\pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
\myTOC
\mainmatter }
+
+% increase link area for cross-references and autoname them,
+\AtBeginDocument{\renewcommand{\ref}[1]{\mbox{\autoref{#1}}}}
+\@ifundefined{extrasenglish}{\usepackage[english]{babel}}{}
+\addto\extrasenglish{%
+ \renewcommand*{\equationautorefname}[1]{}%
+ \renewcommand{\sectionautorefname}{sec.\negthinspace}%
+ \renewcommand{\subsectionautorefname}{sec.\negthinspace}%
+ \renewcommand{\subsubsectionautorefname}{sec.\negthinspace}%
+}
\end_preamble
\options fleqn,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,titlepage,captions=tableheading
\use_default_options false
\author -195340706 "Georg Baum"
\author 5863208 "ab"
\author 155139281 "Jrgen Spitzmller"
-\author 1082167584 "Kayvan Sylvan" kayvan@sylvan.com
\author 1414654397 "Richard Heck"
\author 2090807402 "usti"
\end_header
\begin_inset Newline newline
\end_inset
-Version 2.
-\change_deleted -712698321 1357054389
-0
-\change_inserted -712698321 1357054389
-1
-\change_unchanged
-.x
+Version 2.1.x
\end_layout
\begin_layout Standard
\begin_layout Subsection
Other files needing a line or two
-\change_deleted -712698321 1357054454
-...
-\change_inserted -712698321 1357054454
-\SpecialChar \ldots{}
-
-\change_unchanged
-
\end_layout
\begin_layout Labeling
\end_inset
- feature.
+ feature, see
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "chap:Including-External-Material"
+
+\end_inset
+
+.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Labeling
\end_inset
this file contains a list of all the languages currently supported by LyX.
-\change_inserted -712698321 1357054565
-
\end_layout
\begin_layout Labeling
\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
-
-\change_inserted -712698321 1357054669
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\change_inserted -712698321 1357054669
latexfonts
-\change_unchanged
-
\end_layout
\end_inset
contains information about the supported fonts.
-\change_inserted -195340706 1334775793
-
\end_layout
\begin_layout Labeling
\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
-
-\change_inserted -195340706 1334775793
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\change_inserted -195340706 1334775793
layouttranslations
\end_layout
\end_inset
this file contains translations for internationalized paragraph styles
- (see sec.
-\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
-\end_inset
-
-
+ (see
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
LatexCommand ref
reference "sub:I18n"
\end_inset
).
-\change_inserted -712698321 1357054494
-
\end_layout
\begin_layout Labeling
\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
-
-\change_inserted -712698321 1357054554
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\change_inserted -712698321 1357054508
unicodesymbols
-\change_unchanged
-
\end_layout
\end_inset
this file contains information about unicode-encoded glyphs and the way
they are supported by LyX via LaTeX.
-\change_unchanged
-
\end_layout
\begin_layout Section
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-New\SpecialChar \ldots{}
-
+New
\end_layout
\end_inset
\end_layout
\begin_layout Standard
-
-\change_inserted -195340706 1329851811
The
\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
status collapsed
\end_inset
option tells LyX that a format is suitable for document export.
- If this is set and if a suitable conversion route exists (see sec.
-\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
-\end_inset
-
-
+ If this is set and if a suitable conversion route exists (see
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
LatexCommand ref
reference "sec:Converters"
\end_inset
The output file
-\change_inserted 1082167584 1348453985
-
\end_layout
\begin_layout Labeling
\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
-
-\change_inserted 2090807402 1369935163
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\change_inserted 2090807402 1369935165
$$b
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
-\change_inserted 1082167584 1348453986
The base name (without filename extension) in the LyX temporary directory
\end_layout
\begin_layout Labeling
\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
-
-\change_inserted 2090807402 1369935168
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\change_inserted 2090807402 1369935170
$$p
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
-\change_inserted 1082167584 1348453986
The full directory path of the LyX temporary directory
\end_layout
\begin_layout Labeling
\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
-
-\change_inserted 2090807402 1369935172
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\change_inserted 2090807402 1369935174
$$r
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
-\change_inserted 1082167584 1348453986
The full pathname to the original LyX file being processed
\end_layout
\begin_layout Labeling
\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
-
-\change_inserted 2090807402 1369935180
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\change_inserted 2090807402 1369935182
$$f
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
-\change_inserted 1082167584 1348453986
The filename (without any directory path) of the LyX file.
\end_layout
\end_inset
The `LaTeX name'
-\change_inserted 1082167584 1348453720
-
\end_layout
\begin_layout Standard
\end_inset
file for the conversion.
-\change_inserted 1414654397 1337693117
-
\end_layout
\begin_layout Labeling
\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
-
-\change_inserted 1414654397 1337693188
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\change_inserted 1414654397 1337693129
nice
-\change_unchanged
-
\end_layout
\end_inset
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\change_inserted 1414654397 1337693184
input@path
-\change_unchanged
-
\end_layout
\end_inset
.
-\change_unchanged
-
\end_layout
\begin_layout Labeling
choose the shortest possible chain.
You can, though, still define multiple conversion methods between file
formats.
- For example, the standard LyX configuration provides
-\change_inserted -195340706 1363813100
-five
-\change_deleted -195340706 1363813102
-three
-\change_unchanged
- ways to convert LaTeX to PDF: Directly, using
+ For example, the standard LyX configuration provides five ways to convert
+ LaTeX to PDF:
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Enumerate
+Directly, using
\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
status collapsed
\end_inset
-; via (DVI and) PostScript, using
+
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Enumerate
+via (DVI and) PostScript, using
\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
status collapsed
\end_inset
-; via DVI, using
+
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Enumerate
+via DVI, using
\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
status collapsed
\end_inset
-\change_inserted -195340706 1363813143
-; or directly using XeTeX or LuaTeX
-\change_unchanged
-.
- To define such alternate chains, you must define multiple target `file
- formats', as described in section
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Enumerate
+directly using
+\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+XeTeX
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Enumerate
+directly using
+\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+LuaTeX
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Standard
+To define such alternate chains, you must define multiple target `file formats',
+ as described in
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
LatexCommand ref
reference "sec:Formats"
\end_inset
-,
+ (for
\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-pdf2
+ps2pdf
\end_layout
\end_inset
+),
+\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
+status collapsed
-\change_inserted -195340706 1363813075
-,
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+pdf2
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ (for
\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
+pdflatex
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
-\change_inserted -195340706 1363813079
+),
+\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
pdf3
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+ (for
\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
+dvipdfm
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+),
+\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
+status collapsed
-\change_inserted -195340706 1363813082
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
pdf4
\end_layout
\end_inset
+ (for
+\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
+status collapsed
-\change_unchanged
-, and
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+XeTeX
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+), and
\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-pdf
-\change_inserted -195340706 1363813086
-5
-\change_deleted -195340706 1363813086
-3
-\change_unchanged
+pdf5
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ (for
+\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
+status collapsed
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+LuaTeX
\end_layout
\end_inset
- are defined, all of which share the extension
+) are defined, all of which share the extension
\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
status collapsed
\end_inset
extension and provide LyX with information about document classes.
- As of LyX 1.6, however, layout information can also be contained in layout
-
+ Since LyX 1.6 layout information can also be contained in layout
\emph on
modules
\emph default
tag.
Any format is acceptable, but one would normally use the format current
at the time.
- (In LyX 2.0, the current layout format is 35.) You should be aware that local
- layout is not supported by versions of LyX prior to 1.6, so you should not
- use it if you want to be able to export your document to LyX 1.5 or earlier
- (without, that is, losing the local layout information).
+ (In LyX 2.
+\change_inserted 2090807402 1370141351
+1
+\change_deleted 2090807402 1370141352
+0
+\change_unchanged
+, the current layout format is 35
+\change_inserted 2090807402 1370141354
+??
+\change_unchanged
+.) You should be aware that local layout is not supported by versions of
+ LyX prior to 1.6, so you should not use it if you want to be able to export
+ your document to LyX 1.5 or earlier (without, that is, losing the local
+ layout information).
If you wish to be able to export to 1.6---local layout is supported in 1.6,
though there is no UI for it---then you should use format 11 and, of course,
use only layout constructs that were available in LyX 1.6.
Your new package may also provide commands or environments not present in
the base class.
In this case, you will want to add these to the layout file.
- See section
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-
+ See
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
LatexCommand ref
reference "sec:TextClass"
\begin_layout Standard
A more complex module might modify the behavior of some existing constructs
or define some new ones.
- Again, see section
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-
+ Again, see
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
LatexCommand ref
reference "sec:TextClass"
\end_layout
\begin_layout Subsection
-The document class declaration
-\change_inserted -712698321 1349766602
- and classification
-\change_unchanged
-
+The document class declaration and classification
\end_layout
\begin_layout Standard
\end_inset
- files should begin with
-\change_deleted -712698321 1349766533
-a
-\change_unchanged
-line
-\change_inserted -712698321 1349766536
-s
-\change_unchanged
- like:
+ files should begin with lines like:
\end_layout
\begin_layout LyX-Code
\size small
#
\backslash
-DeclareLaTeXClass{
-\change_deleted -712698321 1349766193
-article
-\change_inserted -712698321 1349766201
-Article (Standard Class)
-\change_unchanged
-}
-\change_inserted -712698321 1349766538
+DeclareLaT
+\size default
+
+\begin_inset ERT
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+{}
\end_layout
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
+\end_inset
+
-\change_inserted -712698321 1349766581
+\size small
+eXClass{Article (Standard Class)}
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
\size small
#
\backslash
DeclareCategory{Articles}
-\change_unchanged
-
\end_layout
\begin_layout Standard
-The second
-\change_inserted -712698321 1349766695
-and third
-\change_unchanged
-line
-\change_inserted -712698321 1349766626
-s
-\change_unchanged
-
-\change_deleted -712698321 1349766628
-is
-\change_inserted -712698321 1349766628
-are
-\change_unchanged
- used when you (re)configure LyX.
+The second and third lines are used when you (re)configure LyX.
The layout file is read by the LaTeX script
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
is ignored.
- The first line is just a LaTeX comment,
-\change_deleted -712698321 1349766656
-and
-\change_unchanged
-the second one contains the
-\change_inserted -712698321 1349766650
-mandatory
-\change_unchanged
-declaration of the text class
-\change_inserted -712698321 1349766689
-, and the third line contains the optional classification of the class
-\change_unchanged
-.
+ The first line is just a LaTeX comment, the second one contains the mandatory
+ declaration of the text class and the third line contains the optional
+ classification of the class.
If these lines appear in a file named
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_inset Quotes eld
\end_inset
-
-\change_deleted -712698321 1349766253
-article
-\change_inserted -712698321 1349766260
Article (Standard Class)
-\change_unchanged
-
\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
\end_inset
dialog.
-
-\change_inserted -712698321 1349767097
The category (
\begin_inset Quotes eld
\end_inset
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\change_inserted -712698321 1349766801
Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Settings
\end_layout
\end_inset
group.
-\change_unchanged
-
\end_layout
\begin_layout Standard
\size small
#
\backslash
-DeclareLaTeXClass[article]{
-\change_deleted -712698321 1349766303
-a
-\change_inserted -712698321 1349766303
-A
-\change_unchanged
-rticle (with
-\change_deleted -712698321 1349766338
-m
-\change_inserted -712698321 1349766338
-M
-\change_unchanged
-y
-\change_deleted -712698321 1349766340
-o
-\change_inserted -712698321 1349766340
-O
-\change_unchanged
-wn
-\change_deleted -712698321 1349766343
-h
-\change_inserted -712698321 1349766343
-H
-\change_unchanged
-eadings)}
-\change_inserted -712698321 1349767223
+DeclareLaT
+\size default
+\begin_inset ERT
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+{}
\end_layout
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
+\end_inset
-\change_inserted -712698321 1349767223
+
+\size small
+eXClass[article]{Article (with My Own Headings)}
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
\size small
#
\backslash
DeclareCategory{Articles}
-\change_unchanged
-
\end_layout
\begin_layout Standard
\begin_inset Quotes eld
\end_inset
-
-\change_deleted -712698321 1349766329
-a
-\change_inserted -712698321 1349766329
-A
-\change_unchanged
-rticle (with
-\change_deleted -712698321 1349766347
-m
-\change_inserted -712698321 1349766347
-M
-\change_unchanged
-y
-\change_deleted -712698321 1349766350
-o
-\change_inserted -712698321 1349766350
-O
-\change_unchanged
-wn
-\change_deleted -712698321 1349766352
-h
-\change_inserted -712698321 1349766352
-H
-\change_unchanged
-eadings)
+Article (with My Own Headings)
\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
\size small
#
\backslash
-DeclareLaTeXClass[article,foo.sty]{
-\change_deleted -712698321 1349766366
-a
-\change_inserted -712698321 1349766366
-A
-\change_unchanged
-rticle (with
-\change_deleted -712698321 1349766369
-m
-\change_inserted -712698321 1349766369
-M
-\change_unchanged
-y
-\change_deleted -712698321 1349766371
-o
-\change_inserted -712698321 1349766371
-O
-\change_unchanged
-wn
-\change_deleted -712698321 1349766374
-h
-\change_inserted -712698321 1349766374
-H
-\change_unchanged
-eadings)}
-\change_inserted -712698321 1349767240
+DeclareLaT
+\size default
-\end_layout
+\begin_inset ERT
+status collapsed
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+{}
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
-\change_inserted -712698321 1349767240
+
+\size small
+eXClass[article,foo.sty]{Article (with My Own Headings)}
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
\size small
#
\backslash
DeclareCategory{Articles}
-\change_unchanged
-
\end_layout
\begin_layout Standard
\size small
#
\backslash
-DeclareDocBookClass[article]{SGML (DocBook
-\change_deleted -712698321 1349766387
-a
-\change_inserted -712698321 1349766387
-A
-\change_unchanged
-rticle)}
-\change_inserted -712698321 1349767247
-
+DeclareDocBookClass[article]{SGML (DocBook Article)}
\end_layout
\begin_layout LyX-Code
-\change_inserted -712698321 1349767302
-
\size small
#
\backslash
DeclareCategory{Articles (DocBook)}
-\change_unchanged
-
\end_layout
\begin_layout Standard
\size small
#
\backslash
-DeclareLaTeXClass[class,package.sty]{layout description}
-\change_inserted -712698321 1349767329
+DeclareLaT
+\size default
+
+\begin_inset ERT
+status collapsed
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+{}
\end_layout
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
+\end_inset
-\change_inserted -712698321 1349767339
+
+\size small
+eXClass[class,package.sty]{layout description}
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
\size small
#
\backslash
DeclareCategory{category}
-\change_unchanged
-
\end_layout
\begin_layout Standard
\begin_layout LyX-Code
#
\backslash
-DeclareLyXModule[endnotes.sty]{Endnotes}
+DeclareL
+\begin_inset ERT
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+{}
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+yXModule[endnotes.sty]{Endnotes}
\end_layout
\begin_layout Standard
\end_inset
Defines formats for use in the display of bibliographic information.
- See Section
+ See
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
LatexCommand ref
reference "sub:Citation-format-description"
\end_inset
Describes various global options supported by the document class.
- See Section
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-
+ See
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
LatexCommand ref
reference "sub:ClassOptions"
\begin_inset Newline newline
\end_inset
-See Section
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-
+See
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
LatexCommand ref
reference "sub:Counters"
\end_inset
Sets the default font used to display the document.
- See Section
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-
+ See
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
LatexCommand ref
reference "sub:Font-description"
not
\emph default
be used in a module.
- Modules have their own way of excluding other modules (see section
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-
+ Modules have their own way of excluding other modules (see
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
LatexCommand ref
reference "sub:Layout-modules"
\end_inset
Defines a new float.
- See Section
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-
+ See
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
LatexCommand ref
reference "sub:Floats"
\begin_inset Newline newline
\end_inset
-See Section
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-
+See
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
LatexCommand ref
reference "sub:Counters"
\begin_inset Newline newline
\end_inset
-See Section
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-
+See
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
LatexCommand ref
reference "sub:Flex-insets-and"
\end_inset
] Specifies what sort of output documents using this class will produce.
-\change_inserted 1414654397 1369315909
-
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
-
-\change_inserted 1414654397 1369316059
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\change_inserted 1414654397 1369315915
PackageOptions
\end_layout
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\change_inserted 1414654397 1369315909
string
\end_layout
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\change_inserted 1414654397 1369315919
string
\end_layout
\begin_inset Flex Code
-status open
+status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\change_inserted 1414654397 1369315957
PackageOptions natbib square
-\change_unchanged
-
\end_layout
\end_inset
will cause
\begin_inset Flex Code
-status open
+status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\change_inserted 1414654397 1369315966
natbib
-\change_unchanged
-
\end_layout
\end_inset
to be loaded with the
\begin_inset Flex Code
-status open
+status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\change_inserted 1414654397 1369315985
square
-\change_unchanged
-
\end_layout
\end_inset
option.
(For TeXperts, this causes LyX to output:
\begin_inset Flex Code
-status open
+status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-\change_inserted 1414654397 1369316019
-
\backslash
PassOptionsToPackage{natbib}{square}
-\change_unchanged
-
\end_layout
\end_inset
prior to loading
\begin_inset Flex Code
-status open
+status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\change_inserted 1414654397 1369316061
natbib
-\change_unchanged
-
\end_layout
\end_inset
.)
-\change_unchanged
-
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
\end_inset
).
- See chapter
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-
+ See
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
LatexCommand ref
reference "chap:List-of-functions"
.
Multiple features must be separated by commas.
Note that you can only request supported features.
- (See chapter
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-
+ (See
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
LatexCommand ref
reference "chap:List-of-functions"
\begin_inset Newline newline
\end_inset
-See Section
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-
+See
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
LatexCommand ref
reference "sub:Paragraph-Styles"
(Some LaTeX styles prohibit certain alignments, since those wouldn't make
sense.
For example a right-aligned or centered enumeration isn't possible.)
-\change_inserted -712698321 1353679769
-
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
-
-\change_inserted -712698321 1353680268
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\change_inserted -712698321 1353679781
Argument
\end_layout
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\change_inserted -712698321 1353679772
int
\end_layout
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\change_inserted -712698321 1353680069
EndArgument
\end_layout
\begin_deeper
\begin_layout Quote
-\change_inserted -712698321 1353680127
-
\family typewriter
Argument 1
\end_layout
\begin_layout Quote
-\change_inserted -712698321 1353680195
-
\family typewriter
...
\end_layout
\begin_layout Quote
-\change_inserted -712698321 1353680135
-
\family typewriter
EndArgument
\end_layout
\begin_layout Quote
-\change_inserted -712698321 1353680140
-
\family typewriter
Argument 2
\end_layout
\begin_layout Quote
-\change_inserted -712698321 1353680197
-
\family typewriter
...
\end_layout
\begin_layout Quote
-\change_inserted -712698321 1353680147
-
\family typewriter
EndArgument
\end_layout
\begin_layout Standard
-
-\change_inserted -712698321 1353680528
Inside the
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\change_inserted -712698321 1353680412
Argument
\end_layout
\end_layout
\begin_layout Itemize
-
-\change_inserted -712698321 1355076779
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\change_inserted -712698321 1353680543
LabelString
-\change_unchanged
-
\end_layout
\end_inset
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\change_inserted -712698321 1353680567
[string]
\end_layout
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\change_inserted -712698321 1355076779
MenuString
\end_layout
\end_inset
g.
-
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
+\begin_inset space \space{}
+\end_inset
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-\change_inserted -712698321 1353691482
\begin_inset Quotes eld
\end_inset
-Short Title|S
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
-\end_inset
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\change_unchanged
-
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Short Title|S
\end_layout
\end_inset
+
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
).
\end_layout
\begin_layout Itemize
-
-\change_inserted -712698321 1355076754
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\change_inserted -712698321 1355076658
MenuString
\end_layout
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\change_inserted -712698321 1355076654
[string]
\end_layout
\end_inset
g.
-
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
+\begin_inset space \space{}
+\end_inset
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-\change_inserted -712698321 1355076654
\begin_inset Quotes eld
\end_inset
-Short Title|S
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
-\end_inset
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Short Title|S
\end_layout
\end_inset
+
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
).
This specification is optional.
If it is not given the
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\change_inserted -712698321 1355076736
LabelString
-\change_unchanged
-
\end_layout
\end_inset
\end_layout
\begin_layout Itemize
-
-\change_inserted -712698321 1353680665
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\change_inserted -712698321 1353680616
Tooltip
\end_layout
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\change_inserted -712698321 1353680623
[string]
\end_layout
\end_layout
\begin_layout Itemize
-
-\change_inserted -712698321 1353680874
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\change_inserted -712698321 1353680732
Mandatory
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-\change_inserted -712698321 1353680738
-[int=0]
+\emph on
+0
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+1
\end_layout
\end_inset
- Declare if this is a mandatory
-\change_inserted 2090807402 1353765594
-(1)
-\change_inserted -712698321 1353680874
-or an optional
-\change_inserted 2090807402 1353765599
-(0)
-\change_inserted -712698321 1353680874
-argument.
+] Declare if this is a mandatory (1) or an optional (0) argument.
Mandatory arguments will be output empty if not given, while optional arguments
will not be output at all.
By default, mandatory arguments are delimited by
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\change_inserted -712698321 1353680808
{...}
-\change_unchanged
-
\end_layout
\end_inset
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\change_inserted -712698321 1353680833
[...]
\end_layout
\end_layout
\begin_layout Itemize
-
-\change_inserted -712698321 1353917199
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\change_inserted -712698321 1353680879
Requires
\end_layout
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\change_inserted -712698321 1353680874
[int=0]
\end_layout
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-\change_inserted -712698321 1353688183
-
\backslash
-command[][arg]{text}
-\change_unchanged
-
+command[][argument]{text}
\end_layout
\end_inset
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\change_inserted -712698321 1353681031
Requires 1
-\change_unchanged
-
\end_layout
\end_inset
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\change_inserted -712698321 1353681045
Argument 2
-\change_unchanged
-
\end_layout
\end_inset
\end_layout
\begin_layout Itemize
-
-\change_inserted -712698321 1354263104
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\change_inserted -712698321 1353681072
LeftDelim
-\change_unchanged
-
\end_layout
\end_inset
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\change_inserted -712698321 1353681067
[string]
\end_layout
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\change_inserted -712698321 1353681127
{
-\change_unchanged
-
\end_layout
\end_inset
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\change_inserted -712698321 1353681133
[
-\change_unchanged
-
\end_layout
\end_inset
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\change_inserted -712698321 1354263104
<br/>
\end_layout
\end_inset
.
-\change_unchanged
-
\end_layout
\begin_layout Itemize
-
-\change_inserted -712698321 1355144479
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\change_inserted -712698321 1353681149
RightDelim
\end_layout
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\change_inserted -712698321 1353681146
[string]
\end_layout
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\change_inserted -712698321 1353681158
}
\end_layout
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\change_inserted -712698321 1353681161
]
\end_layout
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\change_inserted -712698321 1354263106
<br/>
\end_layout
\end_layout
\begin_layout Itemize
-
-\change_inserted -712698321 1361701444
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\change_inserted -712698321 1361701356
DefaultArg
\end_layout
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\change_inserted -712698321 1361701356
[string]
\end_layout
\end_inset
e.
- if no argument inset has been inserted (note that also an empty argument
+\begin_inset space \space{}
+\end_inset
+
+if no argument inset has been inserted (note that also an empty argument
inset omits the DefaultArg).
Multiple arguments need to be separated by comma.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Itemize
-
-\change_inserted -712698321 1361701337
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\change_inserted -712698321 1355144487
PresetArg
-\change_unchanged
-
\end_layout
\end_inset
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\change_inserted -712698321 1355144500
[string]
\end_layout
\end_layout
\begin_layout Itemize
-
-\change_inserted -712698321 1353917320
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\change_inserted -712698321 1353917320
Font
\end_layout
\end_inset
- The font used for the argument content.
- See section
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-
+ The font used for the argument content, see
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
LatexCommand ref
reference "sub:Font-description"
\end_layout
\begin_layout Itemize
-
-\change_inserted -712698321 1353917320
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\change_inserted -712698321 1353917320
LabelFont
\end_layout
\end_inset
- The font used for the label.
- See section
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-
+ The font used for the label; see
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
LatexCommand ref
reference "sub:Font-description"
\end_layout
\begin_layout Itemize
-
-\change_inserted -712698321 1355661048
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\change_inserted -712698321 1353917320
Decoration
\end_layout
\end_inset
- can be
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\change_inserted -712698321 1353917320
-Classic
-\end_layout
-
-\end_inset
-
-,
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\change_inserted -712698321 1353917320
-Minimalistic
-\end_layout
-
-\end_inset
-
-, or
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\change_inserted -712698321 1353917320
-Conglomerate
-\end_layout
-
-\end_inset
-
-, describing the rendering style used for the inset's frame and buttons.
- Default is
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-\change_inserted -712698321 1353917320
+\emph on
Classic
+\emph default
+, Minimalistic, Conglomerate
\end_layout
\end_inset
-.
+] describes the rendering style used for the inset's frame and buttons.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Itemize
-
-\change_inserted -712698321 1355747298
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\change_inserted -712698321 1355661057
AutoInsert
\end_layout
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\change_inserted -712698321 1355661049
[int=0]
\end_layout
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\change_inserted -712698321 1355661077
1
-\change_unchanged
-
\end_layout
\end_inset
, this argument is automatically inserted when the respective style is selected.
Currently, only one argument per style\SpecialChar \slash{}
layout can be automatically inserted.
-\change_inserted 155139281 1354198988
-
\end_layout
\begin_layout Standard
-
-\change_inserted -712698321 1356689813
By default, the text entered in the LyX workarea in the respective layout
is the last (mandatory) argument of a command if the
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\change_inserted -712698321 1356689619
-LatexType
-\change_unchanged
-
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+LatexType
\end_layout
\end_inset
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\change_inserted -712698321 1356689629
Command
-\change_unchanged
-
\end_layout
\end_inset
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\change_inserted -712698321 1356689679
post:
-\change_unchanged
-
\end_layout
\end_inset
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\change_inserted -712698321 1356689813
post:1
-\change_unchanged
-
\end_layout
\end_inset
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\change_inserted -712698321 1356689801
LatexType
\end_layout
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\change_inserted -712698321 1356689801
Command
\end_layout
\end_inset
.
-\change_unchanged
-
\end_layout
\begin_layout Standard
-
-\change_inserted 155139281 1354199102
Arguments for list
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-\change_inserted 155139281 1354199013
-
\backslash
item
-\change_unchanged
-
\end_layout
\end_inset
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-\change_inserted 155139281 1354199102
-
\backslash
item[foo]
-\change_unchanged
-
\end_layout
\end_inset
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\change_inserted 155139281 1354199044
item:
-\change_unchanged
-
\end_layout
\end_inset
\end_inset
g.
-
+\begin_inset space \space{}
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\change_inserted 155139281 1354199064
Argument item:1
-\change_unchanged
-
\end_layout
\end_inset
)
-\change_unchanged
-
\end_layout
\end_deeper
\end_inset
.
- See section
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-
+ See
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
LatexCommand ref
reference "sub:I18n"
and
\emph default
the label.
- See section
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-
+ See
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
LatexCommand ref
reference "sub:Font-description"
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\change_inserted -195340706 1364753581
-ForceLocal n
+ForceLocal
+\change_unchanged
+
\end_layout
\end_inset
- Used for backporting new styles to stable LyX versions.
- The first stable version that supports this tag is LyX 2.1.0.
-
+
+\change_unchanged
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\change_inserted -195340706 1364753581
-n
+int=0
\end_layout
\end_inset
- is a number which may either be 0 (this is the default if the tag is not
- given), -1 or any value greater than zero.
+]
+\change_inserted -195340706 1364753581
+Used for backporting new styles to stable LyX versions.
+ The first stable version that supports this tag is LyX 2.1.0.
+
+\change_unchanged
+The argment
+\change_inserted -195340706 1364753581
+is a number which may either be 0, -1 or any value greater than zero.
If the
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\change_inserted -195340706 1364753581
ForceLocal
+\change_unchanged
+
\end_layout
\end_inset
\change_inserted -195340706 1364753581
ForceLocal
+\change_unchanged
+
\end_layout
\end_inset
less than the version number of the already existing style in the document
class, the new style is ignored.
If the version number is higher, the new style replaces the existing style.
- A value of -1 means an infinite version number, i.e.
- it is always used.
+ A value of -1 means an infinite version number,
+\change_unchanged
+i.
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+e.
+\begin_inset space \space{}
+\end_inset
+
+i
+\change_inserted -195340706 1364753581
+t is always used.
\change_unchanged
\end_layout
it in the LabelString.
This will work with
\begin_inset Flex Code
-status open
+status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\end_inset
-s
+s
+\change_unchanged
+,
+\change_inserted 1414654397 1360434581
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
-status open
+status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
,
\begin_inset Flex Code
-status open
+status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\end_inset
-, and
+ and
\begin_inset Flex Code
-status open
+status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\begin_inset Newline newline
\end_inset
-See Section
+See
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
LatexCommand ref
reference "sub:Counters"
\end_inset
The font used for the label.
- See section
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-
+ See
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
LatexCommand ref
reference "sub:Font-description"
\end_inset
-] The string used for
-\change_inserted 1414654397 1360434358
- the label
-\change_deleted 1414654397 1360434353
- a label with a
-\change_unchanged
-.
+] The string used for the label.
When
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
is set, this string can be contain the special formatting commands described
- in Section
+ in
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
LatexCommand ref
reference "sub:Counters"
, at the beginning of the paragraph.
If the
\begin_inset Flex Code
-status open
+status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
is
\begin_inset Flex Code
-status open
+status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
, then it will be displayed only in the first paragraph in any sequence
of paragraphs with the same
\begin_inset Flex Code
-status open
+status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\end_inset
.
- See section
+ See
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
LatexCommand ref
reference "sub:I18n"
\change_inserted -712698321 1355144804
Argument
+\change_unchanged
+
\end_layout
\end_inset
\change_inserted -712698321 1353866852
LeftDelim
+\change_unchanged
+
\end_layout
\end_inset
\change_inserted -712698321 1353866852
string
+\change_unchanged
+
\end_layout
\end_inset
\change_inserted -712698321 1354263086
<br/>
+\change_unchanged
+
\end_layout
\end_inset
\end_inset
- above (sec.
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-
+ above (
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
LatexCommand ref
reference "sub:General-text-class"
\emph on
0
+\change_unchanged
+
\end_layout
\end_inset
\change_inserted -712698321 1353693235
1
+\change_unchanged
+
\end_layout
\end_inset
\change_inserted -712698321 1353866876
RightDelim
+\change_unchanged
+
\end_layout
\end_inset
\change_inserted -712698321 1353866873
string
+\change_unchanged
+
\end_layout
\end_inset
\end_inset
The font used for the text body .
- See section
+ See
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
LatexCommand ref
reference "sub:Font-description"
\end_inset
These tags control the XHTML output.
- See section
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-
+ See
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
LatexCommand ref
reference "sec:Tags-for-XHTML"
\end_inset
-,
+,
\change_unchanged
-
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
.
- See section
+ See
+\change_deleted 2090807402 1370133795
+section
\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
+\change_inserted -712698321 1353681390
+
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
LatexCommand ref
reference "sub:Paragraph-Styles"
\end_inset
Preamble for changing languages.
- See section
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-
+ See
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
LatexCommand ref
reference "sub:I18n"
\end_inset
] The color for the inset's background.
- See chapter
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-
+ See
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
LatexCommand ref
reference "chap:Names-of-colors"
\end_inset
-] As with paragraph styles, see sec.
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-
+] As with paragraph styles, see
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
LatexCommand ref
reference "sub:Paragraph-Styles"
and
\emph default
the label.
- See section
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-
+ See
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
LatexCommand ref
reference "sub:Font-description"
\end_inset
-] As with paragraph styles, see sec.
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-
+] As with paragraph styles, see
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
LatexCommand ref
reference "sub:Paragraph-Styles"
\end_inset
These tags control the XHTML output.
- See section
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-
+ See
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
LatexCommand ref
reference "sec:Tags-for-XHTML"
\end_inset
-] As with paragraph styles, see sec.
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-
+] As with paragraph styles, see
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
LatexCommand ref
reference "sub:Paragraph-Styles"
\end_inset
The font used for the label.
- See section
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-
+ See
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
LatexCommand ref
reference "sub:Font-description"
\end_inset
Language dependent preamble.
- See section
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-
+ See
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
LatexCommand ref
reference "sub:I18n"
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\bar under
-Edit
-\bar default
-\SpecialChar \menuseparator
-
-\bar under
-P
-\bar default
-aragraph
+Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
+Paragraph
\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\end_inset
-] As with paragraph styles, see sec.
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-
+] As with paragraph styles, see
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
LatexCommand ref
reference "sub:Paragraph-Styles"
\end_inset
-] As with paragraph styles, see sec.
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-
+] As with paragraph styles, see
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
LatexCommand ref
reference "sub:Paragraph-Styles"
\end_inset
- As with paragraph styles, see sec.
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-
+ As with paragraph styles, see
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
LatexCommand ref
reference "sub:Paragraph-Styles"
\end_inset
-] As with paragraph styles, see sec.
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-
+] As with paragraph styles, see
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
LatexCommand ref
reference "sub:Paragraph-Styles"
\change_inserted 1414654397 1364133464
Must end with
\begin_inset Flex Code
-status open
+status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\end_inset
blocks.
- See Section
+ See
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
LatexCommand ref
reference "sub:Citation-format-description"
\end_inset
- declaration.
- (See
+ declaration (see
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
LatexCommand ref
reference "sub:Font-description"
\end_inset
-.) The translation is mostly straightforward and obvious.
+).
+ The translation is mostly straightforward and obvious.
For example,
\begin_inset Quotes eld
\end_inset
\begin_layout Chapter
Including External Material
+\begin_inset CommandInset label
+LatexCommand label
+name "chap:Including-External-Material"
+
+\end_inset
+
+
\end_layout
\begin_layout Standard
will
\emph default
introduce an easily exploitable security hole.
- So before you do this, please read the discussion about security in section
-
+ So before you do this, please read the discussion about security in
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
LatexCommand ref
reference "sec:Security-discussion"
\end_inset
The file format of the original file.
- This must be the name of a format that is known to LyX (see section
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-
+ This must be the name of a format that is known to LyX (see
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
LatexCommand ref
reference "sec:Formats"
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\bar under
-T
-\bar default
-ools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
-
-\bar under
-P
-\bar default
-references\SpecialChar \menuseparator
+Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
+Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
File Handling\SpecialChar \menuseparator
File Format
\end_layout
\noun off
\color none
No particular color -- clear or default
+\change_inserted 2090807402 1370139663
+
+\begin_inset Note Note
+status open
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\change_inserted 2090807402 1370139674
+
+\family roman
+\series medium
+\shape up
+\size normal
+\emph off
+\bar no
+\strikeout off
+\uuline off
+\uwave off
+\noun off
+\color none
+update this list for LyX 2.1!
+\change_unchanged
+
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+
+\change_unchanged
+
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
-#LyX 2.0 created this file. For more info see http://www.lyx.org/
-\lyxformat 413
+#LyX 2.1 created this file. For more info see http://www.lyx.org/
+\lyxformat 474
\begin_document
\begin_header
\textclass scrbook
\pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
\myTOC
\mainmatter }
+
+% Linkfläche für Querverweise vergrößern und automatisch benennen,
+\AtBeginDocument{\renewcommand{\ref}[1]{\mbox{\autoref{#1}}}}
+\addto\extrasngerman{%
+ \renewcommand*{\equationautorefname}[1]{}%
+ \renewcommand{\sectionautorefname}{Kap.\negthinspace}%
+ \renewcommand{\subsectionautorefname}{Kap.\negthinspace}%
+ \renewcommand{\subsubsectionautorefname}{Kap.\negthinspace}%
+}
\end_preamble
\options fleqn,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,titlepage,captions=tableheading
\use_default_options false
\font_roman default
\font_sans default
\font_typewriter default
+\font_math auto
\font_default_family default
\use_non_tex_fonts false
\font_sc false
\font_osf false
\font_sf_scale 100
\font_tt_scale 100
-
\graphics default
\default_output_format default
\output_sync 0
\pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
\papersize default
\use_geometry false
-\use_amsmath 0
-\use_esint 0
-\use_mhchem 0
-\use_mathdots 0
+\use_package amsmath 0
+\use_package amssymb 0
+\use_package cancel 0
+\use_package esint 0
+\use_package mathdots 0
+\use_package mathtools 0
+\use_package mhchem 0
+\use_package stackrel 0
+\use_package stmaryrd 0
+\use_package undertilde 0
\cite_engine basic
+\cite_engine_type default
+\biblio_style plain
\use_bibtopic false
\use_indices false
\paperorientation portrait
\suppress_date false
+\justification true
\use_refstyle 0
\branch OutDated
\selected 0
\begin_inset Newline newline
\end_inset
-Version 2.0.x
+Version 2.1.x
\end_layout
\begin_layout Standard
\family default
mit einer an die internationalisierte Version von LyX angepassten Tastenbelegun
g existiert, wird diese bevorzugt geladen.
- Näheres dazu finden Sie in Kapitel
-\begin_inset space \space{}
-\end_inset
-
-
+ Näheres dazu finden Sie in
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
-LatexCommand vref
+LatexCommand ref
reference "cha:Internationales-LyX"
\end_inset
$LANG_
\family default
vor dem Dateinamen zuerst gesucht und, falls vorhanden, geladen.
- Siehe dazu Kapitel
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-
+ Siehe dazu
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
-LatexCommand vref
+LatexCommand ref
reference "cha:Internationales-LyX"
\end_inset
\family default
\series default
Hier sind die Definitionsdateien für die Tastaturbelegung gespeichert.
- Näheres dazu finden Sie im Abschnitt
-\begin_inset space \space{}
-\end_inset
-
-
+ Näheres dazu finden Sie im
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
LatexCommand ref
reference "sec:Internationale-Tastaturtabellen"
layouts/
\family default
\series default
- Hier werden die in Abschnitt
-\begin_inset space \space{}
-\end_inset
-
-
+ Hier werden die in
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
LatexCommand ref
reference "cha:Installieren-neuer-Textklassen"
Vorlage
\family default
- präsentiert werden, siehe Abschnitt
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-
+ präsentiert werden, siehe
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
LatexCommand ref
reference "sub:Vorlagen-erstellen"
\family typewriter
external_templates
\family default
- Diese Datei enthält die Vorlagen für das neue
+ Diese Datei enthält die Vorlagen für das Feature
\family sans
Externes
\begin_inset space \space{}
Material
\family default
-Modul.
- Siehe dazu Kapitel
-\begin_inset space \space{}
-\end_inset
-
-
+ Siehe dazu
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
-LatexCommand vref
+LatexCommand ref
reference "cha:Externes-Material-einfügen"
\end_inset
\begin_layout Labeling
\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\family typewriter
-lyxrc.example
-\family default
- Veraltet.
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+latexfonts
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+
+\lang english
+ contains information about the supported fonts.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Labeling
+\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+layouttranslations
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+
+\lang english
+ this file contains translations for internationalized paragraph styles
+\lang ngerman
+ (siehe
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:I18n"
+
+\end_inset
+
+).
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Labeling
+\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+unicodesymbols
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+
+\lang english
+ this file contains information about unicode-encoded glyphs and the way
+ they are supported by LyX via LaTeX.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Section
\family sans
Hilfe\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Über
-\begin_inset space \space{}
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Ly
Werkzeuge\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Einstellungen
\family default
-\SpecialChar \ldots{}
gemacht werden, werden in der Datei
\family typewriter
preferences
bearbeiten
\family default
auswählen.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Standard
+Der MIME-Typ
+\lang english
+of a format is optional, but if it is specified, it must be unique across
+ all formats.
+ It is used to detect files of this format from the file contents.
+ For some important file formats there is no MIME-Typ officially registered
+ with the
+\lang ngerman
+
+\begin_inset CommandInset href
+LatexCommand href
+name "IANA"
+target "http://www.iana.org/assignments/media-types/"
+
+\end_inset
+
+.
+\lang english
+Therefore LyX uses the extended list of MIME types as specified by
+\lang ngerman
+
+\begin_inset CommandInset href
+LatexCommand href
+name "freedesktop.org"
+target "http://www.freedesktop.org/wiki/Specifications/shared-mime-info-spec"
+
+\end_inset
+
+.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Standard
\family default
angekreuzt ist, weiß LyX, dass das Format für den Dokumentexport geeignet
ist.
- Wenn dann auch noch ein geeigneter Konverter existiert (siehe Abschnitt
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-
+ Wenn dann auch noch ein geeigneter Konverter existiert (siehe
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
LatexCommand ref
reference "Konverter"
ist die Ausgabedatei.
\end_layout
+\begin_layout Labeling
+\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+$$b
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+
+\lang english
+The base name (without filename extension) in the LyX temporary directory
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Labeling
+\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+$$p
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+
+\lang english
+The full directory path of the LyX temporary directory
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Labeling
+\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+$$r
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+
+\lang english
+The full pathname to the original LyX file being processed
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Labeling
+\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+$$f
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+
+\lang english
+The filename (without any directory path) of the LyX file.
+\end_layout
+
\begin_layout Labeling
\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
zur Konvertierung.
\end_layout
+\begin_layout Labeling
+\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+nice
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+
+\lang english
+Needs a
+\begin_inset Quotes gld
+\end_inset
+
+nice
+\begin_inset Quotes grd
+\end_inset
+
+ file from the backend, which in practice means a LaTeX file like the one
+ we would export, without
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
+input@path
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+.
+\end_layout
+
\begin_layout Labeling
\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
\begin_layout Standard
Trotzdem können Sie Mehrfachkonversionen zwischen Dateiformaten definieren.
- Zum Beispiel liefert die Standardkonfiguration von LyX drei Möglichkeiten,
+ Zum Beispiel liefert die Standardkonfiguration von LyX fünf Möglichkeiten,
um von LaTeX nach PDF zu konvertieren:
\end_layout
\family typewriter
dvipdfm
\family default
- über DVI.
+ über DVI
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Enumerate
+direkt mit
+\family typewriter
+XeTeX
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Enumerate
+direkt mit
+\family typewriter
+LuaTeX
\end_layout
\begin_layout Standard
\emph on
Dateiformate
\emph default
- definieren, wie in Abschnitt
-\begin_inset space \space{}
-\end_inset
-
-
+ definieren, wie in
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
-LatexCommand vref
+LatexCommand ref
reference "sec:Formate"
\end_inset
beschrieben.
- Zum Beispiel enthält die Standardkonfiguration drei Formate für pdf-Dateien,
- die
+ Zum Beispiel enthält die Standardkonfiguration verschiedene Formate für
+ pdf-Dateien, die
\family sans
pdf
\family default
- für
+ (für
\family typewriter
ps2pdf
\family default
-,
+),
\family sans
pdf2
\family default
- für
+ (für
\family typewriter
pdflatex
\family default
- und
+),
\family sans
pdf3
\family default
- für
+ (für
\family typewriter
dvipdfm
\family default
- heißen.
+),
+\family sans
+pdf4
+\family default
+ (für
+\family typewriter
+XeTeX
+\family default
+) und
+\family sans
+pdf5
+\family default
+ (für
+\family typewriter
+LuaTeX
+\family default
+) heißen.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Chapter
\emph on
Anmerkung des Übersetzers: Dieses Kapitel behandelt zwei Themenbereiche.
- Einmal wird in
-\begin_inset space \space{}
-\end_inset
-
-
+ Einmal wird in
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
-LatexCommand vref
+LatexCommand ref
reference "sec:Eine-andere-Sprache"
\end_inset
- und
-\begin_inset space \space{}
-\end_inset
-
-
+ und
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
-LatexCommand vref
+LatexCommand ref
reference "sec:Tastaturkürzel-für-andere"
\end_inset
ant sein.
Die letzten beiden Abschnitte,
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
-LatexCommand vref
+LatexCommand ref
reference "sec:Internationale-Tastaturbelegung"
\end_inset
und
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
-LatexCommand vref
+LatexCommand ref
reference "sec:Internationale-Tastaturtabellen"
\end_inset
\family typewriter
.lyxrc
\family default
- definiert wurden, merklich von der, die in Abschnitt
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-
+ definiert wurden, merklich von der, die in
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
LatexCommand vref
reference "sub:Die-.kmap-Datei"
\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
-2.8 wäre das unter WinXP der Ordner
+2.9 wäre das unter WinXP der Ordner
\begin_inset Newline newline
\end_inset
MiKTeX
\backslash
-2.8
+2.9
\backslash
tex
\backslash
\backslash
Roaming
\backslash
-2.8
+2.9
\backslash
MiKTeX
\backslash
Your new package may also provide commands or environments not present in
the base class.
In this case, you will want to add these to the layout file.
- See section
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-
+ See
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
LatexCommand ref
reference "sec:Das-Layout-Dateiformat"
\lang english
A more complex module might modify the behavior of some existing constructs
or define some new ones.
- Again, see section
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-
+ Again, see
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
LatexCommand ref
reference "sec:Das-Layout-Dateiformat"
\end_layout
\begin_layout Subsection
-Deklaration einer neuen Textklasse
+Deklaration einer neuen Textklasse und Klassifikation
\end_layout
\begin_layout Standard
\size small
#% Do not delete the line below; configure depends on this
+\begin_inset Foot
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+zu Deutsch: Löschen Sie die folgenden Zeilen nicht, da die Konfiguration
+ davon abhängt
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+
\end_layout
\begin_layout LyX-Code
\size small
#
\backslash
-DeclareLaTe
+DeclareLaT
\family typewriter
\size default
\family default
\size small
-XClass{article}
+eXClass{Article (Standard Class)}
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Standard
-Die zweite Zeile wird benötigt, wenn Sie LyX konfigurieren.
- Die Textklassen-Datei wird von dem LaTeX-Skript
-\family typewriter
-
-\begin_inset Flex URL
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
-chkconfig.ltx
+\size small
+#
+\backslash
+DeclareCategory{Articles}
\end_layout
-\end_inset
-
-
+\begin_layout Standard
+Die zweite und dritte Zeile wird benötigt, wenn Sie LyX konfigurieren.
+ Die Textklassen-Datei wird von dem LaTeX-Skript
+\family sans
+chkconfig.ltx
\family default
gelesen, und zwar in einem speziellen Modus, in dem
\family typewriter
#
\family default
-Zeichen ignoriert werden.
- Die erste Zeile ist einfach ein LaTeX-Kommentar, in der zweiten wird die
- Textklasse deklariert.
- Eine Datei namens
-\begin_inset Newline newline
-\end_inset
-
-
+ Die erste Zeile ist einfach ein LaTeX-Kommentar, in der zweiten muss die
+ Textklasse deklariert werden und die dritte Zeile enthält die optionale
+ Klassifikation der Klasse.
+ Eine Datei namens
\family typewriter
article.layout
\family default
, die mit diesen beiden Zeilen beginnt, definiert eine Textklasse mit dem
Namen
-\family typewriter
+\family sans
article
\family default
- und benutzt die LaTeX-Dokumentenklasse
+ (der Name der Layout-Datei) und benutzt die LaTeX-Dokumentenklasse
\family typewriter
article.cls
\family default
-.
+ (Standard ist denselben Namen wie das Layout zu verwenden).
+ Die Zeichenkette
+\begin_inset Quotes gld
+\end_inset
+
+Article (Standard Class)
+\begin_inset Quotes grd
+\end_inset
+
+, die oben erscheint, ist auch die Beschreibung, die später im Popup-Menü
-\emph on
-article
-\emph default
- ist auch die Beschreibung, die später im Popup-Menü
\family sans
Dokument\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Einstellungen
\family default
auftaucht.
-
+ Die Kategorie (
+\begin_inset Quotes gld
+\end_inset
+
+Articles
+\begin_inset Quotes grd
+\end_inset
+
+ im Beispiel) wird auch im Dialog
+\family sans
+Dokument\SpecialChar \menuseparator
+Einstellungen
+\family default
+ verwendet: Die Textklassen weden nach diesen Kategorien gruppiert (was
+ üblicherweise Genres sind, typische Kategorien sind also
+\begin_inset Quotes gld
+\end_inset
+
+Artikel
+\begin_inset Quotes grd
+\end_inset
+
+,
+\begin_inset Quotes gld
+\end_inset
+
+Bücher
+\begin_inset Quotes grd
+\end_inset
+
+,
+\begin_inset Quotes gld
+\end_inset
+
+Berichte
+\begin_inset Quotes grd
+\end_inset
+
+,
+\begin_inset Quotes gld
+\end_inset
+
+Briefe
+\begin_inset Quotes grd
+\end_inset
+
+,
+\begin_inset Quotes gld
+\end_inset
+
+Präsentationen
+\begin_inset Quotes grd
+\end_inset
+
+,
+\begin_inset Quotes gld
+\end_inset
+
+Lebensläufe
+\begin_inset Quotes grd
+\end_inset
+
+ usw.).
+ Wenn keine Kategorie deklariert wurde, wird die Klasse in die Gruppe
+\begin_inset Quotes gld
+\end_inset
+
+Nicht
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+kategorisiert
+\begin_inset Quotes grd
+\end_inset
+
+ getan.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Standard
\size small
#
\backslash
-DeclareLaTe
-\family typewriter
+DeclareLaT
\size default
\begin_inset ERT
\end_inset
-\family default
\size small
-XClass[article]{article (with my own headings)}
+eXClass[article]{Article (with My Own Head
+\begin_inset ERT
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+"-
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ings)}
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+
+\size small
+#
+\backslash
+DeclareCategory{Articles}
\end_layout
\begin_layout Standard
\family default
verwendet und (im Popup-Menü) beschrieben wird mit:
\family sans
-article (with my own headings)
+Article (with My Own Headings)
\family default
.
Falls Ihre Textklasse auch noch von weiteren Paketen abhängt, können Sie
\family default
\size small
-XClass[article,foo.sty]{article (with my own head
+XClass[article,foo.sty]{Article (with My Own Head
\begin_inset ERT
status collapsed
ings)}
\end_layout
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+
+\size small
+#
+\backslash
+DeclareCategory{Articles}
+\end_layout
+
\begin_layout Standard
Dadurch wird angezeigt, dass Ihre Klasse auch das Paket
\family typewriter
\size small
#
\backslash
-DeclareDocBookClass[article]{SGML (DocBook article)}
+DeclareDocBookClass[article]{SGML (DocBook Article)}
\end_layout
\begin_layout Standard
erlaubt).
\end_layout
+\begin_layout Standard
+Eine Layout-Deklaration hat demnach die Form
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+
+\size small
+#
+\backslash
+DeclareLaT
+\size default
+
+\begin_inset ERT
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+{}
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+
+\size small
+eXClass[class,package.sty]{Layout-Beschreibung}
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+
+\size small
+#
+\backslash
+DeclareCategory{Kategorie}
+\end_layout
+
\begin_layout Standard
Wenn Sie eine Textklasse nach Ihrem Geschmack erstellt haben, müssen Sie
die Datei nur noch in das Verzeichnis
\begin_layout LyX-Code
#
\backslash
-DeclareLyXModule[endnotes.sty]{Endnotes}
+DeclareL
+\family typewriter
+
+\begin_inset ERT
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+{}
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+
+\family default
+yXModule[endnotes.sty]{Endnotes}
\end_layout
\begin_layout Standard
\family default
Definiert Formate die in der Anzeige von Bibliographie-Informationen verwendet
werden.
- Siehe Abschnitt
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-
+ Siehe
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
LatexCommand ref
reference "sub:Citation-format-description"
Dieser Abschnitt beschreibt verschiedene globale Optionen, die von der
Dokumentenklasse unterstützt werden.
- Eine detaillierte Beschreibung finden Sie in Abschnitt
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-
+ Eine detaillierte Beschreibung finden Sie in
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
LatexCommand ref
reference "sub:Der-Abschnitt-ClassOptions"
\begin_inset Newline newline
\end_inset
-Siehe Abschnitt
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-
+Siehe
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
LatexCommand ref
reference "sub:Zähler"
\end_inset
Definiert den Standardzeichensatz für die Anzeige des Dokuments.
- Eine genauere Beschreibung finden Sie in Abschnitt
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-
+ Eine genauere Beschreibung finden Sie in
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
LatexCommand ref
reference "sub:Beschreibung-des-Zeichensatzes"
nicht
\emph default
in einem Modul benutzt werden.
- Module haben ihre eigene Methode andere Module auszuschließen (siehe Abschnitt
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-
+ Module haben ihre eigene Methode andere Module auszuschließen (siehe
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
LatexCommand ref
reference "sub:Layout-Module"
\end_inset
definiert ein neues Gleitobjekt.
- Siehe Abschnitt
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-
+ Siehe
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
LatexCommand ref
reference "sub:Gleitobjekte"
\begin_inset Newline newline
\end_inset
-Siehe Abschnitt
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-
+Siehe
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
LatexCommand ref
reference "sub:Zähler"
\begin_inset Newline newline
\end_inset
-Abschnitt
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
LatexCommand ref
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-PageStyle
+PackageOptions
\end_layout
\end_inset
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\emph on
-plain
+string
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-empty
+string
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+] Der zweite String gibt Optionen für das Paket im ersten String an.
+ Zum Beispiel lädt
+\begin_inset Quotes gld
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-headings
+PackageOptions natbib square
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] Der Standard-Seitenstil.
- Kann im Menü
-\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Dokument\SpecialChar \menuseparator
-Einstellungen
-\end_layout
+\begin_inset Quotes grd
\end_inset
- geändert werden.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Preamble
+natbib
\end_layout
\end_inset
- Definiert den Vorspann für das LaTeX-Dokument.
- Beachten Sie, dass dies jede vorhergehende
+ mit der Option
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Preamble
+square
\end_layout
\end_inset
- oder
+.
+ (Für TeXperten: Dies bweirkt, dass LyX
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\backslash
+PassOptionsToPackage{natbib}{square}
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ vor dem Laden von
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+natbib
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ ausgibt.)
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+PageStyle
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\emph on
+plain
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+,
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+empty
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+,
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+headings
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+] Der Standard-Seitenstil.
+ Kann im Menü
+\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Dokument\SpecialChar \menuseparator
+Einstellungen
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ geändert werden.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Preamble
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ Definiert den Vorspann für das LaTeX-Dokument.
+ Beachten Sie, dass dies jede vorhergehende
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Preamble
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ oder
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
).
- Siehe Kapitel
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-
+ Siehe
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
LatexCommand ref
reference "chap:Liste-von-Funktionen"
benötigt.
Mehrfache Funktionen müssen durch Komma getrennt werden Beachten Sie, dass
Sie nur unterstützte Funktionen anfordern können.
- (Siehe Kapitel
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-
+ (Siehe
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
LatexCommand ref
reference "chap:Liste-von-Funktionen"
\begin_inset Newline newline
\end_inset
-Siehe Abschnitt
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-
+Siehe
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
LatexCommand ref
reference "sub:Einzelne-Absatz-Layouts"
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-BabelPreamble
+Argument
\end_layout
\end_inset
- Beachten Sie, dass dies alle vorhergehenden
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-BabelPreamble
+int
\end_layout
\end_inset
--Dekla\SpecialChar \-
-ration für diesen Stil überschreibt.
- Muss mit
-\begin_inset Quotes gld
-\end_inset
-
-
+]
+\lang english
+Defines argument number <int> of a command\SpecialChar \slash{}
+environment associated with the
+ current style.
+ This is useful for things like section headings, and only makes sense with
+ LaTeX.
+ Every (optional or required) argument of a command or environment -- except
+ for the required argument that is associated with the content of the paragraph
+ itself -- has a separate definition, where the number specifies the order
+ of the arguments.
+ The definition must end with
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-EndBabelPreamble
+
+\lang english
+EndArgument
\end_layout
\end_inset
+.
+ So a command with two optional arguments has:
+\end_layout
-\begin_inset Quotes grd
-\end_inset
+\begin_deeper
+\begin_layout Quote
- beendet werden.
- Siehe Abschnitt
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
+\family typewriter
+Argument 1
+\end_layout
+\begin_layout Quote
-\begin_inset CommandInset ref
-LatexCommand ref
-reference "sub:I18n"
+\family typewriter
+...
+\end_layout
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout Quote
- für Details zur Verwendung.
+\family typewriter
+EndArgument
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
+\begin_layout Quote
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-BottomSep
+\family typewriter
+Argument 2
\end_layout
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout Quote
- [
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
+\family typewriter
+...
+\end_layout
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-float=0
+\begin_layout Quote
+
+\family typewriter
+EndArgument
\end_layout
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout Standard
-]
-\begin_inset Foot
+\lang english
+Inside the
+\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-\begin_inset Quotes gld
-\end_inset
-
-float
-\begin_inset Quotes grd
-\end_inset
- ist eine Gleitkommazahl, wie
-\begin_inset Quotes gld
-\end_inset
-
-1,5
-\begin_inset Quotes grd
-\end_inset
-
-.
+\lang english
+Argument
\end_layout
\end_inset
- Der vertikale Abstand, der die letzte Serie von Absätzen vom folgenden
- Text trennt.
- Wenn der nächste Paragraph einen anderen Stil hat, werden die Abstände
- nicht einfach addiert, sondern das Maximum wird verwendet.
+ definition, the following specifications are possible:
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
+\begin_layout Itemize
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Category
+LabelString
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-string
+[string]
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] ist die Kategorie für diesen Stil.
- Sie wird benutzt, um zugehörige Stile in der Layout-Kombobox der Werkzeugleiste
- zu gruppieren.
- Jeder beliebige String kann benutzt werden, aber es ist sinnvoll vorhandene
- Ka\SpecialChar \-
-te\SpecialChar \-
-gorien zusammen mit Ihren eigenen Stilen zu benutzen.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
+
+\lang english
+The string that will appear both in the menu (to insert this argument) and
+ on the argument inset button (unless you also specify a separate
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-CommandDepth
+
+\lang english
+MenuString
\end_layout
\end_inset
- ist die Tiefe des XML-Befehls und wird nur für XML-Formate benutzt.
-\end_layout
+).
+ For the menu, you can define an accelerator by appending the respective
+ character to the string, divided by
+\lang ngerman
+
+\begin_inset Quotes gld
+\end_inset
-\begin_layout Description
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
+|
+\begin_inset Quotes grd
+\end_inset
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-CopyStyle
-\end_layout
+ (z.
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+B.
+
+\begin_inset Quotes gld
\end_inset
- [
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-string
+Short Title|S
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] Kopiert alle Eigenschaften eines bereits definierten Layouts in das aktuelle.
+
+\begin_inset Quotes grd
+\end_inset
+
+).
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
+\begin_layout Itemize
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-DependsOn
+MenuString
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-<Name>
+[string]
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] ist der Name eines Stils, dessen Vorspann
-\emph on
-vor
-\emph default
- diesem ausgegeben werden soll.
- Dadurch wird eine Reihenfolge von Vorspannteilen bewirkt, wenn Makro-Definition
-en voneinander abhängen.
-\begin_inset Foot
-status collapsed
+
+\lang english
+A separate string for the menu.
+ You can define an accelerator by appending the respective character to
+ the string, divided by
+\lang ngerman
+
+\begin_inset Quotes gld
+\end_inset
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Beachten Sie, dass es außer dieser Funktionalität keine andere Möglichkeit
- gibt, Vorspanne zu ordnen.
- Die Reihenfolge, die Sie in einer LyX-Version sehen, kann sich in späteren
- Versionen ohne Warnung ändern.
-\end_layout
+|
+\begin_inset Quotes grd
+\end_inset
+ (z.
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
+B.
+
+\begin_inset Quotes gld
+\end_inset
-\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-EndLabeltype
+Short Title|S
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\emph on
-No_Label
-\emph default
-, Box, Filled_Box, Static
-\end_layout
+\begin_inset Quotes grd
\end_inset
-]
-\family typewriter
+).
-\family default
-ist der Markentyp, der am Ende eines Absatzes steht (oder mehrerer Absätze,
- wenn
+\lang english
+This specification is optional.
+ If it is not given the
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LatexType
-\end_layout
-\end_inset
+\lang english
+LabelString
+\end_layout
- auf
-\begin_inset Newline newline
\end_inset
+ will be used instead for the menu.
+\end_layout
+\begin_layout Itemize
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Environment
+Tooltip
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Item_Environment
+[string]
\end_layout
\end_inset
- oder
+
+\lang english
+A longer explanatory text that appears in the tooltip when hovering over
+ the argument inset.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Itemize
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-List_Environment
+Mandatory
\end_layout
\end_inset
- gesetzt ist).
-\begin_inset Newline newline
-\end_inset
-
-
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-No_Label
+
+\emph on
+0
\end_layout
\end_inset
- bedeutet
-\begin_inset Quotes gld
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
-nichts
-\begin_inset Quotes grd
-\end_inset
-,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Box
+1
\end_layout
\end_inset
- oder
+]
+\lang english
+Declare if this is a mandatory (1) or an optional (0) argument.
+ Mandatory arguments will be output empty if not given, while optional arguments
+ will not be output at all.
+ By default, mandatory arguments are delimited by
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Filled_Box
+
+\lang english
+{...}
\end_layout
\end_inset
- ist ein weißes oder schwarzes Quadrat, das für das Markieren eines Beweisendes
- geeignet ist.
+, while optional arguments are delimited by
+\lang ngerman
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Static
+[...]
\end_layout
\end_inset
- ist eine explizite Zeichenkette.
+
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
+\begin_layout Itemize
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-EndLabelString
+Requires
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-string=""
+[int=0]
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] ist eine Zeichenkette, die für einen
+
+\lang english
+defines another argument (by its number) which this argument requires to
+ be output if it is itself output.
+ E.
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+g., in LaTeX commands, optional arguments often require previous optional
+ arguments to be output (at least empty), as in
+\lang ngerman
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Static
-\end_layout
-
-\end_inset
+\backslash
+command[][Argument]{Text}
+\end_layout
-\begin_inset Newline newline
\end_inset
+\lang english
+.
+ This can be achieved by the statement
+\lang ngerman
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-EndLabelType
+Requires 1
\end_layout
\end_inset
- benutzt wird.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
+
+\lang english
+within
+\lang ngerman
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Font
+Argument 2
\end_layout
-\end_inset
-
- Der Zeichensatz, der für den Textkörper
-\emph on
-und
-\emph default
- die Marke verwendet wird, siehe Abschnitt
-\begin_inset space \space{}
-\end_inset
-
-
-\begin_inset CommandInset ref
-LatexCommand ref
-reference "sub:Beschreibung-des-Zeichensatzes"
-
\end_inset
.
- Wird
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Itemize
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Font
+LeftDelim
\end_layout
\end_inset
- gesetzt, dann erhält
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LabelFont
+[string]
\end_layout
\end_inset
- automatisch denselben Wert.
- Daher sollte
+
+\lang english
+defines a custom left delimiter (instead of
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Font
+
+\lang english
+{
\end_layout
\end_inset
- zuerst definiert werden.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
+ or
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-FreeSpacing
+
+\lang english
+[
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
+).
+ A line break in the output can be indicated by
+\lang ngerman
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\emph on
-0
+<br/>
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
-\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
-\end_inset
-
+.
+\end_layout
+\begin_layout Itemize
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-1
+RightDelim
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] Normalerweise erlaubt es LyX nicht, mehr als ein Leerzeichen zwischen
- Wörtern einzufügen.
- Diese Eigenschaft kann in bestimmten Fällen umständ\SpecialChar \-
-lich sein, zum Beispiel,
- wenn ein Programmcode eingegeben werden soll.
- In solchen Fällen kann
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-FreeSpacing
+[string]
\end_layout
\end_inset
- auf
+
+\lang english
+defines a custom right delimiter (instead of
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-1
+
+\lang english
+}
\end_layout
\end_inset
- gesetzt werden.
- LyX erzeugt in diesem Falls sich LyX nicht im LaTeX-Modus befindet, erzeugt
- es für jedes zusätzliche Leerzeichen ein geschütztes Leerzeichen.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
+ or
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-HTML*
-\end_layout
-
-\end_inset
-
- Diese Tags kontrollieren die XHTML-Ausgabe.
- Siehe Abschnitt
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-\begin_inset CommandInset ref
-LatexCommand ref
-reference "sec:Tags-for-XHTML"
+\lang english
+]
+\end_layout
\end_inset
-.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
+).
+ A line break in the output can be indicated by
+\lang ngerman
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-InnerTag
+<br/>
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [FIXME] (Wird nur für XML-Formate benutzt.)
+.
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
+\begin_layout Itemize
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-InPreamble
+DefaultArg
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\emph on
-0
+[string]
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+
+\lang english
+defines an argument that is inserted if and only if no user-specified arguments
+ were given, i.
\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
+e.
+ if no argument inset has been inserted (note that also an empty argument
+ inset omits the DefaultArg).
+ Multiple arguments need to be separated by comma.
+\end_layout
+\begin_layout Itemize
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-1
+PresetArg
\end_layout
\end_inset
-]Wenn auf
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-1
+[string]
\end_layout
\end_inset
-gesetzt, wird der Stil in den LaTeX-Vorspann gesetzt und nicht in den eigentlich
-en Dokumenttext.
- Dies ist nützlich für Dokumentklassen, die Informationen wie den Titel
- und Autor im Vorspann erwarten.
- Beachten Sie, dass dies nur für Stile funktioniert, deren
-\begin_inset Flex Code
+
+\lang english
+defines an argument that is inserted in any case (alone or in addition to
+ user-specified arguments).
+ Multiple arguments need to be separated by comma.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Itemize
+\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LatexType
+Font
\end_layout
\end_inset
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Command
-\end_layout
+\lang english
+The font used for the argument content
+\lang ngerman
+; siehe
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:Beschreibung-des-Zeichensatzes"
\end_inset
- oder
+.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Itemize
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Paragraph
+LabelFont
\end_layout
\end_inset
-ist.
+
+\lang english
+The font used for the label
+\lang ngerman
+; siehe
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:Beschreibung-des-Zeichensatzes"
+
+\end_inset
+
+.
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
+\begin_layout Itemize
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-InTitle
+Decoration
\end_layout
\end_inset
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\emph on
-0
+Classic
+\emph default
+, Minimalistic, Conglomerate
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
-\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
-\end_inset
-
+]
+\lang english
+describes the rendering style used for the inset's frame and buttons.
+\end_layout
+\begin_layout Itemize
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-1
+AutoInsert
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] Wenn auf
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-1
+[int=0]
\end_layout
\end_inset
-gesetzt, wird der Stil als Teil des Titel-Abschnitts behandelt (siehe auch
- die allgemeinen Textklassen-Parameter
+
+\lang english
+If this is set to
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-TitleLatexType
+
+\lang english
+1
\end_layout
\end_inset
- und
+, this argument is automatically inserted when the respective style is selected.
+ Currently, only one argument per style\SpecialChar \slash{}
+layout can be automatically inserted.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Standard
+
+\lang english
+By default, the text entered in the LyX workarea in the respective layout
+ is the last (mandatory) argument of a command if the
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-TitleLatexName
+
+\lang english
+LatexType
\end_layout
\end_inset
-).
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
+ is
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-ItemSep
+
+\lang english
+Command
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
+.
+ However, arguments with the prefix
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-float=0
+
+\lang english
+post:
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] Ein zusätzlicher Abstand zwischen Absätzen desselben Layouts.
- Wenn in einer Umgebung andere Layouts integriert werden, so werden diese
- mit dem
+ are output after this workarea argument.
+ Note that post-argument numbering restarts at 1, so the first argument
+ following the workarea argument is
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-ParSep
+
+\lang english
+post:1
\end_layout
\end_inset
- der Umgebung getrennt.
- Die kompletten Unterpunkte der Umgebung werden jedoch
-\emph on
-zusätzlich
-\emph default
- mit
+.
+ Post-arguments are ignored in any other
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-ItemSep
+
+\lang english
+LatexType
\end_layout
\end_inset
- getrennt.
- Man beachte, dass
+ than
+\lang ngerman
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-ItemSep
+Command
\end_layout
\end_inset
-ein
-\emph on
-Multiplikator
-\emph default
- ist
-\emph on
.
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
+\begin_layout Standard
+Argumente für Listen-
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-ItemTag
+
+\backslash
+item
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [FIXME] (Wird nur für XML-Formate benutzt.)
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
+s (wie in
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-KeepEmpty
+
+\backslash
+item[foo]
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
+) haben den Präfix
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\emph on
-0
+item:
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+ gefolgt von der Nummer (z.
\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
-
+B.
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-1
+Argument item:1
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] Normalerweise ist es in LyX nicht möglich, einen Absatz leer zu lassen,
- da das zu einer leeren LaTeX-Ausgabe führen würde.
- In manchen Fällen ist das aber durchaus gewünscht: So können beispielsweise
- in einer Briefvorlage die benötigten Felder leer voreingestellt werden,
- damit keiner vergisst, sie anzugeben; in speziellen Klassen wird ein Absatz
- als Unterbrechung verwendet, der keinen Text enthält.
+)
\end_layout
+\end_deeper
\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LabelBottomsep
+BabelPreamble
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
+ Beachten Sie, dass dies alle vorhergehenden
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-float=0
+BabelPreamble
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] Der vertikale Abstand zwischen der Marke und dem folgenden Text.
- Wird nur für Marken benutzt, die über dem folgenden Text stehen (
+-Dekla\SpecialChar \-
+ration für diesen Stil überschreibt.
+ Muss mit
+\begin_inset Quotes gld
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Top_Environment
+EndBabelPreamble
\end_layout
\end_inset
- und
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Centered_Top_Environment
-\end_layout
+\begin_inset Quotes grd
+\end_inset
+
+ beendet werden.
+ Siehe
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:I18n"
\end_inset
-).
+ für Details zur Verwendung.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LabelCounter
+BottomSep
\end_layout
\end_inset
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-string=""
+float=0
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] ist der Name des Zählers zur automatischen Nummerierung.
-\begin_inset Newline newline
-\end_inset
-
-Er
-\emph on
-muss
-\emph default
- angegeben werden, wenn
-\begin_inset Flex Code
+]
+\begin_inset Foot
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LabelType
-\end_layout
+\begin_inset Quotes gld
+\end_inset
+float
+\begin_inset Quotes grd
\end_inset
-
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
+ ist eine Gleitkommazahl, wie
+\begin_inset Quotes gld
+\end_inset
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Counter
+1,5
+\begin_inset Quotes grd
+\end_inset
+
+.
\end_layout
\end_inset
- ist.
- In diesem Fall wird der Zähler jedes mal erhöht, wenn das entsprechende
- Layout im Dokument verwendet wird.
-\begin_inset Newline newline
-\end_inset
+ Der vertikale Abstand, der die letzte Serie von Absätzen vom folgenden
+ Text trennt.
+ Wenn der nächste Paragraph einen anderen Stil hat, werden die Abstände
+ nicht einfach addiert, sondern das Maximum wird verwendet.
+\end_layout
-Er
-\emph on
-kann
-\emph default
- angegeben werden, wenn
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LabelType
+Category
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Enumerate
+string
\end_layout
\end_inset
- ist.
- In diesem Fall ist es etwas kompliziert: Angenommen Sie haben
-\begin_inset Quotes eld
-\end_inset
-
+] ist die Kategorie für diesen Stil.
+ Sie wird benutzt, um zugehörige Stile in der Layout-Kombobox der Werkzeugleiste
+ zu gruppieren.
+ Jeder beliebige String kann benutzt werden, aber es ist sinnvoll vorhandene
+ Ka\SpecialChar \-
+te\SpecialChar \-
+gorien zusammen mit Ihren eigenen Stilen zu benutzen.
+\end_layout
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LabelCounter MeinZaehler
+CommandDepth
\end_layout
\end_inset
+ ist die Tiefe des XML-Befehls und wird nur für XML-Formate benutzt.
+\end_layout
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
-\end_inset
-
- angegeben, dann lauten die eigentlichen Zähler
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-MeinZaehleri
+CopyStyle
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-MeinZaehlerii
+string
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+] Kopiert alle Eigenschaften eines bereits definierten Layouts in das aktuelle.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-MeinZaehleriii
+DependsOn
\end_layout
\end_inset
- und
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-MeinZaehleriv
+<Name>
\end_layout
\end_inset
-; so wie in LaTeX.
- Diese Zähler müssen alle separat deklariert werden.
-\begin_inset Newline newline
-\end_inset
-
-Siehe Abschnitt
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
+] ist der Name eines Stils, dessen Vorspann
+\emph on
+vor
+\emph default
+ diesem ausgegeben werden soll.
+ Dadurch wird eine Reihenfolge von Vorspannteilen bewirkt, wenn Makro-Definition
+en voneinander abhängen.
+\begin_inset Foot
+status collapsed
-\begin_inset CommandInset ref
-LatexCommand ref
-reference "sub:Zähler"
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Beachten Sie, dass es außer dieser Funktionalität keine andere Möglichkeit
+ gibt, Vorspanne zu ordnen.
+ Die Reihenfolge, die Sie in einer LyX-Version sehen, kann sich in späteren
+ Versionen ohne Warnung ändern.
+\end_layout
\end_inset
- für Einzelheiten zu Zählern.
-
+
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LabelFont
+EndLabeltype
\end_layout
\end_inset
- Der Zeichensatz, der für die Marke verwendet wird.
- Siehe Abschnitt
-\begin_inset space \space{}
-\end_inset
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
-\begin_inset CommandInset ref
-LatexCommand ref
-reference "sub:Beschreibung-des-Zeichensatzes"
+\emph on
+No_Label
+\emph default
+, Box, Filled_Box, Static
+\end_layout
\end_inset
-.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
+]
+\family typewriter
+
+\family default
+ist der Markentyp, der am Ende eines Absatzes steht (oder mehrerer Absätze,
+ wenn
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LabelIndent
+LatexType
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
+ auf
+\begin_inset Newline newline
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-string=""
+Environment
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] Text der angibt, wie weit die Marke eingerückt werden soll.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
+,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Labelsep
+Item_Environment
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
+ oder
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-string=""
+List_Environment
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] Text der den horizontalen Abstand zwischen der Marke und dem folgenden
- Text angibt.
- Wird nur für Marken benutzt, die nicht über dem folgenden Text stehen.
-\end_layout
+ gesetzt ist).
+\begin_inset Newline newline
+\end_inset
+
-\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LabelString
+No_Label
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
+ bedeutet
+\begin_inset Quotes gld
+\end_inset
+
+nichts
+\begin_inset Quotes grd
+\end_inset
+
+,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-string=""
+Box
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] Der String, der für den
+ oder
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LabelType
+Filled_Box
\end_layout
\end_inset
+ ist ein weißes oder schwarzes Quadrat, das für das Markieren eines Beweisendes
+ geeignet ist.
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
- verwendet wird.
- Wenn
+ ist eine explizite Zeichenkette.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LabelCounter
+EndLabelString
\end_layout
\end_inset
- gesetzt wurde, kann der String spezielle Formatierungsbefehle enthalten,
- wie sie in Abschnitt
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\begin_inset CommandInset ref
-LatexCommand ref
-reference "sub:Zähler"
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+string=""
+\end_layout
\end_inset
- be\SpecialChar \-
-schrieben sind.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
+] ist eine Zeichenkette, die für einen
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LabelStringAppendix
+Static
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
+
+\begin_inset Newline newline
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-string=""
+EndLabelType
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] wird im Anhang anstatt
+ benutzt wird.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LabelString
+Font
\end_layout
\end_inset
- benutzt.
- Beachten Sie, dass jede Definition von
+ Der Zeichensatz, der für den Textkörper
+\emph on
+und
+\emph default
+ die Marke verwendet wird, siehe
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:Beschreibung-des-Zeichensatzes"
+
+\end_inset
+
+.
+ Wird
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LabelString
+Font
\end_layout
\end_inset
- auch
+ gesetzt, dann erhält
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LabelStringAppendix
+LabelFont
\end_layout
\end_inset
- zurücksetzt.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
+ automatisch denselben Wert.
+ Daher sollte
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LabelTag
+Font
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [FIXME] (Wird nur für XML-Formate benutzt.)
+ zuerst definiert werden.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LabelType
+FreeSpacing
\end_layout
\end_inset
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\emph on
-No_Label
-\emph default
-, Manual, Static, Top_Environment,
-\begin_inset Newline newline
-\end_inset
+0
+\end_layout
-Centered_Top_Environment, Counter, Sensitive, Enumerate,
-\begin_inset Newline newline
\end_inset
-Itemize, Bibliography
-\end_layout
-
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
-]
-\end_layout
-\begin_deeper
-\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Manual
+1
\end_layout
\end_inset
- bedeutet: die Marke ist das erste Wort (bis zum ersten echten Leerzeichen).
- Verwenden Sie geschützte Leerzeichen wenn Sie mehr als ein Wort als Marke
- haben wollen.
-
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
+] Normalerweise erlaubt es LyX nicht, mehr als ein Leerzeichen zwischen
+ Wörtern einzufügen.
+ Diese Eigenschaft kann in bestimmten Fällen umständ\SpecialChar \-
+lich sein, zum Beispiel,
+ wenn ein Programmcode eingegeben werden soll.
+ In solchen Fällen kann
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Static
+FreeSpacing
\end_layout
\end_inset
- bedeutet: die Marke ist was als
+ auf
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LabelString
+1
\end_layout
\end_inset
- definiert wurde.
+ gesetzt werden.
+ LyX erzeugt in diesem Falls sich LyX nicht im LaTeX-Modus befindet, erzeugt
+ es für jedes zusätzliche Leerzeichen ein geschütztes Leerzeichen.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Top_Environment
+HTML*
\end_layout
\end_inset
+ Diese Tags kontrollieren die XHTML-Ausgabe.
+ Siehe
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sec:Tags-for-XHTML"
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-und
-\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
+.
+\end_layout
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Centered_Top_Environment
+InnerTag
\end_layout
\end_inset
- sind Spezialfälle von
-\begin_inset Newline newline
-\end_inset
-
+ [FIXME] (Wird nur für XML-Formate benutzt.)
+\end_layout
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Static
+InPreamble
\end_layout
\end_inset
-.
- Die Marke erscheint über dem Absatz, aber nur am Anfang der Umgebung oder
- am Anfang einer Serie von Absätzen mit diesem Layout.
- Dies benutzt man zum Beispiel im
-\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Abstract
+
+\emph on
+0
\end_layout
\end_inset
--Layout.
-\end_layout
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
-\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Sensitive
+1
\end_layout
\end_inset
- ist ein Spezialfall für Beschriftungsmarken für Abbildungen und Tabellen-Gleito
-bjekte.
-
+]Wenn auf
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Sensitive
+1
\end_layout
\end_inset
- bedeutet, dass der gedruckte Text von der Art des Gleitobjekts abhängt:
- Er ist fest einprogrammiert als 'GleitobjektTyp N', wobei N der Wert des
- Zählers des Gleitobjekttyps ist.
- Für den Fall, dass die Beschriftungsmarke außerhalb eines Gleitobjekts
- eingefügt wird, sollte
+gesetzt, wird der Stil in den LaTeX-Vorspann gesetzt und nicht in den eigentlich
+en Dokumenttext.
+ Dies ist nützlich für Dokumentklassen, die Informationen wie den Titel
+ und Autor im Vorspann erwarten.
+ Beachten Sie, dass dies nur für Stile funktioniert, deren
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LabelString
+LatexType
\end_layout
\end_inset
- z.
-\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
-\end_inset
-
-B.
- auf
-\begin_inset Quotes gld
-\end_inset
-
-Senseless!
-\begin_inset Quotes grd
-\end_inset
-
- gesetzt werden.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Counter
+Command
\end_layout
\end_inset
- definiert automatisch nummerierte Zähler.
- Der
+ oder
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LabelString
+Paragraph
\end_layout
\end_inset
- wird erweitert, damit er alle
+ist.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Counter
+InTitle
\end_layout
\end_inset
- enthält: Das Ergebnis wird demnach zum Beispiel
-\begin_inset Quotes gld
-\end_inset
-
-
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Abschnitt
-\backslash
-thechapter.
-\backslash
-thesection
-\end_layout
-
-\end_inset
-
-\begin_inset Quotes grd
-\end_inset
+\emph on
+0
+\end_layout
- sein.
- Siehe Abschnitt
-\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
-
-\begin_inset CommandInset ref
-LatexCommand ref
-reference "sub:Zähler"
-
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
- für weitere Informationen über Zähler.
-\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Enumerate
+1
\end_layout
\end_inset
- erzeugt die üblichen Marken für Nummerierungen.
- Momentan sind diese fest auf arabische Zahlen, Kleinbuchstaben, kleine
- römische Zahlen und Großbuchstaben (für die 4
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-möglichen Schachtelungstiefen) programmiert.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
+] Wenn auf
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Itemize
+1
\end_layout
\end_inset
- erzeugt je nach Schachtelungstiefe verschiedene Auflistungszeichen, Diese
- sind ebenfalls fest programmiert.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
+gesetzt, wird der Stil als Teil des Titel-Abschnitts behandelt (siehe auch
+ die allgemeinen Textklassen-Parameter
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Bibliography
+TitleLatexType
\end_layout
\end_inset
- wird intern von LyX verwendet und sollte nur zusammen mit
+ und
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LatexType BibEnvironment
+TitleLatexName
\end_layout
\end_inset
- verwendet werden.
+).
\end_layout
-\end_deeper
\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LangPreamble
+ItemSep
\end_layout
\end_inset
- Beachten Sie, dass dies alle vorhergehenden
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LangPreamble
+float=0
\end_layout
\end_inset
--Deklaration für diesen Stil überschreibt.
- Muss mit
-\begin_inset Quotes gld
-\end_inset
-
-
+] Ein zusätzlicher Abstand zwischen Absätzen desselben Layouts.
+ Wenn in einer Umgebung andere Layouts integriert werden, so werden diese
+ mit dem
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-EndLangPreamble
+ParSep
\end_layout
\end_inset
+ der Umgebung getrennt.
+ Die kompletten Unterpunkte der Umgebung werden jedoch
+\emph on
+zusätzlich
+\emph default
+ mit
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\begin_inset Quotes grd
-\end_inset
-
- beendet werden.
- Siehe Abschnitt
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-
-\begin_inset CommandInset ref
-LatexCommand ref
-reference "sub:I18n"
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+ItemSep
+\end_layout
\end_inset
- für Details zur Verwendung.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
+ getrennt.
+ Man beachte, dass
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LatexName
+ItemSep
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
+ein
+\emph on
+Multiplikator
+\emph default
+ ist
+\emph on
+.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-<Name>
+ItemTag
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] Der LaTeX-Name für dieses Layout.
- Das bedeutet entweder der Name eines LaTeX-Befehls oder der einer LaTeX-Umgebun
-g.
+ [FIXME] (Wird nur für XML-Formate benutzt.)
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LatexParam
+KeepEmpty
\end_layout
\end_inset
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-<Parameter>
+
+\emph on
+0
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] Ein optionaler Parameter für den entsprechenden
-\begin_inset Newline newline
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LatexName
+1
\end_layout
\end_inset
-.
- Dieser Parameter kann innerhalb von LyX nicht mehr geändert werden.
-
+] Normalerweise ist es in LyX nicht möglich, einen Absatz leer zu lassen,
+ da das zu einer leeren LaTeX-Ausgabe führen würde.
+ In manchen Fällen ist das aber durchaus gewünscht: So können beispielsweise
+ in einer Briefvorlage die benötigten Felder leer voreingestellt werden,
+ damit keiner vergisst, sie anzugeben; in speziellen Klassen wird ein Absatz
+ als Unterbrechung verwendet, der keinen Text enthält.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LatexType
+LabelBottomsep
\end_layout
\end_inset
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\emph on
-Paragraph
-\emph default
-, Command, Environment, Item_Environment,
-\begin_inset Newline newline
-\end_inset
-
-List_Environment, Bib_Environment
+float=0
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] Legt fest, wie das Layout in LaTeX übersetzt wird.
-\begin_inset Foot
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
+] Der vertikale Abstand zwischen der Marke und dem folgenden Text.
+ Wird nur für Marken benutzt, die über dem folgenden Text stehen (
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LatexType
+Top_Environment
\end_layout
\end_inset
- mag irreführend sein, denn dessen Regeln gelten auch für DocBook-Klassen.
- Siehe die DocBook Klassendateien (Dateinames
+ und
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-db_*.inc
-\end_layout
-
-\end_inset
-
- ) für spezielle Beispiele.
+Centered_Top_Environment
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
+).
\end_layout
-\begin_deeper
\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Paragraph
+LabelCounter
\end_layout
\end_inset
- bewirkt nichts besonderes -- der Text wird als
-\emph on
-normaler
-\emph default
-
-\emph on
-Absatz
-\emph default
- übernommen.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Command
+string=""
\end_layout
\end_inset
- behandelt den Text als Argument eines LaTeX-Befehls
+] ist der Name des Zählers zur automatischen Nummerierung.
\begin_inset Newline newline
\end_inset
-(
+Er
+\emph on
+muss
+\emph default
+ angegeben werden, wenn
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\backslash
-
-\emph on
-LatexName
-\emph default
-{\SpecialChar \ldots{}
-}
+LabelType
\end_layout
\end_inset
-).
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Environment
+Counter
\end_layout
\end_inset
- behandelt den Text als Kern einer LaTeX-Umgebung
+ ist.
+ In diesem Fall wird der Zähler jedes mal erhöht, wenn das entsprechende
+ Layout im Dokument verwendet wird.
\begin_inset Newline newline
\end_inset
-(
+Er
+\emph on
+kann
+\emph default
+ angegeben werden, wenn
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\backslash
-begin{
-\emph on
-LatexName
-\emph default
-}\SpecialChar \ldots{}
-
-\backslash
-end{
-\emph on
-LatexName
-\emph default
-}
+LabelType
\end_layout
\end_inset
-).
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Item_Environment
+Enumerate
\end_layout
\end_inset
- bewirkt dasselbe wie
+ ist.
+ In diesem Fall ist es etwas kompliziert: Angenommen Sie haben
+\begin_inset Quotes eld
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Environment
+LabelCounter MeinZaehler
\end_layout
\end_inset
-, nur dass vor jedem Absatz ein
+
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
+ angegeben, dann lauten die eigentlichen Zähler
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\backslash
-item
+MeinZaehleri
\end_layout
\end_inset
- eingefügt wird.
-
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
+,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-List_Environment
+MeinZaehlerii
\end_layout
\end_inset
- funktioniert wie
+,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Item_Environment
+MeinZaehleriii
\end_layout
\end_inset
-, nur dass
-\begin_inset Newline newline
-\end_inset
-
-
+ und
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LabelWidthString
+MeinZaehleriv
\end_layout
\end_inset
- als Argument an die Umgebung übergeben wird.
+; so wie in LaTeX.
+ Diese Zähler müssen alle separat deklariert werden.
\begin_inset Newline newline
\end_inset
-
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LabelWidthString
-\end_layout
+Siehe
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:Zähler"
\end_inset
- kann im Menü
-\family sans
-Bearbeiten
-\family default
-\SpecialChar \menuseparator
-
-\family sans
-Absatz-Einstellungen
-\family default
+ für Einzelheiten zu Zählern.
-\begin_inset Marginal
-status open
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-\begin_inset Graphics
- filename ../../images/layout-paragraph.png
- BoundingBox 0bp 6bp 20bp 20bp
+LabelFont
+\end_layout
\end_inset
-
-\end_layout
+ Der Zeichensatz, der für die Marke verwendet wird.
+ Siehe
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:Beschreibung-des-Zeichensatzes"
\end_inset
- definiert werden.
+.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Bib_Environment
+LabelIndent
\end_layout
\end_inset
- ist wie
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Environment
+string=""
\end_layout
\end_inset
- aber fügt zusätzlich das notwendige Argument (die längste Marke) zum Begin-Befe
-hl der Bibliografie-Umgebung ein:
-\begin_inset Newline newline
-\end_inset
-
+] Text der angibt, wie weit die Marke eingerückt werden soll.
+\end_layout
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\backslash
-begin{thebibliography}{99}
+Labelsep
\end_layout
\end_inset
- Es ist daher nur für die Bibliografie-Umgebung nützlich.
- Die voreingestellte längste Marke
-\begin_inset Quotes gld
-\end_inset
-
-99
-\begin_inset Quotes grd
-\end_inset
-
- kann vom Nutzer in den Absatzeinstellungen eines Bibliografie-Eintrags
- geändert werden.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Standard
-Fasst man die letzten Sachen zusammen, wird die LaTeX-Ausgabe entweder so:
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-
-\backslash
-LatexName[LatexParam]{\SpecialChar \ldots{}
-}
-\end_layout
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\begin_layout Standard
-oder so:
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+string=""
\end_layout
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-
-\backslash
-begin{LatexName}[LatexParam] \SpecialChar \ldots{}
-
-\backslash
-end{LatexName}.
-\end_layout
+\end_inset
-\begin_layout Standard
-aussehen, abhängig vom LaTeX-Typ.
+] Text der den horizontalen Abstand zwischen der Marke und dem folgenden
+ Text angibt.
+ Wird nur für Marken benutzt, die nicht über dem folgenden Text stehen.
\end_layout
-\end_deeper
\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LeftMargin
+LabelString
\end_layout
\end_inset
\end_inset
-] Wenn ein Layout in ein anderes Layout für Umgebungen eingefügt wird, werden
- die Breiten der verschiedenen
+] Der String, der für den
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LeftMargin
+LabelType
\end_layout
\end_inset
- nicht einfach addiert, sondern vorher in Abhängigkeit zur Schachtelungstiefe
- mit dem Faktor
-\begin_inset Formula $\frac{4}{\mathrm{Tiefe}+4}$
-\end_inset
-
- multipliziert.
- Dieser Parameter wird auch dann benutzt, wenn
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Margin
+Static
\end_layout
\end_inset
- als
+ verwendet wird.
+ Wenn
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Manual
+LabelCounter
\end_layout
\end_inset
- oder
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
+ gesetzt wurde, kann der String spezielle Formatierungsbefehle enthalten,
+ wie sie in
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:Zähler"
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Dynamic
+\end_inset
+
+ be\SpecialChar \-
+schrieben sind.
\end_layout
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
- definiert wurde.
- In diesem Fall wird der Wert zu den gegebenen manuellen oder dynamischen
- Rändern hinzugefügt.
-\begin_inset Newline newline
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+LabelStringAppendix
+\end_layout
-Zum Beispiel bedeutet
-\begin_inset Quotes gld
\end_inset
-
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-MM
+string=""
\end_layout
\end_inset
+] wird im Anhang anstatt
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\begin_inset Quotes grd
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+LabelString
+\end_layout
-, dass der Absatz mit der Breite eingerückt wird, die die Buchstaben
-\begin_inset Quotes gld
\end_inset
-
+ benutzt.
+ Beachten Sie, dass jede Definition von
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-MM
+LabelString
\end_layout
\end_inset
+ auch
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\begin_inset Quotes grd
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+LabelStringAppendix
+\end_layout
- in der normalen Schriftart haben.
- man kann negative Breite erzeugen, indem man den String mit
-\begin_inset Quotes gld
\end_inset
+ zurücksetzt.
+\end_layout
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
--
+LabelTag
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
-\begin_inset Quotes grd
-\end_inset
-
- beginnt.
- Diese Art der Angabe wurde gewählt, damit der Text unabhängig von der verwendet
-en Bildschirmschriftart wie vorgesehen aussieht.
+ [FIXME] (Wird nur für XML-Formate benutzt.)
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Margin
+LabelType
\end_layout
\end_inset
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\emph on
-Static
+No_Label
\emph default
-, Manual, Dynamic, First_Dynamic, Right_Address_Box
-\end_layout
-
+, Manual, Static, Top_Environment,
+\begin_inset Newline newline
\end_inset
-]
+Centered_Top_Environment, Counter, Sensitive, Enumerate,
\begin_inset Newline newline
\end_inset
-legt fest, wie der linke Rand des Textes bestimmt wird.
-
+Itemize, Bibliography
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+]
\end_layout
\begin_deeper
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Static
+Manual
\end_layout
\end_inset
- wählt feste Randbreiten.
+ bedeutet: die Marke ist das erste Wort (bis zum ersten echten Leerzeichen).
+ Verwenden Sie geschützte Leerzeichen wenn Sie mehr als ein Wort als Marke
+ haben wollen.
\end_layout
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Manual
+Static
\end_layout
\end_inset
- bedeutet, dass der Rand von der Einstellung der
-\family sans
-Ausrichtung
-\family default
- im Menü
-\family sans
-Absatz-Einstellungen
-\family default
- (
-\family sans
-Bearbeiten
-\family default
-\SpecialChar \menuseparator
-
-\family sans
-Absatz-Einstellungen
-\family default
-
-\begin_inset Marginal
-status open
+ bedeutet: die Marke ist was als
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-\begin_inset Graphics
- filename ../../images/layout-paragraph.png
- BoundingBox 0bp 6bp 20bp 20bp
-
-\end_inset
-
-
+LabelString
\end_layout
\end_inset
-) abhängt.
- Dies wird für hübsche Listen ohne Tabulatoren benutzt.
-
+ definiert wurde.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Dynamic
+Top_Environment
\end_layout
\end_inset
- bedeutet, der linke Rand hängt von der Größe der verwendeten Markierung
- ab.
- Dies wird zum Beispiel bei automatisch nummerierten Überschriften verwendet.
- Es leuchtet ein, dass die Überschrift
-\begin_inset Quotes gld
-\end_inset
-
-5.4.3.2.1 Sehr lange \SpecialChar \ldots{}
- Überschrift
-\begin_inset Quotes grd
-\end_inset
- einen größeren linken Rand benötigt, als
-\begin_inset Quotes gld
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
-3.2 Sehr lange \SpecialChar \ldots{}
- Überschrift
-\begin_inset Quotes grd
+und
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
-.
-
-\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-First_Dynamic
+Centered_Top_Environment
\end_layout
\end_inset
- arbeitet ähnlich wie
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Dynamic
-\end_layout
-
+ sind Spezialfälle von
+\begin_inset Newline newline
\end_inset
-, aber nur die erste Zeile wird dynamisch gesetzt, die anderen statisch.
- Dies wird für die LaTeX
-\begin_inset ERT
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-"=
+Static
\end_layout
\end_inset
-Umgebung
-\begin_inset Flex Code
+.
+ Die Marke erscheint über dem Absatz, aber nur am Anfang der Umgebung oder
+ am Anfang einer Serie von Absätzen mit diesem Layout.
+ Dies benutzt man zum Beispiel im
+\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-description
+Abstract
\end_layout
\end_inset
- benutzt.
+-Layout.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Right_Address_Box
+Sensitive
\end_layout
\end_inset
- bedeutet, dass der Rand so gewählt wird, dass die längste Zeile des Absatzes
- gerade den rechten Rand berührt.
- Dies wird zum Setzen einer Adresse am rechten Rand der Seite eingesetzt.
-\end_layout
-
-\end_deeper
-\begin_layout Description
+ ist ein Spezialfall für Beschriftungsmarken für Abbildungen und Tabellen-Gleito
+bjekte.
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-NeedProtect
+Sensitive
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
+ bedeutet, dass der gedruckte Text von der Art des Gleitobjekts abhängt:
+ Er ist fest einprogrammiert als 'GleitobjektTyp N', wobei N der Wert des
+ Zählers des Gleitobjekttyps ist.
+ Für den Fall, dass die Beschriftungsmarke außerhalb eines Gleitobjekts
+ eingefügt wird, sollte
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\emph on
-0
+LabelString
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+ z.
\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
-
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-1
-\end_layout
-
-\end_inset
-
-] Gibt an, ob
+B.
+ auf
\begin_inset Quotes gld
\end_inset
-zerbrechliche
+Senseless!
\begin_inset Quotes grd
\end_inset
- LaTeX-Befehle innerhalb dieses Layouts durch
+ gesetzt werden.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\backslash
-protect
+Counter
\end_layout
\end_inset
- geschützt werden müssen.
- (Achtung: Diese Einstellung sagt nichts darüber aus, ob der Befehl an sich
- geschützt werden soll.)
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
+ definiert automatisch nummerierte Zähler.
+ Der
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Newline
+LabelString
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
+ wird erweitert, damit er alle
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-0
+Counter
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
-\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+ enthält: Das Ergebnis wird demnach zum Beispiel
+\begin_inset Quotes gld
\end_inset
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Abschnitt
+\backslash
+thechapter.
+\backslash
+thesection
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
-\emph on
-1
-\end_layout
+\begin_inset Quotes grd
\end_inset
-] Gibt an, ob Zeilenumbrüche in LaTeX als
-\begin_inset Quotes gld
+ sein.
+ Siehe
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:Zähler"
+
\end_inset
+ für weitere Informationen über Zähler.
+\end_layout
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\backslash
-
-\backslash
-
+Enumerate
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
-\begin_inset Quotes grd
+ erzeugt die üblichen Marken für Nummerierungen.
+ Momentan sind diese fest auf arabische Zahlen, Kleinbuchstaben, kleine
+ römische Zahlen und Großbuchstaben (für die 4
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
- dargestellt werden, oder nicht.
- Man kann dies ausschalten (Wert:
+möglichen Schachtelungstiefen) programmiert.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-0
+Itemize
\end_layout
\end_inset
-), um TeX-Code in LyX komfortabler editieren zu können.
+ erzeugt je nach Schachtelungstiefe verschiedene Auflistungszeichen, Diese
+ sind ebenfalls fest programmiert.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-NextNoIndent
+Bibliography
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
+ wird intern von LyX verwendet und sollte nur zusammen mit
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\emph on
-0
+LatexType BibEnvironment
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
-\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
-\end_inset
-
+ verwendet werden.
+\end_layout
+\end_deeper
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-1
+LangPreamble
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] Gibt an, ob der nachfolgende Absatz einen linken Einzug haben darf oder
- nicht.
-
+ Beachten Sie, dass dies alle vorhergehenden
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-1
+LangPreamble
\end_layout
\end_inset
- heißt, der Absatz erhält auf keinen Fall einen Einzug (z.
-\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+-Deklaration für diesen Stil überschreibt.
+ Muss mit
+\begin_inset Quotes gld
\end_inset
-B.
- nach einer Überschrift), wenn
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-DefaultStyle
+EndLangPreamble
\end_layout
\end_inset
-- (normalerweise
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Standard
-\end_layout
+\begin_inset Quotes grd
\end_inset
--) Paragraphen einen Einzug haben.
- (Daher beeinflusst die Einstellung nur
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Standard
-\end_layout
+ beendet werden.
+ Siehe
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:I18n"
\end_inset
--Paragraphen.)
+ für Details zur Verwendung.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-ObsoletedBy
+LatexName
\end_layout
\end_inset
\end_inset
-] Der Name eines Layouts, das durch dieses ersetzt wurde.
- So können Sie ein Layout umbenennen und die Rückwärtskompatibilität erhalten.
+] Der LaTeX-Name für dieses Layout.
+ Das bedeutet entweder der Name eines LaTeX-Befehls oder der einer LaTeX-Umgebun
+g.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-OptionalArgs
+LatexParam
\end_layout
\end_inset
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-int=0
+<Parameter>
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] Die Zahl der optionalen Argumente, die in diesem Layout benutzt werden
- können.
- Dies ist zum Beispiel bei Abschnittsüberschriften hilfreich und macht nur
- mit LaTeX Sinn.
- Beachten Sie, dass in der Ausgabe die optionalen Argumente vor den benötigten
- stehen werden (siehe unten).
- Man kann also Konstrukte wie dieses hier haben:
-\end_layout
+] Ein optionaler Parameter für den entsprechenden
+\begin_inset Newline newline
+\end_inset
-\begin_deeper
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-\backslash
-mycmd[optional1]{benötigt1}{Inhalt des Paragraphs}
-\end_layout
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\begin_layout Standard
-aber nicht:
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+LatexName
\end_layout
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-
-\backslash
-mycmd[optional1]{benötigt1}[optional2]{Inhalt des Paragraphs}
-\end_layout
+\end_inset
-\begin_layout Standard
-zumindest nicht ohne TeX-Code (in den man alles schreiben kann).
+.
+ Dieser Parameter kann innerhalb von LyX nicht mehr geändert werden.
+
\end_layout
-\end_deeper
\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-ParbreakIsNewline
+LatexType
\end_layout
\end_inset
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\emph on
-0
-\end_layout
-
+Paragraph
+\emph default
+, Command, Environment, Item_Environment,
+\begin_inset Newline newline
\end_inset
-,
-\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+List_Environment, Bib_Environment
+\end_layout
+
\end_inset
+] Legt fest, wie das Layout in LaTeX übersetzt wird.
+\begin_inset Foot
+status collapsed
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-1
+LatexType
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] Gibt an, dass ein Paragraph nicht durch eine leere Zeile in der LaTeX-Ausgabe
- abgesetzt wird, sondern nur durch einen Zeilenumbruch.
- Zusammen mit
+ mag irreführend sein, denn dessen Regeln gelten auch für DocBook-Klassen.
+ Siehe die DocBook Klassendateien (Dateinames
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-PassThru 1
+db_*.inc
\end_layout
\end_inset
- erlaubt dies die Emulation eines reinen Texteditors (so wie die TeX-Code
- Einfügung).
+ ) für spezielle Beispiele.
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
+\end_inset
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-ParIndent
-\end_layout
-\end_inset
+\end_layout
- [
+\begin_deeper
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-string=""
+Paragraph
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] Der Einzug der ersten Zeile eines Absatzes.
+ bewirkt nichts besonderes -- der Text wird als
+\emph on
+normaler
+\emph default
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Parindent
+\emph on
+Absatz
+\emph default
+ übernommen.
\end_layout
-\end_inset
-
- bleibt für ein bestimmtes Layout fest.
- Eine Ausnahme ist das Standard-Layout, denn dort kann der Einzug vom vorherigen
- Layout mit
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-NextNoIndent
+Command
\end_layout
\end_inset
- verboten werden.
- Außerdem benutzt das
+ behandelt den Text als Argument eines LaTeX-Befehls
+\begin_inset Newline newline
+\end_inset
+
+(
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Standard
+
+\backslash
+
+\emph on
+LatexName
+\emph default
+{\SpecialChar \ldots{}
+}
\end_layout
\end_inset
--Layout innerhalb von Umgebungen den
+).
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Parindent
+Environment
\end_layout
\end_inset
- der Umgebung und nicht den eigenen.
- Zum Beispiel haben
+ behandelt den Text als Kern einer LaTeX-Umgebung
+\begin_inset Newline newline
+\end_inset
+
+(
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Standard
+
+\backslash
+begin{
+\emph on
+LatexName
+\emph default
+}\SpecialChar \ldots{}
+
+\backslash
+end{
+\emph on
+LatexName
+\emph default
+}
\end_layout
\end_inset
--Absätze innerhalb einer Aufzählung keinen Einzug.
+).
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-ParSep
+Item_Environment
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
+ bewirkt dasselbe wie
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-float=0
+Environment
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] Der vertikale Anstand zwischen den Absätzen dieses Layouts.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
+, nur dass vor jedem Absatz ein
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Parskip
+
+\backslash
+item
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
+ eingefügt wird.
+
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-float=0
+List_Environment
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] Der Benutzer kann in LyX wählen ob Absätze durch
-\family sans
-Einrückung
-\family default
- oder
-\family sans
-Vertikaler
-\begin_inset space \space{}
-\end_inset
-
-Abstand
-\family default
- getrennt werden.
- Wenn
-\family sans
-Einrückung
-\family default
- gewählt ist, wird
+ funktioniert wie
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Parskip
+Item_Environment
\end_layout
\end_inset
- ignoriert.
- Ist
-\family sans
-Vertikaler
-\begin_inset space \space{}
+, nur dass
+\begin_inset Newline newline
\end_inset
-Abstand
-\family default
- gewählt wird
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-ParIndent
+LabelWidthString
\end_layout
\end_inset
- ignoriert und alle Absätze durch den vertikalen Abstand von
+ als Argument an die Umgebung übergeben wird.
+\begin_inset Newline newline
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Parskip
+LabelWidthString
\end_layout
\end_inset
- getrennt.
- Die Länge dieses Abstands berechnet sich mit
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
+ kann im Menü
+\family sans
+Bearbeiten
+\family default
+\SpecialChar \menuseparator
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Parskip
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
+\family sans
+Absatz-Einstellungen
+\family default
+
+\begin_inset Marginal
+status open
-* DefaultHeight
-\end_layout
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+\begin_inset Graphics
+ filename ../../images/layout-paragraph.png
+ BoundingBox 0bp 6bp 20bp 20bp
\end_inset
- wobei
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-DefaultHeight
\end_layout
\end_inset
- die Höhe einer Zeile in der normalen Schrift ist.
- Dadurch bleibt das Aussehen mit verschiedenen Schriften gleich.
+ definiert werden.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-PassThru
+Bib_Environment
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
+ ist wie
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\emph on
-0
+Environment
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
-\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+ aber fügt zusätzlich das notwendige Argument (die längste Marke) zum Begin-Befe
+hl der Bibliografie-Umgebung ein:
+\begin_inset Newline newline
\end_inset
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-1
+
+\backslash
+begin{thebibliography}{99}
\end_layout
\end_inset
-]
-\family typewriter
-
-\family default
-Legt fest, ob der Absatzinhalt unverändert ausgegeben werden soll, also
- ohne diverse von LaTeX benötigte Ersetzungen durchzuführen.
-\end_layout
+ Es ist daher nur für die Bibliografie-Umgebung nützlich.
+ Die voreingestellte längste Marke
+\begin_inset Quotes gld
+\end_inset
-\begin_layout Description
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
+99
+\begin_inset Quotes grd
+\end_inset
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Preamble
+ kann vom Nutzer in den Absatzeinstellungen eines Bibliografie-Eintrags
+ geändert werden.
\end_layout
-\end_inset
-
- Befehle und Definitionen, die in die Präambel (vor
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
+\begin_layout Standard
+Fasst man die letzten Sachen zusammen, wird die LaTeX-Ausgabe entweder so:
+\end_layout
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
\backslash
-begin{docu\SpecialChar \-
-ment}
+LatexName[LatexParam]{\SpecialChar \ldots{}
+}
\end_layout
-\end_inset
-
-) eingefügt werden, wenn dieses Layout benutzt wird.
- Kann verwendet werden um Pakete zu laden, Makros zu definieren usw..
- Muss mit
-\begin_inset Quotes gld
-\end_inset
-
-
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-EndPreamble
+\begin_layout Standard
+oder so:
\end_layout
-\end_inset
-
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
-\begin_inset Quotes grd
-\end_inset
+\backslash
+begin{LatexName}[LatexParam] \SpecialChar \ldots{}
+
+\backslash
+end{LatexName}.
+\end_layout
- beendet werden.
+\begin_layout Standard
+aussehen, abhängig vom LaTeX-Typ.
\end_layout
+\end_deeper
\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-RefPrefix
+LeftMargin
\end_layout
\end_inset
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-string
+string=""
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] Der Präfix, der verwendet werden soll, wenn auf Marken dieses Paragraphs
- verwiesen wird.
- Dies erlaubt die Verwendung von Formatierten Querverweisen.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
+] Wenn ein Layout in ein anderes Layout für Umgebungen eingefügt wird, werden
+ die Breiten der verschiedenen
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-RequiredArgs
+LeftMargin
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
+ nicht einfach addiert, sondern vorher in Abhängigkeit zur Schachtelungstiefe
+ mit dem Faktor
+\begin_inset Formula $\frac{4}{\mathrm{Tiefe}+4}$
+\end_inset
+
+ multipliziert.
+ Dieser Parameter wird auch dann benutzt, wenn
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-int=0
+Margin
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] Die Anzahl an benötigten Argumenten, die der LaTeX-Befehl oder die -Umgebung
- benötigt.
- Für Befehle sind die benötigte Argumente
-\emph on
-andere
-\emph default
- als die, die mit dem Inhalt des Absatzes zu tun haben.
- Diese müssen nicht unbedingt angegeben werden: LyX wird leere Argumente
- ausgeben, wenn nötig.
- Beachten Sie, dass die optionalen Argumente vor den benötigten ausgegeben
- werden.
- Siehe die obige Diskussion in der Beschreibung von
+ als
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-OptionalArgs
+Manual
\end_layout
\end_inset
- für weitere Informationen.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
+ oder
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Requires
+Dynamic
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
+ definiert wurde.
+ In diesem Fall wird der Wert zu den gegebenen manuellen oder dynamischen
+ Rändern hinzugefügt.
+\begin_inset Newline newline
+\end_inset
+
+Zum Beispiel bedeutet
+\begin_inset Quotes gld
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-string
+MM
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] legt fest, dass das Layout die Funktion
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-string
-\end_layout
+\begin_inset Quotes grd
+\end_inset
+, dass der Absatz mit der Breite eingerückt wird, die die Buchstaben
+\begin_inset Quotes gld
\end_inset
- benötigt.
- Siehe die Beschreibung von
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Provides
+MM
\end_layout
\end_inset
- in Abschnitt
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
+\begin_inset Quotes grd
+\end_inset
+
+ in der normalen Schriftart haben.
+ man kann negative Breite erzeugen, indem man den String mit
+\begin_inset Quotes gld
+\end_inset
-\begin_inset CommandInset ref
-LatexCommand ref
-reference "sub:Allgemeine-Parameter-für"
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+-
+\end_layout
\end_inset
-.
+
+\begin_inset Quotes grd
+\end_inset
+
+ beginnt.
+ Diese Art der Angabe wurde gewählt, damit der Text unabhängig von der verwendet
+en Bildschirmschriftart wie vorgesehen aussieht.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-RightMargin
+Margin
\end_layout
\end_inset
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-string=""
+
+\emph on
+Static
+\emph default
+, Manual, Dynamic, First_Dynamic, Right_Address_Box
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] Ähnlich wie
+]
+\begin_inset Newline newline
+\end_inset
+
+legt fest, wie der linke Rand des Textes bestimmt wird.
+
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_deeper
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LeftMargin
+Static
\end_layout
\end_inset
-.
+ wählt feste Randbreiten.
+
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Spacing
+Manual
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
+ bedeutet, dass der Rand von der Einstellung der
+\family sans
+Ausrichtung
+\family default
+ im Menü
+\family sans
+Absatz-Einstellungen
+\family default
+ (
+\family sans
+Bearbeiten
+\family default
+\SpecialChar \menuseparator
+
+\family sans
+Absatz-Einstellungen
+\family default
+
+\begin_inset Marginal
+status open
\begin_layout Plain Layout
+\begin_inset Graphics
+ filename ../../images/layout-paragraph.png
+ BoundingBox 0bp 6bp 20bp 20bp
+
+\end_inset
+
-\emph on
-single
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+) abhängt.
+ Dies wird für hübsche Listen ohne Tabulatoren benutzt.
+
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-onehalf
+Dynamic
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+ bedeutet, der linke Rand hängt von der Größe der verwendeten Markierung
+ ab.
+ Dies wird zum Beispiel bei automatisch nummerierten Überschriften verwendet.
+ Es leuchtet ein, dass die Überschrift
+\begin_inset Quotes gld
+\end_inset
+
+5.4.3.2.1 Sehr lange \SpecialChar \ldots{}
+ Überschrift
+\begin_inset Quotes grd
+\end_inset
+
+ einen größeren linken Rand benötigt, als
+\begin_inset Quotes gld
+\end_inset
+
+3.2 Sehr lange \SpecialChar \ldots{}
+ Überschrift
+\begin_inset Quotes grd
+\end_inset
+
+.
+
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-double
+First_Dynamic
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+ arbeitet ähnlich wie
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-other
-\begin_inset space ~
+Dynamic
+\end_layout
+
\end_inset
-<Wert>
+, aber nur die erste Zeile wird dynamisch gesetzt, die anderen statisch.
+ Dies wird für die LaTeX
+\begin_inset ERT
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+"=
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] Dies definiert die Voreinstellung für den Zeilenabstand des Layouts.
- Die Argumente
+Umgebung
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\emph on
-single
+description
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+ benutzt.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-onehalf
+Right_Address_Box
\end_layout
\end_inset
- und
+ bedeutet, dass der Rand so gewählt wird, dass die längste Zeile des Absatzes
+ gerade den rechten Rand berührt.
+ Dies wird zum Setzen einer Adresse am rechten Rand der Seite eingesetzt.
+\end_layout
+
+\end_deeper
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-double
+NeedProtect
\end_layout
\end_inset
- entsprechen den Multiplikatoren 1, 1.25 und 1.667.
- Wenn Sie als Argument
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-other
+
+\emph on
+0
\end_layout
\end_inset
- angeben, müssen Sie als
-\emph on
-Wert
-\emph default
- einen konkreten Multiplikator angeben.
- Im Gegensatz zu anderen Parametern erzeugt LyX, wenn
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Spacing
+1
\end_layout
\end_inset
- gesetzt wird, spezifischen LaTeX-Code, der das LaTeX-Paket
+] Gibt an, ob
+\begin_inset Quotes gld
+\end_inset
+
+zerbrechliche
+\begin_inset Quotes grd
+\end_inset
+
+ LaTeX-Befehle innerhalb dieses Layouts durch
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-setspace
+
+\backslash
+protect
\end_layout
\end_inset
- verwendet.
+ geschützt werden müssen.
+ (Achtung: Diese Einstellung sagt nichts darüber aus, ob der Befehl an sich
+ geschützt werden soll.)
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Spellcheck
+Newline
\end_layout
\end_inset
\end_inset
-] Erlaubt es, den Inhalt des Paragraphs auf Rechtschreibung zu überprüfen.
-\end_layout
+] Gibt an, ob Zeilenumbrüche in LaTeX als
+\begin_inset Quotes gld
+\end_inset
+
-\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-TextFont
+
+\backslash
+
+\backslash
+
\end_layout
\end_inset
- Der Zeichensatz, der für den Textkörper verwendet wird.
-\begin_inset Newline newline
-\end_inset
-Siehe Abschnitt
-\begin_inset space ~
+\begin_inset Quotes grd
\end_inset
+ dargestellt werden, oder nicht.
+ Man kann dies ausschalten (Wert:
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\begin_inset CommandInset ref
-LatexCommand ref
-reference "sub:Beschreibung-des-Zeichensatzes"
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+0
+\end_layout
\end_inset
-.
+), um TeX-Code in LyX komfortabler editieren zu können.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-TocLevel
+NextNoIndent
\end_layout
\end_inset
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-int=3
+
+\emph on
+0
\end_layout
\end_inset
-]
-\family typewriter
-
-\family default
-ist die Stufe des Stils im Inhaltsverzeichnis und wird zur automatischen
- Nummerierung von Abschnittsüberschriften benutzt.
-\end_layout
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
-\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-TopSep
+1
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
-\series medium
+] Gibt an, ob der nachfolgende Absatz einen linken Einzug haben darf oder
+ nicht.
-\series default
-[
-\family typewriter
-float=0
-\family default
-] Der vertikale Abstand, der die erste Serie von Absätzen vom vorangehenden
- Text trennt.
-\end_layout
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\begin_layout Subsection
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+1
+\end_layout
-\lang english
-\begin_inset CommandInset label
-LatexCommand label
-name "sub:I18n"
+\end_inset
+ heißt, der Absatz erhält auf keinen Fall einen Einzug (z.
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
-Internationalization of Paragraph Styles
+B.
+ nach einer Überschrift), wenn
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+DefaultStyle
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Standard
+\end_inset
-\lang english
-If a
+- (normalerweise
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-Style
+Standard
\end_layout
\end_inset
- defines text that is to appear in the typeset document, it may use
+-) Paragraphen einen Einzug haben.
+ (Daher beeinflusst die Einstellung nur
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-LangPreamble
+Standard
\end_layout
\end_inset
- and
+-Paragraphen.)
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-BabelPreamble
+ObsoletedBy
\end_layout
\end_inset
- to support non-English and even multi-language documents correctly.
- The following excerpt (from the
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-theorems-ams.inc
+<Name>
\end_layout
\end_inset
- file) shows how this works:
+] Der Name eines Layouts, das durch dieses ersetzt wurde.
+ So können Sie ein Layout umbenennen und die Rückwärtskompatibilität erhalten.
\end_layout
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-Preamble
-\end_layout
+\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\begin_deeper
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-
-\backslash
-theoremstyle{remark}
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+OptionalArgs
\end_layout
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-
-\backslash
-newtheorem{claim}[thm]{
-\backslash
-protect
-\backslash
-claimname}
-\end_layout
+\end_inset
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-EndPreamble
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+int=0
\end_layout
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-LangPreamble
+\end_inset
+
+] Die Zahl der optionalen Argumente, die in diesem Layout benutzt werden
+ können.
+ Dies ist zum Beispiel bei Abschnittsüberschriften hilfreich und macht nur
+ mit LaTeX Sinn.
+ Beachten Sie, dass in der Ausgabe die optionalen Argumente vor den benötigten
+ stehen werden (siehe unten).
+ Man kann also Konstrukte wie dieses hier haben:
\end_layout
+\begin_deeper
\begin_layout LyX-Code
-
-\backslash
-providecommand{
+
\backslash
-claimname}{_(Claim)}
+mycmd[optional1]{benötigt1}{Inhalt des Paragraphs}
\end_layout
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-EndLangPreamble
+\begin_layout Standard
+aber nicht:
\end_layout
\begin_layout LyX-Code
-BabelPreamble
-\end_layout
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-
-\backslash
-addto
-\backslash
-captions$$lang{
-\backslash
-renewcommand{
\backslash
-claimname}{_(Claim)}}
+mycmd[optional1]{benötigt1}[optional2]{Inhalt des Paragraphs}
\end_layout
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-EndBabelPreamble
+\begin_layout Standard
+zumindest nicht ohne TeX-Code (in den man alles schreiben kann).
\end_layout
\end_deeper
-\begin_layout Standard
-
-\lang english
-In principle, any legal LaTeX may appear in the
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-LangPreamble
+ParbreakIsNewline
\end_layout
\end_inset
- and
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-\lang english
-BabelPreamble
+\emph on
+0
\end_layout
\end_inset
- tags, but in practice they will typically look as they do here.
- The key to correct translation of the typeset text is the definition of
- the LaTeX command
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-
-\backslash
-claimname
+1
\end_layout
\end_inset
- and its use in
+] Gibt an, dass ein Paragraph nicht durch eine leere Zeile in der LaTeX-Ausgabe
+ abgesetzt wird, sondern nur durch einen Zeilenumbruch.
+ Zusammen mit
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-
-\backslash
-newtheorem
+PassThru 1
\end_layout
\end_inset
-.
-
+ erlaubt dies die Emulation eines reinen Texteditors (so wie die TeX-Code
+ Einfügung).
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Standard
-
-\lang english
-The
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-LangPreamble
+ParIndent
\end_layout
\end_inset
- tag provides for internationalization based upon the overall language of
- the document.
- The contents of the tag will be included in the preamble, just as with
- the
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-Preamble
+string=""
\end_layout
\end_inset
- tag.
- What makes it special is the use of the
-\begin_inset Quotes eld
-\end_inset
-
-function
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
-\end_inset
-
+] Der Einzug der ersten Zeile eines Absatzes.
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-_()
+Parindent
\end_layout
\end_inset
-, which will be replaced, when LyX produces LaTeX output, with the translation
- of its argument into the document language.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Standard
-
-\lang english
-The
+ bleibt für ein bestimmtes Layout fest.
+ Eine Ausnahme ist das Standard-Layout, denn dort kann der Einzug vom vorherigen
+ Layout mit
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-BabelPreamble
+NextNoIndent
\end_layout
\end_inset
- tag is more complex, since it is meant to provide support for multi-language
- documents and so offers an interface to the
+ verboten werden.
+ Außerdem benutzt das
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-babel
+Standard
\end_layout
\end_inset
- package.
- Its contents will be added to the preamble once for each language that
- appears in the document.
- In this case, the argument to
+-Layout innerhalb von Umgebungen den
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-_()
+Parindent
\end_layout
\end_inset
- will be replaced with its translation into the language in question; the
- expression
+ der Umgebung und nicht den eigenen.
+ Zum Beispiel haben
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-$$lang
+Standard
\end_layout
\end_inset
- is replaced by the language name (as used by the babel package).
+-Absätze innerhalb einer Aufzählung keinen Einzug.
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Standard
+\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\lang english
-A German document that also included a French section would thus have the
- following in the preamble:
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+ParSep
\end_layout
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-
-\backslash
-addto
-\backslash
-captionsfrench{
-\backslash
-renewcommand{
-\backslash
-claimname}{Affirmation}}
-\begin_inset Newline newline
-\end_inset
-
-
-\backslash
-addto
-\backslash
-captionsngerman{
-\backslash
-renewcommand{
-\backslash
-claimname}{Behauptung}}
-\begin_inset Newline newline
\end_inset
-
-\backslash
-providecommand{
-\backslash
-claimname}{Behauptung}
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Standard
-
-\lang english
-LaTeX and
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-babel
+float=0
\end_layout
\end_inset
- will then conspire to produce the correct text in the output.
+] Der vertikale Anstand zwischen den Absätzen dieses Layouts.
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Standard
-
-\lang english
-One important point to note here is that the translations are provided by
- LyX itself, through the same mechanism it uses for internationalization
- of the user interface.
- This means, in effect, that
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-LangPreamble
+Parskip
\end_layout
\end_inset
- and
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-BabelPreamble
+float=0
\end_layout
\end_inset
- are really only of use in layout files that are provided with LyX, since
- text entered in user-created layout files will not be seen by LyX's internation
-alization routines.
- That said, however, any layout created with the intention that it will
- be included with LyX should use these tags where appropriate.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Subsection
-Gleitobjekte
-\begin_inset CommandInset label
-LatexCommand label
-name "sub:Gleitobjekte"
-
+] Der Benutzer kann in LyX wählen ob Absätze durch
+\family sans
+Einrückung
+\family default
+ oder
+\family sans
+Vertikaler
+\begin_inset space \space{}
\end_inset
-
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Standard
-Es ist nötig Gleitobjekte (
-\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
+Abstand
+\family default
+ getrennt werden.
+ Wenn
+\family sans
+Einrückung
+\family default
+ gewählt ist, wird
+\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Abbildung
+Parskip
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
-\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
+ ignoriert.
+ Ist
+\family sans
+Vertikaler
+\begin_inset space \space{}
+\end_inset
+
+Abstand
+\family default
+ gewählt wird
+\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Tabelle
+ParIndent
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,\SpecialChar \ldots{}
-) in der Textklasse selber zu definieren.
- Standardgleitobjekte sind in der Datei
+ ignoriert und alle Absätze durch den vertikalen Abstand von
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-stdfloats.inc
+Parskip
\end_layout
\end_inset
- enthalten, so dass Sie sie nur noch
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-Input stdfloats.inc
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Standard
-zu Ihrer Layoutdatei hinzufügen müssen.
- Wenn Sie eine Textklasse implementieren wollen, die andere Gleitobjekttypen
- enthält (wie zum Beispiel die AGU-Klasse), werden Ihnen die folgenden Informati
-onen helfen:
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
+ getrennt.
+ Die Länge dieses Abstands berechnet sich mit
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Extension
+Parskip
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+* DefaultHeight
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
-\family typewriter
-\series medium
-
-\family default
-\series default
-[
+ wobei
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-string
+DefaultHeight
\end_layout
\end_inset
-=
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
-\end_inset
-
-
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
-\end_inset
-
-] Die Dateinamenserweiterung einer zusätzlichen Datei für das Abbildungsver\SpecialChar \-
-zeich
-nis (oder andere).
- LaTeX schreibt die Beschriftungen in diese Datei.
+ die Höhe einer Zeile in der normalen Schrift ist.
+ Dadurch bleibt das Aussehen mit verschiedenen Schriften gleich.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-GuiName
+PassThru
\end_layout
\end_inset
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-string
-\end_layout
-\end_inset
+\emph on
+0
+\end_layout
-=
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
-
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
-] Die Zeichenkette, die in den Menüs und für die Beschriftung benutzt wird.
- Dies wird in die aktuelle Sprache übersetzt, wenn babel verwendet wird.
-\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-HTML*
+1
\end_layout
\end_inset
- Diese Tags kontrollieren die XHTML-Ausgabe.
- Siehe Abschnitt
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-
-\begin_inset CommandInset ref
-LatexCommand ref
-reference "sec:Tags-for-XHTML"
-
-\end_inset
-
-.
+]
+\family typewriter
+
+\family default
+Legt fest, ob der Absatzinhalt unverändert ausgegeben werden soll, also
+ ohne diverse von LaTeX benötigte Ersetzungen durchzuführen.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-IsPredefined
+Preamble
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
-\emph on
-
+ Befehle und Definitionen, die in die Präambel (vor
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-0
+
+\backslash
+begin{docu\SpecialChar \-
+ment}
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
-\emph default
-,
-\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+) eingefügt werden, wenn dieses Layout benutzt wird.
+ Kann verwendet werden um Pakete zu laden, Makros zu definieren usw..
+ Muss mit
+\begin_inset Quotes gld
\end_inset
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-1
+EndPreamble
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] Gibt an, ob das Gleitobjekt bereits in der Dokumentklasse definiert ist
- oder ob das LaTeX-Paket
+
+\begin_inset Quotes grd
+\end_inset
+
+ beendet werden.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-float
+RefPrefix
\end_layout
\end_inset
- geladen werden muss, um es zu definieren.
- Die Voreinstellung ist
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-0
+string
\end_layout
\end_inset
-, was bedeutet, dass
+] Der Präfix, der verwendet werden soll, wenn auf Marken dieses Paragraphs
+ verwiesen wird.
+ Dies erlaubt die Verwendung von Formatierten Querverweisen.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-float
+RequiredArgs
\end_layout
\end_inset
- verwendet wird.
- Es sollte auf
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-1
+int=0
\end_layout
\end_inset
- gesetzt werden, wenn das Gleitobjekt bereits in der Dokumentklasse definiert
- ist.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
+] Die Anzahl an benötigten Argumenten, die der LaTeX-Befehl oder die -Umgebung
+ benötigt.
+ Für Befehle sind die benötigte Argumente
+\emph on
+andere
+\emph default
+ als die, die mit dem Inhalt des Absatzes zu tun haben.
+ Diese müssen nicht unbedingt angegeben werden: LyX wird leere Argumente
+ ausgeben, wenn nötig.
+ Beachten Sie, dass die optionalen Argumente vor den benötigten ausgegeben
+ werden.
+ Siehe die obige Diskussion in der Beschreibung von
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-ListCommand
+OptionalArgs
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
+ für weitere Informationen.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-string
+Requires
\end_layout
\end_inset
-=
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
-\end_inset
-
-
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
-\end_inset
-
-] Der Befehl der verwendet wird, um eine Liste der Gleitobjekte dieses Typs
- zu generieren; das `
-\backslash
-' muss weggelassen werden.
- Der Befehl
-\emph on
-muss
-\emph default
- angegeben werden, wenn
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-UsesFloatPkg
+string
\end_layout
\end_inset
- auf
+] legt fest, dass das Layout die Funktion
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-0
+string
\end_layout
\end_inset
- gesetzt ist, da es sonst keine Möglichkeit gibt, diesen Befehl zu erstellen.
- Er wird ignoriert, falls
+ benötigt.
+ Siehe die Beschreibung von
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-UsesFloatPkg
+Provides
\end_layout
\end_inset
- auf
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-1
-\end_layout
+ in
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:Allgemeine-Parameter-für"
\end_inset
- gesetzt ist, da es dann eine Möglichkeit gibt.
+.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-ListName
+RightMargin
\end_layout
\end_inset
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-string
+string=""
\end_layout
\end_inset
-=
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
-\end_inset
-
-
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
-\end_inset
-
-] Die Überschrift für das Gleitobjekt-Verzeichnis (z.
-\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
-\end_inset
+] Ähnlich wie
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-B.
-
-\begin_inset Quotes gld
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+LeftMargin
+\end_layout
-Abbildungsverzeichnis
-\begin_inset Quotes grd
\end_inset
-).
- Sie wird für die Bildschirmmarke in LyX verwendet, von LaTeX für den Titel
- verwendet und als Titel in der XHTML-Ausgabe.
- Sie wird in die Dokumentsprache übersetzt.
+.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-NumberWithin
+Spacing
\end_layout
\end_inset
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-string
-\end_layout
-
-\end_inset
-
-=
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
-\end_inset
+\emph on
+single
+\end_layout
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
-] Dieses optionale Argument bestimmt, ob Gleitobjekte dieser Klasse mit
- der Abschnittsnummer dieses Dokuments nummeriert werden.
- Wenn zum Beispiel
+,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-NumberWithin
+onehalf
\end_layout
\end_inset
- auf
-\begin_inset Quotes gld
-\end_inset
-
-
+,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-chapter
+double
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
-\begin_inset Quotes grd
-\end_inset
-
- gesetzt ist, werden die Gleitobjekte mit den Kapitelnummern nummeriert.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
+,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Placement
+other
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+<Wert>
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
+] Dies definiert die Voreinstellung für den Zeilenabstand des Layouts.
+ Die Argumente
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-string
-\end_layout
-
-\end_inset
-
-=
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
-\end_inset
+\emph on
+single
+\end_layout
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
-] Die Standardplatzierung für die Gleitobjektklasse.
-
-\family typewriter
-
-\family default
-
+,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-string
+onehalf
\end_layout
\end_inset
- sollte die Standard-LaTeX-Werte
+ und
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-t
+double
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+ entsprechen den Multiplikatoren 1, 1.25 und 1.667.
+ Wenn Sie als Argument
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-b
+other
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+ angeben, müssen Sie als
+\emph on
+Wert
+\emph default
+ einen konkreten Multiplikator angeben.
+ Im Gegensatz zu anderen Parametern erzeugt LyX, wenn
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-p
+Spacing
\end_layout
\end_inset
- und
+ gesetzt wird, spezifischen LaTeX-Code, der das LaTeX-Paket
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-h
+setspace
\end_layout
\end_inset
- für oben, unten, Seite und hier enthalten.
-\begin_inset Foot
+ verwendet.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Wie in LaTeX ist die Reihenfolge der Buchstaben unerheblich.
+Spellcheck
\end_layout
\end_inset
- Zusätzlich gibt es den neuen Typ
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-H
+0
\end_layout
\end_inset
-, der nicht wirklich für ein Gleitobjekt steht, denn er bedeutet: drucke
- es
-\emph on
-hier
-\emph default
- und nirgendwo sonst.
- Beachten Sie, dass
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-H
-\end_layout
-\end_inset
+\emph on
+1
+\end_layout
- besonders ist und wegen der Implementierungsdetails nicht bei nicht-eingebauten
- Gleitobjekttypen benutzt werden kann.
- Wenn Sie die Platzierung nicht verstehen, benutzen Sie einfach
-\begin_inset Quotes gld
\end_inset
+] Erlaubt es, den Inhalt des Paragraphs auf Rechtschreibung zu überprüfen.
+\end_layout
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-tbp
+TextFont
\end_layout
\end_inset
+ Der Zeichensatz, der für den Textkörper verwendet wird.
+\begin_inset Newline newline
+\end_inset
+
+Siehe
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:Beschreibung-des-Zeichensatzes"
-\begin_inset Quotes grd
\end_inset
.
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-RefPrefix
+TocLevel
\end_layout
\end_inset
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-string
+int=3
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] Der Präfix, der verwendet werden soll, wenn auf Marken dieser Gleitobjekte
- verwiesen wird.
- Dies erlaubt die Verwendung von Formatierten Querverweisen.
- Man kann den
+]
+\family typewriter
+
+\family default
+ist die Stufe des Stils im Inhaltsverzeichnis und wird zur automatischen
+ Nummerierung von Abschnittsüberschriften benutzt.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-RefPrefix
+TopSep
\end_layout
\end_inset
- eines kopierten Stils entfernen, indem
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-string
+\series medium
+
+\series default
+[
+\family typewriter
+float=0
+\family default
+] Der vertikale Abstand, der die erste Serie von Absätzen vom vorangehenden
+ Text trennt.
\end_layout
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout Subsection
+\begin_inset CommandInset label
+LatexCommand label
+name "sub:I18n"
- auf
-\begin_inset Quotes gld
\end_inset
-OFF
-\begin_inset Quotes grd
-\end_inset
- gesetzt wird.
+\lang english
+Internationalization of Paragraph Styles
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
+\begin_layout Standard
+
+\lang english
+If a
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
Style
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
+ defines text that is to appear in the typeset document, it may use
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-string
+
+\lang english
+LangPreamble
\end_layout
\end_inset
-=
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
-\end_inset
+ and
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
+BabelPreamble
+\end_layout
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
-] ist der Gleitobjektstil, wenn er mit
+ to support non-English and even multi-language documents correctly.
+ The following excerpt (from the
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-\backslash
-newfloat
+\lang english
+theorems-ams.inc
\end_layout
\end_inset
- definiert wird.
+ file) shows how this works:
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Type
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+Preamble
\end_layout
-\end_inset
+\begin_deeper
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+
+\backslash
+theoremstyle{remark}
+\end_layout
- [
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+
+\backslash
+newtheorem{claim}[thm]{
+\backslash
+protect
+\backslash
+claimname}
+\end_layout
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-string
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+EndPreamble
\end_layout
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+LangPreamble
+\end_layout
-=
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+
+\backslash
+providecommand{
+\backslash
+claimname}{_(Claim)}
+\end_layout
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+EndLangPreamble
+\end_layout
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+BabelPreamble
+\end_layout
-] ist der
-\begin_inset Quotes gld
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+
+\backslash
+addto
+\backslash
+captions$$lang{
+\backslash
+renewcommand{
+\backslash
+claimname}{_(Claim)}}
+\end_layout
-Typ
-\begin_inset Quotes grd
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+EndBabelPreamble
+\end_layout
- der neuen Gleitobjektklasse, wie z.
-\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
-\end_inset
+\end_deeper
+\begin_layout Standard
-B.
- Programm oder Algorithmus.
- Nach dem entsprechenden
+\lang english
+In principle, any legal LaTeX may appear in the
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-\backslash
-newfloat
+\lang english
+LangPreamble
\end_layout
\end_inset
- stehen Befehle wie
+ and
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-\backslash
-begin{program}
+\lang english
+BabelPreamble
\end_layout
\end_inset
- oder
+ tags, but in practice they will typically look as they do here.
+ The key to correct translation of the typeset text is the definition of
+ the LaTeX command
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
+\lang english
+
\backslash
-end{algorithm*}
+claimname
\end_layout
\end_inset
- zur Verfügung.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
+ and its use in
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-UsesFloatPkg
-\end_layout
-\end_inset
-
- [
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
+\lang english
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-0
+\backslash
+newtheorem
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
-\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
-\end_inset
+.
+
+\end_layout
+\begin_layout Standard
+\lang english
+The
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-\emph on
-1
+\lang english
+LangPreamble
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] Gibt an, ob dieses Gleitobjekt mit Hilfe des LaTeX-Pakets
+ tag provides for internationalization based upon the overall language of
+ the document.
+ The contents of the tag will be included in the preamble, just as with
+ the
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-float
+
+\lang english
+Preamble
\end_layout
\end_inset
- definiert wurde, entweder durch die Dokumentklassen, ein anderes Paket
- oder durch LyX.
-\end_layout
+ tag.
+ What makes it special is the use of the
+\begin_inset Quotes eld
+\end_inset
+
+function
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
-\begin_layout Description
-Anmerkung: Wenn ein Gleitobjekt vom Typ
-\emph on
-type
-\emph default
- definiert wurde, gibt es automatisch einen dazugehörigen Zähler namens
-\emph on
-type
-\emph default
-.
-\end_layout
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\begin_layout Subsection
-Flexible Einfügungen und InsetLayout
-\begin_inset CommandInset label
-LatexCommand label
-name "sub:Flexible-Einfügungen-und"
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
-\end_inset
+\lang english
+_()
+\end_layout
+\end_inset
+, which will be replaced, when LyX produces LaTeX output, with the translation
+ of its argument into the document language.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Standard
-Es gibt drei Arten von flexiblen Einfügungen:
-\end_layout
-\begin_layout Itemize
-Zeichenstil (
+\lang english
+The
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-CharStyle
+
+\lang english
+BabelPreamble
\end_layout
\end_inset
-): diese definieren semantische Textauszeichnungen, die mit LaTeX-Befehlen
- wie
+ tag is more complex, since it is meant to provide support for multi-language
+ documents and so offers an interface to the
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-\backslash
-noun
+\lang english
+babel
\end_layout
\end_inset
- oder
+ package.
+ Its contents will be added to the preamble once for each language that
+ appears in the document.
+ In this case, the argument to
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-\backslash
-code
+\lang english
+_()
\end_layout
\end_inset
- korrespondieren.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Itemize
-benutzerdefiniert (
+ will be replaced with its translation into the language in question; the
+ expression
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Custom
+
+\lang english
+$$lang
\end_layout
\end_inset
-): diese können benutzt werden, um benutzer\SpecialChar \-
-de\SpecialChar \-
-fi\SpecialChar \-
-nier\SpecialChar \-
-te einklappbare Einfügungen
- zu definieren, ähnlich wie TeX-Code, Fuß\SpecialChar \-
-no\SpecialChar \-
-te usw.
- Ein naheliegendes Beispiel ist die Endnotiz, die im
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-endnote
+ is replaced by the language name (as used by the babel package).
\end_layout
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout Standard
--Modul definiert ist.
+\lang english
+A German document that also included a French section would thus have the
+ following in the preamble:
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Itemize
-XML-Element (
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Element
-\end_layout
+\backslash
+addto
+\backslash
+captionsfrench{
+\backslash
+renewcommand{
+\backslash
+claimname}{Affirmation}}
+\begin_inset Newline newline
+\end_inset
+
+\backslash
+addto
+\backslash
+captionsngerman{
+\backslash
+renewcommand{
+\backslash
+claimname}{Behauptung}}
+\begin_inset Newline newline
\end_inset
-): diese werden mit DocBook-Klassen benutzt.
+
+\backslash
+providecommand{
+\backslash
+claimname}{Behauptung}
\end_layout
\begin_layout Standard
-Flexible Einfügungen werden mit der
+
+\lang english
+LaTeX and
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-InsetLayout
+
+\lang english
+babel
\end_layout
\end_inset
--Marke definiert, die weiter unten erklärt wird.
+ will then conspire to produce the correct text in the output.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Standard
-Die
+
+\lang english
+One important point to note here is that the translations are provided by
+ LyX itself, through the same mechanism it uses for internationalization
+ of the user interface.
+ This means, in effect, that
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-InsetLayout
+
+\lang english
+LangPreamble
\end_layout
\end_inset
--Marke besitzt noch eine andere Funktion: sie kann benutzt werden, um das
- allgemeine Aussehen vieler verschiedener Einfügungstypen anzupassen.
- Zurzeit kann
+ and
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-InsetLayout
+
+\lang english
+BabelPreamble
\end_layout
\end_inset
- benutzt werden, um die Layout-Parameter für Fußnoten, Randnoten, eingefügten
- Noten, TeX-Code (ERT), Zweige, Stichwortverzeichnisse, Boxen, Tabellen,
- Algorithmen, URLs und optionaler Argumente anzupassen, ebenso um flexible
- Einfügungen zu definieren.
+ are really only of use in layout files that are provided with LyX, since
+ text entered in user-created layout files will not be seen by LyX's internation
+alization routines.
+ That said, however, any layout created with the intention that it will
+ be included with LyX should use these tags where appropriate.
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Standard
-Die
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-InsetLayout
-\end_layout
+\begin_layout Subsection
+Gleitobjekte
+\begin_inset CommandInset label
+LatexCommand label
+name "sub:Gleitobjekte"
\end_inset
--Definition muss mit folgender Zeile beginnen:
-\end_layout
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-InsetLayout <Typ>
\end_layout
\begin_layout Standard
-Hier bezeichnet
-\begin_inset Flex Code
+Es ist nötig Gleitobjekte (
+\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-<Typ>
+Abbildung
\end_layout
\end_inset
- die Einfügung, deren Layout definiert wird.
- Es gibt zwei Möglichkeiten.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Enumerate
-Das Layout für eine existierende Einfügung wird geändert.
- In diesem Fall kann
-\begin_inset Flex Code
+,
+\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-<Typ>
+Tabelle
\end_layout
\end_inset
- folgendes sein:
+,\SpecialChar \ldots{}
+) in der Textklasse selber zu definieren.
+ Standardgleitobjekte sind in der Datei
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Algorithm
+stdfloats.inc
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
+ enthalten, so dass Sie sie nur noch
+\end_layout
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Branch
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+Input stdfloats.inc
\end_layout
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout Standard
+zu Ihrer Layoutdatei hinzufügen müssen.
+ Wenn Sie eine Textklasse implementieren wollen, die andere Gleitobjekttypen
+ enthält (wie zum Beispiel die AGU-Klasse), werden Ihnen die folgenden Informati
+onen helfen:
+\end_layout
-,
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Box
+Extension
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+
+\family typewriter
+\series medium
+
+\family default
+\series default
+[
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Box:shaded
+string
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
+=
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-ERT
-\end_layout
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
-,
+] Die Dateinamenserweiterung einer zusätzlichen Datei für das Abbildungsver\SpecialChar \-
+zeich
+nis (oder andere).
+ LaTeX schreibt die Beschriftungen in diese Datei.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Figure
+GuiName
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Foot
+string
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
+=
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Index
-\end_layout
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
-,
+] Die Zeichenkette, die in den Menüs und für die Beschriftung benutzt wird.
+ Dies wird in die aktuelle Sprache übersetzt, wenn babel verwendet wird.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Info
+HTML*
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+ Diese Tags kontrollieren die XHTML-Ausgabe.
+ Siehe
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sec:Tags-for-XHTML"
+
+\end_inset
+
+.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Info:menu
+IsPredefined
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+ [
+\emph on
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Info:shortcut
+0
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+
+\emph default
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Info:shortcuts
+1
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+] Gibt an, ob das Gleitobjekt bereits in der Dokumentklasse definiert ist
+ oder ob das LaTeX-Paket
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Listings
+float
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+ geladen werden muss, um es zu definieren.
+ Die Voreinstellung ist
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Marginal
+0
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+, was bedeutet, dass
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Note:Comment
+float
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+ verwendet wird.
+ Es sollte auf
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Note:Note
+1
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+ gesetzt werden, wenn das Gleitobjekt bereits in der Dokumentklasse definiert
+ ist.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Note:Greyedout
+ListCommand
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-OptArg
+string
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+=
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
+] Der Befehl der verwendet wird, um eine Liste der Gleitobjekte dieses Typs
+ zu generieren; das `
+\backslash
+' muss weggelassen werden.
+ Der Befehl
+\emph on
+muss
+\emph default
+ angegeben werden, wenn
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Table
+UsesFloatPkg
\end_layout
\end_inset
-, oder
+ auf
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-URL
+0
\end_layout
\end_inset
-.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Enumerate
-Das Layout für eine flexible Einfügung wird definiert.
- In diesem Fall muss
+ gesetzt ist, da es sonst keine Möglichkeit gibt, diesen Befehl zu erstellen.
+ Er wird ignoriert, falls
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-<Typ>
+UsesFloatPkg
\end_layout
\end_inset
- in der Form
-\lang english
-
-\begin_inset Quotes gld
-\end_inset
-
-
+ auf
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Flex:<Name>
+1
\end_layout
\end_inset
+ gesetzt ist, da es dann eine Möglichkeit gibt.
+\end_layout
-\begin_inset Quotes grd
-\end_inset
-
-
-\lang ngerman
- sein, wobei
-\lang english
-
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Name
+ListName
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
-\lang ngerman
- ein beliebiger gültiger Bezeichner sein kann, der in keiner anderen existierend
-en Einfügung benutzt wird.
- Der Bezeichner darf Leerzeichen enthalten, dann muss aber der komplette
- Typ in Anführungszeichen gesetzt werden.
- Beachten Sie, dass die Definition einer flexiblen Einfügung
-\emph on
-auch
-\emph default
- einen
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LyXType
+string
\end_layout
\end_inset
--Eintrag enthalten muss, der festlegt welcher Einfügungstyp definiert wird.
-\end_layout
+=
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
-\begin_layout Standard
-Die
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-InsetLayout
-\end_layout
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+] Die Überschrift für das Gleitobjekt-Verzeichnis (z.
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
--Definition kann folgende Einträge enthalten:
+B.
+
+\begin_inset Quotes gld
+\end_inset
+
+Abbildungsverzeichnis
+\begin_inset Quotes grd
+\end_inset
+
+).
+ Sie wird für die Bildschirmmarke in LyX verwendet, von LaTeX für den Titel
+ verwendet und als Titel in der XHTML-Ausgabe.
+ Sie wird in die Dokumentsprache übersetzt.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-BgColor
+NumberWithin
\end_layout
\end_inset
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-<Name>
+string
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] ist die Hintergrundfarbe der Einfügung.
- Siehe Kapitel
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-
-\begin_inset CommandInset ref
-LatexCommand ref
-reference "chap:Namen-von-Farben"
-
+=
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
- für eine Liste von verfügbaren Farbnamen.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-ContentAsLabel
-\end_layout
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
- [
+] Dieses optionale Argument bestimmt, ob Gleitobjekte dieser Klasse mit
+ der Abschnittsnummer dieses Dokuments nummeriert werden.
+ Wenn zum Beispiel
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\emph on
-0
+NumberWithin
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
-\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+ auf
+\begin_inset Quotes gld
\end_inset
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-1
+chapter
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] Ob der Inhalt der Einfügung als Marke verwendet werden soll, wenn die
- Einfügung geschlossen ist.
+
+\begin_inset Quotes grd
+\end_inset
+
+ gesetzt ist, werden die Gleitobjekte mit den Kapitelnummern nummeriert.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-CopyStyle
+Placement
\end_layout
\end_inset
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-<Typ>
+string
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] Wie bei Absatz-Layouts, siehe Abschnitt
-\begin_inset space ~
+=
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
-\begin_inset CommandInset ref
-LatexCommand ref
-reference "sub:Einzelne-Absatz-Layouts"
-
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
-.
- Beachten Sie, dass der komplette Typ angegeben werden muss, z.
-\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
-\end_inset
+] Die Standardplatzierung für die Gleitobjektklasse.
-B.
+\family typewriter
+\family default
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-CopyStyle Flex:<Name>
+string
\end_layout
\end_inset
-.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
+ sollte die Standard-LaTeX-Werte
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-CustomPars
+t
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
+,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\emph on
-0
+b
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
-\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
-\end_inset
-
-
+,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-1
+p
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] zeigt an, ob der Benutzer den Absatzeinstellungen-Dialog (
-\begin_inset Graphics
- filename ../../images/layout-paragraph.png
- scale 70
- scaleBeforeRotation
- BoundingBox 0bp 6bp 20bp 20bp
- groupId Icon
-
-\end_inset
-
-) benutzen darf.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
+ und
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Decoration
+h
\end_layout
\end_inset
- kann
-\begin_inset Flex Code
+ für oben, unten, Seite und hier enthalten.
+\begin_inset Foot
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Classic
+Wie in LaTeX ist die Reihenfolge der Buchstaben unerheblich.
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+ Zusätzlich gibt es den neuen Typ
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Minimalistic
+H
\end_layout
\end_inset
-, oder
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Conglomerate
-\end_layout
-
-\end_inset
-
- sein.
- Es beschreibt den Rendering-Stil für den Einfügungsrahmen und die -knöpfe.
- Fußnoten benutzen im allgemeinen
+, der nicht wirklich für ein Gleitobjekt steht, denn er bedeutet: drucke
+ es
+\emph on
+hier
+\emph default
+ und nirgendwo sonst.
+ Beachten Sie, dass
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Classic
+H
\end_layout
\end_inset
-, TeX-Code
-\family typewriter
-
-\family default
+ besonders ist und wegen der Implementierungsdetails nicht bei nicht-eingebauten
+ Gleitobjekttypen benutzt werden kann.
+ Wenn Sie die Platzierung nicht verstehen, benutzen Sie einfach
+\begin_inset Quotes gld
+\end_inset
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Minimalistic
+tbp
\end_layout
\end_inset
- und Zeichenstile
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Conglomerate
-\end_layout
+\begin_inset Quotes grd
\end_inset
.
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Display
+RefPrefix
\end_layout
\end_inset
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-0
+string
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
-\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
-\end_inset
-
-
+] Der Präfix, der verwendet werden soll, wenn auf Marken dieser Gleitobjekte
+ verwiesen wird.
+ Dies erlaubt die Verwendung von Formatierten Querverweisen.
+ Man kann den
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\emph on
-1
+RefPrefix
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] Nur sinnvoll wenn der
+ eines kopierten Stils entfernen, indem
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LatexType
+string
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
+ auf
+\begin_inset Quotes gld
+\end_inset
+
+OFF
+\begin_inset Quotes grd
+\end_inset
+
+ gesetzt wird.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Environment
+Style
\end_layout
\end_inset
- ist.
- Gibt an, ob die Umgebung in der Ausgabe abgesetzt erscheint oder in einer
- Zeile mit dem umgebenden Text.
- Wenn auf
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-0
+string
\end_layout
\end_inset
- gesetzt, wird angenommen, dass die LaTeX-Umgebung Leerraum nach den
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
+=
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
-\backslash
-begin{
-\emph on
-LatexName
-\emph default
-}
-\end_layout
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
- und
+] ist der Gleitobjektstil, wenn er mit
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\backslash
-end{
-\emph on
-LatexName
-\emph default
-}
+newfloat
\end_layout
\end_inset
- Befehlen ignoriert (inklusive des Zeilenumbruchzeichens).
+ definiert wird.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-End
+Type
\end_layout
\end_inset
- beendet die
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-InsetLayout
+string
\end_layout
\end_inset
--Definition.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Font
-\end_layout
-
+=
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
- wird für den Text
-\emph on
-und
-\emph default
- die Marke benutzt (siehe
-\begin_inset CommandInset ref
-LatexCommand ref
-reference "sub:Beschreibung-des-Zeichensatzes"
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
-).
- Beachten Sie, dass die Definition dieses Fonts automatisch dem
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LabelFont
-\end_layout
-
+] ist der
+\begin_inset Quotes gld
\end_inset
- denselben Wert zuweist, das heißt
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Font
-\end_layout
+Typ
+\begin_inset Quotes grd
+\end_inset
+ der neuen Gleitobjektklasse, wie z.
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
- muss zuerst definiert werden und
+B.
+ Programm oder Algorithmus.
+ Nach dem entsprechenden
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LabelFont
+
+\backslash
+newfloat
\end_layout
\end_inset
- danach, wenn sie unterschiedlich sein sollen.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
+ stehen Befehle wie
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-ForceLTR
-\end_layout
-
-\end_inset
- erzwingt die
-\begin_inset Quotes gld
-\end_inset
+\backslash
+begin{program}
+\end_layout
-LaTeX-Sprache
-\begin_inset Quotes grd
\end_inset
- und führt zu einer links-nach-rechts-Ausgabe, zum Beispiel bei TeX-Code
- oder URL.
-
+ oder
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-ForceLTR
+
+\backslash
+end{algorithm*}
\end_layout
\end_inset
- ist eine Behelfslösung.
+ zur Verfügung.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-ForcePlain
+UsesFloatPkg
\end_layout
\end_inset
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\emph on
0
\end_layout
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\emph on
1
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] zeigt an, ob stattdessen
+] Gibt an, ob dieses Gleitobjekt mit Hilfe des LaTeX-Pakets
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-PlainLayout
+float
\end_layout
\end_inset
- benutzt werden soll oder ob der Benutzer den Absatzstil der Einfügung ändern
- darf.
+ definiert wurde, entweder durch die Dokumentklassen, ein anderes Paket
+ oder durch LyX.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
+Anmerkung: Wenn ein Gleitobjekt vom Typ
+\emph on
+type
+\emph default
+ definiert wurde, gibt es automatisch einen dazugehörigen Zähler namens
+
+\emph on
+type
+\emph default
+.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Subsection
+Flexible Einfügungen und InsetLayout
+\begin_inset CommandInset label
+LatexCommand label
+name "sub:Flexible-Einfügungen-und"
+
+\end_inset
+
+
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Standard
+Es gibt drei Arten von flexiblen Einfügungen:
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Itemize
+Zeichenstil (
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-FreeSpacing
+CharStyle
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
+): diese definieren semantische Textauszeichnungen, die mit LaTeX-Befehlen
+ wie
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-\emph on
-0
+\backslash
+noun
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
-\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
-\end_inset
-
-
+ oder
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-1
+
+\backslash
+code
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] Wie bei Absatz-Layouts, siehe Abschnitt
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
+ korrespondieren.
+\end_layout
-
-\begin_inset CommandInset ref
-LatexCommand ref
-reference "sub:Einzelne-Absatz-Layouts"
-
-\end_inset
-
-.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
+\begin_layout Itemize
+benutzerdefiniert (
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-HTML*
+Custom
\end_layout
\end_inset
- Diese Tags kontrollieren die XHTML-Ausgabe.
- Siehe Abschnitt
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-
-\begin_inset CommandInset ref
-LatexCommand ref
-reference "sec:Tags-for-XHTML"
-
-\end_inset
-
-.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
+): diese können benutzt werden, um benutzer\SpecialChar \-
+de\SpecialChar \-
+fi\SpecialChar \-
+nier\SpecialChar \-
+te einklappbare Einfügungen
+ zu definieren, ähnlich wie TeX-Code, Fuß\SpecialChar \-
+no\SpecialChar \-
+te usw.
+ Ein naheliegendes Beispiel ist die Endnotiz, die im
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-InToc
+endnote
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\emph on
-0
+-Modul definiert ist.
\end_layout
-\end_inset
-
-,
-\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
-\end_inset
-
-
+\begin_layout Itemize
+XML-Element (
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-1
+Element
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] Ob der Inhalt der Einfügung für die Zeichenketten des 'Gliederungs'-Fensters
- verwendet werden soll.
- Zum Beispiel will man nicht, dass der Inhalt einer Fußzeile im Namen des
- Abschnitts im Inhaltsverzeichnis des Gliederungs-Fensters erscheint.
- Aber man will normalerweise, dass der Inhalt von Zeichenstilen erscheint.
+): diese werden mit DocBook-Klassen benutzt.
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
+\begin_layout Standard
+Flexible Einfügungen werden mit der
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-KeepEmpty
+InsetLayout
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
-\emph on
+-Marke definiert, die weiter unten erklärt wird.
+\end_layout
+\begin_layout Standard
+Die
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-0
+InsetLayout
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
-\emph default
-,
-\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
-\end_inset
-
-
+-Marke besitzt noch eine andere Funktion: sie kann benutzt werden, um das
+ allgemeine Aussehen vieler verschiedener Einfügungstypen anzupassen.
+ Zurzeit kann
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-1
+InsetLayout
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] Wie bei Absatz-Layouts, siehe Abschnitt
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-
-\begin_inset CommandInset ref
-LatexCommand ref
-reference "sub:Einzelne-Absatz-Layouts"
-
-\end_inset
-
-.
+ benutzt werden, um die Layout-Parameter für Fußnoten, Randnoten, eingefügten
+ Noten, TeX-Code (ERT), Zweige, Stichwortverzeichnisse, Boxen, Tabellen,
+ Algorithmen, URLs und optionaler Argumente anzupassen, ebenso um flexible
+ Einfügungen zu definieren.
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
+\begin_layout Standard
+Die
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LabelFont
+InsetLayout
\end_layout
\end_inset
- ist die für die Marke benutze Schrift (siehe
-\begin_inset CommandInset ref
-LatexCommand ref
-reference "sub:Beschreibung-des-Zeichensatzes"
+-Definition muss mit folgender Zeile beginnen:
+\end_layout
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+InsetLayout <Typ>
+\end_layout
-).
- Beachten Sie, dass diese Definition niemals vor
+\begin_layout Standard
+Hier bezeichnet
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Font
+<Typ>
\end_layout
\end_inset
- erscheinen darf, weil sie sonst unwirksam ist.
+ die Einfügung, deren Layout definiert wird.
+ Es gibt zwei Möglichkeiten.
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
+\begin_layout Enumerate
+Das Layout für eine existierende Einfügung wird geändert.
+ In diesem Fall kann
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LabelString
+<Typ>
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
+ folgendes sein:
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-string
+Algorithm
\end_layout
\end_inset
-=
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
-\end_inset
-
-
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
-\end_inset
-
-] wird auf dem Knopf und anderswo als Einfügungsmarke angezeigt.
- Einige Einfügungstypen (TeX-Code und Zweig) ändern diese Marke im Vo\SpecialChar \-
-rü\SpecialChar \-
-ber\SpecialChar \-
-gehen.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
+,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LatexName
+Branch
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
+,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-<Name>
+Box
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] ist der Name der LaTeX-Umgebung oder des LaTeX-Befehls.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
+,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LatexParam
+Box:shaded
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
+,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-<Parameter>
+ERT
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] ist ein optionaler Parameter für den zugehörigen
+,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LatexName
+Figure
\end_layout
\end_inset
-, einschließ\SpecialChar \-
-lich möglicher Klammerpaare wie
+,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-[]
+Foot
\end_layout
\end_inset
-.
- Dieser Parameter kann in LyX nicht geändert werden.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
+,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LatexType
+Index
\end_layout
\end_inset
- Wie bei Absatz-Layouts, siehe Abschnitt
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-
-\begin_inset CommandInset ref
-LatexCommand ref
-reference "sub:Einzelne-Absatz-Layouts"
-
-\end_inset
-
-.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
+,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LyxType
+Info
\end_layout
\end_inset
- kann
+,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-charstyle
+Info:menu
\end_layout
\end_inset
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-custom
+Info:shortcut
\end_layout
\end_inset
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-element
+Info:shortcuts
\end_layout
\end_inset
- oder
+,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-end
+Listings
\end_layout
\end_inset
- (zeigt das Ende einer Definition an) sein.
- Dieser Eintrag wird für flexible Einfügungen benötigt und ist nur dort
- sinnvoll.
- Neben anderen Dingen legt er fest, in welchem Menü diese Einfügung erscheinen
- wird.
- Wird
+,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LyXType
+Marginal
\end_layout
\end_inset
- auf
+,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-charstyle
+Note:Comment
\end_layout
\end_inset
- gesetzt, wird
+,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-MultiPar
+Note:Note
\end_layout
\end_inset
- automatisch auf
+,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-0
+Note:Greyedout
\end_layout
\end_inset
- gesetzt.
-
+,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-MultiPar
+OptArg
\end_layout
\end_inset
- kann auf
+,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-1
+Table
\end_layout
\end_inset
- für
+, oder
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-charstyle
+URL
\end_layout
\end_inset
--Einfügungen gesetzt werden, indem es
-\emph on
-nach
-\emph default
- dem
+.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Enumerate
+Das Layout für eine flexible Einfügung wird definiert.
+ In diesem Fall muss
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LyXType
+<Typ>
\end_layout
\end_inset
- spezifiziert wird.
-\end_layout
+ in der Form
+\lang english
+
+\begin_inset Quotes gld
+\end_inset
+
-\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-MultiPar
+Flex:<Name>
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
+
+\begin_inset Quotes grd
+\end_inset
+
+
+\lang ngerman
+ sein, wobei
+\lang english
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\emph on
-0
+Name
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
-\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
-\end_inset
-
+\lang ngerman
+ ein beliebiger gültiger Bezeichner sein kann, der in keiner anderen existierend
+en Einfügung benutzt wird.
+ Der Bezeichner darf Leerzeichen enthalten, dann muss aber der komplette
+ Typ in Anführungszeichen gesetzt werden.
+ Beachten Sie, dass die Definition einer flexiblen Einfügung
+\emph on
+auch
+\emph default
+ einen
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-1
+LyXType
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] zeigt an, ob in dieser Einfügung mehrfache Absätze erlaubt sind.
- Dadurch wird
+-Eintrag enthalten muss, der festlegt welcher Einfügungstyp definiert wird.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Standard
+Die
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-CustomPars
+InsetLayout
\end_layout
\end_inset
- auf denselben Wert gesetzt und
+-Definition kann folgende Einträge enthalten:
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-ForcePlain
+BgColor
\end_layout
\end_inset
- auf den anderen.
- Diese können auf andere Werte gesetzt werden, wenn sie
-\emph on
-nach
-\emph default
-
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-MultiPar
+<Name>
\end_layout
\end_inset
- benutzt werden.
+] ist die Hintergrundfarbe der Einfügung.
+ Siehe
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "chap:Namen-von-Farben"
+
+\end_inset
+
+ für eine Liste von verfügbaren Farbnamen.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-NeedProtect
+ContentAsLabel
\end_layout
\end_inset
\end_inset
-] zeigt an, ob
-\emph on
-zerbrechliche
-\emph default
- Befehle in diesem Layout ge\SpecialChar \-
-schützt (
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\backslash
-protect
-\end_layout
-
-\end_inset
-
-) werden sollen.
- Es zeigt
-\emph on
-nicht
-\emph default
- an, ob der Befehl selber geschützt werden soll.
+] Ob der Inhalt der Einfügung als Marke verwendet werden soll, wenn die
+ Einfügung geschlossen ist.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-ParbreakIsNewline
+CopyStyle
\end_layout
\end_inset
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\emph on
-0
+<Typ>
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
-\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+] Wie bei Absatz-Layouts, siehe
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:Einzelne-Absatz-Layouts"
+
\end_inset
+.
+ Beachten Sie, dass der komplette Typ angegeben werden muss, z.
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+B.
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-1
+CopyStyle Flex:<Name>
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] Wie bei Absatz-Layouts, siehe Abschnitt
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-
-\begin_inset CommandInset ref
-LatexCommand ref
-reference "sub:Einzelne-Absatz-Layouts"
-
-\end_inset
-
.
\end_layout
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-PassThru
+CustomPars
\end_layout
\end_inset
\end_inset
-] Wie bei Absatz-Layouts, siehe Abschnitt
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-
-\begin_inset CommandInset ref
-LatexCommand ref
-reference "sub:Einzelne-Absatz-Layouts"
+] zeigt an, ob der Benutzer den Absatzeinstellungen-Dialog (
+\begin_inset Graphics
+ filename ../../images/layout-paragraph.png
+ scale 70
+ scaleBeforeRotation
+ BoundingBox 0bp 6bp 20bp 20bp
+ groupId Icon
\end_inset
-.
+) benutzen darf.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Preamble
+Decoration
\end_layout
\end_inset
- Wie bei Absatz-Layouts, siehe Abschnitt
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
+ kann
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\begin_inset CommandInset ref
-LatexCommand ref
-reference "sub:Einzelne-Absatz-Layouts"
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Classic
+\end_layout
\end_inset
-.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
+,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-RefPrefix
+Minimalistic
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
+, oder
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-string
+Conglomerate
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] Der Präfix, der verwendet werden soll, wenn auf Marken dieser Einfügung
- verwiesen wird.
- Dies erlaubt die Verwendung von Formatierten Querverweisen.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
+ sein.
+ Es beschreibt den Rendering-Stil für den Einfügungsrahmen und die -knöpfe.
+ Fußnoten benutzen im allgemeinen
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Requires
+Classic
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
+, TeX-Code
+\family typewriter
+
+\family default
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-string
+Minimalistic
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] Wie bei Absatz-Layouts, siehe Abschnitt
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
+ und Zeichenstile
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\begin_inset CommandInset ref
-LatexCommand ref
-reference "sub:Einzelne-Absatz-Layouts"
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Conglomerate
+\end_layout
\end_inset
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-ResetsFont
+Display
\end_layout
\end_inset
\end_inset
-] Ob die Einfügung die Schrift der benachbarten Umgebungen verwenden soll
- oder seine eigene.
- Voreinstellung ist
+] Nur sinnvoll wenn der
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\emph on
-1
+LatexType
\end_layout
\end_inset
-: verwendet seine Eigene.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Spellcheck
+Environment
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
+ ist.
+ Gibt an, ob die Umgebung in der Ausgabe abgesetzt erscheint oder in einer
+ Zeile mit dem umgebenden Text.
+ Wenn auf
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
-,
-\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
-\end_inset
-
-
+ gesetzt, wird angenommen, dass die LaTeX-Umgebung Leerraum nach den
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
+\backslash
+begin{
\emph on
-1
+LatexName
+\emph default
+}
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] Erlaubt es, den Inhalt der Einfügung auf Rechtschreibung zu überprüfen.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Subsection
-Zähler
-\begin_inset CommandInset label
-LatexCommand label
-name "sub:Zähler"
+ und
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\backslash
+end{
+\emph on
+LatexName
+\emph default
+}
+\end_layout
+\end_inset
+ Befehlen ignoriert (inklusive des Zeilenumbruchzeichens).
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Standard
-Es ist notwendig Zähler (
-\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
+\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-chapter
+End
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
-\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
+ beendet die
+\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-figure
+InsetLayout
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,\SpecialChar \ldots{}
-) in der Textklasse selber zu definieren.
- Die Standardzähler sind in der Datei
+-Definition.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-stdcounters.inc
+Font
\end_layout
\end_inset
- definiert, so dass Sie nur die Zeile
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-Input stdcounters.inc
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Standard
-zu zu Ihrer Layout-Datei hinzufügen müssen, damit sie arbeiten.
- Aber wenn Sie eigene Zähler definieren wollen, können Sie das tun.
- Zähler-Deklarationen beginnen mit
-\end_layout
+ wird für den Text
+\emph on
+und
+\emph default
+ die Marke benutzt (siehe
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:Beschreibung-des-Zeichensatzes"
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-Counter <Name>
-\end_layout
+\end_inset
-\begin_layout Standard
-wobei
+).
+ Beachten Sie, dass die Definition dieses Fonts automatisch dem
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-<Name>
+LabelFont
\end_layout
\end_inset
- der Name Ihres Zählers ist.
- Die Deklaration endet mit
+ denselben Wert zuweist, das heißt
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-End
+Font
\end_layout
\end_inset
-.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Standard
-Folgende Parameter können auch benutzt werden:
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
+ muss zuerst definiert werden und
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LabelString
+LabelFont
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
+ danach, wenn sie unterschiedlich sein sollen.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-string
+ForceLTR
\end_layout
\end_inset
-=
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
+ erzwingt die
+\begin_inset Quotes gld
\end_inset
-
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
+LaTeX-Sprache
+\begin_inset Quotes grd
\end_inset
-] definiert, wie der Zähler dargestellt wird.
- Hierdurch wird
+ und führt zu einer links-nach-rechts-Ausgabe, zum Beispiel bei TeX-Code
+ oder URL.
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LabelStringAppendix
+ForceLTR
\end_layout
\end_inset
- auf denselben Wert gesetzt.
- In der Zeichenkette können folgende Konstrukte benutzt werden:
+ ist eine Behelfslösung.
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Itemize
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\backslash
-thecounter
+ForcePlain
\end_layout
\end_inset
- wird durch die Erweiterung von
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LabelString
+
+\emph on
+0
\end_layout
\end_inset
- (oder
-\begin_inset Newline newline
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LabelStringAppendix
+1
\end_layout
\end_inset
-) des Zählers
+] zeigt an, ob stattdessen
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-counter
+PlainLayout
\end_layout
\end_inset
- ersetzt.
+ benutzt werden soll oder ob der Benutzer den Absatzstil der Einfügung ändern
+ darf.
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Itemize
-Zählerwerte können durch LaTeX-ähnliche Makros wie
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\backslash
-
-\emph on
-numbertype
-\emph default
-{
-\emph on
-counter
-\emph default
-}
+FreeSpacing
\end_layout
\end_inset
- ausgedrückt werden, wobei
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\emph on
-numbertype
+0
\end_layout
\end_inset
- Folgendes sein kann:
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-arabic
+1
\end_layout
\end_inset
-: 1, 2, 3,\SpecialChar \ldots{}
-;
+] Wie bei Absatz-Layouts, siehe
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:Einzelne-Absatz-Layouts"
+
+\end_inset
+
+.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-alph
+HTML*
\end_layout
\end_inset
- für Kleinbuchstaben: a, b, c,\SpecialChar \ldots{}
-;
+ Diese Tags kontrollieren die XHTML-Ausgabe.
+ Siehe
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sec:Tags-for-XHTML"
+
+\end_inset
+
+.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Alph
+InToc
\end_layout
\end_inset
- für Großbuchstaben: A, B, C,\SpecialChar \ldots{}
-;
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-roman
+
+\emph on
+0
\end_layout
\end_inset
- für kleine römische Zahlen: i, ii, iii,\SpecialChar \ldots{}
-;
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Roman
+1
\end_layout
\end_inset
- für große römische Zahlen: I, II, III.
+] Ob der Inhalt der Einfügung für die Zeichenketten des 'Gliederungs'-Fensters
+ verwendet werden soll.
+ Zum Beispiel will man nicht, dass der Inhalt einer Fußzeile im Namen des
+ Abschnitts im Inhaltsverzeichnis des Gliederungs-Fensters erscheint.
+ Aber man will normalerweise, dass der Inhalt von Zeichenstilen erscheint.
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Standard
-Wenn
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LabelString
+KeepEmpty
\end_layout
\end_inset
- nicht definiert ist, wird ein Standardwert wie folgt benutzt: wenn der
- Zähler einen Hauptzähler
+ [
+\emph on
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-master
+0
\end_layout
\end_inset
- (über
+
+\emph default
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Within
+1
\end_layout
\end_inset
- definiert) hat, wird der String
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
+] Wie bei Absatz-Layouts, siehe
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:Einzelne-Absatz-Layouts"
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
+\end_inset
-\backslash
-themaster.
-\backslash
-arabic{counter}
+.
\end_layout
-\end_inset
-
- benutzt, ansonsten
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
+LabelFont
+\end_layout
-\backslash
-arabic{counter}
+\end_inset
+
+ ist die für die Marke benutze Schrift (siehe
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:Beschreibung-des-Zeichensatzes"
+
+\end_inset
+
+).
+ Beachten Sie, dass diese Definition niemals vor
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Font
\end_layout
\end_inset
-.
+ erscheinen darf, weil sie sonst unwirksam ist.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LabelStringAppendix
+LabelString
\end_layout
\end_inset
\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
-] ist dasselbe wie
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LabelString
-\end_layout
-
-\end_inset
-
-, aber für den Anhang.
+] wird auf dem Knopf und anderswo als Einfügungsmarke angezeigt.
+ Einige Einfügungstypen (TeX-Code und Zweig) ändern diese Marke im Vo\SpecialChar \-
+rü\SpecialChar \-
+ber\SpecialChar \-
+gehen.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-PrettyFormat
+LatexName
\end_layout
\end_inset
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-string
+<Name>
\end_layout
\end_inset
-=
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
-\end_inset
-
-
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
-\end_inset
-
-] Ein Format, das für Formatierte Querverweise auf einen Zähler verwendet
- wird.
- Möchte man z.
-\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
-\end_inset
-
-B.
- Referenzen auf Abschnitte in der Form
-\begin_inset Quotes gld
-\end_inset
-
-Abschnitt
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-2.4
-\begin_inset Quotes grd
-\end_inset
-
- haben, sollte der String
-\begin_inset Quotes gld
-\end_inset
-
-##
-\begin_inset Quotes grd
-\end_inset
-
- enthalten.
- Diese Zeichen werden später durch die referenzierte Abschnittsnummer ersetzt.
- Also für Abschnitte lautet der String dann
-\begin_inset Quotes gld
-\end_inset
-
-Abschnitt ##
-\begin_inset Quotes grd
-\end_inset
-
-.
+] ist der Name der LaTeX-Umgebung oder des LaTeX-Befehls.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Within
+LatexParam
\end_layout
\end_inset
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-string
+<Parameter>
\end_layout
\end_inset
-=
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
-\end_inset
-
-
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
-\end_inset
-
-] Wenn dies auf den Namen eines anderen Zählers gesetzt wird, wird der gegenwärt
-ige Zähler jedes mal zurückgesetzt, wenn der andere erhöht wird.
- Zum Beispiel wird
+] ist ein optionaler Parameter für den zugehörigen
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-subsection
+LatexName
\end_layout
\end_inset
- innerhalb
+, einschließ\SpecialChar \-
+lich möglicher Klammerpaare wie
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-section
-\end_layout
-
-\end_inset
-
- nummeriert.
+[]
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Subsection
-Beschreibung des Zeichensatzes
-\begin_inset CommandInset label
-LatexCommand label
-name "sub:Beschreibung-des-Zeichensatzes"
-
\end_inset
-
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Standard
-Eine Zeichensatzbeschreibung sieht folgendermaßen aus:
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-Font
-\family roman
-\emph on
-oder
-\family default
-\emph default
- LabelFont
-\emph on
-oder
-\emph default
- DefaultFont
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
- ...
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-EndFont
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Standard
-und es sind folgende Befehle vorhanden:
+.
+ Dieser Parameter kann in LyX nicht geändert werden.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Color
+LatexType
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
+ Wie bei Absatz-Layouts, siehe
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:Einzelne-Absatz-Layouts"
+
+\end_inset
+
+.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-none
+LyxType
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+ kann
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-black
+charstyle
\end_layout
\end_inset
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-white
+custom
\end_layout
\end_inset
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-red
+element
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+ oder
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-green
+end
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+ (zeigt das Ende einer Definition an) sein.
+ Dieser Eintrag wird für flexible Einfügungen benötigt und ist nur dort
+ sinnvoll.
+ Neben anderen Dingen legt er fest, in welchem Menü diese Einfügung erscheinen
+ wird.
+ Wird
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-blue
+LyXType
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+ auf
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-cyan
+charstyle
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+ gesetzt, wird
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-magenta
+MultiPar
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+ automatisch auf
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-yellow
+0
\end_layout
\end_inset
-]
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
+ gesetzt.
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Family
+MultiPar
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
+ kann auf
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Roman
+1
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+ für
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Sans
+charstyle
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+-Einfügungen gesetzt werden, indem es
+\emph on
+nach
+\emph default
+ dem
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Typewriter
+LyXType
\end_layout
\end_inset
-]
+ spezifiziert wird.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Misc
+MultiPar
\end_layout
\end_inset
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-string
+
+\emph on
+0
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] Zulässige Argumente sind:
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-emph
+1
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+] zeigt an, ob in dieser Einfügung mehrfache Absätze erlaubt sind.
+ Dadurch wird
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-noun
+CustomPars
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+ auf denselben Wert gesetzt und
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-strikeout
+ForcePlain
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
+ auf den anderen.
+ Diese können auf andere Werte gesetzt werden, wenn sie
+\emph on
+nach
+\emph default
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-underbar
+MultiPar
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+ benutzt werden.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-uuline
+NeedProtect
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-uwave
+
+\emph on
+0
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-no_emph
+1
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+] zeigt an, ob
+\emph on
+zerbrechliche
+\emph default
+ Befehle in diesem Layout ge\SpecialChar \-
+schützt (
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-no_noun
+
+\backslash
+protect
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+) werden sollen.
+ Es zeigt
+\emph on
+nicht
+\emph default
+ an, ob der Befehl selber geschützt werden soll.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-no_strikeout
+ParbreakIsNewline
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-no_bar
+
+\emph on
+0
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-no_uuline
+1
\end_layout
\end_inset
- und
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-no_uwave
-\end_layout
+] Wie bei Absatz-Layouts, siehe
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:Einzelne-Absatz-Layouts"
\end_inset
.
- Jedes schaltet die entsprechende Eigenschaft an oder aus.
- Zum Beispiel führt
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-emph
+PassThru
\end_layout
\end_inset
- zum Stil
-\emph on
-Hervorhebung
-\emph default
- und
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-no_emph
+
+\emph on
+0
\end_layout
\end_inset
- schaltet diesen aus.
-\begin_inset Newline newline
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
-Falls Sie Letzteres verwirrt, erinnern Sie sich, dass die Schrifteinstellungen
- standardmäßig von den umgebenden Stilen übernommen wird.
- Daher schaltet
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-no_emph
+1
\end_layout
\end_inset
- die
-\emph on
-Hervorhebung
-\emph default
- aus, die z.
-\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+] Wie bei Absatz-Layouts, siehe
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:Einzelne-Absatz-Layouts"
+
\end_inset
-B.
- in einer Theorem-Umgebung aktiv ist.
+.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Series
+Preamble
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
+ Wie bei Absatz-Layouts, siehe
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:Einzelne-Absatz-Layouts"
+
+\end_inset
+
+.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Medium
+RefPrefix
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Bold
+string
\end_layout
\end_inset
-]
+] Der Präfix, der verwendet werden soll, wenn auf Marken dieser Einfügung
+ verwiesen wird.
+ Dies erlaubt die Verwendung von Formatierten Querverweisen.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Shape
+Requires
\end_layout
\end_inset
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Up
+string
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Italic
-\end_layout
+] Wie bei Absatz-Layouts, siehe
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:Einzelne-Absatz-Layouts"
\end_inset
-,
+.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-SmallCaps
+ResetsFont
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Slanted
+0
\end_layout
\end_inset
-]
-\end_layout
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
-\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Size
+
+\emph on
+1
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
+] Ob die Einfügung die Schrift der benachbarten Umgebungen verwenden soll
+ oder seine eigene.
+ Voreinstellung ist
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-tiny
+
+\emph on
+1
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+: verwendet seine Eigene.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-small
+Spellcheck
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-normal
+0
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-large
+
+\emph on
+1
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-larger
+] Erlaubt es, den Inhalt der Einfügung auf Rechtschreibung zu überprüfen.
\end_layout
+\begin_layout Subsection
+Zähler
+\begin_inset CommandInset label
+LatexCommand label
+name "sub:Zähler"
+
\end_inset
-,
-\begin_inset Flex Code
+
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Standard
+Es ist notwendig Zähler (
+\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-largest
+chapter
\end_layout
\end_inset
,
-\begin_inset Flex Code
+\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-huge
+figure
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+,\SpecialChar \ldots{}
+) in der Textklasse selber zu definieren.
+ Die Standardzähler sind in der Datei
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-giant
+stdcounters.inc
\end_layout
\end_inset
-]
+ definiert, so dass Sie nur die Zeile
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Subsection
-
-\lang english
-\begin_inset CommandInset label
-LatexCommand label
-name "sub:Citation-format-description"
-
-\end_inset
-
-Citation format description
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+Input stdcounters.inc
\end_layout
\begin_layout Standard
-
-\lang english
-The
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-CiteFormat
-\end_layout
-
-\end_inset
-
- blocks are used to describe how bibliographic information should be displayed,
- both within LyX itself (in the citation dialog and in tooltips, for example)
- and in XHTML output.
- Such a block might look like this:
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-CiteFormat
+zu zu Ihrer Layout-Datei hinzufügen müssen, damit sie arbeiten.
+ Aber wenn Sie eigene Zähler definieren wollen, können Sie das tun.
+ Zähler-Deklarationen beginnen mit
\end_layout
\begin_layout LyX-Code
- article ...
+Counter <Name>
\end_layout
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
- book ...
-\end_layout
+\begin_layout Standard
+wobei
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-End
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+<Name>
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Standard
+\end_inset
-\lang english
-The individual lines define how the bibliographic information associated
- with an article or book, respectively, is to be displayed, and such a definitio
-n can be given for any `entry type' that might be present in a BibTeX file.
- LyX defines a default format in the source code that will be used if no
- specific definition has been given.
- LyX predefines several formats in the file
+ der Name Ihres Zählers ist.
+ Die Deklaration endet mit
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-stdciteformats.inc
+End
\end_layout
\end_inset
-, which is included in most of LyX's document classes.
+.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Standard
+Folgende Parameter können auch benutzt werden:
+\end_layout
-\lang english
-The definitions use a simple language that allows BibTeX keys to be replaced
- with their values.
- Keys should be enclosed in
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-%
+LabelString
\end_layout
\end_inset
- signs, e.g.:
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-%author%
+string
\end_layout
\end_inset
-.
- So a simple definition might look like this:
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-misc %author%,
-\begin_inset Quotes eld
+=
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
-%title
+
\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
-.
+] definiert, wie der Zähler dargestellt wird.
+ Hierdurch wird
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+LabelStringAppendix
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Standard
+\end_inset
-\lang english
-This would print the author, followed by a comma, followed by the title,
- in quotes, followed by a period.
+ auf denselben Wert gesetzt.
+ In der Zeichenkette können folgende Konstrukte benutzt werden:
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Standard
-
-\lang english
-Of course, sometimes you may want to print a key only if it exists.
- This can be done by using a conditional construction, such as:
+\begin_layout Itemize
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-\lang english
-{%volume%[[vol.
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-%volume%]]}
+\backslash
+thecounter
\end_layout
\end_inset
-.
- This says: If the
+ wird durch die Erweiterung von
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-volume
+LabelString
\end_layout
\end_inset
- key exists, then print
-\begin_inset Quotes eld
+ (oder
+\begin_inset Newline newline
\end_inset
-vol.
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+LabelStringAppendix
+\end_layout
- followed by the volume key.
- It is also possible to have an else clause in the conditional, such as:
-\begin_inset Newline newline
\end_inset
-
+) des Zählers
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-{%author%[[%author%]][[%editor%, ed.]]}
+counter
\end_layout
\end_inset
+ ersetzt.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Itemize
+Zählerwerte können durch LaTeX-ähnliche Makros wie
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\backslash
+
+\emph on
+numbertype
+\emph default
+{
+\emph on
+counter
+\emph default
+}
+\end_layout
-\begin_inset Newline newline
\end_inset
-Here, the
+ ausgedrückt werden, wobei
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-\lang english
-author
+\emph on
+numbertype
\end_layout
\end_inset
- key is printed if it exists; otherwise, the editor key is printed, followed
- by
-\begin_inset Quotes eld
-\end_inset
+ Folgendes sein kann:
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-,
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+arabic
+\end_layout
-ed.
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
- Note that the key is again enclosed in
+: 1, 2, 3,\SpecialChar \ldots{}
+;
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-%
+alph
\end_layout
\end_inset
- signs; the entire conditional is enclosed in braces; and the if and else
- clauses are enclosed in double brackets,
-\begin_inset Quotes eld
-\end_inset
+ für Kleinbuchstaben: a, b, c,\SpecialChar \ldots{}
+;
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Alph
+\end_layout
+\end_inset
+ für Großbuchstaben: A, B, C,\SpecialChar \ldots{}
+;
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-[[
+roman
\end_layout
\end_inset
+ für kleine römische Zahlen: i, ii, iii,\SpecialChar \ldots{}
+;
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\begin_inset Quotes eld
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Roman
+\end_layout
- and
-\begin_inset Quotes eld
\end_inset
+ für große römische Zahlen: I, II, III.
+\end_layout
+\begin_layout Standard
+Wenn
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-]]
+LabelString
\end_layout
\end_inset
+ nicht definiert ist, wird ein Standardwert wie folgt benutzt: wenn der
+ Zähler einen Hauptzähler
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+master
+\end_layout
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
-.
- There must be no space between any of these.
+ (über
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Within
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Standard
+\end_inset
-\lang english
-There is one other piece of syntax available in definitions, which looks
- like this:
+ definiert) hat, wird der String
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-\lang english
-{!<i>!}
+\backslash
+themaster.
+\backslash
+arabic{counter}
\end_layout
\end_inset
-.
- This defines a piece of formatting information that is to be used when
- creating
-\begin_inset Quotes eld
-\end_inset
-
-rich text
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
-\end_inset
-
-.
- Obviously, we do not want to output HTML tags when writing plain text,
- so they should be wrapped in
-\begin_inset Quotes eld
-\end_inset
+ benutzt, ansonsten
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-{!
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
- and
-\begin_inset Quotes eld
-\end_inset
+\backslash
+arabic{counter}
+\end_layout
-!}
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
.
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Standard
-
-\lang english
-Two special sorts of definitions are also possible in a
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-CiteFormat
+LabelStringAppendix
\end_layout
\end_inset
- block.
- An example of the first would be:
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+string
\end_layout
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-!quotetitle
-\begin_inset Quotes eld
\end_inset
-%title%
+=
\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Standard
-
-\lang english
-This is an abbreviation, or macro, and it can be used by treating it as
- if it were a key:
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-%!quotetitle%
-\end_layout
-
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
-.
- LyX will treat
+] ist dasselbe wie
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-%!quotetitle%
+LabelString
\end_layout
\end_inset
- exactly as it would treat its definition.
- So, let us issue the obvious
-\emph on
-warning
-\emph default
-.
- Do not do this:
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-!funfun %funfun%
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Standard
-
-\lang english
-or anything like it.
- LyX shouldn't go into an infinite loop, but it may go into a long one before
- it gives up.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Standard
-
-\lang english
-The second sort of special definition might look like this:
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-_pptext pp.
+, aber für den Anhang.
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Standard
-
-\lang english
-This defines a translatable piece of text, which allows relevant parts of
- the bibliography to be translated.
- It can be included in a definition by treating it as a key:
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-%_pptext%
+PrettyFormat
\end_layout
\end_inset
-.
- Several of these are predefined in
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-stdciteformats.inc
+string
\end_layout
\end_inset
-.
- Note that these are not macros, in the sense just defined.
- They will not be expanded.
-\end_layout
+=
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
-\begin_layout Standard
-\lang english
-So here then is an example that use all these features:
-\begin_inset VSpace defskip
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
+] Ein Format, das für Formatierte Querverweise auf einen Zähler verwendet
+ wird.
+ Möchte man z.
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
-\end_layout
+B.
+ Referenzen auf Abschnitte in der Form
+\begin_inset Quotes gld
+\end_inset
-\begin_layout Standard
-\noindent
+Abschnitt
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
-\family typewriter
-\lang english
-!authoredit {%author%[[%author%, ]][[{%editor%[[%editor%, %_edtext%, ]]}]]}
-\end_layout
+2.4
+\begin_inset Quotes grd
+\end_inset
-\begin_layout Standard
+ haben, sollte der String
+\begin_inset Quotes gld
+\end_inset
-\lang english
-\begin_inset VSpace defskip
+##
+\begin_inset Quotes grd
\end_inset
-This defines a macro that prints the author, followed by a comma, if the
-
+ enthalten.
+ Diese Zeichen werden später durch die referenzierte Abschnittsnummer ersetzt.
+ Also für Abschnitte lautet der String dann
+\begin_inset Quotes gld
+\end_inset
+
+Abschnitt ##
+\begin_inset Quotes grd
+\end_inset
+
+.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-author
+Within
\end_layout
\end_inset
- key is defined, or else prints the name of the editor, followed by the
-
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-_edtext
+string
\end_layout
\end_inset
- or its translation (it is by default
-\begin_inset Quotes eld
+=
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
-ed.
+
\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
-), if the
+] Wenn dies auf den Namen eines anderen Zählers gesetzt wird, wird der gegenwärt
+ige Zähler jedes mal zurückgesetzt, wenn der andere erhöht wird.
+ Zum Beispiel wird
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-editor
+subsection
\end_layout
\end_inset
- key is defined.
- Note that this is in fact defined in
+ innerhalb
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-stdciteformats.inc
+section
\end_layout
\end_inset
-, so you can use it in your own definitions, or re-definitions, if you load
- that file first.
+ nummeriert.
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Section
-
-\lang english
+\begin_layout Subsection
+Beschreibung des Zeichensatzes
\begin_inset CommandInset label
LatexCommand label
-name "sec:Tags-for-XHTML"
+name "sub:Beschreibung-des-Zeichensatzes"
\end_inset
-Tags for XHTML output
+
\end_layout
\begin_layout Standard
+Eine Zeichensatzbeschreibung sieht folgendermaßen aus:
+\end_layout
-\lang english
-As with LaTeX or DocBook, the format of LyX's XHTML output is also controlled
- by layout information.
- In general, LyX provides sensible defaults and, as mentioned earlier, it
- will even construct default CSS style rules from the other layout tags.
- For example, LyX will attempt to use the information provided in the
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+Font
+\family roman
+\emph on
+oder
+\family default
+\emph default
+ LabelFont
+\emph on
+oder
+\emph default
+ DefaultFont
+\end_layout
-\lang english
-Font
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+ ...
\end_layout
-\end_inset
-
- declaration for the Chapter style to write CSS that will appropriately
- format chapter headings.
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+EndFont
\end_layout
\begin_layout Standard
-
-\lang english
-In many cases, then, you may not have to do anything at all to get acceptable
- XHTML output for your own environments, custom insets, and so forth.
- But in some cases you will, and so LyX provides a number of layout tags
- that can be used to customize the XHTML and CSS that are generated.
+und es sind folgende Befehle vorhanden:
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Standard
-
-\lang english
-Note that there are two tags,
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-HTMLPreamble
+Color
\end_layout
\end_inset
- and
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-AddToHTMLPreamble
+none
\end_layout
\end_inset
- that may appear outside style and inset declarations.
- See
-\begin_inset CommandInset ref
-LatexCommand ref
-reference "sub:Allgemeine-Parameter-für"
-
-\end_inset
+,
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
- for details on these.
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+black
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Subsection
+\end_inset
-\lang english
-Paragraph styles
+,
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+white
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Standard
+\end_inset
-\lang english
-The sort of XHTML LyX outputs for a paragraph depends upon whether we are
- dealing with a normal paragraph, a command, or an environment, where this
- is itself determined by the contents of the corresponding
+,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-LaTeXType
+red
\end_layout
\end_inset
- tag.
-
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Standard
+,
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\lang english
-For a command or normal paragraph, the output XHTML has the following form:
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+green
\end_layout
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-
-\lang english
-<tag attr=
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
-value
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
-\end_inset
+,
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
->
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+blue
\end_layout
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-
-\lang english
-<labeltag attr=
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
-value
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
-\end_inset
+,
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
->Label</labeltag>
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+cyan
\end_layout
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
+\end_inset
-\lang english
-Contents of the paragraph.
+,
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+magenta
\end_layout
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
+\end_inset
-\lang english
-</tag>
+,
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+yellow
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Standard
+\end_inset
-\lang english
-The label tags are of course omitted if the paragraph does not have a label.
+]
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Standard
+\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\lang english
-For an environment that is not some sort of list, the XHTML takes this form:
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Family
\end_layout
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-
-\lang english
-<tag attr=
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
-value
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
-\end_inset
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
->
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Roman
\end_layout
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-
-\lang english
-<itemtag attr=
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
-value
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
-\end_inset
+,
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-><labeltag attr=
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Sans
+\end_layout
-value
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
->Environment Label</labeltag>First paragraph.</itemtag>
+,
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Typewriter
\end_layout
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
+\end_inset
-\lang english
-<itemtag>Second paragraph.</itemtag>
+]
\end_layout
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
+\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\lang english
-</tag>
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Misc
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Standard
+\end_inset
-\lang english
-Note that the label is output only for the first paragraph, as it should
- be for a theorem, for example.
-
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+string
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Standard
+\end_inset
-\lang english
-For a list, we have one of these forms:
-\end_layout
+] Zulässige Argumente sind:
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+emph
+\end_layout
-\lang english
-<tag attr=
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
-value
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
-\end_inset
+,
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
->
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+noun
\end_layout
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-
-\lang english
-<itemtag attr=
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
-value
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
-\end_inset
+,
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-><labeltag attr=
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+strikeout
+\end_layout
-value
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
->List Label</labeltag>First item.</itemtag>
-\end_layout
+,
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+underbar
+\end_layout
-\lang english
-<itemtag attr=
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
-value
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
-\end_inset
-
-><labeltag attr=
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
-\end_inset
-
-value
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
-\end_inset
+,
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
->List Label</labeltag>Second item.</itemtag>
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+uuline
\end_layout
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-
-\lang english
-</tag>
-\end_layout
+\end_inset
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
+,
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+uwave
\end_layout
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-
-\lang english
-<tag attr=
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
-value
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
-\end_inset
+,
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
->
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+no_emph
\end_layout
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-
-\lang english
-<labeltag attr=
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
-\end_inset
-
-value
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
-\end_inset
-
->List Label</labeltag><itemtag attr=
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
-value
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
-\end_inset
+,
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
->First item.</itemtag>
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+no_noun
\end_layout
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-
-\lang english
-<labeltag attr=
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
-value
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
-\end_inset
+,
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
->List Label</labeltag><itemtag attr=
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+no_strikeout
+\end_layout
-value
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
->Second item.</itemtag>
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
+,
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\lang english
-</tag>
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+no_bar
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Standard
+\end_inset
-\lang english
-Note the different orders of
+,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-labeltag
+no_uuline
\end_layout
\end_inset
- and
+ und
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-itemtag
+no_uwave
\end_layout
\end_inset
.
- Which order we get depends upon the setting of
+ Jedes schaltet die entsprechende Eigenschaft an oder aus.
+ Zum Beispiel führt
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-HTMLLabelFirst
+emph
\end_layout
\end_inset
-: If
+ zum Stil
+\emph on
+Hervorhebung
+\emph default
+ und
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-HTMLLabelFirst
+no_emph
\end_layout
\end_inset
- is false (the default), you get the first of these, with the label within
- the item; if true, you get the second, with the label outside the item.
+ schaltet diesen aus.
+\begin_inset Newline newline
+\end_inset
+
+Falls Sie Letzteres verwirrt, erinnern Sie sich, dass die Schrifteinstellungen
+ standardmäßig von den umgebenden Stilen übernommen wird.
+ Daher schaltet
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+no_emph
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Standard
+\end_inset
-\lang english
-The specific tags and attributes output for each paragraph type can be controlle
-d by means of the layout tags we are about to describe.
- As mentioned earlier, however, LyX uses sensible defaults for many of these,
- so you often may not need to do very much to get good XHTML output.
- Think of the available tags as there so you can tweak things to your liking.
+ die
+\emph on
+Hervorhebung
+\emph default
+ aus, die z.
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+B.
+ in einer Theorem-Umgebung aktiv ist.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
-
-\lang english
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-HTMLAttr
+Series
\end_layout
\end_inset
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-string
+Medium
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] Specifies attribute information to be output with the main tag.
- For example,
-\begin_inset Quotes eld
-\end_inset
-
-
+,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-class=`mydiv'
+Bold
\end_layout
\end_inset
+]
+\end_layout
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-.
- By default, LyX will output
-\begin_inset Quotes eld
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Shape
+\end_layout
+\end_inset
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-class=`layoutname'
+Up
\end_layout
\end_inset
+,
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Italic
+\end_layout
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
-, where
+,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-layoutname
+SmallCaps
\end_layout
\end_inset
- is the LyX name of the layout, made lowercase, for example: chapter.
- This should
-\emph on
-not
-\emph default
- contain any style information.
- Use
+,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-HTMLStyle
+Slanted
\end_layout
\end_inset
- for that purpose.
+]
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
-
-\lang english
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-HTMLForceCSS
+Size
\end_layout
\end_inset
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\emph on
-\lang english
-0
+tiny
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
-\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
-\end_inset
-
-
+,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-1
+small
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] Whether to output the default CSS information LyX generates for this layout,
- even if additional information is explicitly provided via
+,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-HTMLStyle
+normal
\end_layout
\end_inset
-.
- Setting this to
+,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-1
+large
\end_layout
\end_inset
- allows you to alter or augment the generated CSS, rather than to override
- it completely.
- Default is
+,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-0
+larger
\end_layout
\end_inset
-.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
-
-\lang english
+,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-HTMLItem
+largest
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
+,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-string
+huge
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] The tag to be used for individual paragraphs of environments, replacing
-
+,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-itemtag
+giant
\end_layout
\end_inset
- in the examples above.
- Defaults to
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-div
+]
\end_layout
+\begin_layout Subsection
+\begin_inset CommandInset label
+LatexCommand label
+name "sub:Citation-format-description"
+
\end_inset
-.
+
+\lang english
+Citation format description
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
+\begin_layout Standard
\lang english
+The
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-HTMLItemAttr
+CiteFormat
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
+ blocks are used to describe how bibliographic information should be displayed,
+ both within LyX itself (in the citation dialog and in tooltips, for example)
+ and in XHTML output.
+ Such a block might look like this:
+\end_layout
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+CiteFormat
+\end_layout
-\lang english
-string
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+ article ...
\end_layout
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+ book ...
+\end_layout
-] Attributes for the item tag.
- Defaults to
-\begin_inset Quotes eld
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+End
+\end_layout
+\begin_layout Standard
+\lang english
+The individual lines define how the bibliographic information associated
+ with an article or book, respectively, is to be displayed, and such a definitio
+n can be given for any `entry type' that might be present in a BibTeX file.
+ LyX defines a default format in the source code that will be used if no
+ specific definition has been given.
+ LyX predefines several formats in the file
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-class=`layoutname_item'
+stdciteformats.inc
\end_layout
\end_inset
+, which is included in most of LyX's document classes.
+\end_layout
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout Standard
-.
- This should
-\emph on
-not
-\emph default
- contain any style information.
- Use
+\lang english
+The definitions use a simple language that allows BibTeX keys to be replaced
+ with their values.
+ Keys should be enclosed in
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-HTMLStyle
+%
\end_layout
\end_inset
- for that purpose.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
-
-\lang english
+ signs, e.g.:
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-HTMLLabel
+%author%
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-string
+.
+ So a simple definition might look like this:
\end_layout
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+misc %author%,
+\begin_inset Quotes eld
\end_inset
-] The tag to be used for paragraph and item labels, replacing
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
+%title
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
+.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Standard
\lang english
-labeltag
+This would print the author, followed by a comma, followed by the title,
+ in quotes, followed by a period.
\end_layout
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout Standard
- in the examples above.
- Defaults to
+\lang english
+Of course, sometimes you may want to print a key only if it exists.
+ This can be done by using a conditional construction, such as:
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-span
+{%volume%[[vol.
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+%volume%]]}
\end_layout
\end_inset
-, unless
+.
+ This says: If the
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-LabelType
+volume
\end_layout
\end_inset
- is either
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
+ key exists, then print
+\begin_inset Quotes eld
+\end_inset
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
+vol.
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
-\lang english
-Top_Environment
-\end_layout
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
+ followed by the volume key.
+ It is also possible to have an else clause in the conditional, such as:
+\begin_inset Newline newline
\end_inset
- or
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-Centered_Top_Environment
+{%author%[[%author%]][[%editor%, ed.]]}
\end_layout
\end_inset
-, in which case it defaults to
+
+\begin_inset Newline newline
+\end_inset
+
+Here, the
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-div
+author
\end_layout
\end_inset
-.
-\end_layout
+ key is printed if it exists; otherwise, the editor key is printed, followed
+ by
+\begin_inset Quotes eld
+\end_inset
-\begin_layout Description
+,
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
-\lang english
+ed.
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
+ Note that the key is again enclosed in
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-HTMLLabelAttr
+%
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
+ signs; the entire conditional is enclosed in braces; and the if and else
+ clauses are enclosed in double brackets,
+\begin_inset Quotes eld
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-string
+[[
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] Attributes for the label tag.
- Defaults to
+
+\begin_inset Quotes eld
+\end_inset
+
+ and
\begin_inset Quotes eld
\end_inset
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-class=`layoutname_label'
+]]
\end_layout
\end_inset
\end_inset
.
- This should
-\emph on
-not
-\emph default
- contain any style information.
- Use
+ There must be no space between any of these.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Standard
+
+\lang english
+There is one other piece of syntax available in definitions, which looks
+ like this:
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-HTMLStyle
+{!<i>!}
\end_layout
\end_inset
- for that purpose.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
+.
+ This defines a piece of formatting information that is to be used when
+ creating
+\begin_inset Quotes eld
+\end_inset
-\lang english
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
+rich text
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
+.
+ Obviously, we do not want to output HTML tags when writing plain text,
+ so they should be wrapped in
+\begin_inset Quotes eld
+\end_inset
-\lang english
-HTMLLabelFirst
-\end_layout
+{!
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+ and
+\begin_inset Quotes eld
\end_inset
- [
+!}
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
+.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Standard
+
+\lang english
+Two special sorts of definitions are also possible in a
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-\emph on
\lang english
-0
+CiteFormat
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
-\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
-\end_inset
+ block.
+ An example of the first would be:
+\end_layout
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+!quotetitle
+\begin_inset Quotes eld
+\end_inset
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
+%title%
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-\lang english
-1
\end_layout
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout Standard
-] Meaningful only for list-like environments, this tag controls whether
- the label tag is output before or inside the item tag.
- This is used, for example, in the description environment, where we want
- `
+\lang english
+This is an abbreviation, or macro, and it can be used by treating it as
+ if it were a key:
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-<dt>\SpecialChar \ldots{}
-</dt><dd>\SpecialChar \ldots{}
-</dd>
+%!quotetitle%
\end_layout
\end_inset
.
- Default is
+ LyX will treat
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-0
+%!quotetitle%
\end_layout
\end_inset
-: The label tag is output inside the item tag.
+ exactly as it would treat its definition.
+ So, let us issue the obvious
+\emph on
+warning
+\emph default
+.
+ Do not do this:
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+!funfun %funfun%
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Standard
\lang english
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
+or anything like it.
+ LyX shouldn't go into an infinite loop, but it may go into a long one before
+ it gives up.
+\end_layout
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
+\begin_layout Standard
\lang english
-HTMLPreamble
+The second sort of special definition might look like this:
\end_layout
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+_pptext pp.
+\end_layout
- Information to be output in the
+\begin_layout Standard
+
+\lang english
+This defines a translatable piece of text, which allows relevant parts of
+ the bibliography to be translated.
+ It can be included in a definition by treating it as a key:
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-<head>
+%_pptext%
\end_layout
\end_inset
- section when this style is used.
- This might, for example, be used to include a
+.
+ Several of these are predefined in
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-<script>
+stdciteformats.inc
\end_layout
\end_inset
- block defining an
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
+.
+ Note that these are not macros, in the sense just defined.
+ They will not be expanded.
+\end_layout
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
+\begin_layout Standard
\lang english
-onclick
+So here then is an example that use all these features:
+\begin_inset VSpace defskip
+\end_inset
+
+
\end_layout
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout Standard
+\noindent
- handler.
+\family typewriter
+\lang english
+!authoredit {%author%[[%author%, ]][[{%editor%[[%editor%, %_edtext%, ]]}]]}
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
+\begin_layout Standard
\lang english
+\begin_inset VSpace defskip
+\end_inset
+
+This defines a macro that prints the author, followed by a comma, if the
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-HTMLStyle
+author
\end_layout
\end_inset
- CSS style information to be included when this style is used.
- Note that this will automatically be wrapped in a layout-generated
+ key is defined, or else prints the name of the editor, followed by the
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-<style>
+_edtext
\end_layout
\end_inset
- block, so only the CSS itself need be included.
-\end_layout
+ or its translation (it is by default
+\begin_inset Quotes eld
+\end_inset
-\begin_layout Description
+ed.
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
-\lang english
+), if the
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-HTMLTag
+editor
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
+ key is defined.
+ Note that this is in fact defined in
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-string
+stdciteformats.inc
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] The tag to be used for the main label, replacing
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
+, so you can use it in your own definitions, or re-definitions, if you load
+ that file first.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Section
+\begin_inset CommandInset label
+LatexCommand label
+name "sec:Tags-for-XHTML"
+
+\end_inset
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-tag
+Tags for XHTML output
\end_layout
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout Standard
- in the examples above.
- Defaults to
+\lang english
+As with LaTeX or DocBook, the format of LyX's XHTML output is also controlled
+ by layout information.
+ In general, LyX provides sensible defaults and, as mentioned earlier, it
+ will even construct default CSS style rules from the other layout tags.
+ For example, LyX will attempt to use the information provided in the
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-div
+Font
\end_layout
\end_inset
-.
+ declaration for the Chapter style to write CSS that will appropriately
+ format chapter headings.
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
+\begin_layout Standard
+
+\lang english
+In many cases, then, you may not have to do anything at all to get acceptable
+ XHTML output for your own environments, custom insets, and so forth.
+ But in some cases you will, and so LyX provides a number of layout tags
+ that can be used to customize the XHTML and CSS that are generated.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Standard
\lang english
+Note that there are two tags,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-HTMLTitle
+HTMLPreamble
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
+ and
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-\emph on
\lang english
-0
+AddToHTMLPreamble
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
-\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+ that may appear outside style and inset declarations.
+ See
+\lang ngerman
+
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:Allgemeine-Parameter-für"
+
\end_inset
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
+\lang english
+ for details on these.
+\end_layout
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
+\begin_layout Subsection
\lang english
-1
+Paragraph styles
\end_layout
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout Standard
-] Marks this style as the one to be used to generate the
+\lang english
+The sort of XHTML LyX outputs for a paragraph depends upon whether we are
+ dealing with a normal paragraph, a command, or an environment, where this
+ is itself determined by the contents of the corresponding
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-<title>
+LaTeXType
\end_layout
\end_inset
- tag for the XHTML file.
- By default, it is false.
- The
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
+ tag.
+
+\end_layout
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
+\begin_layout Standard
\lang english
-stdtitle.inc
+For a command or normal paragraph, the output XHTML has the following form:
\end_layout
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+
+\lang english
+<tag attr=
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
- file sets it to true for the
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
+value
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
+>
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
\lang english
-title
+<labeltag attr=
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
+value
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
+>Label</labeltag>
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+
+\lang english
+Contents of the paragraph.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+
+\lang english
+</tag>
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Standard
+
+\lang english
+The label tags are of course omitted if the paragraph does not have a label.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Standard
+
+\lang english
+For an environment that is not some sort of list, the XHTML takes this form:
\end_layout
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+
+\lang english
+<tag attr=
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
- environment.
-
+value
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
+>
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Subsection
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
\lang english
-InsetLayout XHTML
+<itemtag attr=
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
+value
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
+><labeltag attr=
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
+value
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
+>Environment Label</labeltag>First paragraph.</itemtag>
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+
+\lang english
+<itemtag>Second paragraph.</itemtag>
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+
+\lang english
+</tag>
\end_layout
\begin_layout Standard
\lang english
-The XHTML output of insets can also be controlled by information in layout
- files.
-\begin_inset Foot
-status collapsed
+Note that the label is output only for the first paragraph, as it should
+ be for a theorem, for example.
+
+\end_layout
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
+\begin_layout Standard
\lang english
-At present, this is true only for
-\begin_inset Quotes eld
+For a list, we have one of these forms:
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+
+\lang english
+<tag attr=
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
-text
+value
\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
- insets (insets you can type into) and is not true for
-\begin_inset Quotes eld
+>
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+
+\lang english
+<itemtag attr=
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
-command
+value
\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
- insets (insets that are associated with dialog boxes).
+><labeltag attr=
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
+value
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
+>List Label</labeltag>First item.</itemtag>
\end_layout
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+
+\lang english
+<itemtag attr=
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
- Here, too, LyX tries to provide sensible defaults, and it constructs default
- CSS style rules.
- But everything can be customized.
+value
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
+><labeltag attr=
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
+value
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
+>List Label</labeltag>Second item.</itemtag>
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Standard
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
\lang english
-The XHTML LyX outputs for an inset has the following form:
+</tag>
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+
\end_layout
\begin_layout LyX-Code
\begin_layout LyX-Code
\lang english
-<labeltag>Label</labeltag>
+<labeltag attr=
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
+value
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
+>List Label</labeltag><itemtag attr=
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
+value
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
+>First item.</itemtag>
\end_layout
\begin_layout LyX-Code
\lang english
-<innertag attr=
+<labeltag attr=
\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
->Contents of the inset.</innertag>
+>List Label</labeltag><itemtag attr=
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
+value
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
+>Second item.</itemtag>
\end_layout
\begin_layout LyX-Code
\begin_layout Standard
\lang english
-If the inset permits multiple paragraphs---that is, if
+Note the different orders of
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-MultiPar
+labeltag
\end_layout
\end_inset
- is true---then the contents of the inset will itself be output as paragraphs
- formatted according to the styles used for those paragraphs (standard,
- quote, and the like).
- The label tag is of course omitted if the paragraph does not have a label
- and, at present, is always
+ and
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-span
+itemtag
\end_layout
\end_inset
.
- The inner tag is optional and, by default, does not appear.
+ Which order we get depends upon the setting of
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
+HTMLLabelFirst
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+: If
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
+HTMLLabelFirst
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ is false (the default), you get the first of these, with the label within
+ the item; if true, you get the second, with the label outside the item.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Standard
\lang english
-The specific tags and attributes output for each inset can be controlled
- by means of the following layout tags.
+The specific tags and attributes output for each paragraph type can be controlle
+d by means of the layout tags we are about to describe.
+ As mentioned earlier, however, LyX uses sensible defaults for many of these,
+ so you often may not need to do very much to get good XHTML output.
+ Think of the available tags as there so you can tweak things to your liking.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-class=`myinset' onclick=`\SpecialChar \ldots{}
-'
+class=`mydiv'
\end_layout
\end_inset
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-class=`insetname'
+class=`layoutname'
\end_layout
\end_inset
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-insetname
+layoutname
\end_layout
\end_inset
- is the LyX name of the inset, made lowercase and with non-alphanumeric
- characters converted to underscores, for example: footnote.
+ is the LyX name of the layout, made lowercase, for example: chapter.
+ This should
+\emph on
+not
+\emph default
+ contain any style information.
+ Use
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
+HTMLStyle
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ for that purpose.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
allows you to alter or augment the generated CSS, rather than to override
it completely.
- Default is 0.
+ Default is
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
+0
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-HTMLInnerAttr
+HTMLItem
\end_layout
\end_inset
\end_inset
-] Attributes for the inner tag.
- Defaults to
-\begin_inset Quotes eld
-\end_inset
-
-
+] The tag to be used for individual paragraphs of environments, replacing
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-class=`insetname_inner'
+itemtag
\end_layout
\end_inset
+ in the examples above.
+ Defaults to
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
+div
+\end_layout
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
.
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-HTMLInnerTag
+HTMLItemAttr
\end_layout
\end_inset
\end_inset
-] The inner tag, replacing
+] Attributes for the item tag.
+ Defaults to
+\begin_inset Quotes eld
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-innertag
+class=`layoutname_item'
\end_layout
\end_inset
- in the examples above.
- By default, there is none.
+
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
+.
+ This should
+\emph on
+not
+\emph default
+ contain any style information.
+ Use
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
+HTMLStyle
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ for that purpose.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-HTMLIsBlock
+HTMLLabel
\end_layout
\end_inset
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-0
+string
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
-\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
-\end_inset
+] The tag to be used for paragraph and item labels, replacing
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
+labeltag
+\end_layout
+\end_inset
+ in the examples above.
+ Defaults to
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-\emph on
\lang english
-1
+span
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] Whether this inset represents a standalone block of text (such as a footnote)
- or instead represents material that is included in the surrounding text
- (such as a branch).
- Defaults to 1.
-\end_layout
+, unless
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\begin_layout Description
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
+LabelType
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ is either
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-HTMLLabel
+Top_Environment
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
+ or
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-string
+Centered_Top_Environment
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] A label for this inset, possibly including a reference to a counter.
- For example, for footnote, it might be:
+, in which case it defaults to
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-
-\backslash
-arabic{footnote}
+div
\end_layout
\end_inset
.
- This is optional, and there is no default.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-HTMLPreamble
+HTMLLabelAttr
\end_layout
\end_inset
- Information to be output in the
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-<head>
+string
\end_layout
\end_inset
- section when this style is used.
- This might, for example, be used to include a
+] Attributes for the label tag.
+ Defaults to
+\begin_inset Quotes eld
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-<script>
+class=`layoutname_label'
\end_layout
\end_inset
- block defining an
+
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
+.
+ This should
+\emph on
+not
+\emph default
+ contain any style information.
+ Use
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-onclick
+HTMLStyle
\end_layout
\end_inset
- handler.
+ for that purpose.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-HTMLStyle
+HTMLLabelFirst
\end_layout
\end_inset
- CSS style information to be included when this style is used.
- Note that this will automatically be wrapped in a layout-generated
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
+\emph on
\lang english
-<style>
+0
\end_layout
\end_inset
- block, so only the CSS itself need be included.
-\end_layout
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
-\begin_layout Description
-\lang english
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-HTMLTag
+1
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
+] Meaningful only for list-like environments, this tag controls whether
+ the label tag is output before or inside the item tag.
+ This is used, for example, in the description environment, where we want
+ `
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-string
+<dt>\SpecialChar \ldots{}
+</dt><dd>\SpecialChar \ldots{}
+</dd>
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] The tag to be used for the main label, replacing
+.
+ Default is
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-tag
+0
\end_layout
\end_inset
- in the examples above.
- The default depends upon the setting of
+: The label tag is output inside the item tag.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
+
+\lang english
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-MultiPar
+HTMLPreamble
\end_layout
\end_inset
-: If
+ Information to be output in the
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-MultiPar
+<head>
\end_layout
\end_inset
- is true, the default is
+ section when this style is used.
+ This might, for example, be used to include a
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-div
+<script>
\end_layout
\end_inset
-; if it is false, the default is
+ block defining an
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-span
+onclick
\end_layout
\end_inset
-.
+ handler.
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Subsection
+\begin_layout Description
\lang english
-Float XHTML
-\end_layout
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\begin_layout Standard
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-The XHTML output for floats too can be controlled by layout information.
- The output has the following form:
+HTMLStyle
\end_layout
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-
-\lang english
-<tag attr=
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
-\end_inset
-
-value
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
->
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-
-\lang english
-Contents of the float.
-\end_layout
+ CSS style information to be included when this style is used.
+ Note that this will automatically be wrapped in a layout-generated
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-</tag>
+<style>
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Standard
+\end_inset
-\lang english
-The caption, if there is one, is a separate inset and will be output as
- such.
- Its appearance can be controlled via the InsetLayout for caption insets.
-
+ block, so only the CSS itself need be included.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-HTMLAttr
+HTMLTag
\end_layout
\end_inset
\end_inset
-] Specifies attribute information to be output with the main tag.
- For example,
-\begin_inset Quotes eld
-\end_inset
-
-
+] The tag to be used for the main label, replacing
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-class=`myfloat' onclick=`\SpecialChar \ldots{}
-'
+tag
\end_layout
\end_inset
+ in the examples above.
+ Defaults to
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
+div
+\end_layout
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
.
- By default, LyX will output
-\begin_inset Quotes eld
-\end_inset
+\end_layout
+\begin_layout Description
+\lang english
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-class=`float float-floattype'
+HTMLTitle
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
-\end_inset
-
-, where
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
+\emph on
\lang english
-floattype
+0
\end_layout
\end_inset
- is LyX's name for this type of float, as determined by the float declaration
- (see
-\begin_inset CommandInset ref
-LatexCommand ref
-reference "sub:Gleitobjekte"
-
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
-), though made lowercase and with non-alphanumeric characters converted
- to underscores, for example: float-table.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
-\lang english
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-HTMLStyle
+1
\end_layout
\end_inset
- CSS style information to be included when this float is used.
- Note that this will automatically be wrapped in a layout-generated
+] Marks this style as the one to be used to generate the
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-<style>
+<title>
\end_layout
\end_inset
- block, so only the CSS itself need be included.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
-
-\lang english
+ tag for the XHTML file.
+ By default, it is false.
+ The
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-HTMLTag
+stdtitle.inc
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
+ file sets it to true for the
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-string
+title
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] The tag to be used for this float, replacing
-\begin_inset Quotes eld
-\end_inset
+ environment.
+
+\end_layout
+\begin_layout Subsection
-\begin_inset Flex Code
+\lang english
+InsetLayout XHTML
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Standard
+
+\lang english
+The XHTML output of insets can also be controlled by information in layout
+ files.
+\begin_inset Foot
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-tag
-\end_layout
-
+At present, this is true only for
+\begin_inset Quotes eld
\end_inset
-
+text
\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
- in the example above.
- The default is
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-div
-\end_layout
+ insets (insets you can type into) and is not true for
+\begin_inset Quotes eld
+\end_inset
+command
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
- and will rarely need changing.
+ insets (insets that are associated with dialog boxes).
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Subsection
+\end_inset
-\lang english
-Bibliography formatting
+ Here, too, LyX tries to provide sensible defaults, and it constructs default
+ CSS style rules.
+ But everything can be customized.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Standard
\lang english
-The bibliography can be formatted using
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
+The XHTML LyX outputs for an inset has the following form:
+\end_layout
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
\lang english
-CiteFormat
-\end_layout
+<tag attr=
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+value
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
- blocks.
- See Section
-\begin_inset CommandInset ref
-LatexCommand ref
-reference "sub:Citation-format-description"
+>
+\end_layout
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
- for the details.
+\lang english
+<labeltag>Label</labeltag>
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Subsection
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
\lang english
-LyX-generated CSS
+<innertag attr=
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
+value
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
+>Contents of the inset.</innertag>
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Standard
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
\lang english
-We have several times mentioned that LyX will generate default CSS style
- rules for both insets and paragraph styles, based upon the other layout
- information that is provided.
- In this section, we shall say a word about which layout information LyX
- uses and how.
+</tag>
\end_layout
\begin_layout Standard
\lang english
-At present, LyX auto-generates CSS only for font information, making use
- of the
+If the inset permits multiple paragraphs---that is, if
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-Family
+MultiPar
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+ is true---then the contents of the inset will itself be output as paragraphs
+ formatted according to the styles used for those paragraphs (standard,
+ quote, and the like).
+ The label tag is of course omitted if the paragraph does not have a label
+ and, at present, is always
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-Series
+span
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
+.
+ The inner tag is optional and, by default, does not appear.
+\end_layout
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
+\begin_layout Standard
\lang english
-Shape
+The specific tags and attributes output for each inset can be controlled
+ by means of the following layout tags.
\end_layout
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout Description
-, and
+\lang english
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-Size
+HTMLAttr
\end_layout
\end_inset
- specified in the
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-Font
+string
\end_layout
\end_inset
- declaration.
- (See
-\begin_inset CommandInset ref
-LatexCommand ref
-reference "sub:Beschreibung-des-Zeichensatzes"
-
-\end_inset
-
-.) The translation is mostly straightforward and obvious.
+] Specifies attribute information to be output with the main tag.
For example,
\begin_inset Quotes eld
\end_inset
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-Family Sans
+class=`myinset' onclick=`\SpecialChar \ldots{}
+'
\end_layout
\end_inset
\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
- becomes
+.
+ By default, LyX will output
\begin_inset Quotes eld
\end_inset
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-font-family: sans-serif;
+class=`insetname'
\end_layout
\end_inset
\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
-.
- The correspondence of LyX sizes and CSS sizes is a little less obvious
- but nonetheless intuitive.
- See the
+, where
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-getSizeCSS()
+insetname
\end_layout
\end_inset
- function in
-\begin_inset Flex URL
-status collapsed
+ is the LyX name of the inset, made lowercase and with non-alphanumeric
+ characters converted to underscores, for example: footnote.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
+
+\lang english
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
+HTMLForceCSS
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\emph on
+\lang english
+0
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
+1
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+] Whether to output the default CSS information LyX generates for this layout,
+ even if additional information is explicitly provided via
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
+HTMLStyle
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+.
+ Setting this to
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
+1
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ allows you to alter or augment the generated CSS, rather than to override
+ it completely.
+ Default is 0.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
+
+\lang english
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
+HTMLInnerAttr
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
+string
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+] Attributes for the inner tag.
+ Defaults to
+\begin_inset Quotes eld
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
+class=`insetname_inner'
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
+.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
+
+\lang english
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
+HTMLInnerTag
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
+string
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+] The inner tag, replacing
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
+innertag
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ in the examples above.
+ By default, there is none.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
+
+\lang english
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
+HTMLIsBlock
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
+0
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\emph on
+\lang english
+1
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+] Whether this inset represents a standalone block of text (such as a footnote)
+ or instead represents material that is included in the surrounding text
+ (such as a branch).
+ Defaults to 1.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
+
+\lang english
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
+HTMLLabel
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
+string
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+] A label for this inset, possibly including a reference to a counter.
+ For example, for footnote, it might be:
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
+
+\backslash
+arabic{footnote}
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+.
+ This is optional, and there is no default.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
+
+\lang english
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
+HTMLPreamble
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ Information to be output in the
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
+<head>
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ section when this style is used.
+ This might, for example, be used to include a
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
+<script>
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ block defining an
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
+onclick
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ handler.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
+
+\lang english
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
+HTMLStyle
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ CSS style information to be included when this style is used.
+ Note that this will automatically be wrapped in a layout-generated
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
+<style>
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ block, so only the CSS itself need be included.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
+
+\lang english
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
+HTMLTag
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
+string
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+] The tag to be used for the main label, replacing
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
+tag
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ in the examples above.
+ The default depends upon the setting of
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
+MultiPar
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+: If
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
+MultiPar
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ is true, the default is
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
+div
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+; if it is false, the default is
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
+span
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Subsection
+
+\lang english
+Float XHTML
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Standard
+
+\lang english
+The XHTML output for floats too can be controlled by layout information.
+ The output has the following form:
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+
+\lang english
+<tag attr=
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
+value
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
+>
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+
+\lang english
+Contents of the float.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+
+\lang english
+</tag>
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Standard
+
+\lang english
+The caption, if there is one, is a separate inset and will be output as
+ such.
+ Its appearance can be controlled via the InsetLayout for caption insets.
+
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
+
+\lang english
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
+HTMLAttr
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
+string
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+] Specifies attribute information to be output with the main tag.
+ For example,
+\begin_inset Quotes eld
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
+class=`myfloat' onclick=`\SpecialChar \ldots{}
+'
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
+.
+ By default, LyX will output
+\begin_inset Quotes eld
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
+class=`float float-floattype'
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
+, where
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
+floattype
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ is LyX's name for this type of float, as determined by the float declaration
+ (see
+\lang ngerman
+
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:Gleitobjekte"
+
+\end_inset
+
+
+\lang english
+), though made lowercase and with non-alphanumeric characters converted
+ to underscores, for example: float-table.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
+
+\lang english
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
+HTMLStyle
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ CSS style information to be included when this float is used.
+ Note that this will automatically be wrapped in a layout-generated
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
+<style>
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ block, so only the CSS itself need be included.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
+
+\lang english
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
+HTMLTag
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
+string
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+] The tag to be used for this float, replacing
+\begin_inset Quotes eld
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
+tag
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
+ in the example above.
+ The default is
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
+div
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ and will rarely need changing.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Subsection
+
+\lang english
+Bibliography formatting
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Standard
+
+\lang english
+The bibliography can be formatted using
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
+CiteFormat
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ blocks.
+ See
+\lang ngerman
+
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:Citation-format-description"
+
+\end_inset
+
+
+\lang english
+ for the details.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Subsection
+
+\lang english
+LyX-generated CSS
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Standard
+
+\lang english
+We have several times mentioned that LyX will generate default CSS style
+ rules for both insets and paragraph styles, based upon the other layout
+ information that is provided.
+ In this section, we shall say a word about which layout information LyX
+ uses and how.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Standard
+
+\lang english
+At present, LyX auto-generates CSS only for font information, making use
+ of the
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
+Family
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+,
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
+Series
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+,
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
+Shape
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+, and
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
+Size
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ specified in the
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
+Font
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ declaration (see
+\lang ngerman
+
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:Beschreibung-des-Zeichensatzes"
+
+\end_inset
+
+).
+
+\lang english
+ The translation is mostly straightforward and obvious.
+ For example,
+\begin_inset Quotes eld
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
+Family Sans
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
+ becomes
+\begin_inset Quotes eld
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
+font-family: sans-serif;
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
+.
+ The correspondence of LyX sizes and CSS sizes is a little less obvious
+ but nonetheless intuitive.
+ See the
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
+getSizeCSS()
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ function in
+\begin_inset Flex URL
+status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
status open
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
+WARNUNG:
\lang english
-WARNUNG: This portion of the documentation has not been updated for some
- time.
+This portion of the documentation has not been updated for some time.
We certainly hope that it is still accurate, but there are no guarantees.
\end_layout
und es gibt nur einen Schalter
\family sans
in
-\begin_inset space \space{}
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
Ly
\end_inset
X
-\begin_inset space \space{}
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
anzeigen
will
\emph default
introduce an easily exploitable security hole.
- So before you do this, please read the discussion about security in section
-
+ So before you do this, please read the discussion about security in
+\lang ngerman
+
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
LatexCommand ref
reference "sec:Sicherheitshinweise"
\end_inset
The file format of the original file.
- This must be the name of a format that is known to LyX (see section
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-
+ This must be the name of a format that is known to LyX (see
\lang ngerman
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
\end_inset
+).
\lang english
-).
Use
\begin_inset Quotes eld
\end_inset
\begin_layout Standard
Hier finden Sie eine Liste dieser Makros:
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
-
-\lang english
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-$$AbsOrRelPathMaster
-\end_layout
-
-\end_inset
-
- The file path, absolute or relative to the master LyX document.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
-
-\lang english
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-$$AbsOrRelPathParent
-\end_layout
-
-\end_inset
-
- The file path, absolute or relative to the LyX document.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
-
-\lang english
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-$$AbsPath
-\end_layout
-
-\end_inset
-
- The absolute file path.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
-
-\lang english
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-$$Basename
-\end_layout
-
-\end_inset
-
- The filename without path and without the extension.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
-
-\lang english
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-$$Contents(
-\begin_inset Quotes eld
-\end_inset
-
-filename.ext
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
-\end_inset
-
-)
-\end_layout
-
-\end_inset
-
- This macro will expand to the contents of the file with the name
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-filename.ext
-\end_layout
-
-\end_inset
-
-.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
-
-\lang english
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-$$Extension
-\end_layout
-
-\end_inset
-
- The file extension (including the dot).
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
-
-\lang english
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-$$FName
-\end_layout
-
-\end_inset
-
- The filename of the file specified in the external material dialog.
- This is either an absolute name, or it is relative to the LyX document.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
-
-\lang english
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-$$FPath
-\end_layout
-
-\end_inset
-
- The path part of
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-$$FName
-\end_layout
-
-\end_inset
-
- (absolute name or relative to the LyX document).
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
-
-\lang english
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-$$RelPathMaster
-\end_layout
-
-\end_inset
-
- The file path, relative to the master LyX document.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
-
-\lang english
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-$$RelPathParent
-\end_layout
-
-\end_inset
-
- The file path, relative to the LyX document.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
-
-\lang english
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-$$Sysdir
-\end_layout
-
-\end_inset
-
- This macro will expand to the absolute path of the system directory.
- This is typically used to point to the various helper scripts that are
- bundled with LyX.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
-
-\lang english
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-$$Tempname
-\end_layout
-
-\end_inset
-
- A name and full path to a temporary file which will be automatically deleted
- whenever the containing document is closed, or the external material insertion
- deleted.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Standard
-
-\lang english
-All path macros contain a trailing directory separator, so you can construct
- e.
-\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
-\end_inset
-
-g.
-\begin_inset space \space{}
-\end_inset
+\end_layout
-the absolute filename with
+\begin_layout Description
+
+\lang english
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-$$AbsPath$$Basename$$Extension
+$$AbsOrRelPathMaster
\end_layout
\end_inset
-.
+ The file path, absolute or relative to the master LyX document.
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Standard
+\begin_layout Description
\lang english
-The macros above are substituted in all commands unless otherwise noted.
- The command
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-Product
+$$AbsOrRelPathParent
\end_layout
\end_inset
- supports additionally the following substitutions if they are enabled by
- the
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-Transform
+ The file path, absolute or relative to the LyX document.
\end_layout
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout Description
- and
+\lang english
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-TransformCommand
+$$AbsPath
\end_layout
\end_inset
- commands:
+ The absolute file path.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-$$ResizeFront
+$$Basename
\end_layout
\end_inset
- The front part of the resize command.
+ The filename without path and without the extension.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-$$ResizeBack
-\end_layout
+$$Contents(
+\begin_inset Quotes eld
+\end_inset
+filename.ext
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
- The back part of the resize command.
+)
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
+\end_inset
-\lang english
+ This macro will expand to the contents of the file with the name
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-$$RotateFront
+filename.ext
\end_layout
\end_inset
- The front part of the rotation command.
+.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-$$RotateBack
+$$Extension
\end_layout
\end_inset
- The back part of the rotation command.
+ The file extension (including the dot).
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Standard
+\begin_layout Description
\lang english
-The value string of the
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-Option
+$$FName
\end_layout
\end_inset
- command supports additionally the following substitutions if they are enabled
- by the
+ The filename of the file specified in the external material dialog.
+ This is either an absolute name, or it is relative to the LyX document.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
+
+\lang english
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-Transform
+$$FPath
\end_layout
\end_inset
- and
+ The path part of
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-TransformOption
+$$FName
\end_layout
\end_inset
- commands:
+ (absolute name or relative to the LyX document).
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-$$Clip
+$$RelPathMaster
\end_layout
\end_inset
- The clip option.
+ The file path, relative to the master LyX document.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-$$Extra
+$$RelPathParent
\end_layout
\end_inset
- The extra option.
+ The file path, relative to the LyX document.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-$$Resize
+$$Sysdir
\end_layout
\end_inset
- The resize option.
+ This macro will expand to the absolute path of the system directory.
+ This is typically used to point to the various helper scripts that are
+ bundled with LyX.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-$$Rotate
+$$Tempname
\end_layout
\end_inset
- The rotation option.
+ A name and full path to a temporary file which will be automatically deleted
+ whenever the containing document is closed, or the external material insertion
+ deleted.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Standard
\lang english
-You may ask why there are so many path macros.
- There are mainly two reasons:
-\end_layout
+All path macros contain a trailing directory separator, so you can construct
+ e.
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
-\begin_layout Enumerate
+g.
+\begin_inset space \space{}
+\end_inset
-\lang english
-Relative and absolute file names should remain relative or absolute, respectivel
-y.
- Users may have reasons to prefer either form.
- Relative names are useful for portable documents that should work on different
- machines, for example.
- Absolute names may be required by some programs.
-\end_layout
+the absolute filename with
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\begin_layout Enumerate
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-LaTeX treats relative file names differently than LyX and other programs
- in nested included files.
- For LyX, a relative file name is always relative to the document that contains
- the file name.
- For LaTeX, it is always relative to the master document.
- These two definitions are identical if you have only one document, but
- differ if you have a master document that includes part documents.
- That means that relative filenames must be transformed when presented to
- LaTeX.
- Fortunately LyX does this automatically for you if you choose the right
- macros.
+$$AbsPath$$Basename$$Extension
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Standard
+\end_inset
-\lang english
-So which path macro should be used in new template definitions? The rule
- is not difficult:
+.
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Itemize
+\begin_layout Standard
\lang english
-Use
+The macros above are substituted in all commands unless otherwise noted.
+ The command
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-$$AbsPath
+Product
\end_layout
\end_inset
- if an absolute path is required.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Itemize
-
-\lang english
-Use
+ supports additionally the following substitutions if they are enabled by
+ the
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-$$AbsOrRelPathMaster
+Transform
\end_layout
\end_inset
- if the substituted string is some kind of LaTeX input.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Itemize
-
-\lang english
-Else use
+ and
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-$$AbsOrRelPathParent
+TransformCommand
\end_layout
\end_inset
- in order to preserve the user's choice.
+ commands:
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Standard
+\begin_layout Description
\lang english
-There are special cases where this rule does not work and e.
-\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
-\end_inset
-
-g.
-\begin_inset space \space{}
-\end_inset
-
-relative names are needed, but normally it will work just fine.
- One example for such a case is the command
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-ReferencedFile latex "$$AbsOrRelPathMaster$$Basename.pstex_t"
+$$ResizeFront
\end_layout
\end_inset
- in the XFig template above: We can't use the absolute name because the
- copier for
+ The front part of the resize command.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
+
+\lang english
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-.pstex_t
-\end_layout
-
-\end_inset
-
- files needs the relative name in order to rewrite the file content.
+$$ResizeBack
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Section
-Sicherheitshinweise
-\begin_inset CommandInset label
-LatexCommand label
-name "sec:Sicherheitshinweise"
-
\end_inset
-
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Standard
-
-\lang english
-The external material feature interfaces with a lot of external programs
- and does so automatically, so we have to consider the security implications
- of this.
- In particular, since you have the option of including your own filenames
- and/or parameter strings and those are expanded into a command, it seems
- that it would be possible to create a malicious document which executes
- arbitrary commands when a user views or prints the document.
- This is something we definitely want to avoid.
+ The back part of the resize command.
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Standard
+\begin_layout Description
\lang english
-However, since the external program commands are specified in the template
- configuration file only, there are no security issues if LyX is properly
- configured with safe templates only.
- This is so because the external programs are invoked with the
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-execvp
+$$RotateFront
\end_layout
\end_inset
--system call rather than the
+ The front part of the rotation command.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
+
+\lang english
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-system
+$$RotateBack
\end_layout
\end_inset
- system-call, so it's not possible to execute arbitrary commands from the
- filename or parameter section via the shell.
+ The back part of the rotation command.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Standard
\lang english
-This also implies that you are restricted in what command strings you can
- use in the external material templates.
- In particular, pipes and redirection are not readily available.
- This has to be so if LyX should remain safe.
- If you want to use some of the shell features, you should write a safe
- script to do this in a controlled manner, and then invoke the script from
- the command string.
-
+The value string of the
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
+Option
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Standard
+\end_inset
-\lang english
-It is possible to design a template that interacts directly with the shell,
- but since this would allow a malicious user to execute arbitrary commands
- by writing clever filenames and/or parameters, we generally recommend that
- you only use safe scripts that work with the
+ command supports additionally the following substitutions if they are enabled
+ by the
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-execvp
+Transform
\end_layout
\end_inset
- system call in a controlled manner.
- Of course, for use in a controlled environment, it can be tempting to just
- fall back to use ordinary shell scripts.
- If you do so, be aware that you
-\emph on
-will
-\emph default
- provide an easily exploitable security hole in your system.
- Of course it stands to reason that such unsafe templates will never be
- included in the standard LyX distribution, although we do encourage people
- to submit new templates in the open source tradition.
- But LyX as shipped from the official distribution channels will never have
- unsafe templates.
-\end_layout
+ and
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\begin_layout Standard
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-Including external material provides a lot of power, and you have to be
- careful not to introduce security hazards with this power.
- A subtle error in a single line in an innocent looking script can open
- the door to huge security problems.
- So if you do not fully understand the issues, we recommend that you consult
- a knowledgeable security professional or the LyX development team if you
- have any questions about whether a given template is safe or not.
- And do this before you use it in an uncontrolled environment.
+TransformOption
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Chapter
-\start_of_appendix
-Liste der Funktionen für die Verwendung in Layout-Dateien
-\begin_inset CommandInset label
-LatexCommand label
-name "chap:Liste-von-Funktionen"
-
\end_inset
-
+ commands:
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Standard
-\align center
-\begin_inset Tabular
-<lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="6">
-<features tabularvalignment="middle">
-<column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="14col%">
-<column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="14col%">
-<column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="14col%">
-<column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="14col%">
-<column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="14col%">
-<column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="14col%">
-<row>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
-\begin_inset Text
+\begin_layout Description
+
+\lang english
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-accents
+
+\lang english
+$$Clip
\end_layout
\end_inset
-</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
-\begin_inset Text
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-bbding
+ The clip option.
\end_layout
-\end_inset
-</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
-\begin_inset Text
+\begin_layout Description
+
+\lang english
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-dvipost
+
+\lang english
+$$Extra
\end_layout
\end_inset
-</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
-\begin_inset Text
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-fancybox
+ The extra option.
\end_layout
-\end_inset
-</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
-\begin_inset Text
+\begin_layout Description
+
+\lang english
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-hhline
+
+\lang english
+$$Resize
\end_layout
\end_inset
-</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
-\begin_inset Text
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-latexsym
+ The resize option.
\end_layout
-\end_inset
-</cell>
-</row>
-<row>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
-\begin_inset Text
+\begin_layout Description
+
+\lang english
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-amsbsy
+
+\lang english
+$$Rotate
\end_layout
\end_inset
-</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
-\begin_inset Text
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-bm
+ The rotation option.
\end_layout
-\end_inset
-</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
-\begin_inset Text
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
+\begin_layout Standard
+\lang english
+You may ask why there are so many path macros.
+ There are mainly two reasons:
\end_layout
-\end_inset
-</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
-\begin_inset Text
+\begin_layout Enumerate
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-feyn
+\lang english
+Relative and absolute file names should remain relative or absolute, respectivel
+y.
+ Users may have reasons to prefer either form.
+ Relative names are useful for portable documents that should work on different
+ machines, for example.
+ Absolute names may be required by some programs.
\end_layout
-\end_inset
-</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
-\begin_inset Text
+\begin_layout Enumerate
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-hyperref
+\lang english
+LaTeX treats relative file names differently than LyX and other programs
+ in nested included files.
+ For LyX, a relative file name is always relative to the document that contains
+ the file name.
+ For LaTeX, it is always relative to the master document.
+ These two definitions are identical if you have only one document, but
+ differ if you have a master document that includes part documents.
+ That means that relative filenames must be transformed when presented to
+ LaTeX.
+ Fortunately LyX does this automatically for you if you choose the right
+ macros.
\end_layout
-\end_inset
-</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
-\begin_inset Text
+\begin_layout Standard
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-listings
+\lang english
+So which path macro should be used in new template definitions? The rule
+ is not difficult:
\end_layout
-\end_inset
-</cell>
-</row>
-<row>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
-\begin_inset Text
+\begin_layout Itemize
+
+\lang english
+Use
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-amscd
+
+\lang english
+$$AbsPath
\end_layout
\end_inset
-</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
-\begin_inset Text
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-booktabs
+ if an absolute path is required.
\end_layout
-\end_inset
-</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
-\begin_inset Text
+\begin_layout Itemize
+
+\lang english
+Use
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-endnotes
+
+\lang english
+$$AbsOrRelPathMaster
\end_layout
\end_inset
-</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
-\begin_inset Text
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-fixltx2e
+ if the substituted string is some kind of LaTeX input.
\end_layout
-\end_inset
-</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
-\begin_inset Text
+\begin_layout Itemize
+
+\lang english
+Else use
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
+\lang english
+$$AbsOrRelPathParent
\end_layout
\end_inset
-</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
-\begin_inset Text
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-longtable
+ in order to preserve the user's choice.
\end_layout
-\end_inset
-</cell>
-</row>
-<row>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
-\begin_inset Text
+\begin_layout Standard
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-amsmath
-\end_layout
+\lang english
+There are special cases where this rule does not work and e.
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+g.
+\begin_inset space \space{}
\end_inset
-</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
-\begin_inset Text
+
+relative names are needed, but normally it will work just fine.
+ One example for such a case is the command
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
+\lang english
+ReferencedFile latex "$$AbsOrRelPathMaster$$Basename.pstex_t"
\end_layout
\end_inset
-</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
-\begin_inset Text
+
+ in the XFig template above: We can't use the absolute name because the
+ copier for
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-enumitem
+
+\lang english
+.pstex_t
\end_layout
\end_inset
-</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
-\begin_inset Text
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-float
+ files needs the relative name in order to rewrite the file content.
\end_layout
+\begin_layout Section
+Sicherheitshinweise
+\begin_inset CommandInset label
+LatexCommand label
+name "sec:Sicherheitshinweise"
+
\end_inset
-</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
-\begin_inset Text
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-ifsym
+
\end_layout
-\end_inset
-</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
-\begin_inset Text
+\begin_layout Standard
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-lyxskak
+\lang english
+The external material feature interfaces with a lot of external programs
+ and does so automatically, so we have to consider the security implications
+ of this.
+ In particular, since you have the option of including your own filenames
+ and/or parameter strings and those are expanded into a command, it seems
+ that it would be possible to create a malicious document which executes
+ arbitrary commands when a user views or prints the document.
+ This is something we definitely want to avoid.
\end_layout
-\end_inset
-</cell>
-</row>
-<row>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
-\begin_inset Text
+\begin_layout Standard
+
+\lang english
+However, since the external program commands are specified in the template
+ configuration file only, there are no security issues if LyX is properly
+ configured with safe templates only.
+ This is so because the external programs are invoked with the
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-amssymb
+
+\lang english
+execvp
\end_layout
\end_inset
-</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
-\begin_inset Text
+
+-system call rather than the
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-CJK
+
+\lang english
+system
\end_layout
\end_inset
-</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
-\begin_inset Text
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-esint
+ system-call, so it's not possible to execute arbitrary commands from the
+ filename or parameter section via the shell.
\end_layout
-\end_inset
-</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
-\begin_inset Text
+\begin_layout Standard
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-framed
+\lang english
+This also implies that you are restricted in what command strings you can
+ use in the external material templates.
+ In particular, pipes and redirection are not readily available.
+ This has to be so if LyX should remain safe.
+ If you want to use some of the shell features, you should write a safe
+ script to do this in a controlled manner, and then invoke the script from
+ the command string.
+
\end_layout
-\end_inset
-</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
-\begin_inset Text
+\begin_layout Standard
+
+\lang english
+It is possible to design a template that interacts directly with the shell,
+ but since this would allow a malicious user to execute arbitrary commands
+ by writing clever filenames and/or parameters, we generally recommend that
+ you only use safe scripts that work with the
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-ifthen
+
+\lang english
+execvp
\end_layout
\end_inset
-</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
-\begin_inset Text
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
+ system call in a controlled manner.
+ Of course, for use in a controlled environment, it can be tempting to just
+ fall back to use ordinary shell scripts.
+ If you do so, be aware that you
+\emph on
+will
+\emph default
+ provide an easily exploitable security hole in your system.
+ Of course it stands to reason that such unsafe templates will never be
+ included in the standard LyX distribution, although we do encourage people
+ to submit new templates in the open source tradition.
+ But LyX as shipped from the official distribution channels will never have
+ unsafe templates.
\end_layout
-\end_inset
-</cell>
-</row>
-<row>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
-\begin_inset Text
+\begin_layout Standard
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-amstext
+\lang english
+Including external material provides a lot of power, and you have to be
+ careful not to introduce security hazards with this power.
+ A subtle error in a single line in an innocent looking script can open
+ the door to huge security problems.
+ So if you do not fully understand the issues, we recommend that you consult
+ a knowledgeable security professional or the LyX development team if you
+ have any questions about whether a given template is safe or not.
+ And do this before you use it in an uncontrolled environment.
\end_layout
+\begin_layout Chapter
+\start_of_appendix
+Liste der Funktionen für die Verwendung in Layout-Dateien
+\begin_inset CommandInset label
+LatexCommand label
+name "chap:Liste-von-Funktionen"
+
\end_inset
-</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
-\begin_inset Text
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-color
+
\end_layout
-\end_inset
-</cell>
+\begin_layout Standard
+\align center
+\begin_inset Tabular
+<lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="8">
+<features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
+<column alignment="left" valignment="top">
+<column alignment="left" valignment="top">
+<column alignment="left" valignment="top">
+<column alignment="left" valignment="top">
+<column alignment="left" valignment="top">
+<column alignment="left" valignment="top">
+<column alignment="left" valignment="top">
+<column alignment="left" valignment="top">
+<row>
<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
+accents
\end_layout
\end_inset
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
+booktabs
\end_layout
\end_inset
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
+feyn
\end_layout
\end_inset
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-makeidx
+listings
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-</row>
-<row>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-amsthm
+natbib
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-covington
+rotfloat
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
+tfrupee
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-graphicx
+wasysym
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
+</row>
+<row>
<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-jurabib
+amsbsy
\end_layout
\end_inset
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-marvosym
+calc
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-</row>
-<row>
<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-array
+fixltx2e
\end_layout
\end_inset
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-csquotes
+longtable
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
+nomencl
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
+rsphrase
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
+tipa
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-mathdesign
+wrapfig
\end_layout
\end_inset
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-ascii
+amscd
\end_layout
\end_inset
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
+CJK
\end_layout
\end_inset
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
+float
\end_layout
\end_inset
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-mathdesign
+lyxskak
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
+pdfcolmk
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-mathdots
+setspace
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-</row>
-<row>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
+tipx
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
+xargs
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
+</row>
+<row>
<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
+amsmath
\end_layout
\end_inset
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-mathdots
+color
\end_layout
\end_inset
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
+framed
\end_layout
\end_inset
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-subfig
+makeidx
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-</row>
-</lyxtabular>
-
-\end_inset
-
-
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Standard
-\align center
-\begin_inset Tabular
-<lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="6">
-<features tabularvalignment="middle">
-<column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="14col%">
-<column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="14col%">
-<column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="14col%">
-<column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="14col%">
-<column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="14col%">
-<column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="14col%">
-<row>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-makeidx
+pdfpages
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-pdfcolmk
+shapepar
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-setspace
+tone
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-textcomp
+xcolor
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
+</row>
+<row>
<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-ulem
+amssymb
\end_layout
\end_inset
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-xargs
+covington
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-</row>
-<row>
<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-marvosym
+graphicx
\end_layout
\end_inset
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-pdfpages
+marvosym
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-slashed
+pifont
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-textgreek
+slashed
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-undertilde
+txfonts
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-xcolor
+xy
\end_layout
\end_inset
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-mathdesign
+amstext
\end_layout
\end_inset
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-pifont
+csquotes
\end_layout
\end_inset
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-soul
+hhline
\end_layout
\end_inset
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-tfrupee
+mathdesign
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-units
+pmboxdraw
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-xy
+soul
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-</row>
-<row>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-mathdots
+ulem
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-pmboxdraw
+yhmath
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
+</row>
+<row>
<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-splitidx
+amsthm
\end_layout
\end_inset
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-tipa
+dvipost
\end_layout
\end_inset
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-url
+hyperref
\end_layout
\end_inset
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
+mathdots
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-</row>
-<row>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-mathrsfs
+polyglossia
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-polyglossia
+splitidx
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-subfig
+undertilde
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-tipx
+
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
+</row>
+<row>
<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
+array
\end_layout
\end_inset
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-yhmath
+endnotes
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-</row>
-<row>
<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-mhchem
+ifsym
\end_layout
\end_inset
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-prettyref
+mathrsfs
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-subscript
+prettyref
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-tone
+subfig
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-varioref
+units
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-multirow
+ascii
\end_layout
\end_inset
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-pxfonts
+enumitem
\end_layout
\end_inset
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
+ifthen
\end_layout
\end_inset
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-txfonts
+mhchem
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-verbatim
+pxfonts
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
+subscript
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-</row>
-<row>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
+url
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\end_inset
</cell>
+</row>
+<row>
<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
+bbding
\end_layout
\end_inset
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
+esint
\end_layout
\end_inset
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
+jurabib
\end_layout
\end_inset
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
+multicol
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-</row>
-<row>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-natbib
+refstyle
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-rotating
+textcomp
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
+varioref
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+</row>
+<row>
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-wasysym
+bm
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
+fancybox
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-</row>
-<row>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-nomencl
+latexsym
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-rotfloat
+multirow
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
+rotating
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
+textgreek
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-wrapfig
+verbatim
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
+Keine
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
-\lang english
-none
-\family roman
-\series medium
-\shape up
-\size normal
-\emph off
-\bar no
-\strikeout off
-\uuline off
-\uwave off
-\noun off
-\color none
- No particular color -- clear or default
+Farbe Keine spezielle Farbe -- entfernt Farbe oder setzt Farbe auf Voreinstellun
+g
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
-
-\lang english
-black
+Schwarz
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
-
-\lang english
-white
+Weiß
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
-
-\lang english
-red
+Rot
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
-
-\lang english
-green
+Grün
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
-
-\lang english
-blue
+Blau
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
-
-\lang english
-cyan
+Cyan
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
-
-\lang english
-magenta
+Magenta
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
-
-\lang english
-yellow
+Gelb
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
-
-\lang english
-cursor Cursor color
+Cursor Cursorfarbe
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
-
-\lang english
-background Background color
+Hintergrund Hintergrundfarbe
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
\lang english
-foreground Foreground color
+foreground
+\lang ngerman
+ Vordergrundfarbe
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
-
-\lang english
-selection Background color of selected text
+Auswahl Hintergrundfarbe des ausgewählten Texts
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
+Ausgewählter
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
-\lang english
-selectiontext Foreground color of selected text
+Text Vordergrundfarbe des ausgewählten Texts
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
+Geänderter
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
-\lang english
-changedtextauthor1 Changed text color author 1
+Text
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+(1.Autor) Geänderter Text des 1.Autors
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
+Geänderter
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
-\lang english
-changedtextauthor2 Changed text color author 2
+Text
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+(2.Autor) Geänderter Text des 2.Autors
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
+Geänderter
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
-\lang english
-changedtextauthor3 Changed text color author 3
+Text
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+(3.Autor) Geänderter Text des 3.Autors
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
+Geänderter
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
-\lang english
-changedtextauthor4 Changed text color author 4
+Text
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+(4.Autor) Geänderter Text des 4.Autors
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
+Geänderter
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
-\lang english
-changedtextauthor5 Changed text color author 5
+Text
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+(5.Autor) Geänderter Text des 5.Autors
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
-#LyX 2.0 created this file. For more info see http://www.lyx.org/
-\lyxformat 413
+#LyX 2.1 created this file. For more info see http://www.lyx.org/
+\lyxformat 474
\begin_document
\begin_header
\textclass scrbook
\pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
\myTOC
\mainmatter }
+
+% increase link area for cross-references and autoname them,
+\AtBeginDocument{\renewcommand{\ref}[1]{\mbox{\autoref{#1}}}}
+\addto\extrasspanish{%
+ \renewcommand*{\equationautorefname}[1]{}%
+ \renewcommand{\sectionautorefname}{sec.\negthinspace}%
+ \renewcommand{\subsectionautorefname}{sec.\negthinspace}%
+ \renewcommand{\subsubsectionautorefname}{sec.\negthinspace}%
+}
\end_preamble
\options fleqn,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,titlepage,captions=tableheading
\use_default_options false
\font_roman default
\font_sans default
\font_typewriter default
+\font_math auto
\font_default_family default
\use_non_tex_fonts false
\font_sc false
\font_osf false
\font_sf_scale 100
\font_tt_scale 100
-
\graphics default
\default_output_format default
\output_sync 0
\pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue,pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
\papersize default
\use_geometry false
-\use_amsmath 0
-\use_esint 0
-\use_mhchem 0
-\use_mathdots 1
+\use_package amsmath 0
+\use_package amssymb 0
+\use_package cancel 0
+\use_package esint 0
+\use_package mathdots 1
+\use_package mathtools 0
+\use_package mhchem 0
+\use_package stackrel 0
+\use_package stmaryrd 0
+\use_package undertilde 0
\cite_engine basic
+\cite_engine_type default
+\biblio_style plain
\use_bibtopic false
\use_indices false
\paperorientation portrait
\suppress_date false
+\justification true
\use_refstyle 0
\branch OutDated
\selected 0
\begin_inset Newline newline
\end_inset
-Versión 2.0.x
+Versión 2.1.x
\end_layout
\begin_layout Standard
contiene archivos de mapas de teclado.
Véase
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
LatexCommand ref
reference "sec:keymap"
\end_inset
contiene las clases de textos y los archivos de los módulos descritos en
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-
+
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
LatexCommand ref
reference "cap:Instalación-de-nuevas"
\end_layout
\begin_layout Subsection
-Otros archivos en un par de líneas...
+Otros archivos en un par de líneas
\end_layout
\begin_layout Labeling
\end_inset
+, véase
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "chap:Inserción-de-material"
+
+\end_inset
+
.
\end_layout
contiene una lista de los idiomas actualmente soportados por LyX.
\end_layout
+\begin_layout Labeling
+\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+latexfonts
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+
+\lang english
+ contains information about the supported fonts.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Labeling
+\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+layouttranslations
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+
+\lang english
+this file contains translations for internationalized paragraph styles
+\lang spanish
+ (véase
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:I18n"
+
+\end_inset
+
+).
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Labeling
+\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+unicodesymbols
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+
+\lang english
+ this file contains information about unicode-encoded glyphs and the way
+ they are supported by LyX via LaTeX.
+\end_layout
+
\begin_layout Section
Directorio de configuración personal
\end_layout
por ejemplo.
\end_layout
+\begin_layout Standard
+
+\lang english
+The
+\lang spanish
+
+\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+MIME
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+
+\lang english
+ type of a format is optional, but if it is specified, it must be unique
+ across all formats.
+ It is used to detect files of this format from the file contents.
+ For some important file formats there is no MIME type officially registered
+ with the
+\lang spanish
+
+\begin_inset CommandInset href
+LatexCommand href
+name "IANA"
+target "http://www.iana.org/assignments/media-types/"
+
+\end_inset
+
+.
+
+\lang english
+Therefore LyX uses the extended list of MIME types as specified by
+\lang spanish
+
+\begin_inset CommandInset href
+LatexCommand href
+name "freedesktop.org"
+target "http://www.freedesktop.org/wiki/Specifications/shared-mime-info-spec"
+
+\end_inset
+
+.
+\end_layout
+
\begin_layout Standard
La opción
\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+$$b
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+
+\lang english
+The base name (without filename extension) in the LyX temporary directory
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Labeling
+\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+$$p
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+
+\lang english
+The full directory path of the LyX temporary directory
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Labeling
+\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+$$r
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+
+\lang english
+The full pathname to the original LyX file being processed
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Labeling
+\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+$$f
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+
+\lang english
+The filename (without any directory path) of the LyX file.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Labeling
+\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
\begin_layout Plain Layout
$$l
\end_layout
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+nice
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+
+\lang english
+Needs a
+\begin_inset Quotes fld
+\end_inset
+
+nice
+\begin_inset Quotes frd
+\end_inset
+
+ file from the backend, which in practice means a LaTeX file like the one
+ we would export, without
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
+input@path
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Labeling
+\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
\begin_layout Plain Layout
xml
\end_layout
LyX encuentra automáticamente estas 'cadenas' de convertidores y siempre
escogerá la cadena más corta posible.
Sin embargo, aún puedes definir múltiples métodos de conversión entre formatos.
- Por ejemplo, la configuración estándar de LyX provee tres caminos para
- convertir LaTeX a PDF: directamente, usando
+ Por ejemplo, la configuración estándar de LyX provee cinco caminos para
+ convertir LaTeX a PDF:
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Enumerate
+directamente, usando
\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
status collapsed
\end_inset
-; mediante (DVI y) PostScript, usando
+
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Enumerate
+mediante (DVI y) PostScript, usando
\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
status collapsed
\end_inset
-; o mediante DVI, usando
+
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Enumerate
+mediante DVI, usando
\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
status collapsed
\end_inset
-.
- Para construir estas cadenas alternativas tienes que definir múltiples
- 'formatos de archivo' objetivo, como se describe en la sección
+
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Enumerate
+directamente, usando
+\lang english
+
+\lang spanish
+
+\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+XeTeX
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Enumerate
+directamente, usando
+\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+LuaTeX
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Standard
+Para construir estas cadenas alternativas tienes que definir múltiples 'formatos
+ de archivo' objetivo, como se describe en la sección
\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\end_inset
-,
+ (
+\lang english
+for
+\lang spanish
+
\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-pdf2
+ps2pdf
\end_layout
\end_inset
-, y
+),
\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-pdf3
+pdf2
\end_layout
\end_inset
-, todos ellos compartiendo la extensión
+ (
+\lang english
+for
+\lang spanish
+
\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-.pdf
+pdflatex
\end_layout
\end_inset
-, y que corresponden a los métodos de conversión antes mencionados.
+),
+\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+pdf3
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+
+\lang english
+(for
+\lang spanish
+
+\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+dvipdfm
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+),
+\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+pdf4
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ (
+\lang english
+for
+\lang spanish
+
+\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+XeTeX
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+), y
+\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+pdf5
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ (
+\lang english
+for
+\lang spanish
+
+\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+LuaTeX
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+), todos ellos compartiendo la extensión
+\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+.pdf
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+, y que corresponden a los métodos de conversión antes mencionados.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Chapter
\end_inset
-\begin_inset Argument
+\begin_inset Argument 1
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\end_layout
\begin_layout Subsection
-Declaración de la clase de documento
+Declaración de la clase de documento
+\lang english
+and classification
\end_layout
\begin_layout Standard
\size small
#
\backslash
-DeclareLaTeXClass{article}
+DeclareLaT
+\size default
+
+\begin_inset ERT
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+{}
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+
+\size small
+eXClass{Article (Standard Class)}
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+
+\size small
+#
+\backslash
+DeclareCategory{Articles}
\end_layout
\begin_layout Standard
-La segunda línea se usa en la (re)configuración de LyX.
+La segunda y
+\lang english
+third
+\lang spanish
+ línea se usan en la (re)configuración de LyX.
El archivo `layout' es leido por el guión de LaTeX
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
se ignora.
La primera línea es solo un comentario y la segunda contiene la declaración
- de la clase de texto.
+
+\lang english
+mandatory
+\lang spanish
+ de la clase de texto
+\lang english
+ and the third line contains the optional classification of the class
+\lang spanish
+.
Si estas líneas aparecen en un archivo llamado
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_inset Quotes fld
\end_inset
-article
+Article (Standard Class)
\begin_inset Quotes frd
\end_inset
\end_inset
.
+
+\lang english
+The category (
+\begin_inset Quotes eld
+\end_inset
+
+Articles
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
+ in the example) is also used in the
+\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
+Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
+Settings
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ dialog: the text classes are grouped by these categories (which are usually
+ genres, so typical categories are
+\begin_inset Quotes eld
+\end_inset
+
+Articles
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
+,
+\begin_inset Quotes eld
+\end_inset
+
+Books
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
+,
+\begin_inset Quotes eld
+\end_inset
+
+Reports
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
+,
+\begin_inset Quotes eld
+\end_inset
+
+Letters
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
+,
+\begin_inset Quotes eld
+\end_inset
+
+Presentations
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
+,
+\begin_inset Quotes eld
+\end_inset
+
+Curricula Vitae
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
+ etc.).
+ If no category has been declared, the class will be put in the
+\begin_inset Quotes eld
+\end_inset
+
+Uncategorized
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
+ group.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Standard
\size small
#
\backslash
-DeclareLaTeXClass[article]{article (con mis encabezados)}
+DeclareLaT
+\size default
+
+\begin_inset ERT
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+{}
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+
+\size small
+eXClass[article]{Article (con Mis Encabezados)}
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+
+\size small
+#
+\backslash
+DeclareCategory{Articles}
\end_layout
\begin_layout Standard
\begin_inset Quotes fld
\end_inset
-article (con mis encabezados)
+Article (con Mis Encabezados)
\begin_inset Quotes frd
\end_inset
\size small
#
\backslash
-DeclareLaTeXClass[article,foo.sty]{article (con mis encabezados)}
+DeclareLaT
+\size default
+
+\begin_inset ERT
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+{}
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+
+\size small
+eXClass[article,foo.sty]{Article (con Mis Encabezados)}
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+
+\size small
+#
+\backslash
+DeclareCategory{Articles}
\end_layout
\begin_layout Standard
\size small
#
\backslash
-DeclareDocBookClass[article]{SGML (DocBook article)}
+DeclareDocBookClass[article]{SGML (DocBook Article)}
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+
+\size small
+#
+\backslash
+DeclareCategory{Articles}
\end_layout
\begin_layout Standard
\size small
#
\backslash
-DeclareLaTeXClass[class,package.sty]{descripción del formato}
+DeclareLaT
+\size default
+
+\begin_inset ERT
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+{}
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+
+\size small
+eXClass[class,package.sty]{descripción del formato}
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+
+\size small
+#
+\backslash
+DeclareCategory{
+\lang english
+category
+\lang spanish
+}
\end_layout
\begin_layout Standard
\begin_layout LyX-Code
#
\backslash
-DeclareLyXModule[endnotes.sty]{Endnotes}
+DeclareL
+\begin_inset ERT
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+{}
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+yXModule[endnotes.sty]{Endnotes}
\end_layout
\begin_layout Standard
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-PageStyle
+PackageOptions
\end_layout
\end_inset
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\emph on
-plain
+string
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-empty
+string
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
-\begin_inset Flex Code
+]
+\lang english
+Specifies options, given in the second string, for the package named by
+ the first string.
+ For example,
+\lang spanish
+
+\begin_inset Quotes fld
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+PackageOptions natbib square
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset Quotes frd
+\end_inset
+
+
+\lang english
+will cause
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
+natbib
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ to be loaded with the
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
+square
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ option.
+ (For TeXperts, this causes LyX to output:
+\lang spanish
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\backslash
+PassOptionsToPackage{natbib}{square}
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+
+\lang english
+prior to loading
+\lang spanish
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+natbib
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+.)
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+PageStyle
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\emph on
+plain
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+,
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+empty
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+,
+\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
sentido.
Por ejemplo una alineación a la derecha o al centro de una lista numerada
no es posible).
-
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-BabelPreamble
+Argument
\end_layout
\end_inset
- Esto sobrescribirá completamente cualquier anterior declaración
-\begin_inset Newline newline
-\end_inset
-
-
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-BabelPreamble
+int
\end_layout
\end_inset
- para este estilo.
- Debe terminar con
-\begin_inset Quotes eld
-\end_inset
-
-
+]
+\lang english
+Defines argument number <int> of a command\SpecialChar \slash{}
+environment associated with the
+ current style.
+ This is useful for things like section headings, and only makes sense with
+ LaTeX.
+ Every (optional or required) argument of a command or environment -- except
+ for the required argument that is associated with the content of the paragraph
+ itself -- has a separate definition, where the number specifies the order
+ of the arguments.
+ The definition must end with
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-EndBabelPreamble
+
+\lang english
+EndArgument
\end_layout
\end_inset
+.
+ So a command with two optional arguments has:
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_deeper
+\begin_layout Quote
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
-\end_inset
+\family typewriter
+Argument 1
+\end_layout
-.
- Véase la sección
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout Quote
+\family typewriter
+...
+\end_layout
-\begin_inset CommandInset ref
-LatexCommand ref
-reference "sub:I18n"
+\begin_layout Quote
-\end_inset
+\family typewriter
+EndArgument
+\end_layout
- para detalles sobre su uso.
+\begin_layout Quote
+
+\family typewriter
+Argument 2
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
+\begin_layout Quote
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-BottomSep
+\family typewriter
+...
\end_layout
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout Quote
- [
+\family typewriter
+EndArgument
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Standard
+
+\lang english
+Inside the
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-float=0
+
+\lang english
+Argument
\end_layout
\end_inset
-]
-\begin_inset Foot
+ definition, the following specifications are possible:
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Itemize
+\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Anotar que aquí un 'float' es un número real, como: 1.5.
+LabelString
\end_layout
\end_inset
- El espacio vertical con el que el último de una cadena de párrafos con
- este estilo se separa del siguiente párrafo.
- Si el párrafo siguiente tiene otro estilo, las separaciones no son simplemente
- añadidas sino que se pone la máxima.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Category
+[string]
\end_layout
\end_inset
+\lang english
+The string that will appear both in the menu (to insert this argument) and
+ on the argument inset button (unless you also specify a separate
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-[string]
+
+\lang english
+MenuString
\end_layout
\end_inset
- La categoría para este estilo.
- Se usa para agrupar estilos relacionados en el recuadro de estilo en la
- barra de herramientas.
- Se puede poner cualquier cadena en 'string' pero mejor usar categorías
- existentes con tus propios estilos.
-\end_layout
+).
+ For the menu, you can define an accelerator by appending the respective
+ character to the string, divided by
+\begin_inset Quotes fld
+\end_inset
+
+|
+\begin_inset Quotes frd
+\end_inset
+
+ (e.
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+g.
+\begin_inset space \space{}
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset Quotes fld
+\end_inset
+
-\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-CommandDepth
+
+\lang english
+Short Title|S
\end_layout
\end_inset
- Profundidad del comando XML.
- Usado solo con formatos tipo XML.
+
+\begin_inset Quotes frd
+\end_inset
+
+).
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
+\begin_layout Itemize
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-CopyStyle
+MenuString
\end_layout
\end_inset
\end_inset
- Copia todas las características de un estilo existente en el actual.
-\end_layout
+\lang english
+A separate string for the menu.
+ You can define an accelerator by appending the respective character to
+ the string, divided by
+\begin_inset Quotes fld
+\end_inset
-\begin_layout Description
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
+|
+\begin_inset Quotes frd
+\end_inset
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-DependsOn
-\end_layout
+ (e.
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+g.
+\begin_inset space \space{}
\end_inset
- [
+
+\begin_inset Quotes fld
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-<nombre>
+
+\lang english
+Short Title|S
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] El nombre de un estilo cuyo preámbulo debería salir
-\emph on
-antes
-\emph default
- que éste.
- Esto permite asegurar un orden de los retazos de preámbulo si las definiciones
- de macros dependen de otra.
-\begin_inset Foot
+
+\begin_inset Quotes frd
+\end_inset
+
+).
+ This specification is optional.
+ If it is not given the
+\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Anotar que, excepto esta funcionalidad, no hay forma de asegurar ningún
- orden de los preámbulos.
- El orden que se ve en una versión dada de LyX puede cambiar sin previo
- aviso en versiones posteriores.
+
+\lang english
+LabelString
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
+ will be used instead for the menu.
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
+\begin_layout Itemize
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-EndLabeltype
+Tooltip
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\emph on
-No_Label
-\emph default
-, Box, Filled_Box, Static
+[string]
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] El tipo de etiqueta que se pone al final del párrafo (o secuencia de párrafos
- si
+
+\lang english
+A longer explanatory text that appears in the tooltip when hovering over
+ the argument inset.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Itemize
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LatexType
+Mandatory
\end_layout
\end_inset
- es
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Environment
+
+\emph on
+0
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Item_Environment
+1
\end_layout
\end_inset
- o
+]
+\lang english
+Declare if this is a mandatory (1) or an optional (0) argument.
+ Mandatory arguments will be output empty if not given, while optional arguments
+ will not be output at all.
+ By default, mandatory arguments are delimited by
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-List_Environment
+
+\lang english
+{...}
\end_layout
\end_inset
-).
-
+, while optional arguments are delimited by
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-No_Label
+
+\lang english
+[...]
\end_layout
\end_inset
- quiere decir
-\begin_inset Quotes fld
-\end_inset
-nada
-\begin_inset Quotes frd
-\end_inset
+\end_layout
-,
+\begin_layout Itemize
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Box
+Requires
\end_layout
\end_inset
- (resp.
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-Filled_Box
+[int=0]
\end_layout
\end_inset
-) es un cuadrado blanco (resp.
-\begin_inset space ~
+
+\lang english
+defines another argument (by its number) which this argument requires to
+ be output if it is itself output.
+ E.
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
-negro) adecuado para marcas finales de demostraciones,
+g., in LaTeX commands, optional arguments often require previous optional
+ arguments to be output (at least empty), as in
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Static
-\end_layout
-\end_inset
+\lang english
- es una cadena de texto explícito.
+\backslash
+command[][argument]{text}
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
+\end_inset
+
+.
+ This can be achieved by the statement
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-EndLabelString
+
+\lang english
+Requires 1
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
+ within
+\lang spanish
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-string=""
+Argument 2
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] La cadena usada para una etiqueta con un
+.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Itemize
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Static
+LeftDelim
\end_layout
\end_inset
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-EndLabelType
+[string]
\end_layout
\end_inset
-.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
-\begin_inset Foot
+\lang english
+defines a custom left delimiter (instead of
+\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-\emph on
-Nota de Jean-Marc:
-\emph default
- No estoy seguro de que estas configuraciones (Fill_Bottom, Fill_Top) tengan
- mucho uso, y probablemente se quitarán en próximas versiones.
+\lang english
+{
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
-\begin_inset Note Note
+ or
+\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-No encuentro
-\begin_inset Quotes fld
-\end_inset
-Espacio vertical encima
-\begin_inset Quotes frd
-\end_inset
+\lang english
+[
+\end_layout
- ni
-\begin_inset Quotes fld
\end_inset
-Espacio vertical abajo
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
-\end_inset
+).
+ A line break in the output can be indicated by
+\lang spanish
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
- en Editar\SpecialChar \menuseparator
-Configuración de párrafo, esto parece obsoleto, como dice Jean-Marc
- (Nota de J.P.
- Chrétien, feb.
- 2011)
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+<br/>
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
+.
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
+\begin_layout Itemize
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Font
+RightDelim
\end_layout
\end_inset
- La tipografía usada para el cuerpo del texto
-\emph on
-y
-\emph default
- para la etiqueta.
- Véase la sección
-\begin_inset space ~
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+[string]
+\end_layout
+
\end_inset
+
+\lang english
+defines a custom right delimiter (instead of
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
-\begin_inset CommandInset ref
-LatexCommand ref
-reference "sub:Tipografías"
+\lang english
+}
+\end_layout
\end_inset
-.
- Anotar que al definir esta tipografía se define automáticamente la de la
- etiqueta,
+ or
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LabelFont
+
+\lang english
+]
\end_layout
\end_inset
-.
- Así que debería definirse primero ésta si se quiere definir también
+).
+ A line break in the output can be indicated by
+\lang spanish
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LabelFont
+<br/>
\end_layout
\end_inset
.
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
+\begin_layout Itemize
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-FreeSpacing
+DefaultArg
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
-\emph on
-
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-0
+[string]
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
-\emph default
-,
+
+\lang english
+defines an argument that is inserted if and only if no user-specified arguments
+ were given, i.
\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
+e.
+\begin_inset space \space{}
+\end_inset
+
+if no argument inset has been inserted (note that also an empty argument
+ inset omits the DefaultArg).
+ Multiple arguments need to be separated by comma.
+\end_layout
+\begin_layout Itemize
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-1
+PresetArg
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] Usualmente LyX no permite insertar más de un espacio entre palabras, puesto
- que un espacio se considera como la separación entre dos palabras, no un
- carácter o símbolo por sí mismo.
- Esto es una buena cosa pero a veces puede ser molesta, por ejemplo, para
- escribir código de programas o de LaTeX puro.
- Por esta razón se puede habilitar
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-FreeSpacing
+[string]
\end_layout
\end_inset
-.
- Anotar que LyX creará espacios protegidos para los espacios adicionales
- en modos que no sean LaTeX.
+\lang english
+defines an argument that is inserted in any case (alone or in addition to
+ user-specified arguments).
+ Multiple arguments need to be separated by comma.
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
+\begin_layout Itemize
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-HTML*
+Font
\end_layout
\end_inset
- Para la salida XHTML.
- Véase
+
+\lang english
+The font used for the argument content, see
+\lang spanish
+
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
LatexCommand ref
-reference "sub:Estilos-de-párrafo-XHTML"
+reference "sub:Tipografías"
\end_inset
.
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
+\begin_layout Itemize
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-InnerTag
+LabelFont
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [[FIXME]] (Usado solo con formatos tipo XML.)
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-InPreamble
-\end_layout
+
+\lang english
+The font used for the label; see
+\lang spanish
+
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:Tipografías"
\end_inset
- [
-\emph on
+.
+\end_layout
+\begin_layout Itemize
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\emph on
-0
+Decoration
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
-\emph default
-,
-\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
-\end_inset
-
-
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-1
+
+\emph on
+Classic
+\emph default
+, Minimalistic, Conglomerate
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] Si
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-1
+]
+\lang english
+describes the rendering style used for the inset's frame and buttons.
\end_layout
-\end_inset
-
-, marca el estilo para ser incluido en el preámbulo del documento en lugar
- de en el cuerpo del documento.
- Útil para clases de documento que piden informaciones tales como título
- y autor en el preámbulo.
- Esto solo funciona para estilos para los que
+\begin_layout Itemize
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LatexType
+AutoInsert
\end_layout
\end_inset
- es
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Command
+[int=0]
\end_layout
\end_inset
- o
+
+\lang english
+If this is set to
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Paragraph
+
+\lang english
+1
\end_layout
\end_inset
-.
+, this argument is automatically inserted when the respective style is selected.
+ Currently, only one argument per style\SpecialChar \slash{}
+layout can be automatically inserted.
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
+\begin_layout Standard
+
+\lang english
+By default, the text entered in the LyX workarea in the respective layout
+ is the last (mandatory) argument of a command if the
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-InTitle
+
+\lang english
+LatexType
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
-\emph on
-
+ is
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-\emph on
-0
+\lang english
+Command
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
-\emph default
-,
-\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
-\end_inset
-
-
+.
+ However, arguments with the prefix
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-1
+
+\lang english
+post:
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] Si es
+ are output after this workarea argument.
+ Note that post-argument numbering restarts at 1, so the first argument
+ following the workarea argument is
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-1
+
+\lang english
+post:1
\end_layout
\end_inset
-, marca el estilo como parte de un bloque de título (véanse también las
- entradas globales
+.
+ Post-arguments are ignored in any other
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-TitleLatexType
+
+\lang english
+LatexType
\end_layout
\end_inset
- y
+ than
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-TitleLatexName
+
+\lang english
+Command
\end_layout
\end_inset
-).
+.
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
+\begin_layout Standard
+
+\lang english
+Arguments for list
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-ItemSep
+
+\lang english
+
+\backslash
+item
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
+s (as in
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-float=0
+
+\lang english
+
+\backslash
+item[foo]
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] Esto proporciona espacio extra entre párrafos que tienen el mismo formato.
- Si se ponen otros formatos en un entorno, cada uno es separado con el comando
- de entorno
+) have the prefix
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-ParSep
+
+\lang english
+item:
\end_layout
\end_inset
-.
- Pero el conjunto de los ítems del entorno son separados adicionalmente
- con este
+ followed by the number (e.
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+g.
+\begin_inset space \space{}
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-ItemSep
+
+\lang english
+Argument item:1
\end_layout
\end_inset
-.
- Anotar que esto es un
-\emph on
- multiplicador.
+)
\end_layout
+\end_deeper
\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-ItemTag
+BabelPreamble
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [[FIXME]] (Usado solo con formatos tipo XML.)
-\end_layout
+ Esto sobrescribirá completamente cualquier anterior declaración
+\begin_inset Newline newline
+\end_inset
+
-\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-KeepEmpty
+BabelPreamble
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
-\emph on
+ para este estilo.
+ Debe terminar con
+\begin_inset Quotes eld
+\end_inset
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\emph on
-0
+EndBabelPreamble
\end_layout
\end_inset
-\emph default
-,
-\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
+.
+ Véase la sección
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-1
-\end_layout
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:I18n"
\end_inset
-] Habitualmente, LyX no permite dejar un párrafo vacío, porque llevaría
- a una salida de LaTeX vacía.
- Sin embargo, hay algunos casos donde podría ser útil: en una plantilla
- de carta, los campos requeridos pueden proporcionarse vacíos, así el usuario
- no los olvida; en algunos casos especiales, se puede usar un estilo que
- no contiene texto real como una especie de salto.
+ para detalles sobre su uso.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LabelBottomsep
+BottomSep
\end_layout
\end_inset
\end_inset
-] El espacio vertical entre la etiqueta y el cuerpo del texto.
- Solo se usa para etiquetas que están sobre el cuerpo del texto (
+]
+\begin_inset Foot
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Anotar que aquí un 'float' es un número real, como: 1.5.
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ El espacio vertical con el que el último de una cadena de párrafos con
+ este estilo se separa del siguiente párrafo.
+ Si el párrafo siguiente tiene otro estilo, las separaciones no son simplemente
+ añadidas sino que se pone la máxima.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Top_Environment
+Category
\end_layout
\end_inset
- y
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Centered_Top_Environment
+[string]
\end_layout
\end_inset
-).
+ La categoría para este estilo.
+ Se usa para agrupar estilos relacionados en el recuadro de estilo en la
+ barra de herramientas.
+ Se puede poner cualquier cadena en 'string' pero mejor usar categorías
+ existentes con tus propios estilos.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LabelCounter
+CommandDepth
\end_layout
\end_inset
+ Profundidad del comando XML.
+ Usado solo con formatos tipo XML.
+\end_layout
-\lang english
-
-\lang spanish
-[
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-string=""
+CopyStyle
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] El nombre del contador para numeración automática.
-\begin_inset Newline newline
-\end_inset
-
-Esto
-\emph on
-debe
-\emph default
- ponerse si
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LabelType
+[string]
\end_layout
\end_inset
- es
+ Copia todas las características de un estilo existente en el actual.
+
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Counter
+DependsOn
\end_layout
\end_inset
-.
- En ese caso, el contador avanzará un paso cada vez que que aparezca el
- estilo.
-\begin_inset Newline newline
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+<nombre>
+\end_layout
+
\end_inset
-Esto
+] El nombre de un estilo cuyo preámbulo debería salir
\emph on
-puede
+antes
\emph default
- ponerse también si
-\begin_inset Flex Code
+ que éste.
+ Esto permite asegurar un orden de los retazos de preámbulo si las definiciones
+ de macros dependen de otra.
+\begin_inset Foot
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LabelType
+Anotar que, excepto esta funcionalidad, no hay forma de asegurar ningún
+ orden de los preámbulos.
+ El orden que se ve en una versión dada de LyX puede cambiar sin previo
+ aviso en versiones posteriores.
\end_layout
\end_inset
- es
+
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Enumerate
+EndLabeltype
\end_layout
\end_inset
-, aunque este caso es un poco complicado.
- Supongamos que declaras
-\begin_inset Quotes eld
-\end_inset
-
-
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LabelCounter myenum
+
+\emph on
+No_Label
+\emph default
+, Box, Filled_Box, Static
\end_layout
\end_inset
+] El tipo de etiqueta que se pone al final del párrafo (o secuencia de párrafos
+ si
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+LatexType
+\end_layout
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
-.
- Entonces, los contadores reales usados son
+ es
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-myenumi
+Environment
\end_layout
\end_inset
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-myenumii
+Item_Environment
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+ o
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-myenumiii
+List_Environment
\end_layout
\end_inset
-, y
+).
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-myenumiv
+No_Label
\end_layout
\end_inset
-, como en LaTeX.
- Estos contadores deben declararse todos por separado.
-\begin_inset Newline newline
+ quiere decir
+\begin_inset Quotes fld
\end_inset
-Véase la sección
-\begin_inset CommandInset ref
-LatexCommand ref
-reference "sub:Contadores"
+nada
+\begin_inset Quotes frd
+\end_inset
+
+,
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Box
+\end_layout
\end_inset
- para detalles sobre contadores
+ (resp.
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LabelFont
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+Filled_Box
\end_layout
\end_inset
- La tipografía usada para la etiqueta.
- Véase la sección
+) es un cuadrado blanco (resp.
\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
+negro) adecuado para marcas finales de demostraciones,
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\begin_inset CommandInset ref
-LatexCommand ref
-reference "sub:Tipografías"
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Static
+\end_layout
\end_inset
-.
+ es una cadena de texto explícito.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LabelIndent
+EndLabelString
\end_layout
\end_inset
\end_inset
-] Texto que indica cuánto se debe sangrar una etiqueta.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
+] La cadena usada para una etiqueta con un
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LabelSep
+Static
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-string=""
+EndLabelType
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] Texto que indica el valor de espacio horizontal entre la etiqueta y el
- cuerpo del texto.
- Solo se usa para etiquetas que no están sobre el cuerpo del texto.
+.
+
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
-\begin_inset Flex Code
+\begin_inset Foot
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LabelString
+
+\emph on
+Nota de Jean-Marc:
+\emph default
+ No estoy seguro de que estas configuraciones (Fill_Bottom, Fill_Top) tengan
+ mucho uso, y probablemente se quitarán en próximas versiones.
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
-\begin_inset Flex Code
+
+\begin_inset Note Note
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-string=""
-\end_layout
+No encuentro
+\begin_inset Quotes fld
+\end_inset
+Espacio vertical encima
+\begin_inset Quotes frd
\end_inset
-] La cadena usada para una etiqueta del
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
+ ni
+\begin_inset Quotes fld
+\end_inset
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LabelType
+Espacio vertical abajo
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
+ en Editar\SpecialChar \menuseparator
+Configuración de párrafo, esto parece obsoleto, como dice Jean-Marc
+ (Nota de J.P.
+ Chrétien, feb.
+ 2011)
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Static
\end_layout
-\end_inset
-
-.
- Si
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LabelCounter
+Font
\end_layout
\end_inset
- está establecido, esta cadena puede contener los comandos especiales de
- formato descritos en la sección
+ La tipografía usada para el cuerpo del texto
+\emph on
+y
+\emph default
+ para la etiqueta.
+ Véase la sección
\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
LatexCommand ref
-reference "sub:Contadores"
+reference "sub:Tipografías"
\end_inset
.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
+ Anotar que al definir esta tipografía se define automáticamente la de la
+ etiqueta,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LabelStringAppendix
+LabelFont
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
+.
+ Así que debería definirse primero ésta si se quiere definir también
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-string=""
+LabelFont
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] Esta se usa en el apéndice en vez de
+.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LabelString
+FreeSpacing
\end_layout
\end_inset
-.
- Anotar que toda declaración de
+ [
+\emph on
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LabelString
+0
\end_layout
\end_inset
- reconfigura también
-\begin_inset Newline newline
+
+\emph default
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LabelStringAppendix
+1
\end_layout
\end_inset
-.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
+] Usualmente LyX no permite insertar más de un espacio entre palabras, puesto
+ que un espacio se considera como la separación entre dos palabras, no un
+ carácter o símbolo por sí mismo.
+ Esto es una buena cosa pero a veces puede ser molesta, por ejemplo, para
+ escribir código de programas o de LaTeX puro.
+ Por esta razón se puede habilitar
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LabelTag
+FreeSpacing
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [FIXME] (Usado solo con formatos tipo XML.)
+.
+ Anotar que LyX creará espacios protegidos para los espacios adicionales
+ en modos que no sean LaTeX.
+
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LabelType
+HTML*
\end_layout
\end_inset
+ Para la salida XHTML.
+ Véase
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:Estilos-de-párrafo-XHTML"
-\lang ngerman
-
-\lang spanish
-[
+\end_inset
+
+.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\emph on
-No_Label
-\emph default
-, Manual, Static, Top_Environment,
-\begin_inset Newline newline
-\end_inset
-
-Centered_Top_Environment, Counter, Sensitive, Enumerate,
-\begin_inset Newline newline
-\end_inset
-
-Itemize, Bibliography
+InnerTag
\end_layout
\end_inset
-]
+ [[FIXME]] (Usado solo con formatos tipo XML.)
\end_layout
-\begin_deeper
\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Manual
+InPreamble
\end_layout
\end_inset
- significa que la etiqueta es la primera palabra (hasta elprimer espacio
- real).
- Usa espacios protegidos si quieres más de una palabra como etiqueta.
-
-\end_layout
+ [
+\emph on
-\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Static
+
+\emph on
+0
\end_layout
\end_inset
- significa que la etiqueta es simplemente cualquier
+
+\emph default
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LabelString
+1
\end_layout
\end_inset
- declarado como tal.
- Esto es realmente `estático'.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
+] Si
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Top_Environment
+1
\end_layout
\end_inset
+, marca el estilo para ser incluido en el preámbulo del documento en lugar
+ de en el cuerpo del documento.
+ Útil para clases de documento que piden informaciones tales como título
+ y autor en el preámbulo.
+ Esto solo funciona para estilos para los que
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+LatexType
+\end_layout
-y
-\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
-
+ es
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Centered_Top_Environment
+Command
\end_layout
\end_inset
- son casos especiales de
-\begin_inset Newline newline
-\end_inset
-
-
+ o
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Static
+Paragraph
\end_layout
\end_inset
.
- La etiqueta se imprimirá encima del párrafo, pero solo encima de un entorno
- o de una cadena de párrafos con este estilo.
- Esto se podría usar con el estilo
-\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Resumen
+InTitle
\end_layout
\end_inset
-, por ejemplo.
-\end_layout
+ [
+\emph on
-\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Sensitive
-\end_layout
-\end_inset
+\emph on
+0
+\end_layout
- es un caso especial para las etiquetas de las leyendas de
-\begin_inset Quotes fld
\end_inset
-Figura
-\begin_inset Quotes frd
-\end_inset
- y
-\begin_inset Quotes fld
+\emph default
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
-Tabla
-\begin_inset Quotes frd
-\end_inset
-.
-
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Sensitive
+1
\end_layout
\end_inset
- quiere decir que la cadena (en código) de la etiqueta depende de la clase
- de flotante: Está codificado para ser `FloatType N', donde N es el valor
- del contador asociado al flotante.
-
-\lang english
-For the case that a caption is inserted outside of a float
+] Si es
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-LabelString
+1
\end_layout
\end_inset
- should be set to e.
-\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
-\end_inset
+, marca el estilo como parte de un bloque de título (véanse también las
+ entradas globales
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+TitleLatexType
+\end_layout
-g
-\begin_inset space \space{}
\end_inset
+ y
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\begin_inset Quotes eld
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+TitleLatexName
+\end_layout
-Senseless!
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
-.
+).
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Counter
+ItemSep
\end_layout
\end_inset
- define automáticamente etiquetas numeradas.
-
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LabelString
+float=0
\end_layout
\end_inset
- se expandirá para resolver cualesquiera referencias a contadores que haya:
- por ejemplo, podría ser
-\begin_inset Quotes eld
-\end_inset
-
-
+] Esto proporciona espacio extra entre párrafos que tienen el mismo formato.
+ Si se ponen otros formatos en un entorno, cada uno es separado con el comando
+ de entorno
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Section
-\backslash
-thechapter.
-\backslash
-thesection
+ParSep
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
-\end_inset
-
.
- Véase la sección
-\begin_inset CommandInset ref
-LatexCommand ref
-reference "sub:Contadores"
+ Pero el conjunto de los ítems del entorno son separados adicionalmente
+ con este
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+ItemSep
+\end_layout
\end_inset
- para más información.
+.
+ Anotar que esto es un
+\emph on
+ multiplicador.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Enumerate
+ItemTag
\end_layout
\end_inset
- produce los tipos habituales de etiquetas de enumeración.
- Por ahora está codificado para usar números arábigos, minúsculas, números
- romanos en minúsculas y mayúsculas, respectivamente, para los cuatro niveles
- de profundidad posibles.
+ [[FIXME]] (Usado solo con formatos tipo XML.)
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Itemize
+KeepEmpty
\end_layout
\end_inset
- produce varias marcas para los distintos niveles.
- También está codificado.
-\end_layout
+ [
+\emph on
-\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Bibliography
+
+\emph on
+0
\end_layout
\end_inset
- se usa internamente por LyX y solo debería emplearse con
+
+\emph default
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LatexType BibEnvironment
+1
\end_layout
\end_inset
-.
+] Habitualmente, LyX no permite dejar un párrafo vacío, porque llevaría
+ a una salida de LaTeX vacía.
+ Sin embargo, hay algunos casos donde podría ser útil: en una plantilla
+ de carta, los campos requeridos pueden proporcionarse vacíos, así el usuario
+ no los olvida; en algunos casos especiales, se puede usar un estilo que
+ no contiene texto real como una especie de salto.
\end_layout
-\end_deeper
\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LangPreamble
+LabelBottomsep
\end_layout
\end_inset
- Esto sobrescribirá completamente cualquier declaración anterior de
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LangPreamble
+float=0
\end_layout
\end_inset
- para este estilo.
- Debe acabar con
-\begin_inset Quotes eld
-\end_inset
-
-
+] El espacio vertical entre la etiqueta y el cuerpo del texto.
+ Solo se usa para etiquetas que están sobre el cuerpo del texto (
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-EndLangPreamble
+Top_Environment
\end_layout
\end_inset
+ y
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Centered_Top_Environment
+\end_layout
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
-.
- Véase la sección
-\begin_inset CommandInset ref
-LatexCommand ref
-reference "sub:I18n"
-
-\end_inset
-
- para detallessobre su uso.
+).
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LatexName
+LabelCounter
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
+
+\lang english
+
+\lang spanish
+[
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-<nombre>
+string=""
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] El nombre correspondiente en LaTeX, ya sea de un comando o de un entorno.
-\end_layout
+] El nombre del contador para numeración automática.
+\begin_inset Newline newline
+\end_inset
-\begin_layout Description
+Esto
+\emph on
+debe
+\emph default
+ ponerse si
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LatexParam
+LabelType
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
+ es
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-<parámetro>
+Counter
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] Un parámetro opcional para el correspondiente
+.
+ En ese caso, el contador avanzará un paso cada vez que que aparezca el
+ estilo.
+\begin_inset Newline newline
+\end_inset
+
+Esto
+\emph on
+puede
+\emph default
+ ponerse también si
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LatexName
+LabelType
\end_layout
\end_inset
-.
- Este parámetro no se puede cambiar desde dentro de LyX.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
+ es
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LatexType
+Enumerate
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
+, aunque este caso es un poco complicado.
+ Supongamos que declaras
+\begin_inset Quotes eld
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
+LabelCounter myenum
+\end_layout
-\emph on
-Paragraph
-\emph default
-, Command, Environment, Item_Environment,
-\begin_inset Newline newline
\end_inset
-List_Environment, Bib_Environment
-\end_layout
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
-] Cómo debería traducirse el estilo a LaTeX.
-\begin_inset Foot
-status open
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
+.
+ Entonces, los contadores reales usados son
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LatexType
+myenumi
\end_layout
\end_inset
- es un poco engañoso porque estas reglas se aplican también a clases SGML.
- Consulta los archivos de clases SGML
-\lang english
-(filenames
+,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-db_*.inc
+myenumii
\end_layout
\end_inset
- )
-\lang spanish
- para ejemplos concretos.
+,
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+myenumiii
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_deeper
-\begin_layout Description
+, y
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Paragraph
+myenumiv
\end_layout
\end_inset
- no significa nada especial.
-\end_layout
+, como en LaTeX.
+ Estos contadores deben declararse todos por separado.
+\begin_inset Newline newline
+\end_inset
-\begin_layout Description
+Véase la sección
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:Contadores"
+
+\end_inset
+
+ para detalles sobre contadores
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Command
+LabelFont
\end_layout
\end_inset
- significa
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
+ La tipografía usada para la etiqueta.
+ Véase la sección
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
-\backslash
-\emph on
-LatexName
-\emph default
-{\SpecialChar \ldots{}
-}
-\end_layout
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:Tipografías"
\end_inset
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Environment
+LabelIndent
\end_layout
\end_inset
- significa
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\backslash
-begin{
-\emph on
-LatexName
-\emph default
-}\SpecialChar \ldots{}
-
-\backslash
-end{
-\emph on
-LatexName
-\emph default
-}
+string=""
\end_layout
\end_inset
-.
+] Texto que indica cuánto se debe sangrar una etiqueta.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Item_Environment
+LabelSep
\end_layout
\end_inset
- eslo mismo que
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Environment
+string=""
\end_layout
\end_inset
-, excepto que un
+] Texto que indica el valor de espacio horizontal entre la etiqueta y el
+ cuerpo del texto.
+ Solo se usa para etiquetas que no están sobre el cuerpo del texto.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\backslash
-item
+LabelString
\end_layout
\end_inset
- se genera para cada párrafo de este entorno.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-List_Environment
+string=""
\end_layout
\end_inset
- es lo mismo que
+] La cadena usada para una etiqueta del
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Item_Environment
+LabelType
\end_layout
\end_inset
-, excepto que
-\begin_inset Newline newline
-\end_inset
-
-
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LabelWidthString
+Static
\end_layout
\end_inset
- se pasa como un argumento al entorno.
-\begin_inset Newline newline
-\end_inset
-
-
+.
+ Si
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LabelWidthString
+LabelCounter
\end_layout
\end_inset
- puede definirse en el diálogo
-\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Editar\SpecialChar \menuseparator
-Configuración
+ está establecido, esta cadena puede contener los comandos especiales de
+ formato descritos en la sección
\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
-de
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-párrafos
-\end_layout
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:Contadores"
\end_inset
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
-
-\lang english
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-Bib_Environment
+LabelStringAppendix
\end_layout
\end_inset
- is like
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-Environment
+string=""
\end_layout
\end_inset
- but adds additionally the necessary mandatory argument (the longest label)
- to the begin statement of the bibliography environment:
-\begin_inset Newline newline
-\end_inset
-
-
+] Esta se usa en el apéndice en vez de
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-
-\backslash
-begin{thebibliography}{99}
+LabelString
\end_layout
\end_inset
- It is therefore only useful for bibliography environments.
- The default longest label
-\begin_inset Quotes eld
-\end_inset
-
-99
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
-\end_inset
-
- can be changed by the user in the paragraph settings of a bibliography
- item.
-\end_layout
+.
+ Anotar que toda declaración de
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\begin_layout Standard
-Poniendo juntas las últimas cosas, la salida LaTeX será una de estas:
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+LabelString
\end_layout
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
+\end_inset
-\backslash
-LatexName[LatexParam]{\SpecialChar \ldots{}
-}
-\end_layout
+ reconfigura también
+\begin_inset Newline newline
+\end_inset
-\begin_layout Standard
-o:
-\end_layout
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\backslash
-begin{LatexName}[LatexParam] \SpecialChar \ldots{}
-
-\backslash
-end{LatexName}.
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+LabelStringAppendix
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Standard
-dependiendo del tipo de LaTeX.
+\end_inset
+
+.
\end_layout
-\end_deeper
\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LeftMargin
+LabelTag
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
+ [FIXME] (Usado solo con formatos tipo XML.)
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-string=""
+LabelType
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] Si pones estilos en entornos, los
+
+\lang ngerman
+
+\lang spanish
+[
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LeftMargin
-\end_layout
+\emph on
+No_Label
+\emph default
+, Manual, Static, Top_Environment,
+\begin_inset Newline newline
\end_inset
- no son simplemente añadidos, sino aumentados en un factor
-\begin_inset Formula $\frac{4}{\mathrm{depth}+4}$
+Centered_Top_Environment, Counter, Sensitive, Enumerate,
+\begin_inset Newline newline
\end_inset
-.
- Anotar que este parámetro se usa también cuando
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Margin
+Itemize, Bibliography
\end_layout
\end_inset
- se define como
+]
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_deeper
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
- o
+ significa que la etiqueta es la primera palabra (hasta elprimer espacio
+ real).
+ Usa espacios protegidos si quieres más de una palabra como etiqueta.
+
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Dynamic
+Static
\end_layout
\end_inset
-.
- En ese caso se añade al margen manual o dinámico.
-\begin_inset Newline newline
-\end_inset
-
-Por ejemplo
-\begin_inset Quotes fld
-\end_inset
-
-
+ significa que la etiqueta es simplemente cualquier
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-MM
+LabelString
\end_layout
\end_inset
+ declarado como tal.
+ Esto es realmente `estático'.
+\end_layout
-\begin_inset Quotes frd
-\end_inset
-
- significa que el párrafo se sangra con la anchura de
-\begin_inset Quotes fld
-\end_inset
-
-
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-MM
+Top_Environment
\end_layout
\end_inset
-\begin_inset Quotes frd
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
- en la tipografía normal.
- Se puede obtener una anchura negativa anteponiendo
-\begin_inset Quotes fld
+y
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
--
+Centered_Top_Environment
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
-\begin_inset Quotes frd
+ son casos especiales de
+\begin_inset Newline newline
\end_inset
- a la cadena.
- Se eligió este método para que el aspecto sea el mismo con cada una de
- las tipografías de pantalla usadas.
-\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Margin
+Static
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
-\begin_inset Flex Code
+.
+ La etiqueta se imprimirá encima del párrafo, pero solo encima de un entorno
+ o de una cadena de párrafos con este estilo.
+ Esto se podría usar con el estilo
+\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\emph on
-Static
-\emph default
-, Manual, Dynamic, First_Dynamic, Right_Address_Box
+Resumen
\end_layout
\end_inset
-]
-\begin_inset Newline newline
-\end_inset
-
-El tipo de margen que el estilo tiene en el lado izquierdo.
+, por ejemplo.
\end_layout
-\begin_deeper
\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Static
+Sensitive
\end_layout
\end_inset
- significa un margen fijo.
-\end_layout
+ es un caso especial para las etiquetas de las leyendas de
+\begin_inset Quotes fld
+\end_inset
-\begin_layout Description
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
+Figura
+\begin_inset Quotes frd
+\end_inset
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Manual
-\end_layout
+ y
+\begin_inset Quotes fld
+\end_inset
+Tabla
+\begin_inset Quotes frd
\end_inset
- significa que el margen izquierdo depende de la cadena introducida en el
- diálogo
-\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
+.
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Editar\SpecialChar \menuseparator
-Configuración del párrafo\SpecialChar \ldots{}
-
+Sensitive
\end_layout
\end_inset
-.
- Esto se utiliza para componer bonitas listas sin tabuladores.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
+ quiere decir que la cadena (en código) de la etiqueta depende de la clase
+ de flotante: Está codificado para ser `FloatType N', donde N es el valor
+ del contador asociado al flotante.
+
+\lang english
+For the case that a caption is inserted outside of a float
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Dynamic
-\end_layout
-
-\end_inset
-
- significa que el margen depende del tamaño de la etiqueta.
- Esto se usa para las cabeceras automáticas de las listas numeradas.
- Es obvio que la cabecera
-\begin_inset Quotes fld
-\end_inset
-5.4.3.2.1 Cabecera muy larga
-\begin_inset Quotes frd
-\end_inset
+\lang english
+LabelString
+\end_layout
- debe tener un margen izquierdo más amplio (tan ancho como
-\begin_inset Quotes fld
\end_inset
-5.4.3.2.1
-\begin_inset Quotes frd
+ should be set to e.
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
- más el espacio) que
-\begin_inset Quotes fld
+g
+\begin_inset space \space{}
\end_inset
-3.2 Cabecera muy larga
-\begin_inset Quotes frd
-\end_inset
-, aunque los
-\begin_inset Quotes fld
+\begin_inset Quotes eld
\end_inset
-procesadores de texto
-\begin_inset Quotes frd
+Senseless!
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
- corrientes no sean capaces de hacer esto.
+.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-First_Dynamic
+Counter
\end_layout
\end_inset
- es similar, pero solo la primera fila del párrafo es dinámica, mientras
- que las demás son estáticas; esto se emplea, por ejemplo, para descripciones.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
+ define automáticamente etiquetas numeradas.
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Right_Address_Box
+LabelString
\end_layout
\end_inset
- significa que el margen se elige de manera que la fila más larga de este
- párrafo se adapte al margen derecho.
- Esto se emplea para componer una dirección en el lado derecho de la página.
-
-\end_layout
+ se expandirá para resolver cualesquiera referencias a contadores que haya:
+ por ejemplo, podría ser
+\begin_inset Quotes eld
+\end_inset
+
-\end_deeper
-\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-NeedProtect
+Section
+\backslash
+thechapter.
+\backslash
+thesection
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
+
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
+.
+ Véase la sección
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:Contadores"
+
+\end_inset
+
+ para más información.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\emph on
-0
+Enumerate
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
-\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+ produce los tipos habituales de etiquetas de enumeración.
+ Por ahora está codificado para usar números arábigos, minúsculas, números
+ romanos en minúsculas y mayúsculas, respectivamente, para los cuatro niveles
+ de profundidad posibles.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Itemize
+\end_layout
+
\end_inset
+ produce varias marcas para los distintos niveles.
+ También está codificado.
+\end_layout
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-1
+Bibliography
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] Si los comandos frágiles en este estilo deberían ser protegidos,
+ se usa internamente por LyX y solo debería emplearse con
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\backslash
-protect
+LatexType BibEnvironment
\end_layout
\end_inset
.
- (Nota: es
-\emph on
-no
-\emph default
-si este comando debería él mismo ser protegido.)
\end_layout
+\end_deeper
\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Newline
+LangPreamble
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
+ Esto sobrescribirá completamente cualquier declaración anterior de
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-0
+LangPreamble
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
-\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+ para este estilo.
+ Debe acabar con
+\begin_inset Quotes eld
\end_inset
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\emph on
-1
+EndLangPreamble
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] Si las líneas nuevas se transforman en líneas nuevas LaTeX (
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\backslash
-\backslash
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
-\end_layout
+.
+ Véase la sección
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:I18n"
\end_inset
-) o no.
- La transformación puede desactivarse para permitir una edición más confortable
- de LaTeX en LyX.
+ para detallessobre su uso.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-NextNoIndent
+LatexName
\end_layout
\end_inset
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\emph on
-0
+<nombre>
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
-\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
-\end_inset
-
+] El nombre correspondiente en LaTeX, ya sea de un comando o de un entorno.
+\end_layout
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-1
+LatexParam
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] Si se permite sangrar la primera fila del párrafo siguiente.
-
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-1
+<parámetro>
\end_layout
\end_inset
- significa que no se permite hacerlo;
+] Un parámetro opcional para el correspondiente
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-0
+LatexName
\end_layout
\end_inset
- significa que puede hacerse si se desea.
+.
+ Este parámetro no se puede cambiar desde dentro de LyX.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-ObsoletedBy
+LatexType
\end_layout
\end_inset
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-<nombre>
-\end_layout
+\emph on
+Paragraph
+\emph default
+, Command, Environment, Item_Environment,
+\begin_inset Newline newline
\end_inset
-] Nombre de un estilo que ha reemplazado este estilo.
- Esto se emplea para renombrar un estilo, mientras que se mantiene compatibilida
-d hacia atrás.
+List_Environment, Bib_Environment
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
+\end_inset
+
+] Cómo debería traducirse el estilo a LaTeX.
+\begin_inset Foot
+status open
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-OptionalArgs
+LatexType
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
+ es un poco engañoso porque estas reglas se aplican también a clases SGML.
+ Consulta los archivos de clases SGML
\lang english
-
-\lang spanish
-[
+(filenames
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-int=0
+
+\lang english
+db_*.inc
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] El número de argumentos opcionales que puede usarse con este estilo.
- Es útil para cosas como encabezados de sección, y solo tiene sentido con
- LaTeX.
- En la salida, los argumentos opcionales precederán todos a los argumentos
- requeridos (abajo).
- Así que podemos tener construcciones como:
+ )
+\lang spanish
+ para ejemplos concretos.
\end_layout
-\begin_deeper
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
+\end_inset
-\backslash
-mycmd[opt1]{req1}{contenido del párrafo}
-\end_layout
-\begin_layout Standard
-pero no cosas como:
\end_layout
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
+\begin_deeper
+\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\backslash
-mycmd[opt1]{req1}[opt2]{contenido del párrafo}
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Paragraph
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Standard
-al menos, no sin ERT (con lo que puedes tener cualquier cosa).
-
+\end_inset
+
+ no significa nada especial.
\end_layout
-\end_deeper
\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-ParbreakIsNewline
+Command
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
+ significa
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
+\backslash
+
\emph on
-0
+LatexName
+\emph default
+{\SpecialChar \ldots{}
+}
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
-\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
-\end_inset
-
+.
+\end_layout
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-1
+Environment
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] Indica que los párrafos no serán separados por una línea vacía en la salida
- LaTeX, solo por un salto de línea; junto con
+ significa
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-PassThru 1
+
+\backslash
+begin{
+\emph on
+LatexName
+\emph default
+}\SpecialChar \ldots{}
+
+\backslash
+end{
+\emph on
+LatexName
+\emph default
+}
\end_layout
\end_inset
-, esto permite emular un editor de texto simple (como un recuadro ERT).
+.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-ParIndent
+Item_Environment
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
+ eslo mismo que
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-string=""
+Environment
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] El sangrado de la primera línea de un párrafo.
-
+, excepto que un
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Parindent
+
+\backslash
+item
\end_layout
\end_inset
- estará fijado para un determinado estilo.
- La excepción es el estilo
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Normal
+ se genera para cada párrafo de este entorno.
\end_layout
-\end_inset
-
-, puesto que la sangría de un párrafo de estilo
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Normal
+List_Environment
\end_layout
\end_inset
- puede prohibirse con
+ es lo mismo que
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-NextNoIndent
+Item_Environment
\end_layout
\end_inset
-.
- Además, los párrafos de estilo
+, excepto que
+\begin_inset Newline newline
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Normal
+LabelWidthString
\end_layout
\end_inset
- dentro de entornos usan la sangría
+ se pasa como un argumento al entorno.
+\begin_inset Newline newline
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Parindent
+LabelWidthString
\end_layout
\end_inset
- del entorno, no su propio valor.
- Por ejemplo, los párrafos
-\begin_inset Flex Code
+ puede definirse en el diálogo
+\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Normal
-\end_layout
+Editar\SpecialChar \menuseparator
+Configuración
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+de
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
- en una enumeración no se sangran.
+párrafos
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
+\end_inset
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-ParSep
+.
\end_layout
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout Description
- [
+\lang english
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-float=0
+
+\lang english
+Bib_Environment
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] El espacio vertical entre dos párrafos de este estilo.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
+ is like
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Parskip
+
+\lang english
+Environment
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
+ but adds additionally the necessary mandatory argument (the longest label)
+ to the begin statement of the bibliography environment:
+\begin_inset Newline newline
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-float=0
-\end_layout
-\end_inset
+\lang english
-] LyX permite al usuario elegir entre
-\begin_inset Quotes fld
-\end_inset
+\backslash
+begin{thebibliography}{99}
+\end_layout
-sangrado
-\begin_inset Quotes frd
\end_inset
- o
-\begin_inset Quotes fld
+ It is therefore only useful for bibliography environments.
+ The default longest label
+\begin_inset Quotes eld
\end_inset
-espacio vertical
-\begin_inset Quotes frd
+99
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
- para
-\lang english
- separate paragraphs
-\lang spanish
-.
- Si se elige
-\begin_inset Quotes fld
-\end_inset
+ can be changed by the user in the paragraph settings of a bibliography
+ item.
+\end_layout
-sangrado
-\begin_inset Quotes frd
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout Standard
+Poniendo juntas las últimas cosas, la salida LaTeX será una de estas:
+\end_layout
-, este valor es completamente ignorado.
- Si se elige
-\begin_inset Quotes fld
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
-espacio vertical
-\begin_inset Quotes frd
-\end_inset
+\backslash
+LatexName[LatexParam]{\SpecialChar \ldots{}
+}
+\end_layout
-, el sangrado de un estilo tipo
-\begin_inset Quotes fld
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout Standard
+o:
+\end_layout
-Párrafo
-\begin_inset Quotes frd
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
- de LaTeX se ignora y todos los párrafos son separados con este argumento
+\backslash
+begin{LatexName}[LatexParam] \SpecialChar \ldots{}
-\begin_inset Quotes fld
-\end_inset
+\backslash
+end{LatexName}.
+\end_layout
-parskip
-\begin_inset Quotes frd
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout Standard
+dependiendo del tipo de LaTeX.
+\end_layout
-.
- El espacio vertical se calcula con
+\end_deeper
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Parskip
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-* DefaultHeight
+LeftMargin
\end_layout
\end_inset
-, donde
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-DefaultHeight
+string=""
\end_layout
\end_inset
- es la altura de una fila con la tipografía normal.
- De esta forma, el aspecto queda igual con diferentes tipografías de pantalla.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
+] Si pones estilos en entornos, los
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-PassThru
+LeftMargin
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
-\emph on
+ no son simplemente añadidos, sino aumentados en un factor
+\begin_inset Formula $\frac{4}{\mathrm{depth}+4}$
+\end_inset
+.
+ Anotar que este parámetro se usa también cuando
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\emph on
-0
+Margin
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
-\emph default
-,
-\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
-\end_inset
-
-
+ se define como
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-1
+Manual
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] Si el contenido de este párrafo debería aparecer en la salida en forma
- cruda, es decir sin las traducciones especiales que LaTeX necesitaría.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
+ o
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Preamble
+Dynamic
\end_layout
\end_inset
- Información a incluir en el preámbulo LaTeX cuando se usa este estilo.
- Utilizado para definir macros, paquetes a cargar, etc., requeridos por este
- estilo en particular.
- Debe terminar con
+.
+ En ese caso se añade al margen manual o dinámico.
+\begin_inset Newline newline
+\end_inset
+
+Por ejemplo
\begin_inset Quotes fld
\end_inset
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-EndPreamble
+MM
\end_layout
\end_inset
\begin_inset Quotes frd
\end_inset
-.
-\end_layout
+ significa que el párrafo se sangra con la anchura de
+\begin_inset Quotes fld
+\end_inset
+
-\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-RefPrefix
+MM
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
+
+\begin_inset Quotes frd
+\end_inset
+
+ en la tipografía normal.
+ Se puede obtener una anchura negativa anteponiendo
+\begin_inset Quotes fld
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-string
+-
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] El prefijo a usar cuando se crean etiquetas que se refieren a párrafos
- de este tipo.
- Esto permite el uso de referencias con formato.
+
+\begin_inset Quotes frd
+\end_inset
+
+ a la cadena.
+ Se eligió este método para que el aspecto sea el mismo con cada una de
+ las tipografías de pantalla usadas.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-RequiredArgs
+Margin
\end_layout
\end_inset
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-int=0
+
+\emph on
+Static
+\emph default
+, Manual, Dynamic, First_Dynamic, Right_Address_Box
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] El número de argumentos requeridos que el comando LaTeX o el entorno correspon
-diente a este estilo esperan.
- En el caso de un comando, estos son argumentos requeridos que
-\emph on
-no sean
-\emph default
- los asociados con el contenido del párrafo mismo.
- Estos no se tienen que proporcionar realmente: LyX exportará argumentos
- vacíos si es necesario.
- Los argumentos opcionales se exportarán antes que los requeridos.
- Véase la discusión de la etiqueta anterior
+]
+\begin_inset Newline newline
+\end_inset
+
+El tipo de margen que el estilo tiene en el lado izquierdo.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_deeper
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-OptionalArgs
+Static
\end_layout
\end_inset
- para más información.
+ significa un margen fijo.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Requires
+Manual
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
-\series medium
- [
-\begin_inset Flex Code
+ significa que el margen izquierdo depende de la cadena introducida en el
+ diálogo
+\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-string
+Editar\SpecialChar \menuseparator
+Configuración del párrafo\SpecialChar \ldots{}
+
\end_layout
\end_inset
-]
-\series default
- Si el estilo requiere la característica
+.
+ Esto se utiliza para componer bonitas listas sin tabuladores.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-string
+Dynamic
\end_layout
\end_inset
-.
- Véase arriba (
-\lang english
-sec
-\lang spanish
-.
-\begin_inset space ~
+ significa que el margen depende del tamaño de la etiqueta.
+ Esto se usa para las cabeceras automáticas de las listas numeradas.
+ Es obvio que la cabecera
+\begin_inset Quotes fld
\end_inset
+5.4.3.2.1 Cabecera muy larga
+\begin_inset Quotes frd
+\end_inset
-\begin_inset CommandInset ref
-LatexCommand ref
-reference "sub:Parámetros-generales-clases"
+ debe tener un margen izquierdo más amplio (tan ancho como
+\begin_inset Quotes fld
+\end_inset
+5.4.3.2.1
+\begin_inset Quotes frd
\end_inset
-) la descripción de
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
+ más el espacio) que
+\begin_inset Quotes fld
+\end_inset
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Provides
-\end_layout
+3.2 Cabecera muy larga
+\begin_inset Quotes frd
+\end_inset
+
+, aunque los
+\begin_inset Quotes fld
+\end_inset
+procesadores de texto
+\begin_inset Quotes frd
\end_inset
- para información sobre 'características'.
-
+ corrientes no sean capaces de hacer esto.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-RightMargin
+First_Dynamic
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-string=""
+ es similar, pero solo la primera fila del párrafo es dinámica, mientras
+ que las demás son estáticas; esto se emplea, por ejemplo, para descripciones.
\end_layout
-\end_inset
-
-] Similar a
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LeftMargin
+Right_Address_Box
\end_layout
\end_inset
-.
+ significa que el margen se elige de manera que la fila más larga de este
+ párrafo se adapte al margen derecho.
+ Esto se emplea para componer una dirección en el lado derecho de la página.
+
\end_layout
+\end_deeper
\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Spacing
+NeedProtect
\end_layout
\end_inset
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\emph on
-single
+0
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-onehalf
-\end_layout
-
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
-,
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-double
+1
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+] Si los comandos frágiles en este estilo deberían ser protegidos,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-other
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-<valor>
+\backslash
+protect
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] Esto define cuál debería ser el espacio predefinido en el estilo.
- Los argumentos
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-single
+.
+ (Nota: es
+\emph on
+no
+\emph default
+si este comando debería él mismo ser protegido.)
\end_layout
-\end_inset
-
-,
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-onehalf
+Newline
\end_layout
\end_inset
- y
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-double
+0
\end_layout
\end_inset
- corresponden respectivamente a un multiplicador de 1, 1.25 y 1.667.
- Si se especifica el argumento
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-other
+
+\emph on
+1
\end_layout
\end_inset
-, entonces se debería proporcionar además un argumento numérico que será
- el valor real del multiplicador.
- Anotar que, al contrario que otros parámetros,
+] Si las líneas nuevas se transforman en líneas nuevas LaTeX (
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Spacing
-\end_layout
-\end_inset
+\backslash
- implica la generación de código LaTeX específico, usando el paquete LaTeX
-
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
+\backslash
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-setspace
\end_layout
\end_inset
-.
+) o no.
+ La transformación puede desactivarse para permitir una edición más confortable
+ de LaTeX en LyX.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Spellcheck
+NextNoIndent
\end_layout
\end_inset
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\emph on
0
\end_layout
\end_inset
,
-\emph on
-
\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
-\emph default
-
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\emph on
1
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] Corrección ortográfica de párrafos de este estilo.
- Por omisión, sí.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
+] Si se permite sangrar la primera fila del párrafo siguiente.
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-TextFont
+1
\end_layout
\end_inset
- La tipografía para el cuerpo del texto.
- Véase la sección
-\begin_inset CommandInset ref
-LatexCommand ref
-reference "sub:Tipografías"
+ significa que no se permite hacerlo;
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+0
+\end_layout
\end_inset
-.
+ significa que puede hacerse si se desea.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-TocLevel
+ObsoletedBy
\end_layout
\end_inset
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-int=3
+<nombre>
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] El nivel del estilo en el índice general.
- Esto se usa para la numeración automática de los encabezados de sección.
+] Nombre de un estilo que ha reemplazado este estilo.
+ Esto se emplea para renombrar un estilo, mientras que se mantiene compatibilida
+d hacia atrás.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-TopSep
+OptionalArgs
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
+
+\lang english
+
+\lang spanish
+[
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-float=0
+int=0
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] El espacio vertical con el que el primero de una cadena de párrafos con
- este estilo se separa del párrafo anterior.
- Si el párrafo anterior tiene otro estilo, la separación no es simplemente
- añadida, sino que se pone la máxima.
+] El número de argumentos opcionales que puede usarse con este estilo.
+ Es útil para cosas como encabezados de sección, y solo tiene sentido con
+ LaTeX.
+ En la salida, los argumentos opcionales precederán todos a los argumentos
+ requeridos (abajo).
+ Así que podemos tener construcciones como:
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Subsection
-Internacionalización de estilos de párrafo
-\begin_inset CommandInset label
-LatexCommand label
-name "sub:I18n"
-
-\end_inset
-
+\begin_deeper
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+\backslash
+mycmd[opt1]{req1}{contenido del párrafo}
\end_layout
\begin_layout Standard
-LyX ha soportado desde hace tiempo la internacionalización de la información
- de formato, pero, hasta la versión 2.0, esto se aplicaba solo a la interfaz
- de usuario y no a la salida, digamos, PDF.
- Así, por ej., autores franceses tenían que acudir a feos trucos para conseguir
- `Théorème 1' en vez de `Theorem 1'.
- Gracias a Georg Baum, este ya no es el caso.
+pero no cosas como:
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Standard
-Si un
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Style
+\backslash
+mycmd[opt1]{req1}[opt2]{contenido del párrafo}
\end_layout
-\end_inset
-
- define texto que se mostrará en el documento exportado, puede usar
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LangPreamble
+\begin_layout Standard
+al menos, no sin ERT (con lo que puedes tener cualquier cosa).
+
\end_layout
-\end_inset
-
- y
+\end_deeper
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-BabelPreamble
+ParbreakIsNewline
\end_layout
\end_inset
- para soportar correctamente documentos con idioma distinto del inglés e
- incluso documentos plurilingües.
- El siguiente extracto (del archivo
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-theorems-ams.inc
-\end_layout
-
-\end_inset
-
-) muestra cómo funciona:
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-Preamble
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_deeper
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-
-\backslash
-theoremstyle{remark}
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-
-\backslash
-newtheorem{claim}[thm]{
-\backslash
-protect
-\backslash
-claimname}
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-EndPreamble
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-LangPreamble
-\end_layout
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-
-\backslash
-providecommand{
-\backslash
-claimname}{_(Claim)}
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-EndLangPreamble
+\emph on
+0
\end_layout
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-BabelPreamble
-\end_layout
+\end_inset
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-
-\backslash
-addto
-\backslash
-captions$$lang{
-\backslash
-renewcommand{
-\backslash
-claimname}{_(Claim)}}
-\end_layout
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-EndBabelPreamble
-\end_layout
-\end_deeper
-\begin_layout Standard
-En principio, cualquier LaTeX legal puede aparecer en las etiquetas
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LangPreamble
+1
\end_layout
\end_inset
- y
+] Indica que los párrafos no serán separados por una línea vacía en la salida
+ LaTeX, solo por un salto de línea; junto con
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-BabelPreamble
+PassThru 1
\end_layout
\end_inset
-, pero en la práctica el aspecto será generalmente como el mostrado aquí.
- La clave para una correcta traducción del texto impreso es la definición
- del comando LaTeX
+, esto permite emular un editor de texto simple (como un recuadro ERT).
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\backslash
-claimname
+ParIndent
\end_layout
\end_inset
- y su uso en
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\backslash
-newtheorem
+string=""
\end_layout
\end_inset
-.
+] El sangrado de la primera línea de un párrafo.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Standard
-La etiqueta
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LangPreamble
+Parindent
\end_layout
\end_inset
- proporciona internacionalización basada en el idioma global del documento.
- El contenido de la etiqueta se incluirá en el preámbulo, igual que con
- la etiqueta
+ estará fijado para un determinado estilo.
+ La excepción es el estilo
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Preamble
+Normal
\end_layout
\end_inset
-.
- Lo que la hace especial es el uso de la
-\begin_inset Quotes eld
-\end_inset
-
-función
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
-\end_inset
-
-
+, puesto que la sangría de un párrafo de estilo
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-_()
+Normal
\end_layout
\end_inset
-, que será reemplazada, cuando LyX genere la salida LaTeX, por la traducción
- de su argumento al idioma del documento.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Standard
-La etiqueta
+ puede prohibirse con
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-BabelPreamble
+NextNoIndent
\end_layout
\end_inset
- es más compleja, puesto que está pensada para dar soporte a documentos
- plurilingües y ofrece una interfaz al paquete
+.
+ Además, los párrafos de estilo
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-babel
+Normal
\end_layout
\end_inset
-.
- Su contenido se añadirá al preámbulo una vez por cada idioma que aparezca
- en el documento.
- En este caso, el argumento en
+ dentro de entornos usan la sangría
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-_()
+Parindent
\end_layout
\end_inset
- se reemplazará por su traducción al idioma en cuestión; la expresión
+ del entorno, no su propio valor.
+ Por ejemplo, los párrafos
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-$$lang
+Normal
\end_layout
\end_inset
- es reemplazada por el nombre del idioma (el usado por el paquete babel).
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Standard
-Un documento en alemán que también incluya una sección en francés tendría
- lo siguiente en el preámbulo:
+ en una enumeración no se sangran.
\end_layout
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-
-\backslash
-addto
-\backslash
-captionsfrench{
-\backslash
-renewcommand{
-\backslash
-claimname}{Affirmation}}
-\begin_inset Newline newline
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+ParSep
+\end_layout
-\backslash
-addto
-\backslash
-captionsngerman{
-\backslash
-renewcommand{
-\backslash
-claimname}{Behauptung}}
-\begin_inset Newline newline
\end_inset
-
-\backslash
-providecommand{
-\backslash
-claimname}{Behauptung}
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Standard
-LaTeX y
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-babel
+float=0
\end_layout
\end_inset
- conspirarán para producir el texto correcto en la salida.
+] El espacio vertical entre dos párrafos de este estilo.
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Standard
-Un punto importante a tener en cuenta aquí es que las traducciones son proporcio
-nadas por el propio LyX, por medio del mismo mecanismo empleado para la
- internacionalización de la interfaz de usuario.
- Esto quiere decir, en definitiva, que
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LangPreamble
+Parskip
\end_layout
\end_inset
- y
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-BabelPreamble
+float=0
\end_layout
\end_inset
- realmente solo son útiles en archivos de formato que son proporcionados
- por LyX, puesto que el texto introducido en archivos de formato creados
- por el usuario no serán tenidos en cuenta por las rutinas de internacionalizaci
-ón de LyX.
- Sin embargo, cualquier formato creado con la intención de ser incluido
- en LyX debería usar estas etiquetas en los lugares apropiados.
-\end_layout
+] LyX permite al usuario elegir entre
+\begin_inset Quotes fld
+\end_inset
-\begin_layout Subsection
-Flotantes
-\begin_inset CommandInset label
-LatexCommand label
-name "sub:Flotantes"
+sangrado
+\begin_inset Quotes frd
+\end_inset
+ o
+\begin_inset Quotes fld
\end_inset
+espacio vertical
+\begin_inset Quotes frd
+\end_inset
-\end_layout
+ para
+\lang english
+ separate paragraphs
+\lang spanish
+.
+ Si se elige
+\begin_inset Quotes fld
+\end_inset
-\begin_layout Standard
-Es necesario definir los flotantes (
-\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
-status collapsed
+sangrado
+\begin_inset Quotes frd
+\end_inset
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-figura
-\end_layout
+, este valor es completamente ignorado.
+ Si se elige
+\begin_inset Quotes fld
+\end_inset
+espacio vertical
+\begin_inset Quotes frd
\end_inset
-,
-\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
-status collapsed
+, el sangrado de un estilo tipo
+\begin_inset Quotes fld
+\end_inset
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-cuadro
-\end_layout
+Párrafo
+\begin_inset Quotes frd
+\end_inset
+ de LaTeX se ignora y todos los párrafos son separados con este argumento
+
+\begin_inset Quotes fld
\end_inset
-, \SpecialChar \ldots{}
-) en la propia clase de texto.
- Los flotantes normales se incluyen en el archivo
+parskip
+\begin_inset Quotes frd
+\end_inset
+
+.
+ El espacio vertical se calcula con
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-stdfloats.inc
+Parskip
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+* DefaultHeight
\end_layout
\end_inset
-, así que no tendrás más que añadir
-\end_layout
+, donde
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-Input stdfloats.inc
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+DefaultHeight
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Standard
-en tu archivo de formato.
- Si quieres implementar una clase de texto que proponga algún otro tipo
- de flotante (como la clase AGU empaquetada con LyX), la información siguiente
- te servirá de ayuda:
+\end_inset
+
+ es la altura de una fila con la tipografía normal.
+ De esta forma, el aspecto queda igual con diferentes tipografías de pantalla.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Extension
+PassThru
\end_layout
\end_inset
[
+\emph on
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-string
+
+\emph on
+0
\end_layout
\end_inset
-=
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
+
+\emph default
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+1
+\end_layout
+
\end_inset
-] La extensión del nombre de un archivo auxiliar para la lista de figuras
- (u otra cosa).
- LaTeX escribe las leyendas en este archivo.
+] Si el contenido de este párrafo debería aparecer en la salida en forma
+ cruda, es decir sin las traducciones especiales que LaTeX necesitaría.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-GuiName
+Preamble
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
+ Información a incluir en el preámbulo LaTeX cuando se usa este estilo.
+ Utilizado para definir macros, paquetes a cargar, etc., requeridos por este
+ estilo en particular.
+ Debe terminar con
+\begin_inset Quotes fld
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-string
+EndPreamble
\end_layout
\end_inset
-=
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
-\end_inset
-
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\begin_inset Quotes frd
\end_inset
-] La cadena que se usará en los menús y también para la leyenda.
- Esto se traduce al idioma actual si se usa.
+.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-HTML*
+RefPrefix
\end_layout
\end_inset
- Controlan la salida XHTML.
- Véase la sección
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\begin_inset CommandInset ref
-LatexCommand ref
-reference "sec:Etiquetas-para-XHTML"
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+string
+\end_layout
\end_inset
-.
+] El prefijo a usar cuando se crean etiquetas que se refieren a párrafos
+ de este tipo.
+ Esto permite el uso de referencias con formato.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-IsPredefined
+RequiredArgs
\end_layout
\end_inset
[
-\emph on
-
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-0
+int=0
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
+] El número de argumentos requeridos que el comando LaTeX o el entorno correspon
+diente a este estilo esperan.
+ En el caso de un comando, estos son argumentos requeridos que
+\emph on
+no sean
\emph default
-,
-\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
-\end_inset
-
-
+ los asociados con el contenido del párrafo mismo.
+ Estos no se tienen que proporcionar realmente: LyX exportará argumentos
+ vacíos si es necesario.
+ Los argumentos opcionales se exportarán antes que los requeridos.
+ Véase la discusión de la etiqueta anterior
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-1
+OptionalArgs
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] Indica si el flotante está ya definido en la clase de documento o si necesitam
-os cargar el paquete LaTeX
+ para más información.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-float
+Requires
\end_layout
\end_inset
- para definirlo sobre la marcha.
- Por omisión
+
+\series medium
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-0
+string
\end_layout
\end_inset
-, que significa: usar
+]
+\series default
+ Si el estilo requiere la característica
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-float
+string
\end_layout
\end_inset
.
- Deberá ponerse
+ Véase arriba (
+\lang english
+sec
+\lang spanish
+.
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:Parámetros-generales-clases"
+
+\end_inset
+
+) la descripción de
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-1
+Provides
\end_layout
\end_inset
- si el flotante ya está definido por la clase de documento LaTeX.
+ para información sobre 'características'.
+
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-ListCommand
+RightMargin
\end_layout
\end_inset
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-string
+string=""
\end_layout
\end_inset
-=
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
-\end_inset
-
-
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
-\end_inset
-
-] El comando usado para generar una lista de flotantes de este tipo; debe
- omitirse el precedente `
-\backslash
-'.
- Esto
-\emph on
-debe
-\emph default
- ponerse si
+] Similar a
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-UsesFloatPkg
+LeftMargin
\end_layout
\end_inset
- es `false', puesto que no hay una forma estándar de generar este comando.
- Se ignora si
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-UsesFloatPkg
-\end_layout
-
-\end_inset
-
- es `true', porque en este caso sí hay una forma estándar de definir el
- comando.
+.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-ListName
+Spacing
\end_layout
\end_inset
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-string
-\end_layout
-
-\end_inset
-
-=
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
-\end_inset
+\emph on
+single
+\end_layout
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
-] Un título para una lista de flotantes de este tipo (índice de figuras,
- tablas o lo que sea).
- Se usa para el nombre del recuadro en LyX; se pasa a LaTeX para usarlo
- como título allí; y se usa como título en la salida.
- Será traducido al idioma del documento.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
+,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-NumberWithin
+onehalf
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
+,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-string
+double
\end_layout
\end_inset
-=
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
-\end_inset
-
-
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
-\end_inset
-
-] Este argumento (opcional) determina si los flotantes de esta clase serán
- numerados dentro de alguna unidad de sección del documento.
- Por ejemplo, si
+,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-NumberWithin
-\end_layout
-
+other
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
- es
-\begin_inset Quotes fld
-\end_inset
+<valor>
+\end_layout
+\end_inset
+] Esto define cuál debería ser el espacio predefinido en el estilo.
+ Los argumentos
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-chapter
+single
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
-\begin_inset Quotes frd
-\end_inset
-
-, los flotantes serán numerados dentro de los capítulos.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
+,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Placement
+onehalf
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
+ y
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-string
+double
\end_layout
\end_inset
-=
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
-\end_inset
-
-
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
-\end_inset
-
-] La colocación por omisión para la clase dada de flotantes.
- El valor de
+ corresponden respectivamente a un multiplicador de 1, 1.25 y 1.667.
+ Si se especifica el argumento
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-string
+other
\end_layout
\end_inset
- deberá ser un estándar LaTeX:
+, entonces se debería proporcionar además un argumento numérico que será
+ el valor real del multiplicador.
+ Anotar que, al contrario que otros parámetros,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-t
+Spacing
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+ implica la generación de código LaTeX específico, usando el paquete LaTeX
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-b
+setspace
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-p
+Spellcheck
\end_layout
\end_inset
- y
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-h
+0
\end_layout
\end_inset
-, por
-\begin_inset Quotes fld
-\end_inset
-
-top
-\begin_inset Quotes frd
-\end_inset
-
- (arriba),
-\begin_inset Quotes fld
-\end_inset
-
-bottom
-\begin_inset Quotes frd
-\end_inset
-
- (abajo),
-\begin_inset Quotes fld
-\end_inset
+,
+\emph on
-page
-\begin_inset Quotes frd
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
- (página), y
-\begin_inset Quotes fld
-\end_inset
-here
-\begin_inset Quotes frd
-\end_inset
+\emph default
- (aquí), respectivamente.
-\begin_inset Foot
+\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Anotar que el orden de estas letras en la cadena es irrelevante, como en
- LaTeX.
+
+\emph on
+1
\end_layout
\end_inset
- Por encima de éstos hay un nuevo tipo,
+] Corrección ortográfica de párrafos de este estilo.
+ Por omisión, sí.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-H
+TextFont
\end_layout
\end_inset
-, que no corresponde realmente a un flotante, ya que se refiere a: ponerlo
- aquí,
-\begin_inset Quotes fld
-\end_inset
+ La tipografía para el cuerpo del texto.
+ Véase la sección
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:Tipografías"
-here
-\begin_inset Quotes frd
\end_inset
-, y en ninguna otra parte.
- Anotar que, sin embargo, el colocador
+.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-H
+TocLevel
\end_layout
\end_inset
- es especial y, debido a detalles de implementación, no puede usarse en
- tipos de flotantes no empotrados.
- Si no comprendes lo que esto significa, usa solo
-\begin_inset Quotes fld
-\end_inset
-
-
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-tbp
+int=3
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
-\begin_inset Quotes frd
-\end_inset
-
-.
+] El nivel del estilo en el índice general.
+ Esto se usa para la numeración automática de los encabezados de sección.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-RefPrefix
+TopSep
\end_layout
\end_inset
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-string
+float=0
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] El prefijo a usar cuando se crean etiquetas referidas a flotantes de este
- tipo.
- Esto permite el uso de referencias con formato.
- Puedes quitar cualquier
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-RefPrefix
+] El espacio vertical con el que el primero de una cadena de párrafos con
+ este estilo se separa del párrafo anterior.
+ Si el párrafo anterior tiene otro estilo, la separación no es simplemente
+ añadida, sino que se pone la máxima.
\end_layout
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout Subsection
+Internacionalización de estilos de párrafo
+\begin_inset CommandInset label
+LatexCommand label
+name "sub:I18n"
- puesto por un estilo copiado usando el valor especial
-\begin_inset Quotes eld
\end_inset
-OFF
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
-\end_inset
-, todas mayúsculas.
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
+\begin_layout Standard
+LyX ha soportado desde hace tiempo la internacionalización de la información
+ de formato, pero, hasta la versión 2.0, esto se aplicaba solo a la interfaz
+ de usuario y no a la salida, digamos, PDF.
+ Así, por ej., autores franceses tenían que acudir a feos trucos para conseguir
+ `Théorème 1' en vez de `Theorem 1'.
+ Gracias a Georg Baum, este ya no es el caso.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Standard
+Si un
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
- [
+ define texto que se mostrará en el documento exportado, puede usar
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-string
+LangPreamble
\end_layout
\end_inset
-=
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
-\end_inset
-
+ y
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+BabelPreamble
+\end_layout
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
-] El estilo usado cuando se define el flotante con
+ para soportar correctamente documentos con idioma distinto del inglés e
+ incluso documentos plurilingües.
+ El siguiente extracto (del archivo
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\backslash
-newfloat
+theorems-ams.inc
\end_layout
\end_inset
-.
+) muestra cómo funciona:
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+Preamble
+\end_layout
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Type
+\begin_deeper
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+
+\backslash
+theoremstyle{remark}
\end_layout
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+
+\backslash
+newtheorem{claim}[thm]{
+\backslash
+protect
+\backslash
+claimname}
+\end_layout
- [
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+EndPreamble
+\end_layout
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-string
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+LangPreamble
\end_layout
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+
+\backslash
+providecommand{
+\backslash
+claimname}{_(Claim)}
+\end_layout
-=
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+EndLangPreamble
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+BabelPreamble
+\end_layout
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+
+\backslash
+addto
+\backslash
+captions$$lang{
+\backslash
+renewcommand{
+\backslash
+claimname}{_(Claim)}}
+\end_layout
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+EndBabelPreamble
+\end_layout
-] El
-\begin_inset Quotes fld
-\end_inset
+\end_deeper
+\begin_layout Standard
+En principio, cualquier LaTeX legal puede aparecer en las etiquetas
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+LangPreamble
+\end_layout
-tipo
-\begin_inset Quotes frd
\end_inset
- de la nueva clase de flotante, como programa o algoritmo.
- Después del apropiado
+ y
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\backslash
-newfloat
+BabelPreamble
\end_layout
\end_inset
-, comandos tales como
+, pero en la práctica el aspecto será generalmente como el mostrado aquí.
+ La clave para una correcta traducción del texto impreso es la definición
+ del comando LaTeX
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\backslash
-begin{program}
+claimname
\end_layout
\end_inset
- o
+ y su uso en
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\backslash
-end{algorithm*}
+newtheorem
\end_layout
\end_inset
- estarán disponibles.
+.
+
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
+\begin_layout Standard
+La etiqueta
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-UsesFloatPkg
+LangPreamble
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
+ proporciona internacionalización basada en el idioma global del documento.
+ El contenido de la etiqueta se incluirá en el preámbulo, igual que con
+ la etiqueta
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-0
+Preamble
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
-\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+.
+ Lo que la hace especial es el uso de la
+\begin_inset Quotes eld
\end_inset
+función
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\emph on
-1
+_()
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] Nos dice si este flotante se define usando el paquete LaTeX
+, que será reemplazada, cuando LyX genere la salida LaTeX, por la traducción
+ de su argumento al idioma del documento.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Standard
+La etiqueta
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-float
+BabelPreamble
\end_layout
\end_inset
-, bien por el archivo de clase o por un paquete, o bien sobre la marcha
- por el propio LyX.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Standard
-Anotar que al definir un flotante con tipo
+ es más compleja, puesto que está pensada para dar soporte a documentos
+ plurilingües y ofrece una interfaz al paquete
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\emph on
-type
+babel
\end_layout
\end_inset
- automáticamente se define el correspondiente contador con nombre
+.
+ Su contenido se añadirá al preámbulo una vez por cada idioma que aparezca
+ en el documento.
+ En este caso, el argumento en
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\emph on
-type
+_()
\end_layout
\end_inset
-.
-\end_layout
+ se reemplazará por su traducción al idioma en cuestión; la expresión
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\begin_layout Subsection
-Recuadros flexibles y formato del recuadro
-\begin_inset CommandInset label
-LatexCommand label
-name "sub:estilo-del-texto"
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+$$lang
+\end_layout
\end_inset
-
+ es reemplazada por el nombre del idioma (el usado por el paquete babel).
\end_layout
\begin_layout Standard
-Los recuadros flexibles son de tres tipos:
+Un documento en alemán que también incluya una sección en francés tendría
+ lo siguiente en el preámbulo:
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Itemize
-estilo del texto (
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-CharStyle
-\end_layout
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+\backslash
+addto
+\backslash
+captionsfrench{
+\backslash
+renewcommand{
+\backslash
+claimname}{Affirmation}}
+\begin_inset Newline newline
\end_inset
-): estos definen diseños semánticos correspondientes a comandos LaTeX como
-
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
+\backslash
+addto
+\backslash
+captionsngerman{
+\backslash
+renewcommand{
+\backslash
+claimname}{Behauptung}}
+\begin_inset Newline newline
+\end_inset
+
\backslash
-noun
+providecommand{
+\backslash
+claimname}{Behauptung}
\end_layout
-\end_inset
-
- y
+\begin_layout Standard
+LaTeX y
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\backslash
-code
+babel
\end_layout
\end_inset
-.
+ conspirarán para producir el texto correcto en la salida.
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Itemize
-definido por el usuario (
+\begin_layout Standard
+Un punto importante a tener en cuenta aquí es que las traducciones son proporcio
+nadas por el propio LyX, por medio del mismo mecanismo empleado para la
+ internacionalización de la interfaz de usuario.
+ Esto quiere decir, en definitiva, que
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Custom
+LangPreamble
\end_layout
\end_inset
-): estos se pueden usar para definir recuadros plegables personalizados,
- del tipo de los de código TeX, notas al pie y similares.
- Un ejemplo obvio es un recuadro de nota final, definido en el módulo del
- mismo nombre (
+ y
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-endnotes
+BabelPreamble
\end_layout
\end_inset
-).
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Itemize
-elementos XML (
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Element
+ realmente solo son útiles en archivos de formato que son proporcionados
+ por LyX, puesto que el texto introducido en archivos de formato creados
+ por el usuario no serán tenidos en cuenta por las rutinas de internacionalizaci
+ón de LyX.
+ Sin embargo, cualquier formato creado con la intención de ser incluido
+ en LyX debería usar estas etiquetas en los lugares apropiados.
\end_layout
+\begin_layout Subsection
+Flotantes
+\begin_inset CommandInset label
+LatexCommand label
+name "sub:Flotantes"
+
\end_inset
-): para usar con las clases DocBook.
+
\end_layout
\begin_layout Standard
-Los recuadros flexibles se definen usando la etiqueta
-\begin_inset Flex Code
+Es necesario definir los flotantes (
+\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-InsetLayout
+figura
\end_layout
\end_inset
-, que se explicará en un momento.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Standard
-La etiqueta
-\begin_inset Flex Code
+,
+\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-InsetLayout
+cuadro
\end_layout
\end_inset
- también sirve para otra función: puede utilizarse para personalizar el
- diseño general de muchos tipos diferentes de recuadros.
- Actualmente,
+, \SpecialChar \ldots{}
+) en la propia clase de texto.
+ Los flotantes normales se incluyen en el archivo
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-InsetLayout
+stdfloats.inc
\end_layout
\end_inset
- permite personalizar los parámetros de diseño de notas al pie, notas al
- margen, notas, recuadros de código TeX (ERT), ramas, listados de programa,
- índices, cuadros, tablas, algoritmos, URL, y argumentos opcionales, así
- como para definir recuadros flexibles.
+, así que no tendrás más que añadir
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+Input stdfloats.inc
\end_layout
\begin_layout Standard
-La definición de
+en tu archivo de formato.
+ Si quieres implementar una clase de texto que proponga algún otro tipo
+ de flotante (como la clase AGU empaquetada con LyX), la información siguiente
+ te servirá de ayuda:
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-InsetLayout
+Extension
\end_layout
\end_inset
- debe comenzar con una línea de la forma:
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-InsetLayout <type>
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Standard
-Aquí,
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-<type>
+string
\end_layout
\end_inset
- indica el recuadro cuyo formato se va a definir, y hay dos casos.
+=
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
+] La extensión del nombre de un archivo auxiliar para la lista de figuras
+ (u otra cosa).
+ LaTeX escribe las leyendas en este archivo.
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Enumerate
-Se va a modificar el formato para un tipo de recuadro preexistente.
- En este caso,
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-<type>
+GuiName
\end_layout
\end_inset
- puede ser uno cualquiera de los siguientes:
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Algorithm
+string
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
+=
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Branch
-\end_layout
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
-,
+] La cadena que se usará en los menús y también para la leyenda.
+ Esto se traduce al idioma actual si se usa.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Box
+HTML*
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+ Controlan la salida XHTML.
+ Véase la sección
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sec:Etiquetas-para-XHTML"
+
+\end_inset
+
+.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Box:shaded
+IsPredefined
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+ [
+\emph on
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-ERT
+0
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+
+\emph default
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Figure
+1
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+] Indica si el flotante está ya definido en la clase de documento o si necesitam
+os cargar el paquete LaTeX
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Foot
+float
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+ para definirlo sobre la marcha.
+ Por omisión
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Index
+0
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+, que significa: usar
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Info
+float
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+.
+ Deberá ponerse
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Info:menu
+1
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+ si el flotante ya está definido por la clase de documento LaTeX.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Info:shortcut
+ListCommand
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Info:shortcuts
+string
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+=
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
+] El comando usado para generar una lista de flotantes de este tipo; debe
+ omitirse el precedente `
+\backslash
+'.
+ Esto
+\emph on
+debe
+\emph default
+ ponerse si
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Listings
+UsesFloatPkg
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+ es `false', puesto que no hay una forma estándar de generar este comando.
+ Se ignora si
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Marginal
+UsesFloatPkg
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+ es `true', porque en este caso sí hay una forma estándar de definir el
+ comando.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Note:Comment
+ListName
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Note:Note
+string
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
-\begin_inset Newline newline
+=
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
+] Un título para una lista de flotantes de este tipo (índice de figuras,
+ tablas o lo que sea).
+ Se usa para el nombre del recuadro en LyX; se pasa a LaTeX para usarlo
+ como título allí; y se usa como título en la salida.
+ Será traducido al idioma del documento.
+\end_layout
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Note:GreyedOut
+NumberWithin
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-OptArg
+string
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
+=
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Table
-\end_layout
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
-, o
+] Este argumento (opcional) determina si los flotantes de esta clase serán
+ numerados dentro de alguna unidad de sección del documento.
+ Por ejemplo, si
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-URL
+NumberWithin
\end_layout
\end_inset
-.
-
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Enumerate
-Se va a definir el formato para un recuadro flexible.
- En este caso,
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-<type>
-\end_layout
-
-\end_inset
-
- puede ser cualquier identificador válido no utilizado por un recuadro preexiste
-nte.
- El identificador puede incluir espacios, pero en este caso debe ponerse
- todo entre comillas.
- Puede además incluir un identificador de nombre del espacio, precedido
- de dos puntos, como
-\begin_inset Quotes eld
-\end_inset
-
-
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Flex:Code
-\end_layout
-
+ es
+\begin_inset Quotes fld
\end_inset
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
-\end_inset
-
-.
- Anotar que la definición de un flexible debe incluir
-\emph on
-además
-\emph default
- una entrada
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LyXType
+chapter
\end_layout
\end_inset
-.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Standard
-La definición de
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-InsetLayout
-\end_layout
+\begin_inset Quotes frd
\end_inset
- puede contener las siguientes entradas:
+, los flotantes serán numerados dentro de los capítulos.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-BgColor
+Placement
\end_layout
\end_inset
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-<nombre>
+string
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] El color para el fondo del recuadro.
-
-\lang english
-See chapter
-\begin_inset space ~
+=
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
-\begin_inset CommandInset ref
-LatexCommand ref
-reference "chap:Names-of-colors"
-
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
- for a list of the available color names.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
+] La colocación por omisión para la clase dada de flotantes.
+ El valor de
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-ContentAsLabel
+string
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
+ deberá ser un estándar LaTeX:
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\emph on
-0
+t
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
-\lang ngerman
-
-\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
-\end_inset
-
-
-\lang spanish
-
+,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-1
+b
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] Si usar no el contenido del recuadro como etiqueta del mismo cuando el
- recuadro se cierra.
- Por omisión, falso.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
+,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-CopyStyle
+p
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
+ y
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-<type>
+h
\end_layout
\end_inset
-]
-\lang english
-As with paragraph styles
-\lang spanish
-, véase sección
-\begin_inset space ~
+, por
+\begin_inset Quotes fld
\end_inset
+top
+\begin_inset Quotes frd
+\end_inset
-\begin_inset CommandInset ref
-LatexCommand ref
-reference "sub:Estilos-de-párrafo"
+ (arriba),
+\begin_inset Quotes fld
+\end_inset
+bottom
+\begin_inset Quotes frd
\end_inset
-.
-
-\lang english
-Note that you need to specify the complete type, e.
-\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+ (abajo),
+\begin_inset Quotes fld
\end_inset
-g
-\lang spanish
-.
-\begin_inset space ~
+page
+\begin_inset Quotes frd
\end_inset
+ (página), y
+\begin_inset Quotes fld
+\end_inset
-\begin_inset Flex Code
+here
+\begin_inset Quotes frd
+\end_inset
+
+ (aquí), respectivamente.
+\begin_inset Foot
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-CopyStyle Flex:<nombre>
+Anotar que el orden de estas letras en la cadena es irrelevante, como en
+ LaTeX.
\end_layout
\end_inset
-.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
+ Por encima de éstos hay un nuevo tipo,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-CustomPars
+H
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
+, que no corresponde realmente a un flotante, ya que se refiere a: ponerlo
+ aquí,
+\begin_inset Quotes fld
+\end_inset
+
+here
+\begin_inset Quotes frd
+\end_inset
+
+, y en ninguna otra parte.
+ Anotar que, sin embargo, el colocador
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\emph on
-0
+H
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
-\lang ngerman
-
-\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+ es especial y, debido a detalles de implementación, no puede usarse en
+ tipos de flotantes no empotrados.
+ Si no comprendes lo que esto significa, usa solo
+\begin_inset Quotes fld
\end_inset
-\lang spanish
-
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-1
+tbp
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] Indica si el usuario puede emplear el diálogo Configuración del párrafo
- para modificar el párrafo.
+
+\begin_inset Quotes frd
+\end_inset
+
+.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Decoration
+RefPrefix
\end_layout
\end_inset
- Puede ser
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Classic
+string
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+] El prefijo a usar cuando se crean etiquetas referidas a flotantes de este
+ tipo.
+ Esto permite el uso de referencias con formato.
+ Puedes quitar cualquier
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Minimalistic
+RefPrefix
\end_layout
\end_inset
-, o
+ puesto por un estilo copiado usando el valor especial
+\begin_inset Quotes eld
+\end_inset
+
+OFF
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
+, todas mayúsculas.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Conglomerate
+Style
\end_layout
\end_inset
-, que describe el estilo de presentación para el marco y los botones del
- recuadro.
- Las notas al pie usan generalmente
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Classic
+string
\end_layout
\end_inset
-, los recuadros de código TeX
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
+=
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Minimalistic
-\end_layout
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
-, y los de estilos del texto
+] El estilo usado cuando se define el flotante con
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Conglomerate
+
+\backslash
+newfloat
\end_layout
\end_inset
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Display
+Type
\end_layout
\end_inset
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-0
+string
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
-\lang ngerman
+=
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
-\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
+] El
+\begin_inset Quotes fld
+\end_inset
-\lang spanish
+tipo
+\begin_inset Quotes frd
+\end_inset
+ de la nueva clase de flotante, como programa o algoritmo.
+ Después del apropiado
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-\emph on
-1
+\backslash
+newfloat
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] Solo es útil si
+, comandos tales como
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LatexType
+
+\backslash
+begin{program}
\end_layout
\end_inset
- es
+ o
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Environment
+
+\backslash
+end{algorithm*}
\end_layout
\end_inset
-.
- Indica si el entorno se ubicará en su propio espacio en la salida o si
- aparecerá en línea con el texto circundante.
- Si se pone falso, se supone que el entorno LaTeX ignora los espacios en
- blanco (incluyendo un carácter de línea nueva) después de las etiquetas
-
+ estarán disponibles.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\backslash
-begin{
-\emph on
-LatexName
-\emph default
-}
+UsesFloatPkg
\end_layout
\end_inset
- y
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\backslash
-end{
-\emph on
-LatexName
-\emph default
-}
+0
\end_layout
\end_inset
-.
- Por omisión, verdadero.
-\end_layout
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
-\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-End
+
+\emph on
+1
\end_layout
\end_inset
- Requerido al final de las declaraciones de formato del recuadro
+] Nos dice si este flotante se define usando el paquete LaTeX
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-InsetLayout
+float
\end_layout
\end_inset
-.
+, bien por el archivo de clase o por un paquete, o bien sobre la marcha
+ por el propio LyX.
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
+\begin_layout Standard
+Anotar que al definir un flotante con tipo
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Font
+
+\emph on
+type
\end_layout
\end_inset
- La tipografía usada tanto para el cuerpo del texto como para la etiqueta.
- Véase la sección
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
+ automáticamente se define el correspondiente contador con nombre
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
-\begin_inset CommandInset ref
-LatexCommand ref
-reference "sub:Tipografías"
+\emph on
+type
+\end_layout
\end_inset
.
- Anotar que al definir esta tipografía se define automáticamente el mismo
- valor para la etiqueta,
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LabelFont
\end_layout
+\begin_layout Subsection
+Recuadros flexibles y formato del recuadro
+\begin_inset CommandInset label
+LatexCommand label
+name "sub:estilo-del-texto"
+
\end_inset
-, así que define aquella primero y después define
+
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Standard
+Los recuadros flexibles son de tres tipos:
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Itemize
+estilo del texto (
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LabelFont
+CharStyle
\end_layout
\end_inset
- si las quieres diferentes.
+): estos definen diseños semánticos correspondientes a comandos LaTeX como
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-ForceLTR
+
+\backslash
+noun
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
+ y
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-\emph on
-0
+\backslash
+code
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
-\lang ngerman
-
-\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
-\end_inset
-
-
-\lang spanish
+.
+\end_layout
+\begin_layout Itemize
+definido por el usuario (
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-1
+Custom
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] Fuerza el idioma
-\begin_inset Quotes fld
-\end_inset
-
-latex
-\begin_inset Quotes frd
-\end_inset
+): estos se pueden usar para definir recuadros plegables personalizados,
+ del tipo de los de código TeX, notas al pie y similares.
+ Un ejemplo obvio es un recuadro de nota final, definido en el módulo del
+ mismo nombre (
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
- que genera salida Izquierda-Derecha (latin), p.
-\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+endnotes
+\end_layout
-e.
-\begin_inset space \space{}
\end_inset
-en código TeX o URL.
- Un parche.
+).
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
+\begin_layout Itemize
+elementos XML (
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-ForcePlain
+Element
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
+): para usar con las clases DocBook.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Standard
+Los recuadros flexibles se definen usando la etiqueta
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\emph on
-0
+InsetLayout
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
-\lang ngerman
-
-\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
-\end_inset
-
-
-\lang spanish
+, que se explicará en un momento.
+\end_layout
+\begin_layout Standard
+La etiqueta
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-1
+InsetLayout
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] Indica si debería usarse
+ también sirve para otra función: puede utilizarse para personalizar el
+ diseño general de muchos tipos diferentes de recuadros.
+ Actualmente,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-PlainLayout
+InsetLayout
\end_layout
\end_inset
- o, por el contrario el usuario puede cambiar el estilo de párrafo del recuadro.
+ permite personalizar los parámetros de diseño de notas al pie, notas al
+ margen, notas, recuadros de código TeX (ERT), ramas, listados de programa,
+ índices, cuadros, tablas, algoritmos, URL, y argumentos opcionales, así
+ como para definir recuadros flexibles.
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
+\begin_layout Standard
+La definición de
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-FreeSpacing
+InsetLayout
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
-\emph on
+ debe comenzar con una línea de la forma:
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+InsetLayout <type>
+\end_layout
+\begin_layout Standard
+Aquí,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-0
+<type>
\end_layout
\end_inset
+ indica el recuadro cuyo formato se va a definir, y hay dos casos.
+\end_layout
-\emph default
-,
-\lang ngerman
-
-\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout Enumerate
+Se va a modificar el formato para un tipo de recuadro preexistente.
+ En este caso,
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+<type>
+\end_layout
-\lang spanish
+\end_inset
+ puede ser uno cualquiera de los siguientes:
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-1
+Algorithm
\end_layout
\end_inset
-]
-\lang english
-As with paragraph style
-\lang spanish
-s, véase sección
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-
-\begin_inset CommandInset ref
-LatexCommand ref
-reference "sub:Estilos-de-párrafo"
-
-\end_inset
-
-.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
+,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-HTML*
+Branch
\end_layout
\end_inset
- Controlan la salida XHTML.
- Véase la sección
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
+,
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\begin_inset CommandInset ref
-LatexCommand ref
-reference "sec:Etiquetas-para-XHTML"
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Box
+\end_layout
\end_inset
-.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
+,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-InToc
+Box:shaded
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
+,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\emph on
-0
+ERT
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
-\lang ngerman
-
-\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
-\end_inset
-
-
-\lang spanish
-
+,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-1
+Figure
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] Incluye o no el contenido de este inset en la cadena generada para el
- panel 'Navegador de contorno'.
- El no sería, por ejemplo, para que el contenido de una nota al pie en un
- encabezado de sección no aparezca en el índice que se despliega en el navegador
- de contorno, sin embargo, normalmente sí se incluiría el contenido de un
- estilo de carácter.
- Predeterminado es false: no incluir.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
+,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-KeepEmpty
+Foot
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
-\emph on
-
+,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\emph on
-0
+Index
\end_layout
\end_inset
+,
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\emph default
-,
-\lang ngerman
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Info
+\end_layout
-\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
-
-\lang spanish
-
+,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-1
+Info:menu
\end_layout
\end_inset
-]
-\lang english
-As with paragraph styles
-\lang spanish
-, véase sección
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
+,
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\begin_inset CommandInset ref
-LatexCommand ref
-reference "sub:Estilos-de-párrafo"
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Info:shortcut
+\end_layout
\end_inset
-.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
+,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LabelFont
+Info:shortcuts
\end_layout
\end_inset
- La tipografía para la etiqueta.
- Véase la sección
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
+,
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\begin_inset CommandInset ref
-LatexCommand ref
-reference "sub:Tipografías"
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Listings
+\end_layout
\end_inset
-.
- Anotar que esta definición nunca puede aparecer antes de
+,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Font
+Marginal
\end_layout
\end_inset
-, para que sea efectiva.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
+,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LabelString
+Note:Comment
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
+,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-string
+Note:Note
\end_layout
\end_inset
-=
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
+,
+\begin_inset Newline newline
\end_inset
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
-\end_inset
-
-] Lo que se mostrará sobre el botón u otra parte como etiqueta del recuadro.
- Algunos tipos de recuadro (
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-código TeX
+Note:GreyedOut
\end_layout
\end_inset
- y
+,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Ramas
+OptArg
\end_layout
\end_inset
-) modifican esta etiqueta sobre la marcha.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
+,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LatexName
+Table
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
+, o
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-<nombre>
+URL
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] El nombre LaTeX correspondiente al asunto.
- Cualquier nombre de entorno o de comando.
+.
+
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
+\begin_layout Enumerate
+Se va a definir el formato para un recuadro flexible.
+ En este caso,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LatexParam
+<type>
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
+ puede ser cualquier identificador válido no utilizado por un recuadro preexiste
+nte.
+ El identificador puede incluir espacios, pero en este caso debe ponerse
+ todo entre comillas.
+ Puede además incluir un identificador de nombre del espacio, precedido
+ de dos puntos, como
+\begin_inset Quotes eld
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-<parámetro>
+Flex:Code
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] El parámetro opcional para el correspondiente
+
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
+.
+ Anotar que la definición de un flexible debe incluir
+\emph on
+además
+\emph default
+ una entrada
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LatexName
+LyXType
\end_layout
\end_inset
-, incluyendo posibles pares de corchetes,
+.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Standard
+La definición de
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-[]
+InsetLayout
\end_layout
\end_inset
-.
- Este parámetro no se puede cambiar desde dentro de LyX.
+ puede contener las siguientes entradas:
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LatexType
+BgColor
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+<nombre>
\end_layout
\end_inset
+] El color para el fondo del recuadro.
\lang english
-As with paragraph styles
-\lang spanish
-, véase sección
+See chapter
\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
LatexCommand ref
-reference "sub:Estilos-de-párrafo"
+reference "chap:Names-of-colors"
\end_inset
-.
+ for a list of the available color names.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LyxType
+ContentAsLabel
\end_layout
\end_inset
- Puede ser
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-charstyle
+
+\emph on
+0
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-custom
-\end_layout
+,
+\lang ngerman
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
-,
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-element
-\end_layout
-\end_inset
+\lang spanish
-, o
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-end
+1
\end_layout
\end_inset
- (indicando una definición ficticia que finaliza definiciones de estilos
- de texto, etc).
- Esta entrada es requerida y solo es significativa para recuadros flexibles.
- Entre otras cosas, determina en qué menús aparecerá este recuadro.
- Si
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LyXType
+] Si usar no el contenido del recuadro como etiqueta del mismo cuando el
+ recuadro se cierra.
+ Por omisión, falso.
\end_layout
-\end_inset
-
- es
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-charstyle
+CopyStyle
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-MultiPar
+<type>
\end_layout
\end_inset
- es falso.
-
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
+]
+\lang english
+As with paragraph styles
+\lang spanish
+, véase sección
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-MultiPar
-\end_layout
-\end_inset
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:Estilos-de-párrafo"
- se puede poner como verdadero para recuadros de estilos
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
+\end_inset
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-charstyle
-\end_layout
+.
+
+\lang english
+Note that you need to specify the complete type, e.
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+g
+\lang spanish
+.
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
-, si poniéndolo
-\emph on
-después
-\emph default
- de
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LyXType
+CopyStyle Flex:<nombre>
\end_layout
\end_inset
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-MultiPar
+CustomPars
\end_layout
\end_inset
\end_inset
-] Indica si se permiten múltiples párrafos en este recuadro.
- Además establecerá para CustomPars el mismo valor y para ForcePlain el
- valor opuesto.
- Estos pueden modificarse a otros valores si se usan
-\emph on
-después
-\emph default
- de MultiPar.
+] Indica si el usuario puede emplear el diálogo Configuración del párrafo
+ para modificar el párrafo.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-NeedProtect
+Decoration
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
+ Puede ser
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\emph on
-0
+Classic
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
-\lang ngerman
+,
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Minimalistic
+\end_layout
-\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
+, o
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\lang spanish
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Conglomerate
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+, que describe el estilo de presentación para el marco y los botones del
+ recuadro.
+ Las notas al pie usan generalmente
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-1
+Classic
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] Si los comandos frágiles deben o no ser
+, los recuadros de código TeX
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Minimalistic
+\end_layout
-\backslash
-protect
+\end_inset
+
+, y los de estilos del texto
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Conglomerate
\end_layout
\end_inset
-'ed en este recuadro.
- (Nota: es
-\emph on
-no
-\emph default
- si el comando mismo debe ser protegido
-\emph on
-.)
+.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-ParbreakIsNewline
+Display
\end_layout
\end_inset
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\emph on
0
\end_layout
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\emph on
1
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] Igual que para estilos de párrafo, véase sección
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
+] Solo es útil si
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\begin_inset CommandInset ref
-LatexCommand ref
-reference "sub:Estilos-de-párrafo"
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+LatexType
+\end_layout
\end_inset
-.
- Por omisión es falso.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
+ es
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-PassThru
+Environment
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
-\emph on
-
+.
+ Indica si el entorno se ubicará en su propio espacio en la salida o si
+ aparecerá en línea con el texto circundante.
+ Si se pone falso, se supone que el entorno LaTeX ignora los espacios en
+ blanco (incluyendo un carácter de línea nueva) después de las etiquetas
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
+\backslash
+begin{
\emph on
-0
+LatexName
+\emph default
+}
\end_layout
\end_inset
+ y
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+\backslash
+end{
+\emph on
+LatexName
\emph default
-,
-\lang ngerman
+}
+\end_layout
-\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
+.
+ Por omisión, verdadero.
+\end_layout
-\lang spanish
-
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-1
+End
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] Igual que para estilos de párrafo, véase sección
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
+ Requerido al final de las declaraciones de formato del recuadro
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\begin_inset CommandInset ref
-LatexCommand ref
-reference "sub:Estilos-de-párrafo"
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+InsetLayout
+\end_layout
\end_inset
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Preamble
+Font
\end_layout
\end_inset
- Igual que para estilos de párrafo, véase sección
+ La tipografía usada tanto para el cuerpo del texto como para la etiqueta.
+ Véase la sección
\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
LatexCommand ref
-reference "sub:Estilos-de-párrafo"
+reference "sub:Tipografías"
\end_inset
.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
+ Anotar que al definir esta tipografía se define automáticamente el mismo
+ valor para la etiqueta,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-RefPrefix
+LabelFont
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
+, así que define aquella primero y después define
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-string
+LabelFont
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] Prefijo a usar cuando se crean etiquetas que se refieren a recuadros de
- este tipo.
- Esto permite el uso de referencias con formato.
+ si las quieres diferentes.
+
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Requires
+ForceLTR
\end_layout
\end_inset
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-string
-\end_layout
+
+\emph on
+0
+\end_layout
\end_inset
-] Igual que para estilos de párrafo, véase sección
-\begin_inset space ~
+,
+\lang ngerman
+
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
-\begin_inset CommandInset ref
-LatexCommand ref
-reference "sub:Estilos-de-párrafo"
+\lang spanish
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+1
+\end_layout
\end_inset
-.
+] Fuerza el idioma
+\begin_inset Quotes fld
+\end_inset
+
+latex
+\begin_inset Quotes frd
+\end_inset
+
+ que genera salida Izquierda-Derecha (latin), p.
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+e.
+\begin_inset space \space{}
+\end_inset
+
+en código TeX o URL.
+ Un parche.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-ResetsFont
+ForcePlain
\end_layout
\end_inset
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\emph on
0
\end_layout
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\emph on
1
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] Si este recuadro debería usar la tipografía de su entorno o la suya propia.
- Por omisión es su propia tipografía.
+] Indica si debería usarse
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+PlainLayout
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ o, por el contrario el usuario puede cambiar el estilo de párrafo del recuadro.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Spellcheck
+FreeSpacing
\end_layout
\end_inset
[
+\emph on
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
+
+\emph default
,
\lang ngerman
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\emph on
1
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] Revisar la ortografía del contenido del recuadro.
- Por omisión, sí.
-\end_layout
+]
+\lang english
+As with paragraph style
+\lang spanish
+s, véase sección
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
-\begin_layout Subsection
-Contadores
-\begin_inset CommandInset label
-LatexCommand label
-name "sub:Contadores"
-\end_inset
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:Estilos-de-párrafo"
+\end_inset
+.
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Standard
-Es necesario definir los contadores (
-\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
+\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-chapter
+HTML*
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
-\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
+ Controlan la salida XHTML.
+ Véase la sección
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sec:Etiquetas-para-XHTML"
+
+\end_inset
+
+.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-figure
+InToc
\end_layout
\end_inset
-, \SpecialChar \ldots{}
-) en la propia clase de texto.
- Los contadores estándar están definidos en el archivo
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-stdcounters.inc
+
+\emph on
+0
\end_layout
\end_inset
-, de modo que no tienes más que añadir
-\end_layout
+,
+\lang ngerman
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-Input stdcounters.inc
-\end_layout
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
-\begin_layout Standard
-en el archivo de formato para que funcionen.
- Pero si quieres puedes definir contadores personalizados.
- La declaración de un contador debe comenzar con:
+
+\lang spanish
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+1
\end_layout
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-Counter <nombre>
+\end_inset
+
+] Incluye o no el contenido de este inset en la cadena generada para el
+ panel 'Navegador de contorno'.
+ El no sería, por ejemplo, para que el contenido de una nota al pie en un
+ encabezado de sección no aparezca en el índice que se despliega en el navegador
+ de contorno, sin embargo, normalmente sí se incluiría el contenido de un
+ estilo de carácter.
+ Predeterminado es false: no incluir.
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Standard
-donde
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-<nombre>
+KeepEmpty
\end_layout
\end_inset
- es el nombre del contador.
- Hay que terminar con
+ [
+\emph on
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-End
+
+\emph on
+0
\end_layout
\end_inset
-.
-\end_layout
-\begin_layout Standard
-Se pueden usar además los parámetros siguientes:
-\end_layout
+\emph default
+,
+\lang ngerman
+
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
+\lang spanish
-\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LabelString
+1
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
+]
+\lang english
+As with paragraph styles
+\lang spanish
+, véase sección
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:Estilos-de-párrafo"
+
+\end_inset
+
+.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-string
+LabelFont
\end_layout
\end_inset
-=""] Si se define esta cadena, indica cómo se muestra el contador.
- Al establecer este valor también se da el mismo valor a
+ La tipografía para la etiqueta.
+ Véase la sección
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:Tipografías"
+
+\end_inset
+
+.
+ Anotar que esta definición nunca puede aparecer antes de
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LabelStringAppendix
+Font
\end_layout
\end_inset
-.
- Para los valores de 'string' se pueden usar las estructuras siguientes:
+, para que sea efectiva.
\end_layout
-\begin_deeper
-\begin_layout Itemize
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\backslash
-thecounter
+LabelString
\end_layout
\end_inset
- será reemplazado por la expansión de
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LabelString
+string
\end_layout
\end_inset
+=
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
-\begin_inset Newline linebreak
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
- (o
+] Lo que se mostrará sobre el botón u otra parte como etiqueta del recuadro.
+ Algunos tipos de recuadro (
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LabelStringAppendix
+código TeX
\end_layout
\end_inset
-) del contador
+ y
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-counter
+Ramas
\end_layout
\end_inset
-.
-
+) modifican esta etiqueta sobre la marcha.
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Itemize
-los valores del contador pueden expresarse usando macros tipo LaTeX como
-
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\backslash
-
-\emph on
-numbertype
-\emph default
-{
-\emph on
-counter
-\emph default
-}
+LatexName
\end_layout
\end_inset
-, donde
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\emph on
-numbertype
+<nombre>
\end_layout
\end_inset
- puede ser:
+] El nombre LaTeX correspondiente al asunto.
+ Cualquier nombre de entorno o de comando.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-arabic
+LatexParam
\end_layout
\end_inset
-: 1, 2, 3,\SpecialChar \ldots{}
-;
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-alph
+<parámetro>
\end_layout
\end_inset
- para minúsculas: a, b, c, \SpecialChar \ldots{}
-;
+] El parámetro opcional para el correspondiente
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Alph
+LatexName
\end_layout
\end_inset
- para mayúsculas: A, B, C, \SpecialChar \ldots{}
-;
+, incluyendo posibles pares de corchetes,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-roman
+[]
\end_layout
\end_inset
- números romanos en minúscula: i, ii, iii, \SpecialChar \ldots{}
+.
+ Este parámetro no se puede cambiar desde dentro de LyX.
+\end_layout
-\begin_inset Foot
+\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
+LatexType
+\end_layout
-\size normal
-\emph on
-\color none
-N.
-\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
-del T.
-\emph default
-: El estilo
-\family sans
-
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
+
+\lang english
+As with paragraph styles
+\lang spanish
+, véase sección
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-\family sans
-\size normal
-\color none
-spanish
-\end_layout
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:Estilos-de-párrafo"
\end_inset
+.
+\end_layout
-\family default
- de
-\family sans
-
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\family sans
-\size normal
-\color none
-babel
+LyxType
\end_layout
\end_inset
+ Puede ser
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\family default
-\size default
-\color inherit
- los transforma automáticamente en versalitas
-\noun on
-, i, ii
-\noun default
-\SpecialChar \ldots{}
-, ya que los romanos en minúscula no se usan en español.
-
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+charstyle
\end_layout
\end_inset
-;
+,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Roman
+custom
\end_layout
\end_inset
- para romanos en mayúsculas: I, II, III.
-\end_layout
-
-\end_deeper
-\begin_layout Standard
-Si no se define
+,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LabelString
+element
\end_layout
\end_inset
-, se construye un valor por omisión así: si el contador tiene un contador
- maestro
+, o
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-master
+end
\end_layout
\end_inset
- (definido mediante
+ (indicando una definición ficticia que finaliza definiciones de estilos
+ de texto, etc).
+ Esta entrada es requerida y solo es significativa para recuadros flexibles.
+ Entre otras cosas, determina en qué menús aparecerá este recuadro.
+ Si
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Within
+LyXType
\end_layout
\end_inset
-), se usa la cadena
+ es
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\backslash
-themaster.
-\backslash
-arabic{counter}
+charstyle
\end_layout
\end_inset
-; si no, se usa la cadena
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\backslash
-arabic{counter}
+MultiPar
\end_layout
\end_inset
-.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
+ es falso.
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LabelStringAppendix
+MultiPar
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
+ se puede poner como verdadero para recuadros de estilos
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-string
+charstyle
\end_layout
\end_inset
-=""] Lo mismo que
+, si poniéndolo
+\emph on
+después
+\emph default
+ de
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LabelString
+LyXType
\end_layout
\end_inset
-, pero para el apéndice.
+.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-PrettyFormat
+MultiPar
\end_layout
\end_inset
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-string
-\end_layout
-\end_inset
+\emph on
+0
+\end_layout
-=
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
+,
+\lang ngerman
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
-] Un formato para usar con las referencias a este contador.
- Por ejemplo, podríamos querer las referencias a los números de sección
- en la forma
-\begin_inset Quotes fld
-\end_inset
-Sección
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
+\lang spanish
-2.4
-\begin_inset Quotes frd
-\end_inset
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-.
- La cadena debería contener
-\begin_inset Quotes eld
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+1
+\end_layout
-##
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
-.
- Esto será reemplazado por el número correspondiente del contador.
- Así pues, para secciones sería: Section ##.
+] Indica si se permiten múltiples párrafos en este recuadro.
+ Además establecerá para CustomPars el mismo valor y para ForcePlain el
+ valor opuesto.
+ Estos pueden modificarse a otros valores si se usan
+\emph on
+después
+\emph default
+ de MultiPar.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Within
+NeedProtect
\end_layout
\end_inset
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-string
+
+\emph on
+0
\end_layout
\end_inset
-=""] Si esto se establece para el nombre de otro contador, el presente contador
- se reiniciará cada vez que el otro aumente.
- Por ejemplo,
+,
+\lang ngerman
+
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
+\lang spanish
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-subsection
+1
\end_layout
\end_inset
- se numera dentro de
+] Si los comandos frágiles deben o no ser
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-section
+
+\backslash
+protect
\end_layout
\end_inset
-.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Subsection
-Descripción de las tipografías
-\begin_inset CommandInset label
-LatexCommand label
-name "sub:Tipografías"
-
-\end_inset
-
-
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Standard
-Una descripción de una tipografía se ve como:
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-Font
-\family roman
+'ed en este recuadro.
+ (Nota: es
\emph on
-o
-\family default
+no
\emph default
- LabelFont
+ si el comando mismo debe ser protegido
\emph on
-o
-\emph default
- DefaultFont
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
- ...
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-EndFont
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Standard
-Están disponibles los comandos siguientes:
+.)
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Color
+ParbreakIsNewline
\end_layout
\end_inset
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\emph on
-none
+0
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-black
-\end_layout
+,
+\lang ngerman
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
-,
+
+\lang spanish
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-white
+1
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
+] Igual que para estilos de párrafo, véase sección
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-red
-\end_layout
+
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:Estilos-de-párrafo"
\end_inset
-,
+.
+ Por omisión es falso.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-green
+PassThru
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+ [
+\emph on
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-blue
+
+\emph on
+0
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-cyan
-\end_layout
+\emph default
+,
+\lang ngerman
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
-,
+
+\lang spanish
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-magenta
+1
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
+] Igual que para estilos de párrafo, véase sección
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-yellow
-\end_layout
+
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:Estilos-de-párrafo"
\end_inset
-]
+.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Family
+Preamble
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
-\emph on
-
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
+ Igual que para estilos de párrafo, véase sección
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-\emph on
-Roman
-\end_layout
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:Estilos-de-párrafo"
\end_inset
+.
+\end_layout
-\emph default
-,
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Sans
+RefPrefix
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Typewriter
+string
\end_layout
\end_inset
-]
+] Prefijo a usar cuando se crean etiquetas que se refieren a recuadros de
+ este tipo.
+ Esto permite el uso de referencias con formato.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Misc
+Requires
\end_layout
\end_inset
\end_inset
-] Son argumentos válidos:
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
+] Igual que para estilos de párrafo, véase sección
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-emph
-\end_layout
+
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:Estilos-de-párrafo"
\end_inset
-,
+.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-noun
+ResetsFont
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-strikeout
+0
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-underbar
-\end_layout
+,
+\lang ngerman
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
-,
+
+\lang spanish
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-uuline
+
+\emph on
+1
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+] Si este recuadro debería usar la tipografía de su entorno o la suya propia.
+ Por omisión es su propia tipografía.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-uwave
+Spellcheck
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-no_emph
+0
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+,
+\lang ngerman
+
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
+\lang spanish
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-no_noun
+
+\emph on
+1
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-no_strikeout
+] Revisar la ortografía del contenido del recuadro.
+ Por omisión, sí.
\end_layout
+\begin_layout Subsection
+Contadores
+\begin_inset CommandInset label
+LatexCommand label
+name "sub:Contadores"
+
\end_inset
-,
-\begin_inset Flex Code
+
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Standard
+Es necesario definir los contadores (
+\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-no_bar
+chapter
\end_layout
\end_inset
,
-\begin_inset Flex Code
+\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-no_uuline
+figure
\end_layout
\end_inset
- y
+, \SpecialChar \ldots{}
+) en la propia clase de texto.
+ Los contadores estándar están definidos en el archivo
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-no_uwave
+stdcounters.inc
\end_layout
\end_inset
-.
- Cada uno de ellos activa o desactiva el atributo correspondiente.
- Por ejemplo,
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
+, de modo que no tienes más que añadir
+\end_layout
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-emph
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+Input stdcounters.inc
\end_layout
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout Standard
+en el archivo de formato para que funcionen.
+ Pero si quieres puedes definir contadores personalizados.
+ La declaración de un contador debe comenzar con:
+\end_layout
- activa énfasis, y
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+Counter <nombre>
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Standard
+donde
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-no_emph
+<nombre>
\end_layout
\end_inset
- lo desactiva.
-\begin_inset Newline newline
-\end_inset
-
-Si esto último parece superfluo, recordemos que la configuración de tipografías
- para el presente contexto se hereda generalmente del contexto circundante.
- Por eso
+ es el nombre del contador.
+ Hay que terminar con
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-no_emph
+End
\end_layout
\end_inset
- desactivaría el énfasis que estaba vigente, digamos, en un entorno teorema.
+.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Standard
+Se pueden usar además los parámetros siguientes:
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Series
+LabelString
\end_layout
\end_inset
[
-\emph on
-
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\emph on
-Medium
+string
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
-\emph default
-,
+=""] Si se define esta cadena, indica cómo se muestra el contador.
+ Al establecer este valor también se da el mismo valor a
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Bold
+LabelStringAppendix
\end_layout
\end_inset
-]
+.
+ Para los valores de 'string' se pueden usar las estructuras siguientes:
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
+\begin_deeper
+\begin_layout Itemize
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Shape
+
+\backslash
+thecounter
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
-\emph on
-
+ será reemplazado por la expansión de
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\emph on
-Up
+LabelString
\end_layout
\end_inset
-\emph default
-,
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Italic
-\end_layout
-
+\begin_inset Newline linebreak
\end_inset
-,
+ (o
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-SmallCaps
+LabelStringAppendix
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+) del contador
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Slanted
+counter
\end_layout
\end_inset
-]
+.
+
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
+\begin_layout Itemize
+los valores del contador pueden expresarse usando macros tipo LaTeX como
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Size
+
+\backslash
+
+\emph on
+numbertype
+\emph default
+{
+\emph on
+counter
+\emph default
+}
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
+, donde
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-tiny
+
+\emph on
+numbertype
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+ puede ser:
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-small
+arabic
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+: 1, 2, 3,\SpecialChar \ldots{}
+;
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\emph on
-normal
+alph
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+ para minúsculas: a, b, c, \SpecialChar \ldots{}
+;
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-large
+Alph
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+ para mayúsculas: A, B, C, \SpecialChar \ldots{}
+;
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-larger
+roman
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
-\begin_inset Flex Code
+ números romanos en minúscula: i, ii, iii, \SpecialChar \ldots{}
+
+\begin_inset Foot
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-largest
-\end_layout
+\size normal
+\emph on
+\color none
+N.
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
-,
+del T.
+\emph default
+: El estilo
+\family sans
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-huge
+
+\family sans
+\size normal
+\color none
+spanish
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+
+\family default
+ de
+\family sans
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-giant
-\end_layout
-
-\end_inset
-]
+\family sans
+\size normal
+\color none
+babel
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Subsection
-Descripción del formato de cita
-\begin_inset CommandInset label
-LatexCommand label
-name "sub:Descripción-formato-cita"
-
\end_inset
+\family default
+\size default
+\color inherit
+ los transforma automáticamente en versalitas
+\noun on
+, i, ii
+\noun default
+\SpecialChar \ldots{}
+, ya que los romanos en minúscula no se usan en español.
+
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Standard
-Los bloques
+\end_inset
+
+;
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-CiteFormat
+Roman
\end_layout
\end_inset
- se usan para describir la forma en que debe mostrarse la información bibliográf
-ica, tanto en LyX (en el diálogo de citas y en las ayudas emergentes, por
- ejemplo) como en la salida XHTML.
- El aspecto de unode estos bloques podría ser este:
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-CiteFormat
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
- article ...
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
- book ...
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-End
+ para romanos en mayúsculas: I, II, III.
\end_layout
+\end_deeper
\begin_layout Standard
-Las líneas definen cómo se va a mostrar la información bibliográfica asociada
- con un artículo o libro, respectivamente, y tales definiciones se pueden
- dar para cualquier `tipo de entrada' que pudiera estar presente en un archivo
- BibTeX.
- LyX define un formato por omsión en el código fuente que se usará si no
- se da una definición específica.
- LyX predefine varios formatos en el archivo
+Si no se define
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-stdciteformats.inc
+LabelString
\end_layout
\end_inset
-, que se incluye en la mayoría de las clases de documento de LyX.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Standard
-Las definiciones usan un lenguaje simple que permite reemplazar las claves
- BibTeX por sus valores.
- Las claves deben encerrarse entre símbolos
+, se construye un valor por omisión así: si el contador tiene un contador
+ maestro
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-%
+master
\end_layout
\end_inset
-, p.
-\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
-\end_inset
-
-ej.:
+ (definido mediante
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-%author%
+Within
\end_layout
\end_inset
-.
- Así, una simple definición sería:
-\end_layout
+), se usa la cadena
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-misc %author%,
-\begin_inset Quotes eld
-\end_inset
-
-%title
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
-.
+\backslash
+themaster.
+\backslash
+arabic{counter}
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Standard
-Esto imprimiría el autor, una coma, a continuación el título entre comillas
- y un punto para finalizar.
-\end_layout
+\end_inset
-\begin_layout Standard
-A veces querrás, por supuesto, imprimir una clave solo si existe.
- Esto puede hacerse mediante una construcción condicional tal como:
+; si no, se usa la cadena
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-{%volume%[[vol.
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-%volume%]]}
+\backslash
+arabic{counter}
\end_layout
\end_inset
-, que quiere decir: si la clave
+.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-volume
+LabelStringAppendix
\end_layout
\end_inset
- existe, imprime
-\begin_inset Quotes eld
-\end_inset
-
-vol.
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+string
+\end_layout
- seguido de la clave.
- También es posible tener una cláusula de otro modo en el condicional, como:
-\begin_inset Newline newline
\end_inset
-
+=""] Lo mismo que
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-{%author%[[%author%]][[%editor%, ed.]]}
+LabelString
\end_layout
\end_inset
+, pero para el apéndice.
+\end_layout
-\begin_inset Newline newline
-\end_inset
-
-Aquí, la clave
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-author
+PrettyFormat
\end_layout
\end_inset
- se imprime si existe; por otra parte, se imprime la clave
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-author
+string
\end_layout
\end_inset
- seguida por
-\begin_inset Quotes eld
+=
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
-,
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-ed.
\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
-.
- Advierte que la clave se encierra entre signos
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
+] Un formato para usar con las referencias a este contador.
+ Por ejemplo, podríamos querer las referencias a los números de sección
+ en la forma
+\begin_inset Quotes fld
+\end_inset
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-%
-\end_layout
+Sección
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+2.4
+\begin_inset Quotes frd
\end_inset
-; el condicional entero se encierra entre llaves; y las cláusulas condicional
- y por otra parte se ponen entre cobles corchetes,
+.
+ La cadena debería contener
\begin_inset Quotes eld
\end_inset
+##
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
+.
+ Esto será reemplazado por el número correspondiente del contador.
+ Así pues, para secciones sería: Section ##.
+\end_layout
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-[[
+Within
\end_layout
\end_inset
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\begin_inset Quotes eld
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+string
+\end_layout
- y
-\begin_inset Quotes eld
\end_inset
-
+=""] Si esto se establece para el nombre de otro contador, el presente contador
+ se reiniciará cada vez que el otro aumente.
+ Por ejemplo,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-]]
+subsection
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
-\end_inset
-
-.
- No debe haber espacios entre ninguno de ellos.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Standard
-Hay otra pieza de sintaxis disponible en las definiciones, como esta:
+ se numera dentro de
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-{!<i>!}
+section
\end_layout
\end_inset
.
- Define una pieza de información para ser usada cuando creamos
-\begin_inset Quotes eld
-\end_inset
-
-texto enriquecido
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
-\end_inset
-
-.
- Obviamente, no queremos etiquetas HTML cuando escribimos texto sencillo,
- por tanto deben ponerse entre
-\begin_inset Quotes eld
-\end_inset
+\end_layout
-{!
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout Subsection
+Descripción de las tipografías
+\begin_inset CommandInset label
+LatexCommand label
+name "sub:Tipografías"
- y
-\begin_inset Quotes eld
\end_inset
-!}
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
-\end_inset
-.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Standard
-Además, hay dos clases especiales de definiciones disponibles en un bloque
-
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-CiteFormat
+Una descripción de una tipografía se ve como:
\end_layout
-\end_inset
-
-.
- Un ejemplo de la primera sería:
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+Font
+\family roman
+\emph on
+o
+\family default
+\emph default
+ LabelFont
+\emph on
+o
+\emph default
+ DefaultFont
\end_layout
\begin_layout LyX-Code
-!quotetitle
-\begin_inset Quotes eld
-\end_inset
-
-%title%
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
-\end_inset
-
+ ...
+\end_layout
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+EndFont
\end_layout
\begin_layout Standard
-Esto es una abreviación, o macro, y se puede usar tratándola como si fuera
- una clave:
+Están disponibles los comandos siguientes:
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-%!quotetitle%
+Color
\end_layout
\end_inset
-.
- LyX tratará
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-%!quotetitle%
-\end_layout
-
-\end_inset
- exactamente como trataría su definición.
- Por tanto, permítenos un
\emph on
-aviso
-\emph default
- obvio.
- No hagas:
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-!funfun %funfun%
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Standard
-ni nada parecido.
- LyX no caería en un bucle infinito, pero sí en uno muy largo.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Standard
-El segundo tipo especial de definición sería como:
+none
\end_layout
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-_pptext pp.
-\end_layout
+\end_inset
-\begin_layout Standard
-Esto define un trozo de texto traducible, que permite traducir partes relevantes
- de la bibliografía.
- Puede incluirse en una definición tratándolo como una clave:
+,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-%_pptext%
+black
\end_layout
\end_inset
-.
- Varios de estos están predefinidos en
+,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-stdciteformats.inc
+white
\end_layout
\end_inset
-.
- Advertiremos que no son macros en el sentido definido.
- No se expandirán.
+,
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+red
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Standard
-Aquí hay, pues, un ejemplo que usa todas estas características:
-\begin_inset VSpace defskip
\end_inset
+,
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+green
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Standard
-\noindent
-
-\family typewriter
-!authoredit {%author%[[%author%, ]][[{%editor%[[%editor%, %_edtext%, ]]}]]}
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Standard
-\begin_inset VSpace defskip
\end_inset
-Así definimos una macro que imprime el autor seguido de coma, si la clave
-
+,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-author
+blue
\end_layout
\end_inset
- está definida, o imprime el nombre del editor seguido por el texto
+,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-_edtext
+cyan
\end_layout
\end_inset
- o su traducción (por omisión
-\begin_inset Quotes eld
-\end_inset
-
-ed.
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
-\end_inset
-
-), si la clave
+,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-editor
+magenta
\end_layout
\end_inset
- está definida.
- De hecho, esto está definido en
+,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-stdciteformats.inc
+yellow
\end_layout
\end_inset
-, por tanto puedes usarlo en tus propias definiciones o redefiniciones,
- si cargas antes ese archivo.
+]
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Section
-Etiquetas para la salida XHTML
-\begin_inset CommandInset label
-LatexCommand label
-name "sec:Etiquetas-para-XHTML"
+\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Family
+\end_layout
+\end_inset
-\end_layout
+ [
+\emph on
-\begin_layout Standard
-Como para LaTeX o DocBook, el formato de salida XHTML en LyX también se
- controla mediante la información contenida en archivos de formato.
- En general, LyX provee valores predefinidos sensatos y, como se mencionó
- anteriormente, incluso construirá reglas de estilo CSS a partir de las
- otras etiquetas de formato.
- Por ejemplo, LyX intentará usar la información proporcionada por la declaración
-
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Font
+
+\emph on
+Roman
\end_layout
\end_inset
- para el estilo Chapter para escribir CSS que formateará adecuadamente los
- encabezados de capítulo.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Standard
-En muchos casos, por tanto, no tendrás que hacer nada para obtener una aceptable
- salida XHTML para tus propios entornos, recuadros personalizados y cosas
- así.
- Pero en ciertos casos querrás hacer cambios, y para eso LyX proporciona
- un número de etiquetas de formato que se pueden usar para personalizar
- los XHTML y CSS generados.
-\end_layout
-\begin_layout Standard
-Advertimos que hay dos etiquetas,
+\emph default
+,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-HTMLPreamble
+Sans
\end_layout
\end_inset
- y
+,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-AddToHTMLPreamble
+Typewriter
\end_layout
\end_inset
- que pueden aparecer fuera de las declaraciones de estilos y recuadros.
- Véase
-\begin_inset CommandInset ref
-LatexCommand ref
-reference "sub:Parámetros-generales-clases"
+]
+\end_layout
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
- para detalles sobre esto.
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Misc
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Subsection
-Estilos de párrafo
-\begin_inset CommandInset label
-LatexCommand label
-name "sub:Estilos-de-párrafo-XHTML"
-
\end_inset
-
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Standard
-El tipo de XHTML que genera LyX para un párrafo depende de si se trata de
- un párrafo normal, de un comando o de un entorno, en los que esto se determina
- por el contenido de la correspondiente etiqueta
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LaTeXType
+string
\end_layout
\end_inset
-.
-
-\end_layout
+] Son argumentos válidos:
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\begin_layout Standard
-Para un comando o párrafo, la salida XHTML tiene la forma siguiente:
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+emph
\end_layout
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-<tag attr=
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
-value
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
-\end_inset
+,
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
->
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+noun
\end_layout
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-<labeltag attr=
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
-\end_inset
-
-value
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
->Label</labeltag>
-\end_layout
+,
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-Contents of the paragraph.
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+strikeout
\end_layout
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-</tag>
-\end_layout
+\end_inset
-\begin_layout Standard
-Por supuesto, `label tags´ se omiten si el párrafo no tiene rótulo.
-\end_layout
+,
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\begin_layout Standard
-Para un entorno que no sea algún tipo de lista, XHTML toma la forma:
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+underbar
\end_layout
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-<tag attr=
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
-value
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
-\end_inset
+,
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
->
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+uuline
\end_layout
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-<itemtag attr=
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
-value
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
-\end_inset
+,
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-><labeltag attr=
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+uwave
+\end_layout
-value
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
->Environment Label</labeltag>First paragraph.</itemtag>
-\end_layout
+,
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-<itemtag>Second paragraph.</itemtag>
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+no_emph
\end_layout
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-</tag>
-\end_layout
+\end_inset
-\begin_layout Standard
-El rótulo se genera solo para el primer párrafo, como debería ser, por ejemplo,
- para un teorema.
-
-\end_layout
+,
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\begin_layout Standard
-Para una lista disponemos de una de estas formas:
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+no_noun
\end_layout
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-<tag attr=
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
-value
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
-\end_inset
+,
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
->
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+no_strikeout
\end_layout
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-<itemtag attr=
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
-value
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
-\end_inset
-
-><labeltag attr=
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
-\end_inset
-
-value
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
-\end_inset
-
->List Label</labeltag>First item.</itemtag>
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-<itemtag attr=
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
-\end_inset
-
-value
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
-\end_inset
-
-><labeltag attr=
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
-\end_inset
-
-value
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
-\end_inset
-
->List Label</labeltag>Second item.</itemtag>
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-</tag>
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-<tag attr=
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
-\end_inset
-
-value
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
-\end_inset
+,
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
->
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+no_bar
\end_layout
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-<labeltag attr=
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
-\end_inset
-
-value
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
-\end_inset
-
->List Label</labeltag><itemtag attr=
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
-value
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
-\end_inset
+,
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
->First item.</itemtag>
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+no_uuline
\end_layout
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-<labeltag attr=
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
-\end_inset
-
-value
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
-\end_inset
-
->List Label</labeltag><itemtag attr=
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
-\end_inset
-
-value
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
->Second item.</itemtag>
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-</tag>
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Standard
-Observa los diferentes órdenes de
+ y
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-labeltag
+no_uwave
\end_layout
\end_inset
- e
+.
+ Cada uno de ellos activa o desactiva el atributo correspondiente.
+ Por ejemplo,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-itemtag
+emph
\end_layout
\end_inset
-.
- El orden que obtenemos depende del ajuste de
+ activa énfasis, y
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-HTMLLabelFirst
+no_emph
\end_layout
\end_inset
-: Si
+ lo desactiva.
+\begin_inset Newline newline
+\end_inset
+
+Si esto último parece superfluo, recordemos que la configuración de tipografías
+ para el presente contexto se hereda generalmente del contexto circundante.
+ Por eso
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-HTMLLabelFirst
+no_emph
\end_layout
\end_inset
- es falso (por omisión), se obtiene el primero de ellos, con el rótulo dentro
- del ítem; si verdadero, se obtiene el segundo, con el rótulo fuera del
- ítem.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Standard
-Las etiquetas específicas y la salida de los atributos para cada tipo de
- párrafo puede ser controlado por medio de las etiquetas de formato que
- vamos a describir.
- Como mencionamos antes, sin embargo, LyX usa predefinidos adecuados para
- muchos de estos valores, por lo que generalmente no necesitarás hacer nada
- para obtener una buena salida XHTML.
- Partiendo de las etiquetas ya disponibles puedes afinar lascosas a tu gusto.
+ desactivaría el énfasis que estaba vigente, digamos, en un entorno teorema.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-HTMLAttr
+Series
\end_layout
\end_inset
[
+\emph on
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-string
-\end_layout
-\end_inset
+\emph on
+Medium
+\end_layout
-] Especifica información de los atributos a entregar con la etiqueta principal.
- Por ejemplo,
-\begin_inset Quotes eld
\end_inset
+\emph default
+,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-class=`mydiv'
+Bold
\end_layout
\end_inset
+]
+\end_layout
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
-\end_inset
-
-.
- Por omisión, LyX producirá
-\begin_inset Quotes eld
-\end_inset
-
-
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-class=`layoutname'
+Shape
\end_layout
\end_inset
+ [
+\emph on
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
-\end_inset
-
-, donde
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-layoutname
+
+\emph on
+Up
\end_layout
\end_inset
- es el nombre del formato en LyX, en minúsculas, por ejemplo: chapter.
- Esto
-\emph on
-no
+
\emph default
- debería contener ninguna información de estilo.
- Usa
+,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-HTMLStyle
+Italic
\end_layout
\end_inset
- para ese propósito.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
+,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-HTMLForceCSS
+SmallCaps
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
+,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\emph on
-0
+Slanted
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
-\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
-\end_inset
-
+]
+\end_layout
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-1
+Size
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] Si producir la información CSS predeterminada que LyX genera para este
- formato, incluso si se proporciona explícitamente información adicional
- mediante
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-HTMLStyle
+tiny
\end_layout
\end_inset
-.
- Poner
+,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-1
+small
\end_layout
\end_inset
- permite alterar o aumentar el CSS generado, no sobrescribirlo totalmente.
- Por omisión es
+,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-0
+
+\emph on
+normal
\end_layout
\end_inset
-.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
+,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-HTMLItem
+large
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
+,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-string
+larger
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] Etiqueta a usar para párrafos individuales de entornos, reemplazando
+,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-itemtag
+largest
\end_layout
\end_inset
- en los ejemplos de arriba.
- Por omisión,
+,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-div
+huge
\end_layout
\end_inset
-.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
+,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-HTMLItemAttr
+giant
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-string
+]
\end_layout
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout Subsection
+Descripción del formato de cita
+\begin_inset CommandInset label
+LatexCommand label
+name "sub:Descripción-formato-cita"
-] Atributos para la etiqueta ítem.
- Por omisión
-\begin_inset Quotes eld
\end_inset
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-class=`layoutname_item'
\end_layout
-\end_inset
-
-
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
-\end_inset
-
-.
- Esto
-\emph on
-no
-\emph default
- debería contener ninguna información de estilo.
- Usa
+\begin_layout Standard
+Los bloques
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-HTMLStyle
+CiteFormat
\end_layout
\end_inset
- para ese propósito.
+ se usan para describir la forma en que debe mostrarse la información bibliográf
+ica, tanto en LyX (en el diálogo de citas y en las ayudas emergentes, por
+ ejemplo) como en la salida XHTML.
+ El aspecto de unode estos bloques podría ser este:
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-HTMLLabel
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+CiteFormat
\end_layout
-\end_inset
-
- [
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+ article ...
+\end_layout
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-string
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+ book ...
\end_layout
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+End
+\end_layout
-] Etiqueta a usar para rótulos de párrafos e ítems, reemplazando
+\begin_layout Standard
+Las líneas definen cómo se va a mostrar la información bibliográfica asociada
+ con un artículo o libro, respectivamente, y tales definiciones se pueden
+ dar para cualquier `tipo de entrada' que pudiera estar presente en un archivo
+ BibTeX.
+ LyX define un formato por omsión en el código fuente que se usará si no
+ se da una definición específica.
+ LyX predefine varios formatos en el archivo
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-labeltag
+stdciteformats.inc
\end_layout
\end_inset
- en los ejemplos de arriba.
- Por omisión,
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-span
+, que se incluye en la mayoría de las clases de documento de LyX.
\end_layout
-\end_inset
-
-, a menos que
+\begin_layout Standard
+Las definiciones usan un lenguaje simple que permite reemplazar las claves
+ BibTeX por sus valores.
+ Las claves deben encerrarse entre símbolos
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LabelType
+%
\end_layout
\end_inset
- sea
+, p.
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+ej.:
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Top_Environment
+%author%
\end_layout
\end_inset
- o
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Centered_Top_Environment
+.
+ Así, una simple definición sería:
\end_layout
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+misc %author%,
+\begin_inset Quotes eld
\end_inset
-, en cuyos casos es
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
+%title
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-div
+.
\end_layout
-\end_inset
-
- por omisión.
+\begin_layout Standard
+Esto imprimiría el autor, una coma, a continuación el título entre comillas
+ y un punto para finalizar.
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
+\begin_layout Standard
+A veces querrás, por supuesto, imprimir una clave solo si existe.
+ Esto puede hacerse mediante una construcción condicional tal como:
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-HTMLLabelAttr
+{%volume%[[vol.
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+%volume%]]}
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
+, que quiere decir: si la clave
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-string
+volume
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] Atributos para la etiqueta del rótulo.
- Por omisión es
+ existe, imprime
\begin_inset Quotes eld
\end_inset
-
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-class=`layoutname_label'
-\end_layout
-
+vol.
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
-.
- Esto
-\emph on
-no
-\emph default
- debería contener ninguna información de estilo.
- Usa
+ seguido de la clave.
+ También es posible tener una cláusula de otro modo en el condicional, como:
+\begin_inset Newline newline
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-HTMLStyle
+{%author%[[%author%]][[%editor%, ed.]]}
\end_layout
\end_inset
- para ese propósito.
-\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Newline newline
+\end_inset
+
+Aquí, la clave
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-HTMLLabelFirst
+author
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
+ se imprime si existe; por otra parte, se imprime la clave
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\emph on
-0
+author
\end_layout
+\end_inset
+
+ seguida por
+\begin_inset Quotes eld
\end_inset
,
-\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
+ed.
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+.
+ Advierte que la clave se encierra entre signos
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-1
+%
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] Solo es significativo para entornos tipo lista, esta etiqueta controla
- si la etiqueta de rótulo se genera antes o dentro de la etiqueta de ítem.
- Se usa, por ejemplo, en el entorno descripción, donde queremos `
+; el condicional entero se encierra entre llaves; y las cláusulas condicional
+ y por otra parte se ponen entre cobles corchetes,
+\begin_inset Quotes eld
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-<dt>\SpecialChar \ldots{}
-</dt><dd>\SpecialChar \ldots{}
-</dd>
+[[
\end_layout
\end_inset
-.
- Por omisión,
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-0
-\end_layout
+\begin_inset Quotes eld
+\end_inset
+ y
+\begin_inset Quotes eld
\end_inset
-: la etiqueta de rótulo se genera dentro de la etiqueta de ítem.
-\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-HTMLPreamble
+]]
\end_layout
\end_inset
- Información para generar en la sección
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-<head>
-\end_layout
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
- cuando se usa este estilo.
- Esto podría, por ejemplo, utilizarse para incluir un bloque
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-<script>
+.
+ No debe haber espacios entre ninguno de ellos.
\end_layout
-\end_inset
-
- definiendo un controlador
+\begin_layout Standard
+Hay otra pieza de sintaxis disponible en las definiciones, como esta:
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-onclick
+{!<i>!}
\end_layout
\end_inset
.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
+ Define una pieza de información para ser usada cuando creamos
+\begin_inset Quotes eld
+\end_inset
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-HTMLStyle
-\end_layout
+texto enriquecido
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+.
+ Obviamente, no queremos etiquetas HTML cuando escribimos texto sencillo,
+ por tanto deben ponerse entre
+\begin_inset Quotes eld
\end_inset
- Información de estilo CSS a incluir cuando se usa este estilo.
- Advertimos que esto será automáticamente envuelto en un bloque
+{!
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
+ y
+\begin_inset Quotes eld
+\end_inset
+
+!}
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
+.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Standard
+Además, hay dos clases especiales de definiciones disponibles en un bloque
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-<style>
+CiteFormat
\end_layout
\end_inset
- generado por el formato, por tanto solo es necesario incluir el propio
- CSS.
+.
+ Un ejemplo de la primera sería:
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+!quotetitle
+\begin_inset Quotes eld
+\end_inset
+
+%title%
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
+
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Standard
+Esto es una abreviación, o macro, y se puede usar tratándola como si fuera
+ una clave:
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-HTMLTag
+%!quotetitle%
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
+.
+ LyX tratará
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-string
+%!quotetitle%
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] Etiqueta para el rótulo principal, reemplazando
+ exactamente como trataría su definición.
+ Por tanto, permítenos un
+\emph on
+aviso
+\emph default
+ obvio.
+ No hagas:
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+!funfun %funfun%
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Standard
+ni nada parecido.
+ LyX no caería en un bucle infinito, pero sí en uno muy largo.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Standard
+El segundo tipo especial de definición sería como:
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+_pptext pp.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Standard
+Esto define un trozo de texto traducible, que permite traducir partes relevantes
+ de la bibliografía.
+ Puede incluirse en una definición tratándolo como una clave:
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-tag
+%_pptext%
\end_layout
\end_inset
- en losejemplos de arriba.
- Por omisión es
+.
+ Varios de estos están predefinidos en
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-div
+stdciteformats.inc
\end_layout
\end_inset
.
+ Advertiremos que no son macros en el sentido definido.
+ No se expandirán.
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
+\begin_layout Standard
+Aquí hay, pues, un ejemplo que usa todas estas características:
+\begin_inset VSpace defskip
+\end_inset
+
+
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Standard
+\noindent
+
+\family typewriter
+!authoredit {%author%[[%author%, ]][[{%editor%[[%editor%, %_edtext%, ]]}]]}
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Standard
+\begin_inset VSpace defskip
+\end_inset
+
+Así definimos una macro que imprime el autor seguido de coma, si la clave
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-HTMLTitle
+author
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
+ está definida, o imprime el nombre del editor seguido por el texto
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\emph on
-0
+_edtext
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
-\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+ o su traducción (por omisión
+\begin_inset Quotes eld
\end_inset
+ed.
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+), si la clave
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-1
+editor
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] Marca este estilo como el que se va a usar para generar la etiqueta
+ está definida.
+ De hecho, esto está definido en
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-<title>
+stdciteformats.inc
\end_layout
\end_inset
- para el archivo XHTML.
- Por omisión, es falso.
- El archivo
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-stdtitle.inc
+, por tanto puedes usarlo en tus propias definiciones o redefiniciones,
+ si cargas antes ese archivo.
\end_layout
+\begin_layout Section
+Etiquetas para la salida XHTML
+\begin_inset CommandInset label
+LatexCommand label
+name "sec:Etiquetas-para-XHTML"
+
\end_inset
- lo establece verdadero para el entorno
+
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Standard
+Como para LaTeX o DocBook, el formato de salida XHTML en LyX también se
+ controla mediante la información contenida en archivos de formato.
+ En general, LyX provee valores predefinidos sensatos y, como se mencionó
+ anteriormente, incluso construirá reglas de estilo CSS a partir de las
+ otras etiquetas de formato.
+ Por ejemplo, LyX intentará usar la información proporcionada por la declaración
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-title
+Font
\end_layout
\end_inset
-.
-
+ para el estilo Chapter para escribir CSS que formateará adecuadamente los
+ encabezados de capítulo.
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Subsection
-Recuadros XHTML
+\begin_layout Standard
+En muchos casos, por tanto, no tendrás que hacer nada para obtener una aceptable
+ salida XHTML para tus propios entornos, recuadros personalizados y cosas
+ así.
+ Pero en ciertos casos querrás hacer cambios, y para eso LyX proporciona
+ un número de etiquetas de formato que se pueden usar para personalizar
+ los XHTML y CSS generados.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Standard
-La salida XHTML de los recuadros también se puede controlar por información
- en archivos 'layout'.
-\begin_inset Foot
+Advertimos que hay dos etiquetas,
+\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Por ahora, esto solo es cierto para recuadros de
-\begin_inset Quotes eld
+HTMLPreamble
+\end_layout
+
\end_inset
-texto
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
+ y
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+AddToHTMLPreamble
+\end_layout
+
\end_inset
- (recuadros en los que puedes escribir) y no para recuadros de
-\begin_inset Quotes eld
+ que pueden aparecer fuera de las declaraciones de estilos y recuadros.
+ Véase
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:Parámetros-generales-clases"
+
\end_inset
-commandos
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
+ para detalles sobre esto.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Subsection
+Estilos de párrafo
+\begin_inset CommandInset label
+LatexCommand label
+name "sub:Estilos-de-párrafo-XHTML"
+
\end_inset
- (recuadros asociados con cuadros de diálogo).
+
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Standard
+El tipo de XHTML que genera LyX para un párrafo depende de si se trata de
+ un párrafo normal, de un comando o de un entorno, en los que esto se determina
+ por el contenido de la correspondiente etiqueta
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+LaTeXType
\end_layout
\end_inset
- También en este caso, LyX intenta proporcionar valores predefinidos adecuados,
- y construye reglas de estilo CSS, pero todo puede personalizarse.
+.
+
\end_layout
\begin_layout Standard
-Para los recuadros, LyX produce XHTML en la forma:
+Para un comando o párrafo, la salida XHTML tiene la forma siguiente:
\end_layout
\begin_layout LyX-Code
\end_layout
\begin_layout LyX-Code
-<labeltag>Label</labeltag>
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-<innertag attr=
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
-\end_inset
+<labeltag attr=
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
value
\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
->Contents of the inset.</innertag>
+>Label</labeltag>
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+Contents of the paragraph.
\end_layout
\begin_layout LyX-Code
\end_layout
\begin_layout Standard
-Si el recuadro permite párrafos múltiples ---o sea, si
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
+Por supuesto, `label tags´ se omiten si el párrafo no tiene rótulo.
+\end_layout
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-MultiPar
+\begin_layout Standard
+Para un entorno que no sea algún tipo de lista, XHTML toma la forma:
\end_layout
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+<tag attr=
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
- es verdadero--- el contenido del recuadro se generará en forma de párrafos
- estructurados según los estilos usados para dichos párrafos (normal, cita,
- y similares).
- El rótulo de la etiqueta se omite si el párrafo no lo tiene y, por el momento,
- es siempre
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
+value
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-span
+>
\end_layout
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+<itemtag attr=
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
-.
- La etiqueta interior es opcional y, por omisión, no aparece.
+value
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
+><labeltag attr=
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
+value
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
+>Environment Label</labeltag>First paragraph.</itemtag>
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Standard
-Las etiquetas y atributos específicos para cada recuadro se pueden controlar
- mediante las siguientes etiquetas de formato.
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+<itemtag>Second paragraph.</itemtag>
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+</tag>
+\end_layout
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-HTMLAttr
+\begin_layout Standard
+El rótulo se genera solo para el primer párrafo, como debería ser, por ejemplo,
+ para un teorema.
+
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Standard
+Para una lista disponemos de una de estas formas:
\end_layout
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+<tag attr=
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
- [
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
+value
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-string
+>
\end_layout
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+<itemtag attr=
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
-] Especifica información de atributos a generar con la etiqueta principal.
- Por ejemplo,
-\begin_inset Quotes eld
+value
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
+><labeltag attr=
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
+value
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-class=`myinset' onclick=`\SpecialChar \ldots{}
-'
+>List Label</labeltag>First item.</itemtag>
\end_layout
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+<itemtag attr=
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
+value
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+><labeltag attr=
\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
-.
- Por omisión, LyX generará
-\begin_inset Quotes eld
+value
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
+>List Label</labeltag>Second item.</itemtag>
+\end_layout
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+</tag>
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-class=`insetname'
\end_layout
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+<tag attr=
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
+value
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
+>
+\end_layout
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+<labeltag attr=
\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
-, donde
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
+value
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-insetname
-\end_layout
+>List Label</labeltag><itemtag attr=
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+value
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
- es el nombre del recuadro en LyX, en minúsculas y con los caracteres no
- alfanuméricos convertidos en guiones bajos, por ejemplo: footnote.
+>First item.</itemtag>
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+<labeltag attr=
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-HTMLForceCSS
-\end_layout
+value
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+>List Label</labeltag><itemtag attr=
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
- [
+value
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
+>Second item.</itemtag>
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+</tag>
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Standard
+Observa los diferentes órdenes de
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\emph on
-0
+labeltag
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
-\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
-\end_inset
-
-
+ e
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-1
+itemtag
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] Si producir la información CSS predeterminadad que LyX genera para este
- formato, incluso si se da explícitamente información adicional con
+.
+ El orden que obtenemos depende del ajuste de
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-HTMLStyle
+HTMLLabelFirst
\end_layout
\end_inset
-.
- Si esto es
+: Si
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-1
+HTMLLabelFirst
\end_layout
\end_inset
- parmite alterar o aumentar el CSS generado, en vez de sobrescribirlo.
- Por omisión, 0.
+ es falso (por omisión), se obtiene el primero de ellos, con el rótulo dentro
+ del ítem; si verdadero, se obtiene el segundo, con el rótulo fuera del
+ ítem.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Standard
+Las etiquetas específicas y la salida de los atributos para cada tipo de
+ párrafo puede ser controlado por medio de las etiquetas de formato que
+ vamos a describir.
+ Como mencionamos antes, sin embargo, LyX usa predefinidos adecuados para
+ muchos de estos valores, por lo que generalmente no necesitarás hacer nada
+ para obtener una buena salida XHTML.
+ Partiendo de las etiquetas ya disponibles puedes afinar lascosas a tu gusto.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-HTMLInnerAttr
+HTMLAttr
\end_layout
\end_inset
\end_inset
-] Atributos para la etiqueta interna.
- Por omisión, es
+] Especifica información de los atributos a entregar con la etiqueta principal.
+ Por ejemplo,
\begin_inset Quotes eld
\end_inset
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-class=`insetname_inner'
+class=`mydiv'
\end_layout
\end_inset
\end_inset
.
-\end_layout
+ Por omisión, LyX producirá
+\begin_inset Quotes eld
+\end_inset
+
-\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-HTMLInnerTag
+class=`layoutname'
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-string
-\end_layout
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
-] La etiqueta interna, reemplazando
+, donde
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-innertag
+layoutname
\end_layout
\end_inset
- en los ejemplos de arriba.
- Por omisión, ninguna.
-\end_layout
+ es el nombre del formato en LyX, en minúsculas, por ejemplo: chapter.
+ Esto
+\emph on
+no
+\emph default
+ debería contener ninguna información de estilo.
+ Usa
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+HTMLStyle
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ para ese propósito.
+\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-HTMLIsBlock
+HTMLForceCSS
\end_layout
\end_inset
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\emph on
0
\end_layout
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\emph on
1
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] Si este recuadro representa un bloque de texto independiente (como una
- nota al pie) o bien representa material que está incluido en el texto circundan
-te (como una rama).
- Por omisión, 1.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
+] Si producir la información CSS predeterminada que LyX genera para este
+ formato, incluso si se proporciona explícitamente información adicional
+ mediante
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-HTMLLabel
+HTMLStyle
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
+.
+ Poner
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-string
+1
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] Un rótulo para este recuadro, posiblemente incluyendo una referencia a
- un contador.
- Por ejemplo, para notas al pie, podría ser:
+ permite alterar o aumentar el CSS generado, no sobrescribirlo totalmente.
+ Por omisión es
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\backslash
-arabic{footnote}
+0
\end_layout
\end_inset
.
- Esto es opcional y no hay valor predeterminado.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-HTMLPreamble
+HTMLItem
\end_layout
\end_inset
- Información que saldrá en la sección
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-<head>
+string
\end_layout
\end_inset
- cuando se usa este estilo.
- Esto podría usarse, por ejemplo, para incluir un bloque
+] Etiqueta a usar para párrafos individuales de entornos, reemplazando
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-<script>
+itemtag
\end_layout
\end_inset
- que defina un controlador
+ en los ejemplos de arriba.
+ Por omisión,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-onclick
+div
\end_layout
\end_inset
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-HTMLStyle
+HTMLItemAttr
\end_layout
\end_inset
- Información de estilo CSS a incluir cuando se usa este estilo.
- Esto será automáticamente envuelto en un bloque
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-<style>
+string
\end_layout
\end_inset
- generado por el formato, por lo que solo hay que incluir el propio CSS.
-\end_layout
+] Atributos para la etiqueta ítem.
+ Por omisión
+\begin_inset Quotes eld
+\end_inset
+
-\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-HTMLTag
+class=`layoutname_item'
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
+
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
+.
+ Esto
+\emph on
+no
+\emph default
+ debería contener ninguna información de estilo.
+ Usa
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-string
+HTMLStyle
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] La etiqueta a usar para el rótulo principal, reemplazando
+ para ese propósito.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-tag
+HTMLLabel
\end_layout
\end_inset
- en los ejemplos de arriba.
- El valor por omisión depende de
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-MultiPar
+string
\end_layout
\end_inset
-: Si
+] Etiqueta a usar para rótulos de párrafos e ítems, reemplazando
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-MultiPar
+labeltag
\end_layout
\end_inset
- es verdadero, es
+ en los ejemplos de arriba.
+ Por omisión,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-div
+span
\end_layout
\end_inset
-; si es falso, el valor por omisión es
+, a menos que
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-span
+LabelType
\end_layout
\end_inset
-.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Subsection
-Flotantes XHTML
-\end_layout
+ sea
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\begin_layout Standard
-La salida XHTML para flotantes también se puede controlar mediante información
- en archivos 'layout'.
- La salida tiene la forma:
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Top_Environment
\end_layout
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-<tag attr=
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
-value
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
-\end_inset
+ o
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
->
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Centered_Top_Environment
\end_layout
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-Contents of the float.
-\end_layout
+\end_inset
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-</tag>
+, en cuyos casos es
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+div
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Standard
-La leyenda, si la hay, es un recuadro separado y se generará como tal.
- Su aspecto puede controlarse con InsetLayout para recuadros de leyendas.
-
+\end_inset
+
+ por omisión.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-HTMLAttr
+HTMLLabelAttr
\end_layout
\end_inset
\end_inset
-] Especifica información de los atributos a generar con la etiqueta principal,
- Por ejemplo,
+] Atributos para la etiqueta del rótulo.
+ Por omisión es
\begin_inset Quotes eld
\end_inset
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-class=`myfloat' onclick=`\SpecialChar \ldots{}
-'
+class=`layoutname_label'
\end_layout
\end_inset
\end_inset
.
- Por omisión, LyX generará
-\begin_inset Quotes eld
-\end_inset
-
-
+ Esto
+\emph on
+no
+\emph default
+ debería contener ninguna información de estilo.
+ Usa
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-class=`float float-floattype'
+HTMLStyle
\end_layout
\end_inset
+ para ese propósito.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+HTMLLabelFirst
+\end_layout
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
-, donde
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-floattype
+
+\emph on
+0
\end_layout
\end_inset
- es el nombre en LyX para este tipo de flotante, como determina la declaración
- de flotante (véase
-\begin_inset CommandInset ref
-LatexCommand ref
-reference "sub:Flotantes"
-
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
-), aunque en minúsculas y con los caracteres no alfanuméricos sustituidos
- por guiones bajos, por ejemplo: float-table.
-\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-HTMLStyle
+1
\end_layout
\end_inset
- Información de estilo CSS a incluir cuando se usa este flotante.
- Esto será automáticamente envuelto en un bloque
+] Solo es significativo para entornos tipo lista, esta etiqueta controla
+ si la etiqueta de rótulo se genera antes o dentro de la etiqueta de ítem.
+ Se usa, por ejemplo, en el entorno descripción, donde queremos `
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-<style>
+<dt>\SpecialChar \ldots{}
+</dt><dd>\SpecialChar \ldots{}
+</dd>
\end_layout
\end_inset
- generado por el formato, por lo que solo hay que incluir el propio CSS.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
+.
+ Por omisión,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-HTMLTag
+0
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
+: la etiqueta de rótulo se genera dentro de la etiqueta de ítem.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-string
+HTMLPreamble
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] La etiqueta a usar para este flotante, reemplazando "
+ Información para generar en la sección
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-tag
+<head>
\end_layout
\end_inset
-" en el ejemplo de arriba.
- El valor por omisión es
+ cuando se usa este estilo.
+ Esto podría, por ejemplo, utilizarse para incluir un bloque
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-div
+<script>
\end_layout
\end_inset
- y raramente habrá que cambiarlo.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Subsection
-Formato de la Bibliografía
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Standard
-La bibliografía se puede formatear usando bloques
+ definiendo un controlador
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-CiteFormat
+onclick
\end_layout
\end_inset
.
- Véase la sección
-\begin_inset CommandInset ref
-LatexCommand ref
-reference "sub:Descripción-formato-cita"
-
-\end_inset
-
- para los detalles.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Subsection
-CSS generado por LyX
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Standard
-Hemos mencionado ya que LyX generará reglas de estilo CSS predeterminadas
- para recuadros y estilos de párrafo, basados en la información suministrada
- para otros formatos.
- En esta sección comentaremos qué información usa LyX y cómo la usa.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Standard
-Actualmente, LyX auto-genera CSS solo para información sobre tipografías,
- haciendo uso de
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Family
+HTMLStyle
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+ Información de estilo CSS a incluir cuando se usa este estilo.
+ Advertimos que esto será automáticamente envuelto en un bloque
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Series
+<style>
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+ generado por el formato, por tanto solo es necesario incluir el propio
+ CSS.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Shape
+HTMLTag
\end_layout
\end_inset
-, y
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Size
+string
\end_layout
\end_inset
- especificados en la declaración
+] Etiqueta para el rótulo principal, reemplazando
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Font
+tag
\end_layout
\end_inset
-.
- (Véase
-\begin_inset CommandInset ref
-LatexCommand ref
-reference "sub:Tipografías"
+ en losejemplos de arriba.
+ Por omisión es
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+div
+\end_layout
-.) La traducción es bastante sencilla y evidente.
- Por ejemplo,
-\begin_inset Quotes eld
\end_inset
+.
+\end_layout
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Family Sans
+HTMLTitle
\end_layout
\end_inset
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\emph on
+0
+\end_layout
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
- se convierte en
-\begin_inset Quotes eld
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-font-family: sans-serif;
+1
\end_layout
\end_inset
+] Marca este estilo como el que se va a usar para generar la etiqueta
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+<title>
+\end_layout
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
-.
- La correspondencia entre tamaños LyX y tamaños CSS es un poco menos obvia,
- pero intuitiva en todo caso.
- Véase la función
+ para el archivo XHTML.
+ Por omisión, es falso.
+ El archivo
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-getSizeCSS()
+stdtitle.inc
\end_layout
\end_inset
- en
-\begin_inset Flex URL
+ lo establece verdadero para el entorno
+\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-src/FontInfo.cpp
+title
\end_layout
\end_inset
- para los detalles.
+.
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Chapter
-Inserción de material externo
+\begin_layout Subsection
+Recuadros XHTML
\end_layout
\begin_layout Standard
-\begin_inset Box Shadowbox
-position "t"
-hor_pos "c"
-has_inner_box 1
-inner_pos "t"
-use_parbox 0
-use_makebox 0
-width "100col%"
-special "none"
-height "1in"
-height_special "totalheight"
-status open
+La salida XHTML de los recuadros también se puede controlar por información
+ en archivos 'layout'.
+\begin_inset Foot
+status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-AVISO: Esta parte de la documentación no ha sido actualizada desde hace
- tiempo.
- Esperamos que aún sea adecuada, pero no hay garantías.
-\end_layout
+Por ahora, esto solo es cierto para recuadros de
+\begin_inset Quotes eld
+\end_inset
+texto
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
+ (recuadros en los que puedes escribir) y no para recuadros de
+\begin_inset Quotes eld
+\end_inset
-\end_layout
+commandos
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
-\begin_layout Standard
-El uso de material de procedencia externa a LyX se trata con detalle en
- el manual
-\emph on
-Objetos insertados
-\emph default
-.
- En el presente documento se trata sobre lo que debe suceder entre bambalinas
- para incluir nuevas clases de material.
+ (recuadros asociados con cuadros de diálogo).
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Section
-¿Cómo funciona?
+\end_inset
+
+ También en este caso, LyX intenta proporcionar valores predefinidos adecuados,
+ y construye reglas de estilo CSS, pero todo puede personalizarse.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Standard
-La característica material externo se basa en el concepto
-\emph on
-plantilla
-\emph default
-.
- Una plantilla es una especificación de la forma en que LyX interactúa con
- ciertos tipos de material.
- De por sí, LyX incluye plantillas predefinidas para figuras Xfig, varios
- tipos de imágenes raster, diagramas de ajedrez y notación musical LilyPond.
- Puedes comprobar la lista actual en el menú
-\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
-status collapsed
+Para los recuadros, LyX produce XHTML en la forma:
+\end_layout
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator
-Archivo\SpecialChar \menuseparator
-Material externo
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+<tag attr=
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
+value
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
+>
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+<labeltag>Label</labeltag>
\end_layout
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+<innertag attr=
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
+value
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
-.
- Además, es posible construir plantillas propias para soportar determinado
- tipo de material.
- Más tarde describiremos con más detalle lo que esto implica, y esperamos
- que nos envíes tus plantillas para que se puedan incluir en próximas versiones
- de LyX.
+>Contents of the inset.</innertag>
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+</tag>
\end_layout
\begin_layout Standard
-Otra idea básica de la característica material externo es distinguir entre
- el archivo original que sirve como base para el material final y el archivo
- generado que se incluye en el documento impreso o exportado.
- Por ejemplo, consideremos el caso de una figura hecha con
+Si el recuadro permite párrafos múltiples ---o sea, si
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Xfig
+MultiPar
\end_layout
\end_inset
-.
- El programa Xfig en sí mismo trabaja sobre un archivo original con extensión
-
+ es verdadero--- el contenido del recuadro se generará en forma de párrafos
+ estructurados según los estilos usados para dichos párrafos (normal, cita,
+ y similares).
+ El rótulo de la etiqueta se omite si el párrafo no lo tiene y, por el momento,
+ es siempre
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-.fig
+span
\end_layout
\end_inset
.
- Dentro de Xfig, se crea o modifica una figura y se guarda como un archivo
-
+ La etiqueta interior es opcional y, por omisión, no aparece.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Standard
+Las etiquetas y atributos específicos para cada recuadro se pueden controlar
+ mediante las siguientes etiquetas de formato.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-.fig
+HTMLAttr
\end_layout
\end_inset
-.
- Para incluir la figura en un documento, se ejecuta
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+string
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+] Especifica información de atributos a generar con la etiqueta principal.
+ Por ejemplo,
+\begin_inset Quotes eld
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+class=`myinset' onclick=`\SpecialChar \ldots{}
+'
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
+.
+ Por omisión, LyX generará
+\begin_inset Quotes eld
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+class=`insetname'
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
+, donde
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+insetname
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ es el nombre del recuadro en LyX, en minúsculas y con los caracteres no
+ alfanuméricos convertidos en guiones bajos, por ejemplo: footnote.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+HTMLForceCSS
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\emph on
+0
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+1
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+] Si producir la información CSS predeterminadad que LyX genera para este
+ formato, incluso si se da explícitamente información adicional con
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+HTMLStyle
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+.
+ Si esto es
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+1
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ parmite alterar o aumentar el CSS generado, en vez de sobrescribirlo.
+ Por omisión, 0.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+HTMLInnerAttr
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+string
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+] Atributos para la etiqueta interna.
+ Por omisión, es
+\begin_inset Quotes eld
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+class=`insetname_inner'
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
+.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+HTMLInnerTag
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+string
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+] La etiqueta interna, reemplazando
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+innertag
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ en los ejemplos de arriba.
+ Por omisión, ninguna.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+HTMLIsBlock
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+0
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\emph on
+1
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+] Si este recuadro representa un bloque de texto independiente (como una
+ nota al pie) o bien representa material que está incluido en el texto circundan
+te (como una rama).
+ Por omisión, 1.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+HTMLLabel
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+string
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+] Un rótulo para este recuadro, posiblemente incluyendo una referencia a
+ un contador.
+ Por ejemplo, para notas al pie, podría ser:
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\backslash
+arabic{footnote}
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+.
+ Esto es opcional y no hay valor predeterminado.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+HTMLPreamble
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ Información que saldrá en la sección
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+<head>
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ cuando se usa este estilo.
+ Esto podría usarse, por ejemplo, para incluir un bloque
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+<script>
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ que defina un controlador
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+onclick
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+HTMLStyle
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ Información de estilo CSS a incluir cuando se usa este estilo.
+ Esto será automáticamente envuelto en un bloque
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+<style>
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ generado por el formato, por lo que solo hay que incluir el propio CSS.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+HTMLTag
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+string
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+] La etiqueta a usar para el rótulo principal, reemplazando
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+tag
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ en los ejemplos de arriba.
+ El valor por omisión depende de
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+MultiPar
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+: Si
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+MultiPar
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ es verdadero, es
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+div
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+; si es falso, el valor por omisión es
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+span
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Subsection
+Flotantes XHTML
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Standard
+La salida XHTML para flotantes también se puede controlar mediante información
+ en archivos 'layout'.
+ La salida tiene la forma:
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+<tag attr=
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
+value
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
+>
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+Contents of the float.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+</tag>
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Standard
+La leyenda, si la hay, es un recuadro separado y se generará como tal.
+ Su aspecto puede controlarse con InsetLayout para recuadros de leyendas.
+
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+HTMLAttr
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+string
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+] Especifica información de los atributos a generar con la etiqueta principal,
+ Por ejemplo,
+\begin_inset Quotes eld
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+class=`myfloat' onclick=`\SpecialChar \ldots{}
+'
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
+.
+ Por omisión, LyX generará
+\begin_inset Quotes eld
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+class=`float float-floattype'
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
+, donde
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+floattype
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ es el nombre en LyX para este tipo de flotante, como determina la declaración
+ de flotante (véase
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:Flotantes"
+
+\end_inset
+
+), aunque en minúsculas y con los caracteres no alfanuméricos sustituidos
+ por guiones bajos, por ejemplo: float-table.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+HTMLStyle
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ Información de estilo CSS a incluir cuando se usa este flotante.
+ Esto será automáticamente envuelto en un bloque
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+<style>
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ generado por el formato, por lo que solo hay que incluir el propio CSS.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+HTMLTag
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+string
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+] La etiqueta a usar para este flotante, reemplazando "
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+tag
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+" en el ejemplo de arriba.
+ El valor por omisión es
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+div
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ y raramente habrá que cambiarlo.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Subsection
+Formato de la Bibliografía
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Standard
+La bibliografía se puede formatear usando bloques
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+CiteFormat
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+.
+ Véase la sección
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:Descripción-formato-cita"
+
+\end_inset
+
+ para los detalles.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Subsection
+CSS generado por LyX
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Standard
+Hemos mencionado ya que LyX generará reglas de estilo CSS predeterminadas
+ para recuadros y estilos de párrafo, basados en la información suministrada
+ para otros formatos.
+ En esta sección comentaremos qué información usa LyX y cómo la usa.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Standard
+Actualmente, LyX auto-genera CSS solo para información sobre tipografías,
+ haciendo uso de
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Family
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+,
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Series
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+,
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Shape
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+, y
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Size
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ especificados en la declaración
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Font
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+.
+ (Véase
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:Tipografías"
+
+\end_inset
+
+.) La traducción es bastante sencilla y evidente.
+ Por ejemplo,
+\begin_inset Quotes eld
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Family Sans
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
+ se convierte en
+\begin_inset Quotes eld
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+font-family: sans-serif;
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
+.
+ La correspondencia entre tamaños LyX y tamaños CSS es un poco menos obvia,
+ pero intuitiva en todo caso.
+ Véase la función
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+getSizeCSS()
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ en
+\begin_inset Flex URL
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+src/FontInfo.cpp
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ para los detalles.
+
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Chapter
+Inserción de material externo
+\begin_inset CommandInset label
+LatexCommand label
+name "chap:Inserción-de-material"
+
+\end_inset
+
+
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Standard
+\begin_inset Box Shadowbox
+position "t"
+hor_pos "c"
+has_inner_box 1
+inner_pos "t"
+use_parbox 0
+use_makebox 0
+width "100col%"
+special "none"
+height "1in"
+height_special "totalheight"
+status open
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+AVISO: Esta parte de la documentación no ha sido actualizada desde hace
+ tiempo.
+ Esperamos que aún sea adecuada, pero no hay garantías.
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Standard
+El uso de material de procedencia externa a LyX se trata con detalle en
+ el manual
+\emph on
+Objetos insertados
+\emph default
+.
+ En el presente documento se trata sobre lo que debe suceder entre bambalinas
+ para incluir nuevas clases de material.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Section
+¿Cómo funciona?
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Standard
+La característica material externo se basa en el concepto
+\emph on
+plantilla
+\emph default
+.
+ Una plantilla es una especificación de la forma en que LyX interactúa con
+ ciertos tipos de material.
+ De por sí, LyX incluye plantillas predefinidas para figuras Xfig, varios
+ tipos de imágenes raster, diagramas de ajedrez y notación musical LilyPond.
+ Puedes comprobar la lista actual en el menú
+\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator
+Archivo\SpecialChar \menuseparator
+Material externo
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+.
+ Además, es posible construir plantillas propias para soportar determinado
+ tipo de material.
+ Más tarde describiremos con más detalle lo que esto implica, y esperamos
+ que nos envíes tus plantillas para que se puedan incluir en próximas versiones
+ de LyX.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Standard
+Otra idea básica de la característica material externo es distinguir entre
+ el archivo original que sirve como base para el material final y el archivo
+ generado que se incluye en el documento impreso o exportado.
+ Por ejemplo, consideremos el caso de una figura hecha con
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Xfig
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+.
+ El programa Xfig en sí mismo trabaja sobre un archivo original con extensión
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+.fig
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+.
+ Dentro de Xfig, se crea o modifica una figura y se guarda como un archivo
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+.fig
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+.
+ Para incluir la figura en un documento, se ejecuta
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
ReferencedFile docbook "$$AbsPath$$Basename.eps"
\end_layout
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-ReferencedFile docbook-xml "$$AbsPath$$Basename.eps"
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-FormatEnd
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-Product "[XFig: $$FName]"
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-FormatEnd
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-TemplateEnd
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Standard
-Como puedes ver, la plantilla se incluye entre
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Template
-\end_layout
-
-\end_inset
-
- \SpecialChar \ldots{}
-
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-TemplateEnd
-\end_layout
-
-\end_inset
-
-.
- Contiene una cabecera que especifica algunas configuraciones generales
- y, por cada formato de archivo de documento primario soportado, una sección
-
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Format
-\end_layout
-
-\end_inset
-
- \SpecialChar \ldots{}
-
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-FormatEnd
-\end_layout
-
-\end_inset
-
-.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Subsection
-La cabecera de la plantilla
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-AutomaticProduction
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-true|false
-\end_layout
-
-\end_inset
-
- Si el archivo representado por la plantilla debe ser generado por LyX.
- Este comando debe aparecer exactamente una vez.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-FileFilter
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-<pattern>
-\end_layout
-
-\end_inset
-
- Un patrón global que se usa en el diálogo del archivo para filtrar los
- archivos deseados.
- Si hay más de una posible extensión de archivo (p.
-\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
-\end_inset
-
-e.,
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-tgif tiene
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-.obj
-\end_layout
-
-\end_inset
-
- y
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-.tgo
-\end_layout
-
-\end_inset
-
-), se pone algo como
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-"*.{obj,tgo}"
-\end_layout
-
-\end_inset
-
-.
- Este comando debe aparecer exactamente una vez.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-GuiName
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-<guiname>
-\end_layout
-
-\end_inset
-
- El texto mostrado sobre el botón.
- Este comando debe aparecer exactamente una vez.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-HelpText
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-<text>
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-HelpTextEnd
-\end_layout
-
-\end_inset
-
- El texto de ayuda que se muestra en diálogo.
- Da suficiente información sobre lo que puede proporcionar la plantilla.
- Este comando debe aparecer exactamente una vez.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-InputFormat
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-<format>
-\end_layout
-
-\end_inset
-
- El formato de archivo del original.
- Debe ser el nombre de un formato conocido por LyX (véase la sección
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-
-\begin_inset CommandInset ref
-LatexCommand ref
-reference "sec:Formatos"
-
-\end_inset
-
-).
- Se pone un
-\begin_inset Quotes fld
-\end_inset
-
-
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-*
-\end_layout
-
-\end_inset
-
-
-\begin_inset Quotes frd
-\end_inset
-
- si la plantilla puede manejar archivos originales o más de un formato.
- En este caso, LyX intentará inspeccionar el archivo mismo para deducir
- su formato.
- Este comando debe aparecer exactamente una vez.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Template
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-<id>
-\end_layout
-
-\end_inset
-
- Un nombre único para la plantilla.
- No debe contener macros de sustitución (véase abajo).
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+ReferencedFile docbook-xml "$$AbsPath$$Basename.eps"
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+FormatEnd
+\end_layout
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Transform
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+Product "[XFig: $$FName]"
+\end_layout
-Rotate|Resize|Clip|Extra
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+FormatEnd
\end_layout
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+TemplateEnd
+\end_layout
- Este comando especifica qué transformaciones son soportadas por esta plantilla.
- Puede aparecer ninguna o varias veces.
- Este comando facilita las correspondientes pestañas en el diálogo de material
- externo.
- Cada comando
+\begin_layout Standard
+Como puedes ver, la plantilla se incluye entre
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Transform
+Template
\end_layout
\end_inset
- debe tener el correspondiente
+ \SpecialChar \ldots{}
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-TransformCommand
+TemplateEnd
\end_layout
\end_inset
- o bien
+.
+ Contiene una cabecera que especifica algunas configuraciones generales
+ y, por cada formato de archivo de documento primario soportado, una sección
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-TransformOption
+Format
\end_layout
\end_inset
- en la sección
+ \SpecialChar \ldots{}
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Format
+FormatEnd
\end_layout
\end_inset
.
- De lo contrario la transformación no será soportada por ese formato.
-
\end_layout
\begin_layout Subsection
-La sección Format
+La cabecera de la plantilla
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Format
+AutomaticProduction
\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
-LaTeX|PDFLaTeX|PlainText|DocBook
-\end_layout
-
-\end_inset
-
- El formato de archivo del documento primario para el que es esta definición
- de formato.
- No toda plantilla tiene una representación sensible en los formatos de
- archivo de todos los documentos.
- No obstante, es preferible definir una sección
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Format
+true|false
\end_layout
\end_inset
- para todos los formatos.
- Se usa un texto postizo si no hay representación disponible.
- Entonces, al menos, se puede ver una referencia al material externo en
- el documento exportado.
+ Si el archivo representado por la plantilla debe ser generado por LyX.
+ Este comando debe aparecer exactamente una vez.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Option
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-<name>
+FileFilter
\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
-<value>
+<pattern>
\end_layout
\end_inset
- Este comando define una macro adicional,
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-$$<name>
-\end_layout
+ Un patrón global que se usa en el diálogo del archivo para filtrar los
+ archivos deseados.
+ Si hay más de una posible extensión de archivo (p.
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+e.,
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
-, para sustitución en
+tgif tiene
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Product
+.obj
\end_layout
\end_inset
-.
-
+ y
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-<value>
+.tgo
\end_layout
\end_inset
- puede contener en sí mismo macros de sustitución.
- La ventaja sobre el uso de
+), se pone algo como
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-<value>
+"*.{obj,tgo}"
\end_layout
\end_inset
- directamente en
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Product
+.
+ Este comando debe aparecer exactamente una vez.
\end_layout
-\end_inset
-
- es que el valor sustituido de
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-$$<name>
+GuiName
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+<guiname>
\end_layout
\end_inset
- está saneado así que es un argumento opcional válido en el formato del
- documento.
- Este comando puede aparecer ninguna o más veces.
+ El texto mostrado sobre el botón.
+ Este comando debe aparecer exactamente una vez.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Product
+HelpText
\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
<text>
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+HelpTextEnd
\end_layout
\end_inset
- El texto que se inserta en el documento exportado.
- Realmente este es el comando más importante y puede ser bastante complejo.
+ El texto de ayuda que se muestra en diálogo.
+ Da suficiente información sobre lo que puede proporcionar la plantilla.
Este comando debe aparecer exactamente una vez.
\end_layout
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Preamble
+InputFormat
\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
-<name>
+<format>
\end_layout
\end_inset
- Este comando especifica un fragmento de preámbulo que se incluirá en el
- preámbulo LaTeX.
- Tiene que definirse usando
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-PreambleDef
-\end_layout
-
+ El formato de archivo del original.
+ Debe ser el nombre de un formato conocido por LyX (véase la sección
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
- \SpecialChar \ldots{}
-
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-PreambleDefEnd
-\end_layout
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sec:Formatos"
\end_inset
-.
- Este comando puede aparecer ninguna o más veces.
-\end_layout
+).
+ Se pone un
+\begin_inset Quotes fld
+\end_inset
+
-\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-ReferencedFile
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
+*
+\end_layout
-<format>
-\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
-<filename>
-\end_layout
+\begin_inset Quotes frd
\end_inset
- Este comando indica los archivos que se crean por el proceso de conversión
- y que son necesarios para un formato de exportación particular.
- Si el nombre del archivo es relativo, se interpreta como relativo al documento
- maestro.
- Este comando puede darse ninguna o más veces.
+ si la plantilla puede manejar archivos originales o más de un formato.
+ En este caso, LyX intentará inspeccionar el archivo mismo para deducir
+ su formato.
+ Este comando debe aparecer exactamente una vez.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Requirement
+Template
\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
-<package>
+<id>
\end_layout
\end_inset
- El nombre de un paquete LaTeX requerido.
- El paquete se incuye mediante
+ Un nombre único para la plantilla.
+ No debe contener macros de sustitución (véase abajo).
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Transform
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
-\backslash
-usepackage{}
+Rotate|Resize|Clip|Extra
\end_layout
\end_inset
- en el preámbulo LaTeX.
- Este comando puede aparecer ninguna o más veces.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
+ Este comando especifica qué transformaciones son soportadas por esta plantilla.
+ Puede aparecer ninguna o varias veces.
+ Este comando facilita las correspondientes pestañas en el diálogo de material
+ externo.
+ Cada comando
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-TransformCommand
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-Rotate
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-RotationLatexCommand
+Transform
\end_layout
\end_inset
- Este comando especifica que el comando LaTeX incluido debería usarse para
- la rotación.
- Este comando puede aparecer una vez o ninguna.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
+ debe tener el correspondiente
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
TransformCommand
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-Resize
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-ResizeLatexCommand
\end_layout
\end_inset
- Este comando especifica que el comando LaTeX incluido debería usarse para
- cambiar el tamaño.
- Este comando puede aparecer una vez o ninguna.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
+ o bien
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
TransformOption
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
+\end_layout
-Rotate
-\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
-RotationLatexOption
+ en la sección
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Format
\end_layout
\end_inset
- Este comando especifica que la rotación se hace mediante un argumento opcional.
- Este comando puede aparecer una vez o ninguna.
+.
+ De lo contrario la transformación no será soportada por ese formato.
+
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Subsection
+La sección Format
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-TransformOption
+Format
\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
-Resize
-\begin_inset space ~
+LaTeX|PDFLaTeX|PlainText|DocBook
+\end_layout
+
\end_inset
-ResizeLatexOption
+ El formato de archivo del documento primario para el que es esta definición
+ de formato.
+ No toda plantilla tiene una representación sensible en los formatos de
+ archivo de todos los documentos.
+ No obstante, es preferible definir una sección
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Format
\end_layout
\end_inset
- Este comando especifica que el cambio de tamaño se hace mediante un argumento
- opcional.
- Este comando puede aparecer una vez o ninguna
+ para todos los formatos.
+ Se usa un texto postizo si no hay representación disponible.
+ Entonces, al menos, se puede ver una referencia al material externo en
+ el documento exportado.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-TransformOption
+Option
\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
-Clip
+<name>
\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
-ClipLatexOption
+<value>
\end_layout
\end_inset
- Este comando especifica que el recorte se hace mediante un argumento opcional.
- Este comando puede aparecer una vez o ninguna.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
+ Este comando define una macro adicional,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-TransformOption
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
+$$<name>
+\end_layout
-Extra
-\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
-ExtraLatexOption
+, para sustitución en
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Product
\end_layout
\end_inset
- Este comando especifica que se usa un argumento extra opcional.
- Este comando puede aparecer una vez o ninguna.
+.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-UpdateFormat
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-<format>
+<value>
\end_layout
\end_inset
- El formato de archivo del archivo convertido.
- Debe ser el nombre de un formato conocido por LyX (véase
-\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
+ puede contener en sí mismo macros de sustitución.
+ La ventaja sobre el uso de
+\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Convertidores
+<value>
\end_layout
\end_inset
- de
-\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
+ directamente en
+\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Gestión de archivos
+Product
\end_layout
\end_inset
- en el diálogo
-\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
+ es que el valor sustituido de
+\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Herramientas\SpecialChar \menuseparator
-Preferencias
+$$<name>
\end_layout
\end_inset
-).
- Este comando debe aparecer exactamente una vez.
+ está saneado así que es un argumento opcional válido en el formato del
+ documento.
+ Este comando puede aparecer ninguna o más veces.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-UpdateResult
+Product
\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
-<filename>
+<text>
\end_layout
\end_inset
- El nombre de archivo del archivo convertido.
- El nombre de archivo debe ser absoluto.
+ El texto que se inserta en el documento exportado.
+ Realmente este es el comando más importante y puede ser bastante complejo.
Este comando debe aparecer exactamente una vez.
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Subsection
-Definiciones de preámbulo
+\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Preamble
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+<name>
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Standard
-El archivo de configuración de plantillas externas puede contener definiciones
- de preámbulo adicionales encerradas entre
+\end_inset
+
+ Este comando especifica un fragmento de preámbulo que se incluirá en el
+ preámbulo LaTeX.
+ Tiene que definirse usando
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
.
- Se pueden usar por las plantillas en la sección
+ Este comando puede aparecer ninguna o más veces.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Format
-\end_layout
-
+ReferencedFile
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
-.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Section
-El mecanismo de sustitución
-\end_layout
+<format>
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
-\begin_layout Standard
-Cuando la función de material externo recurre a un programa externo, se
- hace sobre la base de un comando definido en el archivo de configuración
- de la plantilla.
- Estos comandos pueden contener varias macros que se expanden antes de su
- ejecución.
- La ejecución tiene lugar siempre en el directorio del documento.
-
+<filename>
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Standard
-Además, cada vez que el material externo se va a mostrar, el nombre será
- generado por el mecanismo de sustitución, y la mayoría de los demás comandos
- en la definición de la plantilla soportan también sustitución.
-
-\end_layout
+\end_inset
-\begin_layout Standard
-Las macros disponibles son las siguientes:
+ Este comando indica los archivos que se crean por el proceso de conversión
+ y que son necesarios para un formato de exportación particular.
+ Si el nombre del archivo es relativo, se interpreta como relativo al documento
+ maestro.
+ Este comando puede darse ninguna o más veces.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-$$AbsOrRelPathMaster
-\end_layout
-
+Requirement
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
- La ruta del archivo, absoluta o relativa al documento LyX maestro.
+<package>
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
+\end_inset
+
+ El nombre de un paquete LaTeX requerido.
+ El paquete se incuye mediante
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-$$AbsOrRelPathParent
+
+\backslash
+usepackage{}
\end_layout
\end_inset
- La ruta del archivo, absoluta o relativa al documento LyX.
+ en el preámbulo LaTeX.
+ Este comando puede aparecer ninguna o más veces.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-$$AbsPath
+TransformCommand
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+Rotate
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+RotationLatexCommand
\end_layout
\end_inset
- La ruta absoluta del archivo.
+ Este comando especifica que el comando LaTeX incluido debería usarse para
+ la rotación.
+ Este comando puede aparecer una vez o ninguna.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-$$Basename
+TransformCommand
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+Resize
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+ResizeLatexCommand
\end_layout
\end_inset
- El nombre de archivo sin ruta y sin la extensión.
+ Este comando especifica que el comando LaTeX incluido debería usarse para
+ cambiar el tamaño.
+ Este comando puede aparecer una vez o ninguna.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-$$Contents(
-\begin_inset Quotes eld
+TransformOption
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
-filename.ext
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
+Rotate
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
-)
+RotationLatexOption
\end_layout
\end_inset
- Esta macro expandirá los contenidos del archivo con el nombre
+ Este comando especifica que la rotación se hace mediante un argumento opcional.
+ Este comando puede aparecer una vez o ninguna.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-filename.ext
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+TransformOption
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+Resize
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+ResizeLatexOption
\end_layout
\end_inset
-.
+ Este comando especifica que el cambio de tamaño se hace mediante un argumento
+ opcional.
+ Este comando puede aparecer una vez o ninguna
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-$$Extension
+TransformOption
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+Clip
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+ClipLatexOption
\end_layout
\end_inset
- La extensión de archivo (incluyendo el punto).
+ Este comando especifica que el recorte se hace mediante un argumento opcional.
+ Este comando puede aparecer una vez o ninguna.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-$$FName
+TransformOption
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+Extra
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+ExtraLatexOption
\end_layout
\end_inset
- El nombre de archivo del archivo especificado en el diálogo de material
- externo.
- Esto es bien un nombre absoluto, bien relativo al documento LyX.
+ Este comando especifica que se usa un argumento extra opcional.
+ Este comando puede aparecer una vez o ninguna.
+
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-$$FPath
+UpdateFormat
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+<format>
\end_layout
\end_inset
- La parte de la ruta de
-\begin_inset Flex Code
+ El formato de archivo del archivo convertido.
+ Debe ser el nombre de un formato conocido por LyX (véase
+\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-$$FName
+Convertidores
\end_layout
\end_inset
- (nombre absoluto o relativo al documento LyX).
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
-\begin_inset Flex Code
+ de
+\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-$$RelPathMaster
+Gestión de archivos
\end_layout
\end_inset
- La ruta del archivo, relativa al documento maestro LyX.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
-\begin_inset Flex Code
+ en el diálogo
+\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-$$RelPathParent
+Herramientas\SpecialChar \menuseparator
+Preferencias
\end_layout
\end_inset
- La ruta del archivo, relativa al documento LyX.
+).
+ Este comando debe aparecer exactamente una vez.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-$$Sysdir
-\end_layout
-
+UpdateResult
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
- Esta macro expandirá a la ruta absoluta del directorio de sistema.
- Esto se usa habitualmente para apuntar a los varios guiones de ayuda que
- se empaquetan con LyX.
+<filename>
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
+\end_inset
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-$$Tempname
+ El nombre de archivo del archivo convertido.
+ El nombre de archivo debe ser absoluto.
+ Este comando debe aparecer exactamente una vez.
\end_layout
-\end_inset
-
- Un nombre y ruta completa a un directorio temporal que será borrado automáticam
-ente siempre que el documento se cierra, o se suprime la inserción de material
- externo.
+\begin_layout Subsection
+Definiciones de preámbulo
\end_layout
\begin_layout Standard
-Todas las macros de ruta contienen un separador de rastreo del directorio,
- así se puede construir, p.
-\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
-\end_inset
-
-e., el nombre de archivo absoluto con
+El archivo de configuración de plantillas externas puede contener definiciones
+ de preámbulo adicionales encerradas entre
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-$$AbsPath$$Basename$$Extension
+PreambleDef
\end_layout
\end_inset
-.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Standard
-Las macros anteriores son sustituidas en todos los comandos a menos que
- se indique lo contrario.
- El comando
+ \SpecialChar \ldots{}
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Product
+PreambleDefEnd
\end_layout
\end_inset
- soporta adicionalmente las siguientes sustituciones si se habilitan por
- los comandos
+.
+ Se pueden usar por las plantillas en la sección
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Transform
+Format
\end_layout
\end_inset
- y
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
+.
+\end_layout
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-TransformCommand
+\begin_layout Section
+El mecanismo de sustitución
\end_layout
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout Standard
+Cuando la función de material externo recurre a un programa externo, se
+ hace sobre la base de un comando definido en el archivo de configuración
+ de la plantilla.
+ Estos comandos pueden contener varias macros que se expanden antes de su
+ ejecución.
+ La ejecución tiene lugar siempre en el directorio del documento.
+
+\end_layout
-:
+\begin_layout Standard
+Además, cada vez que el material externo se va a mostrar, el nombre será
+ generado por el mecanismo de sustitución, y la mayoría de los demás comandos
+ en la definición de la plantilla soportan también sustitución.
+
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Standard
+Las macros disponibles son las siguientes:
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-$$ResizeFront
+$$AbsOrRelPathMaster
\end_layout
\end_inset
- La parte delantera del comando para cambiar el tamaño.
+ La ruta del archivo, absoluta o relativa al documento LyX maestro.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-$$ResizeBack
+$$AbsOrRelPathParent
\end_layout
\end_inset
- La parte trasera del comando para cambiar el tamaño.
+ La ruta del archivo, absoluta o relativa al documento LyX.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-$$RotateFront
+$$AbsPath
\end_layout
\end_inset
- La parte delantera del comando para la rotación.
+ La ruta absoluta del archivo.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-$$RotateBack
+$$Basename
\end_layout
\end_inset
- La parte trasera del comando para la rotación.
+ El nombre de archivo sin ruta y sin la extensión.
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Standard
-La cadena de valor del comando
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Option
+$$Contents(
+\begin_inset Quotes eld
+\end_inset
+
+filename.ext
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
+)
\end_layout
\end_inset
- soporta adicionalmente las siguientes sustituciones si éstas se han habilitado
- por los comandos
+ Esta macro expandirá los contenidos del archivo con el nombre
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Transform
+filename.ext
\end_layout
\end_inset
- y
+.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-TransformOption
+$$Extension
\end_layout
\end_inset
-:
+ La extensión de archivo (incluyendo el punto).
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-$$Clip
+$$FName
\end_layout
\end_inset
- La opción recorte.
+ El nombre de archivo del archivo especificado en el diálogo de material
+ externo.
+ Esto es bien un nombre absoluto, bien relativo al documento LyX.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-$$Extra
+$$FPath
\end_layout
\end_inset
- La opción extra.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
+ La parte de la ruta de
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-$$Resize
+$$FName
\end_layout
\end_inset
- La opción cambio de tamaño.
+ (nombre absoluto o relativo al documento LyX).
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-$$Rotate
+$$RelPathMaster
\end_layout
\end_inset
- La opción rotación.
+ La ruta del archivo, relativa al documento maestro LyX.
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Standard
-Te puedes preguntar por qué hay tantas macros de ruta.
- Por dos razones, principalmente:
-\end_layout
+\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\begin_layout Enumerate
-Los nombres de archivo relativo y absoluto deberían permanecer relativo
- o absoluto, respectivamente.
- Los usuarios pueden tener razones para preferir cualquiera de ambas formas.
- Los nombres relativos son útiles para documentos portables que deberían
- funcionar en máquinas diferentes, por ejemplo.
- Los nombres absolutos pueden ser requeridos por algunos programas.
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+$$RelPathParent
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Enumerate
-LaTeX procesa los nombres de archivo relativos de manera diferente a LyX
- y otros programas en archivos anidados incluidos.
- Para LyX, un nombre de archivo relativo es siempre relativo al documento
- que contiene el nombre de archivo.
- Para LaTeX, es siempre relativo al documento maestro.
- Estas dos definiciones son idénticas si se tiene solo un documento, pero
- son distintas si se tiene un documento maestro que incluye documentos parciales.
- Esto quiere decir que los nombres de archivo relativos deben ser transformados
- cuando se presentan a LaTeX.
- Afortunadamente, LyX hace esto automáticamente si se eligen las macros
- correctas.
-\end_layout
+\end_inset
-\begin_layout Standard
-Así pues, ¿qué macros de ruta deberían emplearse en las definiciones de
- plantillas nuevas? La regla no es difícil:
+ La ruta del archivo, relativa al documento LyX.
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Itemize
-Usar
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-$$AbsPath
+$$Sysdir
\end_layout
\end_inset
- si se requiere una ruta absoluta.
+ Esta macro expandirá a la ruta absoluta del directorio de sistema.
+ Esto se usa habitualmente para apuntar a los varios guiones de ayuda que
+ se empaquetan con LyX.
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Itemize
-Usar
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-$$AbsOrRelPathMaster
+$$Tempname
\end_layout
\end_inset
- si la cadena sustituida es algún tipo de entrada LaTeX.
+ Un nombre y ruta completa a un directorio temporal que será borrado automáticam
+ente siempre que el documento se cierra, o se suprime la inserción de material
+ externo.
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Itemize
-Si no, usar
+\begin_layout Standard
+Todas las macros de ruta contienen un separador de rastreo del directorio,
+ así se puede construir, p.
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+e., el nombre de archivo absoluto con
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-$$AbsOrRelPathParent
+$$AbsPath$$Basename$$Extension
\end_layout
\end_inset
- con el fin de preservar la elección del usuario.
+.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Standard
-Hay casos especiales en los que esta regla no funciona y se necesitan, p.
-\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+Las macros anteriores son sustituidas en todos los comandos a menos que
+ se indique lo contrario.
+ El comando
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Product
+\end_layout
+
\end_inset
-e., nombres relativos, pero normalmente funcionará bien.
- Un ejemplo de uno de estos casos es el comando
+ soporta adicionalmente las siguientes sustituciones si se habilitan por
+ los comandos
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-ReferencedFile latex "$$AbsOrRelPathMaster$$Basename.pstex_t"
+Transform
\end_layout
\end_inset
- en la plantilla XFig de arriba: no podemos usar el nombre absoluto porque
- el copiador para archivos
+ y
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-.pstex_t
+TransformCommand
\end_layout
\end_inset
- necesita el nombre relativo para reescribir el contenido del archivo.
+:
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Section
-Discusión sobre seguridad
-\begin_inset CommandInset label
-LatexCommand label
-name "sec:Discusión-sobre-seguridad"
+\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+$$ResizeFront
+\end_layout
\end_inset
+ La parte delantera del comando para cambiar el tamaño.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+$$ResizeBack
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Standard
-La función material externo interactúa con muchos programas externos y lo
- hace de forma automática, así que hemos de tener en cuenta las implicaciones
- de seguridad que esto conlleva.
- En particular, puesto que tienes la opción de incluir tus propios archivos
- y/o cadenas de parámetros y estos se expanden en un comando, parece posible
- crear un documento malicioso que ejecute comandos arbitrarios cuando un
- usuario ve o imprime el documento.
- Esto es algo que definitivamente queremos evitar.
-
+\end_inset
+
+ La parte trasera del comando para cambiar el tamaño.
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Standard
-Sin embargo, dado que los comandos de material externo se especifican solo
- en el archivo de configuración de la plantilla, no hay problemas de seguridad
- si LyX está adecuadamente configurado solo con plantillas seguras.
- Esto es así porque los programas externos se invocan con la llamada al
- sistema
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-execvp
+$$RotateFront
\end_layout
\end_inset
- más bien que con la llamada
+ La parte delantera del comando para la rotación.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-system
+$$RotateBack
\end_layout
\end_inset
-, de modo que no es posible ejecutar comandos arbitrarios desde la sección
- del nombre de archivo o de parámetros mediante el shell.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Standard
-Esto implica además que hay restricciones en las cadenas de comandos que
- puedes usar en las plantillas de material externo.
- En particular, las tuberías y la redirección no están fácilmente disponibles.
- Esto debe ser así para que LyX permanezca seguro.
- Si quieres usar algunas características de shell, deberías escribir un
- guión seguro para hacerlo de manera controlada, y después invocar el guión
- desde la cadena de comandos.
+ La parte trasera del comando para la rotación.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Standard
-Es posible diseñar una plantilla que interactúe directamente con el shell,
- pero puesto que esto permitiría a un usuario malicioso ejecutar comandos
- arbitrarios escribiendo nombres de archivo y/o parámetros astutos, generalmente
- recomendamos usar solo guiones seguros que trabajen con la llamada
+La cadena de valor del comando
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-execvp
+Option
\end_layout
\end_inset
- al sistema en forma controlada.
- Por supuesto, para usar en un entorno controlado, puede ser tentador caer
- en el uso de guiones de shell ordinarios.
- Si lo haces así, sé consciente de que vas a suministrar un agujero se seguridad
- fácilmente explotable en tu sistema.
- Evidentemente, es de razón que tales plantillas inseguras nunca serán incluidas
- en la distribución estándar de LyX, aunque alentamos a la gente a que,
- a la usanza del software libre, envíe nuevas plantillas.
- No obstante, LyX nunca tendrá plantillas inseguras tal y como se distribuye
- por los canales oficiales.
-\end_layout
+ soporta adicionalmente las siguientes sustituciones si éstas se han habilitado
+ por los comandos
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\begin_layout Standard
-Incluir material externo suministra mucha potencia y has de ser cuidadoso
- en no introducir riesgos de seguridad a costa de esta potencia.
- Un sutil error en una simple línea en un guión aparentemente inocente puede
- abrir la puerta a graves problemas de seguridad.
- Así, si no comprendes totalmente estos asuntos, recomendamos consultar
- a un profesional entendido en seguridad o al equipo de desarrollo de LyX
- si tienes dudas acerca de si una plantilla dada es o no segura.
- Y hazlo antes de usarla en un entorno no controlado.
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Transform
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Chapter
-\start_of_appendix
+\end_inset
-\lang english
-List of functions to be used in layouts
-\lang spanish
+ y
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\begin_inset CommandInset label
-LatexCommand label
-name "chap:List-of-functions"
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+TransformOption
+\end_layout
\end_inset
-
+:
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Standard
-\align center
-\begin_inset Tabular
-<lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="6">
-<features tabularvalignment="middle">
-<column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="14col%">
-<column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="14col%">
-<column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="14col%">
-<column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="14col%">
-<column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="14col%">
-<column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="14col%">
-<row>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
-\begin_inset Text
+\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-accents
+$$Clip
\end_layout
\end_inset
-</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
-\begin_inset Text
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-bbding
+ La opción recorte.
\end_layout
-\end_inset
-</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
-\begin_inset Text
+\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-dvipost
+$$Extra
\end_layout
\end_inset
-</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
-\begin_inset Text
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-fancybox
+ La opción extra.
\end_layout
-\end_inset
-</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
-\begin_inset Text
+\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-hhline
+$$Resize
\end_layout
\end_inset
-</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
-\begin_inset Text
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-latexsym
+ La opción cambio de tamaño.
\end_layout
-\end_inset
-</cell>
-</row>
-<row>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
-\begin_inset Text
+\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-amsbsy
+$$Rotate
\end_layout
\end_inset
-</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
-\begin_inset Text
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-bm
+ La opción rotación.
\end_layout
-\end_inset
-</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
-\begin_inset Text
+\begin_layout Standard
+Te puedes preguntar por qué hay tantas macros de ruta.
+ Por dos razones, principalmente:
+\end_layout
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
+\begin_layout Enumerate
+Los nombres de archivo relativo y absoluto deberían permanecer relativo
+ o absoluto, respectivamente.
+ Los usuarios pueden tener razones para preferir cualquiera de ambas formas.
+ Los nombres relativos son útiles para documentos portables que deberían
+ funcionar en máquinas diferentes, por ejemplo.
+ Los nombres absolutos pueden ser requeridos por algunos programas.
+\end_layout
+\begin_layout Enumerate
+LaTeX procesa los nombres de archivo relativos de manera diferente a LyX
+ y otros programas en archivos anidados incluidos.
+ Para LyX, un nombre de archivo relativo es siempre relativo al documento
+ que contiene el nombre de archivo.
+ Para LaTeX, es siempre relativo al documento maestro.
+ Estas dos definiciones son idénticas si se tiene solo un documento, pero
+ son distintas si se tiene un documento maestro que incluye documentos parciales.
+ Esto quiere decir que los nombres de archivo relativos deben ser transformados
+ cuando se presentan a LaTeX.
+ Afortunadamente, LyX hace esto automáticamente si se eligen las macros
+ correctas.
\end_layout
-\end_inset
-</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
-\begin_inset Text
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-feyn
+\begin_layout Standard
+Así pues, ¿qué macros de ruta deberían emplearse en las definiciones de
+ plantillas nuevas? La regla no es difícil:
\end_layout
-\end_inset
-</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
-\begin_inset Text
+\begin_layout Itemize
+Usar
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-hyperref
+$$AbsPath
\end_layout
\end_inset
-</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
-\begin_inset Text
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-listings
+ si se requiere una ruta absoluta.
\end_layout
-\end_inset
-</cell>
-</row>
-<row>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
-\begin_inset Text
+\begin_layout Itemize
+Usar
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-amscd
+$$AbsOrRelPathMaster
\end_layout
\end_inset
-</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
-\begin_inset Text
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-booktabs
+ si la cadena sustituida es algún tipo de entrada LaTeX.
\end_layout
-\end_inset
-</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
-\begin_inset Text
+\begin_layout Itemize
+Si no, usar
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-endnotes
+$$AbsOrRelPathParent
\end_layout
\end_inset
-</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
-\begin_inset Text
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-fixltx2e
+ con el fin de preservar la elección del usuario.
\end_layout
+\begin_layout Standard
+Hay casos especiales en los que esta regla no funciona y se necesitan, p.
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
-</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
-\begin_inset Text
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
+e., nombres relativos, pero normalmente funcionará bien.
+ Un ejemplo de uno de estos casos es el comando
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+ReferencedFile latex "$$AbsOrRelPathMaster$$Basename.pstex_t"
\end_layout
\end_inset
-</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
-\begin_inset Text
+
+ en la plantilla XFig de arriba: no podemos usar el nombre absoluto porque
+ el copiador para archivos
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-longtable
+.pstex_t
\end_layout
\end_inset
-</cell>
-</row>
-<row>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
-\begin_inset Text
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-amsmath
+ necesita el nombre relativo para reescribir el contenido del archivo.
\end_layout
+\begin_layout Section
+Discusión sobre seguridad
+\begin_inset CommandInset label
+LatexCommand label
+name "sec:Discusión-sobre-seguridad"
+
\end_inset
-</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
-\begin_inset Text
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
\end_layout
-\end_inset
-</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
-\begin_inset Text
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-enumitem
+\begin_layout Standard
+La función material externo interactúa con muchos programas externos y lo
+ hace de forma automática, así que hemos de tener en cuenta las implicaciones
+ de seguridad que esto conlleva.
+ En particular, puesto que tienes la opción de incluir tus propios archivos
+ y/o cadenas de parámetros y estos se expanden en un comando, parece posible
+ crear un documento malicioso que ejecute comandos arbitrarios cuando un
+ usuario ve o imprime el documento.
+ Esto es algo que definitivamente queremos evitar.
+
\end_layout
-\end_inset
-</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
-\begin_inset Text
+\begin_layout Standard
+Sin embargo, dado que los comandos de material externo se especifican solo
+ en el archivo de configuración de la plantilla, no hay problemas de seguridad
+ si LyX está adecuadamente configurado solo con plantillas seguras.
+ Esto es así porque los programas externos se invocan con la llamada al
+ sistema
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-float
+execvp
\end_layout
\end_inset
-</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
-\begin_inset Text
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-ifsym
-\end_layout
-\end_inset
-</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
-\begin_inset Text
+ más bien que con la llamada
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-lyxskak
+system
\end_layout
\end_inset
-</cell>
-</row>
-<row>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
-\begin_inset Text
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-amssymb
+, de modo que no es posible ejecutar comandos arbitrarios desde la sección
+ del nombre de archivo o de parámetros mediante el shell.
\end_layout
-\end_inset
-</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
-\begin_inset Text
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-CJK
+\begin_layout Standard
+Esto implica además que hay restricciones en las cadenas de comandos que
+ puedes usar en las plantillas de material externo.
+ En particular, las tuberías y la redirección no están fácilmente disponibles.
+ Esto debe ser así para que LyX permanezca seguro.
+ Si quieres usar algunas características de shell, deberías escribir un
+ guión seguro para hacerlo de manera controlada, y después invocar el guión
+ desde la cadena de comandos.
\end_layout
-\end_inset
-</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
-\begin_inset Text
+\begin_layout Standard
+Es posible diseñar una plantilla que interactúe directamente con el shell,
+ pero puesto que esto permitiría a un usuario malicioso ejecutar comandos
+ arbitrarios escribiendo nombres de archivo y/o parámetros astutos, generalmente
+ recomendamos usar solo guiones seguros que trabajen con la llamada
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-esint
+execvp
\end_layout
\end_inset
-</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
-\begin_inset Text
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-framed
+ al sistema en forma controlada.
+ Por supuesto, para usar en un entorno controlado, puede ser tentador caer
+ en el uso de guiones de shell ordinarios.
+ Si lo haces así, sé consciente de que vas a suministrar un agujero se seguridad
+ fácilmente explotable en tu sistema.
+ Evidentemente, es de razón que tales plantillas inseguras nunca serán incluidas
+ en la distribución estándar de LyX, aunque alentamos a la gente a que,
+ a la usanza del software libre, envíe nuevas plantillas.
+ No obstante, LyX nunca tendrá plantillas inseguras tal y como se distribuye
+ por los canales oficiales.
\end_layout
-\end_inset
-</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
-\begin_inset Text
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-ifthen
+\begin_layout Standard
+Incluir material externo suministra mucha potencia y has de ser cuidadoso
+ en no introducir riesgos de seguridad a costa de esta potencia.
+ Un sutil error en una simple línea en un guión aparentemente inocente puede
+ abrir la puerta a graves problemas de seguridad.
+ Así, si no comprendes totalmente estos asuntos, recomendamos consultar
+ a un profesional entendido en seguridad o al equipo de desarrollo de LyX
+ si tienes dudas acerca de si una plantilla dada es o no segura.
+ Y hazlo antes de usarla en un entorno no controlado.
\end_layout
-\end_inset
-</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
-\begin_inset Text
+\begin_layout Chapter
+\start_of_appendix
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
+\lang english
+List of functions to be used in layouts
+\lang spanish
-\end_layout
+\begin_inset CommandInset label
+LatexCommand label
+name "chap:List-of-functions"
\end_inset
-</cell>
-</row>
-<row>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
-\begin_inset Text
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-amstext
-\end_layout
-\end_inset
-</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
-\begin_inset Text
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-color
\end_layout
-\end_inset
-</cell>
+\begin_layout Standard
+\align center
+\begin_inset Tabular
+<lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="8">
+<features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
+<column alignment="left" valignment="top">
+<column alignment="left" valignment="top">
+<column alignment="left" valignment="top">
+<column alignment="left" valignment="top">
+<column alignment="left" valignment="top">
+<column alignment="left" valignment="top">
+<column alignment="left" valignment="top">
+<column alignment="left" valignment="top">
+<row>
<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
+accents
\end_layout
\end_inset
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
+booktabs
\end_layout
\end_inset
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
+feyn
\end_layout
\end_inset
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-makeidx
+listings
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-</row>
-<row>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-amsthm
+natbib
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-covington
+rotfloat
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
+tfrupee
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-graphicx
+wasysym
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
+</row>
+<row>
<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-jurabib
+amsbsy
\end_layout
\end_inset
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-marvosym
+calc
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-</row>
-<row>
<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-array
+fixltx2e
\end_layout
\end_inset
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-csquotes
+longtable
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
+nomencl
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
+rsphrase
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
+tipa
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-mathdesign
+wrapfig
\end_layout
\end_inset
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-ascii
+amscd
\end_layout
\end_inset
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
+CJK
\end_layout
\end_inset
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
+float
\end_layout
\end_inset
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-mathdesign
+lyxskak
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
+pdfcolmk
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-mathdots
+setspace
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-</row>
-<row>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
+tipx
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
+xargs
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
+</row>
+<row>
<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
+amsmath
\end_layout
\end_inset
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-mathdots
+color
\end_layout
\end_inset
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
+framed
\end_layout
\end_inset
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-subfig
+makeidx
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-</row>
-</lyxtabular>
-
-\end_inset
-
-
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Standard
-\align center
-\begin_inset Tabular
-<lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="6">
-<features tabularvalignment="middle">
-<column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="14col%">
-<column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="14col%">
-<column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="14col%">
-<column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="14col%">
-<column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="14col%">
-<column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="14col%">
-<row>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-makeidx
+pdfpages
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-pdfcolmk
+shapepar
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-setspace
+tone
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-textcomp
+xcolor
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
+</row>
+<row>
<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-ulem
+amssymb
\end_layout
\end_inset
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-xargs
+covington
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-</row>
-<row>
<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-marvosym
+graphicx
\end_layout
\end_inset
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-pdfpages
+marvosym
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-slashed
+pifont
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-textgreek
+slashed
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-undertilde
+txfonts
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-xcolor
+xy
\end_layout
\end_inset
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-mathdesign
+amstext
\end_layout
\end_inset
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-pifont
+csquotes
\end_layout
\end_inset
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-soul
+hhline
\end_layout
\end_inset
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-tfrupee
+mathdesign
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-units
+pmboxdraw
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-xy
+soul
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-</row>
-<row>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-mathdots
+ulem
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-pmboxdraw
+yhmath
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
+</row>
+<row>
<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-splitidx
+amsthm
\end_layout
\end_inset
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-tipa
+dvipost
\end_layout
\end_inset
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-url
+hyperref
\end_layout
\end_inset
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
+mathdots
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-</row>
-<row>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-mathrsfs
+polyglossia
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-polyglossia
+splitidx
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-subfig
+undertilde
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-tipx
+
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
+</row>
+<row>
<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
+array
\end_layout
\end_inset
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-yhmath
+endnotes
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-</row>
-<row>
<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-mhchem
+ifsym
\end_layout
\end_inset
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-prettyref
+mathrsfs
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-subscript
+prettyref
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-tone
+subfig
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-varioref
+units
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-multirow
+ascii
\end_layout
\end_inset
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-pxfonts
+enumitem
\end_layout
\end_inset
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
+ifthen
\end_layout
\end_inset
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-txfonts
+mhchem
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-verbatim
+pxfonts
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
+subscript
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-</row>
-<row>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
+url
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\end_inset
</cell>
+</row>
+<row>
<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
+bbding
\end_layout
\end_inset
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
+esint
\end_layout
\end_inset
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
+jurabib
\end_layout
\end_inset
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
+multicol
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-</row>
-<row>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-natbib
+refstyle
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-rotating
+textcomp
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
+varioref
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+</row>
+<row>
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-wasysym
+bm
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
+fancybox
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-</row>
-<row>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-nomencl
+latexsym
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-rotfloat
+multirow
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
+rotating
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
+textgreek
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-wrapfig
+verbatim
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
Names of available colors to be used in layouts
+\lang spanish
+
\begin_inset CommandInset label
LatexCommand label
name "chap:Names-of-colors"
-#LyX 2.0 created this file. For more info see http://www.lyx.org/
-\lyxformat 413
+#LyX 2.1 created this file. For more info see http://www.lyx.org/
+\lyxformat 474
\begin_document
\begin_header
\textclass scrbook
\pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
\myTOC
\mainmatter }
+
+% increase link area for cross-references and autoname them,
+\AtBeginDocument{\renewcommand{\ref}[1]{\mbox{\autoref{#1}}}}
+\addto\extrasfrench{%
+ \renewcommand*{\equationautorefname}[1]{}%
+ \renewcommand{\sectionautorefname}{sec.\negthinspace}%
+ \renewcommand{\subsectionautorefname}{sec.\negthinspace}%
+ \renewcommand{\subsubsectionautorefname}{sec.\negthinspace}%
+}
\end_preamble
\options fleqn,liststotoc,bibtotoc,idxtotoc,BCOR7.5mm,titlepage,tablecaptionabove
\use_default_options false
\font_roman default
\font_sans default
\font_typewriter default
+\font_math auto
\font_default_family default
\use_non_tex_fonts false
\font_sc false
\font_osf false
\font_sf_scale 100
\font_tt_scale 100
-
\graphics default
\default_output_format default
\output_sync 0
\pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue,pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
\papersize default
\use_geometry false
-\use_amsmath 0
-\use_esint 0
-\use_mhchem 1
-\use_mathdots 1
+\use_package amsmath 0
+\use_package amssymb 0
+\use_package cancel 0
+\use_package esint 0
+\use_package mathdots 1
+\use_package mathtools 0
+\use_package mhchem 1
+\use_package stackrel 0
+\use_package stmaryrd 0
+\use_package undertilde 0
\cite_engine basic
+\cite_engine_type default
+\biblio_style plain
\use_bibtopic false
\use_indices false
\paperorientation portrait
\suppress_date false
+\justification true
\use_refstyle 0
\branch Obsolete
\selected 0
\begin_inset Newline newline
\end_inset
-Version 2.0.x
+Version 2.1.x
\end_layout
\begin_layout Standard
\end_inset
-, celles-ci seront utilisées d'abord (voir le chapitre
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-
+, celles-ci seront utilisées d'abord (voir le
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
LatexCommand ref
reference "chap:i18n"
\end_inset
contient les fichiers de réaffectation clavier.
- Voir le chapitre
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-
+ Voir le
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
LatexCommand ref
reference "sec:clavier"
\end_inset
- contient les classes de texte et les fichiers de modules décrits au chapitre
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-
+ contient les classes de texte et les fichiers de modules décrits au
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
LatexCommand ref
reference "chap:classe-texte"
\end_inset
- contient les fichiers modèles de LyX décrits dans la section
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-
+ contient les fichiers modèles de LyX décrits dans la
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
LatexCommand ref
reference "sec:modeles"
\end_inset
+
+\lang english
+, see
+\lang french
+
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "chap:Insérer-un-Objet"
+
+\end_inset
+
.
\end_layout
contient la liste de toutes les langues actuellement supportées par LyX.
\end_layout
+\begin_layout Labeling
+\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+latexfonts
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+
+\lang english
+ contains information about the supported fonts.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Labeling
+\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+layouttranslations
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+
+\lang english
+ this file contains translations for internationalized paragraph styles
+ (see
+\lang french
+
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:I18n"
+
+\end_inset
+
+).
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Labeling
+\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+unicodesymbols
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+
+\lang english
+ this file contains information about unicode-encoded glyphs and the way
+ they are supported by LyX via LaTeX.
+\end_layout
+
\begin_layout Section
Votre répertoire personnel de configuration
\end_layout
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Nouveau\SpecialChar \ldots{}
-
+Nouveau
\end_layout
\end_inset
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Modifier le fichier via une application externe\SpecialChar \ldots{}
-
+Modifier le fichier via une application externe
\end_layout
\end_inset
\end_layout
\begin_layout Standard
-La case à cocher Format de document informe LyX que le format est approprié
- pour une exportation du document.
- Si la case est cochée que qu'une procédure de conversion est définie (voir
- la section
-\begin_inset space ~
+
+\lang english
+The
+\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
+MIME
+\end_layout
+
\end_inset
+ type of a format is optional, but if it is specified, it must be unique
+ across all formats.
+ It is used to detect files of this format from the file contents.
+ For some important file formats there is no MIME type officially registered
+ with the
+\lang french
+
+\begin_inset CommandInset href
+LatexCommand href
+name "IANA"
+target "http://www.iana.org/assignments/media-types/"
+
+\end_inset
+
+.
+
+\lang english
+Therefore LyX uses the extended list of MIME types as specified by
+\lang french
+
+\begin_inset CommandInset href
+LatexCommand href
+name "freedesktop.org"
+target "http://www.freedesktop.org/wiki/Specifications/shared-mime-info-spec"
+
+\end_inset
+.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Standard
+La case à cocher Format de document informe LyX que le format est approprié
+ pour une exportation du document.
+ Si la case est cochée que qu'une procédure de conversion est définie (voir
+ la
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
LatexCommand ref
reference "sec:Convertisseurs"
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
$$s
\end_layout
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
/usr/share/lyx
\end_layout
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
$$i
\end_layout
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
$$o
\end_layout
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
+$$b
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+
+\lang english
+The base name (without filename extension) in the LyX temporary directory
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Labeling
+\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+$$p
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+
+\lang english
+The full directory path of the LyX temporary directory
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Labeling
+\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+$$r
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+
+\lang english
+The full pathname to the original LyX file being processed
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Labeling
+\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+$$f
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
\lang english
+The filename (without any directory path) of the LyX file.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Labeling
+\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
$$l
\end_layout
\begin_layout Labeling
\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
-
-\lang english
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
$$s
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
-\lang french
-le répertoire système de LyX
+ le répertoire système de LyX
\end_layout
\begin_layout Labeling
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
$$i
\end_layout
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
$$o
\end_layout
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
$$b
\end_layout
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
$$p
\end_layout
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
$$r
\end_layout
\begin_layout Labeling
\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
-
-\lang english
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
$$e
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
-\lang french
-l'identificateur
+ l'identificateur
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
latex
\end_layout
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
needaux
\end_layout
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
.aux
\end_layout
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+nice
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+
+\lang english
+Needs a
+\begin_inset Quotes fld
+\end_inset
+
+nice
+\begin_inset Quotes frd
+\end_inset
+
+ file from the backend, which in practice means a LaTeX file like the one
+ we would export, without
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
+input@path
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+
+\lang french
+.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Labeling
+\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
xml
\end_layout
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
parselog
\end_layout
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
$$s
\end_layout
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
resultdir
\end_layout
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
$$b
\end_layout
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
resultfile
\end_layout
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
$$b
\end_layout
toujours le séquence la plus courte.
Vous pouvez cependant définir plusieurs méthodes de conversion entre formats
de fichier.
- Par exemple, la configuration LyX standard propose trois façons différentes
- de convertir LaTeX vers PDF: directement, via
-\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
+ Par exemple, la configuration LyX standard propose cinq façons différentes
+ de convertir LaTeX vers PDF:
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Enumerate
+directement, via
+\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\end_inset
-; via (DVI et) PostScript, en utilisant
+
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Enumerate
+via (DVI et) PostScript, en utilisant
\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
status collapsed
\end_inset
-; ou via DVI, en utilisant
+
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Enumerate
+via DVI, en utilisant
\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
status collapsed
\end_inset
-.
- Pour définir de tels choix de séquences, vous devez définir plusieurs
-\begin_inset Quotes fld
+
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Enumerate
+directement, via
+\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+XeTeX
+\end_layout
+
\end_inset
-formats de fichier
-\begin_inset Quotes frd
+
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Enumerate
+directement, via
+\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+LuaTeX
+\end_layout
+
\end_inset
- cible, comme décrit dans la section
-\begin_inset space ~
+
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Standard
+Pour définir de tels choix de séquences, vous devez définir plusieurs
+\begin_inset Quotes fld
\end_inset
+formats de fichier
+\begin_inset Quotes frd
+\end_inset
+ cible, comme décrit dans la
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
LatexCommand ref
reference "sec:Formats"
.
Par exemple, avec la configuration standard, les formats dénommés
+\lang english
+
\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
pdf
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+ (for
+\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
+ps2pdf
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+),
\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
pdf2
\end_layout
\end_inset
- et
+ (for
\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
+pdflatex
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+),
+\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
pdf3
\end_layout
\end_inset
+ (for
+\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
+dvipdfm
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+),
+\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
+pdf4
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ (for
+\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
+XeTeX
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+), et
+\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
+pdf5
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ (for
+\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
+LuaTeX
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+)
+\lang french
sont définis, qui correspondent tous au suffixe
\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
status collapsed
\end_layout
\begin_layout Standard
-Supposez que vous ayez besoin du caractère circonflexe
+Supposez que vous ayez besoin du caractère circonflexe,
\begin_inset Foot
status collapsed
\end_inset
-,
+
\family typewriter
\begin_inset Quotes fld
\end_inset
- puis en affectant cette touche symbolique à la commande LyX correspondante
+ puis en affectant cette touche symbolique à la commande LyX correspondante.
\begin_inset Foot
status collapsed
\end_inset
-.
Vous pouvez transformer à peu près n'importe quelle touche en touche
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
-\begin_inset Argument
+\begin_inset Argument 1
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
la liste
\family sans
Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
-Paramètres\SpecialChar \ldots{}
-\SpecialChar \menuseparator
+Paramètres\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Classe du document
\family default
, vous devez créer une fichier de
Votre nouveau paquetage peut également fournir des commandes ou des environnemen
ts qui n'existent pas dans la classe de base.
dans ce cas, il vous faudra ajouter ceux-ci au fichier de format.
- Voir le paragraphe
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-
+ Voir
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
LatexCommand ref
reference "sec:Syntaxe-des"
\family typewriter
Un module plus compliqué pourrait modifier le comportement de constructions
es=xistantes ou den définir de nouvelles.
- De nouveau, voir le paragraphe
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-
+ De nouveau, voir
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
LatexCommand ref
reference "sec:Syntaxe-des"
\end_layout
\begin_layout Subsection
-Déclaration d'une classe de document
+Déclaration d'une classe de document
+\lang english
+and classification
\end_layout
\begin_layout Standard
\size small
#
\backslash
-DeclareLaTeXClass{article}
+DeclareLaT
+\begin_inset ERT
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\size small
+\lang english
+{}
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+eXClass{Article (Standard Class)}
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+
+\size small
+#
+\backslash
+DeclareCategory{Articles}
\end_layout
\begin_layout Standard
-La deuxième ligne sert quand vous (re)configurez LyX.
+La deuxième et
+\lang english
+ third
+\lang french
+ ligne sert quand vous (re)configurez LyX.
Le fichier de format est lu par le script LaTeX
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
est ignoré.
La première ligne est juste un commentaire LaTeX, et la deuxième contient
- la déclaration de la classe de texte.
+ la déclaration
+\lang english
+mandatory
+\lang french
+ de la classe de texte
+\lang english
+ and the third line contains the optional classification of the class
+\lang french
+.
Si ces lignes apparaissent dans un fichier appelé
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_inset Quotes fld
\end_inset
-article
+Article (Standard Class)
\begin_inset Quotes frd
\end_inset
\begin_layout Plain Layout
Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
-Paramètres\SpecialChar \ldots{}
+Paramètres
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+.
+
+\lang english
+The category (
+\begin_inset Quotes eld
+\end_inset
+
+Articles
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
+ in the example) is also used in the
+\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+\lang english
+Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
+Settings
\end_layout
\end_inset
+ dialog: the text classes are grouped by these categories (which are usually
+ genres, so typical categories are
+\begin_inset Quotes eld
+\end_inset
+
+Articles
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
+,
+\begin_inset Quotes eld
+\end_inset
+
+Books
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
+,
+\begin_inset Quotes eld
+\end_inset
+
+Reports
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
+,
+\begin_inset Quotes eld
+\end_inset
+
+Letters
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
+,
+\begin_inset Quotes eld
+\end_inset
+
+Presentations
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
+,
+\begin_inset Quotes eld
+\end_inset
+
+Curricula Vitae
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
+ etc.).
+ If no category has been declared, the class will be put in the
+\begin_inset Quotes eld
+\end_inset
+
+Uncategorized
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+ group.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Standard
\size small
#
\backslash
-DeclareLaTeXClass[article]{article (avec mes en-têtes)}
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Standard
-Ceci déclare une classe de texte
-\begin_inset Flex Code
+DeclareLaT
+\begin_inset ERT
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-mon_article
+
+\size small
+\lang english
+{}
\end_layout
\end_inset
-, associée avec la classe de document LaTeX
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
+eXClass[article]{Article (avec Mes En-têtes)}
+\end_layout
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+
+\size small
+#
+\backslash
+DeclareCategory{Articles}
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Standard
+Ceci déclare une classe de texte
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+mon_article
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+, associée avec la classe de document LaTeX
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
article.cls
\end_layout
\begin_inset Quotes fld
\end_inset
-article (avec mes en-têtes)
+Article (avec Mes En-têtes)
\begin_inset Quotes frd
\end_inset
\size small
#
\backslash
-DeclareLaTeXClass[article,machin.sty]{article (avec mes en-têtes)}
+DeclareLaT
+\begin_inset ERT
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\size small
+\lang english
+{}
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+eXClass[article,machin.sty]{Article (avec Mes En-têtes)}
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+
+\size small
+#
+\backslash
+DeclareCategory{Articles}
\end_layout
\begin_layout Standard
\end_layout
\begin_layout LyX-Code
+
+\size small
#% Do not delete the line below; configure depends on this
\end_layout
\begin_layout LyX-Code
+
+\size small
#
\backslash
-DeclareDocBookClass[article]{SGML (DocBook article)}
+DeclareDocBookClass[article]{SGML (DocBook Article)}
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+
+\size small
+#
+\backslash
+DeclareCategory{Articles}
\end_layout
\begin_layout Standard
\begin_layout LyX-Code
\size small
+#
+\backslash
+DeclareLaT
+\begin_inset ERT
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\size small
+\lang english
+{}
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+eXClass[class,package.sty]{
\lang english
+layout description
+\lang french
+}
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+
+\size small
#
\backslash
-DeclareLaTeXClass[class,package.sty]{layout description}
+DeclareCategory{
+\lang english
+category
+\lang french
+}
\end_layout
\begin_layout Standard
\begin_layout Standard
Une fois le fichier de format installé, vous pouvez le modifier et vérifier
- l'effet de ces modifications sans reconfigurer ou redémarrer LyX
+ l'effet de ces modifications sans reconfigurer ou redémarrer LyX.
\begin_inset Foot
status collapsed
\end_inset
-.
Vous pouvez imposer un rechargement du format en service en utilisant la
fonction
\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
module pourraient déclencher des comportements bizarres.
En particulier, de telles erreurs pourraient inciter LyX à considérer les
formats en service comme incorrects et à essayer de basculer sur un autre
- format
+ format.
\begin_inset Foot
status collapsed
\end_inset
-.
Les développeurs s'efforcent de conserver une bonne stabilité à LyX dans
de telles situations, mais il vaut mieux être sûr que regretter
\begin_inset Foot
\end_layout
\begin_layout LyX-Code
-
-\lang english
#
\backslash
-DeclareLyXModule[endnotes.sty]{Endnotes}
+DeclareL
+\size small
+
+\begin_inset ERT
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\size small
+\lang english
+{}
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+
+\size default
+yXModule[endnotes.sty]{Endnotes}
\end_layout
\begin_layout Standard
\begin_layout Plain Layout
Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
-Paramètres\SpecialChar \ldots{}
-\SpecialChar \menuseparator
+Paramètres\SpecialChar \menuseparator
Modules
\end_layout
\family default
ajoute une information au préambule du document.
- Voir section
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-
+ Voir
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
LatexCommand ref
reference "sub:Description citation"
\family default
décrit diverses options globales comprises par la classe du document.
- Voir la section
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-
+ Voir la
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
LatexCommand ref
reference "sub:Section-ClassOptions"
\begin_inset Newline newline
\end_inset
-Voir la section
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-
+Voir la
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
LatexCommand ref
reference "sub:Compteurs"
\lang french
décrit la police implicite dans le document.
- Voir la section
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-
+ Voir la
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
LatexCommand ref
reference "sub:polices"
\lang french
définit un nouveau flottant.
- Voir la Section
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-
+ Voir la
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
LatexCommand ref
reference "sub:Flottants"
\begin_inset Newline newline
\end_inset
-Voir la section
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-
+Voir la
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
LatexCommand ref
reference "sub:Compteurs"
\lang french
\family default
-\lang english
[
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
<type>
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
-\lang french
] cette section (re)définit le format d'un insert.
Elle peut être appliquée à un insert existant pour obtenir un nouvel insert
défini par l'utilisateur, e.g.
\begin_inset Newline newline
\end_inset
- Voir la section
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-
+ Voir la
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
LatexCommand ref
reference "sub:Flex-insets-and"
\begin_layout Plain Layout
+\lang english
+PackageOptions
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+
+\lang french
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+chaîne
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+chaîne
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+]
+\lang english
+Specifies options, given in the second string, for the package named by
+ the first string.
+ For example,
+\lang french
+
+\begin_inset Quotes fld
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+PackageOptions natbib square
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset Quotes frd
+\end_inset
+
+
+\lang english
+will cause
+\lang french
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+natbib
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+
+\lang english
+ to be loaded with the
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
+square
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ option.
+ (For TeXperts, this causes LyX to output:
+\lang french
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\backslash
+PassOptionsToPackage{natbib}{square}
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+
+\lang english
+prior to loading
+\lang french
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+natbib
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+.)
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
+
+\lang english
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
\lang english
PageStyle
\end_layout
,\SpecialChar \ldots{}
).
Voir
-\lang english
-chapter
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
LatexCommand ref
reference "chap:List-of-functions"
\end_inset
+
+\lang english
for the list of features.
\end_layout
Plusieurs fonctionnalités doivent être séparées par des virgules.
Noter que l'on ne peut requérir que des fonctionnalités reconnues (voir
-\lang english
-chapter
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
LatexCommand ref
reference "chap:List-of-functions"
\end_inset
+
+\lang english
for the list of features
\lang french
).
\begin_inset Newline newline
\end_inset
-Voir la Section
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-
+Voir la
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
LatexCommand ref
reference "sub:Styles-de-paragraphe"
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-BabelPreamble
+Argument
\end_layout
\end_inset
\lang french
- noter que cette directive écrasera complètement toute déclaration
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-BabelPreamble
+int
\end_layout
\end_inset
- antérieure pour ce style.
- Doit être fermée par
+]
+\lang english
+Defines argument number <int> of a command\SpecialChar \slash{}
+environment associated with the
+ current style.
+ This is useful for things like section headings, and only makes sense with
+ LaTeX.
+ Every (optional or required) argument of a command or environment -- except
+ for the required argument that is associated with the content of the paragraph
+ itself -- has a separate definition, where the number specifies the order
+ of the arguments.
+ The definition must end with
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-EndBabelPreamble
+
+\lang english
+EndArgument
\end_layout
\end_inset
.
- Voir la section
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
+ So a command with two optional arguments has:
+\end_layout
+\begin_deeper
+\begin_layout Quote
-\begin_inset CommandInset ref
-LatexCommand ref
-reference "sub:I18n"
+\family typewriter
+Argument 1
+\end_layout
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout Quote
- pour les détails d'utilisation.
+\family typewriter
+...
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
+\begin_layout Quote
-\lang english
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
+\family typewriter
+EndArgument
+\end_layout
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
+\begin_layout Quote
-\lang english
-BottomSep
+\family typewriter
+Argument 2
\end_layout
-\end_inset
-
+\begin_layout Quote
-\lang french
- [
\family typewriter
-float=0
-\family default
-]
-\begin_inset Foot
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Noter que
-\begin_inset Quotes fld
-\end_inset
+...
+\end_layout
-float
-\begin_inset Quotes frd
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout Quote
- ici désigne un nombre réel, e.g.
- 1.5
+\family typewriter
+EndArgument
\end_layout
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout Standard
- l'espacement vertical qui sépare du paragraphe suivant le dernier paragraphe
- d'une série doté de cette directive.
- Si le paragraphe suivant est doté d'un autre style, les séparations ne
- sont pas simplement additionnées, mais le maximum est pris en considération.La
- même chose que
+\lang english
+Inside the
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-TopSep
+
+\lang english
+Argument
\end_layout
\end_inset
- pour le dernier paragraphe.
+ definition, the following specifications are possible:
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
+\begin_layout Itemize
\lang english
\begin_inset Flex Code
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-Category
+LabelString
\end_layout
\end_inset
\end_inset
- fixe la catégorie pour ce style.
- Ceci est utilise pour regrouper les styles apparentés dans le menu déroulant
- des styles de la barre d'outils.
- N'importe quelle chaîne de caractères peut être utilisée, mais vous voudrez
- peut-être utiliser des catégories existantes pour vos propres styles.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
-
+
\lang english
+The string that will appear both in the menu (to insert this argument) and
+ on the argument inset button (unless you also specify a separate
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-CommandDepth
+MenuString
\end_layout
\end_inset
+).
+ For the menu, you can define an accelerator by appending the respective
+ character to the string, divided by
+\begin_inset Quotes fld
+\end_inset
-\lang french
- fixe la profondeur d'une commande XML.
- Utilisable uniquement avec les formats XML.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
+|
+\begin_inset Quotes frd
+\end_inset
-\lang english
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
+ (e.
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
+g.
+\begin_inset space \space{}
+\end_inset
-\lang english
-CopyStyle
-\end_layout
+\begin_inset Quotes fld
\end_inset
-\lang french
-
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-[chaîne]
+
+\lang english
+Short Title|S
\end_layout
\end_inset
- sert à copier toutes les caractéristiques d'un style déjà existant dans
- un nouveau style.
+
+\begin_inset Quotes frd
+\end_inset
+
+).
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
+\begin_layout Itemize
\lang english
\begin_inset Flex Code
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-DependsOn
+MenuString
\end_layout
\end_inset
\lang french
- [
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-<nom>
+[chaîne]
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] nomme un style dont le préambule devra être placé
-\emph on
-avant
-\emph default
- celui-ci.
- Ceci permet d'assurer une relation d'ordre entre les morceaux de préambule
- quand les définitions de macros dépendent les unes des autres.
+
\lang english
+A separate string for the menu.
+ You can define an accelerator by appending the respective character to
+ the string, divided by
+\begin_inset Quotes fld
+\end_inset
-\begin_inset Foot
-status collapsed
+|
+\begin_inset Quotes frd
+\end_inset
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Noter que, à part cette fonctionnalité, il n'y a aucun moyen de garantir
- un ordonnancement des préambules.
- L'ordre que vous constatez avec une version de LyX peut changer sans préavis
- dans les versions ultérieures.
-\end_layout
+ (e.
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+g.
+\begin_inset space \space{}
\end_inset
-\end_layout
+\begin_inset Quotes fld
+\end_inset
-\begin_layout Description
-\lang english
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-EndLabeltype
+Short Title|S
\end_layout
\end_inset
-\lang french
- [
-\family typewriter
-\emph on
-No_Label
-\family default
-\emph default
-,
-\family typewriter
-Box
-\family default
-,
-\family typewriter
-Filled_Box
-\family default
-,
-\family typewriter
-Static
-\family default
-] fixe le type de marqueur qui se trouve à la fin du paragraphe (ou de la
- suite de paragraphes si
+\begin_inset Quotes frd
+\end_inset
+
+).
+ This specification is optional.
+ If it is not given the
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LatexType
+
+\lang english
+LabelString
\end_layout
\end_inset
- est
+ will be used instead for the menu.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Itemize
+
+\lang english
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Environment
+
+\lang english
+Tooltip
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+
+\lang french
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Item_Environment
+[chaîne]
\end_layout
\end_inset
- ou
+
+\lang english
+A longer explanatory text that appears in the tooltip when hovering over
+ the argument inset.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Itemize
+
+\lang english
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-List_Environment
+
+\lang english
+Mandatory
\end_layout
\end_inset
-).
-
+
+\lang french
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-No_Label
+
+\emph on
+0
\end_layout
\end_inset
- signifie
-\begin_inset Quotes fld
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
-rien
-\begin_inset Quotes frd
-\end_inset
-,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Box
+1
\end_layout
\end_inset
- (respectivement
+]
+\lang english
+Declare if this is a mandatory (1) or an optional (0) argument.
+ Mandatory arguments will be output empty if not given, while optional arguments
+ will not be output at all.
+ By default, mandatory arguments are delimited by
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Filled_Box
+
+\lang english
+{...}
\end_layout
\end_inset
-) est un carré blanc (respectivement noir) en général placé à la fin des
- démonstrations.
-
+, while optional arguments are delimited by
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Static
+
+\lang english
+[...]
\end_layout
\end_inset
- est une chaîne de caractères explicitement donnée.
+
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
+\begin_layout Itemize
\lang english
\begin_inset Flex Code
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-EndLabelString
+Requires
\end_layout
\end_inset
\lang french
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+[int=0]
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+
\lang english
+defines another argument (by its number) which this argument requires to
+ be output if it is itself output.
+ E.
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+g., in LaTeX commands, optional arguments often require previous optional
+ arguments to be output (at least empty), as in
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-[
-\lang french
-chaîne
-\lang english
-=""]
-\end_layout
-
-\end_inset
+\backslash
+command[][argument]{text}
+\end_layout
-\lang french
- fixe la chaîne utilisée pour le marqueur quand
-\begin_inset Newline newline
\end_inset
-
+.
+ This can be achieved by the statement
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-EndLabelType
+
+\lang english
+Requires 1
\end_layout
\end_inset
- vaut
+ within
+\lang french
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Static
+Argument 2
\end_layout
\end_inset
.
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
+\begin_layout Itemize
\lang english
\begin_inset Flex Code
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-Font
+LeftDelim
\end_layout
\end_inset
\lang french
- fixe la police utilisée à la fois pour le corps du texte
-\emph on
-et
-\emph default
- pour le marqueur.
- Voir la section
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\begin_inset CommandInset ref
-LatexCommand ref
-reference "sub:polices"
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+[chaîne]
+\end_layout
\end_inset
-.
- Noter qu'en définissant cette police on définit aussi automatiquement
+
\lang english
-
+defines a custom left delimiter (instead of
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-LabelFont
+{
\end_layout
\end_inset
+ or
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
-\lang french
- avec la même valeur.
- Il faut donc définir celle-ci d'abord pour fixer
\lang english
+[
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+).
+ A line break in the output can be indicated by
+\lang french
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-LabelFont
+<br/>
\end_layout
\end_inset
.
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
+\begin_layout Itemize
\lang english
\begin_inset Flex Code
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-FreeSpacing
+RightDelim
\end_layout
\end_inset
\lang french
- [
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\emph on
-0
+[chaîne]
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
-\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
-\end_inset
+
+\lang english
+defines a custom right delimiter (instead of
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
+}
+\end_layout
+\end_inset
+ or
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-1
+
+\lang english
+]
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] LyX ne permet pas d'habitude d'insérer plus d'une espace entre deux mots,
- car une espace est considérée comme un séparateur de mots, non comme un
- caractère ou un symbole en tant que tel.
- C'est très bien mais c'est parfois ennuyeux, par exemple pour taper un
- code source de programme ou du code LaTeX brut.
- C'est pourquoi on peut activer
+).
+ A line break in the output can be indicated by
+\lang french
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-FreeSpacing
+<br/>
\end_layout
\end_inset
.
- Noter que LyX créera les espaces insécables correspondants aux espaces
- additionnelles pour tous les modes autres que le mode LaTeX.
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
+\begin_layout Itemize
\lang english
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-HTML*
+
+\lang english
+DefaultArg
\end_layout
\end_inset
\lang french
- sont utilisées avec l'exportation XHTML.
- Voir
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-
-\begin_inset CommandInset ref
-LatexCommand ref
-reference "sub:Styles-de-paragraphe-XHTML"
-
-\end_inset
-
-.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
-
-\lang english
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
+[chaîne]
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
\lang english
-InnerTag
-\end_layout
+defines an argument that is inserted if and only if no user-specified arguments
+ were given, i.
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+e.
+\begin_inset space \space{}
\end_inset
- [[FIXME]]
-\lang french
- (Utilisable uniquement avec les formats XML).
+if no argument inset has been inserted (note that also an empty argument
+ inset omits the DefaultArg).
+ Multiple arguments need to be separated by comma.
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
+\begin_layout Itemize
\lang english
\begin_inset Flex Code
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-InPreamble
+PresetArg
\end_layout
\end_inset
-\family typewriter
\lang french
-\family default
-[
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\emph on
-0
+[chaîne]
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
-\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
-\end_inset
+
+\lang english
+defines an argument that is inserted in any case (alone or in addition to
+ user-specified arguments).
+ Multiple arguments need to be separated by comma.
+\end_layout
+\begin_layout Itemize
+\lang english
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-1
+
+\lang english
+Font
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] indique avec
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
+ The font used for the argument content,
+\lang french
+ voir
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:polices"
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-1
+\end_inset
+
+.
\end_layout
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout Itemize
- que que le style doit être inclus dans le préambule plutôt que dans le
- corps du document.
- Ceci est utile pour les classes de document qui désirent que les informations
- telles que le titre et l'auteur figurent dans le préambule.
- Notez bien que ceci ne fonctionne que pour les styles pour lesquels
+\lang english
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LateXType
+
+\lang english
+LabelFont
\end_layout
\end_inset
- est
-\lang english
+ The font used for the label; see
+\lang french
+
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:polices"
+\end_inset
+
+.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Itemize
+
+\lang english
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-Command
+Decoration
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
-\lang french
- ou
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
+\emph on
\lang english
-Paragraph
+Classic
+\emph default
+, Minimalistic, Conglomerate
\end_layout
\end_inset
-.
+] describes the rendering style used for the inset's frame and buttons.
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
+\begin_layout Itemize
\lang english
\begin_inset Flex Code
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-InTitle
+AutoInsert
\end_layout
\end_inset
-\family typewriter
\lang french
-\family default
-[
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\emph on
-0
+[int=0]
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
-\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
-\end_inset
-
-
+
+\lang english
+If this is set to
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
1
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] indique avec
+, this argument is automatically inserted when the respective style is selected.
+ Currently, only one argument per style\SpecialChar \slash{}
+layout can be automatically inserted.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Standard
+
+\lang english
+By default, the text entered in the LyX workarea in the respective layout
+ is the last (mandatory) argument of a command if the
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-1
+
+\lang english
+LatexType
\end_layout
\end_inset
- que le style fait partie d'un bloc de titre (voir aussi
+ is
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-TitleLatexType
+Command
\end_layout
\end_inset
- et
+.
+ However, arguments with the prefix
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-TitleLatexName
+post:
\end_layout
\end_inset
- dans les paramètres généraux).
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
-
-\lang english
+ are output after this workarea argument.
+ Note that post-argument numbering restarts at 1, so the first argument
+ following the workarea argument is
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-ItemSep
+post:1
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
-\lang french
- [
+.
+ Post-arguments are ignored in any other
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-float=0
-\end_layout
-
-\end_inset
-
-] crée un espacement supplémentaire entre les paragraphes du même style
- dans un environnement.
- Si vous emboîtez des paragraphes d'autres formats dans un environnement,
- ils seront espacés de
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-ParSep
+\lang english
+LatexType
\end_layout
\end_inset
-.
- Mais les éléments de l'environnement seront en plus espacés de
+ than
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-ItemSep
+
+\lang english
+Command
\end_layout
\end_inset
-.
- Noter que c'est un
-\emph on
-multiplicateur
-\emph default
.
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
+\begin_layout Standard
\lang english
+Arguments for list
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-ItemTag
-\end_layout
-
-\end_inset
- [[FIXME]]
-\lang french
- (Utilisable uniquement avec les formats XML).
+\backslash
+item
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
+\end_inset
-\lang english
+s (as in
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-KeepEmpty
+
+\backslash
+item[foo]
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
-\lang french
-[
+) have the prefix
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-\emph on
-0
+\lang english
+item:
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+ followed by the number (e.
\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
+g.
+\begin_inset space \space{}
+\end_inset
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-1
+
+\lang english
+Argument item:1
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] LyX ne permet pas d'habitude de laisser un paragraphe vide, car il ne
- générerait rien en LaTeX.
- Il y a quelques cas où c'est pourtant utile : dans un modèle pour une lettre,
- les champs requis peuvent être laissés vides, pour que les gens ne les
- oublient pas; dans certains cas particuliers, un style peut aussi servir
- de séparateur, et ne pas contenir de texte.
+)
\end_layout
+\end_deeper
\begin_layout Description
\lang english
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-LabelBottomSep
+BabelPreamble
\end_layout
\end_inset
-\family typewriter
\lang french
-
-\family default
-[
+ noter que cette directive écrasera complètement toute déclaration
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-float=0
+BabelPreamble
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] fixe l'espacement vertical entre le marqueur et le corps du texte.
- Sert seulement pour les marqueurs qui sont au dessus du corps du texte
- (
+ antérieure pour ce style.
+ Doit être fermée par
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Top_Environment
+EndBabelPreamble
\end_layout
\end_inset
- et
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Centered_Top_Environment
-\end_layout
+.
+ Voir la
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:I18n"
\end_inset
-).
+ pour les détails d'utilisation.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-LabelCounter
+BottomSep
\end_layout
\end_inset
\lang french
-
-\begin_inset Flex Code
+ [
+\family typewriter
+float=0
+\family default
+]
+\begin_inset Foot
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-[chaîne=""]
-\end_layout
-
+Noter que
+\begin_inset Quotes fld
\end_inset
- dénomme le compteur pour la numérotation automatique.
-\begin_inset Newline newline
+float
+\begin_inset Quotes frd
\end_inset
-Il
-\emph on
-doit
-\emph default
- être indiqué si
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-Labeltype
+ ici désigne un nombre réel, e.g.
+ 1.5
\end_layout
\end_inset
- est
+ l'espacement vertical qui sépare du paragraphe suivant le dernier paragraphe
+ d'une série doté de cette directive.
+ Si le paragraphe suivant est doté d'un autre style, les séparations ne
+ sont pas simplement additionnées, mais le maximum est pris en considération.La
+ même chose que
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-Counter
+TopSep
\end_layout
\end_inset
-: dans ce cas, le compteur sera incrémenté chaque fois que le style apparaîtra
- dans le document.
-\begin_inset Newline newline
-\end_inset
-
-Il
-\emph on
-peut
-\emph default
- être indiqué si
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-Labeltype
+ pour le dernier paragraphe.
\end_layout
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout Description
- est
+\lang english
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-Enumerate
+Category
\end_layout
\end_inset
-, bien que ce cas soit un peu compliqué.
- Supposez que vous déclariez
+
+\lang french
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-\begin_inset Quotes fld
-\end_inset
-
-LabelCounter monEnum
+[chaîne]
\end_layout
\end_inset
+ fixe la catégorie pour ce style.
+ Ceci est utilise pour regrouper les styles apparentés dans le menu déroulant
+ des styles de la barre d'outils.
+ N'importe quelle chaîne de caractères peut être utilisée, mais vous voudrez
+ peut-être utiliser des catégories existantes pour vos propres styles.
+\end_layout
-\begin_inset Quotes frd
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout Description
-.
- Les compteurs effectivement utilisés sont alors
+\lang english
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-monEnumi
+
+\lang english
+CommandDepth
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-monEnumii
+\lang french
+ fixe la profondeur d'une commande XML.
+ Utilisable uniquement avec les formats XML.
\end_layout
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout Description
-,
+\lang english
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-monEnumiii
+
+\lang english
+CopyStyle
\end_layout
\end_inset
- et
+
+\lang french
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-monEnumiv
+[chaîne]
\end_layout
\end_inset
-, tout à fait comme en LaTeX.
- Ces compteurs doivent être tous déclarés séparément.
-\begin_inset Newline newline
-\end_inset
-
-Voir la section
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-
-\begin_inset CommandInset ref
-LatexCommand ref
-reference "sub:Compteurs"
-
-\end_inset
-
- pour les détails sur les compteurs.
+ sert à copier toutes les caractéristiques d'un style déjà existant dans
+ un nouveau style.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-LabelFont
+DependsOn
\end_layout
\end_inset
\lang french
- fixe la police utilisée pour le marqueur.
- Voir la section
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+<nom>
+\end_layout
-\begin_inset CommandInset ref
-LatexCommand ref
-reference "sub:polices"
+\end_inset
+
+] nomme un style dont le préambule devra être placé
+\emph on
+avant
+\emph default
+ celui-ci.
+ Ceci permet d'assurer une relation d'ordre entre les morceaux de préambule
+ quand les définitions de macros dépendent les unes des autres.
+\lang english
+
+\begin_inset Foot
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Noter que, à part cette fonctionnalité, il n'y a aucun moyen de garantir
+ un ordonnancement des préambules.
+ L'ordre que vous constatez avec une version de LyX peut changer sans préavis
+ dans les versions ultérieures.
+\end_layout
\end_inset
-.
+
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-LabelIndent
+EndLabeltype
\end_layout
\end_inset
\lang french
-
+ [
+\family typewriter
+\emph on
+No_Label
+\family default
+\emph default
+,
+\family typewriter
+Box
+\family default
+,
+\family typewriter
+Filled_Box
+\family default
+,
+\family typewriter
+Static
+\family default
+] fixe le type de marqueur qui se trouve à la fin du paragraphe (ou de la
+ suite de paragraphes si
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-[chaîne=""]
+LatexType
\end_layout
\end_inset
- fixe le texte indiquent l'importance de l'indentation d'un marqueur.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
-
-\lang english
+ est
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-LabelSep
+Environment
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
-\lang french
-
+,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-[chaîne=""]
+Item_Environment
\end_layout
\end_inset
- fixe le texte indiquent l'espacement horizontal entre le marqueur et le
- corps du texte.
- Sert seulement pour les marqueurs qui ne sont pas au dessus du corps du
- texte.
+ ou
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+List_Environment
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
+\end_inset
-\lang english
+).
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-LabelString
+No_Label
\end_layout
\end_inset
+ signifie
+\begin_inset Quotes fld
+\end_inset
+
+rien
+\begin_inset Quotes frd
+\end_inset
-\lang french
-
+,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-[chaîne=""]
+Box
\end_layout
\end_inset
- fixe la chaîne utilisée comme marqueur avec le
-\lang english
-
+ (respectivement
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-LabelType
+Filled_Box
\end_layout
\end_inset
+) est un carré blanc (respectivement noir) en général placé à la fin des
+ démonstrations.
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
Static
\end_layout
\end_inset
+ est une chaîne de caractères explicitement donnée.
+\end_layout
-\lang french
-.
- Quand
-\lang english
+\begin_layout Description
+\lang english
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-LabelCounter
+EndLabelString
\end_layout
\end_inset
\lang french
- est indiqué, cette chaîne peut contenir les instructions de formatage particuli
-ères décrites dans la section
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-
-\begin_inset CommandInset ref
-LatexCommand ref
-reference "sub:Compteurs"
-
-\end_inset
-
-.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
-
+
\lang english
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-LabelStringAppendix
+[
+\lang french
+chaîne
+\lang english
+=""]
\end_layout
\end_inset
\lang french
-
+ fixe la chaîne utilisée pour le marqueur quand
+\begin_inset Newline newline
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-[chaîne=""]
+EndLabelType
\end_layout
\end_inset
- est utilisée dans un appendice à la place de
+ vaut
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-LabelString
+Static
\end_layout
\end_inset
.
- Noter que toute directive
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
+
+\lang english
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-LabelString
+Font
\end_layout
\end_inset
- écrase
-\begin_inset Newline newline
+
+\lang french
+ fixe la police utilisée à la fois pour le corps du texte
+\emph on
+et
+\emph default
+ pour le marqueur.
+ Voir la
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:polices"
+
\end_inset
+.
+ Noter qu'en définissant cette police on définit aussi automatiquement
+\lang english
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-LabelStringAppendix
+LabelFont
\end_layout
\end_inset
-.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
+\lang french
+ avec la même valeur.
+ Il faut donc définir celle-ci d'abord pour fixer
\lang english
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-LabelTag
+LabelFont
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [FIXME]
-\lang french
- (Utilisable uniquement avec les formats XML).
+.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-Labeltype
+FreeSpacing
\end_layout
\end_inset
-\lang ngerman
+\lang french
[
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\emph on
-\lang ngerman
-No_Label
-\emph default
-, Manual, Static, Top_Environment,
-\begin_inset Newline newline
-\end_inset
-
-Centered_Top_Environment, Counter, Sensitive, Enumerate,
-\begin_inset Newline newline
-\end_inset
-
-Itemize, Bibliography
+0
\end_layout
\end_inset
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
-\lang french
-]
-\end_layout
-\begin_deeper
-\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-Manual
+1
\end_layout
\end_inset
- veut dire que le marqueur est le premier mot (avant la première vraie espace).
- Utilisez des espaces insécables si vous voulez mettre plus d'un mot dans
- le marqueur.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
+] LyX ne permet pas d'habitude d'insérer plus d'une espace entre deux mots,
+ car une espace est considérée comme un séparateur de mots, non comme un
+ caractère ou un symbole en tant que tel.
+ C'est très bien mais c'est parfois ennuyeux, par exemple pour taper un
+ code source de programme ou du code LaTeX brut.
+ C'est pourquoi on peut activer
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-Static
+FreeSpacing
\end_layout
\end_inset
- veut dire qu'il est défini dans le style (voir
+.
+ Noter que LyX créera les espaces insécables correspondants aux espaces
+ additionnelles pour tous les modes autres que le mode LaTeX.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
+
+\lang english
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-LabelString
+HTML*
\end_layout
\end_inset
-).
- Notez que ceci est vraiment
-\begin_inset Quotes fld
-\end_inset
-statique
-\begin_inset Quotes frd
+\lang french
+ sont utilisées avec l'exportation XHTML.
+ Voir
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:Styles-de-paragraphe-XHTML"
+
\end_inset
.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
+
+\lang english
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-Top_Environment
+InnerTag
\end_layout
\end_inset
+ [[FIXME]]
+\lang french
+ (Utilisable uniquement avec les formats XML).
+\end_layout
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-et
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
+\begin_layout Description
+\lang english
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-Centered_Top_Environment
+InPreamble
\end_layout
\end_inset
- sont des cas particuliers de
+
+\family typewriter
+\lang french
+
+\family default
+[
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-\lang english
-Static
+\emph on
+0
\end_layout
\end_inset
-.
- Le marqueur sera imprimé au dessus du paragraphe, mais seulement au début
- d'un environnement ou au début d'une suite de paragraphes dans ce style.
- Ceci peut être utilisé par exemple pour le style
-\family sans
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
-\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\family sans
-Abstract
+1
\end_layout
\end_inset
-.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
+] indique avec
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-Sensitive
+1
\end_layout
\end_inset
- est un cas particulier pour les marqueurs de légende
-\begin_inset Quotes fld
-\end_inset
+ que que le style doit être inclus dans le préambule plutôt que dans le
+ corps du document.
+ Ceci est utile pour les classes de document qui désirent que les informations
+ telles que le titre et l'auteur figurent dans le préambule.
+ Notez bien que ceci ne fonctionne que pour les styles pour lesquels
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-Figure
-\begin_inset Quotes frd
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+LateXType
+\end_layout
- et
-\begin_inset Quotes fld
\end_inset
-Tableau
-\begin_inset Quotes frd
-\end_inset
+ est
+\lang english
-.
-
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-Sensitive
+Command
\end_layout
-\end_inset
-
- signifie que le mot affiché (défini en dur) dépend du type de flottant:
- il est défini dans les sources comme
-\begin_inset Quotes fld
\end_inset
+\lang french
+ ou
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-FloatType N
+Paragraph
\end_layout
\end_inset
+.
+\end_layout
-\begin_inset Quotes frd
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout Description
- où
+\lang english
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-N
+
+\lang english
+InTitle
\end_layout
\end_inset
- est la valeur du compteur associé au flottant.
+
+\family typewriter
+\lang french
-\lang english
-For the case that a caption is inserted outside of a float
+\family default
+[
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-\lang english
-LabelString
+\emph on
+0
\end_layout
\end_inset
- should be set to e.
+,
\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
-g
-\begin_inset space \space{}
-\end_inset
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\begin_inset Quotes eld
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+1
+\end_layout
-Senseless!
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
-.
+] indique avec
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+1
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
+\end_inset
+
+ que le style fait partie d'un bloc de titre (voir aussi
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-Counter
+TitleLatexType
\end_layout
\end_inset
- définissent automatiquement des marqueurs numérotés.
- La directive
+ et
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-LabelString
+TitleLatexName
\end_layout
\end_inset
- sera déployée pour résoudre tout conflit de référence de compteur qui apparaîtr
-ait.
- Par exemple, ce pourrait être
-\begin_inset Newline newline
-\end_inset
-
-
-\begin_inset Quotes fld
-\end_inset
+ dans les paramètres généraux).
+\end_layout
+\begin_layout Description
+\lang english
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-Section
-\backslash
-thechapter.
-\backslash
-thesection
+ItemSep
\end_layout
\end_inset
-\begin_inset Quotes frd
-\end_inset
+\lang french
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-.
-\begin_inset Newline newline
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+float=0
+\end_layout
-Voir la section
-\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
+] crée un espacement supplémentaire entre les paragraphes du même style
+ dans un environnement.
+ Si vous emboîtez des paragraphes d'autres formats dans un environnement,
+ ils seront espacés de
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\begin_inset CommandInset ref
-LatexCommand ref
-reference "sub:Compteurs"
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+ParSep
+\end_layout
\end_inset
- pour des précisions sur le compteurs.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
+.
+ Mais les éléments de l'environnement seront en plus espacés de
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-Enumerate
+ItemSep
\end_layout
\end_inset
- produit le type habituel d'étiquettes d'énumération.
- Pour le moment, il est défini en dur comme chiffres arabes, lettres en
- bas de casse, petits chiffres romains et lettres capitales pour les quatre
- profondeurs possibles.
+.
+ Noter que c'est un
+\emph on
+multiplicateur
+\emph default
+.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-Itemize
+ItemTag
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
+ [[FIXME]]
\lang french
- produit des symboles pour les différents niveaux.
- Il est également défini en dur.
+ (Utilisable uniquement avec les formats XML).
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-Bibliography
+KeepEmpty
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
-\lang french
- est utilisé de manière interne par LyX et ne doit être utilisé qu'avec
-\lang english
-
+\lang french
+[
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-\lang english
-LatexType BibEnvironment
+\emph on
+0
\end_layout
\end_inset
-.
-\end_layout
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
-\end_deeper
-\begin_layout Description
-\lang english
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-LangPreamble
+1
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
-\lang french
- écrasera complètement toute autre directive
+] LyX ne permet pas d'habitude de laisser un paragraphe vide, car il ne
+ générerait rien en LaTeX.
+ Il y a quelques cas où c'est pourtant utile : dans un modèle pour une lettre,
+ les champs requis peuvent être laissés vides, pour que les gens ne les
+ oublient pas; dans certains cas particuliers, un style peut aussi servir
+ de séparateur, et ne pas contenir de texte.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
+
+\lang english
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LangPreamble
+
+\lang english
+LabelBottomSep
\end_layout
\end_inset
- antérieure.
- Doit être fermée par
+
+\family typewriter
+\lang french
+
+\family default
+[
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-EndLangPreamble
+float=0
\end_layout
\end_inset
-.
-\begin_inset Newline newline
-\end_inset
+] fixe l'espacement vertical entre le marqueur et le corps du texte.
+ Sert seulement pour les marqueurs qui sont au dessus du corps du texte
+ (
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Top_Environment
+\end_layout
-Voir la section
-\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
+ et
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\begin_inset CommandInset ref
-LatexCommand ref
-reference "sub:I18n"
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Centered_Top_Environment
+\end_layout
\end_inset
- pour les détails d'utilisation.
+).
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-LatexName
+LabelCounter
\end_layout
\end_inset
\lang french
- [
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-<nom>
+[chaîne=""]
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] fixe le nom de l'objet LaTeX correspondant, soit l'environnement, soit
- la commande.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
+ dénomme le compteur pour la numérotation automatique.
+\begin_inset Newline newline
+\end_inset
-\lang english
+Il
+\emph on
+doit
+\emph default
+ être indiqué si
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-LatexParam
+Labeltype
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
-\lang french
- [
+ est
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-<paramètre>
+
+\lang english
+Counter
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] fixe le paramètre facultatif de l'objet
+: dans ce cas, le compteur sera incrémenté chaque fois que le style apparaîtra
+ dans le document.
+\begin_inset Newline newline
+\end_inset
+
+Il
+\emph on
+peut
+\emph default
+ être indiqué si
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LatexName
-\end_layout
-\end_inset
-
- correspondant.
- Ce paramètre ne peut pas être changé depuis LyX.
+\lang english
+Labeltype
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
+\end_inset
-\lang english
+ est
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-LatexType
+Enumerate
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
-\lang ngerman
-[
+, bien que ce cas soit un peu compliqué.
+ Supposez que vous déclariez
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\emph on
-\lang ngerman
-Paragraph
-\emph default
-, Command, Environment, Item_Environment,
-\begin_inset Newline newline
+\begin_inset Quotes fld
\end_inset
-List_Environment, Bib_Environment
+LabelCounter monEnum
\end_layout
\end_inset
-\lang french
-] décrit comment traduire l'environnement en LaTeX.
-\lang english
+\begin_inset Quotes frd
+\end_inset
-\begin_inset Foot
-status open
+.
+ Les compteurs effectivement utilisés sont alors
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
+monEnumi
+\end_layout
-\lang english
+\end_inset
+
+,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-LatexType
+monEnumii
\end_layout
\end_inset
- is perhaps a bit misleading, since these rules apply to DocBook classes,
- too.
- Visit the DocBook class files (filenames
+,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-db_*.inc
+monEnumiii
\end_layout
\end_inset
- ) for specific examples.
+ et
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+monEnumiv
\end_layout
\end_inset
+, tout à fait comme en LaTeX.
+ Ces compteurs doivent être tous déclarés séparément.
+\begin_inset Newline newline
+\end_inset
+
+Voir la
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:Compteurs"
+
+\end_inset
+ pour les détails sur les compteurs.
\end_layout
-\begin_deeper
\begin_layout Description
+
+\lang english
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Paragraph
+
+\lang english
+LabelFont
\end_layout
\end_inset
- veut dire
-\begin_inset Quotes fld
-\end_inset
-rien de spécial
-\begin_inset Quotes frd
+\lang french
+ fixe la police utilisée pour le marqueur.
+ Voir la
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:polices"
+
\end_inset
.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
+
+\lang english
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Command
+
+\lang english
+LabelIndent
\end_layout
\end_inset
- veut dire
+
+\lang french
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\backslash
-
-\emph on
-LatexName
-\emph default
-{\SpecialChar \ldots{}
-}
+[chaîne=""]
\end_layout
\end_inset
-.
+ fixe le texte indiquent l'importance de l'indentation d'un marqueur.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
+
+\lang english
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Environment
+
+\lang english
+LabelSep
\end_layout
\end_inset
- veut dire
+
+\lang french
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\backslash
-begin{
-\emph on
-LatexName
-\emph default
-}\SpecialChar \ldots{}
-
-\backslash
-end{
-\emph on
-LatexName
-\emph default
-}
+[chaîne=""]
\end_layout
\end_inset
-.
+ fixe le texte indiquent l'espacement horizontal entre le marqueur et le
+ corps du texte.
+ Sert seulement pour les marqueurs qui ne sont pas au dessus du corps du
+ texte.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
+
+\lang english
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Item_Environment
+
+\lang english
+LabelString
\end_layout
\end_inset
- est la même chose que
+
+\lang french
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Environment
+[chaîne=""]
\end_layout
\end_inset
-, sauf qu'il génère un
+ fixe la chaîne utilisée comme marqueur avec le
+\lang english
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-\backslash
-item
+\lang english
+LabelType
\end_layout
\end_inset
- pour chaque paragraphe de l'environnement.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-List_Environment
-\end_layout
-
-\end_inset
- est la même chose que
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Item_Environment
+\lang english
+Static
\end_layout
\end_inset
-, sauf que
-\begin_inset Newline newline
-\end_inset
+\lang french
+.
+ Quand
+\lang english
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LabelWidthString
+
+\lang english
+LabelCounter
\end_layout
\end_inset
- est passé en paramètre de l'environnement.
-\begin_inset Newline newline
+
+\lang french
+ est indiqué, cette chaîne peut contenir les instructions de formatage particuli
+ères décrites dans la
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:Compteurs"
+
\end_inset
+.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
+\lang english
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LabelWidthString
+
+\lang english
+LabelStringAppendix
\end_layout
\end_inset
- peut être défini dans la fenêtre
-\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
+
+\lang french
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Édition\SpecialChar \menuseparator
-Paramètres
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-de
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-Paragraphe
+[chaîne=""]
\end_layout
\end_inset
-.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
-
-\lang english
+ est utilisée dans un appendice à la place de
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-Bib_Environment
+LabelString
\end_layout
\end_inset
- is like
+.
+ Noter que toute directive
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-Environment
+LabelString
\end_layout
\end_inset
- but adds additionally the necessary mandatory argument (the longest label)
- to the begin statement of the bibliography environment:
+ écrase
\begin_inset Newline newline
\end_inset
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-
-\backslash
-begin{thebibliography}{99}
+LabelStringAppendix
\end_layout
\end_inset
- It is therefore only useful for bibliography environments.
- The default longest label
-\begin_inset Quotes eld
-\end_inset
-
-99
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
-\end_inset
-
- can be changed by the user in the paragraph settings of a bibliography
- item.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Standard
-En collectant ces derniers éléments, l'exportation LaTeX sera ou bien:
+.
\end_layout
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
+\begin_layout Description
\lang english
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\backslash
-LatexName[LatexParam]{\SpecialChar \ldots{}
-}
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Standard
-ou bien:
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-
-\backslash
-begin{LatexName}[LatexParam] \SpecialChar \ldots{}
-
-\backslash
-end{LatexName}.
+LabelTag
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Standard
-en fonction du type LaTeX.
+\end_inset
+
+ [FIXME]
+\lang french
+ (Utilisable uniquement avec les formats XML).
\end_layout
-\end_deeper
\begin_layout Description
\lang english
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-LeftMargin
+Labeltype
\end_layout
\end_inset
-\lang french
-
+\lang ngerman
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-[chaîne=""]
-\end_layout
+\emph on
+\lang ngerman
+No_Label
+\emph default
+, Manual, Static, Top_Environment,
+\begin_inset Newline newline
\end_inset
- fixe la marge gauche: si vous mettez des styles dans un environnement,
- les
-\lang english
-
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Centered_Top_Environment, Counter, Sensitive, Enumerate,
+\begin_inset Newline newline
+\end_inset
-\lang english
-LeftMargin
+Itemize, Bibliography
\end_layout
\end_inset
\lang french
- ne seront pas ajoutées directement, mais avec un facteur
-\begin_inset Formula $\frac{4}{\mathrm{profondeur}+4}$
-\end_inset
-
-.
- Notez que ce paramètre sert aussi quand
-\lang english
+]
+\end_layout
+\begin_deeper
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-Margin
+Manual
\end_layout
\end_inset
+ veut dire que le marqueur est le premier mot (avant la première vraie espace).
+ Utilisez des espaces insécables si vous voulez mettre plus d'un mot dans
+ le marqueur.
+\end_layout
-\lang french
- est définie comme
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-Manual
+Static
\end_layout
\end_inset
- ou
+ veut dire qu'il est défini dans le style (voir
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-Dynamic
+LabelString
\end_layout
\end_inset
-.
- Il est alors ajouté à la marge manuelle ou dynamique.
-\begin_inset Newline newline
+).
+ Notez que ceci est vraiment
+\begin_inset Quotes fld
\end_inset
-Par exemple,
-\begin_inset Quotes fld
+statique
+\begin_inset Quotes frd
\end_inset
+.
+\end_layout
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-MM
+
+\lang english
+Top_Environment
\end_layout
\end_inset
-\begin_inset Quotes frd
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
- signifie que le paragraphe est indenté avec la largeur de
-\begin_inset Quotes fld
+et
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-MM
-\end_layout
-\end_inset
-
-
-\begin_inset Quotes frd
-\end_inset
+\lang english
+Centered_Top_Environment
+\end_layout
- dans la police normale.
- Il est possible de créer une largeur négative avec
-\begin_inset Quotes fld
\end_inset
-
+ sont des cas particuliers de
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
--
-\end_layout
-
-\end_inset
+\lang english
+Static
+\end_layout
-\begin_inset Quotes frd
\end_inset
.
- Cette solution a été choisie pour que l'apparence soit la même quelle que
- soit la police d'écran.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
+ Le marqueur sera imprimé au dessus du paragraphe, mais seulement au début
+ d'un environnement ou au début d'une suite de paragraphes dans ce style.
+ Ceci peut être utilisé par exemple pour le style
+\family sans
-\lang english
-\begin_inset Flex Code
+\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-\lang english
-Margin
+\family sans
+Abstract
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
+.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-\emph on
\lang english
-Static
-\emph default
-, Manual, Dynamic, First_Dynamic, Right_Address_Box
+Sensitive
\end_layout
\end_inset
-]
-\begin_inset Newline newline
+ est un cas particulier pour les marqueurs de légende
+\begin_inset Quotes fld
\end_inset
+Figure
+\begin_inset Quotes frd
+\end_inset
-\lang french
-fixe le type de marge à gauche du format.
-\end_layout
+ et
+\begin_inset Quotes fld
+\end_inset
-\begin_deeper
-\begin_layout Description
+Tableau
+\begin_inset Quotes frd
+\end_inset
+
+.
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-Static
+Sensitive
\end_layout
\end_inset
- veut dire une marge fixe.
-\end_layout
+ signifie que le mot affiché (défini en dur) dépend du type de flottant:
+ il est défini dans les sources comme
+\begin_inset Quotes fld
+\end_inset
+
-\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-Manual
+FloatType N
\end_layout
\end_inset
- veut dire que la marge de gauche dépend de ce qu'il y a dans la fenêtre
-
-\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
-status collapsed
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Édition\SpecialChar \menuseparator
-Paramètres
-\begin_inset space ~
+\begin_inset Quotes frd
\end_inset
-de
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
+ où
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-Paragraphe
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+N
\end_layout
\end_inset
-.
- Ceci sert à obtenir des listes bien mises en page sans tabulations.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
+ est la valeur du compteur associé au flottant.
+
+\lang english
+For the case that a caption is inserted outside of a float
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-Dynamic
+LabelString
\end_layout
\end_inset
- veut dire que la marge dépend de la taille du marqueur.
- Ceci sert entre autres aux en-têtes numérotés.
- Il est évident que l'en-tête
-\begin_inset Quotes fld
-\end_inset
-
-5.4.3.2.1 Très long en-tête
-\begin_inset Quotes frd
+ should be set to e.
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
- doit avoir une marge de gauche plus grande (autant que
-\begin_inset Quotes fld
+g
+\begin_inset space \space{}
\end_inset
-5.4.3.2.1
-\begin_inset Quotes frd
-\end_inset
- plus l'espace) que
-\begin_inset Quotes fld
+\begin_inset Quotes eld
\end_inset
-3.2 Très long en-tête
-\begin_inset Quotes frd
+Senseless!
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
-, même si les autres traitements de texte ne savent pas le faire.
+.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-First_Dynamic
+Counter
\end_layout
\end_inset
- est similaire, mais seulement la toute première ligne du paragraphe est
- dynamique, les autres étant statiques; ceci est utile par exemple pour
- les descriptions.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
+ définissent automatiquement des marqueurs numérotés.
+ La directive
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-Right_Address_Box
+LabelString
\end_layout
\end_inset
- signifie que la marge est choisie pour que la ligne la plus longue du paragraph
-e touche la marge de droite.
- Ceci sert à typographier une adresse sur le bord droit de la page.
-\end_layout
+ sera déployée pour résoudre tout conflit de référence de compteur qui apparaîtr
+ait.
+ Par exemple, ce pourrait être
+\begin_inset Newline newline
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset Quotes fld
+\end_inset
-\end_deeper
-\begin_layout Description
-\lang english
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-NeedProtect
+Section
+\backslash
+thechapter.
+\backslash
+thesection
\end_layout
\end_inset
-\lang french
- [
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\emph on
-0
-\end_layout
-
+\begin_inset Quotes frd
\end_inset
-,
-\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+.
+\begin_inset Newline newline
\end_inset
+Voir la
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:Compteurs"
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
+\end_inset
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-1
+ pour des précisions sur le compteurs.
\end_layout
-\end_inset
-
-] indique si les commandes fragiles doivent être protégées par
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-\backslash
-protect
+\lang english
+Enumerate
\end_layout
\end_inset
- dans ce style (Note: ceci n'indique pas si cette commande elle-même doit
- être protégée).
+ produit le type habituel d'étiquettes d'énumération.
+ Pour le moment, il est défini en dur comme chiffres arabes, lettres en
+ bas de casse, petits chiffres romains et lettres capitales pour les quatre
+ profondeurs possibles.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-Newline
+Itemize
\end_layout
\end_inset
\lang french
- [
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-0
+ produit des symboles pour les différents niveaux.
+ Il est également défini en dur.
\end_layout
-\end_inset
-
-,
-\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
-\end_inset
-
+\begin_layout Description
+\lang english
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-\emph on
-1
+\lang english
+Bibliography
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] indique si les nouvelles lignes sont traduites ou non en sauts de ligne
- LaTeX (
+
+\lang french
+ est utilisé de manière interne par LyX et ne doit être utilisé qu'avec
+
+\lang english
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-\backslash
-
-\backslash
-
+\lang english
+LatexType BibEnvironment
\end_layout
\end_inset
-).
- La traduction peut être désactivée pour permettre d'éditer plus confortablement
- du LaTeX depuis LyX.
+.
\end_layout
+\end_deeper
\begin_layout Description
\lang english
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-NextNoIndent
+LangPreamble
\end_layout
\end_inset
\lang french
- [
+ écrasera complètement toute autre directive
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\emph on
-0
+LangPreamble
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
-\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
-\end_inset
-
-
+ antérieure.
+ Doit être fermée par
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-1
+EndLangPreamble
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] indique si LyX indente ou non la première ligne du paragraphe suivant.
-
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-1
-\end_layout
-
+.
+\begin_inset Newline newline
\end_inset
- veut dire qu'il ne peut pas,
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-0
-\end_layout
+Voir la
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:I18n"
\end_inset
- veut dire qu'il peut s'il le veut.
+ pour les détails d'utilisation.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-ObsoletedBy
+LatexName
\end_layout
\end_inset
\end_inset
-] dénomme un style qui a remplacé ce style en cours.
- Ceci est utilisé pour renommer un style en conservant la rétrocompatibilité.
+] fixe le nom de l'objet LaTeX correspondant, soit l'environnement, soit
+ la commande.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-OptionalArgs
+LatexParam
\end_layout
\end_inset
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-int=0
+<paramètre>
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] fixe le nombre d'arguments facultatifs qui peuvent être utilisés avec
- ce style.
- Ceci est utile pour par exemple pour les en-têtes de section, et n'a de
- sens qu'avec LaTeX.
- Noter que, dans le résultat, les arguments optionnels précéderont les arguments
- obligatoire (voir ci-après).
- On peut donc définir des constructions comme:
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_deeper
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-
-\backslash
-mycmd[opt1]{req1}{contenu du paragraphe}
-\end_layout
+] fixe le paramètre facultatif de l'objet
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\begin_layout Standard
-mais on peut pas avoir de constructions comme:
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+LatexName
\end_layout
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-
-\backslash
-mycmd[opt1]{req1}[opt2]{contenu du paragraphe}
-\end_layout
+\end_inset
-\begin_layout Standard
-du moins sans recours au code TeX (avec lequel vous faites ce que vous voulez).
+ correspondant.
+ Ce paramètre ne peut pas être changé depuis LyX.
\end_layout
-\end_deeper
\begin_layout Description
\lang english
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-ParbreakIsNewline
+LatexType
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
-\lang french
- [
+
+\lang ngerman
+[
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\emph on
-0
+\lang ngerman
+Paragraph
+\emph default
+, Command, Environment, Item_Environment,
+\begin_inset Newline newline
+\end_inset
+
+List_Environment, Bib_Environment
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
-\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
-\end_inset
+\lang french
+] décrit comment traduire l'environnement en LaTeX.
+\lang english
+
+\begin_inset Foot
+status open
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+\lang english
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-1
+
+\lang english
+LatexType
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] indique que les paragraphes ne seront pas séparés par une ligne vide dans
- le résultat LaTeX, mais par un retour à la ligne; combiné avec
+ is perhaps a bit misleading, since these rules apply to DocBook classes,
+ too.
+ Visit the DocBook class files (filenames
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-PassThru 1
+
+\lang english
+db_*.inc
\end_layout
\end_inset
-, ceci permet d'émuler une éditeur plein texte (comme l'insert code TeX).
+ ) for specific examples.
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
+\end_inset
-\lang english
+
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_deeper
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-ParIndent
+Paragraph
\end_layout
\end_inset
+ veut dire
+\begin_inset Quotes fld
+\end_inset
-\lang french
-
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
+rien de spécial
+\begin_inset Quotes frd
+\end_inset
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-[chaîne=""]
+.
\end_layout
-\end_inset
-
- fixe l'indentation de la toute première ligne d'un paragraphe.
-
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Parindent
+Command
\end_layout
\end_inset
- est fixé pour un format donné, à l'exception du format
+ veut dire
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Standard
+
+\backslash
+
+\emph on
+LatexName
+\emph default
+{\SpecialChar \ldots{}
+}
\end_layout
\end_inset
-, car l'indentation d'un paragraphe dans l'environnement
+.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Standard
+Environment
\end_layout
\end_inset
- peut être empêchée par
+ veut dire
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-NextNoIndent
+
+\backslash
+begin{
+\emph on
+LatexName
+\emph default
+}\SpecialChar \ldots{}
+
+\backslash
+end{
+\emph on
+LatexName
+\emph default
+}
\end_layout
\end_inset
.
- De plus, les paragraphes de style
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Standard
+Item_Environment
\end_layout
\end_inset
- emboîtés dans d'autres environnements utilisent le
+ est la même chose que
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-ParIndent
+Environment
\end_layout
\end_inset
- de l'environne\SpecialChar \-
-ment, pas le leur.
- Par exemple, les paragraphes
+, sauf qu'il génère un
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Standard
+
+\backslash
+item
\end_layout
\end_inset
- dans une énumération ne sont pas indentés.
+ pour chaque paragraphe de l'environnement.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
-
-\lang english
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-ParSep
+List_Environment
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
-\lang french
- [
-\family typewriter
-float=0
-\family default
-] fixe l'espacement vertical entre deux paragraphes dans le style.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
-
-\lang english
+ est la même chose que
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-Parskip
+Item_Environment
\end_layout
\end_inset
+, sauf que
+\begin_inset Newline newline
+\end_inset
+
-\lang french
- [
-\family typewriter
-float=0
-\family default
-] fixe la valeur d'interligne entre paragraphes.
- LyX donne le choix entre
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Indentation
+LabelWidthString
\end_layout
\end_inset
- et
+ est passé en paramètre de l'environnement.
+\begin_inset Newline newline
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Interligne
+LabelWidthString
\end_layout
\end_inset
- pour séparer les paragraphes.
- Quand on choisit
-\begin_inset Flex Code
+ peut être défini dans la fenêtre
+\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Indentation
-\end_layout
-
+Édition\SpecialChar \menuseparator
+Paramètres
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
-, cette valeur n'est pas prise en compte.
- Quand on choisit
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
+de
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Interligne
+Paragraphe
\end_layout
\end_inset
-, la valeur de
+.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
+
+\lang english
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-ParIndent
+
+\lang english
+Bib_Environment
\end_layout
\end_inset
- n'est pas prise en compte et tous les paragraphes sont séparés par ce paramètre
-
+ is like
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Parskip
+
+\lang english
+Environment
\end_layout
\end_inset
-, en plus de l'interligne normal.
- L'espacement vertical est calculé par
+ but adds additionally the necessary mandatory argument (the longest label)
+ to the begin statement of the bibliography environment:
+\begin_inset Newline newline
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-valeur*DefaultHeight()
+
+\lang english
+
+\backslash
+begin{thebibliography}{99}
\end_layout
\end_inset
- où
-\family typewriter
-valeur
-\family default
- est la valeur choisie pour
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
+ It is therefore only useful for bibliography environments.
+ The default longest label
+\begin_inset Quotes eld
+\end_inset
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Parskip
+99
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
+ can be changed by the user in the paragraph settings of a bibliography
+ item.
\end_layout
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout Standard
+En collectant ces derniers éléments, l'exportation LaTeX sera ou bien:
+\end_layout
- et
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-DefaultHeight()
+\lang english
+
+\backslash
+LatexName[LatexParam]{\SpecialChar \ldots{}
+}
\end_layout
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout Standard
+ou bien:
+\end_layout
- est la hauteur d'une ligne dans la police normale.
- De cette façon, l'aspect reste le même quelle que soit la police à l'écran.
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+
+\lang english
+
+\backslash
+begin{LatexName}[LatexParam] \SpecialChar \ldots{}
+
+\backslash
+end{LatexName}.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Standard
+en fonction du type LaTeX.
\end_layout
+\end_deeper
\begin_layout Description
\lang english
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-PassThru
+LeftMargin
\end_layout
\end_inset
\lang french
- [
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\emph on
-0
+[chaîne=""]
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
-\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
-\end_inset
-
+ fixe la marge gauche: si vous mettez des styles dans un environnement,
+ les
+\lang english
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-1
+
+\lang english
+LeftMargin
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] indique si le contenu du paragraphe doit être passé sous forme brute,
- c'est-à-dire sans les traductions spéciales dont LaTeX aurait besoin.
-
-\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
+\lang french
+ ne seront pas ajoutées directement, mais avec un facteur
+\begin_inset Formula $\frac{4}{\mathrm{profondeur}+4}$
+\end_inset
+.
+ Notez que ce paramètre sert aussi quand
\lang english
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-Preamble
+Margin
\end_layout
\end_inset
\lang french
- fixe le contenu à inclure dans le préambule LaTeX quand le style est utilisé.
- Utile pour définir des macros, charger des paquetages, etc.
- requis pour ce style particulier.
- Doit être fermé par
-\begin_inset Quotes fld
-\end_inset
-
-
+ est définie comme
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-EndPreamble
+Manual
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
-\begin_inset Quotes frd
-\end_inset
-
-.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
-
-\lang english
+ ou
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-RefPrefix
+Dynamic
\end_layout
\end_inset
+.
+ Il est alors ajouté à la marge manuelle ou dynamique.
+\begin_inset Newline newline
+\end_inset
+
+Par exemple,
+\begin_inset Quotes fld
+\end_inset
+
-\lang french
- [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-chaîne
+MM
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] indique le préfixe à utiliser pour créer des étiquettes référant les paragraph
-es de ce type.
- Ceci permet l'utilisation de références mises en forme.
-\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Quotes frd
+\end_inset
+
+ signifie que le paragraphe est indenté avec la largeur de
+\begin_inset Quotes fld
+\end_inset
+
-\lang english
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-RequiredArgs
+MM
\end_layout
\end_inset
-\lang french
- [
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-int=0
-\end_layout
+\begin_inset Quotes frd
+\end_inset
+ dans la police normale.
+ Il est possible de créer une largeur négative avec
+\begin_inset Quotes fld
\end_inset
-] précise le nombre d'arguments attendus par la commande ou l'environnement
- LaTeX correspondant à ce style.
- Dans le cas d'une commande, ce sont les arguments requis autres que ceux
- qui sont associés au contenu du paragraphe proprement dit.
- Ceux-ci n'ont pas nécessairement besoin d'être fournis: LyX créera des
- arguments vides si nécessaire.
- Noter que les arguments optionnels seront émis avant les arguments obligatoires.
- Voir la description de la directive
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-OptionalTags
+-
\end_layout
\end_inset
- ci-dessus pour les détails.
+
+\begin_inset Quotes frd
+\end_inset
+
+.
+ Cette solution a été choisie pour que l'apparence soit la même quelle que
+ soit la police d'écran.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-Requires
+Margin
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
-\lang french
[
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-chaîne
+
+\emph on
+\lang english
+Static
+\emph default
+, Manual, Dynamic, First_Dynamic, Right_Address_Box
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] indique que le style requiert la fonctionnalité chaîne.
- Voir la description de
+]
+\begin_inset Newline newline
+\end_inset
+
+
+\lang french
+fixe le type de marge à gauche du format.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_deeper
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-Provides
+Static
\end_layout
\end_inset
- ci-dessus (
-\lang english
-sec
-\lang french
-.
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-
-\begin_inset CommandInset ref
-LatexCommand ref
-reference "sub:Paramètres-généraux-d'une"
-
-\end_inset
-
-) pour les détails sur les fonctionnalités.
-
+ veut dire une marge fixe.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
-
-\lang english
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-RightMargin
+Manual
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
-\lang french
- [
-\begin_inset Flex Code
+ veut dire que la marge de gauche dépend de ce qu'il y a dans la fenêtre
+
+\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-chaîne
+Édition\SpecialChar \menuseparator
+Paramètres
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+de
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+Paragraphe
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] similaire à
-\family typewriter
-LeftMargin
-\family default
.
+ Ceci sert à obtenir des listes bien mises en page sans tabulations.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
-
-\lang english
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-Spacing
+Dynamic
\end_layout
\end_inset
+ veut dire que la marge dépend de la taille du marqueur.
+ Ceci sert entre autres aux en-têtes numérotés.
+ Il est évident que l'en-tête
+\begin_inset Quotes fld
+\end_inset
-\lang french
-
-\lang english
-[
+5.4.3.2.1 Très long en-tête
+\begin_inset Quotes frd
+\end_inset
+
+ doit avoir une marge de gauche plus grande (autant que
+\begin_inset Quotes fld
+\end_inset
+
+5.4.3.2.1
+\begin_inset Quotes frd
+\end_inset
+
+ plus l'espace) que
+\begin_inset Quotes fld
+\end_inset
+
+3.2 Très long en-tête
+\begin_inset Quotes frd
+\end_inset
+
+, même si les autres traitements de texte ne savent pas le faire.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-\emph on
\lang english
-single
+First_Dynamic
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+ est similaire, mais seulement la toute première ligne du paragraphe est
+ dynamique, les autres étant statiques; ceci est utile par exemple pour
+ les descriptions.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-onehalf
+Right_Address_Box
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+ signifie que la marge est choisie pour que la ligne la plus longue du paragraph
+e touche la marge de droite.
+ Ceci sert à typographier une adresse sur le bord droit de la page.
+\end_layout
+
+\end_deeper
+\begin_layout Description
+
+\lang english
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-double
+NeedProtect
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+
+\lang french
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-\lang english
-other
-\lang french
+\emph on
+0
+\end_layout
-\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
-<valeur>
-\end_layout
-
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
-\lang french
-] définit l'interligne par défaut dans ce style.
- Les paramètres
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-single
+1
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+] indique si les commandes fragiles doivent être protégées par
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-onehalf
+
+\backslash
+protect
\end_layout
\end_inset
- et
+ dans ce style (Note: ceci n'indique pas si cette commande elle-même doit
+ être protégée).
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
+
+\lang english
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-double
+
+\lang english
+Newline
\end_layout
\end_inset
- correspondent respectivement à un facteur multiplicatif de 1, 1,25 et 1,667.
- Si vous mettez le paramètre
+
+\lang french
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-other
+0
\end_layout
\end_inset
-, vous devez aussi mettre une valeur numérique qui servira de facteur multiplica
-tif.
- Notez que, contrairement aux autres paramètres,
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Spacing
+
+\emph on
+1
\end_layout
\end_inset
- implique de générer du code LaTeX spécifique, qui utilise le paquetage
- LaTeX
+] indique si les nouvelles lignes sont traduites ou non en sauts de ligne
+ LaTeX (
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-setspace
+
+\backslash
+
+\backslash
+
\end_layout
\end_inset
-.
+).
+ La traduction peut être désactivée pour permettre d'éditer plus confortablement
+ du LaTeX depuis LyX.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-Spellcheck
+NextNoIndent
\end_layout
\end_inset
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\emph on
0
\end_layout
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\emph on
1
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] active la correction orthographique du style.
- Implicitement vrai.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
-
-\lang english
+] indique si LyX indente ou non la première ligne du paragraphe suivant.
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-TextFont
+1
\end_layout
\end_inset
+ veut dire qu'il ne peut pas,
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\lang french
- fixe la police utilisée pour le corps du texte.
- Voir la section
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-
-\begin_inset CommandInset ref
-LatexCommand ref
-reference "sub:polices"
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+0
+\end_layout
\end_inset
-.
+ veut dire qu'il peut s'il le veut.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-TocLevel
+ObsoletedBy
\end_layout
\end_inset
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-int=3
+<nom>
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] fixe le niveau du style dans le table des matières.
- Ceci est utilisé pour la numérotation automatique des en-têtes.
+] dénomme un style qui a remplacé ce style en cours.
+ Ceci est utilisé pour renommer un style en conservant la rétrocompatibilité.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-TopSep
+OptionalArgs
\end_layout
\end_inset
\lang french
[
-\family typewriter
-float=0
-\family default
-] fixe L'espacement vertical qui sépare le premier paragraphe dans une série
- du même style, du paragraphe qui le précède.
- Si le paragraphe précédent est dans un autre style, les séparations ne
- s'ajoutent pas, mais LyX prend le maximum des deux.
-\end_layout
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\begin_layout Subsection
-\begin_inset CommandInset label
-LatexCommand label
-name "sub:I18n"
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+int=0
+\end_layout
\end_inset
-Internationalisation des styles de paragraphes
+] fixe le nombre d'arguments facultatifs qui peuvent être utilisés avec
+ ce style.
+ Ceci est utile pour par exemple pour les en-têtes de section, et n'a de
+ sens qu'avec LaTeX.
+ Noter que, dans le résultat, les arguments optionnels précéderont les arguments
+ obligatoire (voir ci-après).
+ On peut donc définir des constructions comme:
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Standard
-LyX effectue depuis longtemps la traduction des informations de format,
- mais, jusqu'à la version 2.0, ceci ne s'appliquait qu'à l'interface utilisateur
- et non pas par exemple au résultat PDF.
- Ainsi les auteurs francophones devaient avoir recours à des astuces pénibles
- s'ils voulaient obtenir
-\begin_inset Quotes fld
-\end_inset
+\begin_deeper
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
-Théorème 1
-\begin_inset Quotes frd
-\end_inset
+\backslash
+mycmd[opt1]{req1}{contenu du paragraphe}
+\end_layout
- au lieu de
-\begin_inset Quotes fld
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout Standard
+mais on peut pas avoir de constructions comme:
+\end_layout
-Theorem 1
-\begin_inset Quotes frd
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
-.
- Grâce à Georg
-\noun on
-Baum
-\noun default
-, ce n'est plus les cas.
+\backslash
+mycmd[opt1]{req1}[opt2]{contenu du paragraphe}
\end_layout
\begin_layout Standard
-Si un
+du moins sans recours au code TeX (avec lequel vous faites ce que vous voulez).
+\end_layout
+
+\end_deeper
+\begin_layout Description
+
+\lang english
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Style
+
+\lang english
+ParbreakIsNewline
\end_layout
\end_inset
- définit un texte qui doit apparaître dans le le document typographique,
- il peut utiliser
+
+\lang french
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LangPreamble
+
+\emph on
+0
\end_layout
\end_inset
- et
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-BabelPreamble
+1
\end_layout
\end_inset
- pour traiter correctement les documents non anglophones, et même multilingues.
- L'extrait suivant (du fichier
+] indique que les paragraphes ne seront pas séparés par une ligne vide dans
+ le résultat LaTeX, mais par un retour à la ligne; combiné avec
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-theorems-ams.inc
+PassThru 1
\end_layout
\end_inset
-) illustre le fonctionnement:
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-
-\lang english
-Preamble
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_deeper
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-
-\lang english
-
-\backslash
-theoremstyle{remark}
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-
-\lang english
-
-\backslash
-newtheorem{claim}[thm]{
-\backslash
-protect
-\backslash
-claimname}
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-
-\lang english
-EndPreamble
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-
-\lang english
-LangPreamble
+, ceci permet d'émuler une éditeur plein texte (comme l'insert code TeX).
\end_layout
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
+\begin_layout Description
\lang english
-
-\backslash
-providecommand{
-\backslash
-claimname}{_(Claim)}
-\end_layout
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-EndLangPreamble
+ParIndent
\end_layout
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
+\end_inset
-\lang english
-BabelPreamble
-\end_layout
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
+\lang french
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\lang english
-
-\backslash
-addto
-\backslash
-captions$$lang{
-\backslash
-renewcommand{
-\backslash
-claimname}{_(Claim)}}
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+[chaîne=""]
\end_layout
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-
-\lang english
-EndBabelPreamble
-\end_layout
+\end_inset
-\end_deeper
-\begin_layout Standard
-En principe, toute commande LaTeX autorisée peut apparaître dans les directives
+ fixe l'indentation de la toute première ligne d'un paragraphe.
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LangPreamble
+Parindent
\end_layout
\end_inset
- et
+ est fixé pour un format donné, à l'exception du format
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-BabelPreamble
+Standard
\end_layout
\end_inset
-, mais dans la pratique elles se présenteront typiquement comme ce qui est
- montré ici.
- La clé de la traduction correcte du texte typographié est la définition
- de le commande LateX
+, car l'indentation d'un paragraphe dans l'environnement
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\backslash
-claimname
+Standard
\end_layout
\end_inset
- et son utilisation avec
+ peut être empêchée par
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\backslash
-newtheorem
+NextNoIndent
\end_layout
\end_inset
.
-
+ De plus, les paragraphes de style
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Standard
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Standard
-La directive
+\end_inset
+
+ emboîtés dans d'autres environnements utilisent le
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LangPreamble
+ParIndent
\end_layout
\end_inset
- fournit ce qu'il faut pour l'internationalisation fondée sur le langage
- global du document.
- Le contenu de la directive sera inclus dans le préambule, comme avec la
- directive
+ de l'environne\SpecialChar \-
+ment, pas le leur.
+ Par exemple, les paragraphes
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Preamble
+Standard
\end_layout
\end_inset
-.
- Ce qui la rend singulière est l'utilisation de la
-\begin_inset Quotes fld
-\end_inset
+ dans une énumération ne sont pas indentés.
+\end_layout
-fonction
-\begin_inset Quotes frd
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout Description
-
+\lang english
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-_()
+
+\lang english
+ParSep
\end_layout
\end_inset
-, qui sera remplacée, lorsque LyX produira le résultat LaTeX, par la traduction
- de son argument dans la langue du document
-\begin_inset Foot
+
+\lang french
+ [
+\family typewriter
+float=0
+\family default
+] fixe l'espacement vertical entre deux paragraphes dans le style.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
+
+\lang english
+\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Pour ceux qui s'intéressent au fonctionnement sous-jacent, la fonction
-\begin_inset Quotes fld
+
+\lang english
+Parskip
+\end_layout
+
\end_inset
+\lang french
+ [
+\family typewriter
+float=0
+\family default
+] fixe la valeur d'interligne entre paragraphes.
+ LyX donne le choix entre
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-_()
+Indentation
\end_layout
\end_inset
+ et
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Interligne
+\end_layout
-\begin_inset Quotes frd
\end_inset
- cache la fonction
+ pour séparer les paragraphes.
+ Quand on choisit
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-gettext()
+Indentation
\end_layout
\end_inset
-, qui constitue le cœur du mécanisme de traduction de l'interface LyX, et
- qui est étendue ici à la traduction à la volée de code LaTeX.
+, cette valeur n'est pas prise en compte.
+ Quand on choisit
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Interligne
\end_layout
\end_inset
-.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Standard
-La directive
+, la valeur de
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-BabelPreamble
+ParIndent
\end_layout
\end_inset
- est plus compliquée, car elle fournit une fonctionnalité adaptée aux documents
- multilingues et propose par conséquent une interface pour le paquetage
+ n'est pas prise en compte et tous les paragraphes sont séparés par ce paramètre
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-babel
+Parskip
\end_layout
\end_inset
- Son contenu sera ajouté au préambule une fois pour chaque langue utilisée
- par le document.
- Dans ce cas, l'argument de
+, en plus de l'interligne normal.
+ L'espacement vertical est calculé par
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-_()
+valeur*DefaultHeight()
\end_layout
\end_inset
- sera remplacé par sa traduction dans le langage en question: l'expression
-
+ où
+\family typewriter
+valeur
+\family default
+ est la valeur choisie pour
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-$$lang
+Parskip
\end_layout
\end_inset
- est remplacée par le nom de la langue (telle qu'il est connu de
+ et
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-babel
+DefaultHeight()
\end_layout
\end_inset
-).
-
+ est la hauteur d'une ligne dans la police normale.
+ De cette façon, l'aspect reste le même quelle que soit la police à l'écran.
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Standard
-Un document en allemand qui inclut aussi un paragraphe en français aura
- donc ceci dans le préambule:
-\end_layout
+\begin_layout Description
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
+\lang english
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
+PassThru
+\end_layout
-\backslash
-addto
-\backslash
-captionsfrench{
-\backslash
-renewcommand{
-\backslash
-claimname}{Affirmation}}
-\begin_inset Newline newline
-\end_inset
-
-
-\backslash
-addto
-\backslash
-captionsngerman{
-\backslash
-renewcommand{
-\backslash
-claimname}{Behauptung}}
-\begin_inset Newline newline
\end_inset
-\backslash
-providecommand{
-\backslash
-claimname}{Behauptung}
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Standard
-LaTeX et
+\lang french
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-babel
-\end_layout
-
-\end_inset
- vont alors conspirer pour créer le texte correct dans le résultat imprimable.
+\emph on
+0
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Standard
-Un point important à noter est que les traductions sont celles qui sont
- fournies par LyX lui-même, via le mécanisme d'internationalisation de l'interfa
-ce utilisateur.
- Ceci signifie que
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LangPreamble
-\end_layout
+\end_inset
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
- et
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-BabelPreamble
+1
\end_layout
\end_inset
- ne sont effectifs que dans les fichiers de format fournis avec LyX, puisque
- les fichiers de format créés par l'utilisateur ne seront pas explorés par
- les fonction d'internationalisation.
- Ceci dit, tout fichier de format créé dans le but d'être distribué avec
- LyX doit inclure ces directives s'il y a lieu.
+] indique si le contenu du paragraphe doit être passé sous forme brute,
+ c'est-à-dire sans les traductions spéciales dont LaTeX aurait besoin.
+
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Subsection
-Flottants
-\begin_inset CommandInset label
-LatexCommand label
-name "sub:Flottants"
-
-\end_inset
-
-
-\end_layout
+\begin_layout Description
-\begin_layout Standard
-Il faut définir les flottants (
+\lang english
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-figure
-\end_layout
-\end_inset
-
-,
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-tableau
+\lang english
+Preamble
\end_layout
\end_inset
-\SpecialChar \ldots{}
-) dans la classe elle-même.
- Si vous cherchez à savoir comment mettre à jour une classe déjà existante,
- il suffit probablement que vous ajoutiez
-\end_layout
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-Input stdfloats.inc
-\end_layout
+\lang french
+ fixe le contenu à inclure dans le préambule LaTeX quand le style est utilisé.
+ Utile pour définir des macros, charger des paquetages, etc.
+ requis pour ce style particulier.
+ Doit être fermé par
+\begin_inset Quotes fld
+\end_inset
-\begin_layout Standard
-à un endroit raisonnable dans la classe
-\begin_inset Foot
-status collapsed
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-N'oubliez pas de jeter aussi un
-\begin_inset ERT
+\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\backslash
-oe{}
+\lang english
+EndPreamble
\end_layout
\end_inset
-il sur les compteurs dans la section suivante.
-\end_layout
+\begin_inset Quotes frd
\end_inset
.
- Si vous voulez implémenter une classe de texte qui propose un nouveau type
- de flottant (comme la classe AGU fournie avec LyX), les explications ci-dessous
- vont sans doute vous être utiles :
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-Extension
+RefPrefix
\end_layout
\end_inset
-\family typewriter
\lang french
-
-\family default
-[
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
-] définit le suffixe d'un fichier auxiliaire contenant la liste des flottants
- de ce type.
- LaTeX écrit les légendes dans ce fichier.
+] indique le préfixe à utiliser pour créer des étiquettes référant les paragraph
+es de ce type.
+ Ceci permet l'utilisation de références mises en forme.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-GuiName
+RequiredArgs
\end_layout
\end_inset
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-chaîne
+int=0
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] définit la chaîne de caractères qui se trouvera dans les menus et également
- dans la légende.
- Ceci est traduit dans le langage courant si
+] précise le nombre d'arguments attendus par la commande ou l'environnement
+ LaTeX correspondant à ce style.
+ Dans le cas d'une commande, ce sont les arguments requis autres que ceux
+ qui sont associés au contenu du paragraphe proprement dit.
+ Ceux-ci n'ont pas nécessairement besoin d'être fournis: LyX créera des
+ arguments vides si nécessaire.
+ Noter que les arguments optionnels seront émis avant les arguments obligatoires.
+ Voir la description de la directive
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-babel
+OptionalTags
\end_layout
\end_inset
- est utilisé.
+ ci-dessus pour les détails.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-HTML*
+
+\lang english
+Requires
\end_layout
\end_inset
\lang french
- sont utilisées avec l'exportation XHTML.
- Voir
-\begin_inset space ~
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+chaîne
+\end_layout
+
\end_inset
+] indique que le style requiert la fonctionnalité chaîne.
+ Voir la description de
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
+Provides
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+ ci-dessus (
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
LatexCommand ref
-reference "sub:Styles-de-paragraphe-XHTML"
+reference "sub:Paramètres-généraux-d'une"
\end_inset
-.
+) pour les détails sur les fonctionnalités.
+
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-IsPredefined
+RightMargin
\end_layout
\end_inset
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\emph on
-0
+chaîne
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
-\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
-\end_inset
+] similaire à
+\family typewriter
+LeftMargin
+\family default
+.
+\end_layout
+\begin_layout Description
+\lang english
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-1
+
+\lang english
+Spacing
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] indique si le flottant est déjà défini dans la classe de document ou s'il
- faut charger le paquetage LaTeX
+
+\lang french
+
+\lang english
+[
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-float
+
+\emph on
+\lang english
+single
\end_layout
\end_inset
- pour le définir à la volée.
- La valeur implicite est
+,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-0
+
+\lang english
+onehalf
\end_layout
\end_inset
- qui signifie: utiliser
+,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-float
+
+\lang english
+double
\end_layout
\end_inset
-.
- Elle doit être positionnée sur
+,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-1
-\end_layout
+\lang english
+other
+\lang french
+
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
- si le flottant est déjà défini par la classe de document.
+<valeur>
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
+\end_inset
-\lang english
+
+\lang french
+] définit l'interligne par défaut dans ce style.
+ Les paramètres
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-ListCommand
-\end_layout
+single
+\end_layout
\end_inset
-
-\lang french
- [
+,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-chaîne
+onehalf
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] détermine la commande utilisée pour engendrer une liste de flottants du
- type considéré; le
-\begin_inset Quotes fld
-\end_inset
-
-
-\backslash
-
-\begin_inset Quotes frd
-\end_inset
-
- initial doit être omis.
- Cette directive
-\emph on
-doit
-\emph default
- être utilisée si
+ et
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-UsesFloatPkg
+double
\end_layout
\end_inset
- est faux, puisqu'il n'y a alors pas de procédure pour activer cette commande.
- La directive est ignorée si
+ correspondent respectivement à un facteur multiplicatif de 1, 1,25 et 1,667.
+ Si vous mettez le paramètre
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-UsesFloatPkg
+other
\end_layout
\end_inset
- est vrai, puisqu'il y a alors une procédure.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
-
-\lang english
+, vous devez aussi mettre une valeur numérique qui servira de facteur multiplica
+tif.
+ Notez que, contrairement aux autres paramètres,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-ListName
+Spacing
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
-\lang french
- [
+ implique de générer du code LaTeX spécifique, qui utilise le paquetage
+ LaTeX
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-chaîne
+setspace
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] fixe le titre utilisé pour une liste des flottants du type considéré (figures,
- tableaux, etc.).
- Il est utilisé pour l'étiquette à l'écran dans LyX; il est passé à LaTeX
- pour être utilisé comme titre, et il est également utilisé comme titre
- dans l'exportation XHTML.
- Il sera traduit dans le langage du document.
+.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-NumberWithin
+Spellcheck
\end_layout
\end_inset
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-chaîne
+0
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] (paramètre facultatif) détermine si les flottants de cette classe seront
- numérotés en suivant un type de section du document.
- Par exemple, si
-\lang english
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-\lang english
-NumberWithin
+\emph on
+1
\end_layout
\end_inset
+] active la correction orthographique du style.
+ Implicitement vrai.
+\end_layout
-\lang french
- es
-\begin_inset Quotes fld
-\end_inset
-
+\begin_layout Description
+\lang english
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-chapter
+TextFont
\end_layout
\end_inset
-\begin_inset Quotes frd
+\lang french
+ fixe la police utilisée pour le corps du texte.
+ Voir la
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:polices"
+
\end_inset
-, les flottants seront numérotés chapitre par chapitre.
+.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-Placement
+TocLevel
\end_layout
\end_inset
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-chaîne
+int=3
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] définit le placement implicite pour cette catégorie de flottants.
- C'est comme en LaTeX standard :
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-t
+] fixe le niveau du style dans le table des matières.
+ Ceci est utilisé pour la numérotation automatique des en-têtes.
\end_layout
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout Description
-,
+\lang english
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-b
-\end_layout
-
-\end_inset
-,
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-p
+\lang english
+TopSep
\end_layout
\end_inset
- et
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-h
+\lang french
+ [
+\family typewriter
+float=0
+\family default
+] fixe L'espacement vertical qui sépare le premier paragraphe dans une série
+ du même style, du paragraphe qui le précède.
+ Si le paragraphe précédent est dans un autre style, les séparations ne
+ s'ajoutent pas, mais LyX prend le maximum des deux.
\end_layout
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout Subsection
+\begin_inset CommandInset label
+LatexCommand label
+name "sub:I18n"
- pour haut, bas, page et ici respectivement
-\begin_inset Foot
-status collapsed
+\end_inset
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Notez que l'ordre dans lequel vous mettez ces lettres est sans importance,
- comme en LaTeX.
+Internationalisation des styles de paragraphes
\end_layout
+\begin_layout Standard
+LyX effectue depuis longtemps la traduction des informations de format,
+ mais, jusqu'à la version 2.0, ceci ne s'appliquait qu'à l'interface utilisateur
+ et non pas par exemple au résultat PDF.
+ Ainsi les auteurs francophones devaient avoir recours à des astuces pénibles
+ s'ils voulaient obtenir
+\begin_inset Quotes fld
\end_inset
-.
- En plus vous avez un nouveau type,
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-H
-\end_layout
-
+Théorème 1
+\begin_inset Quotes frd
\end_inset
-, qui ne correspond pas vraiment à un flottant, car il signifie de le positionne
-r
+ au lieu de
\begin_inset Quotes fld
\end_inset
-ici
+Theorem 1
\begin_inset Quotes frd
\end_inset
- et nulle part ailleurs.
- Notez cependant que le type
+.
+ Grâce à Georg
+\noun on
+Baum
+\noun default
+, ce n'est plus les cas.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Standard
+Si un
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-H
+Style
\end_layout
\end_inset
- est spécial et, à cause de détails d'implantation, ne peut pas être utilisé
- avec des flottants non définis dans la classe de document.
- Si vous n'avez pas compris tout ce baratin, mettez simplement
-\family typewriter
-
-\begin_inset Quotes fld
-\end_inset
-
-
-\family default
-
+ définit un texte qui doit apparaître dans le le document typographique,
+ il peut utiliser
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-tbp
+LangPreamble
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
-\family typewriter
-
-\begin_inset Quotes frd
-\end_inset
-
-
-\family default
-.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
-
-\lang english
+ et
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-RefPrefix
+BabelPreamble
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
-\lang french
- [
+ pour traiter correctement les documents non anglophones, et même multilingues.
+ L'extrait suivant (du fichier
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-chaîne
+theorems-ams.inc
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] détermine le préfixe à utiliser lors de la création d'étiquettes référant
- les flottants du type considéré.
- Ceci permet l'utilisation de références mises en forme.
- Notez que vous pouvez supprimer tout préfixe défini en copiant un style
- en utilisant la valeur spécifique
-\begin_inset Quotes fld
-\end_inset
-
-OFF
-\begin_inset Quotes frd
-\end_inset
-
-, qui doit être en capitales.
+) illustre le fonctionnement:
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
\lang english
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
+Preamble
+\end_layout
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
+\begin_deeper
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
\lang english
-Style
+
+\backslash
+theoremstyle{remark}
\end_layout
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+\lang english
+
+\backslash
+newtheorem{claim}[thm]{
+\backslash
+protect
+\backslash
+claimname}
+\end_layout
-\lang french
- [
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-chaîne
+\lang english
+EndPreamble
\end_layout
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
-] fixe le style utilisé quand on définit le flottant avec
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
+\lang english
+LangPreamble
+\end_layout
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+\lang english
+
\backslash
-newfloat
+providecommand{
+\backslash
+claimname}{_(Claim)}
\end_layout
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
-.
+\lang english
+EndLangPreamble
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
\lang english
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
+BabelPreamble
+\end_layout
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
\lang english
-Type
+
+\backslash
+addto
+\backslash
+captions$$lang{
+\backslash
+renewcommand{
+\backslash
+claimname}{_(Claim)}}
\end_layout
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+\lang english
+EndBabelPreamble
+\end_layout
-\lang french
- [
+\end_deeper
+\begin_layout Standard
+En principe, toute commande LaTeX autorisée peut apparaître dans les directives
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-chaîne
+LangPreamble
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] définit le
-\begin_inset Quotes fld
-\end_inset
-
-type
-\begin_inset Quotes frd
-\end_inset
-
- de la nouvelle classe de flottants, comme
-\begin_inset Quotes fld
-\end_inset
-
-program
-\begin_inset Quotes frd
-\end_inset
-
- ou
-\begin_inset Quotes fld
-\end_inset
-
-algorithm
-\begin_inset Quotes frd
-\end_inset
-
-.
- Après l'instruction
+ et
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\backslash
-newfloat
+BabelPreamble
\end_layout
\end_inset
- appropriée, vous disposez de commandes comme
+, mais dans la pratique elles se présenteront typiquement comme ce qui est
+ montré ici.
+ La clé de la traduction correcte du texte typographié est la définition
+ de le commande LateX
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\backslash
-begin{program}
+claimname
\end_layout
\end_inset
- ou
+ et son utilisation avec
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\backslash
-end{algorithm*}
+newtheorem
\end_layout
\end_inset
.
- Noter que définir un flottant de type
+
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Standard
+La directive
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-type
+LangPreamble
\end_layout
\end_inset
- définit automatiquement les compteur correspondant, de nom
+ fournit ce qu'il faut pour l'internationalisation fondée sur le langage
+ global du document.
+ Le contenu de la directive sera inclus dans le préambule, comme avec la
+ directive
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-type
+Preamble
\end_layout
\end_inset
.
-\end_layout
+ Ce qui la rend singulière est l'utilisation de la
+\begin_inset Quotes fld
+\end_inset
-\begin_layout Description
+fonction
+\begin_inset Quotes frd
+\end_inset
-\lang english
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-UsesFloatPkg
+_()
\end_layout
\end_inset
+, qui sera remplacée, lorsque LyX produira le résultat LaTeX, par la traduction
+ de son argument dans la langue du document
+\begin_inset Foot
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Pour ceux qui s'intéressent au fonctionnement sous-jacent, la fonction
+\begin_inset Quotes fld
+\end_inset
+
-\lang french
- [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-0
+_()
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
-\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
-\end_inset
+\begin_inset Quotes frd
+\end_inset
+ cache la fonction
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\emph on
-1
+gettext()
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] indique si ce flottant est défini en utilisant le paquetage LaTeX
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-float
+, qui constitue le cœur du mécanisme de traduction de l'interface LyX, et
+ qui est étendue ici à la traduction à la volée de code LaTeX.
\end_layout
\end_inset
-, soit par la classe de document ou par un paquetage, soit à la volée par
- LyX.
+.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Standard
-Notez que la définition d'un flottant de type
+La directive
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\emph on
-type
+BabelPreamble
\end_layout
\end_inset
- implique la déclaration du compteur correspondant de nom
+ est plus compliquée, car elle fournit une fonctionnalité adaptée aux documents
+ multilingues et propose par conséquent une interface pour le paquetage
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\emph on
-type
-\end_layout
-
-\end_inset
-
-.
+babel
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Subsection
-
-\lang english
-Inserts flexibles et InsetLayout
-\begin_inset CommandInset label
-LatexCommand label
-name "sub:Flex-insets-and"
-
\end_inset
-
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Standard
-Les inserts flexibles sont de trois sortes:
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Itemize
-styles de caractères (
+ Son contenu sera ajouté au préambule une fois pour chaque langue utilisée
+ par le document.
+ Dans ce cas, l'argument de
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-CharStyle
+_()
\end_layout
\end_inset
-): ceux-ci définissent un balisage sémantique correspondant à des commandes
- LaTeX telles que
+ sera remplacé par sa traduction dans le langage en question: l'expression
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-
-\backslash
-noun
+$$lang
\end_layout
\end_inset
- et
+ est remplacée par le nom de la langue (telle qu'il est connu de
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-
-\backslash
-code
+babel
\end_layout
\end_inset
-.
+).
+
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Itemize
-définis par l'utilisateur (
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
+\begin_layout Standard
+Un document en allemand qui inclut aussi un paragraphe en français aura
+ donc ceci dans le préambule:
+\end_layout
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
\lang english
-Custom
-\end_layout
+\backslash
+addto
+\backslash
+captionsfrench{
+\backslash
+renewcommand{
+\backslash
+claimname}{Affirmation}}
+\begin_inset Newline newline
\end_inset
-): ceux-ci permettent de définir des inserts repliables personnalisés, similaire
-s au code TeX, aux notes de bas de page, etc.
- Un exemple évident est l'insert de note en fin de document, défini dans
- le module
+
+\backslash
+addto
+\backslash
+captionsngerman{
+\backslash
+renewcommand{
+\backslash
+claimname}{Behauptung}}
+\begin_inset Newline newline
+\end_inset
+
+
+\backslash
+providecommand{
+\backslash
+claimname}{Behauptung}
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Standard
+LaTeX et
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-endnote
+babel
\end_layout
\end_inset
-.
+ vont alors conspirer pour créer le texte correct dans le résultat imprimable.
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Itemize
-
-\lang english
-éléments XML (
+\begin_layout Standard
+Un point important à noter est que les traductions sont celles qui sont
+ fournies par LyX lui-même, via le mécanisme d'internationalisation de l'interfa
+ce utilisateur.
+ Ceci signifie que
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-Element
+LangPreamble
\end_layout
\end_inset
-): à utiliser avec les classes DocBook.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Standard
-Les inserts flexibles sont définis en utilisant la directive
+ et
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
+BabelPreamble
+\end_layout
-\lang english
-InsetLayout
+\end_inset
+
+ ne sont effectifs que dans les fichiers de format fournis avec LyX, puisque
+ les fichiers de format créés par l'utilisateur ne seront pas explorés par
+ les fonction d'internationalisation.
+ Ceci dit, tout fichier de format créé dans le but d'être distribué avec
+ LyX doit inclure ces directives s'il y a lieu.
\end_layout
+\begin_layout Subsection
+Flottants
+\begin_inset CommandInset label
+LatexCommand label
+name "sub:Flottants"
+
\end_inset
-, qui va être expliquée dans la suite.
+
\end_layout
\begin_layout Standard
-La directive
+Il faut définir les flottants (
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-InsetLayout
+figure
\end_layout
\end_inset
- a une autre fonction: elle permet de personnaliser le style de différents
- types d'inserts.
- Actuellement,
+,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-InsetLayout
+tableau
\end_layout
\end_inset
- permet de personnaliser les paramètres de style pour les notes de bas de
- page, les notes en marge, les inserts de note, les inserts de code TeX
- (ERT), les branches, les listings, les index, les boîtes, les tables, les
- algorithmes, les URL et les arguments facultatifs, aussi bien que de définir
- des inserts flexibles.
+\SpecialChar \ldots{}
+) dans la classe elle-même.
+ Si vous cherchez à savoir comment mettre à jour une classe déjà existante,
+ il suffit probablement que vous ajoutiez
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+Input stdfloats.inc
\end_layout
\begin_layout Standard
-La définition d'un
-\begin_inset Flex Code
+à un endroit raisonnable dans la classe
+\begin_inset Foot
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+N'oubliez pas de jeter aussi un
+\begin_inset ERT
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-\lang english
-InsetLayout
+
+\backslash
+oe{}
\end_layout
\end_inset
- doit commencer par une lignes de la forme:
+il sur les compteurs dans la section suivante.
\end_layout
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
+\end_inset
-\lang english
-InsetLayout <type>
+.
+ Si vous voulez implémenter une classe de texte qui propose un nouveau type
+ de flottant (comme la classe AGU fournie avec LyX), les explications ci-dessous
+ vont sans doute vous être utiles :
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Standard
-Ici
+\begin_layout Description
+
+\lang english
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-<type>
+Extension
\end_layout
\end_inset
- indique l'insert dont le style doit être défini, et il y a deux cas.
-\end_layout
-\begin_layout Enumerate
-Le style d'un insert préexistant doit être modifié.
- Dans ce cas, peuvent être
+\family typewriter
+\lang french
+
+\family default
+[
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-<type>
+chaîne
\end_layout
\end_inset
- un quelconque des éléments suivants:
+] définit le suffixe d'un fichier auxiliaire contenant la liste des flottants
+ de ce type.
+ LaTeX écrit les légendes dans ce fichier.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
+
+\lang english
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-Algorithm
+GuiName
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+
+\lang french
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-Branch
+chaîne
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+] définit la chaîne de caractères qui se trouvera dans les menus et également
+ dans la légende.
+ Ceci est traduit dans le langage courant si
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-Box
+babel
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
-\begin_inset Newline newline
-\end_inset
+ est utilisé.
+\end_layout
+\begin_layout Description
+\lang english
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-Box:shaded
+HTML*
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
+\lang french
+ sont utilisées avec l'exportation XHTML.
+ Voir
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:Styles-de-paragraphe-XHTML"
-\lang english
-ERT
+\end_inset
+
+.
\end_layout
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout Description
-,
+\lang english
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-Figure
+IsPredefined
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+
+\lang french
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-\lang english
-Foot
+\emph on
+0
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-Index
+1
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+] indique si le flottant est déjà défini dans la classe de document ou s'il
+ faut charger le paquetage LaTeX
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-Info
+float
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+ pour le définir à la volée.
+ La valeur implicite est
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-Info:menu
+0
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+ qui signifie: utiliser
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-Info:shortcut
+float
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+.
+ Elle doit être positionnée sur
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-Info:shortcuts
+1
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-Listings
+ si le flottant est déjà défini par la classe de document.
\end_layout
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout Description
-,
+\lang english
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-Marginal
+ListCommand
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+
+\lang french
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-Note:Comment
+chaîne
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
+] détermine la commande utilisée pour engendrer une liste de flottants du
+ type considéré; le
+\begin_inset Quotes fld
+\end_inset
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-\lang english
-Note:Note
-\end_layout
+\backslash
+\begin_inset Quotes frd
\end_inset
-,
+ initial doit être omis.
+ Cette directive
+\emph on
+doit
+\emph default
+ être utilisée si
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-Note:Greyedout
+UsesFloatPkg
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+ est faux, puisqu'il n'y a alors pas de procédure pour activer cette commande.
+ La directive est ignorée si
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-OptArg
+UsesFloatPkg
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+ est vrai, puisqu'il y a alors une procédure.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
+
+\lang english
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-Table
+ListName
\end_layout
\end_inset
-, ou
+
+\lang french
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-URL
+chaîne
\end_layout
\end_inset
-.
-
+] fixe le titre utilisé pour une liste des flottants du type considéré (figures,
+ tableaux, etc.).
+ Il est utilisé pour l'étiquette à l'écran dans LyX; il est passé à LaTeX
+ pour être utilisé comme titre, et il est également utilisé comme titre
+ dans l'exportation XHTML.
+ Il sera traduit dans le langage du document.
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Enumerate
-Le style d'un insert flexible doit être défini.
- Dans ce cas,
+\begin_layout Description
+
+\lang english
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-<type>
+NumberWithin
\end_layout
\end_inset
- doit être de la forme
+
+\lang french
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Flex:<nom>
+chaîne
\end_layout
\end_inset
-, où
+] (paramètre facultatif) détermine si les flottants de cette classe seront
+ numérotés en suivant un type de section du document.
+ Par exemple, si
+\lang english
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-nom
+
+\lang english
+NumberWithin
\end_layout
\end_inset
- peut être n'importe quel identificateur valide qui n'est pas utilisé dans
- un insert existant.
- L'identificateur peut inclure des espaces, mais alors il faut enclore l'ensembl
-e entre apostrophes.
- Noter que la définition d'un insert flexible
-\emph on
-doit
-\emph default
- aussi inclure une entrée
+
+\lang french
+ es
+\begin_inset Quotes fld
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-LyXType
+chapter
\end_layout
\end_inset
-, précisant quel est le type d'insert qu'il définit.
+
+\begin_inset Quotes frd
+\end_inset
+
+, les flottants seront numérotés chapitre par chapitre.
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Standard
-La définition d'un
+\begin_layout Description
+
+\lang english
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-InsetLayout
+Placement
\end_layout
\end_inset
- peut inclure les entrées suivantes:
+
+\lang french
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+chaîne
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
+\end_inset
-\lang english
+] définit le placement implicite pour cette catégorie de flottants.
+ C'est comme en LaTeX standard :
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-BgColor
+t
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
+,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-<name>
+b
\end_layout
\end_inset
+,
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+p
+\end_layout
-\lang french
-] définit la couleur d'arrière-plan de l'insert.
-
-\lang english
-See chapter
-\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
+ et
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\begin_inset CommandInset ref
-LatexCommand ref
-reference "chap:Names-of-colors"
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+h
+\end_layout
\end_inset
- for a list of the available color names.
+ pour haut, bas, page et ici respectivement
+\begin_inset Foot
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Notez que l'ordre dans lequel vous mettez ces lettres est sans importance,
+ comme en LaTeX.
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
+\end_inset
-\lang english
+.
+ En plus vous avez un nouveau type,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-ContentAsLabel
+H
\end_layout
\end_inset
+, qui ne correspond pas vraiment à un flottant, car il signifie de le positionne
+r
+\begin_inset Quotes fld
+\end_inset
-\lang french
- [
+ici
+\begin_inset Quotes frd
+\end_inset
+
+ et nulle part ailleurs.
+ Notez cependant que le type
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\emph on
-0
+H
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
-\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+ est spécial et, à cause de détails d'implantation, ne peut pas être utilisé
+ avec des flottants non définis dans la classe de document.
+ Si vous n'avez pas compris tout ce baratin, mettez simplement
+\family typewriter
+
+\begin_inset Quotes fld
\end_inset
+\family default
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-1
+tbp
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] indique s'il faut utiliser le contenu de l'insert comme une étiquette,
- quand l'insert est fermé.
- Valeur implicite: faux.
+
+\family typewriter
+
+\begin_inset Quotes frd
+\end_inset
+
+
+\family default
+.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-CopyStyle
+RefPrefix
\end_layout
\end_inset
+
+\lang french
[
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-<type>
+chaîne
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
-\lang french
-]
-\lang english
-As with paragraph styles, see sec
-\lang french
-.
-\begin_inset space ~
+] détermine le préfixe à utiliser lors de la création d'étiquettes référant
+ les flottants du type considéré.
+ Ceci permet l'utilisation de références mises en forme.
+ Notez que vous pouvez supprimer tout préfixe défini en copiant un style
+ en utilisant la valeur spécifique
+\begin_inset Quotes fld
\end_inset
-
-\begin_inset CommandInset ref
-LatexCommand ref
-reference "sub:Styles-de-paragraphe"
-
-\end_inset
-
-.
-
-\lang english
-Note that you need to specify the complete type, e.
-\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
-\end_inset
-
-g.
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-CopyStyle Flex:<name>
-\end_layout
-
+OFF
+\begin_inset Quotes frd
\end_inset
-.
+, qui doit être en capitales.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-CustomPars
+Style
\end_layout
\end_inset
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\emph on
-0
+chaîne
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
-\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
-\end_inset
-
-
+] fixe le style utilisé quand on définit le flottant avec
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-1
-\end_layout
-
-\end_inset
-] indique si l'utilisateur peut utiliser le dialogue
-\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Édition\SpecialChar \menuseparator
-Paramètres de paragraphe
+\backslash
+newfloat
\end_layout
\end_inset
- pour personnaliser le paragraphe.
+.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-Decoration
+Type
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
+
\lang french
-peut être
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-Classic
+chaîne
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+] définit le
+\begin_inset Quotes fld
+\end_inset
+
+type
+\begin_inset Quotes frd
+\end_inset
+
+ de la nouvelle classe de flottants, comme
+\begin_inset Quotes fld
+\end_inset
+
+program
+\begin_inset Quotes frd
+\end_inset
+
+ ou
+\begin_inset Quotes fld
+\end_inset
+
+algorithm
+\begin_inset Quotes frd
+\end_inset
+
+.
+ Après l'instruction
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-\lang english
-Minimalistic
+\backslash
+newfloat
\end_layout
\end_inset
-, ou
+ appropriée, vous disposez de commandes comme
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-\lang english
-Conglomerate
+\backslash
+begin{program}
\end_layout
\end_inset
-, décrivant l'appa\SpecialChar \-
-rence du cadre et des boutons de l'insert.
- les notes de bas de page utilisent en général
+ ou
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-\lang english
-Classic
+\backslash
+end{algorithm*}
\end_layout
\end_inset
-, les insert des code TeX
+.
+ Noter que définir un flottant de type
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-Minimalistic
+type
\end_layout
\end_inset
-, et les styles de caractères
+ définit automatiquement les compteur correspondant, de nom
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-Conglomerate
+type
\end_layout
\end_inset
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-Display
+UsesFloatPkg
\end_layout
\end_inset
\end_inset
-] n'est utilisé que lorsque
+] indique si ce flottant est défini en utilisant le paquetage LaTeX
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LatexType
+float
\end_layout
\end_inset
- vaut
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Environment
+, soit par la classe de document ou par un paquetage, soit à la volée par
+ LyX.
\end_layout
-\end_inset
-
-.
- Indique si l'environnement se trouvera à part dans le résultat imprimable
- ou bien apparaîtra inclus dans le texte environnant.
- S'il est positionné à faux, on suppose que l'environnement LaTeX ignore
- les espaces (avec un caractère retour ligne inclus) après les balises
+\begin_layout Standard
+Notez que la définition d'un flottant de type
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-\backslash
-begin{
\emph on
-LatexName
-\emph default
-}
+type
\end_layout
\end_inset
- et
+ implique la déclaration du compteur correspondant de nom
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-\backslash
-end{
\emph on
-LatexName
-\emph default
-}
+type
\end_layout
\end_inset
.
- Valeur implicite: vrai.
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
+\begin_layout Subsection
\lang english
-End
-\end_layout
+Inserts flexibles et InsetLayout
+\lang french
+
+\begin_inset CommandInset label
+LatexCommand label
+name "sub:Flex-insets-and"
\end_inset
- est requis pour fermer la déclaration d'un
-\lang english
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Standard
+Les inserts flexibles sont de trois sortes:
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Itemize
+styles de caractères (
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-InsetLayout
+CharStyle
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
-\lang french
-.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
+): ceux-ci définissent un balisage sémantique correspondant à des commandes
+ LaTeX telles que
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-Font
+
+\backslash
+noun
\end_layout
\end_inset
- définit la police utilisée pour le texte du corps de l'insert
-\emph on
-et
-\emph default
- pour le marqueur.
- Voir la section
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
+ et
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
-\begin_inset CommandInset ref
-LatexCommand ref
-reference "sub:polices"
+\lang english
+
+\backslash
+code
+\end_layout
\end_inset
.
- Noter qu'en définissant cette police on définit aussi automatiquement
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Itemize
+définis par l'utilisateur (
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-LabelFont
+Custom
\end_layout
\end_inset
- avec la même valeur.
- Il faut donc définir celle-ci d'abord pour fixer
+): ceux-ci permettent de définir des inserts repliables personnalisés, similaire
+s au code TeX, aux notes de bas de page, etc.
+ Un exemple évident est l'insert de note en fin de document, défini dans
+ le module
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-LabelFont
+endnote
\end_layout
\end_inset
- différemment.
+.
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
+\begin_layout Itemize
\lang english
+éléments XML (
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-ForceLTR
+Element
\end_layout
\end_inset
+): à utiliser avec les classes DocBook.
+\end_layout
-\lang french
- [
+\begin_layout Standard
+Les inserts flexibles sont définis en utilisant la directive
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-\emph on
-0
+\lang english
+InsetLayout
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
-\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
-\end_inset
-
+, qui va être expliquée dans la suite.
+\end_layout
+\begin_layout Standard
+La directive
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-1
+
+\lang english
+InsetLayout
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] impose le langage
-\begin_inset Quotes fld
-\end_inset
+ a une autre fonction: elle permet de personnaliser le style de différents
+ types d'inserts.
+ Actuellement,
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-latex
-\begin_inset Quotes frd
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
-, conduisant à un résultat de gauche à droite (Left-to-Right, latin), e.
-\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
-\end_inset
+\lang english
+InsetLayout
+\end_layout
-g.
-\begin_inset space \space{}
\end_inset
-en code TeX ou dans un URL.
- Une verrue.
+ permet de personnaliser les paramètres de style pour les notes de bas de
+ page, les notes en marge, les inserts de note, les inserts de code TeX
+ (ERT), les branches, les listings, les index, les boîtes, les tables, les
+ algorithmes, les URL et les arguments facultatifs, aussi bien que de définir
+ des inserts flexibles.
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
-
-\lang english
+\begin_layout Standard
+La définition d'un
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-ForcePlain
+InsetLayout
\end_layout
\end_inset
+ doit commencer par une lignes de la forme:
+\end_layout
-\lang french
- [
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+
+\lang english
+InsetLayout <type>
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Standard
+Ici
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-\emph on
-0
+\lang english
+<type>
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
-\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
-\end_inset
-
+ indique l'insert dont le style doit être défini, et il y a deux cas.
+\end_layout
+\begin_layout Enumerate
+Le style d'un insert préexistant doit être modifié.
+ Dans ce cas, peuvent être
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-1
+
+\lang english
+<type>
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] indique si
+ un quelconque des éléments suivants:
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-PlainLayout
+Algorithm
\end_layout
\end_inset
- doit être utilisé, ou bien si l'utilisateur peut modifier le style de paragraph
-e utilisé dans l'insert.
- Valeur implicite: faux.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
-
-\lang english
+,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-FreeSpacing
+Branch
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
-\lang french
- [
+,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-\emph on
-0
+\lang english
+Box
\end_layout
\end_inset
,
-\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\begin_inset Newline newline
\end_inset
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-1
-\end_layout
-
-\end_inset
-]
\lang english
-As with paragraph styles, see sec
-\lang french
-.
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-
-\begin_inset CommandInset ref
-LatexCommand ref
-reference "sub:Styles-de-paragraphe"
-
-\end_inset
-
-.
+Box:shaded
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
+\end_inset
-\lang english
+,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-HTML*
-\end_layout
-
-\end_inset
+\lang english
+ERT
+\end_layout
-\lang french
- sont utilisées avec l'exportation XHTML.
- Voir
-\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
+,
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\begin_inset CommandInset ref
-LatexCommand ref
-reference "sub:Styles-de-paragraphe-XHTML"
-
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
-.
+\lang english
+Figure
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
+\end_inset
-\lang english
+,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-InToc
+Foot
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
-\lang french
- [
+,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-\emph on
-0
+\lang english
+Index
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
-\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
-\end_inset
-
-
+,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-1
+
+\lang english
+Info
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] indique s'il faut inclure le contenu de cet insert dans les chaînes créées
- pour le panneau
-\begin_inset Quotes fld
-\end_inset
+,
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-Plan
-\begin_inset Quotes frd
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
-.
- L'utilisateur ne voudra pas, par exemple, que le contenu d'une note de
- bas de page dans un titre de section soit incluse dans la tables des matières
- affichée dans le plan, mais voudra habituellement voir affiché le contenu
- d'un style de caractère.
- Valeur implicite; faux, pas d'inclusion.
+\lang english
+Info:menu
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
+\end_inset
-\lang english
+,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-KeepEmpty
+Info:shortcut
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
-\lang french
- [
+,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-\emph on
-0
+\lang english
+Info:shortcuts
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
-\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
-\end_inset
-
-
+,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-1
-\end_layout
-
-\end_inset
-]
\lang english
-As with paragraph styles, see sec
-\lang french
-.
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-
-\begin_inset CommandInset ref
-LatexCommand ref
-reference "sub:Styles-de-paragraphe"
-
-\end_inset
-
-.
+Listings
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
+\end_inset
-\lang english
+,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-LabelFont
+Marginal
\end_layout
\end_inset
+,
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\lang french
- définit la police utilisée pour le marqueur.
- Voir la section
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
-\begin_inset CommandInset ref
-LatexCommand ref
-reference "sub:polices"
+\lang english
+Note:Comment
+\end_layout
\end_inset
-.
- Noter que cette directive ne peut jamais apparaître avant
+,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-Font
+Note:Note
\end_layout
\end_inset
-, sinon elle sera sans effet.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
-
-\lang english
+,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-LabelString
+Note:Greyedout
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
-\lang french
- [
+,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-chaîne
+
+\lang english
+OptArg
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] définit la chaîne de caractères qui apparaîtra sur le bouton ou ailleurs
- en tant que marquer d'insert.
- Quelques types d'inserts (
+,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-code TeX
+Table
\end_layout
\end_inset
- et
+, ou
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Branche
+
+\lang english
+URL
\end_layout
\end_inset
-) modifient ce marqueur à la volée.
+.
+
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
-
-\lang english
+\begin_layout Enumerate
+Le style d'un insert flexible doit être défini.
+ Dans ce cas,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-LatexName
+<type>
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
-\lang french
- [
+ doit être de la forme
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-<nom>
+Flex:<nom>
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] définit le nom du code LaTeX correspondant, soit un environnement, soit
- une commande.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
-
-\lang english
+, où
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-LatexParam
+nom
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
-\lang french
- [
+ peut être n'importe quel identificateur valide qui n'est pas utilisé dans
+ un insert existant.
+ L'identificateur peut inclure des espaces, mais alors il faut enclore l'ensembl
+e entre apostrophes.
+ Noter que la définition d'un insert flexible
+\emph on
+doit
+\emph default
+ aussi inclure une entrée
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-<paramètre>
+
+\lang english
+LyXType
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] définit le paramètre facultatif pour le
+, précisant quel est le type d'insert qu'il définit.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Standard
+La définition d'un
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-LatexName
+InsetLayout
\end_layout
\end_inset
- correspondant, y compris des paires de crochets
+ peut inclure les entrées suivantes:
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
+
+\lang english
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-[]
+BgColor
\end_layout
\end_inset
-.
- Ce paramètre ne peut pas être modifié depuis LyX.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
-
-\lang english
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-LatexType
+<name>
\end_layout
-\end_inset
-
- As with paragraph styles, see sec
-\lang french
-.
-\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
+\lang french
+] définit la couleur d'arrière-plan de l'insert.
+
+\lang english
+See
+\lang french
+
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
LatexCommand ref
-reference "sub:Styles-de-paragraphe"
+reference "chap:Names-of-colors"
\end_inset
-.
+
+\lang english
+for a list of the available color names.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-LyxType
+ContentAsLabel
\end_layout
\end_inset
\lang french
- peut être
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-\lang english
-charstyle
+\emph on
+0
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-custom
+1
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-element
+] indique s'il faut utiliser le contenu de l'insert comme une étiquette,
+ quand l'insert est fermé.
+ Valeur implicite: faux.
\end_layout
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout Description
-, ou
+\lang english
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-end
+CopyStyle
\end_layout
\end_inset
- (indiquant une définition vide terminant les définitions de styles de caractère
-s, etc).
- Cette entrée est requise dans les inserts flexibles et n'est significative
- que là.
- Parmi d'autres choses, elle détermine dans quel menu cet insert va apparaître.
- Fixer
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LyXType
-\end_layout
-
-\end_inset
- à
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-charstyle
+\lang english
+<type>
\end_layout
\end_inset
- positionnera
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-MultiPar
-\end_layout
+\lang french
+]
+\lang english
+As with paragraph styles, see
+\lang french
+
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:Styles-de-paragraphe"
\end_inset
- à faux.
+.
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-MultiPar
-\end_layout
-
+\lang english
+Note that you need to specify the complete type, e.
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
- peut être positionné à vrai pour les inserts
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-charstyle
-\end_layout
-
+g.
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
-, en le positionnant
-\emph on
-après
-\emph default
- avoir fixé
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LyXType
+
+\lang english
+CopyStyle Flex:<name>
\end_layout
\end_inset
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-MultiPar
+CustomPars
\end_layout
\end_inset
\end_inset
-] indique si plusieurs paragraphes sont autorisés dans cet insert.
- Ceci positionnera aussi
-\begin_inset Flex Code
+] indique si l'utilisateur peut utiliser le dialogue
+\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-CustomPars
+Édition\SpecialChar \menuseparator
+Paramètres de paragraphe
\end_layout
\end_inset
- à la même valeur et
+ pour personnaliser le paragraphe.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
+
+\lang english
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-ForcePlain
+Decoration
\end_layout
\end_inset
- à la valeur opposée.
- Ceux-ci peuvent être repositionnés s'ils sont utilisés
-\emph on
-après
-\emph default
+\lang french
+peut être
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-MultiPar
+Classic
\end_layout
\end_inset
-.
- Valeur implicite: vrai.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
-
-\lang english
+,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-NeedProtect
+Minimalistic
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
-\lang french
- [
+, ou
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-\emph on
-0
+\lang english
+Conglomerate
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
-\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
-\end_inset
+, décrivant l'appa\SpecialChar \-
+rence du cadre et des boutons de l'insert.
+ les notes de bas de page utilisent en général
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+\lang english
+Classic
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+, les insert des code TeX
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-1
+
+\lang english
+Minimalistic
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] indique si les commandes fragiles de cet insert doivent êtres protégées
- par
+, et les styles de caractères
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-
-\backslash
-protect
+Conglomerate
\end_layout
\end_inset
- (Note: ceci ne dit
-\emph on
-rien
-\emph default
- sur le fait que la commande elle-même doive être protégée).
- Valeur implicite: faux.
+.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-ParbreakIsNewline
+Display
\end_layout
\end_inset
\lang french
[
-\family typewriter
-\emph on
-
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
-
-\family default
-\emph default
,
\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
-\family typewriter
-
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\emph on
1
\end_layout
\end_inset
+] n'est utilisé que lorsque
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+LatexType
+\end_layout
-\family default
-]
-\lang english
-As with paragraph styles, see sec
-\lang french
-.
-\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
+ vaut
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\begin_inset CommandInset ref
-LatexCommand ref
-reference "sub:Styles-de-paragraphe"
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Environment
+\end_layout
\end_inset
.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
-
-\lang english
+ Indique si l'environnement se trouvera à part dans le résultat imprimable
+ ou bien apparaîtra inclus dans le texte environnant.
+ S'il est positionné à faux, on suppose que l'environnement LaTeX ignore
+ les espaces (avec un caractère retour ligne inclus) après les balises
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-\lang english
-PassThru
+\backslash
+begin{
+\emph on
+LatexName
+\emph default
+}
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
-\lang french
- [
-\family typewriter
-\emph on
-
+ et
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-0
-\end_layout
-\end_inset
-
-
-\family default
+\backslash
+end{
+\emph on
+LatexName
\emph default
-,
-\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
-\end_inset
+}
+\end_layout
+\end_inset
-\family typewriter
+.
+ Valeur implicite: vrai.
+\end_layout
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-1
+
+\lang english
+End
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
-\family default
-]
+ est requis pour fermer la déclaration d'un
\lang english
-As with paragraph styles, see sec
-\lang french
-.
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\begin_inset CommandInset ref
-LatexCommand ref
-reference "sub:Styles-de-paragraphe"
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
+InsetLayout
+\end_layout
\end_inset
+
+\lang french
.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
-
-\lang english
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-Preamble
+Font
\end_layout
\end_inset
- As with paragraph styles, see sec
-\lang french
-.
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-
+ définit la police utilisée pour le texte du corps de l'insert
+\emph on
+et
+\emph default
+ pour le marqueur.
+ Voir la
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
LatexCommand ref
-reference "sub:Styles-de-paragraphe"
+reference "sub:polices"
\end_inset
.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
-
-\lang english
+ Noter qu'en définissant cette police on définit aussi automatiquement
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-RefPrefix
+LabelFont
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
-\lang french
- [
+ avec la même valeur.
+ Il faut donc définir celle-ci d'abord pour fixer
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-chaîne
+
+\lang english
+LabelFont
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] indique le préfixe à utiliser pour créer des étiquettes référant les paragraph
-es de ce type.
- Ceci permet l'utilisation de références mises en forme.
+ différemment.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-Requires
+ForceLTR
\end_layout
\end_inset
\lang french
-
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-[chaîne]
+
+\emph on
+0
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
-\lang english
-As with paragraph styles, see sec
-\lang french
-.
-\begin_inset space ~
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
-\begin_inset CommandInset ref
-LatexCommand ref
-reference "sub:Styles-de-paragraphe"
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+1
+\end_layout
\end_inset
-.
+] impose le langage
+\begin_inset Quotes fld
+\end_inset
+
+latex
+\begin_inset Quotes frd
+\end_inset
+
+, conduisant à un résultat de gauche à droite (Left-to-Right, latin), e.
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+g.
+\begin_inset space \space{}
+\end_inset
+
+en code TeX ou dans un URL.
+ Une verrue.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-ResetsFont
+ForcePlain
\end_layout
\end_inset
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\emph on
0
\end_layout
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\emph on
1
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] indique si l'insert doit utiliser la police de caractères environnante
- ou bien utiliser la sienne propre.
- Valeur implicite; vrai, utiliser sa propre police.
+] indique si
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
+PlainLayout
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ doit être utilisé, ou bien si l'utilisateur peut modifier le style de paragraph
+e utilisé dans l'insert.
+ Valeur implicite: faux.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-Spellcheck
+FreeSpacing
\end_layout
\end_inset
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\emph on
0
\end_layout
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\emph on
1
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] active le correcteur orthographique sur le contenu de cet insert.
- Valeur implicite; vrai.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Subsection
-Compteurs
-\begin_inset CommandInset label
-LatexCommand label
-name "sub:Compteurs"
+]
+\lang english
+As with paragraph styles, see
+\lang french
+
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:Styles-de-paragraphe"
\end_inset
-
+.
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Standard
-Il faut définir les compteurs (
+\begin_layout Description
+
+\lang english
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-chapitre
+HTML*
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-figure
-\end_layout
+\lang french
+ sont utilisées avec l'exportation XHTML.
+ Voir
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:Styles-de-paragraphe-XHTML"
\end_inset
-\SpecialChar \ldots{}
-) dans la classe elle-même.
- Les compteurs standard sont définis dans le fichier
-\lang english
+.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
+\lang english
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-stdcounters.inc
+InToc
\end_layout
\end_inset
\lang french
-.
- Si vous cherchez à savoir comment mettre à jour une classe déjà existante,
- il suffit probablement que vous ajoutiez
-\end_layout
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-Input stdcounters.inc
-\end_layout
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
-\begin_layout Standard
-à un endroit raisonnable dans la classe.
+\emph on
+0
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Standard
-Mais si vous voulez définir des compteurs à votre guise, vous pouvez le
- faire.
- la déclaration d'un compteur doit commencer par
-\end_layout
+\end_inset
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
-\lang english
-Counter
-\lang french
- <nom>
-\end_layout
-\begin_layout Standard
-où
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-<nom>
+1
\end_layout
\end_inset
- est le nom du compteur.
- Et elle doit se terminer par
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-End
-\end_layout
+] indique s'il faut inclure le contenu de cet insert dans les chaînes créées
+ pour le panneau
+\begin_inset Quotes fld
+\end_inset
+Plan
+\begin_inset Quotes frd
\end_inset
.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Standard
-Les paramètres suivants peuvent également être utilisés:
+ L'utilisateur ne voudra pas, par exemple, que le contenu d'une note de
+ bas de page dans un titre de section soit incluse dans la tables des matières
+ affichée dans le plan, mais voudra habituellement voir affiché le contenu
+ d'un style de caractère.
+ Valeur implicite; faux, pas d'inclusion.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-LabelString
+KeepEmpty
\end_layout
\end_inset
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-chaîne
+
+\emph on
+0
\end_layout
\end_inset
-=
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
-\end_inset
-
-] définit comment le compteur s'affiche.
- Fixer ce paramètre positionne également
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
+1
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+]
\lang english
-LabelStringAppendix
-\end_layout
+As with paragraph styles, see
+\lang french
+
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:Styles-de-paragraphe"
\end_inset
- à la même valeur.
- Les arguments spécifiques suivants peuvent être utilisés:
+.
\end_layout
-\begin_deeper
-\begin_layout Itemize
+\begin_layout Description
+
+\lang english
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-
-\backslash
-thecounter
+LabelFont
\end_layout
\end_inset
- sera remplacé par l'expansion de
+
+\lang french
+ définit la police utilisée pour le marqueur.
+ Voir la
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:polices"
+
+\end_inset
+
+.
+ Noter que cette directive ne peut jamais apparaître avant
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-LabelString
+Font
\end_layout
\end_inset
- (ou
-\begin_inset Newline newline
-\end_inset
+, sinon elle sera sans effet.
+\end_layout
+\begin_layout Description
+\lang english
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-LabelStringAppendix
+LabelString
\end_layout
\end_inset
-) du compteur
+
+\lang french
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-counter
+chaîne
\end_layout
\end_inset
-.
-
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Itemize
-les valeurs du compteur peuvent être exprimées par des macros à la LaTeX
-
+] définit la chaîne de caractères qui apparaîtra sur le bouton ou ailleurs
+ en tant que marquer d'insert.
+ Quelques types d'inserts (
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-
-\backslash
-
-\emph on
-numbertype
-\emph default
-{
-\emph on
-counter
-\emph default
-}
+code TeX
\end_layout
\end_inset
-, où
+ et
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\emph on
-\lang english
-numbertype
+Branche
\end_layout
\end_inset
- peut être:
+) modifient ce marqueur à la volée.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
+
+\lang english
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-arabic
+LatexName
\end_layout
\end_inset
-: 1, 2, 3,\SpecialChar \ldots{}
-;
+
+\lang french
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-alph
+<nom>
\end_layout
\end_inset
- pour les let tes en bas de casse: a, b, c, \SpecialChar \ldots{}
-;
+] définit le nom du code LaTeX correspondant, soit un environnement, soit
+ une commande.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
+
+\lang english
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-Alph
+LatexParam
\end_layout
\end_inset
- pour les lettres en capitales: A, B, C, \SpecialChar \ldots{}
-;
+
+\lang french
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-roman
+<paramètre>
\end_layout
\end_inset
- pour la numérotation en bas de casse romaine: i, ii, iii, \SpecialChar \ldots{}
-;
+] définit le paramètre facultatif pour le
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-Roman
+LatexName
\end_layout
\end_inset
- pour la numérotation capitale romaine: I, II, III.
-\end_layout
-
-\end_deeper
-\begin_layout Standard
-Si
-\lang english
-
+ correspondant, y compris des paires de crochets
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-LabelString
+[]
\end_layout
\end_inset
+.
+ Ce paramètre ne peut pas être modifié depuis LyX.
+\end_layout
-\lang french
- est indéfini, une valeur implicite est construite comme suit: si le compteur
- a un compteur maître
+\begin_layout Description
+
+\lang english
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-master
+LatexType
\end_layout
\end_inset
- (défini via
+ As with paragraph styles, see
+\lang french
+
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:Styles-de-paragraphe"
+
+\end_inset
+
+.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
+
+\lang english
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-Within
+LyxType
\end_layout
\end_inset
-), la chaîne
-\begin_inset Newline newline
-\end_inset
-
+\lang french
+ peut être
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-
-\backslash
-themaster.
-\backslash
-arabic{counter}
+charstyle
\end_layout
\end_inset
- est utilisée; sinon la chaîne
+,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-
-\backslash
-arabic{counter}
+custom
\end_layout
\end_inset
- est utilisée.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
-
-\lang english
+,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-LabelStringAppendix
+element
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
-\lang french
- [
+, ou
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-chaîne
+
+\lang english
+end
\end_layout
\end_inset
-=
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
-\end_inset
+ (indiquant une définition vide terminant les définitions de styles de caractère
+s, etc).
+ Cette entrée est requise dans les inserts flexibles et n'est significative
+ que là.
+ Parmi d'autres choses, elle détermine dans quel menu cet insert va apparaître.
+ Fixer
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+LyXType
+\end_layout
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
-] est identique à
+ à
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-LabelString
+charstyle
\end_layout
\end_inset
-, mais pour les appendices.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
+ positionnera
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-PrettyFormat
+MultiPar
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
+ à faux.
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-chaîne
+MultiPar
\end_layout
\end_inset
-=
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
-\end_inset
-
-
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
-\end_inset
+ peut être positionné à vrai pour les inserts
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-] définit un format à utiliser pour les références lises en forme utilisant
- ce compteur.
- Par exemple, on peut vouloir que les références aux numéros de section
- apparaissent comme
-\begin_inset Quotes fld
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+charstyle
+\end_layout
-Section
-\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
-2.4
-\begin_inset Quotes frd
-\end_inset
+, en le positionnant
+\emph on
+après
+\emph default
+ avoir fixé
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-.
- La chaîne devra contenir
-\begin_inset Quotes fld
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+LyXType
+\end_layout
-##
-\begin_inset Quotes frd
\end_inset
.
- Ceci sera remplacé par la valeur courante du compteur.
- Ainsi, pour les sections, ce sera: Section ##.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
+
+\lang english
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-Within
+MultiPar
\end_layout
\end_inset
+
+\lang french
[
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-chaîne
+
+\emph on
+0
\end_layout
\end_inset
-=
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
-\end_inset
-
-] contient le nom d'un autre compteur: le compteur actuel sera remis à zéro
- à chaque fois que l'autre augmentera.
- Par exemple,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-sous-section
+1
\end_layout
\end_inset
- est numéroté dans
+] indique si plusieurs paragraphes sont autorisés dans cet insert.
+ Ceci positionnera aussi
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-section
-\end_layout
-
-\end_inset
-.
+\lang english
+CustomPars
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Subsection
-Description de police
-\begin_inset CommandInset label
-LatexCommand label
-name "sub:polices"
-
\end_inset
+ à la même valeur et
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\end_layout
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
-\begin_layout Standard
-Une description de police ressemble à :
+\lang english
+ForcePlain
\end_layout
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-Font
-\family roman
-\emph on
-ou
-\family default
-\emph default
- LabelFont
+\end_inset
+
+ à la valeur opposée.
+ Ceux-ci peuvent être repositionnés s'ils sont utilisés
\emph on
-ou
+après
\emph default
- DefaultFont
-\end_layout
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
- ...
-\end_layout
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-EndFont
+\lang english
+MultiPar
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Standard
-et les commandes suivantes sont disponibles :
+\end_inset
+
+.
+ Valeur implicite: vrai.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
+
+\lang english
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Color
+
+\lang english
+NeedProtect
\end_layout
\end_inset
-\family typewriter
-
-\family default
-[
+\lang french
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\emph on
-none
+0
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-black
+1
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+] indique si les commandes fragiles de cet insert doivent êtres protégées
+ par
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-white
+
+\lang english
+
+\backslash
+protect
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-red
+ (Note: ceci ne dit
+\emph on
+rien
+\emph default
+ sur le fait que la commande elle-même doive être protégée).
+ Valeur implicite: faux.
\end_layout
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout Description
-,
+\lang english
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-green
+
+\lang english
+ParbreakIsNewline
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+
+\lang french
+ [
+\family typewriter
+\emph on
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-blue
+0
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-cyan
-\end_layout
+\family default
+\emph default
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
-,
+
+\family typewriter
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-magenta
+1
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-yellow
-\end_layout
+\family default
+]
+\lang english
+As with paragraph styles, see
+\lang french
+
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:Styles-de-paragraphe"
\end_inset
-]
+.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
+
+\lang english
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Family
+
+\lang english
+PassThru
\end_layout
\end_inset
+
+\lang french
[
+\family typewriter
\emph on
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Roman
+0
\end_layout
\end_inset
+\family default
\emph default
-,
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Sans
-\end_layout
-\end_inset
+\family typewriter
-,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Typewriter
+1
\end_layout
\end_inset
+
+\family default
]
+\lang english
+As with paragraph styles, see
+\lang french
+
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:Styles-de-paragraphe"
+
+\end_inset
+
+.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
+
+\lang english
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Misc
+
+\lang english
+Preamble
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
+ As with paragraph styles, see
+\lang french
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-string
-\end_layout
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:Styles-de-paragraphe"
\end_inset
-] avec les arguments valides suivants:
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-emph
+.
\end_layout
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout Description
-,
+\lang english
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-noun
+
+\lang english
+RefPrefix
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+
+\lang french
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-strikeout
+chaîne
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+] indique le préfixe à utiliser pour créer des étiquettes référant les paragraph
+es de ce type.
+ Ceci permet l'utilisation de références mises en forme.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
+
+\lang english
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-underbar
+
+\lang english
+Requires
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+
+\lang french
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-uuline
+[chaîne]
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
+
+\lang english
+As with paragraph styles, see
+\lang french
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-uwave
-\end_layout
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:Styles-de-paragraphe"
\end_inset
-,
+.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
+
+\lang english
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-no_emph
+
+\lang english
+ResetsFont
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+
+\lang french
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-no_noun
+0
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-no_strikeout
+
+\emph on
+1
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+] indique si l'insert doit utiliser la police de caractères environnante
+ ou bien utiliser la sienne propre.
+ Valeur implicite; vrai, utiliser sa propre police.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
+
+\lang english
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-no_bar
+
+\lang english
+Spellcheck
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+
+\lang french
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-no_uuline
+0
\end_layout
\end_inset
- et
-\begin_inset Newline linebreak
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-no_uwave
+
+\emph on
+1
\end_layout
\end_inset
-.
- Chacun de ceux-ci (dés)active l'attribut correspondant.
-\begin_inset Newline newline
+] active le correcteur orthographique sur le contenu de cet insert.
+ Valeur implicite; vrai.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Subsection
+Compteurs
+\begin_inset CommandInset label
+LatexCommand label
+name "sub:Compteurs"
+
\end_inset
-Par exemple,
+
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Standard
+Il faut définir les compteurs (
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-emph
+chapitre
\end_layout
\end_inset
- active la mise en évidence, et
+,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-no_emph
+figure
\end_layout
\end_inset
- la désactive.
- Si e dernier point vous intrigue, souvenez-vous que le réglage de police
- du contexte courant est généralement hérité du contexte environnant.
- De ce fait,
+\SpecialChar \ldots{}
+) dans la classe elle-même.
+ Les compteurs standard sont définis dans le fichier
+\lang english
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-no_emph
+stdcounters.inc
\end_layout
\end_inset
- désactiverait la mise en évidence qui était active de toutes façons, par
- exemple dans un environnement de théorème.
-
+
+\lang french
+.
+ Si vous cherchez à savoir comment mettre à jour une classe déjà existante,
+ il suffit probablement que vous ajoutiez
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+Input stdcounters.inc
+\end_layout
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Series
+\begin_layout Standard
+à un endroit raisonnable dans la classe.
\end_layout
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout Standard
+Mais si vous voulez définir des compteurs à votre guise, vous pouvez le
+ faire.
+ la déclaration d'un compteur doit commencer par
+\end_layout
- [
-\emph on
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+
+\lang english
+Counter
+\lang french
+ <nom>
+\end_layout
+\begin_layout Standard
+où
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Medium
+<nom>
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
-\emph default
-,
+ est le nom du compteur.
+ Et elle doit se terminer par
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Bold
+
+\lang english
+End
\end_layout
\end_inset
-]
+.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Standard
+Les paramètres suivants peuvent également être utilisés:
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
+
+\lang english
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Shape
+
+\lang english
+LabelString
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
-\emph on
+\lang french
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Up
+chaîne
\end_layout
\end_inset
+=
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
-\emph default
-,
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
+] définit comment le compteur s'affiche.
+ Fixer ce paramètre positionne également
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Italic
+
+\lang english
+LabelStringAppendix
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+ à la même valeur.
+ Les arguments spécifiques suivants peuvent être utilisés:
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_deeper
+\begin_layout Itemize
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-SmallCaps
+
+\lang english
+
+\backslash
+thecounter
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+ sera remplacé par l'expansion de
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Slanted
+
+\lang english
+LabelString
\end_layout
\end_inset
-]
-\end_layout
+ (ou
+\begin_inset Newline newline
+\end_inset
+
-\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Size
+
+\lang english
+LabelStringAppendix
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
+) du compteur
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-tiny
+
+\lang english
+counter
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+.
+
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Itemize
+les valeurs du compteur peuvent être exprimées par des macros à la LaTeX
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-small
+
+\lang english
+
+\backslash
+
+\emph on
+numbertype
+\emph default
+{
+\emph on
+counter
+\emph default
+}
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+, où
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\emph on
-normal
+\lang english
+numbertype
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+ peut être:
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-large
+
+\lang english
+arabic
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+: 1, 2, 3,\SpecialChar \ldots{}
+;
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-larger
+
+\lang english
+alph
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+ pour les let tes en bas de casse: a, b, c, \SpecialChar \ldots{}
+;
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-largest
+
+\lang english
+Alph
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+ pour les lettres en capitales: A, B, C, \SpecialChar \ldots{}
+;
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-huge
+
+\lang english
+roman
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+ pour la numérotation en bas de casse romaine: i, ii, iii, \SpecialChar \ldots{}
+;
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-giant
-\end_layout
-
-\end_inset
-]
+\lang english
+Roman
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Subsection
-Description d'une insertion de citation
-\begin_inset CommandInset label
-LatexCommand label
-name "sub:Description citation"
-
\end_inset
-
+ pour la numérotation capitale romaine: I, II, III.
\end_layout
+\end_deeper
\begin_layout Standard
-Les blocs
+Si
+\lang english
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-CiteFormat
+
+\lang english
+LabelString
\end_layout
\end_inset
- servent à décrire comment les citations bibliographiques doivent être affichées
-, à la fois dans LyX (dans la fenêtre de citation et dans les bulles d'aide,
- par exemple) et dans le résultat XHTML.
- Un tel bloc se présente comme suit:
-\end_layout
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
+\lang french
+ est indéfini, une valeur implicite est construite comme suit: si le compteur
+ a un compteur maître
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-CiteFormat
+master
\end_layout
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
+\end_inset
-\lang english
- article ...
-\end_layout
+ (défini via
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
- book ...
+Within
\end_layout
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
+\end_inset
+
+), la chaîne
+\begin_inset Newline newline
+\end_inset
-\lang english
-End
-\end_layout
-\begin_layout Standard
-Les différentes lignes définissent l'affichage de l'information correspondant
- à une article ou à un livre, respectivement, et une telle définition peut
- être créée pour tout type d'entrée apparaissant dans un fichier BibTeX.
- LyX définit un format implicite dans le code source qui sera utilisé si
- aucune définition spécifique n'est fournie.
- LyX prédéfinit plusieurs formats dans le fichier
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-stdciteformats.inc
-\end_layout
-\end_inset
+\lang english
-, qui est inclus dans la plupart des classes de document LyX.
+\backslash
+themaster.
+\backslash
+arabic{counter}
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Standard
-Les définitions utilisent un langage simple qui permet
-\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
-de remplacer les clés BibTeX par leurs valeurs.
- les clés doivent être encloses entre caractères
-\lang english
-
+ est utilisée; sinon la chaîne
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-%
+
+\backslash
+arabic{counter}
\end_layout
\end_inset
-, e.g.:
+ est utilisée.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
+
+\lang english
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-%author%
+LabelStringAppendix
\end_layout
\end_inset
-.
\lang french
- Une définition simple serait par exemple:
-\end_layout
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+chaîne
+\end_layout
-\lang english
-misc %author%,
-\begin_inset Quotes eld
\end_inset
-%title
+=
\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
-.
-\end_layout
-\begin_layout Standard
-Ceci imprimerait le nom de l'auteur, suivi d'une virgule, suivi du titre,
- entre double guillemets, suivi d'un point.
-\end_layout
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
-\begin_layout Standard
-Bine entendu, vous voudrez parfois n'imprimer une clé que si elle existe.
- Ceci est obtenu par une construction conditionnelle, comme:
+] est identique à
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-{%volume%[[vol.
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-%volume%]]}
+\lang english
+LabelString
\end_layout
\end_inset
-.
- Ceci signifie: si la clé
+, mais pour les appendices.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-volume
-\end_layout
-
-\end_inset
- existe, alors imprimer
-\begin_inset Quotes fld
-\end_inset
+\lang english
+PrettyFormat
+\end_layout
-vol.
-\begin_inset Quotes frd
\end_inset
- suivi de la clé volume.
- On peut aussi introduire une clause
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-else
+chaîne
\end_layout
\end_inset
- dans l'expression conditionnelle, comme dans:
-\begin_inset Newline newline
+=
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-{%author%[[%author%]][[%editor%, ed.]]}
-\end_layout
+] définit un format à utiliser pour les références lises en forme utilisant
+ ce compteur.
+ Par exemple, on peut vouloir que les références aux numéros de section
+ apparaissent comme
+\begin_inset Quotes fld
+\end_inset
+Section
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
+2.4
+\begin_inset Quotes frd
+\end_inset
-\begin_inset Newline newline
+.
+ La chaîne devra contenir
+\begin_inset Quotes fld
\end_inset
-Ici, la clé
+##
+\begin_inset Quotes frd
+\end_inset
+
+.
+ Ceci sera remplacé par la valeur courante du compteur.
+ Ainsi, pour les sections, ce sera: Section ##.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-author
+
+\lang english
+Within
\end_layout
\end_inset
- est imprimée si elle existe; sinon la clé
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-editor
+chaîne
\end_layout
\end_inset
- est imprimée, suivi de
-\begin_inset Quotes fld
+=
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
-, ed.
-\begin_inset Quotes frd
+
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
-.
- Noter que la clé est encore enclose entre caractères
+] contient le nom d'un autre compteur: le compteur actuel sera remis à zéro
+ à chaque fois que l'autre augmentera.
+ Par exemple,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-%
+sous-section
\end_layout
\end_inset
-; la clause conditionnelle entière est enclose entre accolades, et les clauses
-
+ est numéroté dans
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-if
+section
\end_layout
\end_inset
- et
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-else
+.
\end_layout
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout Subsection
+Description de police
+\begin_inset CommandInset label
+LatexCommand label
+name "sub:polices"
- sont encloses entre double crochets
-\begin_inset Quotes fld
\end_inset
-[[
-\begin_inset Quotes frd
-\end_inset
- et
-\begin_inset Quotes fld
-\end_inset
+\end_layout
-]]
-\begin_inset Quotes frd
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout Standard
+Une description de police ressemble à :
+\end_layout
-.
- Il ne peut avoir d'espaces entre ces marqueurs.
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+Font
+\family roman
+\emph on
+ou
+\family default
+\emph default
+ LabelFont
+\emph on
+ou
+\emph default
+ DefaultFont
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+ ...
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+EndFont
\end_layout
\begin_layout Standard
-Il existe enfin une autre syntaxe possible dans ces définitions, qui se
- présente comme suit:
+et les commandes suivantes sont disponibles :
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-{!<i>!}
+Color
\end_layout
\end_inset
-.
- Ceci définit une entité d'information utilisée pour créer du
-\begin_inset Quotes fld
-\end_inset
-
-texte enrichi
-\begin_inset Quotes frd
-\end_inset
-.
- De manière évidente, nous ne souhaitons pas exporter des balises HTML en
- écrivant du texte normal, aussi doivent elles être enclose entre
-\begin_inset Quotes fld
-\end_inset
+\family typewriter
+
+\family default
+[
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-{!
-\begin_inset Quotes frd
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
- et
-\begin_inset Quotes fld
-\end_inset
+\emph on
+none
+\end_layout
-!}
-\begin_inset Quotes frd
\end_inset
-.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Standard
-Deux définitions spéciales sont également disponibles dans un bloc
+,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-CiteFormat
-\end_layout
-
-\end_inset
-
- Un exemple de la première définition est celle-ci:
+black
\end_layout
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-!quotetitle
-\begin_inset Quotes eld
-\end_inset
-
-%title%
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
-
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Standard
-Ceci est une abréviation, ou macro-instruction, et peut être employée comme
- une clé:
+,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-%!quotetitle%
+white
\end_layout
\end_inset
-.
- LyX considérera
+,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-%!quotetitle%
+red
\end_layout
\end_inset
- exactement comme s'l s'agissait de sa définition.
- Exprimons par conséquent un
-\emph on
-avertissement
-\emph default
- évident: n'utilisez pas:
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-!funfun %funfun%
-\end_layout
+,
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\begin_layout Standard
-ou similaire.
- LyX ne devrait pas se perdre dans une boucle infinie, mais cela peut prendre
- un moment avant qu'il s'en sorte.
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+green
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Standard
-Le second type de définitions particulières se présente comme ceci:
-\end_layout
+\end_inset
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
+,
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\lang english
-_pptext pp.
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+blue
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Standard
-Ceci définit un segment de texte susceptible de traduction, ce qui permet
- de traduire les parties appropriées de la bibliographie.
- Cette syntaxe peut être inclue dans une définition normale en la considérant
- comme une clé:
+\end_inset
+
+,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-%_pptext%
+cyan
\end_layout
\end_inset
-.
- Plusieurs d'entre elles sont prédéfinies dans
+,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-stdciteformats.inc
+magenta
\end_layout
\end_inset
-.
- Notez bien que ce ne sont pas des macro-instructions, au sens défini ci-dessus:
- elles ne seront pas interprétées.
-\end_layout
+,
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\begin_layout Standard
-Voici donc un exemple utilisant toutes ces fonctionnalités:
-\lang english
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+yellow
+\end_layout
-\begin_inset VSpace defskip
\end_inset
-
+]
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Standard
-\noindent
+\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\family typewriter
-\lang english
-!authoredit {%author%[[%author%, ]][[{%editor%[[%editor%, %_edtext%, ]]}]]}
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Family
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Standard
-
-\lang english
-\begin_inset VSpace defskip
\end_inset
+ [
+\emph on
-\lang french
-Ceci défini une macro qui imprime le nom de l'auteur, suivi d'un virgule,
- si la clé
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-author
+Roman
\end_layout
\end_inset
- existe, ou bien imprime le nom de l'éditeur, suivi de
+
+\emph default
+,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-_edtext
+Sans
\end_layout
\end_inset
- ou de sa traduction (implicitement, apparaîtra
-\begin_inset Quotes fld
-\end_inset
+,
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Typewriter
+\end_layout
-ed.
-\begin_inset Quotes frd
\end_inset
-), si la clé
+]
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-editor
+Misc
\end_layout
\end_inset
- existe.
- Notez que ceci est déjà défini dans
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-stdciteformats.inc
+string
\end_layout
\end_inset
-, vous pouvez donc l'utiliser dans vos propres définitions, ou redéfinitions,
- si vous chargez ce fichier d'abord.
-\end_layout
+] avec les arguments valides suivants:
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\begin_layout Section
-Directives pour l'exportation XHTML
-\begin_inset CommandInset label
-LatexCommand label
-name "sec:Tags-for-XHTML"
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+emph
+\end_layout
\end_inset
+,
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+noun
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Standard
-Comme pour LaTeX ou DocBook, la présentation du résultat HTML créé par LyX
- est déterminé par les informations de format.
- En général, LyX produit une présentation implicite raisonnable, et comme
- indiqué plus haut, il construira même des règles implicites CSS à partir
- des autres directives de format.
- Par exemple, LyX essaiera d'utiliser l'information du bloc
+\end_inset
+
+,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Font
+strikeout
\end_layout
\end_inset
- du style Chapter pour écrire une CSS qui mettra en forme les titres de
- chapitres de manière appropriée.
-\end_layout
+,
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\begin_layout Standard
-Dans de nombreux cas, vous n'aurez donc sans doute rien à faire du tout
- pour obtenir un résultat XHTML acceptable pour vos environnements propres,
- vos inserts personnalisés, et ainsi de suite.
- Mais dans certains cas vous devrez faire quelque chose, et LyX fournit
- par conséquent un certain nombre de directives de format qui peuvent être
- utilisées pour personnaliser le XHTML et les CSS qui sont créés.
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+underbar
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Standard
-Notez qu'il existe deux directives,
+\end_inset
+
+,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-HTMLPreamble
+uuline
\end_layout
\end_inset
- and
+,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-AddToHTMLPreamble
+uwave
\end_layout
\end_inset
-, qui peu\SpecialChar \-
-vent apparaître en dehors des déclarations de style et d'insert.
- Voir
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
+,
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\begin_inset CommandInset ref
-LatexCommand ref
-reference "sub:Paramètres-généraux-d'une"
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+no_emph
+\end_layout
\end_inset
- pour les détails sur celles-ci.
-\end_layout
+,
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\begin_layout Subsection
-Styles de paragraphe
-\begin_inset CommandInset label
-LatexCommand label
-name "sub:Styles-de-paragraphe-XHTML"
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+no_noun
+\end_layout
\end_inset
+,
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+no_strikeout
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Standard
-Le type de XHTML que LyX crée pour un paragraphe dépend s'il s'agit d'un
- paragraphe normal, d'une commande, ou d'un environnement, ce qui est déterminé
- par le contenu de la directive correspondante
+\end_inset
+
+,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LaTeXType
+no_bar
\end_layout
\end_inset
-.
-\end_layout
+,
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\begin_layout Standard
-Pour une commande ou un paragraphe normal, le résultat XHTML a la forme
- suivante:
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+no_uuline
\end_layout
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-
-\lang english
-<tag attr=
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
-value
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
+ et
+\begin_inset Newline linebreak
\end_inset
->
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+no_uwave
\end_layout
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
+\end_inset
-\lang english
-<labeltag attr=
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
+.
+ Chacun de ceux-ci (dés)active l'attribut correspondant.
+\begin_inset Newline newline
\end_inset
-value
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
+Par exemple,
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+emph
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ active la mise en évidence, et
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+no_emph
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ la désactive.
+ Si e dernier point vous intrigue, souvenez-vous que le réglage de police
+ du contexte courant est généralement hérité du contexte environnant.
+ De ce fait,
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
+no_emph
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ désactiverait la mise en évidence qui était active de toutes façons, par
+ exemple dans un environnement de théorème.
+
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Series
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ [
+\emph on
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Medium
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+
+\emph default
+,
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Bold
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+]
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Shape
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ [
+\emph on
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Up
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+
+\emph default
+,
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Italic
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+,
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+SmallCaps
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+,
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Slanted
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+]
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Size
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+tiny
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+,
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+small
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+,
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\emph on
+normal
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+,
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+large
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+,
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+larger
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+,
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+largest
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+,
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+huge
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+,
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+giant
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+]
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Subsection
+Description d'une insertion de citation
+\begin_inset CommandInset label
+LatexCommand label
+name "sub:Description citation"
+
+\end_inset
+
+
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Standard
+Les blocs
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+CiteFormat
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ servent à décrire comment les citations bibliographiques doivent être affichées
+, à la fois dans LyX (dans la fenêtre de citation et dans les bulles d'aide,
+ par exemple) et dans le résultat XHTML.
+ Un tel bloc se présente comme suit:
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+
+\lang english
+CiteFormat
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+
+\lang english
+ article ...
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+
+\lang english
+ book ...
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+
+\lang english
+End
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Standard
+Les différentes lignes définissent l'affichage de l'information correspondant
+ à une article ou à un livre, respectivement, et une telle définition peut
+ être créée pour tout type d'entrée apparaissant dans un fichier BibTeX.
+ LyX définit un format implicite dans le code source qui sera utilisé si
+ aucune définition spécifique n'est fournie.
+ LyX prédéfinit plusieurs formats dans le fichier
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+stdciteformats.inc
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+, qui est inclus dans la plupart des classes de document LyX.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Standard
+Les définitions utilisent un langage simple qui permet
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+de remplacer les clés BibTeX par leurs valeurs.
+ les clés doivent être encloses entre caractères
+\lang english
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
+%
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+, e.g.:
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
+%author%
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+.
+
+\lang french
+ Une définition simple serait par exemple:
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+
+\lang english
+misc %author%,
+\begin_inset Quotes eld
+\end_inset
+
+%title
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
+.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Standard
+Ceci imprimerait le nom de l'auteur, suivi d'une virgule, suivi du titre,
+ entre double guillemets, suivi d'un point.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Standard
+Bine entendu, vous voudrez parfois n'imprimer une clé que si elle existe.
+ Ceci est obtenu par une construction conditionnelle, comme:
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+{%volume%[[vol.
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+%volume%]]}
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+.
+ Ceci signifie: si la clé
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+volume
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ existe, alors imprimer
+\begin_inset Quotes fld
+\end_inset
+
+vol.
+\begin_inset Quotes frd
+\end_inset
+
+ suivi de la clé volume.
+ On peut aussi introduire une clause
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+else
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ dans l'expression conditionnelle, comme dans:
+\begin_inset Newline newline
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+{%author%[[%author%]][[%editor%, ed.]]}
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset Newline newline
+\end_inset
+
+Ici, la clé
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+author
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ est imprimée si elle existe; sinon la clé
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+editor
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ est imprimée, suivi de
+\begin_inset Quotes fld
+\end_inset
+
+, ed.
+\begin_inset Quotes frd
+\end_inset
+
+.
+ Noter que la clé est encore enclose entre caractères
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+%
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+; la clause conditionnelle entière est enclose entre accolades, et les clauses
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+if
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ et
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+else
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ sont encloses entre double crochets
+\begin_inset Quotes fld
+\end_inset
+
+[[
+\begin_inset Quotes frd
+\end_inset
+
+ et
+\begin_inset Quotes fld
+\end_inset
+
+]]
+\begin_inset Quotes frd
+\end_inset
+
+.
+ Il ne peut avoir d'espaces entre ces marqueurs.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Standard
+Il existe enfin une autre syntaxe possible dans ces définitions, qui se
+ présente comme suit:
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+{!<i>!}
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+.
+ Ceci définit une entité d'information utilisée pour créer du
+\begin_inset Quotes fld
+\end_inset
+
+texte enrichi
+\begin_inset Quotes frd
+\end_inset
+
+.
+ De manière évidente, nous ne souhaitons pas exporter des balises HTML en
+ écrivant du texte normal, aussi doivent elles être enclose entre
+\begin_inset Quotes fld
+\end_inset
+
+{!
+\begin_inset Quotes frd
+\end_inset
+
+ et
+\begin_inset Quotes fld
+\end_inset
+
+!}
+\begin_inset Quotes frd
+\end_inset
+
+.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Standard
+Deux définitions spéciales sont également disponibles dans un bloc
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+CiteFormat
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ Un exemple de la première définition est celle-ci:
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+!quotetitle
+\begin_inset Quotes eld
+\end_inset
+
+%title%
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
+
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Standard
+Ceci est une abréviation, ou macro-instruction, et peut être employée comme
+ une clé:
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+%!quotetitle%
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+.
+ LyX considérera
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+%!quotetitle%
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ exactement comme s'l s'agissait de sa définition.
+ Exprimons par conséquent un
+\emph on
+avertissement
+\emph default
+ évident: n'utilisez pas:
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+!funfun %funfun%
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Standard
+ou similaire.
+ LyX ne devrait pas se perdre dans une boucle infinie, mais cela peut prendre
+ un moment avant qu'il s'en sorte.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Standard
+Le second type de définitions particulières se présente comme ceci:
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+
+\lang english
+_pptext pp.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Standard
+Ceci définit un segment de texte susceptible de traduction, ce qui permet
+ de traduire les parties appropriées de la bibliographie.
+ Cette syntaxe peut être inclue dans une définition normale en la considérant
+ comme une clé:
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+%_pptext%
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+.
+ Plusieurs d'entre elles sont prédéfinies dans
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+stdciteformats.inc
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+.
+ Notez bien que ce ne sont pas des macro-instructions, au sens défini ci-dessus:
+ elles ne seront pas interprétées.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Standard
+Voici donc un exemple utilisant toutes ces fonctionnalités:
+\lang english
+
+\begin_inset VSpace defskip
+\end_inset
+
+
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Standard
+\noindent
+
+\family typewriter
+\lang english
+!authoredit {%author%[[%author%, ]][[{%editor%[[%editor%, %_edtext%, ]]}]]}
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Standard
+
+\lang english
+\begin_inset VSpace defskip
+\end_inset
+
+
+\lang french
+Ceci défini une macro qui imprime le nom de l'auteur, suivi d'un virgule,
+ si la clé
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+author
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ existe, ou bien imprime le nom de l'éditeur, suivi de
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+_edtext
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ ou de sa traduction (implicitement, apparaîtra
+\begin_inset Quotes fld
+\end_inset
+
+ed.
+\begin_inset Quotes frd
+\end_inset
+
+), si la clé
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+editor
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ existe.
+ Notez que ceci est déjà défini dans
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+stdciteformats.inc
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+, vous pouvez donc l'utiliser dans vos propres définitions, ou redéfinitions,
+ si vous chargez ce fichier d'abord.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Section
+Directives pour l'exportation XHTML
+\begin_inset CommandInset label
+LatexCommand label
+name "sec:Tags-for-XHTML"
+
+\end_inset
+
+
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Standard
+Comme pour LaTeX ou DocBook, la présentation du résultat HTML créé par LyX
+ est déterminé par les informations de format.
+ En général, LyX produit une présentation implicite raisonnable, et comme
+ indiqué plus haut, il construira même des règles implicites CSS à partir
+ des autres directives de format.
+ Par exemple, LyX essaiera d'utiliser l'information du bloc
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Font
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ du style Chapter pour écrire une CSS qui mettra en forme les titres de
+ chapitres de manière appropriée.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Standard
+Dans de nombreux cas, vous n'aurez donc sans doute rien à faire du tout
+ pour obtenir un résultat XHTML acceptable pour vos environnements propres,
+ vos inserts personnalisés, et ainsi de suite.
+ Mais dans certains cas vous devrez faire quelque chose, et LyX fournit
+ par conséquent un certain nombre de directives de format qui peuvent être
+ utilisées pour personnaliser le XHTML et les CSS qui sont créés.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Standard
+Notez qu'il existe deux directives,
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+HTMLPreamble
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ and
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+AddToHTMLPreamble
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+, qui peu\SpecialChar \-
+vent apparaître en dehors des déclarations de style et d'insert.
+ Voir
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:Paramètres-généraux-d'une"
+
+\end_inset
+
+ pour les détails sur celles-ci.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Subsection
+Styles de paragraphe
+\begin_inset CommandInset label
+LatexCommand label
+name "sub:Styles-de-paragraphe-XHTML"
+
+\end_inset
+
+
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Standard
+Le type de XHTML que LyX crée pour un paragraphe dépend s'il s'agit d'un
+ paragraphe normal, d'une commande, ou d'un environnement, ce qui est déterminé
+ par le contenu de la directive correspondante
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+LaTeXType
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Standard
+Pour une commande ou un paragraphe normal, le résultat XHTML a la forme
+ suivante:
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+
+\lang english
+<tag attr=
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
+value
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
+>
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+
+\lang english
+<labeltag attr=
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
+value
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
>
\end_inset
est le nom LyX de l'insert (tel qu'il est déterminé par la déclaration
- de flottant, voir
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-
+ de flottant, voir
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
LatexCommand ref
reference "sub:Flottants"
\end_inset
.
- Voir la section
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-
+ Voir la
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
LatexCommand ref
reference "sub:Description citation"
\end_inset
- (voir
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-
+ (voir
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
LatexCommand ref
reference "sub:polices"
\begin_layout Chapter
Insérer un Objet externe
+\begin_inset CommandInset label
+LatexCommand label
+name "chap:Insérer-un-Objet"
+
+\end_inset
+
+
\end_layout
\begin_layout Standard
sûrement
\emph default
une faille de sécurité facilement exploitable.
- Avant de commencer, lisez donc plus bas ce qui concerne la sécurité (section
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-
+ Avant de commencer, lisez donc plus bas ce qui concerne la sécurité (
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
LatexCommand pageref
reference "sec:La-question-de"
\begin_layout LyX-Code
\lang english
-AutomaticProduction true
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-
-\lang english
-Transform Rotate
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-
-\lang english
-Transform Resize
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-
-\lang english
-Format LaTeX
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-
-\lang english
-TransformCommand Rotate RotationLatexCommand
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-
-\lang english
-TransformCommand Resize ResizeLatexCommand
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-
-\lang english
-Product "$$RotateFront$$ResizeFront
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-
-\lang english
-
-\backslash
-
-\backslash
-input{$$AbsOrRelPathMaster$$Basename.pstex_t}
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-
-\lang english
- $$ResizeBack$$RotateBack"
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-
-\lang english
-UpdateFormat pstex
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-
-\lang english
-UpdateResult "$$AbsPath$$Basename.pstex_t"
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-
-\lang english
-Requirement "graphicx"
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-
-\lang english
-ReferencedFile latex "$$AbsOrRelPathMaster$$Basename.pstex_t"
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-
-\lang english
-ReferencedFile latex "$$AbsPath$$Basename.eps"
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-
-\lang english
-ReferencedFile dvi "$$AbsPath$$Basename.eps"
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-
-\lang english
-FormatEnd
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-
-\lang english
-Format PDFLaTeX
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-
-\lang english
-TransformCommand Rotate RotationLatexCommand
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-
-\lang english
-TransformCommand Resize ResizeLatexCommand
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-
-\lang english
-Product "$$RotateFront$$ResizeFront
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-
-\lang english
-
-\backslash
-
-\backslash
-input{$$AbsOrRelPathMaster$$Basename.pdftex_t}
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-
-\lang english
- $$ResizeBack$$RotateBack"
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-
-\lang english
-UpdateFormat pdftex
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-
-\lang english
-UpdateResult "$$AbsPath$$Basename.pdftex_t"
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-
-\lang english
-Requirement "graphicx"
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-
-\lang english
-ReferencedFile latex "$$AbsOrRelPathMaster$$Basename.pdftex_t"
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-
-\lang english
-ReferencedFile latex "$$AbsPath$$Basename.pdf"
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-
-\lang english
-FormatEnd
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-
-\lang english
-Format Ascii
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-
-\lang english
-Product "$$Contents(
-\backslash
-"$$AbsPath$$Basename.asc
-\backslash
-")"
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-
-\lang english
-UpdateFormat asciixfig
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-
-\lang english
-UpdateResult "$$AbsPath$$Basename.asc"
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-
-\lang english
-FormatEnd
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-
-\lang english
-Format DocBook
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-
-\lang english
-Product "<graphic fileref=
-\backslash
-"$$AbsOrRelPathMaster$$Basename.eps
-\backslash
-">
+AutomaticProduction true
\end_layout
\begin_layout LyX-Code
\lang english
- </graphic>"
+Transform Rotate
\end_layout
\begin_layout LyX-Code
\lang english
-UpdateFormat eps
+Transform Resize
\end_layout
\begin_layout LyX-Code
\lang english
-UpdateResult "$$AbsPath$$Basename.eps"
+Format LaTeX
\end_layout
\begin_layout LyX-Code
\lang english
-ReferencedFile docbook "$$AbsPath$$Basename.eps"
+TransformCommand Rotate RotationLatexCommand
\end_layout
\begin_layout LyX-Code
\lang english
-ReferencedFile docbook-xml "$$AbsPath$$Basename.eps"
+TransformCommand Resize ResizeLatexCommand
\end_layout
\begin_layout LyX-Code
\lang english
-FormatEnd
+Product "$$RotateFront$$ResizeFront
\end_layout
\begin_layout LyX-Code
\lang english
-Product "[XFig: $$FName]"
+
+\backslash
+
+\backslash
+input{$$AbsOrRelPathMaster$$Basename.pstex_t}
\end_layout
\begin_layout LyX-Code
\lang english
-FormatEnd
+ $$ResizeBack$$RotateBack"
\end_layout
\begin_layout LyX-Code
\lang english
-TemplateEnd
+UpdateFormat pstex
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Standard
-Comme vous pouvez le constater, le cadre est inséré entre
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
\lang english
-Template
+UpdateResult "$$AbsPath$$Basename.pstex_t"
\end_layout
-\end_inset
-
- \SpecialChar \ldots{}
-
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
\lang english
-TemplateEnd
+Requirement "graphicx"
\end_layout
-\end_inset
-
-.
- Il contient un en-tête spécifiant quelques réglages généraux et, pour chaque
- format primaire de document reconnu, une section
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
\lang english
-Format
+ReferencedFile latex "$$AbsOrRelPathMaster$$Basename.pstex_t"
\end_layout
-\end_inset
-
- \SpecialChar \ldots{}
-
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
\lang english
-FormatEnd
+ReferencedFile latex "$$AbsPath$$Basename.eps"
\end_layout
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
-.
+\lang english
+ReferencedFile dvi "$$AbsPath$$Basename.eps"
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Subsection
-L'en-tête de cadre
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+
+\lang english
+FormatEnd
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
\lang english
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
+Format PDFLaTeX
+\end_layout
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
\lang english
-AutomaticProduction
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-true|false
+TransformCommand Rotate RotationLatexCommand
\end_layout
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
-
-\lang french
-indique si le fichier représenté par le cadre doit être créé par LyX.
- Cette directive doit apparaître une et une seule fois.
+\lang english
+TransformCommand Resize ResizeLatexCommand
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
\lang english
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
+Product "$$RotateFront$$ResizeFront
+\end_layout
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
\lang english
-FileFilter
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
+
+\backslash
-<pattern>
+\backslash
+input{$$AbsOrRelPathMaster$$Basename.pdftex_t}
\end_layout
-\end_inset
-
-
-\lang french
-précise un patron gloal utilisé dans l'échange dans la spécification des
- fichiers pour filtrer les fichiers désignés.
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
\lang english
-
-\lang french
-S'il y a plus d'un suffixe possible (e.g.
- pour tgif,
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
+ $$ResizeBack$$RotateBack"
+\end_layout
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
\lang english
-.obj
+UpdateFormat pdftex
\end_layout
-\end_inset
-
- et
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
\lang english
-.tgo
+UpdateResult "$$AbsPath$$Basename.pdftex_t"
\end_layout
-\end_inset
-
-), utiliser une syntaxe comme
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
\lang english
-"*.{obj,tgo}"
+Requirement "graphicx"
\end_layout
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
-.
- Cette directive doit apparaître une et une seule fois.
+\lang english
+ReferencedFile latex "$$AbsOrRelPathMaster$$Basename.pdftex_t"
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
\lang english
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
+ReferencedFile latex "$$AbsPath$$Basename.pdf"
+\end_layout
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
\lang english
-GuiName
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-<guiname>
+FormatEnd
\end_layout
-\end_inset
-
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
-\lang french
- fixe le texte apparaissant dans le bouton.
- Cette directive doit apparaître une et une seule fois.
+\lang english
+Format Ascii
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
\lang english
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
+Product "$$Contents(
+\backslash
+"$$AbsPath$$Basename.asc
+\backslash
+")"
+\end_layout
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
\lang english
-HelpText
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-<text>
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-HelpTextEnd
+UpdateFormat asciixfig
\end_layout
-\end_inset
-
-
-\lang french
- décrit le texte d'aide utilisé dans la fenêtre de dialogue
-\begin_inset Quotes fld
-\end_inset
-
-Objet externe
-\begin_inset Quotes frd
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
-.
- Fournir suffisamment d'informations pour que l'utilisateur comprenne ce
- que le cadre peut faire pour lui.
- Cette directive doit apparaître une et une seule fois.
+\lang english
+UpdateResult "$$AbsPath$$Basename.asc"
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
\lang english
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
+FormatEnd
+\end_layout
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
\lang english
-InputFormat
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-<format>
+Format DocBook
\end_layout
-\end_inset
-
-
-\lang french
- indique le format du fichier original.
- Ce doit être le nom d'un format reconnu par LyX (voir la section
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-
-\begin_inset CommandInset ref
-LatexCommand ref
-reference "sec:Formats"
-
-\end_inset
-
-).
- Utiliser
-\begin_inset Quotes eld
-\end_inset
-
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
+\lang english
+Product "<graphic fileref=
+\backslash
+"$$AbsOrRelPathMaster$$Basename.eps
+\backslash
+">
+\end_layout
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
\lang english
-*
+ </graphic>"
\end_layout
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+\lang english
+UpdateFormat eps
+\end_layout
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
-si le cadre peut gérer des fichiers originaux dans plus d'un format.
- LyX tentera d'analyser le fichier pour ne déduire le format dans ce cas.
- Cette directive doit apparaître une et une seule fois.
+\lang english
+UpdateResult "$$AbsPath$$Basename.eps"
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
\lang english
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
+ReferencedFile docbook "$$AbsPath$$Basename.eps"
+\end_layout
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
\lang english
-Template
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-<id>
+ReferencedFile docbook-xml "$$AbsPath$$Basename.eps"
\end_layout
-\end_inset
-
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
-\lang french
- est un nom original pour le cadre.
- Il ne soit pas contenir de macros de substitution (voir ci-après).
+\lang english
+FormatEnd
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
\lang english
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
+Product "[XFig: $$FName]"
+\end_layout
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
\lang english
-Transform
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-Rotate|Resize|Clip|Extra
+FormatEnd
\end_layout
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+\lang english
+TemplateEnd
+\end_layout
-\lang french
- spécifie quelles transformations sont reconnues par ce cadre.
- Elle peut apparaître zéro ou plusieurs fois.
- Elle active les options correspondantes dans la fenêtre de dialogue.
- Chaque directive
+\begin_layout Standard
+Comme vous pouvez le constater, le cadre est inséré entre
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-Transform
+Template
\end_layout
\end_inset
- doit avoir soit une directive
+ \SpecialChar \ldots{}
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-TransformCommand
+TemplateEnd
\end_layout
\end_inset
- correspondante, soit une directive
+.
+ Il contient un en-tête spécifiant quelques réglages généraux et, pour chaque
+ format primaire de document reconnu, une section
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-TransformOption
+Format
\end_layout
\end_inset
- dans la section
+ \SpecialChar \ldots{}
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-Format
+FormatEnd
\end_layout
\end_inset
.
- Sinon, la transformation ne sera pas reconnue par ce cadre.
-
\end_layout
\begin_layout Subsection
-La section Format
+L'en-tête de cadre
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-Format
+AutomaticProduction
\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
-LaTeX|PDFLaTeX|PlainText|DocBook
+true|false
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
+
\lang french
- décrit le format de document primaire relevant de cette définition de format.
- Tous les cadres n'ont pas de représentation raisonnable dans tous les formats
- de fichier documentaire.
- Définissez cependant une section
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-Format
-\end_layout
-
-\end_inset
-
- pour tous les formats, et utilisez un texte bidon lorsqu'il n'existe pas
- de représentation.
- Ainsi vous verrez au minimum une référence à l'objet externe dans le document
- exporté.
+indique si le fichier représenté par le cadre doit être créé par LyX.
+ Cette directive doit apparaître une et une seule fois.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-Option
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-<
-\lang french
-nom
-\lang english
->
+FileFilter
\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
-<
-\lang french
-valeur
-\lang english
->
+<pattern>
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
+
\lang french
- définit une macro additionnelle
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
+précise un patron gloal utilisé dans l'échange dans la spécification des
+ fichiers pour filtrer les fichiers désignés.
\lang english
-$$<
+
\lang french
-nom
-\lang english
->
-\end_layout
-
-\end_inset
-
- pour la substitution par
+S'il y a plus d'un suffixe possible (e.g.
+ pour tgif,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-Product
+.obj
\end_layout
\end_inset
-.
-
+ et
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-<
-\lang french
-valeur
-\lang english
->
+.tgo
\end_layout
\end_inset
- peut elle-même contenir des macros de substitution.
- L'avantage par rapport à l'usage direct de
+), utiliser une syntaxe comme
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-<
-\lang french
-valeur
-\lang english
->
+"*.{obj,tgo}"
\end_layout
\end_inset
- dans
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-Product
+.
+ Cette directive doit apparaître une et une seule fois.
\end_layout
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout Description
- est que la valeur substituée par
+\lang english
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-$$<
-\lang french
-nom
-\lang english
->
+GuiName
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+<guiname>
\end_layout
\end_inset
- est nettoyée de sorte qu'elle est un argument facultatif valide dans le
- format documentaire.
+
+\lang french
+ fixe le texte apparaissant dans le bouton.
Cette directive doit apparaître une et une seule fois.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-Product
+HelpText
\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
<text>
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+HelpTextEnd
\end_layout
\end_inset
\lang french
- spécifie les texte inséré dans le document exporté.
- C'est en fait la directive la plus importante et elle peut être assez compliqué
-e.
+ décrit le texte d'aide utilisé dans la fenêtre de dialogue
+\begin_inset Quotes fld
+\end_inset
+
+Objet externe
+\begin_inset Quotes frd
+\end_inset
+
+.
+ Fournir suffisamment d'informations pour que l'utilisateur comprenne ce
+ que le cadre peut faire pour lui.
Cette directive doit apparaître une et une seule fois.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-Preamble
+InputFormat
\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
-<
-\lang french
-nom
-\lang english
->
+<format>
\end_layout
\end_inset
\lang french
- spécifie un élément de préambule qui sera inclus dans le préambule LaTeX.
- Il doit être défini par
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
+ indique le format du fichier original.
+ Ce doit être le nom d'un format reconnu par LyX (voir la
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sec:Formats"
-\lang english
-PreambleDef
-\end_layout
+\end_inset
+).
+ Utiliser
+\begin_inset Quotes eld
\end_inset
- \SpecialChar \ldots{}
-
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-PreambleDefEnd
+*
\end_layout
\end_inset
-.
+
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
+si le cadre peut gérer des fichiers originaux dans plus d'un format.
+ LyX tentera d'analyser le fichier pour ne déduire le format dans ce cas.
Cette directive doit apparaître une et une seule fois.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-ReferencedFile
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-<format>
+Template
\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
-<filename>
+<id>
\end_layout
\end_inset
\lang french
- désigne les fichiers créés par la procédure de conversion et requis par
- un format d'exportation particulier.
- Si le nom d'un fichier est relatif, il est interprété relativement au document
- maître.
- Cette directive peut apparaître zéro ou plusieurs fois.
+ est un nom original pour le cadre.
+ Il ne soit pas contenir de macros de substitution (voir ci-après).
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-Requirement
+Transform
\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
-<package>
+Rotate|Resize|Clip|Extra
\end_layout
\end_inset
\lang french
- désigne le nom d'un paquetage LaTeX requis.
- Le paquetage est inclus via
+ spécifie quelles transformations sont reconnues par ce cadre.
+ Elle peut apparaître zéro ou plusieurs fois.
+ Elle active les options correspondantes dans la fenêtre de dialogue.
+ Chaque directive
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-
-\backslash
-usepackage{}
+Transform
\end_layout
\end_inset
- dans le préambule LaTeX.
- Cette directive peut apparaître zéro ou plusieurs fois.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
-
-\lang english
+ doit avoir soit une directive
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\lang english
TransformCommand
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-Rotate
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-RotationLatexCommand
\end_layout
\end_inset
+ correspondante, soit une directive
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\lang french
- spécifie que la commande LaTeX native doit être utilisée pour effectuer
- les rotations.
- Cette directive peut apparaître une fois ou pas du tout.
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
+TransformOption
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
+\end_inset
-\lang english
+ dans la section
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-TransformCommand
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-Resize
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-ResizeLatexCommand
+Format
\end_layout
\end_inset
+.
+ Sinon, la transformation ne sera pas reconnue par ce cadre.
+
+\end_layout
-\lang french
- spécifie que la commande LaTeX native doit être utilisée pour effectuer
- les changements de taille.
- Cette directive peut apparaître une fois ou pas du tout.
+\begin_layout Subsection
+La section Format
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-TransformOption
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-Rotate
+Format
\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
-RotationLatexOption
+LaTeX|PDFLaTeX|PlainText|DocBook
\end_layout
\end_inset
\lang french
- spécifie que les rotations sont effectuées via un paramètre facultatif.
- Cette directive peut apparaître une fois ou pas du tout.
+ décrit le format de document primaire relevant de cette définition de format.
+ Tous les cadres n'ont pas de représentation raisonnable dans tous les formats
+ de fichier documentaire.
+ Définissez cependant une section
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-
+Format
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ pour tous les formats, et utilisez un texte bidon lorsqu'il n'existe pas
+ de représentation.
+ Ainsi vous verrez au minimum une référence à l'objet externe dans le document
+ exporté.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-TransformOption
+Option
\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
-Resize
+<
+\lang french
+nom
+\lang english
+>
\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
-ResizeLatexOption
+<
+\lang french
+valeur
+\lang english
+>
\end_layout
\end_inset
\lang french
- spécifie que les changements de taille sont effectuées via un paramètre
- facultatif.
- Cette directive peut apparaître une fois ou pas du tout
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
-
-\lang english
+ définit une macro additionnelle
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-TransformOption
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
+$$<
+\lang french
+nom
+\lang english
+>
+\end_layout
-Clip
-\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
-ClipLatexOption
-\end_layout
+ pour la substitution par
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang french
-spécifie que les recadrages sont effectuées via un paramètre facultatif.
- Cette directive peut apparaître une fois ou pas du tout
\lang english
-.
+Product
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
+\end_inset
-\lang english
+.
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-TransformOption
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-Extra
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-ExtraLatexOption
+<
+\lang french
+valeur
+\lang english
+>
\end_layout
\end_inset
+ peut elle-même contenir des macros de substitution.
+ L'avantage par rapport à l'usage direct de
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+\lang english
+<
\lang french
- spécifie qu'un paramètre supplémentaire facultatif est utilisé.
- Cette directive peut apparaître une fois ou pas du tout
+valeur
\lang english
-.
+>
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
+\end_inset
-\lang english
+ dans
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-UpdateFormat
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-<format>
+Product
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
-\lang french
- spécifie le format de fichier du fichier converti.
- Ce doit être le nom d'un format reconnu par LyX (voir la fenêtre de dialogue
-
-\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
+ est que la valeur substituée par
+\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-Outils\SpecialChar \menuseparator
+$$<
+\lang french
+nom
+\lang english
+>
+\end_layout
-\bar under
-P
-\bar default
-références\SpecialChar \menuseparator
-Gestion
-\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
-des
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
+ est nettoyée de sorte qu'elle est un argument facultatif valide dans le
+ format documentaire.
+ Cette directive doit apparaître une et une seule fois.
+\end_layout
-fichiers\SpecialChar \menuseparator
-Format
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout Description
-de
+\lang english
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
+Product
\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
-fichier
+<text>
\end_layout
\end_inset
- ).
+
+\lang french
+ spécifie les texte inséré dans le document exporté.
+ C'est en fait la directive la plus importante et elle peut être assez compliqué
+e.
Cette directive doit apparaître une et une seule fois.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-UpdateResult
+Preamble
\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
-<filename>
+<
+\lang french
+nom
+\lang english
+>
\end_layout
\end_inset
\lang french
- spécifie le nom du fichier converti.
- Le nom de fichier doit être absolu.
- Cette directive doit apparaître une et une seule fois.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Subsection
-Définitions du préambule
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Standard
-La configuration du cadre externe peut contenir des définitions additionnelles
- de préambule incluses dans
+ spécifie un élément de préambule qui sera inclus dans le préambule LaTeX.
+ Il doit être défini par
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
.
- Elle peuvent être utilisées par les cadres dans la section
+ Cette directive doit apparaître une et une seule fois.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
+
+\lang english
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-Format
-\end_layout
-
+ReferencedFile
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
-.
-\end_layout
+<format>
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
-\begin_layout Section
-Le mécanisme de substitution
+<filename>
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Standard
-Quand la fenêtre d'objet externe invoque un programme externe, il le fait
- selon la commande définie dans le fichier de configuration des cadres.
- Ces commandes peuvent contenir diverses macros qui sont interprétées avant
- l'exécution.
- Les commandes sont toujours exécutées dans le répertoire du document.
-\end_layout
+\end_inset
-\begin_layout Standard
-Ainsi, quand un objet externe est affiché, un mécanisme de substitution
- génère son nom, et la plupart des autres directives reconnaissent la substituti
-on de manière similaire.
-\end_layout
-\begin_layout Standard
-Les macros disponibles sont les suivantes :
+\lang french
+ désigne les fichiers créés par la procédure de conversion et requis par
+ un format d'exportation particulier.
+ Si le nom d'un fichier est relatif, il est interprété relativement au document
+ maître.
+ Cette directive peut apparaître zéro ou plusieurs fois.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-$$AbsOrRelPathMaster
+Requirement
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+<package>
\end_layout
\end_inset
\lang french
- est le est le chemin d'accès, absolu ou relatif au document maître LyX.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
-
-\lang english
+ désigne le nom d'un paquetage LaTeX requis.
+ Le paquetage est inclus via
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-$$AbsOrRelPathParent
+
+\backslash
+usepackage{}
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
-\lang french
- est le est le chemin d'accès, absolu ou relatif au document LyX.
+ dans le préambule LaTeX.
+ Cette directive peut apparaître zéro ou plusieurs fois.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-$$AbsPath
+TransformCommand
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+Rotate
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+RotationLatexCommand
\end_layout
\end_inset
\lang french
- est le chemin d'accès absolu.
+ spécifie que la commande LaTeX native doit être utilisée pour effectuer
+ les rotations.
+ Cette directive peut apparaître une fois ou pas du tout.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-$$Basename
+TransformCommand
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+Resize
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+ResizeLatexCommand
\end_layout
\end_inset
\lang french
- est le nom du fichier sans chemin d'accès et sans suffixe.
+ spécifie que la commande LaTeX native doit être utilisée pour effectuer
+ les changements de taille.
+ Cette directive peut apparaître une fois ou pas du tout.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
-$$Contents(
-\begin_inset Quotes fld
-\end_inset
-
-nom_fichier.ext
-\begin_inset Quotes frd
-\end_inset
-) la macro dépliera le contenu du fichier de nom
+\lang english
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-nom_fichier.ext
+
+\lang english
+TransformOption
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+Rotate
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+RotationLatexOption
\end_layout
\end_inset
-.
+
+\lang french
+ spécifie que les rotations sont effectuées via un paramètre facultatif.
+ Cette directive peut apparaître une fois ou pas du tout.
+
+\lang english
+
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-$$Extension
+TransformOption
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+Resize
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+ResizeLatexOption
\end_layout
\end_inset
\lang french
- est le suffixe (point inclus).
+ spécifie que les changements de taille sont effectuées via un paramètre
+ facultatif.
+ Cette directive peut apparaître une fois ou pas du tout
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-$$FName
-\end_layout
+TransformOption
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+Clip
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
+ClipLatexOption
+\end_layout
-\lang french
- est le nom du fichier spécifié dans la fenêtre d'objet externe.
+\end_inset
-\lang english
\lang french
-Il est soit absolu, soit relatif au document LyX.
+spécifie que les recadrages sont effectuées via un paramètre facultatif.
+ Cette directive peut apparaître une fois ou pas du tout
+\lang english
+.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-$$FPath
+TransformOption
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+Extra
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+ExtraLatexOption
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
+
\lang french
-la partie
-\begin_inset Quotes fld
-\end_inset
+ spécifie qu'un paramètre supplémentaire facultatif est utilisé.
+ Cette directive peut apparaître une fois ou pas du tout
+\lang english
+.
+\end_layout
-chemin d'accès
-\begin_inset Quotes frd
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout Description
- de
+\lang english
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-$$FName
-\end_layout
-
+UpdateFormat
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
- (absolu ou relatif au document LyX).
+<format>
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
+\end_inset
-\lang english
-\begin_inset Flex Code
+
+\lang french
+ spécifie le format de fichier du fichier converti.
+ Ce doit être le nom d'un format reconnu par LyX (voir la fenêtre de dialogue
+
+\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-$$RelPathMaster
+Outils\SpecialChar \menuseparator
+
+\bar under
+P
+\bar default
+références\SpecialChar \menuseparator
+Gestion
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+des
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+fichiers\SpecialChar \menuseparator
+Format
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+de
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+fichier
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
-\lang french
-est le chemin d'accès relatif au document maître LyX.
+ ).
+ Cette directive doit apparaître une et une seule fois.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-$$RelPathParent
+UpdateResult
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+<filename>
\end_layout
\end_inset
\lang french
- est le chemin d'accès relatif au document LyX.
+ spécifie le nom du fichier converti.
+ Le nom de fichier doit être absolu.
+ Cette directive doit apparaître une et une seule fois.
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
+\begin_layout Subsection
+Définitions du préambule
+\end_layout
-\lang english
+\begin_layout Standard
+La configuration du cadre externe peut contenir des définitions additionnelles
+ de préambule incluses dans
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-$$Sysdir
+PreambleDef
\end_layout
\end_inset
+ \SpecialChar \ldots{}
-\lang french
-désigne le chemin absolu du répertoire système.
- Typiquement utilisé pour pouvoir trouver les différents scripts auxiliaires
- fournis avec LyX.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
-
-\lang english
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-$$Tempname
+PreambleDefEnd
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
-\lang french
- Le nom et le chemin absolu d'un fichier temporaire qui sera automatiquement
- effacé quand le document sera fermé, ou l'objet externe effacé.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Standard
-Toutes la macros de chemin contiennent un séparateur de répertoire final,
- vous pouvez donc construire par exemple le nom de fichier absolu avec
+.
+ Elle peuvent être utilisées par les cadres dans la section
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-$$AbsPath$$Basename$$Extension
+Format
\end_layout
\end_inset
.
\end_layout
+\begin_layout Section
+Le mécanisme de substitution
+\end_layout
+
\begin_layout Standard
-Les macros ci-dessus sont substituées dans toutes les directives sauf indiqué.
- La directive
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
+Quand la fenêtre d'objet externe invoque un programme externe, il le fait
+ selon la commande définie dans le fichier de configuration des cadres.
+ Ces commandes peuvent contenir diverses macros qui sont interprétées avant
+ l'exécution.
+ Les commandes sont toujours exécutées dans le répertoire du document.
+\end_layout
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
+\begin_layout Standard
+Ainsi, quand un objet externe est affiché, un mécanisme de substitution
+ génère son nom, et la plupart des autres directives reconnaissent la substituti
+on de manière similaire.
+\end_layout
-\lang english
-Product
+\begin_layout Standard
+Les macros disponibles sont les suivantes :
\end_layout
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout Description
- reconnaît également les substitutions suivantes si elles sont autorisées
- par les directives
+\lang english
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-Transform
+$$AbsOrRelPathMaster
\end_layout
\end_inset
- et
+
+\lang french
+ est le est le chemin d'accès, absolu ou relatif au document maître LyX.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
+
+\lang english
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-TransformCommand
+$$AbsOrRelPathParent
\end_layout
\end_inset
- :
+
+\lang french
+ est le est le chemin d'accès, absolu ou relatif au document LyX.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-$$ResizeFront
+$$AbsPath
\end_layout
\end_inset
\lang french
- partie initiale de la commande de changement de taille.
+ est le chemin d'accès absolu.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-$$ResizeBack
+$$Basename
\end_layout
\end_inset
\lang french
- partie finale de la commande de changement de taille.
+ est le nom du fichier sans chemin d'accès et sans suffixe.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
+$$Contents(
+\begin_inset Quotes fld
+\end_inset
-\lang english
+nom_fichier.ext
+\begin_inset Quotes frd
+\end_inset
+
+) la macro dépliera le contenu du fichier de nom
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-$$RotateFront
+nom_fichier.ext
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
-\lang french
- partie initiale de la commande de rotation.
+.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-$$RotateBack
+$$Extension
\end_layout
\end_inset
\lang french
- partie finale de la commande de rotation.
+ est le suffixe (point inclus).
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Standard
-La valeur de la chaîne de la directive
+\begin_layout Description
+
+\lang english
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-Option
+$$FName
\end_layout
\end_inset
- reconnaît également les substitutions suivantes si elles sont autorisées
- par les directives
+
+\lang french
+ est le nom du fichier spécifié dans la fenêtre d'objet externe.
+
\lang english
+\lang french
+Il est soit absolu, soit relatif au document LyX.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
+
+\lang english
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-Transform
+$$FPath
\end_layout
\end_inset
- and
+
+\lang french
+la partie
+\begin_inset Quotes fld
+\end_inset
+
+chemin d'accès
+\begin_inset Quotes frd
+\end_inset
+
+ de
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-TransformOption
+$$FName
\end_layout
\end_inset
-:
+ (absolu ou relatif au document LyX).
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-$$Clip
+$$RelPathMaster
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
+
\lang french
- option de recadrage.
+est le chemin d'accès relatif au document maître LyX.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
+
+\lang english
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-$$Extra
+$$RelPathParent
\end_layout
\end_inset
- option supplémentaire.
+
+\lang french
+ est le chemin d'accès relatif au document LyX.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
+
+\lang english
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-$$Resize
+$$Sysdir
\end_layout
\end_inset
- option de changement de taille.
+
+\lang french
+désigne le chemin absolu du répertoire système.
+ Typiquement utilisé pour pouvoir trouver les différents scripts auxiliaires
+ fournis avec LyX.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
+
+\lang english
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-$$Rotate
+$$Tempname
\end_layout
\end_inset
- option de rotation.
+
+\lang french
+ Le nom et le chemin absolu d'un fichier temporaire qui sera automatiquement
+ effacé quand le document sera fermé, ou l'objet externe effacé.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Standard
-Vous pouvez vous demander pourquoi les macros de chemin d'accès sont aussi
- nombreuses.
- Il y a deux raisons principales:
-\end_layout
+Toutes la macros de chemin contiennent un séparateur de répertoire final,
+ vous pouvez donc construire par exemple le nom de fichier absolu avec
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\begin_layout Enumerate
-les chemins d'accès relatifs et absolus doivent rester relatifs et absolus,
- respectivement.
- Les utilisateurs peuvent avoir des raisons de préférer l'un ou l'autre.
- Les chemins relatifs sont utiles pour des documents portables sur différentes
- machines, par exemple.
- Les chemins absolus peuvent être requis par certains logiciels.
-\end_layout
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
-\begin_layout Enumerate
-LaTeX traite les chemins d'accès relatifs différemment de LyX et d'autres
- logiciels dans des fichiers inclus encapsulés.
- Pour LyX, par exemple, un chemin relatif est toujours relatif au document
- qui contient le nom de fichier.
- Pour LaTeX, il est toujours relatif au document maître.
- Ces deux définitions sont identiques si vous n'avez qu'un seul document.,
- mais diffèrent si vous avez un document maître qui inclut des sous-documents.
- Ceci signifie que les chemins relatifs doivent être transformés pour être
- transmis à LaTeX.
- Heureusement LyX fait ceci automatiquement si vous choisissez les macros
- de substitution correctes.
+\lang english
+$$AbsPath$$Basename$$Extension
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Standard
-Donc, quelle macro faut-il choisir dans une nouvelle définition de cadre?
- La règle n'est pas difficile:
+\end_inset
+
+.
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Itemize
-utiliser
+\begin_layout Standard
+Les macros ci-dessus sont substituées dans toutes les directives sauf indiqué.
+ La directive
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-$$AbsPath
+Product
\end_layout
\end_inset
- si un chemin absolu est requis;
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Itemize
-utiliser
+ reconnaît également les substitutions suivantes si elles sont autorisées
+ par les directives
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-$$AbsOrRelPathMaster
+Transform
\end_layout
\end_inset
- si la chaîne substituée est du type entrée pour LaTeX;
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Itemize
-sinon utiliser
+ et
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-$$AbsOrRelPathParent
+TransformCommand
\end_layout
\end_inset
- pour préserver le choix de l'utilisateur.
+ :
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Standard
-Des cas spéciaux existent pour lesquels cette règle n'est pas valable, et
- par exemple lorsque des chemins relatifs sont requis, mais elle fonctionne
- correctement d'habitude.
- Un exemple de cas tordu est la directive
+\begin_layout Description
+
+\lang english
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-ReferencedFile latex "$$AbsOrRelPathMaster$$Basename.pstex_t"
+$$ResizeFront
\end_layout
\end_inset
- dans le cadre Xfig indiqué ci-dessus: il n'est pas possible d'utiliser
- le nom absolu parce que la copieur pour les fichiers
+
+\lang french
+ partie initiale de la commande de changement de taille.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
+
+\lang english
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-.pstex_t
-\end_layout
-
-\end_inset
-
- nécessite le nom relatif pour réécrire le contenu du fichier.
+$$ResizeBack
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Section
-La question de la sécurité
-\begin_inset CommandInset label
-LatexCommand label
-name "sec:La-question-de"
-
\end_inset
+\lang french
+ partie finale de la commande de changement de taille.
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Standard
-L'insertion d'objet externe crée une interface avec un paquet de programmes
- externes et le fait de manière automatique, nous devons donc en examiner
- les conséquences en matière de sécurité.
- En particulier, comme vous avez la possibilité d'inclure vos propres noms
- de fichier et/ou paramètres et qu'ils sont interprétés pour former une
- commande, il semble possible de créer un document malveillant qui exécute
- des commandes indésirables quand un utilisateur le visualise ou l'imprime.
- C'est quelque chose que nous voulons absolument éviter.
-\end_layout
+\begin_layout Description
-\begin_layout Standard
-Cependant, comme les commandes du programme externe sont définies seulement
- dans le fichier de configuration des cadres, il n'y a pas de problème de
- sécurité si LyX est configuré correctement avec seulement des cadres sûrs.
- Ceci parce que les programmes externes sont invoqués via l'appel système
-
+\lang english
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-execvp
+
+\lang english
+$$RotateFront
\end_layout
\end_inset
- et non via l'appel système
+
+\lang french
+ partie initiale de la commande de rotation.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
+
+\lang english
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-system
+
+\lang english
+$$RotateBack
\end_layout
\end_inset
-.
- Il n'est donc pas possible d'exécuter des commandes arbitraires via le
- shell à partir du nom de fichier ou des paramètres.
-\end_layout
-\begin_layout Standard
-Ça implique aussi qu'il y a des restrictions dans les commandes définissables
- dans un cadre d'objet externe.
- En particulier, les pipes et les redirections ne sont pas disponibles.
- C'était obligatoire pour que LyX reste sûr.
- Si vous voulez utiliser quelques-unes des fonctions du shell, vous devez
- écrire un script sûr pour le faire de manière contrôlée, puis définir ce
- script comme commande.
-
+\lang french
+ partie finale de la commande de rotation.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Standard
-Il est possible de créer un cadre qui interagit directement avec le shell,
- mais comme cela permettrait à un utilisateur malveillant d'exécuter des
- commandes arbitraires en écrivant des noms de fichier et/ou des paramètres
- bien choisis, nous vous recommandons d'utiliser en général des scripts
- sûrs qui marchent avec l'appel système
+La valeur de la chaîne de la directive
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-execvp
+
+\lang english
+Option
\end_layout
\end_inset
- d'une manière contrôlée.
- Bien sûr, si vous êtes dans un environnement dans lequel vous avez confiance,
- il est tentant de ne pas se fouler et d'utiliser des scripts shell ordinaires.
- Si vous faites ça, sachez que vous allez
-\emph on
-vraiment
-\emph default
- créer dans votre système une faille de sécurité facile à exploiter.
- Il est évident que de tels cadres non sécurisés ne seront jamais inclus
- dans la distribution standard de LyX, même si nous encourageons les gens
- à nous proposer de nouveaux cadres dans la tradition du logiciel libre.
- Mais LyX tel que vous vous le procurez par les voies officielles de distributio
-n ne contiendra jamais de cadres non sécurisés.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Standard
-L'insertion d'objet externe est un outil très puissant, et vous devez faire
- attention à ne pas mettre en péril la sécurité avec cette puissance.
- Une légère erreur dans une seule ligne d'un script apparemment inoffensif
- peut ouvrir la voie à d'énormes problèmes.
- Si vous n'avez pas une compréhension claire de ce qui est en jeu, nous
- vous recommandons de consulter un professionnel de la sécurité, ou de contacter
- l'équipe de développement de LyX si vous vous demandez si votre cadre est
- sûr ou non.
- Faites le avant de l'utiliser dans un environnement que vous ne contrôlez
- pas.
-\end_layout
+ reconnaît également les substitutions suivantes si elles sont autorisées
+ par les directives
+\lang english
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\begin_layout Chapter
-\start_of_appendix
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-List of functions to be used in layouts
-\lang french
-
-\begin_inset CommandInset label
-LatexCommand label
-name "chap:List-of-functions"
+Transform
+\end_layout
\end_inset
-
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Standard
-\align center
-\begin_inset Tabular
-<lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="6">
-<features tabularvalignment="middle">
-<column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="14col%">
-<column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="14col%">
-<column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="14col%">
-<column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="14col%">
-<column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="14col%">
-<column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="14col%">
-<row>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
-\begin_inset Text
+ and
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-accents
+
+\lang english
+TransformOption
\end_layout
\end_inset
-</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
-\begin_inset Text
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-bbding
+:
\end_layout
-\end_inset
-</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
-\begin_inset Text
+\begin_layout Description
+
+\lang english
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-dvipost
+
+\lang english
+$$Clip
\end_layout
\end_inset
-</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
-\begin_inset Text
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-fancybox
+
+\lang french
+ option de recadrage.
\end_layout
-\end_inset
-</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
-\begin_inset Text
+\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-hhline
+
+\lang english
+$$Extra
\end_layout
\end_inset
-</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
-\begin_inset Text
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-latexsym
+ option supplémentaire.
\end_layout
-\end_inset
-</cell>
-</row>
-<row>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
-\begin_inset Text
+\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-amsbsy
+
+\lang english
+$$Resize
\end_layout
\end_inset
-</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
-\begin_inset Text
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-bm
+ option de changement de taille.
\end_layout
-\end_inset
-</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
-\begin_inset Text
+\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
+\lang english
+$$Rotate
\end_layout
\end_inset
-</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
-\begin_inset Text
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-feyn
+ option de rotation.
\end_layout
-\end_inset
-</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
-\begin_inset Text
+\begin_layout Standard
+Vous pouvez vous demander pourquoi les macros de chemin d'accès sont aussi
+ nombreuses.
+ Il y a deux raisons principales:
+\end_layout
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-hyperref
+\begin_layout Enumerate
+les chemins d'accès relatifs et absolus doivent rester relatifs et absolus,
+ respectivement.
+ Les utilisateurs peuvent avoir des raisons de préférer l'un ou l'autre.
+ Les chemins relatifs sont utiles pour des documents portables sur différentes
+ machines, par exemple.
+ Les chemins absolus peuvent être requis par certains logiciels.
\end_layout
-\end_inset
-</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
-\begin_inset Text
+\begin_layout Enumerate
+LaTeX traite les chemins d'accès relatifs différemment de LyX et d'autres
+ logiciels dans des fichiers inclus encapsulés.
+ Pour LyX, par exemple, un chemin relatif est toujours relatif au document
+ qui contient le nom de fichier.
+ Pour LaTeX, il est toujours relatif au document maître.
+ Ces deux définitions sont identiques si vous n'avez qu'un seul document.,
+ mais diffèrent si vous avez un document maître qui inclut des sous-documents.
+ Ceci signifie que les chemins relatifs doivent être transformés pour être
+ transmis à LaTeX.
+ Heureusement LyX fait ceci automatiquement si vous choisissez les macros
+ de substitution correctes.
+\end_layout
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-listings
+\begin_layout Standard
+Donc, quelle macro faut-il choisir dans une nouvelle définition de cadre?
+ La règle n'est pas difficile:
\end_layout
-\end_inset
-</cell>
-</row>
-<row>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
-\begin_inset Text
+\begin_layout Itemize
+utiliser
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-amscd
+
+\lang english
+$$AbsPath
\end_layout
\end_inset
-</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
-\begin_inset Text
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-booktabs
+ si un chemin absolu est requis;
\end_layout
-\end_inset
-</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
-\begin_inset Text
+\begin_layout Itemize
+utiliser
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-endnotes
+
+\lang english
+$$AbsOrRelPathMaster
\end_layout
\end_inset
-</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
-\begin_inset Text
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-fixltx2e
+ si la chaîne substituée est du type entrée pour LaTeX;
\end_layout
-\end_inset
-</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
-\begin_inset Text
+\begin_layout Itemize
+sinon utiliser
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
+\lang english
+$$AbsOrRelPathParent
\end_layout
\end_inset
-</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
-\begin_inset Text
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-longtable
+ pour préserver le choix de l'utilisateur.
\end_layout
-\end_inset
-</cell>
-</row>
-<row>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
-\begin_inset Text
+\begin_layout Standard
+Des cas spéciaux existent pour lesquels cette règle n'est pas valable, et
+ par exemple lorsque des chemins relatifs sont requis, mais elle fonctionne
+ correctement d'habitude.
+ Un exemple de cas tordu est la directive
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-amsmath
+
+\lang english
+ReferencedFile latex "$$AbsOrRelPathMaster$$Basename.pstex_t"
\end_layout
\end_inset
-</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
-\begin_inset Text
+
+ dans le cadre Xfig indiqué ci-dessus: il n'est pas possible d'utiliser
+ le nom absolu parce que la copieur pour les fichiers
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
+\lang english
+.pstex_t
\end_layout
\end_inset
-</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
-\begin_inset Text
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-enumitem
+ nécessite le nom relatif pour réécrire le contenu du fichier.
\end_layout
-\end_inset
-</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
-\begin_inset Text
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-float
-\end_layout
+\begin_layout Section
+La question de la sécurité
+\begin_inset CommandInset label
+LatexCommand label
+name "sec:La-question-de"
\end_inset
-</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
-\begin_inset Text
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-ifsym
-\end_layout
-\end_inset
-</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
-\begin_inset Text
+\end_layout
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-lyxskak
+\begin_layout Standard
+L'insertion d'objet externe crée une interface avec un paquet de programmes
+ externes et le fait de manière automatique, nous devons donc en examiner
+ les conséquences en matière de sécurité.
+ En particulier, comme vous avez la possibilité d'inclure vos propres noms
+ de fichier et/ou paramètres et qu'ils sont interprétés pour former une
+ commande, il semble possible de créer un document malveillant qui exécute
+ des commandes indésirables quand un utilisateur le visualise ou l'imprime.
+ C'est quelque chose que nous voulons absolument éviter.
\end_layout
-\end_inset
-</cell>
-</row>
-<row>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
-\begin_inset Text
+\begin_layout Standard
+Cependant, comme les commandes du programme externe sont définies seulement
+ dans le fichier de configuration des cadres, il n'y a pas de problème de
+ sécurité si LyX est configuré correctement avec seulement des cadres sûrs.
+ Ceci parce que les programmes externes sont invoqués via l'appel système
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-amssymb
+execvp
\end_layout
\end_inset
-</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
-\begin_inset Text
+
+ et non via l'appel système
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-CJK
+system
\end_layout
\end_inset
-</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
-\begin_inset Text
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-esint
+.
+ Il n'est donc pas possible d'exécuter des commandes arbitraires via le
+ shell à partir du nom de fichier ou des paramètres.
\end_layout
-\end_inset
-</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
-\begin_inset Text
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-framed
+\begin_layout Standard
+Ça implique aussi qu'il y a des restrictions dans les commandes définissables
+ dans un cadre d'objet externe.
+ En particulier, les pipes et les redirections ne sont pas disponibles.
+ C'était obligatoire pour que LyX reste sûr.
+ Si vous voulez utiliser quelques-unes des fonctions du shell, vous devez
+ écrire un script sûr pour le faire de manière contrôlée, puis définir ce
+ script comme commande.
+
\end_layout
-\end_inset
-</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
-\begin_inset Text
+\begin_layout Standard
+Il est possible de créer un cadre qui interagit directement avec le shell,
+ mais comme cela permettrait à un utilisateur malveillant d'exécuter des
+ commandes arbitraires en écrivant des noms de fichier et/ou des paramètres
+ bien choisis, nous vous recommandons d'utiliser en général des scripts
+ sûrs qui marchent avec l'appel système
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-ifthen
+execvp
\end_layout
\end_inset
-</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
-\begin_inset Text
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
+ d'une manière contrôlée.
+ Bien sûr, si vous êtes dans un environnement dans lequel vous avez confiance,
+ il est tentant de ne pas se fouler et d'utiliser des scripts shell ordinaires.
+ Si vous faites ça, sachez que vous allez
+\emph on
+vraiment
+\emph default
+ créer dans votre système une faille de sécurité facile à exploiter.
+ Il est évident que de tels cadres non sécurisés ne seront jamais inclus
+ dans la distribution standard de LyX, même si nous encourageons les gens
+ à nous proposer de nouveaux cadres dans la tradition du logiciel libre.
+ Mais LyX tel que vous vous le procurez par les voies officielles de distributio
+n ne contiendra jamais de cadres non sécurisés.
+\end_layout
+\begin_layout Standard
+L'insertion d'objet externe est un outil très puissant, et vous devez faire
+ attention à ne pas mettre en péril la sécurité avec cette puissance.
+ Une légère erreur dans une seule ligne d'un script apparemment inoffensif
+ peut ouvrir la voie à d'énormes problèmes.
+ Si vous n'avez pas une compréhension claire de ce qui est en jeu, nous
+ vous recommandons de consulter un professionnel de la sécurité, ou de contacter
+ l'équipe de développement de LyX si vous vous demandez si votre cadre est
+ sûr ou non.
+ Faites le avant de l'utiliser dans un environnement que vous ne contrôlez
+ pas.
\end_layout
-\end_inset
-</cell>
-</row>
-<row>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
-\begin_inset Text
+\begin_layout Chapter
+\start_of_appendix
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-amstext
-\end_layout
+\lang english
+List of functions to be used in layouts
+\lang french
+
+\begin_inset CommandInset label
+LatexCommand label
+name "chap:List-of-functions"
\end_inset
-</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
-\begin_inset Text
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-color
+
\end_layout
-\end_inset
-</cell>
+\begin_layout Standard
+\align center
+\begin_inset Tabular
+<lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="8">
+<features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
+<column alignment="left" valignment="top">
+<column alignment="left" valignment="top">
+<column alignment="left" valignment="top">
+<column alignment="left" valignment="top">
+<column alignment="left" valignment="top">
+<column alignment="left" valignment="top">
+<column alignment="left" valignment="top">
+<column alignment="left" valignment="top">
+<row>
<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
+accents
\end_layout
\end_inset
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
+booktabs
\end_layout
\end_inset
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
+feyn
\end_layout
\end_inset
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-makeidx
+listings
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-</row>
-<row>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-amsthm
+natbib
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-covington
+rotfloat
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
+tfrupee
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-graphicx
+wasysym
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
+</row>
+<row>
<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-jurabib
+amsbsy
\end_layout
\end_inset
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-marvosym
+calc
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-</row>
-<row>
<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-array
+fixltx2e
\end_layout
\end_inset
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-csquotes
+longtable
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
+nomencl
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
+rsphrase
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
+tipa
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-mathdesign
+wrapfig
\end_layout
\end_inset
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-ascii
+amscd
\end_layout
\end_inset
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
+CJK
\end_layout
\end_inset
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
+float
\end_layout
\end_inset
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-mathdesign
+lyxskak
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
+pdfcolmk
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-mathdots
+setspace
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-</row>
-<row>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
+tipx
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
+xargs
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
+</row>
+<row>
<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
+amsmath
\end_layout
\end_inset
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-mathdots
+color
\end_layout
\end_inset
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
+framed
\end_layout
\end_inset
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-subfig
+makeidx
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-</row>
-</lyxtabular>
-
-\end_inset
-
-
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Standard
-\align center
-\begin_inset Tabular
-<lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="6">
-<features tabularvalignment="middle">
-<column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="14col%">
-<column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="14col%">
-<column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="14col%">
-<column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="14col%">
-<column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="14col%">
-<column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="14col%">
-<row>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-makeidx
+pdfpages
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-pdfcolmk
+shapepar
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-setspace
+tone
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-textcomp
+xcolor
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
+</row>
+<row>
<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-ulem
+amssymb
\end_layout
\end_inset
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-xargs
+covington
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-</row>
-<row>
<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-marvosym
+graphicx
\end_layout
\end_inset
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-pdfpages
+marvosym
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-slashed
+pifont
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-textgreek
+slashed
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-undertilde
+txfonts
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-xcolor
+xy
\end_layout
\end_inset
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-mathdesign
+amstext
\end_layout
\end_inset
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-pifont
+csquotes
\end_layout
\end_inset
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-soul
+hhline
\end_layout
\end_inset
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-tfrupee
+mathdesign
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-units
+pmboxdraw
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-xy
+soul
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-</row>
-<row>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-mathdots
+ulem
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-pmboxdraw
+yhmath
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
+</row>
+<row>
<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-splitidx
+amsthm
\end_layout
\end_inset
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-tipa
+dvipost
\end_layout
\end_inset
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-url
+hyperref
\end_layout
\end_inset
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
+mathdots
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-</row>
-<row>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-mathrsfs
+polyglossia
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-polyglossia
+splitidx
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-subfig
+undertilde
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-tipx
+
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
+</row>
+<row>
<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
+array
\end_layout
\end_inset
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-yhmath
+endnotes
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-</row>
-<row>
<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-mhchem
+ifsym
\end_layout
\end_inset
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-prettyref
+mathrsfs
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-subscript
+prettyref
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-tone
+subfig
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-varioref
+units
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-multirow
+ascii
\end_layout
\end_inset
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-pxfonts
+enumitem
\end_layout
\end_inset
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
+ifthen
\end_layout
\end_inset
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-txfonts
+mhchem
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-verbatim
+pxfonts
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
+subscript
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-</row>
-<row>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
+url
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\end_inset
</cell>
+</row>
+<row>
<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
+bbding
\end_layout
\end_inset
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
+esint
\end_layout
\end_inset
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
+jurabib
\end_layout
\end_inset
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
+multicol
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-</row>
-<row>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-natbib
+refstyle
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-rotating
+textcomp
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
+varioref
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+</row>
+<row>
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-wasysym
+bm
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
+fancybox
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-</row>
-<row>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-nomencl
+latexsym
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-rotfloat
+multirow
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
+rotating
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
+textgreek
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-wrapfig
+verbatim
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
Names of available colors to be used in layouts
+\lang french
+
\begin_inset CommandInset label
LatexCommand label
name "chap:Names-of-colors"
-#LyX 2.0 created this file. For more info see http://www.lyx.org/
-\lyxformat 413
+#LyX 2.1 created this file. For more info see http://www.lyx.org/
+\lyxformat 474
\begin_document
\begin_header
\textclass jbook
\font_roman default
\font_sans default
\font_typewriter default
+\font_math auto
\font_default_family default
\use_non_tex_fonts false
\font_sc false
\font_osf false
\font_sf_scale 100
\font_tt_scale 100
-
\graphics default
\default_output_format default
\output_sync 0
\pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue,pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
\papersize default
\use_geometry false
-\use_amsmath 0
-\use_esint 0
-\use_mhchem 0
-\use_mathdots 0
+\use_package amsmath 0
+\use_package amssymb 0
+\use_package cancel 0
+\use_package esint 0
+\use_package mathdots 0
+\use_package mathtools 0
+\use_package mhchem 0
+\use_package stackrel 0
+\use_package stmaryrd 0
+\use_package undertilde 0
\cite_engine basic
+\cite_engine_type default
+\biblio_style plain
\use_bibtopic false
\use_indices false
\paperorientation portrait
\suppress_date false
+\justification true
\use_refstyle 0
\branch OutDated
\selected 0
\begin_inset Newline newline
\end_inset
-第2.0.x版
+第2.1.x版
\end_layout
\begin_layout Standard
\end_layout
\begin_layout Subsection
-ひとこと必要なファイル群...
+ひとこと必要なファイル群
\end_layout
\begin_layout Labeling
\end_inset
-機能で使用できるひな型が載っています。
+機能で使用できるひな型が載っています
+\lang english
+, see
+\lang japanese
+
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "chap:外部素材を取り込む"
+
+\end_inset
+
+。
\end_layout
\begin_layout Labeling
このファイルには、現在LyXがサポートしている言語の全一覧が載っています。
\end_layout
+\begin_layout Labeling
+\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+latexfonts
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+
+\lang english
+ contains information about the supported fonts.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Labeling
+\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+layouttranslations
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+
+\lang english
+ this file contains translations for internationalized paragraph styles
+ (see
+\lang japanese
+
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:段落様式の国際化"
+
+\end_inset
+
+)。
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Labeling
+\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+unicodesymbols
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+
+\lang english
+ this file contains information about unicode-encoded glyphs and the way
+ they are supported by LyX via LaTeX.
+\end_layout
+
\begin_layout Section
ユーザのローカル設定ディレクトリ
\end_layout
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+$$b
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+
+\lang english
+The base name (without filename extension) in the LyX temporary directory
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Labeling
+\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+$$p
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+
+\lang english
+The full directory path of the LyX temporary directory
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Labeling
+\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+$$r
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+
+\lang english
+The full pathname to the original LyX file being processed
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Labeling
+\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+$$f
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+
+\lang english
+The filename (without any directory path) of the LyX file.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Labeling
+\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
\begin_layout Plain Layout
$$l
\end_layout
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+nice
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+
+\lang english
+Needs a
+\begin_inset Quotes eld
+\end_inset
+
+nice
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
+ file from the backend, which in practice means a LaTeX file like the one
+ we would export, without
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
+input@path
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+
+\lang japanese
+。
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Labeling
+\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
\begin_layout Plain Layout
xml
\end_layout
tScriptを書き出していることに気づかれることでしょう。これは、まずLaTeXファイルを生成した後に（これには変換子を定義する必要はありません）、「LaTe
XからDVI」変換子を使用してDVIに変換し、最後に、得られたDVIをPostScriptに変換することによって実現しています。LyXはこのような変換子の「連鎖
」を自動的に見つけ、つねに最も短い連鎖を選択します。しかしながら、なお形式間に複数の変換方法を定義することも可能です。たとえば、標準的なLyX設定は、LaTeX
-からPDFへ変換するのに、以下の3つの方法を用意しています。(1)
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
+からPDFへ変換するのに、以下の3つの方法を用意しています。
+\end_layout
+\begin_layout Enumerate
直接
\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
status collapsed
\end_inset
-を使用するもの。(2)
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
+を使用するもの
+\end_layout
+\begin_layout Enumerate
（DVIと）PostScriptを経由して
\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
status collapsed
\end_inset
-を使用するもの。(3)
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
+を使用するもの
+\end_layout
+\begin_layout Enumerate
DVI経由で
\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
status collapsed
\end_inset
-を使用するもの。このように代替連鎖を定義するには、第
+を使用するもの
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Enumerate
+直接
+\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+XeTeX
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+を使用するもの
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Enumerate
+直接
+\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+LuaTeX
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+を使用するもの
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Standard
+このように代替連鎖を定義するには、第
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
LatexCommand ref
reference "sec:ファイル形式"
\end_inset
-・
+(
+\lang english
+for
+\lang japanese
+
\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-pdf2
+ps2pdf
\end_layout
\end_inset
-・
+)・
\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-pdf3
+pdf2
\end_layout
\end_inset
-と命名された形式が定義されていて、すべて共通の拡張子
+(
+\lang english
+for
+\lang japanese
+
\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-.pdf
+pdflatex
\end_layout
\end_inset
-を持ち、上記で言及した各変換方法に対応しています。
-\end_layout
+)・
+\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
+status collapsed
-\begin_layout Chapter
-LyXの各国語対応
-\begin_inset CommandInset label
-LatexCommand label
-name "cha:LyXの各国語対応"
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+pdf3
+\end_layout
\end_inset
+(
+\lang english
+for
+\lang japanese
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Standard
-LyXは、翻訳された操作画面の利用をサポートしています。私たちが最後に確かめたところでは、LyXは30言語の翻訳を提供しています。選択した言語は、使用する
-\emph on
-ロケール
-\emph default
-と呼ばれます（ロケール設定についての詳しい資料は、お使いの基本ソフトに添付のロケール関連説明書をご覧ください。Linuxの場合は、マニュアルページの
-\begin_inset Flex Code
+\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-locale(5)
+dvipdfm
\end_layout
\end_inset
-から見ると良いかもしれません）。
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Standard
-これらの翻訳は適切に機能しますが、欠点もいくつかあることに注意してください。たとえば、ダイアログはすべて英文を念頭にデザインされているため、翻訳文の一部は、割り
-当てられたスペースに収めるには大きすぎるかもしれません。これは表示上の問題に過ぎず、他の障害は引き起こしません。また、翻訳によっては、すべての短絡キーが定義され
-ていないことに気づかれるでしょう。短絡キーのために空いている文字が十分ないことが時々あるのです。単に翻訳者がまだ短絡キーを定義していないこともあるでしょう。もち
-ろん、私たちの各国語対応チーム—あなたも参加したいと思われるかもしれません
-\begin_inset Foot
+)・
+\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-もしあなたが英語以外の言語を流暢に操れるならば、これらのチームに参加することは、LyXコミュニティに報いるたいへん素晴らしい方法です！
+pdf4
\end_layout
\end_inset
-—は、LyXの将来のバージョンでこれらの欠点を修正しようとするでしょう。
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Section
-LyXを翻訳する
-\end_layout
+(
+\lang english
+for
+\lang japanese
-\begin_layout Subsection
-グラフィカル・ユーザ・インタフェース（テキスト・メッセージ）を翻訳する
-\begin_inset Argument
+\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-GUI（テキストメッセージ）を翻訳する
+XeTeX
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+)・
+\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+pdf5
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+(
+\lang english
+for
+\lang japanese
+
+\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+LuaTeX
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+) と命名された形式が定義されていて、すべて共通の拡張子
+\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+.pdf
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+を持ち、上記で言及した各変換方法に対応しています。
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Chapter
+LyXの各国語対応
+\begin_inset CommandInset label
+LatexCommand label
+name "cha:LyXの各国語対応"
+
+\end_inset
+
+
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Standard
+LyXは、翻訳された操作画面の利用をサポートしています。私たちが最後に確かめたところでは、LyXは30言語の翻訳を提供しています。選択した言語は、使用する
+\emph on
+ロケール
+\emph default
+と呼ばれます（ロケール設定についての詳しい資料は、お使いの基本ソフトに添付のロケール関連説明書をご覧ください。Linuxの場合は、マニュアルページの
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+locale(5)
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+から見ると良いかもしれません）。
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Standard
+これらの翻訳は適切に機能しますが、欠点もいくつかあることに注意してください。たとえば、ダイアログはすべて英文を念頭にデザインされているため、翻訳文の一部は、割り
+当てられたスペースに収めるには大きすぎるかもしれません。これは表示上の問題に過ぎず、他の障害は引き起こしません。また、翻訳によっては、すべての短絡キーが定義され
+ていないことに気づかれるでしょう。短絡キーのために空いている文字が十分ないことが時々あるのです。単に翻訳者がまだ短絡キーを定義していないこともあるでしょう。もち
+ろん、私たちの各国語対応チーム—あなたも参加したいと思われるかもしれません
+\begin_inset Foot
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+もしあなたが英語以外の言語を流暢に操れるならば、これらのチームに参加することは、LyXコミュニティに報いるたいへん素晴らしい方法です！
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+—は、LyXの将来のバージョンでこれらの欠点を修正しようとするでしょう。
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Section
+LyXを翻訳する
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Subsection
+グラフィカル・ユーザ・インタフェース（テキスト・メッセージ）を翻訳する
+\begin_inset Argument 1
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+GUI（テキストメッセージ）を翻訳する
\end_layout
\end_inset
\end_inset
-\begin_inset Argument
+\begin_inset Argument 1
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\begin_layout Subsection
文書クラス宣言
+\lang english
+and classification
\end_layout
\begin_layout Standard
\begin_layout LyX-Code
\size small
-#% Do not delete the line below; configure depends on this
+#% Do not delete the line below; configure depends on this
\end_layout
\begin_layout LyX-Code
\size small
-eXClass{article}
+eXClass{Article (Standard Class)}
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+
+\size small
+#
+\backslash
+DeclareCategory{Articles}
\end_layout
\begin_layout Standard
-この2行目は、LyXを初期設定や(再)設定するときに用いられるのです。このレイアウトファイルは、LaTeXスクリプト
+
+\lang english
+The second and third lines are used when you (re)configure LyX
+\lang japanese
+。このレイアウトファイルは、LaTeXスクリプト
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
-を無視する特別なモードで読み込みます。1行目は単なるLaTeXコメントですが、2行目にはテキストクラスの宣言が書かれています。これらの行が
+を無視する特別なモードで読み込みます。1行目は単なるLaTeXコメントですが、2行目にはテキストクラスの宣言が書かれています
+\lang english
+ and the third line contains the optional classification of the class
+\lang japanese
+。これらの行が
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
-を使用するようになります（既定ではレイアウトと同じ名称のものを使用します）。上記に現れる「article」という文字列は、
+を使用するようになります（既定ではレイアウトと同じ名称のものを使用します）。上記に現れる「Article (Standard Class)」という文字列は、
\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
status collapsed
\end_inset
ダイアログのテキストクラスの説明に使用されます。
+\lang english
+The category (
+\begin_inset Quotes eld
+\end_inset
+
+Articles
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
+ in the example) is also used in the
+\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
+Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
+Settings
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ dialog: the text classes are grouped by these categories (which are usually
+ genres, so typical categories are
+\begin_inset Quotes eld
+\end_inset
+
+Articles
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
+,
+\begin_inset Quotes eld
+\end_inset
+
+Books
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
+,
+\begin_inset Quotes eld
+\end_inset
+
+Reports
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
+,
+\begin_inset Quotes eld
+\end_inset
+
+Letters
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
+,
+\begin_inset Quotes eld
+\end_inset
+
+Presentations
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
+,
+\begin_inset Quotes eld
+\end_inset
+
+Curricula Vitae
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
+ etc.).
+ If no category has been declared, the class will be put in the
+\begin_inset Quotes eld
+\end_inset
+
+Uncategorized
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
+ group.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Standard
\size small
-eXClass[article]{article (with my own headings)}
+eXClass[article]{article (with My Own Headings)}
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+
+\size small
+#
+\backslash
+DeclareCategory{Articles}
\end_layout
\begin_layout Standard
\end_inset
-に関連づけられ、「article (with my own headings)」と表示される、
+に関連づけられ、「Article (with My Own Headings)」と表示される、
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\size small
-eXClass[article,foo.sty]{article (with my own headings)}
+eXClass[article,foo.sty]{Article (with My Own Headings)}
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+
+\size small
+#
+\backslash
+DeclareCategory{Articles}
\end_layout
\begin_layout Standard
DeclareDocBookClass[article]{SGML (DocBook article)}
\end_layout
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+
+\size small
+#
+\backslash
+DeclareCategory{Articles}
+\end_layout
+
\begin_layout Standard
これらの宣言には、文書クラス名を宣言する非必須パラメータ（ただしリストではない）を与えることができることに注意してください。
\end_layout
eXClass[クラス,パッケージ名.sty]{レイアウトの説明}
\end_layout
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+
+\size small
+#
+\backslash
+DeclareCategory{
+\lang english
+category
+\lang japanese
+}
+\end_layout
+
\begin_layout Standard
ここで「クラス」は、LaTeXクラスファイル名とレイアウトファイル名が異なるときのみ、指定する必要があります。クラスファイル名が指定されなければ、LyXは単純に
、クラスファイル名がレイアウトファイル名と同じであると仮定します。
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-PageStyle
+PackageOptions
\end_layout
\end_inset
[
-\emph on
-
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-plain
+文字列
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
-\emph default
-,
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-empty
+文字列
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+]
+\lang english
+Specifies options, given in the second string, for the package named by
+ the first string.
+ For example,
+\begin_inset Quotes eld
+\end_inset
+
+
+\lang japanese
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-headings
+PackageOptions natbib square
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] 既定ページ様式。
-\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
-status collapsed
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-文書\SpecialChar \menuseparator
-設定
-\end_layout
+\lang english
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
-ダイアログで変更することができます。
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
+ will cause
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Preamble
+
+\lang english
+natbib
\end_layout
\end_inset
- LaTeX文書のプリアンブルを設定します。前に行った
+ to be loaded with the
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Preamble
+
+\lang english
+square
\end_layout
\end_inset
-宣言や
+ option.
+ (For TeXperts, this causes LyX to output:
+\lang japanese
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-AddToPreamble
+
+\backslash
+PassOptionsToPackage{natbib}{square}
\end_layout
\end_inset
-宣言は、すべて上書きされてしまうので注意してください。（プリアンブルに何かを追加したい時には、
+
+\lang english
+prior to loading
+\lang japanese
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-AddToPreamble
+natbib
\end_layout
\end_inset
-を使用してください。）「
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
+。)
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+PageStyle
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ [
+\emph on
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+plain
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+
+\emph default
+,
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+empty
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+,
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+headings
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+] 既定ページ様式。
+\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+文書\SpecialChar \menuseparator
+設定
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ダイアログで変更することができます。
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Preamble
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ LaTeX文書のプリアンブルを設定します。前に行った
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Preamble
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+宣言や
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+AddToPreamble
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+宣言は、すべて上書きされてしまうので注意してください。（プリアンブルに何かを追加したい時には、
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+AddToPreamble
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+を使用してください。）「
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
EndPreamble
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-BabelPreamble
+Argument
\end_layout
\end_inset
- これは、前に現れたこの様式の
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-BabelPreamble
+int
\end_layout
\end_inset
-宣言をすべて、完全に上書きしますので注意してください。「
+]
+\lang english
+Defines argument number <int> of a command\SpecialChar \slash{}
+environment associated with the
+ current style.
+ This is useful for things like section headings, and only makes sense with
+ LaTeX.
+ Every (optional or required) argument of a command or environment -- except
+ for the required argument that is associated with the content of the paragraph
+ itself -- has a separate definition, where the number specifies the order
+ of the arguments.
+ The definition must end with
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-EndBabelPreamble
+
+\lang english
+EndArgument
\end_layout
\end_inset
-」で閉じる必要があります。これの利用法についての詳細は、第
-\begin_inset CommandInset ref
-LatexCommand ref
-reference "sub:段落様式の国際化"
+.
+ So a command with two optional arguments has:
+\end_layout
-\end_inset
+\begin_deeper
+\begin_layout Quote
-節をご覧ください。
+\family typewriter
+Argument 1
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
+\begin_layout Quote
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-BottomSep
+\family typewriter
+...
\end_layout
-\end_inset
-
- [
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
+\begin_layout Quote
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-浮動小数点型=0
+\family typewriter
+EndArgument
\end_layout
-\end_inset
-
-]
-\begin_inset Foot
-status collapsed
+\begin_layout Quote
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-ここで「浮動小数点型」とは1.5のような実数を指します。
+\family typewriter
+Argument 2
\end_layout
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout Quote
- このレイアウト型の段落塊の最後の段落と、次の段落とを分離する垂直空白。次の段落が別のレイアウト型である場合、分離幅は足し上げられるのではなく、最大値がとられま
-す。
+\family typewriter
+...
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
+\begin_layout Quote
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Category
+\family typewriter
+EndArgument
\end_layout
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout Standard
- [
+\lang english
+Inside the
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-文字列
+
+\lang english
+Argument
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] この様式のカテゴリです。これは、ツールバーのレイアウト・コンボボックスで関連した様式をグループ化するのに用いられます。任意の文字列を使用することができますが
-、作成した様式に既存のカテゴリを使用したいと思うことが多いでしょう。
+ definition, the following specifications are possible:
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
+\begin_layout Itemize
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-CommandDepth
+LabelString
\end_layout
\end_inset
- XMLコマンドの深度。XML型の書式でのみ使用されます。
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-CopyStyle
+[string]
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
+
+\lang english
+The string that will appear both in the menu (to insert this argument) and
+ on the argument inset button (unless you also specify a separate
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-文字列
+
+\lang english
+MenuString
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] 既存の様式から、すべての機能を現在の様式にコピーします。
-\end_layout
+).
+ For the menu, you can define an accelerator by appending the respective
+ character to the string, divided by
+\begin_inset Quotes eld
+\end_inset
-\begin_layout Description
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
+|
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-DependsOn
-\end_layout
+ (e.
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+g.
+\begin_inset space \space{}
\end_inset
-
-\lang english
-[
+
+\begin_inset Quotes eld
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
-<name>
+Short Title|S
\end_layout
\end_inset
-]
-\lang japanese
-この
-\emph on
-前に
-\emph default
-プリアンブルを出力させる様式名。マクロ定義がお互いに依存関係にある場合に、プリアンブルの断片の順序を確実にするためのものです
-\begin_inset Foot
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-この機能以外には、プリアンブルの順序を確定する方法はないことに注意してください。LyXの特定のバージョンで観察された順序は、将来のバージョンで警告なしに変わる可
-能性があります。
-\end_layout
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
-。
+).
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
+\begin_layout Itemize
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-EndLabeltype
+MenuString
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\emph on
-No_Label
-\emph default
-, Box, Filled_Box, Static
+[string]
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] 段落の最後（あるいは
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
+
+\lang english
+A separate string for the menu.
+ You can define an accelerator by appending the respective character to
+ the string, divided by
+\begin_inset Quotes eld
+\end_inset
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LatexType
-\end_layout
+|
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+ (e.
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
-が、
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
+g.
+\begin_inset space \space{}
+\end_inset
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Environment
-\end_layout
+\begin_inset Quotes eld
\end_inset
-・
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Item_Environment
+
+\lang english
+Short Title|S
\end_layout
\end_inset
-・
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-List_Environment
-\end_layout
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
-のいずれかの場合は、段落群の最後）に置くラベル。
+).
+ This specification is optional.
+ If it is not given the
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-No_Label
+
+\lang english
+LabelString
\end_layout
\end_inset
-の場合は「何もない」ことを指し、
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Box
+ will be used instead for the menu.
\end_layout
-\end_inset
-
-（あるいは
+\begin_layout Itemize
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Filled_Box
+Tooltip
\end_layout
\end_inset
-）の場合は、証明終了マーカ用の白い箱型（あるいは黒い箱型）を指し、
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Static
+[string]
\end_layout
\end_inset
-は明示したテキスト文字列を指します。
+
+\lang english
+A longer explanatory text that appears in the tooltip when hovering over
+ the argument inset.
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
+\begin_layout Itemize
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-EndLabelString
+Mandatory
\end_layout
\end_inset
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-文字列=""
+
+\emph on
+0
\end_layout
\end_inset
-]
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Static
+1
\end_layout
\end_inset
-型
+]
+\lang english
+Declare if this is a mandatory (1) or an optional (0) argument.
+ Mandatory arguments will be output empty if not given, while optional arguments
+ will not be output at all.
+ By default, mandatory arguments are delimited by
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-EndLabelType
+
+\lang english
+{...}
\end_layout
\end_inset
-のラベルで用いる文字列。
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
+, while optional arguments are delimited by
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Font
+
+\lang english
+[...]
\end_layout
\end_inset
- 本文テキストとラベルの
-\emph on
-両方で
-\emph default
-用いられるフォント。第
-\begin_inset CommandInset ref
-LatexCommand ref
-reference "sub:フォント指定"
-\end_inset
+\end_layout
-節を参照。このフォントを定義すると、自動的に
+\begin_layout Itemize
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LabelFont
+Requires
\end_layout
\end_inset
-も同じ値で定義されることに注意してください。したがって、
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LabelFont
+[int=0]
\end_layout
\end_inset
-も同時に定義したい場合には、これを先に定義してください。
-\end_layout
+
+\lang english
+defines another argument (by its number) which this argument requires to
+ be output if it is itself output.
+ E.
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
-\begin_layout Description
+g., in LaTeX commands, optional arguments often require previous optional
+ arguments to be output (at least empty), as in
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-FreeSpacing
+
+\lang english
+
+\backslash
+command[][argument]{text}
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
-\emph on
-
+.
+ This can be achieved by the statement
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-0
-\end_layout
-
-\end_inset
+\lang english
+Requires 1
+\end_layout
-\emph default
-,
-\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
-
+ within
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-1
+
+\lang english
+Argument 2
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] LyXは、空白をそれ自体文字や記号ではなく、2つの単語の間の分割子として捉えているため、単語間に2つ以上の空白を入れることは、通常許可していません。これ自体
-はとても素晴らしいことですが、たとえばプログラムコードや生のLaTeXコードを入力しようとするときなどに、煩わしくなることがあります。このことから、
+.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Itemize
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-FreeSpacing
+LeftDelim
\end_layout
\end_inset
-を有効にすることが認められています。LyXは、LaTeXモード以外では2つめ以降の空白には、保護された空白を使用することに注意してください。
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-HTML*
+[string]
\end_layout
\end_inset
- これらのタグは、XHTML出力で使用されます。第
-\begin_inset CommandInset ref
-LatexCommand ref
-reference "sub:段落様式-XHTML"
-
-\end_inset
-
-節をご覧ください。
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
+
+\lang english
+defines a custom left delimiter (instead of
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-InnerTag
+
+\lang english
+{
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [[FIXME]] （XML型書式でのみ使用されます。）
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
+ or
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-InPreamble
+
+\lang english
+[
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
-\emph on
-
+).
+ A line break in the output can be indicated by
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-0
-\end_layout
-
-\end_inset
+\lang english
+<br/>
+\end_layout
-\emph default
-,
-\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
+.
+\end_layout
+\begin_layout Itemize
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-1
+RightDelim
\end_layout
\end_inset
-]
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-1
+[string]
\end_layout
\end_inset
-の場合、様式が文書本体ではなく、文書プリアンブルにインクルードされるようにします。これは、タイトルや著者の情報をプリアンブルで設定する必要のある文書クラスに便利
-です。これは、
+
+\lang english
+defines a custom right delimiter (instead of
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LatexType
+
+\lang english
+}
\end_layout
\end_inset
-が
+ or
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Command
+
+\lang english
+]
\end_layout
\end_inset
-または
+).
+ A line break in the output can be indicated by
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Paragraph
+
+\lang english
+<br/>
\end_layout
\end_inset
-の様式に対してのみ動作します。
+.
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
+\begin_layout Itemize
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-InTitle
+DefaultArg
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
-\emph on
-
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-0
+[string]
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
-\emph default
-,
+
+\lang english
+defines an argument that is inserted if and only if no user-specified arguments
+ were given, i.
\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
+e.
+\begin_inset space \space{}
+\end_inset
+
+if no argument inset has been inserted (note that also an empty argument
+ inset omits the DefaultArg).
+ Multiple arguments need to be separated by comma.
+\end_layout
+\begin_layout Itemize
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-1
+PresetArg
\end_layout
\end_inset
-]
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-1
+[string]
\end_layout
\end_inset
-の場合、このレイアウトをタイトルブロックの一部としてマークします（大域項目の
+
+\lang english
+defines an argument that is inserted in any case (alone or in addition to
+ user-specified arguments).
+ Multiple arguments need to be separated by comma.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Itemize
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-TitleLatexType
+Font
\end_layout
\end_inset
-と
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
+
+\lang english
+The font used for the argument content, see
+\lang japanese
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-TitleLatexName
-\end_layout
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:フォント指定"
\end_inset
-ã\82\82å\8f\82ç\85§ï¼\89ã\80\82
+。
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
+\begin_layout Itemize
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-ItemSep
+LabelFont
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
+
+\lang english
+The font used for the label; see
+\lang japanese
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-浮動小数点型=0
-\end_layout
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:フォント指定"
\end_inset
-] これは、同じレイアウトを持つ段落群の間に追加する空白を与えるものです。複数のレイアウトを一つの環境に入れると、それぞれのレイアウトは、その環境の
+。
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Itemize
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-ParSep
+Decoration
\end_layout
\end_inset
-だけ分離されます。しかし、その環境の項目全体は、さらにこの
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-ItemSep
-\end_layout
-\end_inset
-
-分だけ離されます。これは
\emph on
-乗数
+Classic
\emph default
-であることに注意してください。
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-ItemTag
+, Minimalistic, Conglomerate
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [[FIXME]] （XML型書式でのみ使用されます。）
+]
+\lang english
+describes the rendering style used for the inset's frame and buttons.
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
+\begin_layout Itemize
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-KeepEmpty
+AutoInsert
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
-\emph on
-
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-0
+[int=0]
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
-\emph default
-,
-\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
-\end_inset
-
-
+
+\lang english
+If this is set to
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\lang english
1
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] 段落を空のままにすると、LaTeX出力が空になってしまうので、通常、LyXは段落を空にすることを許可しません。しかしながら、これを無効にすることが望ましい場
-合が存在します。たとえば、書簡のひな型では、必須フィールドを人々が忘れないように、空のフィールドのまま提供する手もあります。特別なクラスにおいては、レイアウトを
-実際には文章を含まないある種の改行として使用することもあります。
+, this argument is automatically inserted when the respective style is selected.
+ Currently, only one argument per style\SpecialChar \slash{}
+layout can be automatically inserted.
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
+\begin_layout Standard
+
+\lang english
+By default, the text entered in the LyX workarea in the respective layout
+ is the last (mandatory) argument of a command if the
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LabelBottomsep
+
+\lang english
+LatexType
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
+ is
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-浮動小数点型=0
+
+\lang english
+Command
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] ラベルと本文テキストとの間の垂直余白。本文テキストの上に来るラベルにのみ使用されます（
+.
+ However, arguments with the prefix
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Top_Environment
-\end_layout
-\end_inset
+\lang english
+post:
+\end_layout
-および
-\begin_inset Newline linebreak
\end_inset
-
+ are output after this workarea argument.
+ Note that post-argument numbering restarts at 1, so the first argument
+ following the workarea argument is
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Centered_Top_Environment
+
+\lang english
+post:1
\end_layout
\end_inset
-）。
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
+.
+ Post-arguments are ignored in any other
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LabelCounter
+
+\lang english
+LatexType
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
+ than
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-文字列=""
-\end_layout
-
-\end_inset
-] 自動連番に使われるカウンタ名（詳しくは第
-\begin_inset CommandInset ref
-LatexCommand ref
-reference "sub:カウンタ"
+\lang english
+Command
+\end_layout
\end_inset
-節参照）。
-\begin_inset Newline newline
-\end_inset
+.
+\end_layout
+\begin_layout Standard
+\lang english
+Arguments for list
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LabelType
-\end_layout
-
-\end_inset
-が
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
+\lang english
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Counter
+\backslash
+item
\end_layout
\end_inset
-型のときには、本項目は
-\emph on
-必須
-\emph default
-です。この場合には、この様式が出現するたびにカウンタが増えます。
-\begin_inset Newline newline
-\end_inset
-
-また、
+s (as in
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LabelType
+
+\lang english
+
+\backslash
+item[foo]
\end_layout
\end_inset
-が
+) have the prefix
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Enumerate
+
+\lang english
+item:
\end_layout
\end_inset
-型のときにも、若干複雑にはなりますが、本項目を使うことができます。たとえば、「
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LabelCounter myenum
-\end_layout
+ followed by the number (e.
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+g.
+\begin_inset space \space{}
\end_inset
-」と宣言したものとしましょう。すると、LaTeXにおけるのと同様、実際に使われるカウンタは、
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-myenumi
+
+\lang english
+Argument item:1
\end_layout
\end_inset
-・
+)
+\end_layout
+
+\end_deeper
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-myenumii
+BabelPreamble
\end_layout
\end_inset
-・
+ これは、前に現れたこの様式の
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-myenumii
+BabelPreamble
\end_layout
\end_inset
-・
+宣言をすべて、完全に上書きしますので注意してください。「
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-myenumiv
+EndBabelPreamble
\end_layout
\end_inset
-のようになります。これらのカウンタは、全て別々に宣言されなくてはなりません。
-\begin_inset Newline newline
-\end_inset
-
-カウンタの詳細については、第
+」で閉じる必要があります。これの利用法についての詳細は、第
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
LatexCommand ref
-reference "sub:カウンタ"
+reference "sub:段落様式の国際化"
\end_inset
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LabelFont
+BottomSep
\end_layout
\end_inset
- ラベルに使用されるフォント。第
-\begin_inset CommandInset ref
-LatexCommand ref
-reference "sub:フォント指定"
-
-\end_inset
-
-節を参照。
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LabelIndent
+浮動小数点型=0
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
-\begin_inset Flex Code
+]
+\begin_inset Foot
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-文字列=""
+ここで「浮動小数点型」とは1.5のような実数を指します。
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] ラベルをどれくらい行頭下げすべきかを示す文字列。
+ このレイアウト型の段落塊の最後の段落と、次の段落とを分離する垂直空白。次の段落が別のレイアウト型である場合、分離幅は足し上げられるのではなく、最大値がとられま
+す。
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LabelSep
+Category
\end_layout
\end_inset
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-文字列=""
+文字列
\end_layout
\end_inset
-]
-\lang english
-Text that indicates the amount of
-\lang japanese
-ラベルと本文テキストの間の水平余白。本文テキストの上に来ないラベルにのみ使用されます。
+] この様式のカテゴリです。これは、ツールバーのレイアウト・コンボボックスで関連した様式をグループ化するのに用いられます。任意の文字列を使用することができますが
+、作成した様式に既存のカテゴリを使用したいと思うことが多いでしょう。
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LabelString
+CommandDepth
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-文字列=""
+ XMLコマンドの深度。XML型の書式でのみ使用されます。
\end_layout
-\end_inset
-
-]
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Static
+CopyStyle
\end_layout
\end_inset
-ラベル型でラベルに使用する文字列。
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LabelCounter
+文字列
\end_layout
\end_inset
-を設定している場合、第
-\begin_inset CommandInset ref
-LatexCommand ref
-reference "sub:カウンタ"
-
-\end_inset
-
-節に述べられている特別な整形コマンドを含めることができます。
+] 既存の様式から、すべての機能を現在の様式にコピーします。
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LabelStringAppendix
+DependsOn
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
+
+\lang english
+[
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-文字列=""
+
+\lang english
+<name>
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] これは付録の中で
-\begin_inset Flex Code
+]
+\lang japanese
+この
+\emph on
+前に
+\emph default
+プリアンブルを出力させる様式名。マクロ定義がお互いに依存関係にある場合に、プリアンブルの断片の順序を確実にするためのものです
+\begin_inset Foot
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LabelString
+この機能以外には、プリアンブルの順序を確定する方法はないことに注意してください。LyXの特定のバージョンで観察された順序は、将来のバージョンで警告なしに変わる可
+能性があります。
\end_layout
\end_inset
-の代わりに用いられます。各
+。
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LabelString
+EndLabeltype
\end_layout
\end_inset
-ステートメントは、
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LabelStringAppendix
+
+\emph on
+No_Label
+\emph default
+, Box, Filled_Box, Static
\end_layout
\end_inset
-をもリセットすることに注意してください。
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
+] 段落の最後（あるいは
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LabelTag
+LatexType
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [FIXME] （XML型書式でのみ使用されます。）
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
+が、
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LabelType
+Environment
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
+・
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Item_Environment
+\end_layout
-\emph on
-No_Label
-\emph default
-, Manual, Static, Top_Environment,
-\begin_inset Newline newline
\end_inset
-Centered_Top_Environment, Counter, Sensitive, Enumerate,
-\begin_inset Newline newline
-\end_inset
+・
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-Itemize, Bibliography
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+List_Environment
\end_layout
\end_inset
-]
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_deeper
-\begin_layout Description
+のいずれかの場合は、段落群の最後）に置くラベル。
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Manual
+No_Label
\end_layout
\end_inset
- は、ラベルが最初の単語（最初の本当の空白まで）であることを示します。ラベルに2単語以上使用したいときは、保護された空白を使用してください。
+の場合は「何もない」ことを指し、
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Box
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
+\end_inset
+
+（あるいは
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Static
+Filled_Box
\end_layout
\end_inset
- は、ラベルが
+）の場合は、証明終了マーカ用の白い箱型（あるいは黒い箱型）を指し、
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LabelString
+Static
\end_layout
\end_inset
-ã\81§å®£è¨\80ã\81\97ã\81\9fã\82\82ã\81®ã\81§ã\81\82ã\82\8bã\81\93ã\81¨ã\82\92示ã\81\97ã\81¾ã\81\99ã\80\82ã\81\93ã\82\8cã\81¯ã\80\8cé\9d\99ç\9a\84ã\80\8dã\81§ã\81\82ã\82\8bã\81\93ã\81¨ã\81«æ³¨æ\84\8fã\81\97ã\81¦ã\81\8fã\81 ã\81\95ã\81\84。
+ã\81¯æ\98\8e示ã\81\97ã\81\9fã\83\86ã\82ã\82¹ã\83\88æ\96\87å\97å\88\97ã\82\92æ\8c\87ã\81\97ã\81¾ã\81\99。
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Top_Environment
+EndLabelString
\end_layout
\end_inset
-と
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Centered_Top_Environment
+文字列=""
\end_layout
\end_inset
- は、
+]
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
-の特別な場合です。ラベルは段落の上に印字されるのですが、それは単一の環境の上か、このレイアウトを持つ連続した段落群の上だけに印字されます。たとえば、
-\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
+型
+\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Abstract
+EndLabelType
\end_layout
\end_inset
-ã\83¬ã\82¤ã\82¢ã\82¦ã\83\88ã\81\8c使ç\94¨ã\81\97ã\81\9fã\82\8aã\81\97ã\81¾ã\81\99。
+ã\81®ã\83©ã\83\99ã\83«ã\81§ç\94¨ã\81\84ã\82\8bæ\96\87å\97å\88\97。
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Sensitive
+Font
\end_layout
\end_inset
- はキャプションラベルの「図」や「表」の特別な場合です。
+ 本文テキストとラベルの
+\emph on
+両方で
+\emph default
+用いられるフォント。第
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:フォント指定"
+
+\end_inset
+
+節を参照。このフォントを定義すると、自動的に
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Sensitive
+LabelFont
\end_layout
\end_inset
-は、（ハードコードされた）ラベル文字列がフロートの種類に依存することを示します。これは、フロートに関連付けられたカウンタの値がNであるものとすると、「Float
-Type N」にハードコードされています。
-\lang english
-For the case that a caption is inserted outside of a float
+も同じ値で定義されることに注意してください。したがって、
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-LabelString
+LabelFont
\end_layout
\end_inset
- should be set to e.
-\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
-\end_inset
-
-g
-\begin_inset space \space{}
-\end_inset
-
-
-\begin_inset Quotes eld
-\end_inset
-
-Senseless!
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
-\end_inset
-
-.
+も同時に定義したい場合には、これを先に定義してください。
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Counter
+FreeSpacing
\end_layout
\end_inset
- ラベル型は、自動的に連番が付されるラベルを定義します。
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LabelString
-\end_layout
-
-\end_inset
+ [
+\emph on
-は、それが含むカウンタ参照をすべて解決するために展開されます。これは、たとえば
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Section
-\backslash
-thechapter.
-\backslash
-thesection
+0
\end_layout
\end_inset
-のようになります。第
-\begin_inset CommandInset ref
-LatexCommand ref
-reference "sub:カウンタ"
+\emph default
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
-節を参照してください。
-\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Enumerate
+1
\end_layout
\end_inset
- は、通常の連番ラベルを生成します。現在のところ、これは、第4階層まで順に、アラビア数字・小文字・小文字ローマ数字・大文字を使用するようにハードコードされていま
-す。
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
+] LyXは、空白をそれ自体文字や記号ではなく、2つの単語の間の分割子として捉えているため、単語間に2つ以上の空白を入れることは、通常許可していません。これ自体
+はとても素晴らしいことですが、たとえばプログラムコードや生のLaTeXコードを入力しようとするときなどに、煩わしくなることがあります。このことから、
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Itemize
+FreeSpacing
\end_layout
\end_inset
- は、各階層でさまざまなブリットを生成します。これもハードコードされています。
+を有効にすることが認められています。LyXは、LaTeXモード以外では2つめ以降の空白には、保護された空白を使用することに注意してください。
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Bibliography
+HTML*
\end_layout
\end_inset
- は、LyXで内部的に使用され、
+ これらのタグは、XHTML出力で使用されます。第
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:段落様式-XHTML"
+
+\end_inset
+
+節をご覧ください。
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LatexType BibEnvironment
+InnerTag
\end_layout
\end_inset
-とともにのみ使用されます。
+ [[FIXME]] （XML型書式でのみ使用されます。）
\end_layout
-\end_deeper
\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LangPreamble
+InPreamble
\end_layout
\end_inset
- これは、この様式で既に出現した
+ [
+\emph on
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LangPreamble
+0
\end_layout
\end_inset
-宣言をすべて、完全に上書きしますので、注意してください。使用法についての詳細は、第
-\begin_inset CommandInset ref
-LatexCommand ref
-reference "sub:段落様式の国際化"
+\emph default
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
-節をご覧ください。
-\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LatexName
+1
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
-\lang english
-[
+]
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-<name>
+1
\end_layout
\end_inset
-]
-\lang japanese
-対応するLaTeXの名称です。環境名かコマンド名を指します。
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
+の場合、様式が文書本体ではなく、文書プリアンブルにインクルードされるようにします。これは、タイトルや著者の情報をプリアンブルで設定する必要のある文書クラスに便利
+です。これは、
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LatexParam
+LatexType
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
-\lang english
-[
+が
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-<parameter>
+Command
\end_layout
\end_inset
-]
-\lang japanese
- 対応する
+または
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LatexName
+Paragraph
\end_layout
\end_inset
-の非必須パラメータです。このパラメータは、LyX内部から変更することはできません。
+の様式に対してのみ動作します。
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LatexType
+InTitle
\end_layout
\end_inset
[
+\emph on
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
+0
+\end_layout
-\emph on
-Paragraph
-\emph default
-, Command, Environment, Item_Environment,
-\begin_inset Newline newline
\end_inset
-List_Environment, Bib_Environment
-\end_layout
+\emph default
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
-] レイアウトがどのようにLaTeXに変換されるべきかを示します。
-\begin_inset Foot
-status collapsed
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-これらのルールはDocBookクラスにも適用されるので、
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LatexType
+1
\end_layout
\end_inset
-の名称は、少しミスリーディングかもしれません。特定の例については、DocBook
-\lang english
-(filenames
+]
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-db_*.inc
+1
\end_layout
\end_inset
- )
-\lang japanese
-クラスファイルを見てください。
+の場合、このレイアウトをタイトルブロックの一部としてマークします（大域項目の
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+TitleLatexType
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_deeper
-\begin_layout Description
+と
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Paragraph
+TitleLatexName
\end_layout
\end_inset
- は、何も特別なことは意味しません。
+も参照）。
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Command
+ItemSep
\end_layout
\end_inset
- は、
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\backslash
-
-\emph on
-LatexName
-\emph default
-{\SpecialChar \ldots{}
-}
+浮動小数点型=0
\end_layout
\end_inset
-を意味します。
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
+] これは、同じレイアウトを持つ段落群の間に追加する空白を与えるものです。複数のレイアウトを一つの環境に入れると、それぞれのレイアウトは、その環境の
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Environment
+ParSep
\end_layout
\end_inset
- は、
+だけ分離されます。しかし、その環境の項目全体は、さらにこの
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\backslash
-begin{
-\emph on
-LatexName
-\emph default
-}\SpecialChar \ldots{}
-
-\backslash
-end{
-\emph on
-LatexName
-\emph default
-}
+ItemSep
\end_layout
\end_inset
-を意味します。
+分だけ離されます。これは
+\emph on
+乗数
+\emph default
+であることに注意してください。
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Item_Environment
+ItemTag
\end_layout
\end_inset
- は
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Environment
+ [[FIXME]] （XML型書式でのみ使用されます。）
\end_layout
-\end_inset
-
-と同じですが、
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\backslash
-item
+KeepEmpty
\end_layout
\end_inset
-がこの環境のすべての段落に付けられるところだけが異なっています。
-\end_layout
+ [
+\emph on
-\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-List_Environment
+0
\end_layout
\end_inset
- は
+
+\emph default
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Item_Environment
+1
\end_layout
\end_inset
-と同じですが、
+] 段落を空のままにすると、LaTeX出力が空になってしまうので、通常、LyXは段落を空にすることを許可しません。しかしながら、これを無効にすることが望ましい場
+合が存在します。たとえば、書簡のひな型では、必須フィールドを人々が忘れないように、空のフィールドのまま提供する手もあります。特別なクラスにおいては、レイアウトを
+実際には文章を含まないある種の改行として使用することもあります。
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LabelWidthString
+LabelBottomsep
\end_layout
\end_inset
-が環境の引数として渡されるところだけが異なっています。
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LabelWidthString
+浮動小数点型=0
\end_layout
\end_inset
-は、
-\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
+] ラベルと本文テキストとの間の垂直余白。本文テキストの上に来るラベルにのみ使用されます（
+\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-編集\SpecialChar \menuseparator
-段落設定
+Top_Environment
\end_layout
\end_inset
-ダイアログで定義することができます。
-\end_layout
+および
+\begin_inset Newline linebreak
+\end_inset
-\begin_layout Description
-\lang english
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-Bib_Environment
+Centered_Top_Environment
\end_layout
\end_inset
- is like
+）。
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-Environment
+LabelCounter
\end_layout
\end_inset
- but adds additionally the necessary mandatory argument (the longest label)
- to the begin statement of the bibliography environment:
-\begin_inset Newline newline
-\end_inset
-
-
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-
-\backslash
-begin{thebibliography}{99}
+文字列=""
\end_layout
\end_inset
- It is therefore only useful for bibliography environments.
- The default longest label
-\begin_inset Quotes eld
-\end_inset
+] 自動連番に使われるカウンタ名（詳しくは第
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:カウンタ"
-99
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
- can be changed by the user in the paragraph settings of a bibliography
- item.
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Standard
-上記最後のいくつかをまとめると、LaTeX出力は、LaTeX型に依存して
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-
-\backslash
-LatexName[LatexParam]{\SpecialChar \ldots{}
-}
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Standard
-のようになるか、
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-
-\backslash
-begin{LatexName}[LatexParam] \SpecialChar \ldots{}
-
-\backslash
-end{LatexName}.
-\end_layout
+節参照）。
+\begin_inset Newline newline
+\end_inset
-\begin_layout Standard
-となります。
-\end_layout
-\end_deeper
-\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LeftMargin
+LabelType
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
+が
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-文字列=""
+Counter
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] レイアウトを環境の中に入れた場合、左余白は単純に加えられるのではなく、因子
-\begin_inset Formula $\frac{4}{\mathrm{depth}+4}$
+型のときには、本項目は
+\emph on
+必須
+\emph default
+です。この場合には、この様式が出現するたびにカウンタが増えます。
+\begin_inset Newline newline
\end_inset
-ã\82\92ã\81\8bã\81\91ã\81¦å\8a ã\81\88ã\82\89ã\82\8cã\81¾ã\81\99ã\80\82ã\81\93ã\81®ã\83\91ã\83©ã\83¡ã\83¼ã\82¿ã\81¯、
+ã\81¾ã\81\9f、
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Margin
+LabelType
\end_layout
\end_inset
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Manual
+Enumerate
\end_layout
\end_inset
-あるいは
+型のときにも、若干複雑にはなりますが、本項目を使うことができます。たとえば、「
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Dynamic
+LabelCounter myenum
\end_layout
\end_inset
-に設定されているときにも用いられることに注意してください。その場合には、これは手動設定余白または動的設定余白に加えられることに注意してください。
-\begin_inset Newline newline
-\end_inset
-
-たとえば「
+」と宣言したものとしましょう。すると、LaTeXにおけるのと同様、実際に使われるカウンタは、
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-MM
+myenumi
\end_layout
\end_inset
-ã\80\8dã\81¨æ\8c\87å®\9aã\81\99ã\82\8bã\81¨ã\80\81段è\90½ã\82\92é\80\9a常ã\83\95ã\82©ã\83³ã\83\88ã\81®ã\80\8c
+ã\83»
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-MM
+myenumii
\end_layout
\end_inset
-ã\80\8dã\81®å¹\85ã\81 ã\81\91è¡\8cé ä¸\8bã\81\92ã\82\92è¡\8cã\81\84ã\81¾ã\81\99ã\80\82æ\96\87å\97å\88\97ã\81®å\89\8dã\81«ã\80\8c
+ã\83»
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
--
+myenumii
\end_layout
\end_inset
-」を付けると、負の幅を与えることができます。この方法が採用されたのは、どの画面フォントでも見かけが同じになるようにするためです。
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
+・
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Margin
+myenumiv
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\emph on
-Static
-\emph default
-, Manual, Dynamic, First_Dynamic, Right_Address_Box
-\end_layout
-
+のようになります。これらのカウンタは、全て別々に宣言されなくてはなりません。
+\begin_inset Newline newline
\end_inset
-]
-\begin_inset Newline newline
+カウンタの詳細については、第
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:カウンタ"
+
\end_inset
-このレイアウトの左余白の種類です。
+節をご覧ください。
\end_layout
-\begin_deeper
\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Static
+LabelFont
\end_layout
\end_inset
- は固定余白を示します。
+ ラベルに使用されるフォント。第
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:フォント指定"
+
+\end_inset
+
+節を参照。
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Manual
+LabelIndent
\end_layout
\end_inset
- は、左余白が
-\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-編集\SpecialChar \menuseparator
-段落設定
+文字列=""
\end_layout
\end_inset
-ダイアログで入力した文字列によって決められることを示します。これは、タブを用いずに整った一覧表を組むのに使用されます。
+] ラベルをどれくらい行頭下げすべきかを示す文字列。
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Dynamic
+LabelSep
\end_layout
\end_inset
- は、余白がラベルの大きさに依存することを示します。これは、自動連番の見出しに使用されます。「5.4.3.2.1 非常に長い見出し」という見出し行が、「3.2
- 非常に長い見出し」よりも広い左余白（5.4.3.2.1足す空白と同じ幅）を必要とすることは明らかでしょう（標準的「ワープロ」はこんなことはやってくれませんが）。
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-First_Dynamic
+文字列=""
\end_layout
\end_inset
- は似ていますが、段落の最初の行だけがDynamicでその他の行はStaticです。これは、たとえば、箇条書き（記述）に使用されます。
+]
+\lang english
+Text that indicates the amount of
+\lang japanese
+ラベルと本文テキストの間の水平余白。本文テキストの上に来ないラベルにのみ使用されます。
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Right_Address_Box
+LabelString
\end_layout
\end_inset
- は、段落中、最も長い行が右余白に合うように余白を選択します。これは、ページの右端に住所を組版するのに用いられます。
-\end_layout
-
-\end_deeper
-\begin_layout Description
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-NeedProtect
+文字列=""
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
+]
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\emph on
-0
+Static
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
-\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
-\end_inset
-
-
+ラベル型でラベルに使用する文字列。
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-1
+LabelCounter
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] このレイアウト中の脆弱なコマンドが
+を設定している場合、第
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:カウンタ"
+
+\end_inset
+
+節に述べられている特別な整形コマンドを含めることができます。
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\backslash
-protect
+LabelStringAppendix
\end_layout
\end_inset
-されるべきか否か（註：これはこのコマンド自体が
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\backslash
-protect
+文字列=""
\end_layout
\end_inset
-されるべきかでは
-\emph on
-ありません
-\emph default
-）。
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
+] これは付録の中で
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Newline
+LabelString
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
+の代わりに用いられます。各
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-0
+LabelString
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
-\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
-\end_inset
-
-
+ステートメントは、
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\emph on
-1
+LabelStringAppendix
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] 新規行をLaTeXの新規行（
+をもリセットすることに注意してください。
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\backslash
-
-\backslash
-
+LabelTag
\end_layout
\end_inset
-）に変換するか否か。LyX中でLaTeX編集をやりやすくするために、変換は無効にすることができます。
+ [FIXME] （XML型書式でのみ使用されます。）
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-NextNoIndent
+LabelType
\end_layout
\end_inset
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\emph on
-0
-\end_layout
+No_Label
+\emph default
+, Manual, Static, Top_Environment,
+\begin_inset Newline newline
+\end_inset
+Centered_Top_Environment, Counter, Sensitive, Enumerate,
+\begin_inset Newline newline
\end_inset
-,
-\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+Itemize, Bibliography
+\end_layout
+
\end_inset
+]
+\end_layout
+\begin_deeper
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-1
+Manual
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] 次の段落に最初の行の行頭下げを許すか否か。
+ は、ラベルが最初の単語（最初の本当の空白まで）であることを示します。ラベルに2単語以上使用したいときは、保護された空白を使用してください。
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-1
+Static
\end_layout
\end_inset
-は許可しないことを意味し、
+ は、ラベルが
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-0
+LabelString
\end_layout
\end_inset
-ã\81¯æ\9c\9bã\82\80ã\81ªã\82\89ã\81°è¡\8cé ä¸\8bã\81\92ã\81§ã\81\8dã\82\8bã\81\93ã\81¨ã\82\92æ\84\8få\91³ã\81\97ã\81¾ã\81\99。
+ã\81§å®£è¨\80ã\81\97ã\81\9fã\82\82ã\81®ã\81§ã\81\82ã\82\8bã\81\93ã\81¨ã\82\92示ã\81\97ã\81¾ã\81\99ã\80\82ã\81\93ã\82\8cã\81¯ã\80\8cé\9d\99ç\9a\84ã\80\8dã\81§ã\81\82ã\82\8bã\81\93ã\81¨ã\81«æ³¨æ\84\8fã\81\97ã\81¦ã\81\8fã\81 ã\81\95ã\81\84。
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-ObsoletedBy
+Top_Environment
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
-\lang english
-[
+と
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-<name>
+Centered_Top_Environment
\end_layout
\end_inset
-]
-\lang japanese
- このレイアウトが置き換えられたレイアウト名。これは、後方互換性を維持しながら、レイアウトの名称を変更するのに使用されます。
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
+ は、
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-OptionalArgs
+Static
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
-\begin_inset Flex Code
+の特別な場合です。ラベルは段落の上に印字されるのですが、それは単一の環境の上か、このレイアウトを持つ連続した段落群の上だけに印字されます。たとえば、
+\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-整数型=0
+Abstract
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] このレイアウトに使用することのできる非必須引数の数。節見出しのようなものに有用であり、LaTeXでのみ意味を持ちます。出力時には、非必須引数は、すべての必須
-引数の前に来ることに注意してください（以下参照）。つまり、
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_deeper
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-
-\backslash
-mycmd[非必須引数1]{必須引数1}{段落の内容}
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Standard
-のようなコマンドは生成できますが、
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-
-\backslash
-mycmd[非必須引数1]{必須引数1}[非必須引数2]{段落の内容}
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Standard
-のようなコマンドは、TeXコード（これを使えば何でもできます）を使用することなしには、生成することができません。
+レイアウトが使用したりします。
\end_layout
-\end_deeper
\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-ParbreakIsNewline
+Sensitive
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
+ はキャプションラベルの「図」や「表」の特別な場合です。
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\emph on
-0
+Sensitive
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
-\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
-\end_inset
-
-
+は、（ハードコードされた）ラベル文字列がフロートの種類に依存することを示します。これは、フロートに関連付けられたカウンタの値がNであるものとすると、「Float
+Type N」にハードコードされています。
+\lang english
+For the case that a caption is inserted outside of a float
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-1
+
+\lang english
+LabelString
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] LaTeX出力中で、段落を空行ではなく、改行で区切るよう指定します。
+ should be set to e.
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+g
+\begin_inset space \space{}
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset Quotes eld
+\end_inset
+
+Senseless!
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
+.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-PassThru 1
+Counter
\end_layout
\end_inset
-と併用すれば、（TeXコードを使用したときのように）テキストエディタをエミュレートすることができます。
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
+ ラベル型は、自動的に連番が付されるラベルを定義します。
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-ParIndent
+LabelString
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
+は、それが含むカウンタ参照をすべて解決するために展開されます。これは、たとえば
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-文字列=""
+Section
+\backslash
+thechapter.
+\backslash
+thesection
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] 段落の最初の行の行頭下げ。レイアウトによっては
+のようになります。第
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:カウンタ"
+
+\end_inset
+
+節を参照してください。
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Parindent
+Enumerate
\end_layout
\end_inset
-は固定されています。例外には標準レイアウトがあり、標準レイアウトの段落の行頭下げは、
+ は、通常の連番ラベルを生成します。現在のところ、これは、第4階層まで順に、アラビア数字・小文字・小文字ローマ数字・大文字を使用するようにハードコードされていま
+す。
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-NextNoIndent
+Itemize
\end_layout
\end_inset
-で禁止することができるようになっています。また、環境中の標準レイアウト段落は、当該段落の
+ は、各階層でさまざまなブリットを生成します。これもハードコードされています。
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Parindent
+Bibliography
\end_layout
\end_inset
-ではなく、この環境の
+ は、LyXで内部的に使用され、
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Parindent
+LatexType BibEnvironment
\end_layout
\end_inset
-ã\82\92使ç\94¨ã\81\97ã\81¾ã\81\99ã\80\82ã\81\9fã\81¨ã\81\88ã\81°ã\80\81ç®\87æ\9d¡æ\9b¸ã\81\8dï¼\88é\80£ç\95ªï¼\89å\86\85ã\81®æ¨\99æº\96段è\90½ã\81¯ã\80\81è¡\8cé ä¸\8bã\81\92ã\81\95ã\82\8cã\81¾ã\81\9bã\82\93。
+ã\81¨ã\81¨ã\82\82ã\81«ã\81®ã\81¿ä½¿ç\94¨ã\81\95ã\82\8cã\81¾ã\81\99。
\end_layout
+\end_deeper
\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-ParSep
+LangPreamble
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
+ これは、この様式で既に出現した
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-浮動小数点型=0
+LangPreamble
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] このレイアウトの2段落間の垂直余白。
+宣言をすべて、完全に上書きしますので、注意してください。使用法についての詳細は、第
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:段落様式の国際化"
+
+\end_inset
+
+節をご覧ください。
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Parskip
+LatexName
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
+
+\lang english
+[
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-浮動小数点型=0
+
+\lang english
+<name>
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] LyXでは、文書を組版するのに、ユーザが「行頭下げ」か「スキップ」を選ぶことができます。「行頭下げ」を選択した際には、この値は完全に無視されます。「スキップ
-」を選択した際には、LaTeX型「段落」レイアウトの
+]
+\lang japanese
+対応するLaTeXの名称です。環境名かコマンド名を指します。
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-ParIndent
+LatexParam
\end_layout
\end_inset
-は無視され、すべての段落はこの
+
+\lang english
+[
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Parskip
+
+\lang english
+<parameter>
\end_layout
\end_inset
-引数分だけ引き離されます。垂直余白は、
+]
+\lang japanese
+ 対応する
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-DefaultHeight
+LatexName
\end_layout
\end_inset
-を標準フォントでの1行の高さとすると、
+の非必須パラメータです。このパラメータは、LyX内部から変更することはできません。
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Parskipの値
+LatexType
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
-\begin_inset Formula $\times$
-\end_inset
-
-
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-DefaultHeight
-\end_layout
+\emph on
+Paragraph
+\emph default
+, Command, Environment, Item_Environment,
+\begin_inset Newline newline
\end_inset
-によって計算されます。このようにして、画面フォントを変更しても同じように表示されるのです。
+List_Environment, Bib_Environment
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
+\end_inset
+
+] レイアウトがどのようにLaTeXに変換されるべきかを示します。
+\begin_inset Foot
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+これらのルールはDocBookクラスにも適用されるので、
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-PassThru
+LatexType
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
-\emph on
-
+の名称は、少しミスリーディングかもしれません。特定の例については、DocBook
+\lang english
+(filenames
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-0
+
+\lang english
+db_*.inc
\end_layout
\end_inset
+ )
+\lang japanese
+クラスファイルを見てください。
+\end_layout
-\emph default
-,
-\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_deeper
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-1
+Paragraph
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] この段落の内容が、LaTeXが必要とするような特別な変換を行わずに、生の形で出力されるべきかどうか。
+ は、何も特別なことは意味しません。
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Preamble
+Command
\end_layout
\end_inset
- この様式が使用されたときに、LaTeXプリアンブルに付け加えるべき情報。この特定の様式が要求するマクロを定義したり、パッケージを読み込んだりと言ったことに使用
-します。「
+ は、
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-EndPreamble
+
+\backslash
+
+\emph on
+LatexName
+\emph default
+{\SpecialChar \ldots{}
+}
\end_layout
\end_inset
-ã\80\8dã\81§é\96\89ã\81\98ã\82\8bå¿\85è¦\81ã\81\8cã\81\82ã\82\8aます。
+ã\82\92æ\84\8få\91³ã\81\97ます。
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-RefPrefix
+Environment
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
+ は、
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-文字列
+
+\backslash
+begin{
+\emph on
+LatexName
+\emph default
+}\SpecialChar \ldots{}
+
+\backslash
+end{
+\emph on
+LatexName
+\emph default
+}
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] この型の段落を参照する際、生成されるラベルに使用する前置句。これによって、整形参照を使用することができるようになります。
+を意味します。
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-RequiredArgs
+Item_Environment
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
+ は
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-整数型=0
+Environment
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] このレイアウトに対応するLaTeXコマンドやLaTeX環境が予期している、必須引数の数。コマンドの場合には、段落の内容自体に関連付けられている引数
-\emph on
-以外に
-\emph default
-、必要な引数の数のことです。これらの引数は、実際には渡されなくても構いません。必要な場合は、LyXが空の引数を生成します。非必須引数は、必須引数の前に出力される
-ことに注意してください。詳細については、上記
+と同じですが、
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-OptionalArgs
+
+\backslash
+item
\end_layout
\end_inset
-ã\82¿ã\82°ã\81«ã\81\8aã\81\91ã\82\8bè°è«\96ã\82\92ã\81\94覧ã\81\8fã\81 ã\81\95ã\81\84。
+ã\81\8cã\81\93ã\81®ç\92°å¢\83ã\81®ã\81\99ã\81¹ã\81¦ã\81®æ®µè\90½ã\81«ä»\98ã\81\91ã\82\89ã\82\8cã\82\8bã\81¨ã\81\93ã\82\8dã\81 ã\81\91ã\81\8cç\95°ã\81ªã\81£ã\81¦ã\81\84ã\81¾ã\81\99。
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Requires
+List_Environment
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
+ は
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-文字列
+Item_Environment
\end_layout
\end_inset
-]
-\lang english
-Whether the style requires the feature
+と同じですが、
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-string
+LabelWidthString
\end_layout
\end_inset
-.
- See the description of
+が環境の引数として渡されるところだけが異なっています。
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
+LabelWidthString
+\end_layout
-\lang english
-Provides
-\end_layout
-
-\end_inset
-
- above (sec
-\lang japanese
-.
-\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
+は、
+\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
+status collapsed
-\begin_inset CommandInset ref
-LatexCommand ref
-reference "sub:汎用テキストクラスパラメータ"
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+編集\SpecialChar \menuseparator
+段落設定
+\end_layout
\end_inset
-
-\lang english
-) for information on `features'
-\lang japanese
-。
+ダイアログで定義することができます。
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
+
+\lang english
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-RightMargin
+
+\lang english
+Bib_Environment
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
+ is like
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-文字列=""
+
+\lang english
+Environment
\end_layout
\end_inset
-]
+ but adds additionally the necessary mandatory argument (the longest label)
+ to the begin statement of the bibliography environment:
+\begin_inset Newline newline
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LeftMargin
+
+\lang english
+
+\backslash
+begin{thebibliography}{99}
\end_layout
\end_inset
-に同様。
+ It is therefore only useful for bibliography environments.
+ The default longest label
+\begin_inset Quotes eld
+\end_inset
+
+99
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
+ can be changed by the user in the paragraph settings of a bibliography
+ item.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Standard
+上記最後のいくつかをまとめると、LaTeX出力は、LaTeX型に依存して
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+
+\backslash
+LatexName[LatexParam]{\SpecialChar \ldots{}
+}
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Standard
+のようになるか、
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+
+\backslash
+begin{LatexName}[LatexParam] \SpecialChar \ldots{}
+
+\backslash
+end{LatexName}.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Standard
+となります。
\end_layout
+\end_deeper
\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Spacing
+LeftMargin
\end_layout
\end_inset
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\emph on
-single
+文字列=""
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+] レイアウトを環境の中に入れた場合、左余白は単純に加えられるのではなく、因子
+\begin_inset Formula $\frac{4}{\mathrm{depth}+4}$
+\end_inset
+
+をかけて加えられます。このパラメータは、
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-onehalf
+Margin
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+が
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-double
+Manual
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+あるいは
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-other
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-<
-\emph on
-値
-\emph default
->
+Dynamic
\end_layout
\end_inset
-]
-\lang english
-
-\lang japanese
-ã\81\93ã\82\8cã\81¯ã\83¬ã\82¤ã\82¢ã\82¦ã\83\88ä¸ã\81®æ\97¢å®\9aã\81®è¡\8cé\96\93ã\82\92ã\81©ã\81\86ã\81\99ã\81¹ã\81\8dã\81\8bå®\9a義ã\81\99ã\82\8bã\82\82ã\81®ã\81§ã\81\99ã\80\82å¼\95æ\95°ã\81®
+に設定されているときにも用いられることに注意してください。その場合には、これは手動設定余白または動的設定余白に加えられることに注意してください。
+\begin_inset Newline newline
+\end_inset
+
+ã\81\9fã\81¨ã\81\88ã\81°ã\80\8c
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-single
+MM
\end_layout
\end_inset
-ã\83»
+ã\80\8dã\81¨æ\8c\87å®\9aã\81\99ã\82\8bã\81¨ã\80\81段è\90½ã\82\92é\80\9a常ã\83\95ã\82©ã\83³ã\83\88ã\81®ã\80\8c
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-onehalf
+MM
\end_layout
\end_inset
-ã\83»
+ã\80\8dã\81®å¹\85ã\81 ã\81\91è¡\8cé ä¸\8bã\81\92ã\82\92è¡\8cã\81\84ã\81¾ã\81\99ã\80\82æ\96\87å\97å\88\97ã\81®å\89\8dã\81«ã\80\8c
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-double
+-
\end_layout
\end_inset
-は、それぞれ乗数1・1.25・1.667に対応します。引数
+」を付けると、負の幅を与えることができます。この方法が採用されたのは、どの画面フォントでも見かけが同じになるようにするためです。
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-other
+Margin
\end_layout
\end_inset
-を指定した場合には、実際の乗数値も引数として指定しなくてはなりません。他のパラメータと違って
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Spacing
+
+\emph on
+Static
+\emph default
+, Manual, Dynamic, First_Dynamic, Right_Address_Box
\end_layout
\end_inset
-は、
-\lang english
-LaTeX package
-\lang japanese
+]
+\begin_inset Newline newline
+\end_inset
+このレイアウトの左余白の種類です。
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_deeper
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-setspace
+Static
\end_layout
\end_inset
-パッケージを使用した、限定的なLaTeXコードを生成することを意味することにご注意ください。
+ は固定余白を示します。
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Spellcheck
+Manual
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
-\begin_inset Flex Code
+ は、左余白が
+\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-0
+編集\SpecialChar \menuseparator
+段落設定
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
-\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
-\end_inset
-
+ダイアログで入力した文字列によって決められることを示します。これは、タブを用いずに整った一覧表を組むのに使用されます。
+\end_layout
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-1
+Dynamic
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] この様式の段落をスペルチェックするか否か。既定値は真です。
+ は、余白がラベルの大きさに依存することを示します。これは、自動連番の見出しに使用されます。「5.4.3.2.1 非常に長い見出し」という見出し行が、「3.2
+ 非常に長い見出し」よりも広い左余白（5.4.3.2.1足す空白と同じ幅）を必要とすることは明らかでしょう（標準的「ワープロ」はこんなことはやってくれませんが）。
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-TextFont
+First_Dynamic
\end_layout
\end_inset
- 本文に使うフォント。第
-\begin_inset CommandInset ref
-LatexCommand ref
-reference "sub:フォント指定"
+ は似ていますが、段落の最初の行だけがDynamicでその他の行はStaticです。これは、たとえば、箇条書き（記述）に使用されます。
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Right_Address_Box
+\end_layout
\end_inset
-節参照。
+ は、段落中、最も長い行が右余白に合うように余白を選択します。これは、ページの右端に住所を組版するのに用いられます。
\end_layout
+\end_deeper
\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-TocLevel
+NeedProtect
\end_layout
\end_inset
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-整数型=3
+
+\emph on
+0
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] 目次中でのこの様式の階層。これは、節見出しの自動連番に使用されます。
-\end_layout
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
-\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-TopSep
+1
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
+] このレイアウト中の脆弱なコマンドが
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-浮動小数点型=0
+
+\backslash
+protect
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] このレイアウトを持つ一連の段落群の最初の段落と、その前の段落の間の垂直余白。前の段落が別のレイアウトを持っていれば、余白は単純に追加されるのではなく、それら
-の最大値がとられます。
-\end_layout
+されるべきか否か（註：これはこのコマンド自体が
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\begin_layout Subsection
-\begin_inset CommandInset label
-LatexCommand label
-name "sub:段落様式の国際化"
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\backslash
+protect
+\end_layout
\end_inset
-段落様式の国際化
+されるべきかでは
+\emph on
+ありません
+\emph default
+）。
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Standard
-LyXは、長きにわたってレイアウト情報の国際化をサポートしてきましたが、第2.0版までは、これは操作画面にのみ適用されるものであって、たとえばPDF出力には適用さ
-れませんでした。たとえば、フランスの著者が、「Theorem 1」の代わりに「
-\lang french
-Théorème
-\lang japanese
- 1」としたければ、醜いハックに頼るしかありませんでした。Georg Baumのおかげで、これは解消されました。
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Standard
-もし
-\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
+\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Style
+Newline
\end_layout
\end_inset
-が、組版文書に出力される文字列を定義するのであれば、非英語文書や複数言語文書をサポートするために、
-\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LangPreamble
+0
\end_layout
\end_inset
-や
-\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-BabelPreamble
-\end_layout
-
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
-を使用することができます。以下の抜粋（
-\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-theorems-ams.inc
-\end_layout
-
-\end_inset
-
-より）は、これがどう動作するかを示すものです。
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-Preamble
-\end_layout
-\begin_deeper
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-
-\backslash
-theoremstyle{remark}
+\emph on
+1
\end_layout
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-
-\backslash
-newtheorem{claim}[thm]{
-\backslash
-protect
-\backslash
-claimname}
-\end_layout
+\end_inset
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-EndPreamble
-\end_layout
+] 新規行をLaTeXの新規行（
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-LangPreamble
-\end_layout
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-
-\backslash
-providecommand{
\backslash
-claimname}{_(Claim)}
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-EndLangPreamble
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-BabelPreamble
-\end_layout
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-
-\backslash
-addto
-\backslash
-captions$$lang{
-\backslash
-renewcommand{
\backslash
-claimname}{_(Claim)}}
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-EndBabelPreamble
-\end_layout
-
-\end_deeper
-\begin_layout Standard
-原則として、
-\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
-status collapsed
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LangPreamble
\end_layout
\end_inset
-と
-\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-BabelPreamble
+）に変換するか否か。LyX中でLaTeX編集をやりやすくするために、変換は無効にすることができます。
\end_layout
-\end_inset
-
-タグ内には、有効なLaTeXコードはすべて用いることができますが、実際においては、ここで典型的に示したような形になるでしょう。組版文字列が正しく翻訳されるための
-鍵となるのは、LaTeXコマンド
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\backslash
-claimname
+NextNoIndent
\end_layout
\end_inset
-とその
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-\backslash
-newtheorem
+\emph on
+0
\end_layout
\end_inset
-中での用い方です。
-\end_layout
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
-\begin_layout Standard
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LangPreamble
+1
\end_layout
\end_inset
-タグは、文書全体の言語に基づいた国際化を提供します。タグの内容は、
+] 次の段落に最初の行の行頭下げを許すか否か。
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Preamble
+1
\end_layout
\end_inset
-ã\82¿ã\82°ã\81¨å\90\8cæ§\98ã\80\81ã\83\97ã\83ªã\82¢ã\83³ã\83\96ã\83«ã\81«ç½®ã\81\8bã\82\8cã\82\8bã\81®ã\81§ã\81\99ã\81\8cã\80\81ã\81\93ã\82\8cã\82\92ç\89¹å\88¥ã\81ªã\82\82ã\81®ã\81«ã\81\97ã\81¦ã\81\84ã\82\8bã\81®ã\81¯ã\80\81ã\80\8cé\96¢æ\95°ã\80\8d
+ã\81¯è¨±å\8f¯ã\81\97ã\81ªã\81\84ã\81\93ã\81¨ã\82\92æ\84\8få\91³ã\81\97ã\80\81
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-_()
+0
\end_layout
\end_inset
-ã\81\8c使ç\94¨ã\81\95ã\82\8cã\81¦ã\81\84ã\82\8bã\81\93ã\81¨ã\81§ã\81\99ã\80\82ã\81\93ã\82\8cã\81¯ã\80\81LyXã\81\8cLaTeXå\87ºå\8a\9bã\82\92ç\94\9fæ\88\90ã\81\99ã\82\8bé\9a\9bã\80\81ã\81\9dã\81®å¼\95æ\95°ã\82\92æ\96\87æ\9b¸è¨\80èª\9eã\81«ç¿»è¨³ã\81\97ã\81\9fã\82\82ã\81®ã\81§ç½®ã\81\8dæ\8f\9bã\81\88ã\82\89ã\82\8cます。
+ã\81¯æ\9c\9bã\82\80ã\81ªã\82\89ã\81°è¡\8cé ä¸\8bã\81\92ã\81§ã\81\8dã\82\8bã\81\93ã\81¨ã\82\92æ\84\8få\91³ã\81\97ます。
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Standard
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-BabelPreamble
+ObsoletedBy
\end_layout
\end_inset
-タグは、複数言語文書をサポートし、
+
+\lang english
+[
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-babel
+
+\lang english
+<name>
\end_layout
\end_inset
-パッケージへのインタフェースを提供することを意図しているので、もう少し複雑です。その内容は、文書に現れる言語それぞれについて一度、プリアンブルに追加されます。こ
-の場合には、
+]
+\lang japanese
+ このレイアウトが置き換えられたレイアウト名。これは、後方互換性を維持しながら、レイアウトの名称を変更するのに使用されます。
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-_()
+OptionalArgs
\end_layout
\end_inset
-の引数は、その当該言語への翻訳で置き換えられ、
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-$$lang
+整数型=0
\end_layout
\end_inset
-は言語名（babelパッケージで使用されるもの）で置き換えられます。
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Standard
-したがって、フランス語のセクションを持つドイツ語文書では、以下のような内容がプリアンブルに追加されます
+] このレイアウトに使用することのできる非必須引数の数。節見出しのようなものに有用であり、LaTeXでのみ意味を持ちます。出力時には、非必須引数は、すべての必須
+引数の前に来ることに注意してください（以下参照）。つまり、
\end_layout
+\begin_deeper
\begin_layout LyX-Code
\backslash
-addto
-\backslash
-captionsfrench{
-\backslash
-renewcommand{
-\backslash
-claimname}{Affirmation}}
-\begin_inset Newline newline
-\end_inset
-
+mycmd[非必須引数1]{必須引数1}{段落の内容}
+\end_layout
-\backslash
-addto
-\backslash
-captionsngerman{
-\backslash
-renewcommand{
-\backslash
-claimname}{Behauptung}}
-\begin_inset Newline newline
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout Standard
+のようなコマンドは生成できますが、
+\end_layout
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
\backslash
-providecommand{
-\backslash
-claimname}{Behauptung}
+mycmd[非必須引数1]{必須引数1}[非必須引数2]{段落の内容}
\end_layout
\begin_layout Standard
-それから、LaTeXと
+のようなコマンドは、TeXコード（これを使えば何でもできます）を使用することなしには、生成することができません。
+\end_layout
+
+\end_deeper
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-babel
+ParbreakIsNewline
\end_layout
\end_inset
-は協力して、出力に正しい文字列を生成します。
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\emph on
+0
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Standard
-ここで注意しなくてはならない重要な点は、翻訳は、操作画面の国際化に使われるのと同じ機構を通じて、LyX自身によって提供されるということです。つまり、ユーザー作成
-のレイアウトファイルに入力された文字列は、LyXの国際化ルーチンでは取り扱われないので、
-\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
+\end_inset
+
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LangPreamble
+1
\end_layout
\end_inset
-と
-\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
+] LaTeX出力中で、段落を空行ではなく、改行で区切るよう指定します。
+\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-BabelPreamble
+PassThru 1
\end_layout
\end_inset
-は、事実上、LyXとともに提供されるレイアウトファイルでのみ、使うことができるということを意味します。とはいえ、こういうことでありますので、将来的にLyXに同梱
-させようという意図を以て作成されたレイアウトは、適切なところではすべて、これらのタグを使用するべきです。
+と併用すれば、（TeXコードを使用したときのように）テキストエディタをエミュレートすることができます。
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Subsection
-フロート
-\begin_inset CommandInset label
-LatexCommand label
-name "sub:フロート"
+\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+ParIndent
+\end_layout
\end_inset
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+文字列=""
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Standard
-LyX第1.3.0版以来、テキストクラス自体の中でフロート（
-\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
+\end_inset
+
+] 段落の最初の行の行頭下げ。レイアウトによっては
+\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-figure
+Parindent
\end_layout
\end_inset
-ã\83»
-\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
+ã\81¯å\9bºå®\9aã\81\95ã\82\8cã\81¦ã\81\84ã\81¾ã\81\99ã\80\82ä¾\8bå¤\96ã\81«ã\81¯æ¨\99æº\96ã\83¬ã\82¤ã\82¢ã\82¦ã\83\88ã\81\8cã\81\82ã\82\8aã\80\81æ¨\99æº\96ã\83¬ã\82¤ã\82¢ã\82¦ã\83\88ã\81®æ®µè\90½ã\81®è¡\8cé ä¸\8bã\81\92ã\81¯ã\80\81
+\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-table
+NextNoIndent
\end_layout
\end_inset
-・\SpecialChar \ldots{}
-）を定義することが可能となり、かつ必要となりました。標準的なフロートは
+で禁止することができるようになっています。また、環境中の標準レイアウト段落は、当該段落の
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-stdfloats.inc
+Parindent
\end_layout
\end_inset
-ファイルに含まれているので、作業中のレイアウトファイルに
-\end_layout
+ではなく、この環境の
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-Input stdfloats.inc
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Parindent
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Standard
-と加えるだけで済むことも多いでしょう。LyXに同梱されているAGUクラスのように、それ以外のフロート型を提供するテキストクラスを実装するには、以下の情報が役立つ
-ã\81§ã\81\82ã\82\8aã\81¾ã\81\97ã\82\87ã\81\86。
+\end_inset
+
+ã\82\92使ç\94¨ã\81\97ã\81¾ã\81\99ã\80\82ã\81\9fã\81¨ã\81\88ã\81°ã\80\81ç®\87æ\9d¡æ\9b¸ã\81\8dï¼\88é\80£ç\95ªï¼\89å\86\85ã\81®æ¨\99æº\96段è\90½ã\81¯ã\80\81è¡\8cé ä¸\8bã\81\92ã\81\95ã\82\8cã\81¾ã\81\9bã\82\93。
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Extension
+ParSep
\end_layout
\end_inset
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-æ\96\87å\97å\88\97
+æµ®å\8b\95å°\8fæ\95°ç\82¹å\9e\8b=0
\end_layout
\end_inset
-=
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
-\end_inset
-
-
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
-\end_inset
-
-] 図などのリストを含む外部ファイルのファイル拡張子名。LaTeXがキャプションを書き込むファイルです。
+] このレイアウトの2段落間の垂直余白。
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-GuiName
+Parskip
\end_layout
\end_inset
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-æ\96\87å\97å\88\97
+æµ®å\8b\95å°\8fæ\95°ç\82¹å\9e\8b=0
\end_layout
\end_inset
-=
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
-\end_inset
+] LyXでは、文書を組版するのに、ユーザが「行頭下げ」か「スキップ」を選ぶことができます。「行頭下げ」を選択した際には、この値は完全に無視されます。「スキップ
+」を選択した際には、LaTeX型「段落」レイアウトの
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+ParIndent
+\end_layout
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
-] メニューとキャプションに使用される文字列。babelが使用される場合には、これは現在の言語に翻訳されます。
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
+は無視され、すべての段落はこの
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-HTML*
+Parskip
\end_layout
\end_inset
- これらは、XHTML出力で使用されます。第
-\begin_inset CommandInset ref
-LatexCommand ref
-reference "sec:XHTML出力のタグ"
-
-\end_inset
-
-節をご覧ください。
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
+引数分だけ引き離されます。垂直余白は、
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-IsPredefined
+DefaultHeight
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
+を標準フォントでの1行の高さとすると、
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\emph on
-0
+Parskipの値
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
-\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+
+\begin_inset Formula $\times$
\end_inset
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-1
+DefaultHeight
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] フロートがドキュメントクラス中に既に定義されているのか、あるいは
-\lang english
-LaTeX package
-\lang japanese
+によって計算されます。このようにして、画面フォントを変更しても同じように表示されるのです。
+\end_layout
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-float
+PassThru
\end_layout
\end_inset
-を読み込む必要があり、そのファイル内のものを使用して、オン・ザ・フライで定義するかを示します。既定は
+ [
+\emph on
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\end_inset
-で、この場合
+
+\emph default
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-float
+1
\end_layout
\end_inset
-を使用します。LaTeXドキュメントクラス中に既に定義されているときには、
+] この段落の内容が、LaTeXが必要とするような特別な変換を行わずに、生の形で出力されるべきかどうか。
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-0
+Preamble
\end_layout
\end_inset
-に設定しなくてはなりません。
+ この様式が使用されたときに、LaTeXプリアンブルに付け加えるべき情報。この特定の様式が要求するマクロを定義したり、パッケージを読み込んだりと言ったことに使用
+します。「
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+EndPreamble
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+」で閉じる必要があります。
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-ListCommand
+RefPrefix
\end_layout
\end_inset
\end_inset
-=
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
-\end_inset
+] この型の段落を参照する際、生成されるラベルに使用する前置句。これによって、整形参照を使用することができるようになります。
+\end_layout
+\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+RequiredArgs
+\end_layout
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
-] この型のフロートの一覧を生成するのに使用するコマンド。頭部の「
-\backslash
-」は書きません。
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-NeedsFloatPkg
+整数型=0
\end_layout
\end_inset
-が偽の時には、このコマンドを生成する標準的な方法はないので、これは
+] このレイアウトに対応するLaTeXコマンドやLaTeX環境が予期している、必須引数の数。コマンドの場合には、段落の内容自体に関連付けられている引数
\emph on
-必ず
+以外に
\emph default
-指定しなくてはなりません。
+、必要な引数の数のことです。これらの引数は、実際には渡されなくても構いません。必要な場合は、LyXが空の引数を生成します。非必須引数は、必須引数の前に出力される
+ことに注意してください。詳細については、上記
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-NeedsFloatPkg
+OptionalArgs
\end_layout
\end_inset
-ã\81\8cç\9c\9fã\81®æ\99\82ã\81¯ã\80\81æ¨\99æº\96ç\9a\84ã\81ªæ\96¹æ³\95ã\81\8cå\98å\9c¨ã\81\99ã\82\8bã\81®ã\81§ã\80\81ã\81\93ã\82\8cã\81¯ç\84¡è¦\96ã\81\95ã\82\8cã\81¾ã\81\99。
+ã\82¿ã\82°ã\81«ã\81\8aã\81\91ã\82\8bè°è«\96ã\82\92ã\81\94覧ã\81\8fã\81 ã\81\95ã\81\84。
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-ListName
+Requires
\end_layout
\end_inset
\end_inset
-=
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
-\end_inset
-
-
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
-\end_inset
-
-] この種類のフロート一覧（図一覧・表一覧など）に使用される見出し。LyX中では、これは画面上のラベルとして使用されます。また、見出しとして使用するために、La
-TeXに渡され、XHTML出力でも見出しとして使用されます。これは、文書言語に翻訳されます。
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
+]
+\lang english
+Whether the style requires the feature
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-NumberWithin
+
+\lang english
+string
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
+.
+ See the description of
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-文字列
+
+\lang english
+Provides
\end_layout
\end_inset
-=
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
+ above (sec
+\lang japanese
+.
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:汎用テキストクラスパラメータ"
+
\end_inset
-] この（非必須の）引数は、このクラスのフロートが文書中のある節単位ごとに番号を振り直されるべきかどうかを規定します。
+
\lang english
-For example, if
+) for information on `features'
\lang japanese
+。
+\end_layout
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-NumberWithin
+RightMargin
\end_layout
\end_inset
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\lang english
- is set to
-\lang japanese
-「
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+文字列=""
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+]
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-chapter
+LeftMargin
\end_layout
\end_inset
-ã\80\8dã\81¨æ\8c\87å®\9aã\81\95ã\82\8cã\81¦ã\81\84ã\82\8cã\81°ã\80\81ã\83\95ã\83ã\83¼ã\83\88ã\81¯ç« ã\81\94ã\81¨ã\81«ç\95ªå\8f·ã\81\8cæ\8c¯ã\82\8aç\9b´ã\81\95ã\82\8cã\81¾ã\81\99。
+ã\81«å\90\8cæ§\98。
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Placement
+Spacing
\end_layout
\end_inset
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-文字列
-\end_layout
-
-\end_inset
-
-=
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
-\end_inset
-
-
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
-\end_inset
-
-] このクラスのフロートの既定の配置法。文字列は、標準的なLaTeX表記に従い、
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-t
+\emph on
+single
\end_layout
\end_inset
-ならば上部（top）、
+,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-b
+onehalf
\end_layout
\end_inset
-ならば下部（bottom）、
+,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-p
+double
\end_layout
\end_inset
-ならばページ（page）、
+,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-h
-\end_layout
-
+other
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
-ならばここ（here）を表します
-\begin_inset Foot
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LaTeX同様、文字列中でのこれらの文字の順序は関係ありません。
+<
+\emph on
+値
+\emph default
+>
\end_layout
\end_inset
-。これらの他に新しい型
+]
+\lang english
+
+\lang japanese
+これはレイアウト中の既定の行間をどうすべきか定義するものです。引数の
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-H
+single
\end_layout
\end_inset
-ã\81\8cã\81\82ã\82\8aã\80\81ã\81\93ã\82\8cã\81¯ã\83\95ã\83ã\83¼ã\83\88ã\82\92ã\80\8cã\81\93ã\81\93ã\80\8dã\81«ç½®ã\81\84ã\81¦ã\81\84ã\81\84ã\81\91ã\82\8cã\81©ã\82\82ä»\96ã\81®å ´æ\89\80ã\81¯ã\81 ã\82\81ã\80\81ã\81¨ã\81\84ã\81\86ã\82\82ã\81®ã\81ªã\81®ã\81§ã\80\81æ\9c¬å½\93ã\81¯ã\83\95ã\83ã\83¼ã\83\88ã\81«ã\81\82ã\82\8bã\82\82ã\81®ã\81§ã\81¯ã\81\82ã\82\8aã\81¾ã\81\9bã\82\93ã\80\82ã\81\97ã\81\8bã\81\97ã\80\81
+ã\83»
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-H
+onehalf
\end_layout
\end_inset
-指定子は特別なものであり、その細かい実装上の理由で、組み込み以外のフロート型では使用することができません。これが何を意味するかおわかりにならない場合には、代わり
-に「
+・
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-tbp
+double
\end_layout
\end_inset
-」を指定してください。
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
+は、それぞれ乗数1・1.25・1.667に対応します。引数
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-RefPrefix
+other
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
+を指定した場合には、実際の乗数値も引数として指定しなくてはなりません。他のパラメータと違って
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-文字列
+Spacing
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] この型のフロートを参照する際、生成されるラベルに使用する前置句。これによって、整形参照を使用することができるようになります。コピーした様式が設定した
+は、
+\lang english
+LaTeX package
+\lang japanese
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-RefPrefix
+setspace
\end_layout
\end_inset
-ã\81¯ã\80\81ç\89¹å\88¥ã\81ªæ\96\87å\97å\88\97ã\80\8cOFFã\80\8dï¼\88ã\81\99ã\81¹ã\81¦å¤§æ\96\87å\97ï¼\89ã\82\92使ã\81\88ã\81°ã\80\81ã\81\84ã\81¤ã\81§ã\82\82å\89\8aé\99¤ã\81\99ã\82\8bã\81\93ã\81¨ã\81\8cã\81§ã\81\8dã\81¾ã\81\99。
+ã\83\91ã\83\83ã\82±ã\83¼ã\82¸ã\82\92使ç\94¨ã\81\97ã\81\9fã\80\81é\99\90å®\9aç\9a\84ã\81ªLaTeXã\82³ã\83¼ã\83\89ã\82\92ç\94\9fæ\88\90ã\81\99ã\82\8bã\81\93ã\81¨ã\82\92æ\84\8få\91³ã\81\99ã\82\8bã\81\93ã\81¨ã\81«ã\81\94注æ\84\8fã\81\8fã\81 ã\81\95ã\81\84。
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Style
+Spellcheck
\end_layout
\end_inset
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-文字列
+0
\end_layout
\end_inset
-=
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
-\end_inset
-
-]
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\backslash
-newfloat
+1
\end_layout
\end_inset
-を使用してフロートを定義する際に使用される様式。
+] この様式の段落をスペルチェックするか否か。既定値は真です。
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Type
-\end_layout
-
-\end_inset
-
- [
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-文字列
+TextFont
\end_layout
\end_inset
-=
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
-\end_inset
-
+ 本文に使うフォント。第
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:フォント指定"
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
-] プログラムやアルゴリズムのような、フロートの新しいクラス「型」。適切な
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\backslash
-newfloat
+節参照。
\end_layout
-\end_inset
-
-の後で、
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\backslash
-begin{program}
+TocLevel
\end_layout
\end_inset
-や
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\backslash
-end{algorithm*}
+整数型=3
\end_layout
\end_inset
-といったコマンドが利用できます。
+] 目次中でのこの様式の階層。これは、節見出しの自動連番に使用されます。
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-UsesFloatPkg
+TopSep
\end_layout
\end_inset
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-0
+浮動小数点型=0
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
-\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
-\end_inset
-
+] このレイアウトを持つ一連の段落群の最初の段落と、その前の段落の間の垂直余白。前の段落が別のレイアウトを持っていれば、余白は単純に追加されるのではなく、それら
+の最大値がとられます。
+\end_layout
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
+\begin_layout Subsection
+\begin_inset CommandInset label
+LatexCommand label
+name "sub:段落様式の国際化"
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
+\end_inset
-\emph on
-1
+段落様式の国際化
\end_layout
-\end_inset
-
-] このフロートが、クラスファイルやパッケージ中で、
-\lang english
-LaTeX-package
+\begin_layout Standard
+LyXは、長きにわたってレイアウト情報の国際化をサポートしてきましたが、第2.0版までは、これは操作画面にのみ適用されるものであって、たとえばPDF出力には適用さ
+れませんでした。たとえば、フランスの著者が、「Theorem 1」の代わりに「
+\lang french
+Théorème
\lang japanese
+ 1」としたければ、醜いハックに頼るしかありませんでした。Georg Baumのおかげで、これは解消されました。
+\end_layout
-\begin_inset Flex Code
+\begin_layout Standard
+もし
+\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-float
+Style
\end_layout
\end_inset
-が提供しているものを使用して定義されているのか、LyX自身がオン・ザ・フライで定義しているのかを示します。
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Standard
-\begin_inset Flex Code
+が、組版文書に出力される文字列を定義するのであれば、非英語文書や複数言語文書をサポートするために、
+\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\emph on
-type
+LangPreamble
\end_layout
\end_inset
-型のフロートを定義すると、自動的に
-\emph on
-対応する
-\emph default
-
-\begin_inset Flex Code
+や
+\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\emph on
-type
+BabelPreamble
\end_layout
\end_inset
-名カウンタが定義されます。
-\end_layout
+を使用することができます。以下の抜粋（
+\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
+status collapsed
-\begin_layout Subsection
-自由差込枠と差込枠レイアウト
-\begin_inset CommandInset label
-LatexCommand label
-name "sub:任意設定差込枠"
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+theorems-ams.inc
+\end_layout
\end_inset
+より）は、これがどう動作するかを示すものです。
+\end_layout
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+Preamble
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Standard
-自由差込枠には次の3種類があります。
+\begin_deeper
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+
+\backslash
+theoremstyle{remark}
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Itemize
-文字様式（
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+
+\backslash
+newtheorem{claim}[thm]{
+\backslash
+protect
+\backslash
+claimname}
+\end_layout
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-CharStyle
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+EndPreamble
\end_layout
-\end_inset
-
-）。これは、
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+LangPreamble
+\end_layout
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+
\backslash
-noun
+providecommand{
+\backslash
+claimname}{_(Claim)}
\end_layout
-\end_inset
-
-や
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+EndLangPreamble
+\end_layout
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+BabelPreamble
+\end_layout
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+
\backslash
-code
+addto
+\backslash
+captions$$lang{
+\backslash
+renewcommand{
+\backslash
+claimname}{_(Claim)}}
\end_layout
-\end_inset
-
-などのLaTeXコマンドに対応した意味論的マークアップを定義するものです。
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+EndBabelPreamble
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Itemize
-ユーザ設定（
-\begin_inset Flex Code
+\end_deeper
+\begin_layout Standard
+原則として、
+\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Custom
+LangPreamble
\end_layout
\end_inset
-）。これは、TeXコードや脚注などに似たユーザ設定の折りたたみ式差込枠を定義するのに使用することができます。わかりやすい例はendnote差込枠で、これは
-\begin_inset Flex Code
+と
+\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-endnote
+BabelPreamble
\end_layout
\end_inset
-モジュール中で定義されています。
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Itemize
-XML要素（
+タグ内には、有効なLaTeXコードはすべて用いることができますが、実際においては、ここで典型的に示したような形になるでしょう。組版文字列が正しく翻訳されるための
+鍵となるのは、LaTeXコマンド
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Element
+
+\backslash
+claimname
\end_layout
\end_inset
-）。DocBookクラスで使用するものです。
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Standard
-自由差込枠は、以下で説明する
+とその
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-InsetLayout
+
+\backslash
+newtheorem
\end_layout
\end_inset
-タグを使用して定義されます。
+中での用い方です。
\end_layout
\begin_layout Standard
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-InsetLayout
+LangPreamble
\end_layout
\end_inset
-タグは、もう一つ別の機能も提供します。これを使えば、いろいろな種類の差込枠全体のレイアウトを設定するのに使用することができるのです。現在のところ、
+タグは、文書全体の言語に基づいた国際化を提供します。タグの内容は、
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-InsetLayout
+Preamble
\end_layout
\end_inset
-は自由差込枠を定義することの他に、脚注・傍注・注釈差込枠・TeXコード（ERT）差込枠・派生枝・リスト・索引・ボックス・表・アルゴリズム・URL・オプション引数
-のレイアウトパラメータを設定するのに使用することができます。
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Standard
+タグと同様、プリアンブルに置かれるのですが、これを特別なものにしているのは、「関数」
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-InsetLayout
+_()
\end_layout
\end_inset
-定義は以下の形の行では始まらなくてはなりません。
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-InsetLayout <型>
+が使用されていることです。これは、LyXがLaTeX出力を生成する際、その引数を文書言語に翻訳したもので置き換えられます。
\end_layout
\begin_layout Standard
-ここで
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-<型>
+BabelPreamble
\end_layout
\end_inset
-は、レイアウトを定義しようとしている差込枠を指し、以下の2つの場合がありえます。
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Enumerate
-既存の差込枠のレイアウトを変更する場合。この場合、
+タグは、複数言語文書をサポートし、
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-<型>
+babel
\end_layout
\end_inset
-は以下のいずれかになります：
+パッケージへのインタフェースを提供することを意図しているので、もう少し複雑です。その内容は、文書に現れる言語それぞれについて一度、プリアンブルに追加されます。こ
+の場合には、
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Algorithm
+_()
\end_layout
\end_inset
-ã\83»
+ã\81®å¼\95æ\95°ã\81¯ã\80\81ã\81\9dã\81®å½\93該è¨\80èª\9eã\81¸ã\81®ç¿»è¨³ã\81§ç½®ã\81\8dæ\8f\9bã\81\88ã\82\89ã\82\8cã\80\81
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Branch
+$$lang
\end_layout
\end_inset
-・
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
+は言語名（babelパッケージで使用されるもの）で置き換えられます。
+\end_layout
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Box
+\begin_layout Standard
+したがって、フランス語のセクションを持つドイツ語文書では、以下のような内容がプリアンブルに追加されます
\end_layout
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+
+\backslash
+addto
+\backslash
+captionsfrench{
+\backslash
+renewcommand{
+\backslash
+claimname}{Affirmation}}
+\begin_inset Newline newline
\end_inset
-・
+
+\backslash
+addto
+\backslash
+captionsngerman{
+\backslash
+renewcommand{
+\backslash
+claimname}{Behauptung}}
+\begin_inset Newline newline
+\end_inset
+
+
+\backslash
+providecommand{
+\backslash
+claimname}{Behauptung}
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Standard
+それから、LaTeXと
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Box:shaded
+babel
\end_layout
\end_inset
-・
-\begin_inset Flex Code
+は協力して、出力に正しい文字列を生成します。
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Standard
+ここで注意しなくてはならない重要な点は、翻訳は、操作画面の国際化に使われるのと同じ機構を通じて、LyX自身によって提供されるということです。つまり、ユーザー作成
+のレイアウトファイルに入力された文字列は、LyXの国際化ルーチンでは取り扱われないので、
+\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-ERT
+LangPreamble
\end_layout
\end_inset
-ã\83»
-\begin_inset Flex Code
+ã\81¨
+\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Figure
+BabelPreamble
\end_layout
\end_inset
-・
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Foot
+は、事実上、LyXとともに提供されるレイアウトファイルでのみ、使うことができるということを意味します。とはいえ、こういうことでありますので、将来的にLyXに同梱
+させようという意図を以て作成されたレイアウトは、適切なところではすべて、これらのタグを使用するべきです。
\end_layout
+\begin_layout Subsection
+フロート
+\begin_inset CommandInset label
+LatexCommand label
+name "sub:フロート"
+
\end_inset
-・
-\begin_inset Flex Code
+
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Standard
+LyX第1.3.0版以来、テキストクラス自体の中でフロート（
+\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Index
+figure
\end_layout
\end_inset
・
-\begin_inset Flex Code
+\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Info
+table
\end_layout
\end_inset
-・
+・\SpecialChar \ldots{}
+）を定義することが可能となり、かつ必要となりました。標準的なフロートは
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Info:menu
+stdfloats.inc
\end_layout
\end_inset
-・
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
+ファイルに含まれているので、作業中のレイアウトファイルに
+\end_layout
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Info:shortcut
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+Input stdfloats.inc
\end_layout
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout Standard
+と加えるだけで済むことも多いでしょう。LyXに同梱されているAGUクラスのように、それ以外のフロート型を提供するテキストクラスを実装するには、以下の情報が役立つ
+でありましょう。
+\end_layout
-・
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Info:shortcuts
+Extension
\end_layout
\end_inset
-・
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Listings
+文字列
\end_layout
\end_inset
-・
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
+=
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Marginal
-\end_layout
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
-・
+] 図などのリストを含む外部ファイルのファイル拡張子名。LaTeXがキャプションを書き込むファイルです。
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Note:Comment
+GuiName
\end_layout
\end_inset
-・
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Note:Note
+文字列
\end_layout
\end_inset
-・
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
+=
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Note:GreyedOut
-\end_layout
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
-・
+] メニューとキャプションに使用される文字列。babelが使用される場合には、これは現在の言語に翻訳されます。
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-OptArg
+HTML*
\end_layout
\end_inset
-・
+ これらは、XHTML出力で使用されます。第
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sec:XHTML出力のタグ"
+
+\end_inset
+
+節をご覧ください。
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Table
+IsPredefined
\end_layout
\end_inset
-・
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-URL
+
+\emph on
+0
\end_layout
\end_inset
-。
-\end_layout
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
-\begin_layout Enumerate
-自由差込枠のレイアウトを定義する場合。この場合、
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-<型>
+1
\end_layout
\end_inset
-は
+] フロートがドキュメントクラス中に既に定義されているのか、あるいは
+\lang english
+LaTeX package
+\lang japanese
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Flex:<名称>
+float
\end_layout
\end_inset
-ã\81®å½¢ã\81§ã\81ªã\81\8fã\81¦ã\81¯ã\81ªã\82\8aã\81¾ã\81\9bã\82\93ã\80\82ã\81\93ã\81\93ã\81§ã\80\81
+ã\82\92èªã\81¿è¾¼ã\82\80å¿\85è¦\81ã\81\8cã\81\82ã\82\8aã\80\81ã\81\9dã\81®ã\83\95ã\82¡ã\82¤ã\83«å\86\85ã\81®ã\82\82ã\81®ã\82\92使ç\94¨ã\81\97ã\81¦ã\80\81ã\82ªã\83³ã\83»ã\82¶ã\83»ã\83\95ã\83©ã\82¤ã\81§å®\9a義ã\81\99ã\82\8bã\81\8bã\82\92示ã\81\97ã\81¾ã\81\99ã\80\82æ\97¢å®\9aã\81¯
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-名称
+0
\end_layout
\end_inset
-は、既存の自由差込枠で使用されていない有効な識別子であれば、何でも構いません。識別子には空白を入れることもできますが、この場合には全体を引用符で囲まなくてはなり
-ません。自由差込枠の定義には、この定義がどの差込枠型なのか宣言するために、
+で、この場合
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LyXType
+float
\end_layout
\end_inset
-項目が含まれていなくてはならないことに注意してください。
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Standard
+を使用します。LaTeXドキュメントクラス中に既に定義されているときには、
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-InsetLayout
+0
\end_layout
\end_inset
-定義には以下の項目を入れることができます。
+に設定しなくてはなりません。
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-BgColor
+ListCommand
\end_layout
\end_inset
[
-\lang english
-
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-<name>
+文字列
\end_layout
\end_inset
+=
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
-\lang japanese
-] 差込枠の背景色。
-\lang english
-See chapter
-\begin_inset space ~
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
+] この型のフロートの一覧を生成するのに使用するコマンド。頭部の「
+\backslash
+」は書きません。
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\begin_inset CommandInset ref
-LatexCommand ref
-reference "chap:Names-of-colors"
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+NeedsFloatPkg
+\end_layout
\end_inset
- for a list of the available color names.
+が偽の時には、このコマンドを生成する標準的な方法はないので、これは
+\emph on
+必ず
+\emph default
+指定しなくてはなりません。
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+NeedsFloatPkg
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+が真の時は、標準的な方法が存在するので、これは無視されます。
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-ContentAsLabel
+ListName
\end_layout
\end_inset
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\emph on
-0
+文字列
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
-\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+=
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
+] この種類のフロート一覧（図一覧・表一覧など）に使用される見出し。LyX中では、これは画面上のラベルとして使用されます。また、見出しとして使用するために、La
+TeXに渡され、XHTML出力でも見出しとして使用されます。これは、文書言語に翻訳されます。
+\end_layout
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-1
+NumberWithin
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] 差込枠を閉じた際、差込枠の内容をラベルとして使用するか否か。既定値は偽です。
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-CopyStyle
+文字列
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [<型>]
-\lang english
-As with paragraph styles, see sec.
-\begin_inset space ~
+=
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
-\lang japanese
-
-\begin_inset CommandInset ref
-LatexCommand ref
-reference "sub:段落様式"
-
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
-。
+] この（非必須の）引数は、このクラスのフロートが文書中のある節単位ごとに番号を振り直されるべきかどうかを規定します。
\lang english
-Note that you need to specify the complete type, e.
-\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
-\end_inset
+For example, if
+\lang japanese
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+NumberWithin
+\end_layout
-g.
-\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
+\lang english
+ is set to
+\lang japanese
+「
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-CopyStyle Flex:<name>
+chapter
\end_layout
\end_inset
-.
+」と指定されていれば、フロートは章ごとに番号が振り直されます。
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-CustomPars
+Placement
\end_layout
\end_inset
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\emph on
-0
+文字列
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
-\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+=
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
+] このクラスのフロートの既定の配置法。文字列は、標準的なLaTeX表記に従い、
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-1
+t
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] 段落を設定するのに、段落設定ダイアログをユーザが使えるかどうかを指定します。
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
+ならば上部（top）、
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Decoration
+b
\end_layout
\end_inset
- 差込枠の枠とボタンをレンダリングするのに使用する様式を指定するもので、
+ならば下部（bottom）、
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Classic
+p
\end_layout
\end_inset
-ã\83»
+ã\81ªã\82\89ã\81°ã\83\9aã\83¼ã\82¸ï¼\88pageï¼\89ã\80\81
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Minimalistic
+h
\end_layout
\end_inset
-ã\83»
-\begin_inset Flex Code
+ã\81ªã\82\89ã\81°ã\81\93ã\81\93ï¼\88hereï¼\89ã\82\92表ã\81\97ã\81¾ã\81\99
+\begin_inset Foot
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Conglomerate
+LaTeX同様、文字列中でのこれらの文字の順序は関係ありません。
\end_layout
\end_inset
-ã\81®ã\81\84ã\81\9aã\82\8cã\81\8bã\82\92æ\8c\87å®\9aã\81\99ã\82\8bã\81\93ã\81¨ã\81\8cã\81§ã\81\8dã\81¾ã\81\99ã\80\82è\84\9a注ã\81¯é\80\9a常
+ã\80\82ã\81\93ã\82\8cã\82\89ã\81®ä»\96ã\81«æ\96°ã\81\97ã\81\84å\9e\8b
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Classic
+H
\end_layout
\end_inset
-ã\82\92使ç\94¨ã\81\97ã\80\81TeXã\82³ã\83¼ã\83\89差込æ\9e ã\81¯é\80\9a常
+ã\81\8cã\81\82ã\82\8aã\80\81ã\81\93ã\82\8cã\81¯ã\83\95ã\83ã\83¼ã\83\88ã\82\92ã\80\8cã\81\93ã\81\93ã\80\8dã\81«ç½®ã\81\84ã\81¦ã\81\84ã\81\84ã\81\91ã\82\8cã\81©ã\82\82ä»\96ã\81®å ´æ\89\80ã\81¯ã\81 ã\82\81ã\80\81ã\81¨ã\81\84ã\81\86ã\82\82ã\81®ã\81ªã\81®ã\81§ã\80\81æ\9c¬å½\93ã\81¯ã\83\95ã\83ã\83¼ã\83\88ã\81«ã\81\82ã\82\8bã\82\82ã\81®ã\81§ã\81¯ã\81\82ã\82\8aã\81¾ã\81\9bã\82\93ã\80\82ã\81\97ã\81\8bã\81\97ã\80\81
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Minimalistic
+H
\end_layout
\end_inset
-、文字様式は
+指定子は特別なものであり、その細かい実装上の理由で、組み込み以外のフロート型では使用することができません。これが何を意味するかおわかりにならない場合には、代わり
+に「
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Conglomerate
+tbp
\end_layout
\end_inset
-ã\82\92使ç\94¨ã\81\97ã\81¾ã\81\99。
+ã\80\8dã\82\92æ\8c\87å®\9aã\81\97ã\81¦ã\81\8fã\81 ã\81\95ã\81\84。
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Display
+RefPrefix
\end_layout
\end_inset
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-0
+文字列
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
-\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
-\end_inset
-
-
+] この型のフロートを参照する際、生成されるラベルに使用する前置句。これによって、整形参照を使用することができるようになります。コピーした様式が設定した
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\emph on
-1
+RefPrefix
\end_layout
\end_inset
-]
+は、特別な文字列「OFF」（すべて大文字）を使えば、いつでも削除することができます。
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LatexType
+Style
\end_layout
\end_inset
-が
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Environment
+文字列
\end_layout
\end_inset
-の時のみ意味をもちます。環境を、出力中で独立して出力させるか、周囲のテキストとインラインで出力させるかを示します。偽にすると、LaTeX環境は、
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
+=
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
-\backslash
-begin{LatexName}
-\end_layout
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
-タグと
+]
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\backslash
-end{LatexName}
+newfloat
\end_layout
\end_inset
-ã\82¿ã\82°ã\81®å¾\8cã\81®ç©ºç\99½(æ\94¹è¡\8cæ\96\87å\97ã\82\92å\90«ã\82\80)ã\82\92ç\84¡è¦\96ã\81\99ã\82\8bã\82\82ã\81®ã\81¨ä»®å®\9aã\81\97ã\81¾ã\81\99。
+ã\82\92使ç\94¨ã\81\97ã\81¦ã\83\95ã\83ã\83¼ã\83\88ã\82\92å®\9a義ã\81\99ã\82\8bé\9a\9bã\81«ä½¿ç\94¨ã\81\95ã\82\8cã\82\8bæ§\98å¼\8f。
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-End
+Type
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-InsetLayout
+文字列
\end_layout
\end_inset
-宣言を閉じるのに必要です。
-\end_layout
+=
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
-\begin_layout Description
+
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
+] プログラムやアルゴリズムのような、フロートの新しいクラス「型」。適切な
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Font
-\end_layout
-\end_inset
-
- 本文本体とラベル
-\emph on
-両方に
-\emph default
-使用されるフォントです。第
-\begin_inset CommandInset ref
-LatexCommand ref
-reference "sub:フォント指定"
+\backslash
+newfloat
+\end_layout
\end_inset
-節を参照。このフォントを定義すると自動的に
+の後で、
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LabelFont
+
+\backslash
+begin{program}
\end_layout
\end_inset
-ã\82\82å\90\8cã\81\98å\80¤ã\81«å®\9a義ã\81\95ã\82\8cã\82\8bã\81®ã\81§ã\80\81ã\81\93ã\82\8cã\82\89ã\82\92å\88¥ã\80\85ã\81®å\80¤ã\81«ã\81\97ã\81\9fã\81\84ã\81¨ã\81\8dã\81¯ã\80\81ã\81\93ã\82\8cã\82\92å\85\88ã\81«å®\9a義ã\81\97ã\81¦ã\81\8bã\82\89å¾\8cã\81«
+ã\82\84
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LabelFont
+
+\backslash
+end{algorithm*}
\end_layout
\end_inset
-ã\82\92å®\9a義ã\81\97ã\81ªã\81\8fã\81¦ã\81¯ã\81ªã\82\89ã\81ªã\81\84ã\81\93ã\81¨ã\81«æ³¨æ\84\8fã\81\97ã\81¦ã\81\8fã\81 ã\81\95ã\81\84。
+ã\81¨ã\81\84ã\81£ã\81\9fã\82³ã\83\9eã\83³ã\83\89ã\81\8cå\88©ç\94¨ã\81§ã\81\8dã\81¾ã\81\99。
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-ForceLTR
+UsesFloatPkg
\end_layout
\end_inset
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\emph on
0
\end_layout
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\emph on
1
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] たとえばTeXコードやURLで「latex」言語が「左から右」（ラテン式）出力になるように強制します。うまく機能しません。
-\end_layout
+] このフロートが、クラスファイルやパッケージ中で、
+\lang english
+LaTeX-package
+\lang japanese
-\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-ForcePlain
+float
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
+が提供しているものを使用して定義されているのか、LyX自身がオン・ザ・フライで定義しているのかを示します。
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Standard
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\emph on
-0
+type
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
-\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
-\end_inset
-
+型のフロートを定義すると、自動的に
+\emph on
+対応する
+\emph default
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-1
+
+\emph on
+type
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] PlainLayoutを使用するべきなのか、それともユーザが差込枠で使用されている段落様式を変更できるのかを指定します。既定値は偽です。
+名カウンタが定義されます。
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-FreeSpacing
-\end_layout
+\begin_layout Subsection
+自由差込枠と差込枠レイアウト
+\begin_inset CommandInset label
+LatexCommand label
+name "sub:任意設定差込枠"
\end_inset
- [
-\emph on
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Standard
+自由差込枠には次の3種類があります。
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Itemize
+文字様式（
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-0
+CharStyle
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
-\emph default
-,
-\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
-\end_inset
-
-
+）。これは、
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-1
-\end_layout
-\end_inset
+\backslash
+noun
+\end_layout
-]
-\lang english
-As with paragraph styles, see sec.
-\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
+や
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\lang japanese
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
-\begin_inset CommandInset ref
-LatexCommand ref
-reference "sub:段落様式"
+\backslash
+code
+\end_layout
\end_inset
-。
+ã\81ªã\81©ã\81®LaTeXã\82³ã\83\9eã\83³ã\83\89ã\81«å¯¾å¿\9cã\81\97ã\81\9fæ\84\8få\91³è«\96ç\9a\84ã\83\9eã\83¼ã\82¯ã\82¢ã\83\83ã\83\97ã\82\92å®\9a義ã\81\99ã\82\8bã\82\82ã\81®ã\81§ã\81\99ã\80\82
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
+\begin_layout Itemize
+ユーザ設定（
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-HTML*
+Custom
\end_layout
\end_inset
- これらは、XHTML出力で使用されます。第
-\begin_inset CommandInset ref
-LatexCommand ref
-reference "sec:XHTML出力のタグ"
+）。これは、TeXコードや脚注などに似たユーザ設定の折りたたみ式差込枠を定義するのに使用することができます。わかりやすい例はendnote差込枠で、これは
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+endnote
+\end_layout
\end_inset
-節をご覧ください。
+モジュール中で定義されています。
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
+\begin_layout Itemize
+XML要素（
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-InToc
+Element
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
+）。DocBookクラスで使用するものです。
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Standard
+自由差込枠は、以下で説明する
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\emph on
-0
+InsetLayout
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
-\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
-\end_inset
-
+タグを使用して定義されます。
+\end_layout
+\begin_layout Standard
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-1
+InsetLayout
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] 「文書構造」ペイン用に出力される文字列に、この差込枠の内容を含めるかどうか。たとえば、節見出しの脚注の内容が、文書構造の目次に表示されることは望まないでしょ
-うが、通常、文字様式の内容は表示されることを望むでしょう。既定値は偽、すなわち含めません。
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
+タグは、もう一つ別の機能も提供します。これを使えば、いろいろな種類の差込枠全体のレイアウトを設定するのに使用することができるのです。現在のところ、
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-KeepEmpty
+InsetLayout
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
-\emph on
+は自由差込枠を定義することの他に、脚注・傍注・注釈差込枠・TeXコード（ERT）差込枠・派生枝・リスト・索引・ボックス・表・アルゴリズム・URL・オプション引数
+のレイアウトパラメータを設定するのに使用することができます。
+\end_layout
+\begin_layout Standard
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-0
+InsetLayout
\end_layout
\end_inset
+定義は以下の形の行では始まらなくてはなりません。
+\end_layout
-\emph default
-,
-\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
-\end_inset
-
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+InsetLayout <型>
+\end_layout
+\begin_layout Standard
+ここで
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-1
+<型>
\end_layout
\end_inset
-]
-\lang english
-As with paragraph styles, see sec.
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
+は、レイアウトを定義しようとしている差込枠を指し、以下の2つの場合がありえます。
+\end_layout
-\lang japanese
+\begin_layout Enumerate
+既存の差込枠のレイアウトを変更する場合。この場合、
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\begin_inset CommandInset ref
-LatexCommand ref
-reference "sub:段落様式"
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+<型>
+\end_layout
\end_inset
-。
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
+は以下のいずれかになります：
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LabelFont
+Algorithm
\end_layout
\end_inset
- ラベルに使用されるフォント。第
-\begin_inset CommandInset ref
-LatexCommand ref
-reference "sub:フォント指定"
-
-\end_inset
-
-節を参照。非効率を回避するため、この定義は
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Font
-\end_layout
-
-\end_inset
-
-の前には決して現れてはなりません。
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
+・
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LabelString
+Branch
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
+・
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-文字列
+Box
\end_layout
\end_inset
-=
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
-\end_inset
-
-
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
-\end_inset
-
-]
-\lang english
-
-\lang japanese
-ボタンなどに差込枠のラベルとして表示されるもの。差込枠型によっては（TeXコードや派生枝）、ラベルが動的に変更されます。
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
+・
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LatexName
+Box:shaded
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
-\lang english
-
+・
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-<name>
+ERT
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
-\lang japanese
-] 対応するLaTeX関連物の名称。環境名ないしはコマンド名。
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
+・
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LatexParam
+Figure
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
-\lang english
-[
+・
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\lang english
-<parameter>
+Foot
\end_layout
\end_inset
-]
-\lang japanese
-対応する
+・
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LatexName
+Index
\end_layout
\end_inset
-関連物の非必須パラメータ。
+・
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-[]
+Info
\end_layout
\end_inset
-のような括弧対を含む。このパラメータはLyX内部から変更することはできません。
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
+・
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LatexType
+Info:menu
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
-\lang english
-As with paragraph styles, see sec.
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-
-\lang japanese
-
-\begin_inset CommandInset ref
-LatexCommand ref
-reference "sub:段落様式"
-
-\end_inset
-
-。
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
+・
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LyxType
+Info:shortcut
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
+・
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-charstyle
+Info:shortcuts
\end_layout
\end_inset
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-custom
+Listings
\end_layout
\end_inset
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-element
+Marginal
\end_layout
\end_inset
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-end
+Note:Comment
\end_layout
\end_inset
-（charstyleの定義の終わりなどを示すダミー定義）の各値を取ることができます。この項目は、自由差込枠に必須であり、かつ自由差込枠でしか意味を持ちません。こ
-の項目は、就中、差込枠がどのメニューに表示されるかを決定します。
+・
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LyxType
+Note:Note
\end_layout
\end_inset
-ã\82\92
+ã\83»
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-charstyle
+Note:GreyedOut
\end_layout
\end_inset
-ã\81«è¨å®\9aã\81\99ã\82\8bã\81¨ã\80\81
+ã\83»
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-MultiPar
+OptArg
\end_layout
\end_inset
-ã\81\8cå\81½ã\81«è¨å®\9aã\81\95ã\82\8cã\81¾ã\81\99ã\80\82æ\96\87å\97æ§\98å¼\8f差込æ\9e ã\81§
+ã\83»
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-MultiPar
+Table
\end_layout
\end_inset
-ã\82\92ç\9c\9fã\81«ã\81\97ã\81\9fã\81\84æ\99\82ã\81«ã\81¯ã\80\81
+ã\83»
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LyxType
+URL
\end_layout
\end_inset
-を設定した
-\emph on
-後に
-\emph default
-設定すれば、真に設定することができます。
+。
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
+\begin_layout Enumerate
+自由差込枠のレイアウトを定義する場合。この場合、
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-MultiPar
+<型>
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
+は
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\emph on
-0
+Flex:<名称>
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
-\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
-\end_inset
-
-
+の形でなくてはなりません。ここで、
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-1
+名称
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] この差込枠中に複数の段落を入れることができるかどうか。これは同時に、
+は、既存の自由差込枠で使用されていない有効な識別子であれば、何でも構いません。識別子には空白を入れることもできますが、この場合には全体を引用符で囲まなくてはなり
+ません。自由差込枠の定義には、この定義がどの差込枠型なのか宣言するために、
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-CustomPars
+LyXType
\end_layout
\end_inset
-を同じ値に設定し、
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-ForcePlain
+項目が含まれていなくてはならないことに注意してください。
\end_layout
-\end_inset
-
-を逆の値に設定します。これらは、
+\begin_layout Standard
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-MultiPar
+InsetLayout
\end_layout
\end_inset
-の
-\emph on
-後に
-\emph default
-指定されれば、他の値に指定し直すことができます。既定値は真です。
+定義には以下の項目を入れることができます。
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-NeedProtect
+BgColor
\end_layout
\end_inset
[
+\lang english
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-\emph on
-0
+\lang english
+<name>
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
-\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
-\end_inset
-
-
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-1
-\end_layout
+\lang japanese
+] 差込枠の背景色。
+\lang english
+See chapter
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
-] 本レイアウト中で脆弱なコマンドを
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-\backslash
-protect
-\end_layout
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "chap:Names-of-colors"
\end_inset
-するか否か（註：当該コマンド自身をprotectするかどうかでは
-\emph on
-ありません
-\emph default
-）。既定値は偽です。
+ for a list of the available color names.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-ParbreakIsNewline
+ContentAsLabel
\end_layout
\end_inset
\end_inset
-]
+] 差込枠を閉じた際、差込枠の内容をラベルとして使用するか否か。既定値は偽です。
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+CopyStyle
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ [<型>]
\lang english
As with paragraph styles, see sec.
\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
。
-\end_layout
+\lang english
+Note that you need to specify the complete type, e.
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
-\begin_layout Description
-\begin_inset Flex Code
+g.
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-PassThru
+
+\lang english
+CopyStyle Flex:<name>
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
-\emph on
+.
+\end_layout
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-0
+CustomPars
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
-\emph default
-,
-\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
-\end_inset
-
-
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-1
+
+\emph on
+0
\end_layout
\end_inset
-]
-\lang english
-As with paragraph styles, see sec.
-\begin_inset space ~
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
-\lang japanese
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\begin_inset CommandInset ref
-LatexCommand ref
-reference "sub:段落様式"
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+1
+\end_layout
\end_inset
-。
+] 段落を設定するのに、段落設定ダイアログをユーザが使えるかどうかを指定します。
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Preamble
+Decoration
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
-\lang english
-As with paragraph styles, see sec.
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-
-\lang japanese
+ 差込枠の枠とボタンをレンダリングするのに使用する様式を指定するもので、
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\begin_inset CommandInset ref
-LatexCommand ref
-reference "sub:段落様式"
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Classic
+\end_layout
\end_inset
-。
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
+・
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-RefPrefix
+Minimalistic
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
+・
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-文字列
+Conglomerate
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] この型の差込枠を参照する際、生成されるラベルに使用する前置句。これによって、整形参照を使用することができるようになります。
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
+のいずれかを指定することができます。脚注は通常
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Requires
+Classic
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
+を使用し、TeXコード差込枠は通常
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-文字列
+Minimalistic
\end_layout
\end_inset
-]
-\lang english
-As with paragraph styles, see sec.
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-
-\lang japanese
+、文字様式は
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\begin_inset CommandInset ref
-LatexCommand ref
-reference "sub:段落様式"
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Conglomerate
+\end_layout
\end_inset
-。
+ã\82\92使ç\94¨ã\81\97ã\81¾ã\81\99ã\80\82
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-ResetFont
+Display
\end_layout
\end_inset
\end_inset
-] この差込枠が周囲の環境と同じフォントを用いるか、独自のフォントを用いるか。既定値は真、すなわち独自のフォントを用います。
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
+]
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Spellcheck
+LatexType
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
+が
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-0
+Environment
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
-\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
-\end_inset
-
-
+の時のみ意味をもちます。環境を、出力中で独立して出力させるか、周囲のテキストとインラインで出力させるかを示します。偽にすると、LaTeX環境は、
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-\emph on
-1
+\backslash
+begin{LatexName}
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] この差込枠の内容をスペルチェックするか否か。既定値は真です。
-\end_layout
+タグと
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\begin_layout Subsection
-カウンタ
-\begin_inset CommandInset label
-LatexCommand label
-name "sub:カウンタ"
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
-\end_inset
+\backslash
+end{LatexName}
+\end_layout
+\end_inset
+タグの後の空白(改行文字を含む)を無視するものと仮定します。
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Standard
-
-\lang english
-It is necessary to define the counters
-\lang japanese
-（
-\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
+\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-chapter
+End
\end_layout
\end_inset
-・
-\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-figure
+InsetLayout
\end_layout
\end_inset
-・\SpecialChar \ldots{}
-）を定義することが可能となり、かつ必要となりました。標準的なフロートは
+宣言を閉じるのに必要です。
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-stdcounters.inc
+Font
\end_layout
\end_inset
-ファイルに含まれているので、作業中のレイアウトファイルに
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-Input stdcounters.inc
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Standard
-と加えるだけで済むことも多いでしょう。しかし自製カウンタを定義したければ、そうすることもできます。カウンタ宣言は、
-\end_layout
+ 本文本体とラベル
+\emph on
+両方に
+\emph default
+使用されるフォントです。第
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:フォント指定"
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-Counter カウンタ名
-\end_layout
+\end_inset
-\begin_layout Standard
-で始まらなくてはなりません。ここで「
+節を参照。このフォントを定義すると自動的に
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-カウンタ名
+LabelFont
\end_layout
\end_inset
-ã\80\8dã\81¯ã\80\81å®\9fé\9a\9bã\81®ã\82«ã\82¦ã\83³ã\82¿å\90\8dã\81§ç½®ã\81\8dæ\8f\9bã\81\88ã\81¾ã\81\99ã\80\82ã\81¾ã\81\9fã\80\81宣è¨\80ã\81¯ã\80\8c
+ã\82\82å\90\8cã\81\98å\80¤ã\81«å®\9a義ã\81\95ã\82\8cã\82\8bã\81®ã\81§ã\80\81ã\81\93ã\82\8cã\82\89ã\82\92å\88¥ã\80\85ã\81®å\80¤ã\81«ã\81\97ã\81\9fã\81\84ã\81¨ã\81\8dã\81¯ã\80\81ã\81\93ã\82\8cã\82\92å\85\88ã\81«å®\9a義ã\81\97ã\81¦ã\81\8bã\82\89å¾\8cã\81«
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-End
+LabelFont
\end_layout
\end_inset
-」で終わらなくてはなりません。
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Standard
-以下のパラメータを使用することができます。
+を定義しなくてはならないことに注意してください。
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LabelString [文字列=""]
+ForceLTR
\end_layout
\end_inset
- 定義されていると、ここで指定した文字列がカウンタの表示の仕方を定義します。この値を指定すると、
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LabelStringAppendix
+
+\emph on
+0
\end_layout
\end_inset
-も同じ値に設定されます。文字列中では、以下の構成要素を使用することができます。
-\end_layout
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
-\begin_deeper
-\begin_layout Itemize
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\backslash
-thecounter
+1
\end_layout
\end_inset
-は、カウンタ
+] たとえばTeXコードやURLで「latex」言語が「左から右」（ラテン式）出力になるように強制します。うまく機能しません。
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-counter
+ForcePlain
\end_layout
\end_inset
-の
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LabelString
+
+\emph on
+0
\end_layout
\end_inset
-（または
-\begin_inset Newline linebreak
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LabelStringAppendix
+1
\end_layout
\end_inset
-）を展開したもので置き換えられます。
+] PlainLayoutを使用するべきなのか、それともユーザが差込枠で使用されている段落様式を変更できるのかを指定します。既定値は偽です。
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Itemize
-カウンタ値は、LaTeX型マクロ
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
+FreeSpacing
+\end_layout
-\backslash
+\end_inset
+ [
\emph on
-numbertype
-\emph default
-{
-\emph on
-カウンタ
-\emph default
-}
-\end_layout
-
-\end_inset
-を用いて表現することができます。ここで
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\emph on
-numbertype
+0
\end_layout
\end_inset
-は以下のいずれかです。
+
+\emph default
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-arabic
+1
\end_layout
\end_inset
-：1, 2, 3,\SpecialChar \ldots{}
-；
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
+]
+\lang english
+As with paragraph styles, see sec.
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-alph
-\end_layout
+
+\lang japanese
+
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:段落様式"
\end_inset
-：a, b, c, \SpecialChar \ldots{}
-（小文字）；
+。
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Alph
+HTML*
\end_layout
\end_inset
-：A, B, C, \SpecialChar \ldots{}
-（大文字）；
+ これらは、XHTML出力で使用されます。第
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sec:XHTML出力のタグ"
+
+\end_inset
+
+節をご覧ください。
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-roman
+InToc
\end_layout
\end_inset
-：i, ii, iii, \SpecialChar \ldots{}
-（小文字ローマ数字）；
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Roman
+
+\emph on
+0
\end_layout
\end_inset
-：I, II, III\SpecialChar \ldots{}
-（大文字ローマ数字）。
-\end_layout
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
-\end_deeper
-\begin_layout Standard
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LabelString
+1
\end_layout
\end_inset
-が定義されていないときは、既定値は以下のように組み立てられます。このカウンタに親カウンタ
+] 「文書構造」ペイン用に出力される文字列に、この差込枠の内容を含めるかどうか。たとえば、節見出しの脚注の内容が、文書構造の目次に表示されることは望まないでしょ
+うが、通常、文字様式の内容は表示されることを望むでしょう。既定値は偽、すなわち含めません。
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-master
+KeepEmpty
\end_layout
\end_inset
-（
+ [
+\emph on
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Within
+0
\end_layout
\end_inset
-で定義）があるときには、文字列
-\begin_inset Newline linebreak
+
+\emph default
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\backslash
-themaster.
-\backslash
-arabic{カウンタ}
+1
\end_layout
\end_inset
-が使用されます。それ以外の場合は、
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
+]
+\lang english
+As with paragraph styles, see sec.
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-\backslash
-arabic{カウンタ}
-\end_layout
+\lang japanese
+
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:段落様式"
\end_inset
-ã\81\8c使ç\94¨ã\81\95ã\82\8cã\81¾ã\81\99ã\80\82
+。
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LabelStringAppendix
+LabelFont
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-文字列
-\end_layout
+ ラベルに使用されるフォント。第
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:フォント指定"
\end_inset
-=""]
+節を参照。非効率を回避するため、この定義は
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LabelString
+Font
\end_layout
\end_inset
-ã\81¨å\90\8cæ§\98ã\81§ã\81\99ã\81\8cã\80\81ä»\98é\8c²ã\81§ä½¿ç\94¨ã\81\99ã\82\8bã\81\9fã\82\81ã\81®ã\82\82ã\81®ã\81§ã\81\99。
+ã\81®å\89\8dã\81«ã\81¯æ±ºã\81\97ã\81¦ç\8f¾ã\82\8cã\81¦ã\81¯ã\81ªã\82\8aã\81¾ã\81\9bã\82\93。
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-PrettyFormat
+LabelString
\end_layout
\end_inset
\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
-] このカウンタの整形参照で使用する書式。たとえば、節番号への参照を「Section
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-2.4」のように表示させたい場合には、文字列に「##」を含めます。これは、カウンタ番号で置換されます。したがって、節の場合には「Section ##」のようにしま
-す。
+]
+\lang english
+
+\lang japanese
+ボタンなどに差込枠のラベルとして表示されるもの。差込枠型によっては（TeXコードや派生枝）、ラベルが動的に変更されます。
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Within
+LatexName
\end_layout
\end_inset
[
+\lang english
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-文字列
-\end_layout
-\end_inset
+\lang english
+<name>
+\end_layout
-=
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
-\end_inset
+\lang japanese
+] 対応するLaTeX関連物の名称。環境名ないしはコマンド名。
+\end_layout
-] これを別のカウンタ名に設定すると、現在のカウンタは、別のカウンタが増加する毎にリセットされます。たとえば、
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-subsection
+LatexParam
\end_layout
\end_inset
-は
+
+\lang english
+[
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-section
-\end_layout
-
-\end_inset
-毎に番号がリセットされます。
+\lang english
+<parameter>
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Subsection
-フォント指定
-\begin_inset CommandInset label
-LatexCommand label
-name "sub:フォント指定"
-
\end_inset
-
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Standard
-フォント指定は、以下のような形を取ります。
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-Font
-\family roman
-\emph on
-または
-\family default
-\emph default
- LabelFont
-\family roman
-\emph on
-または
-\family default
-\emph default
- DefaultFont
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
- ...
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-EndFont
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Standard
-以下のコマンドを使用することができます。
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
+]
+\lang japanese
+対応する
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Color
+LatexName
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
+関連物の非必須パラメータ。
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\emph on
-none
+[]
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+のような括弧対を含む。このパラメータはLyX内部から変更することはできません。
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-black
+LatexType
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
+
+\lang english
+As with paragraph styles, see sec.
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-white
-\end_layout
+
+\lang japanese
+
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:段落様式"
\end_inset
-,
+。
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-red
+LyxType
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-green
+charstyle
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+・
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-blue
+custom
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+・
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-cyan
+element
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+・
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-magenta
+end
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+（charstyleの定義の終わりなどを示すダミー定義）の各値を取ることができます。この項目は、自由差込枠に必須であり、かつ自由差込枠でしか意味を持ちません。こ
+の項目は、就中、差込枠がどのメニューに表示されるかを決定します。
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-yellow
+LyxType
\end_layout
\end_inset
-]
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
+を
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Family
+charstyle
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
-\emph on
-
+に設定すると、
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Roman
+MultiPar
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
-\emph default
-,
+が偽に設定されます。文字様式差込枠で
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Sans
+MultiPar
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+を真にしたい時には、
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Typewriter
+LyxType
\end_layout
\end_inset
-]
+を設定した
+\emph on
+後に
+\emph default
+設定すれば、真に設定することができます。
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Misc
+MultiPar
\end_layout
\end_inset
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-文字列
+
+\emph on
+0
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] 有効な引数は、
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-emph
-\end_layout
-
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
-・
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-noun
+1
\end_layout
\end_inset
-・
+] この差込枠中に複数の段落を入れることができるかどうか。これは同時に、
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-strikeout
+CustomPars
\end_layout
\end_inset
-ã\83»
+ã\82\92å\90\8cã\81\98å\80¤ã\81«è¨å®\9aã\81\97ã\80\81
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-underbar
+ForcePlain
\end_layout
\end_inset
-ã\83»
+ã\82\92é\80\86ã\81®å\80¤ã\81«è¨å®\9aã\81\97ã\81¾ã\81\99ã\80\82ã\81\93ã\82\8cã\82\89ã\81¯ã\80\81
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-uuline
+MultiPar
\end_layout
\end_inset
-・
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-uwave
+の
+\emph on
+後に
+\emph default
+指定されれば、他の値に指定し直すことができます。既定値は真です。
\end_layout
-\end_inset
-
-・
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-no_emph
+NeedProtect
\end_layout
\end_inset
-・
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-no_noun
+
+\emph on
+0
\end_layout
\end_inset
-・
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-no_strikeout
+1
\end_layout
\end_inset
-・
+] 本レイアウト中で脆弱なコマンドを
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-no_bar
+
+\backslash
+protect
\end_layout
\end_inset
-・
+するか否か（註：当該コマンド自身をprotectするかどうかでは
+\emph on
+ありません
+\emph default
+）。既定値は偽です。
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-no_uuline
+ParbreakIsNewline
\end_layout
\end_inset
-・
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-no_uwave
+
+\emph on
+0
\end_layout
\end_inset
-です。それぞれ、対応する属性を有効にしたり無効にしたりします。
-\begin_inset Newline newline
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
-たとえば、
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-emph
+1
\end_layout
\end_inset
-は強調を有効にし、
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-no_emph
-\end_layout
-
+]
+\lang english
+As with paragraph styles, see sec.
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
-はそれを無効にします。もし後者がわかりにくければ、現在のコンテクストのフォント設定は、一般的に周囲のコンテクストから継承していることを思い出してください。ですか
-ら
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-no_emph
-\end_layout
+\lang japanese
+
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:段落様式"
\end_inset
-ã\81¯ã\80\81ã\81\9fã\81¨ã\81\88ã\81°å®\9aç\90\86ç\92°å¢\83ã\81§ã\80\81ä½\95ã\82\92ã\81\9bã\81\9aã\81¨ã\82\82æ\9c\89å\8a¹ã\81¨ã\81ªã\81£ã\81¦ã\81\84ã\82\8b強調ã\82\92ç\84¡å\8a¹ã\81«ã\81\99ã\82\8bã\81®ã\81§ã\81\99ã\80\82
+。
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Series
+PassThru
\end_layout
\end_inset
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Medium
+0
\end_layout
\end_inset
\emph default
-,
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Bold
+1
\end_layout
\end_inset
]
+\lang english
+As with paragraph styles, see sec.
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+
+\lang japanese
+
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:段落様式"
+
+\end_inset
+
+。
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Shape
+Preamble
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
-\emph on
+
+\lang english
+As with paragraph styles, see sec.
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Up
-\end_layout
+\lang japanese
+
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:段落様式"
\end_inset
+。
+\end_layout
-\emph default
-,
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Italic
+RefPrefix
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-SmallCaps
+文字列
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+] この型の差込枠を参照する際、生成されるラベルに使用する前置句。これによって、整形参照を使用することができるようになります。
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Slanted
+Requires
\end_layout
\end_inset
-]
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Size
+文字列
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-tiny
-\end_layout
-
+]
+\lang english
+As with paragraph styles, see sec.
+\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
-,
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-small
-\end_layout
+\lang japanese
+
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:段落様式"
\end_inset
-,
+。
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\emph on
-normal
+ResetFont
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-large
+0
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-larger
+
+\emph on
+1
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+] この差込枠が周囲の環境と同じフォントを用いるか、独自のフォントを用いるか。既定値は真、すなわち独自のフォントを用います。
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-largest
+Spellcheck
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-huge
+0
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-giant
+
+\emph on
+1
\end_layout
\end_inset
-]
+] この差込枠の内容をスペルチェックするか否か。既定値は真です。
\end_layout
\begin_layout Subsection
+カウンタ
\begin_inset CommandInset label
LatexCommand label
-name "sub:引用書式指定"
+name "sub:カウンタ"
\end_inset
-引用書式指定
+
\end_layout
\begin_layout Standard
-（引用ダイアログやツールチップなどの）LyX内部やXHTML出力において、書誌情報をどのように表示するべきかの叙述には、
-\begin_inset Flex Code
+
+\lang english
+It is necessary to define the counters
+\lang japanese
+（
+\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-CiteFormat
+chapter
\end_layout
\end_inset
-ブロックが使用されています。このブロックは、以下のような形をしています。
-\end_layout
+・
+\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
+status collapsed
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-CiteFormat
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+figure
\end_layout
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
- article ...
+\end_inset
+
+・\SpecialChar \ldots{}
+）を定義することが可能となり、かつ必要となりました。標準的なフロートは
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+stdcounters.inc
\end_layout
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
- book ...
+\end_inset
+
+ファイルに含まれているので、作業中のレイアウトファイルに
\end_layout
\begin_layout LyX-Code
-End
+Input stdcounters.inc
\end_layout
\begin_layout Standard
-上記の各行は、それぞれarticleやbookに関連付けられた書誌情報をどのように表示するべきかを定義するものですが、このような定義は、BibTeXファイル中に
-存在しうる「項目型」すべてについて与えることができます。特定の定義が与えられなければ、LyXは、ソースコード中に定義されている既定書式を使用します。LyXは、い
-くつかの書式を
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-stdciteformats.inc
+と加えるだけで済むことも多いでしょう。しかし自製カウンタを定義したければ、そうすることもできます。カウンタ宣言は、
\end_layout
-\end_inset
-
-ファイルで事前定義しており、これはほとんどのLyX文書クラスにインクルードされています。
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+Counter カウンタ名
\end_layout
\begin_layout Standard
-ã\81\93ã\81®å®\9a義ã\81¯ã\80\81BibTeXã\82ã\83¼ã\82\92ã\81\9dã\81®å\80¤ã\81§ç½®æ\8f\9bã\81§ã\81\8dã\82\8bæ©\9fè\83½ã\82\92æ\8c\81ã\81£ã\81\9fã\80\81ç°¡å\8d\98ã\81ªè¨\80èª\9eã\82\92使ç\94¨ã\81\97ã\81¦ã\81\84ã\81¾ã\81\99ã\80\82ã\82ã\83¼ã\81¯ã\80\81
+ã\81§å§\8bã\81¾ã\82\89ã\81ªã\81\8fã\81¦ã\81¯ã\81ªã\82\8aã\81¾ã\81\9bã\82\93ã\80\82ã\81\93ã\81\93ã\81§ã\80\8c
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-%author%
+カウンタ名
\end_layout
\end_inset
-ã\81®ã\82\88ã\81\86ã\81«
+ã\80\8dã\81¯ã\80\81å®\9fé\9a\9bã\81®ã\82«ã\82¦ã\83³ã\82¿å\90\8dã\81§ç½®ã\81\8dæ\8f\9bã\81\88ã\81¾ã\81\99ã\80\82ã\81¾ã\81\9fã\80\81宣è¨\80ã\81¯ã\80\8c
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-%
-\end_layout
-
-\end_inset
-
-記号でくくらなくてはなりません。したがって、簡単な定義は以下のようになります。
+End
\end_layout
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-misc %author%,
-\begin_inset Quotes eld
-\end_inset
-
-%title%
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
-
+」で終わらなくてはなりません。
\end_layout
\begin_layout Standard
-これは、「著者名・コンマ・引用に囲まれたタイトル・終止符」を出力します。
+以下のパラメータを使用することができます。
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Standard
-もちろん、キーが存在するときのみ、キーを出力したい時があるはずです。このようなときには
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-{%volume%[[vol.
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-%volume%]]}
+LabelString [文字列=""]
\end_layout
\end_inset
-のように、条件付きの構成を使用することができます。これは、
+ 定義されていると、ここで指定した文字列がカウンタの表示の仕方を定義します。この値を指定すると、
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-volume
+LabelStringAppendix
\end_layout
\end_inset
-が存在するならば，「vol.
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-」とvolumeキーを出力するという意味です。また、
-\begin_inset Newline newline
-\end_inset
-
+も同じ値に設定されます。文字列中では、以下の構成要素を使用することができます。
+\end_layout
+\begin_deeper
+\begin_layout Itemize
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-{%author%[[%author%]][[%editor%, ed.]]}
+
+\backslash
+thecounter
\end_layout
\end_inset
+は、カウンタ
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+counter
+\end_layout
-\begin_inset Newline newline
\end_inset
-のように、条件の中にelse節を含めることも可能です。ここでは、もし
+の
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-author
+LabelString
\end_layout
\end_inset
-キーが存在するならば出力され、そうでなければeditorキーと「,
-\begin_inset space ~
+（または
+\begin_inset Newline linebreak
\end_inset
-ed.」が出力されます。ここでもキーは、
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-%
+LabelStringAppendix
\end_layout
\end_inset
-記号でくくられていることに注意してください。条件全体は、波括弧で囲まれています。if節およびelse節は、「
+）を展開したもので置き換えられます。
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Itemize
+カウンタ値は、LaTeX型マクロ
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-[[
+
+\backslash
+
+\emph on
+numbertype
+\emph default
+{
+\emph on
+カウンタ
+\emph default
+}
\end_layout
\end_inset
-ã\80\8dã\81¨ã\80\8c
+ã\82\92ç\94¨ã\81\84ã\81¦è¡¨ç\8f¾ã\81\99ã\82\8bã\81\93ã\81¨ã\81\8cã\81§ã\81\8dã\81¾ã\81\99ã\80\82ã\81\93ã\81\93ã\81§
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-]]
+
+\emph on
+numbertype
\end_layout
\end_inset
-」の二重角括弧で囲まれています。これらすべてのあいだには，空白は入ってはなりません。
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Standard
-もう一つ、定義中で使用することのできる文法として、
+は以下のいずれかです。
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-{!<i>!}
+arabic
\end_layout
\end_inset
-という形をしたものがあります。これは、「リッチテキスト」を生成するときに使われる整形情報を定義するものです。当然のことながら、平文を書き出すときには、HTMLタ
-グを出力させたくはありませんから、HTMLタグは「
+：1, 2, 3,\SpecialChar \ldots{}
+；
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-{!
+alph
\end_layout
\end_inset
-」と「
+：a, b, c, \SpecialChar \ldots{}
+（小文字）；
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-!}
+Alph
\end_layout
\end_inset
-」でくるんでやらなくてはならないのです。
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Standard
+：A, B, C, \SpecialChar \ldots{}
+（大文字）；
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-CiteFormat
+roman
\end_layout
\end_inset
-ブロックでは、他に2つの特殊な定義が可能です。一つめの例としては、
-\end_layout
+：i, ii, iii, \SpecialChar \ldots{}
+（小文字ローマ数字）；
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-!quotetitle
-\begin_inset Quotes eld
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Roman
+\end_layout
-%title%
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
-
+：I, II, III\SpecialChar \ldots{}
+（大文字ローマ数字）。
\end_layout
+\end_deeper
\begin_layout Standard
-といった例が挙げられます。これは、短縮形ないしはマクロであり、
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-%!quotetitle%
+LabelString
\end_layout
\end_inset
-ã\81®ã\82\88ã\81\86ã\81«ã\80\81ã\81\93ã\82\8cã\81\8cã\82ã\83¼ã\81§ã\81\82ã\82\8bã\81\8bã\81®ã\82\88ã\81\86ã\81«æ\89±ã\81£ã\81¦ä½¿ç\94¨ã\81\99ã\82\8bã\81\93ã\81¨ã\81\8cã\81§ã\81\8dã\81¾ã\81\99ã\80\82LyXã\81¯ã\80\81
+ã\81\8cå®\9a義ã\81\95ã\82\8cã\81¦ã\81\84ã\81ªã\81\84ã\81¨ã\81\8dã\81¯ã\80\81æ\97¢å®\9aå\80¤ã\81¯ä»¥ä¸\8bã\81®ã\82\88ã\81\86ã\81«çµ\84ã\81¿ç«\8bã\81¦ã\82\89ã\82\8cã\81¾ã\81\99ã\80\82ã\81\93ã\81®ã\82«ã\82¦ã\83³ã\82¿ã\81«è¦ªã\82«ã\82¦ã\83³ã\82¿
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-%!quotetitle%
+master
\end_layout
\end_inset
-を、そこで定義されているものを扱う場合と同じように取り扱います。ですから、明白な警告を敢えてさせて頂くと、
-\end_layout
+（
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-!funfun %funfun%
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Within
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Standard
-のようなことはしないでください。LyXは、無限ループに陥るようなことはありませんが、諦めるまでに長いループに入るかもしれません。
+\end_inset
+
+で定義）があるときには、文字列
+\begin_inset Newline linebreak
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\backslash
+themaster.
+\backslash
+arabic{カウンタ}
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Standard
-特殊な定義の二つめは、
+\end_inset
+
+が使用されます。それ以外の場合は、
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\backslash
+arabic{カウンタ}
\end_layout
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-_pptext pp.
+\end_inset
+
+が使用されます。
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Standard
-のようなものです。これは、文字列の翻訳可能な部分を定義するもので、書誌情報中の関連部分が翻訳されるようにすることができます。
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-%_pptext%
+LabelStringAppendix
\end_layout
\end_inset
-のように、これをキーとして扱って、定義の中に入れることもできます。これらのうちいくつかは、
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-stdciteformats.inc
+文字列
\end_layout
\end_inset
-中に事前定義されています。これは、上記で述べたような意味でのマクロではないことに注意してください。
+=""]
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+LabelString
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Standard
-以下は、これらの機能を全て使った例です。
-\begin_inset VSpace defskip
\end_inset
-
+と同様ですが、付録で使用するためのものです。
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Standard
-\noindent
+\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\family typewriter
-!authoredit {%author%[[%author%, ]][[{%editor%[[%editor%, %_edtext%, ]]}]]}
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+PrettyFormat
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Standard
-\begin_inset VSpace defskip
\end_inset
-これは、
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-author
+文字列
\end_layout
\end_inset
-キーが定義されているならば、著者とコンマを出力し、
+=
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
+] このカウンタの整形参照で使用する書式。たとえば、節番号への参照を「Section
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+2.4」のように表示させたい場合には、文字列に「##」を含めます。これは、カウンタ番号で置換されます。したがって、節の場合には「Section ##」のようにしま
+す。
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-author
+Within
\end_layout
\end_inset
-キーが定義されておらず、
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-editor
+文字列
\end_layout
\end_inset
-キーが定義されているならば、編集者名の後に
+=
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
+] これを別のカウンタ名に設定すると、現在のカウンタは、別のカウンタが増加する毎にリセットされます。たとえば、
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-_edtext
+subsection
\end_layout
\end_inset
-ã\81ªã\81\84ã\81\97ã\81¯ã\81\9dã\81®ç¿»è¨³ï¼\88æ\97¢å®\9aã\81§ã\81¯ã\80\8ced.ã\80\8dï¼\89ã\82\92å\87ºå\8a\9bã\81\97ã\81¾ã\81\99ã\80\82ã\81\93ã\82\8cã\81¯å®\9fã\81¯
+は
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-stdciteformats.inc
+section
\end_layout
\end_inset
-の中で定義されていますので、このファイルをまず読みこめば、ご自身の定義ないしは再定義の中で使用することができます。
+毎に番号がリセットされます。
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Section
+\begin_layout Subsection
+フォント指定
\begin_inset CommandInset label
LatexCommand label
-name "sec:XHTML出力のタグ"
+name "sub:フォント指定"
\end_inset
-XHTML出力のタグ
+
\end_layout
\begin_layout Standard
-LaTeXやDocBookと同様、LyXのXHTML出力の書式も、レイアウト情報によって制御することができます。一般的に、LyXは適切な既定値を提供し、前述した
-ように、他のレイアウトタグに基づいて、既定のCSSスタイルの構成まで行ないます。たとえば、章見出しを適切に整形するためのCSSを書き出すために、LyXは、章様式
-の
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
+フォント指定は、以下のような形を取ります。
+\end_layout
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Font
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+Font
+\family roman
+\emph on
+または
+\family default
+\emph default
+ LabelFont
+\family roman
+\emph on
+または
+\family default
+\emph default
+ DefaultFont
\end_layout
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+ ...
+\end_layout
-宣言で提供されている情報を利用しようと試みます。
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+EndFont
\end_layout
\begin_layout Standard
-したがって、多くの場合、使いたい環境やユーザ設定差込枠などのために満足のいくXHTML出力を得るために、まったく何もしなくてよいことになるでしょう。しかしながら
-、これが必要になる場合もあるので、LyXは、生成されるXHTMLやCSSをカスタマイズするために使用できるレイアウトタグを、たくさん提供しています。
+以下のコマンドを使用することができます。
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Standard
-様式宣言や差込枠宣言の外で使用することができるタグに、
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-HTMLPreamble
+Color
\end_layout
\end_inset
-と
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-AddToHTMLPreamble
+
+\emph on
+none
\end_layout
\end_inset
-の2つがあることに注意してください。これらの詳細については、第
-\begin_inset CommandInset ref
-LatexCommand ref
-reference "sub:汎用テキストクラスパラメータ"
-
-\end_inset
+,
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-節をご覧ください。
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+black
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Subsection
-\begin_inset CommandInset label
-LatexCommand label
-name "sub:段落様式-XHTML"
-
\end_inset
-段落様式
+,
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+white
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Standard
-LyXが段落のために出力するXHTMLの種類は、通常の段落を取り扱っているのか、コマンドを取り扱っているのか、あるいは環境を取り扱っているのかに依存し、これは対
-応する
+\end_inset
+
+,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LaTeXType
+red
\end_layout
\end_inset
-タグの内容によって決定されます。
-\end_layout
+,
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\begin_layout Standard
-コマンドや通常の段落の場合には、XHTML出力は以下の形になります。
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+green
\end_layout
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-<tag attr=
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
-value
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
-\end_inset
+,
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
->
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+blue
\end_layout
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-<labeltag attr=
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
-value
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
-\end_inset
-
->ラベル</labeltag>
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-段落の内容
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-</tag>
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Standard
-もちろん、段落にラベルがなければ、ラベルタグは省略することができます。
-\end_layout
+,
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\begin_layout Standard
-環境のうち、リストの変種でないものに関しては、XHTMLは以下の形を取ります。
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+cyan
\end_layout
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-<tag attr=
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
-value
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
-\end_inset
+,
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
->
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+magenta
\end_layout
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-<itemtag attr=
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
-\end_inset
-
-value
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
-\end_inset
-
-><labeltag attr=
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
-\end_inset
-
-value
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
->環境ラベル</labeltag>最初の段落。
-\end_layout
+,
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-</itemtag>
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+yellow
\end_layout
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-<itemtag>二つめの段落。</itemtag>
-\end_layout
+\end_inset
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-</tag>
+]
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Standard
-ラベルは、たとえば定理の場合にそうであるように、最初の段落にだけ出力されることに注意してください。
-\end_layout
+\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\begin_layout Standard
-リストに関しては、次のような形になります。
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Family
\end_layout
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-<tag attr=
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
-value
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
-\end_inset
+ [
+\emph on
->
-\end_layout
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-<itemtag attr=
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Roman
+\end_layout
-value
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
-><labeltag attr=
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
-\end_inset
-value
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
-\end_inset
+\emph default
+,
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
->リストのラベル</labeltag>最初の項目。</itemtag>
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Sans
\end_layout
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-<itemtag attr=
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
-value
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
-\end_inset
+,
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-><labeltag attr=
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Typewriter
+\end_layout
-value
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
->リストのラベル</labeltag>二つめの項目。</itemtag>
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-</tag>
+]
\end_layout
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
+\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Misc
\end_layout
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-<tag attr=
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
-value
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
-\end_inset
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
->
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+文字列
\end_layout
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-<labeltag attr=
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
-\end_inset
-
-value
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
-\end_inset
-
->リストのラベル</labeltag><itemtag attr=
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
-value
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
-\end_inset
+] 有効な引数は、
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
->最初の項目。</itemtag>
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+emph
\end_layout
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-<labeltag attr=
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
-\end_inset
-
-value
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
-\end_inset
-
->リストのラベル</labeltag><itemtag attr=
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
-\end_inset
-
-value
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
->二つめの項目</itemtag>
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-</tag>
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Standard
-ここで
+・
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-labeltag
+noun
\end_layout
\end_inset
-ã\81¨
+ã\83»
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-itemtag
+strikeout
\end_layout
\end_inset
-ã\81®é \86åº\8fã\81\8cé\81\95ã\81£ã\81¦ã\81\84ã\82\8bã\81\93ã\81¨ã\81«æ³¨æ\84\8fã\81\97ã\81¦ã\81\8fã\81 ã\81\95ã\81\84ã\80\82ã\81©ã\81¡ã\82\89ã\81®é \86åº\8fã\81«ã\81ªã\82\8bã\81\8bã\81¯ã\80\81
+ã\83»
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-HTMLLabelFirst
+underbar
\end_layout
\end_inset
-ã\81®è¨å®\9aã\81«ä¾\9då\98ã\81\97ã\81¾ã\81\99ã\80\82ã\82\82ã\81\97
+ã\83»
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-HTMLLabelFirst
+uuline
\end_layout
\end_inset
-が偽であれば（既定値）、最初のケースのようになり、これが真であれば、二番めのケースのように、labelがitemの外側に来るようになります。
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Standard
-各段落の特定のタグ出力や属性出力は、以下に述べるようなレイアウトタグを使って制御することができます。しかしながら、前述のように、多くの場合、LyXは適切な既定値
-を生成するので、たいしたことをしなくても、望ましいXHTML出力を得ることができるということになるはずです。ここで利用出来るタグは、自分の好みにあわせて微調整す
-る目的でここにあるものと考えてください。
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
+・
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-HTMLAttr
+uwave
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
+・
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-文字列
+no_emph
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] 主幹タグと共に出力される属性情報を指定します。たとえば、「
+・
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-class=`mydiv'
+no_noun
\end_layout
\end_inset
-ã\80\8dã\81®ã\82\88ã\81\86ã\81ªã\82\82ã\81®ã\81§ã\81\99ã\80\82æ\97¢å®\9aã\81«ã\81\8aã\81\84ã\81¦ã\81¯ã\80\81LyXã\81¯ã\80\8c
+ã\83»
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-class=`レイアウト名'
+no_strikeout
\end_layout
\end_inset
-ã\80\8dã\81¨å\87ºå\8a\9bã\81\97ã\81¾ã\81\99ã\80\82ã\81\93ã\81\93ã\81§
+ã\83»
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-レイアウト名
+no_bar
\end_layout
\end_inset
-は、レイアウトのLyX名であり、chapterのように小文字で記述します。
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
+・
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-HTMLForceCSS
+no_uuline
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
+・
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\emph on
-0
+no_uwave
\end_layout
\end_inset
-,
-\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
-\end_inset
-
-
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-1
-\end_layout
-
+です。それぞれ、対応する属性を有効にしたり無効にしたりします。
+\begin_inset Newline newline
\end_inset
-]
+たとえば、
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-HTMLStyle
+emph
\end_layout
\end_inset
-ã\81§è¿½å\8a æ\83\85å ±ã\81\8cæ\98\8e示ç\9a\84ã\81«ä¸\8eã\81\88ã\82\89ã\82\8cã\81¦ã\81\84ã\82\8bã\81¨ã\81\8dã\81§ã\82\82ã\80\81LyXã\81\8cã\81\93ã\81®ã\83¬ã\82¤ã\82¢ã\82¦ã\83\88ç\94¨ã\81«ç\94\9fæ\88\90ã\81\99ã\82\8bæ\97¢å®\9aCSSæ\83\85å ±ã\82\92å\87ºå\8a\9bã\81\99ã\82\8bã\81\8bå\90¦ã\81\8bã\80\82ã\81\93ã\82\8cã\82\92
+ã\81¯å¼·èª¿ã\82\92æ\9c\89å\8a¹ã\81«ã\81\97ã\80\81
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-1
+no_emph
\end_layout
\end_inset
-にすると、生成されたCSSを完全に上書きする代わりに、変更したり追加したりすることができます。既定値は
+はそれを無効にします。もし後者がわかりにくければ、現在のコンテクストのフォント設定は、一般的に周囲のコンテクストから継承していることを思い出してください。ですか
+ら
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-0
+no_emph
\end_layout
\end_inset
-です。
+ã\81¯ã\80\81ã\81\9fã\81¨ã\81\88ã\81°å®\9aç\90\86ç\92°å¢\83ã\81§ã\80\81ä½\95ã\82\92ã\81\9bã\81\9aã\81¨ã\82\82æ\9c\89å\8a¹ã\81¨ã\81ªã\81£ã\81¦ã\81\84ã\82\8b強調ã\82\92ç\84¡å\8a¹ã\81«ã\81\99ã\82\8bã\81®ã\81§ã\81\99ã\80\82
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-HTMLItem
+Series
\end_layout
\end_inset
[
+\emph on
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-文字列
+Medium
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] 環境の段落に使用されるタグ。上記各例の
+
+\emph default
+,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-itemtag
+Bold
\end_layout
\end_inset
-を置き換えます。既定値は
+]
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-div
+Shape
\end_layout
\end_inset
-です。
-\end_layout
+ [
+\emph on
-\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-HTMLItemAttr
+Up
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
+
+\emph default
+,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-文字列
+Italic
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] itemタグの属性。既定値は
+,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-class=`レイアウト名_item'
+SmallCaps
\end_layout
\end_inset
-です。ここには、様式情報は含まれては
-\emph on
-なりません
-\emph default
-。その目的のためには、
+,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-HTMLStyle
+Slanted
\end_layout
\end_inset
-を使用してください。
+]
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-HTMLLabel
+Size
\end_layout
\end_inset
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-文字列
+tiny
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] 段落と項目ラベルに使用されるタグ。上記各例の
+,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-labeltag
+small
\end_layout
\end_inset
-を置き換えます。
+,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LabelType
+
+\emph on
+normal
\end_layout
\end_inset
-が
+,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Top_Environment
+large
\end_layout
\end_inset
-や
+,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Centered_Top_Environment
+larger
\end_layout
\end_inset
-の時は、既定値は
+,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-div
+largest
\end_layout
\end_inset
-ですが、それ以外の時の既定値は
+,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-span
+huge
\end_layout
\end_inset
-です。
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
+,
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-HTMLLabelAttr
+giant
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-文字列
+]
\end_layout
+\begin_layout Subsection
+\begin_inset CommandInset label
+LatexCommand label
+name "sub:引用書式指定"
+
\end_inset
-] labelタグの属性。既定値は
+引用書式指定
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Standard
+（引用ダイアログやツールチップなどの）LyX内部やXHTML出力において、書誌情報をどのように表示するべきかの叙述には、
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-class=`レイアウト名_label'
+CiteFormat
\end_layout
\end_inset
-です。ここには、様式情報は含まれては
-\emph on
-なりません
-\emph default
-。その目的のためには、
+ブロックが使用されています。このブロックは、以下のような形をしています。
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+CiteFormat
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+ article ...
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+ book ...
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+End
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Standard
+上記の各行は、それぞれarticleやbookに関連付けられた書誌情報をどのように表示するべきかを定義するものですが、このような定義は、BibTeXファイル中に
+存在しうる「項目型」すべてについて与えることができます。特定の定義が与えられなければ、LyXは、ソースコード中に定義されている既定書式を使用します。LyXは、い
+くつかの書式を
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-HTMLStyle
+stdciteformats.inc
\end_layout
\end_inset
-ã\82\92使ç\94¨ã\81\97ã\81¦ã\81\8fã\81 ã\81\95ã\81\84。
+ã\83\95ã\82¡ã\82¤ã\83«ã\81§äº\8bå\89\8då®\9a義ã\81\97ã\81¦ã\81\8aã\82\8aã\80\81ã\81\93ã\82\8cã\81¯ã\81»ã\81¨ã\82\93ã\81©ã\81®LyXæ\96\87æ\9b¸ã\82¯ã\83©ã\82¹ã\81«ã\82¤ã\83³ã\82¯ã\83«ã\83¼ã\83\89ã\81\95ã\82\8cã\81¦ã\81\84ã\81¾ã\81\99。
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
+\begin_layout Standard
+この定義は、BibTeXキーをその値で置換できる機能を持った、簡単な言語を使用しています。キーは、
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-HTMLLabelFirst
+%author%
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
+のように
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
+%
+\end_layout
-\emph on
-0
+\end_inset
+
+記号でくくらなくてはなりません。したがって、簡単な定義は以下のようになります。
\end_layout
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+misc %author%,
+\begin_inset Quotes eld
\end_inset
-,
-\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+%title%
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Standard
+これは、「著者名・コンマ・引用に囲まれたタイトル・終止符」を出力します。
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Standard
+もちろん、キーが存在するときのみ、キーを出力したい時があるはずです。このようなときには
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-1
+{%volume%[[vol.
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+%volume%]]}
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] このタグは、リスト関係環境でのみ意味を持ち、labelタグが、itemタグの前に出力されるか、中に出力されるかを制御します。これは、たとえば、descrip
-tion環境の中で、
+のように、条件付きの構成を使用することができます。これは、
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-`<dt>\SpecialChar \ldots{}
-</dt><dd>\SpecialChar \ldots{}
-</dd>
+volume
\end_layout
\end_inset
-という形を得るために使用されます。既定値は
+が存在するならば，「vol.
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+」とvolumeキーを出力するという意味です。また、
+\begin_inset Newline newline
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-0
+{%author%[[%author%]][[%editor%, ed.]]}
\end_layout
\end_inset
-で、labelタグはitemタグの中に出力されます。
-\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Newline newline
+\end_inset
+
+のように、条件の中にelse節を含めることも可能です。ここでは、もし
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-HTMLPreamble
+author
\end_layout
\end_inset
- この様式が使用されたときに、
+キーが存在するならば出力され、そうでなければeditorキーと「,
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+ed.」が出力されます。ここでもキーは、
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-<head>
+%
\end_layout
\end_inset
-セクションに出力される情報。これは、たとえば、
+記号でくくられていることに注意してください。条件全体は、波括弧で囲まれています。if節およびelse節は、「
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-onclick
+[[
\end_layout
\end_inset
-ã\83\8fã\83³ã\83\89ã\83©ã\82\92å®\9a義ã\81\99ã\82\8bã\81\9fã\82\81ã\81«
+ã\80\8dã\81¨ã\80\8c
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-<script>
+]]
\end_layout
\end_inset
-ã\83\96ã\83ã\83\83ã\82¯ã\82\92ã\82¤ã\83³ã\82¯ã\83«ã\83¼ã\83\89ã\81\99ã\82\8bã\81®ã\81«ä½¿ç\94¨ã\81\99ã\82\8bã\81\93ã\81¨ã\81\8cã\81§ã\81\8dã\81¾ã\81\99。
+ã\80\8dã\81®äº\8cé\87\8dè§\92æ\8b¬å¼§ã\81§å\9b²ã\81¾ã\82\8cã\81¦ã\81\84ã\81¾ã\81\99ã\80\82ã\81\93ã\82\8cã\82\89ã\81\99ã\81¹ã\81¦ã\81®ã\81\82ã\81\84ã\81 ã\81«ã\81¯ï¼\8c空ç\99½ã\81¯å\85¥ã\81£ã\81¦ã\81¯ã\81ªã\82\8aã\81¾ã\81\9bã\82\93。
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
+\begin_layout Standard
+もう一つ、定義中で使用することのできる文法として、
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-HTMLStyle
+{!<i>!}
\end_layout
\end_inset
- この様式が使用されたときに、インクルードするCSSスタイル情報。これは、レイアウトが生成する
+という形をしたものがあります。これは、「リッチテキスト」を生成するときに使われる整形情報を定義するものです。当然のことながら、平文を書き出すときには、HTMLタ
+グを出力させたくはありませんから、HTMLタグは「
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-<style>
+{!
\end_layout
\end_inset
-ブロックで自動的に包まれますので、CSS自体をインクルードするだけで大丈夫です。
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
+」と「
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-HTMLTag
+!}
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-文字列
+」でくるんでやらなくてはならないのです。
\end_layout
-\end_inset
-
-] 主幹ラベルに使用されるタグ。上記各例の
+\begin_layout Standard
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-tag
+CiteFormat
\end_layout
\end_inset
-を置き換えます。既定値は
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-div
+ブロックでは、他に2つの特殊な定義が可能です。一つめの例としては、
\end_layout
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+!quotetitle
+\begin_inset Quotes eld
\end_inset
-です。
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-HTMLTitle
-\end_layout
-
+%title%
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
- [
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-\emph on
-0
\end_layout
-\end_inset
-
-,
-\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
-\end_inset
-
-
+\begin_layout Standard
+といった例が挙げられます。これは、短縮形ないしはマクロであり、
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-1
+%!quotetitle%
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] この様式が、XHTMLファイルの
+のように、これがキーであるかのように扱って使用することができます。LyXは、
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-<title>
+%!quotetitle%
\end_layout
\end_inset
-タグを生成するのに使用する様式であるという印をつけます。既定値は偽です。
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-stdtitle.inc
+を、そこで定義されているものを扱う場合と同じように取り扱います。ですから、明白な警告を敢えてさせて頂くと、
\end_layout
-\end_inset
-
-ファイルでは、
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-title
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+!funfun %funfun%
\end_layout
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout Standard
+のようなことはしないでください。LyXは、無限ループに陥るようなことはありませんが、諦めるまでに長いループに入るかもしれません。
+\end_layout
-環境のこの項目を真に設定しています。
+\begin_layout Standard
+特殊な定義の二つめは、
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Subsection
-差込枠レイアウトXHTML
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+_pptext pp.
\end_layout
\begin_layout Standard
-差込枠のXHTML出力も、レイアウトファイル内の情報によって制御することができます
-\begin_inset Foot
+のようなものです。これは、文字列の翻訳可能な部分を定義するもので、書誌情報中の関連部分が翻訳されるようにすることができます。
+\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-現在のところ、これは「テキスト」差込枠（中に書き込みができる差込枠）にのみ有効で、「コマンド」差込枠（ダイアログボックスに関連付けられた差込枠）には適用されませ
-ん。
+%_pptext%
\end_layout
\end_inset
-。ここでも、LyXは適切な既定値を提供しようと試み、既定のCSS様式を構成します。しかし、すべてカスタマイズ可能です。
-\end_layout
+のように、これをキーとして扱って、定義の中に入れることもできます。これらのうちいくつかは、
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\begin_layout Standard
-LyXが差込枠用に出力するXHTMLは、以下の形を取ります。
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+stdciteformats.inc
\end_layout
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-<tag attr=
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
-\end_inset
-
-value
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
->
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-<labeltag>ラベル</labeltag>
+中に事前定義されています。これは、上記で述べたような意味でのマクロではないことに注意してください。
\end_layout
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-<innertag attr=
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
-\end_inset
-
-value
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\begin_layout Standard
+以下は、これらの機能を全て使った例です。
+\begin_inset VSpace defskip
\end_inset
->差込枠の内容。</innertag>
-\end_layout
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-</tag>
\end_layout
\begin_layout Standard
-差込枠が多段落を許可している---つまり
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
+\noindent
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-MultiPar
+\family typewriter
+!authoredit {%author%[[%author%, ]][[{%editor%[[%editor%, %_edtext%, ]]}]]}
\end_layout
+\begin_layout Standard
+\begin_inset VSpace defskip
\end_inset
-が真---ならば、差込枠の内容は、それ自身段落として出力され、それらの段落に用いられる様式（標準、引用など）を用いて整形されます。もちろん、段落にラベルがなけれ
-ば、labelタグは省略され、ラベルがあれば、現在のところ、つねに
+これは、
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-span
+author
\end_layout
\end_inset
-が用いられます。innerタグは非必須であり、既定では出力されません。各差込枠用に出力される特定のタグや属性は、以下のレイアウトタグによって制御することができま
-す。
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
+キーが定義されているならば、著者とコンマを出力し、
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-HTMLAttr
+author
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
+キーが定義されておらず、
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-文字列
+editor
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] 主幹タグと共に出力される属性情報を指定します。たとえば、「
+キーが定義されているならば、編集者名の後に
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-class=`myinset' onclick=`\SpecialChar \ldots{}
-'
+_edtext
\end_layout
\end_inset
-ã\80\8dã\81®ã\82\88ã\81\86ã\81ªã\82\82ã\81®ã\81§ã\81\99ã\80\82æ\97¢å®\9aã\81«ã\81\8aã\81\84ã\81¦ã\81¯ã\80\81LyXã\81¯ã\80\8c
+ã\81ªã\81\84ã\81\97ã\81¯ã\81\9dã\81®ç¿»è¨³ï¼\88æ\97¢å®\9aã\81§ã\81¯ã\80\8ced.ã\80\8dï¼\89ã\82\92å\87ºå\8a\9bã\81\97ã\81¾ã\81\99ã\80\82ã\81\93ã\82\8cã\81¯å®\9fã\81¯
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-class=`差込枠名'
+stdciteformats.inc
\end_layout
\end_inset
-」と出力します。ここで
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-差込枠名
+の中で定義されていますので、このファイルをまず読みこめば、ご自身の定義ないしは再定義の中で使用することができます。
\end_layout
+\begin_layout Section
+\begin_inset CommandInset label
+LatexCommand label
+name "sec:XHTML出力のタグ"
+
\end_inset
-は、差込枠のLyX名であり、小文字で記述します。アルファベットや数字以外の文字は、アンダースコアに置き換えられます。
+XHTML出力のタグ
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
+\begin_layout Standard
+LaTeXやDocBookと同様、LyXのXHTML出力の書式も、レイアウト情報によって制御することができます。一般的に、LyXは適切な既定値を提供し、前述した
+ように、他のレイアウトタグに基づいて、既定のCSSスタイルの構成まで行ないます。たとえば、章見出しを適切に整形するためのCSSを書き出すために、LyXは、章様式
+の
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-HTMLForceCSS
+Font
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\emph on
-0
-\emph default
-,1
+宣言で提供されている情報を利用しようと試みます。
\end_layout
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout Standard
+したがって、多くの場合、使いたい環境やユーザ設定差込枠などのために満足のいくXHTML出力を得るために、まったく何もしなくてよいことになるでしょう。しかしながら
+、これが必要になる場合もあるので、LyXは、生成されるXHTMLやCSSをカスタマイズするために使用できるレイアウトタグを、たくさん提供しています。
+\end_layout
-]
+\begin_layout Standard
+様式宣言や差込枠宣言の外で使用することができるタグに、
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-HTMLStyle
+HTMLPreamble
\end_layout
\end_inset
-ã\81§è¿½å\8a æ\83\85å ±ã\81\8cæ\98\8e示ç\9a\84ã\81«ä¸\8eã\81\88ã\82\89ã\82\8cã\81¦ã\81\84ã\82\8bã\81¨ã\81\8dã\81§ã\82\82ã\80\81LyXã\81\8cã\81\93ã\81®ã\83¬ã\82¤ã\82¢ã\82¦ã\83\88ç\94¨ã\81«ç\94\9fæ\88\90ã\81\99ã\82\8bæ\97¢å®\9aCSSæ\83\85å ±ã\82\92å\87ºå\8a\9bã\81\99ã\82\8bã\81\8bå\90¦ã\81\8bã\80\82ã\81\93ã\82\8cã\82\92
+ã\81¨
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-1
+AddToHTMLPreamble
\end_layout
\end_inset
-にすると、生成されたCSSを完全に上書きする代わりに、変更したり追加したりすることができます。既定値は
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-0
-\end_layout
+の2つがあることに注意してください。これらの詳細については、第
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:汎用テキストクラスパラメータ"
\end_inset
-です。
+節をご覧ください。
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-HTMLInnerAttr
-\end_layout
+\begin_layout Subsection
+\begin_inset CommandInset label
+LatexCommand label
+name "sub:段落様式-XHTML"
\end_inset
- [
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-文字列
+段落様式
\end_layout
-\end_inset
-
-] innerタグの属性。既定値は
+\begin_layout Standard
+LyXが段落のために出力するXHTMLの種類は、通常の段落を取り扱っているのか、コマンドを取り扱っているのか、あるいは環境を取り扱っているのかに依存し、これは対
+応する
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-class=`差込枠名_inner'
+LaTeXType
\end_layout
\end_inset
-ã\81§す。
+ã\82¿ã\82°ã\81®å\86\85容ã\81«ã\82\88ã\81£ã\81¦æ±ºå®\9aã\81\95ã\82\8cã\81¾す。
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-HTMLInnerTag
+\begin_layout Standard
+コマンドや通常の段落の場合には、XHTML出力は以下の形になります。
\end_layout
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+<tag attr=
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
- [
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
+value
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-文字列
+>
\end_layout
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+<labeltag attr=
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
-] innerタグです。上記各例の
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
+value
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-innertag
+>ラベル</labeltag>
\end_layout
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+段落の内容
+\end_layout
-を置き換えます。既定値はなしです。
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+</tag>
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
+\begin_layout Standard
+もちろん、段落にラベルがなければ、ラベルタグは省略することができます。
+\end_layout
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-HTMLIsBlock
+\begin_layout Standard
+環境のうち、リストの変種でないものに関しては、XHTMLは以下の形を取ります。
\end_layout
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+<tag attr=
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
- [
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
+value
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-0
+>
\end_layout
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+<itemtag attr=
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
-,
-\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+value
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
+><labeltag attr=
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
+value
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
+>環境ラベル</labeltag>最初の段落。
+\end_layout
-\emph on
-1
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+</itemtag>
\end_layout
-\end_inset
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+<itemtag>二つめの段落。</itemtag>
+\end_layout
-] この差込枠が（脚注のように）独立した文字列ブロックを表すのか、それとも、（派生枝のように）周囲の文字列の中に取り込まれる素材を表すのか。既定値は1です。
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+</tag>
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
+\begin_layout Standard
+ラベルは、たとえば定理の場合にそうであるように、最初の段落にだけ出力されることに注意してください。
+\end_layout
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-HTMLLabel
+\begin_layout Standard
+リストに関しては、次のような形になります。
\end_layout
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+<tag attr=
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
- [
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
+value
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-文字列
+>
\end_layout
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+<itemtag attr=
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
-] 場合によっては、カウンタへの参照を含む、この差込枠のラベル。たとえば、脚注用には
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
+value
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
+><labeltag attr=
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
-\backslash
-arabic{footnote}
+value
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
+>リストのラベル</labeltag>最初の項目。</itemtag>
\end_layout
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+<itemtag attr=
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
-など。これは非必須であり、既定値はありません。
+value
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
+><labeltag attr=
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
+value
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
+>リストのラベル</labeltag>二つめの項目。</itemtag>
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+</tag>
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-HTMLPreamble
\end_layout
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+<tag attr=
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
- この様式が使用されたときに、
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
+value
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-<head>
+>
\end_layout
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+<labeltag attr=
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
-セクションに出力される情報。これは、たとえば、
+value
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
+>リストのラベル</labeltag><itemtag attr=
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
+value
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
+>最初の項目。</itemtag>
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+<labeltag attr=
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
+value
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
+>リストのラベル</labeltag><itemtag attr=
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
+value
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
+>二つめの項目</itemtag>
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+</tag>
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Standard
+ここで
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-onclick
+labeltag
\end_layout
\end_inset
-ã\83\8fã\83³ã\83\89ã\83©ã\82\92å®\9a義ã\81\99ã\82\8bã\81\9fã\82\81ã\81«
+ã\81¨
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-<script>
+itemtag
\end_layout
\end_inset
-ブロックをインクルードするのに使用することができます。
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
+の順序が違っていることに注意してください。どちらの順序になるかは、
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-HTMLStyle
+HTMLLabelFirst
\end_layout
\end_inset
- この様式が使用されたときに、インクルードするCSSスタイル情報。これは、レイアウトが生成する
+の設定に依存します。もし
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-<style>
+HTMLLabelFirst
\end_layout
\end_inset
-ブロックで自動的に包まれますので、CSS自体をインクルードするだけで大丈夫です。
+が偽であれば（既定値）、最初のケースのようになり、これが真であれば、二番めのケースのように、labelがitemの外側に来るようになります。
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Standard
+各段落の特定のタグ出力や属性出力は、以下に述べるようなレイアウトタグを使って制御することができます。しかしながら、前述のように、多くの場合、LyXは適切な既定値
+を生成するので、たいしたことをしなくても、望ましいXHTML出力を得ることができるということになるはずです。ここで利用出来るタグは、自分の好みにあわせて微調整す
+る目的でここにあるものと考えてください。
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-HTMLTag
+HTMLAttr
\end_layout
\end_inset
\end_inset
-]ã\80\80主幹ã\83©ã\83\99ã\83«ã\81«ä½¿ç\94¨ã\81\95ã\82\8cã\82\8bã\82¿ã\82°ã\80\82ä¸\8aè¨\98å\90\84ä¾\8bã\81®
+]ã\80\80主幹ã\82¿ã\82°ã\81¨å\85±ã\81«å\87ºå\8a\9bã\81\95ã\82\8cã\82\8bå±\9eæ\80§æ\83\85å ±ã\82\92æ\8c\87å®\9aã\81\97ã\81¾ã\81\99ã\80\82ã\81\9fã\81¨ã\81\88ã\81°ã\80\81ã\80\8c
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-tag
+class=`mydiv'
\end_layout
\end_inset
-ã\82\92ç½®ã\81\8dæ\8f\9bã\81\88ã\81¾ã\81\99ã\80\82æ\97¢å®\9aå\80¤ã\81¯
+ã\80\8dã\81®ã\82\88ã\81\86ã\81ªã\82\82ã\81®ã\81§ã\81\99ã\80\82æ\97¢å®\9aã\81«ã\81\8aã\81\84ã\81¦ã\81¯ã\80\81LyXã\81¯ã\80\8c
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-MultiPar
+class=`レイアウト名'
\end_layout
\end_inset
-ã\81®è¨å®\9aã\81«ä¾\9då\98ã\81\97ã\80\81
+ã\80\8dã\81¨å\87ºå\8a\9bã\81\97ã\81¾ã\81\99ã\80\82ã\81\93ã\81\93ã\81§
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-MultiPar
+レイアウト名
\end_layout
\end_inset
-が真ならば
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-div
+は、レイアウトのLyX名であり、chapterのように小文字で記述します。
\end_layout
-\end_inset
-
-、偽ならば
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-span
+HTMLForceCSS
\end_layout
\end_inset
-です。
-\end_layout
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\begin_layout Subsection
-フロートXHTML
-\end_layout
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
-\begin_layout Standard
-フロートのXHTML出力も、レイアウトファイル内の情報によって制御することができます。出力は、以下の形を取ります。
+\emph on
+0
\end_layout
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-<tag attr=
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
-value
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
\end_inset
->
-\end_layout
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-フロートの内容。
-\end_layout
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-</tag>
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+1
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Standard
-キャプションは、存在している場合には、独立した差込枠となり、そのような形で出力されます。その外観は、キャプション差込枠のInsetLayoutで制御することがで
-きます。
-\end_layout
+\end_inset
-\begin_layout Description
+]
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-HTMLAttr
+HTMLStyle
\end_layout
\end_inset
- [
+で追加情報が明示的に与えられているときでも、LyXがこのレイアウト用に生成する既定CSS情報を出力するか否か。これを
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-文字列
+1
\end_layout
\end_inset
-] 主幹タグと共に出力される属性情報を指定します。たとえば、「
+にすると、生成されたCSSを完全に上書きする代わりに、変更したり追加したりすることができます。既定値は
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-class=`myfloat' onclick=`\SpecialChar \ldots{}
-'
+0
\end_layout
\end_inset
-」のようなものです。既定においては、LyXは「
+です。
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-class=`float フロート-フロート型'
+HTMLItem
\end_layout
\end_inset
-」と出力します。ここで
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-フロート型
+文字列
\end_layout
\end_inset
-は、フロート宣言で定義された（
-\begin_inset CommandInset ref
-LatexCommand ref
-reference "sub:フロート"
-
-\end_inset
-
-参照）、この型のフロートのLyX名です。ただし、これは小文字に変換され、アルファベットや数字でない文字はアンダースコアに変換されます。例：float-table
-。
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
+] 環境の段落に使用されるタグ。上記各例の
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-HTMLStyle
+itemtag
\end_layout
\end_inset
- このフロートが使用されたときに、インクルードするCSSスタイル情報。これは、レイアウトが生成する
+を置き換えます。既定値は
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-<style>
+div
\end_layout
\end_inset
-ã\83\96ã\83ã\83\83ã\82¯ã\81§è\87ªå\8b\95ç\9a\84ã\81«å\8c\85ã\81¾ã\82\8cã\81¾ã\81\99ã\81®ã\81§ã\80\81CSSè\87ªä½\93ã\82\92ã\82¤ã\83³ã\82¯ã\83«ã\83¼ã\83\89ã\81\99ã\82\8bã\81 ã\81\91ã\81§å¤§ä¸\88夫ã\81§ã\81\99ã\80\82
+です。
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-HTMLTag
+HTMLItemAttr
\end_layout
\end_inset
\end_inset
-] このフロートに使用されるタグ。上記各例の
+] itemタグの属性。既定値は
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-tag
+class=`レイアウト名_item'
\end_layout
\end_inset
-を置き換えます。既定値は
+です。ここには、様式情報は含まれては
+\emph on
+なりません
+\emph default
+。その目的のためには、
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-div
+HTMLStyle
\end_layout
\end_inset
-であり、ほとんどの場合変更する必要はありません。
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Subsection
-書誌情報の整形
+を使用してください。
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Standard
-書誌情報は、
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-CiteFormat
+HTMLLabel
\end_layout
\end_inset
-ブロックを使用して整形することができます。詳細については、第
-\begin_inset CommandInset ref
-LatexCommand ref
-reference "sub:引用書式指定"
-
-\end_inset
-
-節を参照してください。
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Subsection
-LyXが生成したCSS
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Standard
-LyXは、提供されている他のレイアウト情報に基づいて、差込枠と段落様式の両方の既定CSS様式ルールを生成ということすることを、これまでに何度か触れました。この節
-では、LyXがどのレイアウト情報を、どのように使うのか、ひとこと述べておきたいと思います。
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Standard
-LyXは、現在のところ、
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Font
+文字列
\end_layout
\end_inset
-宣言で指定されている
+] 段落と項目ラベルに使用されるタグ。上記各例の
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Family
+labeltag
\end_layout
\end_inset
-ã\83»
+ã\82\92ç½®ã\81\8dæ\8f\9bã\81\88ã\81¾ã\81\99ã\80\82
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Series
+LabelType
\end_layout
\end_inset
-ã\83»
+ã\81\8c
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Shape
+Top_Environment
\end_layout
\end_inset
-ã\83»
+ã\82\84
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Size
+Centered_Top_Environment
\end_layout
\end_inset
-を利用して、フォント情報についてのみCSSを自動生成します（第
-\begin_inset CommandInset ref
-LatexCommand ref
-reference "sub:フォント指定"
-
-\end_inset
-
-節を参照）。この変換は、きわめて分かりやすく自明です。たとえば、「
+の時は、既定値は
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Family Sans
+div
\end_layout
\end_inset
-ã\80\8dã\81¯ã\80\8c
+ã\81§ã\81\99ã\81\8cã\80\81ã\81\9dã\82\8c以å¤\96ã\81®æ\99\82ã\81®æ\97¢å®\9aå\80¤ã\81¯
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-font-family: sans-serif
+span
\end_layout
\end_inset
-」になります。LyXの寸法とCSSの寸法のあいだの対応は、少し複雑ですが、それでも直感的に分かります。詳細については、
-\begin_inset Flex URL
+です。
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-src/FontInfo.cpp
+HTMLLabelAttr
\end_layout
\end_inset
-の
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-getSizeCSS()
+文字列
\end_layout
\end_inset
-関数をご覧ください。
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Chapter
-外部素材を取り込む
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Standard
-\begin_inset Box Shadowbox
-position "t"
-hor_pos "c"
-has_inner_box 1
-inner_pos "t"
-use_parbox 0
-use_makebox 0
-width "100col%"
-special "none"
-height "1in"
-height_special "totalheight"
-status open
+] labelタグの属性。既定値は
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-【警告】本説明書のこの部分は、しばらく更新されていません。もちろんまだ正確であることを期待していますが、保証の限りではありません。
+class=`レイアウト名_label'
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Standard
-LyX外部のソースから素材を使用する方法は、取扱説明書
+です。ここには、様式情報は含まれては
\emph on
-埋込オブジェクト篇
+なりません
\emph default
-で詳細にカバーされています。本章は、新種の素材を取り込む際に、舞台裏で何をする必要があるかをカバーします。
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Section
-どのように機能するのか
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Standard
-外部素材の機能は、ひな型の概念に基づいています。ひな型は、LyXがある型の素材とどのように橋渡しをするべきかを指定するものです。同梱物として、LyXは、Xfig
-の図や、様々なラスター形式画像、チェス棋譜、LilyPond楽譜用のひな型を事前に定義されたものとして含んでいます。実際に何が入っているかは、
-\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
+。その目的のためには、
+\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-挿入\SpecialChar \menuseparator
-ファイル\SpecialChar \menuseparator
-外部素材
+HTMLStyle
\end_layout
\end_inset
-メニューで見ることができます。さらに、特定の型の素材をサポートするのに、自分自身のひな型を作成することも可能です。後でどのようなことをすればいいか詳細に説明しま
-すが、できればあなたが作ったすべてのひな型を投稿して、我々がLyXの後の版に取り込むことができるようにしてくださることを希望します。
+を使用してください。
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Standard
-外部素材の機能におけるもう一つの基本的な発想は、最終素材の元となるオリジナルファイルと、書き出された文書や印刷された文書に取り込むための生成ファイルとを区別して
-いることです。たとえば、
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Xfig
+HTMLLabelFirst
\end_layout
\end_inset
-で作成した図の場合を考えてみましょう。Xfigアプリケーション自体は、
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-.fig
+
+\emph on
+0
\end_layout
\end_inset
-拡張子を持つオリジナルファイルを操作します。Xfigで図を作成したり変更したりして、作業が終われば
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-fig
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+1
\end_layout
\end_inset
-ファイルに保存します。この図をお使いの文書に取り込みたいときには、LaTeXファイルにそのままインクルードできるように、
+] このタグは、リスト関係環境でのみ意味を持ち、labelタグが、itemタグの前に出力されるか、中に出力されるかを制御します。これは、たとえば、descrip
+tion環境の中で、
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-transfig
+`<dt>\SpecialChar \ldots{}
+</dt><dd>\SpecialChar \ldots{}
+</dd>
\end_layout
\end_inset
-ã\82\92å\91¼ã\81³å\87ºã\81\97ã\81¦PostScriptã\83\95ã\82¡ã\82¤ã\83«ã\82\92ç\94\9fæ\88\90ã\81\97ã\81¾ã\81\99ã\80\82ã\81\93ã\81®å ´å\90\88ã\81«ã\81¯ã\80\81
+ã\81¨ã\81\84ã\81\86å½¢ã\82\92å¾\97ã\82\8bã\81\9fã\82\81ã\81«ä½¿ç\94¨ã\81\95ã\82\8cã\81¾ã\81\99ã\80\82æ\97¢å®\9aå\80¤ã\81¯
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-.fig
+0
\end_layout
\end_inset
-ã\83\95ã\82¡ã\82¤ã\83«ã\81\8cã\82ªã\83ªã\82¸ã\83\8aã\83«ã\83\95ã\82¡ã\82¤ã\83«ã\81§ã\81\82ã\82\8aã\80\81PostScriptã\83\95ã\82¡ã\82¤ã\83«ã\81\8cç\94\9fæ\88\90ã\83\95ã\82¡ã\82¤ã\83«ã\81«ã\81ªã\82\8aます。
+ã\81§ã\80\81labelã\82¿ã\82°ã\81¯itemã\82¿ã\82°ã\81®ä¸ã\81«å\87ºå\8a\9bã\81\95ã\82\8cます。
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Standard
-この区別は、文書を執筆している最中に、素材を更新することができるようにするために重要です。さらに、これによって、複数の書き出し書式をサポートするために必要な柔軟
-性が提供されます。たとえば、平文テキストファイルの場合には、図を生のPostScriptファイルとして取り込むのは、とても褒められた発想とはいえません。むしろ、
-その図への参照だけを含めるか、最終出力が実際の画像に近いものとなるように画像からASCIIへの変換子を呼び出したいと考えることでしょう。LyXの外部素材マネジメ
-ントは、LyXがサポートする各書き出し書式別に仕分けしているので、ユーザがこれを行うことが可能となっています。
-\end_layout
+\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\begin_layout Standard
-LyXの外部素材マネジメントは、書き出し書式によって異なる生成物をサポートすることの他に、編集・閲覧アプリケーションを緊密に統合することもサポートします。Xfi
-gの図の場合には、LyXの外部素材ダイアログからシングルクリックでオリジナルファイルをXfigで開くことができ、ダブルクリックすることで生成されたPostScr
-iptファイルをGhostviewで閲覧することができます。もうコマンドラインをもてあそんだり、オリジナルファイルや生成ファイルがどこにあるか探したり変更を加え
-るためにファイルブラウザをいじくり回す必要はないのです。このようにして、文書を執筆する際に必要となる多くのアプリケーションを最大限に利用し、最終的により生産性を
-上げることができるようになるのです。
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+HTMLPreamble
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Section
-外用ひな型設定ファイル
+\end_inset
+
+ この様式が使用されたときに、
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+<head>
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Standard
-LyXに自製の外用ひな型を付け加えるのは、比較的簡単です。しかしながら、これを不用心に行ってしまうと、たいていの場合、簡単に濫用されてしまうようなセキュリティホ
-ールを作ってしまいがちであることを心に留めておいてください。したがって、これを実行に移す前に、第
-\begin_inset CommandInset ref
-LatexCommand ref
-reference "sec:セキュリティに関する論点"
+\end_inset
+
+セクションに出力される情報。これは、たとえば、
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+onclick
+\end_layout
\end_inset
-節のセキュリティに関する議論を読んでおいてください。
+ハンドラを定義するために
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+<script>
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Standard
-このことに言及した上で、あなたが作成した面白いひな型は、ぜひ投稿してください。
+\end_inset
+
+ブロックをインクルードするのに使用することができます。
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Standard
-外用ひな型は、
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-LyXDir/lib/external_templates
+HTMLStyle
\end_layout
\end_inset
-ファイルで定義されています。自分用の版を
+ この様式が使用されたときに、インクルードするCSSスタイル情報。これは、レイアウトが生成する
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-UserDir/external_templates
+<style>
\end_layout
\end_inset
-ã\81«ç½®ã\81\8fã\81\93ã\81¨ã\82\82ã\81§ã\81\8dã\81¾す。
+ã\83\96ã\83ã\83\83ã\82¯ã\81§è\87ªå\8b\95ç\9a\84ã\81«å\8c\85ã\81¾ã\82\8cã\81¾ã\81\99ã\81®ã\81§ã\80\81CSSè\87ªä½\93ã\82\92ã\82¤ã\83³ã\82¯ã\83«ã\83¼ã\83\89ã\81\99ã\82\8bã\81 ã\81\91ã\81§å¤§ä¸\88夫ã\81§す。
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Standard
-典型的なひな型は以下のようになります。
-\end_layout
+\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-Template XFig
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+HTMLTag
\end_layout
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-GuiName "XFig: $$AbsOrRelPathParent$$Basename"
-\end_layout
+\end_inset
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-HelpText
-\end_layout
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-An XFig figure.
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+文字列
\end_layout
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-HelpTextEnd
-\end_layout
+\end_inset
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-InputFormat fig
-\end_layout
+] 主幹ラベルに使用されるタグ。上記各例の
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-FileFilter "*.fig"
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+tag
\end_layout
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-AutomaticProduction true
+\end_inset
+
+を置き換えます。既定値は
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+div
\end_layout
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-Transform Rotate
+\end_inset
+
+です。
\end_layout
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-Transform Resize
+\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+HTMLTitle
\end_layout
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-Format LaT
-\begin_inset ERT
+\end_inset
+
+ [
+\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-{}
+\emph on
+0
\end_layout
\end_inset
-eX
-\end_layout
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-TransformCommand Rotate RotationLatexCommand
-\end_layout
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-TransformCommand Resize ResizeLatexCommand
-\end_layout
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-Product "$$RotateFront$$ResizeFront
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+1
\end_layout
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-
-\backslash
+\end_inset
-\backslash
-input{$$AbsOrRelPathMaster$$Basename.pstex_t}
-\end_layout
+] この様式が、XHTMLファイルの
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
- $$ResizeBack$$RotateBack"
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+<title>
\end_layout
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-UpdateFormat pstex
-\end_layout
+\end_inset
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-UpdateResult "$$AbsPath$$Basename.pstex_t"
-\end_layout
+タグを生成するのに使用する様式であるという印をつけます。既定値は偽です。
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-Requirement "graphicx"
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+stdtitle.inc
\end_layout
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-ReferencedFile latex "$$AbsOrRelPathMaster$$Basename.pstex_t"
-\end_layout
+\end_inset
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-ReferencedFile latex "$$AbsPath$$Basename.eps"
+ファイルでは、
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+title
\end_layout
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-ReferencedFile dvi "$$AbsPath$$Basename.eps"
+\end_inset
+
+環境のこの項目を真に設定しています。
\end_layout
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-FormatEnd
+\begin_layout Subsection
+差込枠レイアウトXHTML
\end_layout
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-Format PDFLaT
-\begin_inset ERT
+\begin_layout Standard
+差込枠のXHTML出力も、レイアウトファイル内の情報によって制御することができます
+\begin_inset Foot
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-{}
+現在のところ、これは「テキスト」差込枠（中に書き込みができる差込枠）にのみ有効で、「コマンド」差込枠（ダイアログボックスに関連付けられた差込枠）には適用されませ
+ん。
\end_layout
\end_inset
-eX
+。ここでも、LyXは適切な既定値を提供しようと試み、既定のCSS様式を構成します。しかし、すべてカスタマイズ可能です。
\end_layout
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-TransformCommand Rotate RotationLatexCommand
+\begin_layout Standard
+LyXが差込枠用に出力するXHTMLは、以下の形を取ります。
\end_layout
\begin_layout LyX-Code
-TransformCommand Resize ResizeLatexCommand
+<tag attr=
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
+value
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
+>
\end_layout
\begin_layout LyX-Code
-Product "$$RotateFront$$ResizeFront
+<labeltag>ラベル</labeltag>
\end_layout
\begin_layout LyX-Code
-
-\backslash
-
-\backslash
-input{$$AbsOrRelPathMaster$$Basename.pdftex_t}
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
- $$ResizeBack$$RotateBack"
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-UpdateFormat pdftex
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-UpdateResult "$$AbsPath$$Basename.pdftex_t"
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-Requirement "graphicx"
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-ReferencedFile latex "$$AbsOrRelPathMaster$$Basename.pdftex_t"
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-ReferencedFile latex "$$AbsPath$$Basename.pdf"
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-FormatEnd
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-Format Ascii
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-Product "$$Contents(
-\backslash
-"$$AbsPath$$Basename.asc
-\backslash
-")"
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-UpdateFormat asciixfig
-\end_layout
+<innertag attr=
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-UpdateResult "$$AbsPath$$Basename.asc"
-\end_layout
+value
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-FormatEnd
+>差込枠の内容。</innertag>
\end_layout
\begin_layout LyX-Code
-Format DocBook
+</tag>
\end_layout
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-Product "<graphic fileref=
-\backslash
-"$$AbsOrRelPathMaster$$Basename.eps
-\backslash
-">
-\end_layout
+\begin_layout Standard
+差込枠が多段落を許可している---つまり
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
- </graphic>"
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+MultiPar
\end_layout
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-UpdateFormat eps
-\end_layout
+\end_inset
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-UpdateResult "$$AbsPath$$Basename.eps"
-\end_layout
+が真---ならば、差込枠の内容は、それ自身段落として出力され、それらの段落に用いられる様式（標準、引用など）を用いて整形されます。もちろん、段落にラベルがなけれ
+ば、labelタグは省略され、ラベルがあれば、現在のところ、つねに
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-ReferencedFile docbook "$$AbsPath$$Basename.eps"
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+span
\end_layout
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-ReferencedFile docbook-xml "$$AbsPath$$Basename.eps"
-\end_layout
+\end_inset
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-FormatEnd
+が用いられます。innerタグは非必須であり、既定では出力されません。各差込枠用に出力される特定のタグや属性は、以下のレイアウトタグによって制御することができま
+す。
\end_layout
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-Product "[XFig: $$FName]"
-\end_layout
+\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-FormatEnd
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+HTMLAttr
\end_layout
-\begin_layout LyX-Code
-TemplateEnd
-\end_layout
+\end_inset
-\begin_layout Standard
-ご覧の通り、ひな型は
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Template
+文字列
\end_layout
\end_inset
- \SpecialChar \ldots{}
-
+] 主幹タグと共に出力される属性情報を指定します。たとえば、「
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-TemplateEnd
+class=`myinset' onclick=`\SpecialChar \ldots{}
+'
\end_layout
\end_inset
-ã\81§é\96\89ã\81\98ã\82\89ã\82\8cã\81¾ã\81\99ã\80\82ã\81²ã\81ªå\9e\8bã\81«ã\81¯ã\80\81ä¸\80è\88¬ç\9a\84ã\81ªè¨å®\9aã\82\92è¡\8cã\81\86ã\83\98ã\83\83ã\83\80é\83¨ã\81¨ã\80\81ã\82µã\83\9dã\83¼ã\83\88ã\81\95ã\82\8cã\81¦ã\81\84ã\82\8b主è¦\81ã\81ªæ\96\87æ\9b¸ã\83\95ã\82¡ã\82¤ã\83«å½¢å¼\8fã\81®è¨å®\9aã\82\92è¡\8cã\81\86
+ã\80\8dã\81®ã\82\88ã\81\86ã\81ªã\82\82ã\81®ã\81§ã\81\99ã\80\82æ\97¢å®\9aã\81«ã\81\8aã\81\84ã\81¦ã\81¯ã\80\81LyXã\81¯ã\80\8c
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Format
+class=`差込枠名'
\end_layout
\end_inset
- \SpecialChar \ldots{}
-
+」と出力します。ここで
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-FormatEnd
+差込枠名
\end_layout
\end_inset
-部があります。
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Subsection
-ひな型のヘッダ
+は、差込枠のLyX名であり、小文字で記述します。アルファベットや数字以外の文字は、アンダースコアに置き換えられます。
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-AutomaticProduction
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-true|false
+HTMLForceCSS
\end_layout
\end_inset
- このひな型で扱うファイルをLyXが生成しなくてはならないか否か。このコマンドは、一度だけ必ず現れなくてはなりません。
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-FileFilter
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-<パターン>
+\emph on
+0
+\emph default
+,1
\end_layout
\end_inset
- 望むファイル群を表示するために、ファイルダイアログで使用するフィルタ用globパターン。2つ以上のファイル拡張子があり得る場合（たとえば、tgifには
+]
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-.obj
+HTMLStyle
\end_layout
\end_inset
-ã\81¨
+ã\81§è¿½å\8a æ\83\85å ±ã\81\8cæ\98\8e示ç\9a\84ã\81«ä¸\8eã\81\88ã\82\89ã\82\8cã\81¦ã\81\84ã\82\8bã\81¨ã\81\8dã\81§ã\82\82ã\80\81LyXã\81\8cã\81\93ã\81®ã\83¬ã\82¤ã\82¢ã\82¦ã\83\88ç\94¨ã\81«ç\94\9fæ\88\90ã\81\99ã\82\8bæ\97¢å®\9aCSSæ\83\85å ±ã\82\92å\87ºå\8a\9bã\81\99ã\82\8bã\81\8bå\90¦ã\81\8bã\80\82ã\81\93ã\82\8cã\82\92
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-.tgo
+1
\end_layout
\end_inset
-ã\81\8cã\81\82ã\82\8aã\81¾ã\81\99ï¼\89ã\80\81ã\80\8c
+ã\81«ã\81\99ã\82\8bã\81¨ã\80\81ç\94\9fæ\88\90ã\81\95ã\82\8cã\81\9fCSSã\82\92å®\8cå\85¨ã\81«ä¸\8aæ\9b¸ã\81\8dã\81\99ã\82\8b代ã\82\8fã\82\8aã\81«ã\80\81å¤\89æ\9b´ã\81\97ã\81\9fã\82\8a追å\8a ã\81\97ã\81\9fã\82\8aã\81\99ã\82\8bã\81\93ã\81¨ã\81\8cã\81§ã\81\8dã\81¾ã\81\99ã\80\82æ\97¢å®\9aå\80¤ã\81¯
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-*.{obj,tgo}
+0
\end_layout
\end_inset
-ã\80\8dã\81®æ§\98ã\81ªã\83\91ã\82¿ã\83¼ã\83³ã\82\92使ç\94¨ã\81\97ã\81¦ã\81\8fã\81 ã\81\95ã\81\84ã\80\82ã\81\93ã\81®ã\82³ã\83\9eã\83³ã\83\89ã\81¯ã\80\81ä¸\80度ã\81 ã\81\91å¿\85ã\81\9aç\8f¾ã\82\8cã\81ªã\81\8fã\81¦ã\81¯ã\81ªã\82\8aã\81¾ã\81\9bã\82\93。
+ã\81§ã\81\99。
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-GuiName
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-<GUI名>
+HTMLInnerAttr
\end_layout
\end_inset
- この文字列はボタン上に表示されます。このコマンドは、一度だけ必ず現れなくてはなりません。
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-HelpText
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
+文字列
+\end_layout
-<文章>
-\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
-HelpTextEnd
+] innerタグの属性。既定値は
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+class=`差込枠名_inner'
\end_layout
\end_inset
- 外部素材ダイアログで使用されるヘルプ文。このひな型がユーザに何を提供できるのか、ユーザに説明するのに十分な情報を盛り込んでください。このコマンドは、一度だけ必
-ず現れなくてはなりません。
+です。
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-InputFormat
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-<書式>
+HTMLInnerTag
\end_layout
\end_inset
- オリジナルファイルのファイル形式。これは、LyXが知っている書式名でなくてはなりません（第
-\begin_inset CommandInset ref
-LatexCommand ref
-reference "sec:ファイル形式"
-
-\end_inset
-
-章参照）。このひな型が、2つ以上の書式のオリジナルファイルを取り扱える場合は、「
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-*
+文字列
\end_layout
\end_inset
-」を使用してください。この場合、LyXはファイル形式を推定するために、ファイル自体に詮索を試みます。このコマンドは、一度だけ必ず現れなくてはなりません。
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
+] innerタグです。上記各例の
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Template
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-<ID>
+innertag
\end_layout
\end_inset
- このひな型の（他と重複しない）名称。代入マクロを含めてはなりません（下記参照）。
+を置き換えます。既定値はなしです。
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Transform
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-Rotate|Resize|Clip|Extra
+HTMLIsBlock
\end_layout
\end_inset
- このコマンドは、このひな型がどのような変換をサポートしているかを指定します。これは全く登場しなくても1回以上現れても構いません。このコマンドは、外部素材ダイア
-ログ中の対応するタブを使用可能にします。
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Transform
+0
\end_layout
\end_inset
-コマンド一つずつに応じて、
+,
+\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
+\end_inset
+
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Format
+
+\emph on
+1
\end_layout
\end_inset
-部に、対応する
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
-
+] この差込枠が（脚注のように）独立した文字列ブロックを表すのか、それとも、（派生枝のように）周囲の文字列の中に取り込まれる素材を表すのか。既定値は1です。
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-TransformCommand
+HTMLLabel
\end_layout
\end_inset
-コマンドか
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-TransformOption
+文字列
\end_layout
\end_inset
-コマンドを置かなくてはなりません。これを行わないと、この書式での変換はサポートされません。
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Subsection
+] 場合によっては、カウンタへの参照を含む、この差込枠のラベル。たとえば、脚注用には
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Format
+
+\backslash
+arabic{footnote}
\end_layout
\end_inset
-部
+など。これは非必須であり、既定値はありません。
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Format
-\begin_inset space ~
+HTMLPreamble
+\end_layout
+
\end_inset
-LaT
-\begin_inset ERT
+ この様式が使用されたときに、
+\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-{}
+<head>
\end_layout
\end_inset
-eX|PDFLaT
-\begin_inset ERT
+セクションに出力される情報。これは、たとえば、
+\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-{}
-\end_layout
-
-\end_inset
-
-eX|PlainText|DocBook
+onclick
\end_layout
\end_inset
- この書式定義が定める主要な文書ファイル形式。すべてのひな型が、全文書ファイル形式に対して意味のある表示ができるわけではありません。それでも、全書式に対して
+ハンドラを定義するために
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Format
+<script>
\end_layout
\end_inset
-部を定義してください。表示する方法がないときは、ダミーテキストを使用してください。これによって、書き出した文書内で、少なくとも外部素材への参照を見ることができる
-ようになります。
+ブロックをインクルードするのに使用することができます。
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Option
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
+HTMLStyle
+\end_layout
-<名称>
-\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
-<値>
+ この様式が使用されたときに、インクルードするCSSスタイル情報。これは、レイアウトが生成する
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+<style>
\end_layout
\end_inset
- このコマンドは、
+ブロックで自動的に包まれますので、CSS自体をインクルードするだけで大丈夫です。
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Product
+HTMLTag
\end_layout
\end_inset
-での代入に使うマクロ
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-$$<名称>
+文字列
\end_layout
\end_inset
-を新たに定義します。
+] 主幹ラベルに使用されるタグ。上記各例の
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-<値>
+tag
\end_layout
\end_inset
-自体にも代入マクロを使うことができます。
+を置き換えます。既定値は
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Product
+MultiPar
\end_layout
\end_inset
-ã\81§
+ã\81®è¨å®\9aã\81«ä¾\9då\98ã\81\97ã\80\81
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-<値>
+MultiPar
\end_layout
\end_inset
-ã\82\92ç\9b´æ\8e¥ä½¿ç\94¨ã\81\99ã\82\8bã\82\88ã\82\8aã\82\82å\84ªã\82\8cã\81\9fç\82¹ã\81¯ã\80\81
+ã\81\8cç\9c\9fã\81ªã\82\89ã\81°
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-$$<名称>
+div
\end_layout
\end_inset
-に代入された値が、その文書書式で有効な非必須引数となるように健全化されることです。このコマンドは全く登場しなくても1回以上現れても構いません。
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
+、偽ならば
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Product
-\begin_inset space ~
+span
+\end_layout
+
\end_inset
-<文>
+です。
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Subsection
+フロートXHTML
\end_layout
+\begin_layout Standard
+フロートのXHTML出力も、レイアウトファイル内の情報によって制御することができます。出力は、以下の形を取ります。
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+<tag attr=
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
\end_inset
- 書き出された文書に挿入される文。実のところ、これが最も重要なコマンドであり、とても複雑になることがあります。このコマンドは、一度だけ必ず現れなくてはなりません
-。
+value
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
+>
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+フロートの内容。
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+</tag>
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Standard
+キャプションは、存在している場合には、独立した差込枠となり、そのような形で出力されます。その外観は、キャプション差込枠のInsetLayoutで制御することがで
+きます。
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Preamble
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-<名称>
+HTMLAttr
\end_layout
\end_inset
- このコマンドは、LaTeXプリアンブルに入れるプリアンブル片を指定します。これは
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-PreambleDef
+文字列
\end_layout
\end_inset
- \SpecialChar \ldots{}
-
+] 主幹タグと共に出力される属性情報を指定します。たとえば、「
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-PreambleDefEnd
+class=`myfloat' onclick=`\SpecialChar \ldots{}
+'
\end_layout
\end_inset
-を使用して定義しなくてはなりません。このコマンドは全く登場しなくても1回以上現れても構いません。
+」のようなものです。既定においては、LyXは「
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+class=`float フロート-フロート型'
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
+\end_inset
+
+」と出力します。ここで
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-ReferencedFile
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
+フロート型
+\end_layout
-<書式>
-\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
-<ファイル名>
-\end_layout
+は、フロート宣言で定義された（
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:フロート"
\end_inset
- このコマンドは、変換過程で生成され、特定の書き出し書式に必要とされるファイルを示します。ファイル名が相対パスである場合には、親文書に対する相対パスとして解釈さ
-ã\82\8cã\81¾ã\81\99ã\80\82ã\81\93ã\81®ã\82³ã\83\9eã\83³ã\83\89ã\81¯å\85¨ã\81\8fç\99»å ´ã\81\97ã\81ªã\81\8fã\81¦ã\82\821å\9b\9e以ä¸\8aç\8f¾ã\82\8cã\81¦ã\82\82æ§\8bã\81\84ã\81¾ã\81\9bã\82\93ã\80\82
+参照）、この型のフロートのLyX名です。ただし、これは小文字に変換され、アルファベットや数字でない文字はアンダースコアに変換されます。例：float-table
+。
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Requirement
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-<package>
+HTMLStyle
\end_layout
\end_inset
- 必要とされるLaTeXパッケージ名。パッケージは、LaTeXプリアンブル中で
+ このフロートが使用されたときに、インクルードするCSSスタイル情報。これは、レイアウトが生成する
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
-\backslash
-usepackage{}
+<style>
\end_layout
\end_inset
-ã\82\92使ã\81£ã\81¦å\8f\96ã\82\8aè¾¼ã\81¾ã\82\8cã\81¾ã\81\99ã\80\82ã\81\93ã\81®ã\82³ã\83\9eã\83³ã\83\89ã\81¯å\85¨ã\81\8fç\99»å ´ã\81\97ã\81ªã\81\8fã\81¦ã\82\821å\9b\9e以ä¸\8aç\8f¾ã\82\8cã\81¦ã\82\82æ§\8bã\81\84ã\81¾ã\81\9bã\82\93。
+ã\83\96ã\83ã\83\83ã\82¯ã\81§è\87ªå\8b\95ç\9a\84ã\81«å\8c\85ã\81¾ã\82\8cã\81¾ã\81\99ã\81®ã\81§ã\80\81CSSè\87ªä½\93ã\82\92ã\82¤ã\83³ã\82¯ã\83«ã\83¼ã\83\89ã\81\99ã\82\8bã\81 ã\81\91ã\81§å¤§ä¸\88夫ã\81§ã\81\99。
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-TransformCommand
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-Rotate
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-RotationLatexCommand
+HTMLTag
\end_layout
\end_inset
- このコマンドは、回転用に、組み込みのLaTeXコマンドを使用するように指定します。このコマンドは、1回現れても全く現れなくても構いません。
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
+ [
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-TransformCommand
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
+文字列
+\end_layout
-Resize
-\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
-ResizeLatexCommand
+] このフロートに使用されるタグ。上記各例の
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+tag
\end_layout
\end_inset
- このコマンドは、伸縮用に、組み込みのLaTeXコマンドを使用するように指定します。このコマンドは、1回現れても全く現れなくても構いません。
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
+を置き換えます。既定値は
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-TransformOption
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
+div
+\end_layout
-Rotate
-\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
-RotationLatexOption
+であり、ほとんどの場合変更する必要はありません。
\end_layout
-\end_inset
-
- このコマンドは、回転が非必須引数を通じて行われるように指定します。このコマンドは、1回現れても全く現れなくても構いません。
+\begin_layout Subsection
+書誌情報の整形
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
+\begin_layout Standard
+書誌情報は、
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-TransformOption
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
+CiteFormat
+\end_layout
-Resize
-\begin_inset space ~
\end_inset
-ResizeLatexOption
-\end_layout
+ブロックを使用して整形することができます。詳細については、第
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:引用書式指定"
\end_inset
- このコマンドは、伸縮が非必須引数を通じて行われるように指定します。このコマンドは、1回現れても全く現れなくても構いません。
+節を参照してください。
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
+\begin_layout Subsection
+LyXが生成したCSS
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Standard
+LyXは、提供されている他のレイアウト情報に基づいて、差込枠と段落様式の両方の既定CSS様式ルールを生成ということすることを、これまでに何度か触れました。この節
+では、LyXがどのレイアウト情報を、どのように使うのか、ひとこと述べておきたいと思います。
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Standard
+LyXは、現在のところ、
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-TransformOption
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-Clip
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-ClipLatexOption
+Font
\end_layout
\end_inset
- このコマンドは、切り抜きが非必須引数を通じて行われるように指定します。このコマンドは、1回現れても全く現れなくても構いません。
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
+宣言で指定されている
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-TransformOption
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-Extra
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-ExtraLatexOption
+Family
\end_layout
\end_inset
- このコマンドは、追加の非必須引数を使用することを指定します。このコマンドは、1回現れても全く現れなくても構いません。
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
+・
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-UpdateFormat
-\begin_inset space ~
-\end_inset
-
-<書式>
+Series
\end_layout
\end_inset
- 変換されたファイルのファイル形式。これは、LyXが知っている書式名でなくてはなりません（
-\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
+・
+\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-ツール\SpecialChar \menuseparator
-設定:変換子
+Shape
\end_layout
\end_inset
-ダイアログを参照）。このコマンドは、一度だけ必ず現れなくてはなりません。
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
+・
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-UpdateResult
-\begin_inset space ~
+Size
+\end_layout
+
\end_inset
-<ファイル名>
-\end_layout
+を利用して、フォント情報についてのみCSSを自動生成します（第
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sub:フォント指定"
\end_inset
- 変換されたファイルのファイル名。ファイル名は絶対パスでなくてはなりません。このコマンドは、一度だけ必ず現れなくてはなりません。
-\end_layout
+節を参照）。この変換は、きわめて分かりやすく自明です。たとえば、「
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\begin_layout Subsection
-プリアンブルの定義
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Family Sans
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Standard
-外用ひな型設定ファイルには、
+\end_inset
+
+」は「
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-PreambleDef
+font-family: sans-serif
\end_layout
\end_inset
- \SpecialChar \ldots{}
-
-\begin_inset Flex Code
+」になります。LyXの寸法とCSSの寸法のあいだの対応は、少し複雑ですが、それでも直感的に分かります。詳細については、
+\begin_inset Flex URL
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-PreambleDefEnd
+
+src/FontInfo.cpp
\end_layout
\end_inset
-ã\81§å\9b²ã\82\93ã\81 ã\83\97ã\83ªã\82¢ã\83³ã\83\96ã\83«å®\9a義ã\82\92追å\8a ã\81\99ã\82\8bã\81\93ã\81¨ã\81\8cã\81§ã\81\8dã\81¾ã\81\99ã\80\82ã\81\93ã\82\8cã\82\89ã\81®å®\9a義ã\81¯ã\80\81ã\81²ã\81ªå\9e\8bã\81®
+の
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Format
+getSizeCSS()
\end_layout
\end_inset
-é\83¨ã\81§ä½¿ç\94¨ã\81\99ã\82\8bã\81\93ã\81¨ã\81\8cã\81§ã\81\8dã\81¾ã\81\99。
+é\96¢æ\95°ã\82\92ã\81\94覧ã\81\8fã\81 ã\81\95ã\81\84。
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Section
-代入機構
-\end_layout
+\begin_layout Chapter
+外部素材を取り込む
+\begin_inset CommandInset label
+LatexCommand label
+name "chap:外部素材を取り込む"
-\begin_layout Standard
-外部素材機構が外部プログラムを呼び出すときには、ひな型設定ファイルで定義されたコマンドにしたがって行われます。これらのコマンドには、実行前に展開されるマクロをい
-ろいろ入れることができます。実行は、つねに元の文書があるディレクトリで行われます。
-\end_layout
+\end_inset
-\begin_layout Standard
-また、外部素材が表示されるときにはいつでも、その名称は代入機構によって組み立てられ、ひな型定義中の他のほとんどのコマンドも代入をサポートしています。
-\end_layout
-\begin_layout Standard
-使用できるマクロは以下の通りです。
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
+\begin_layout Standard
+\begin_inset Box Shadowbox
+position "t"
+hor_pos "c"
+has_inner_box 1
+inner_pos "t"
+use_parbox 0
+use_makebox 0
+width "100col%"
+special "none"
+height "1in"
+height_special "totalheight"
+status open
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-$$AbsOrRelPathMaster
+【警告】本説明書のこの部分は、しばらく更新されていません。もちろんまだ正確であることを期待していますが、保証の限りではありません。
\end_layout
\end_inset
- LyX親文書への絶対ファイルパスないしは相対ファイルパス
+
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
-\begin_inset Flex Code
+\begin_layout Standard
+LyX外部のソースから素材を使用する方法は、取扱説明書
+\emph on
+埋込オブジェクト篇
+\emph default
+で詳細にカバーされています。本章は、新種の素材を取り込む際に、舞台裏で何をする必要があるかをカバーします。
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Section
+どのように機能するのか
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Standard
+外部素材の機能は、ひな型の概念に基づいています。ひな型は、LyXがある型の素材とどのように橋渡しをするべきかを指定するものです。同梱物として、LyXは、Xfig
+の図や、様々なラスター形式画像、チェス棋譜、LilyPond楽譜用のひな型を事前に定義されたものとして含んでいます。実際に何が入っているかは、
+\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-$$AbsOrRelPathParent
+挿入\SpecialChar \menuseparator
+ファイル\SpecialChar \menuseparator
+外部素材
\end_layout
\end_inset
- LyX文書への絶対ファイルパスないしは相対ファイルパス
+メニューで見ることができます。さらに、特定の型の素材をサポートするのに、自分自身のひな型を作成することも可能です。後でどのようなことをすればいいか詳細に説明しま
+すが、できればあなたが作ったすべてのひな型を投稿して、我々がLyXの後の版に取り込むことができるようにしてくださることを希望します。
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
+\begin_layout Standard
+外部素材の機能におけるもう一つの基本的な発想は、最終素材の元となるオリジナルファイルと、書き出された文書や印刷された文書に取り込むための生成ファイルとを区別して
+いることです。たとえば、
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-$$AbsPath
+Xfig
\end_layout
\end_inset
- 絶対ファイルパス
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
+で作成した図の場合を考えてみましょう。Xfigアプリケーション自体は、
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-$$Basename
+.fig
\end_layout
\end_inset
- パスおよび拡張子を除いたファイル名
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
+拡張子を持つオリジナルファイルを操作します。Xfigで図を作成したり変更したりして、作業が終われば
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-$$Contents(
-\begin_inset Quotes eld
-\end_inset
-
-filename.ext
-\begin_inset Quotes erd
-\end_inset
-
-)
+fig
\end_layout
\end_inset
- このマクロは、
+ファイルに保存します。この図をお使いの文書に取り込みたいときには、LaTeXファイルにそのままインクルードできるように、
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-filename.ext
+transfig
\end_layout
\end_inset
-と云う名のファイルの中身を展開します。
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
+を呼び出してPostScriptファイルを生成します。この場合には、
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-$$Extension
+.fig
\end_layout
\end_inset
- ファイル拡張子（点を含む）
+ファイルがオリジナルファイルであり、PostScriptファイルが生成ファイルになります。
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
-\begin_inset Flex Code
-status collapsed
+\begin_layout Standard
+この区別は、文書を執筆している最中に、素材を更新することができるようにするために重要です。さらに、これによって、複数の書き出し書式をサポートするために必要な柔軟
+性が提供されます。たとえば、平文テキストファイルの場合には、図を生のPostScriptファイルとして取り込むのは、とても褒められた発想とはいえません。むしろ、
+その図への参照だけを含めるか、最終出力が実際の画像に近いものとなるように画像からASCIIへの変換子を呼び出したいと考えることでしょう。LyXの外部素材マネジメ
+ントは、LyXがサポートする各書き出し書式別に仕分けしているので、ユーザがこれを行うことが可能となっています。
+\end_layout
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-$$FName
+\begin_layout Standard
+LyXの外部素材マネジメントは、書き出し書式によって異なる生成物をサポートすることの他に、編集・閲覧アプリケーションを緊密に統合することもサポートします。Xfi
+gの図の場合には、LyXの外部素材ダイアログからシングルクリックでオリジナルファイルをXfigで開くことができ、ダブルクリックすることで生成されたPostScr
+iptファイルをGhostviewで閲覧することができます。もうコマンドラインをもてあそんだり、オリジナルファイルや生成ファイルがどこにあるか探したり変更を加え
+るためにファイルブラウザをいじくり回す必要はないのです。このようにして、文書を執筆する際に必要となる多くのアプリケーションを最大限に利用し、最終的により生産性を
+上げることができるようになるのです。
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Section
+外用ひな型設定ファイル
\end_layout
+\begin_layout Standard
+LyXに自製の外用ひな型を付け加えるのは、比較的簡単です。しかしながら、これを不用心に行ってしまうと、たいていの場合、簡単に濫用されてしまうようなセキュリティホ
+ールを作ってしまいがちであることを心に留めておいてください。したがって、これを実行に移す前に、第
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sec:セキュリティに関する論点"
+
\end_inset
- 外部素材ダイアログで指定されたファイルのファイル名。これはLyX文書への絶対パスでも良いですし、相対パスでも構いません。
+節のセキュリティに関する議論を読んでおいてください。
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Description
+\begin_layout Standard
+このことに言及した上で、あなたが作成した面白いひな型は、ぜひ投稿してください。
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Standard
+外用ひな型は、
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-$$FPath
+LyXDir/lib/external_templates
\end_layout
\end_inset
-
+ファイルで定義されています。自分用の版を
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-$$FName
+UserDir/external_templates
\end_layout
\end_inset
-のパス部分（LyX文書への絶対パス名か相対パス名）
+に置くこともできます。
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Standard
+典型的なひな型は以下のようになります。
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+Template XFig
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+GuiName "XFig: $$AbsOrRelPathParent$$Basename"
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+HelpText
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+An XFig figure.
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+HelpTextEnd
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+InputFormat fig
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+FileFilter "*.fig"
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+AutomaticProduction true
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+Transform Rotate
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+Transform Resize
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+Format LaT
+\begin_inset ERT
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+{}
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+eX
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+TransformCommand Rotate RotationLatexCommand
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+TransformCommand Resize ResizeLatexCommand
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+Product "$$RotateFront$$ResizeFront
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+
+\backslash
+
+\backslash
+input{$$AbsOrRelPathMaster$$Basename.pstex_t}
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+ $$ResizeBack$$RotateBack"
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+UpdateFormat pstex
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+UpdateResult "$$AbsPath$$Basename.pstex_t"
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+Requirement "graphicx"
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+ReferencedFile latex "$$AbsOrRelPathMaster$$Basename.pstex_t"
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+ReferencedFile latex "$$AbsPath$$Basename.eps"
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+ReferencedFile dvi "$$AbsPath$$Basename.eps"
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+FormatEnd
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+Format PDFLaT
+\begin_inset ERT
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+{}
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+eX
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+TransformCommand Rotate RotationLatexCommand
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+TransformCommand Resize ResizeLatexCommand
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+Product "$$RotateFront$$ResizeFront
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+
+\backslash
+
+\backslash
+input{$$AbsOrRelPathMaster$$Basename.pdftex_t}
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+ $$ResizeBack$$RotateBack"
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+UpdateFormat pdftex
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+UpdateResult "$$AbsPath$$Basename.pdftex_t"
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+Requirement "graphicx"
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+ReferencedFile latex "$$AbsOrRelPathMaster$$Basename.pdftex_t"
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+ReferencedFile latex "$$AbsPath$$Basename.pdf"
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+FormatEnd
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+Format Ascii
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+Product "$$Contents(
+\backslash
+"$$AbsPath$$Basename.asc
+\backslash
+")"
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+UpdateFormat asciixfig
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+UpdateResult "$$AbsPath$$Basename.asc"
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+FormatEnd
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+Format DocBook
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+Product "<graphic fileref=
+\backslash
+"$$AbsOrRelPathMaster$$Basename.eps
+\backslash
+">
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+ </graphic>"
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+UpdateFormat eps
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+UpdateResult "$$AbsPath$$Basename.eps"
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+ReferencedFile docbook "$$AbsPath$$Basename.eps"
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+ReferencedFile docbook-xml "$$AbsPath$$Basename.eps"
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+FormatEnd
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+Product "[XFig: $$FName]"
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+FormatEnd
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout LyX-Code
+TemplateEnd
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Standard
+ご覧の通り、ひな型は
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Template
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ \SpecialChar \ldots{}
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+TemplateEnd
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+で閉じられます。ひな型には、一般的な設定を行うヘッダ部と、サポートされている主要な文書ファイル形式の設定を行う
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Format
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ \SpecialChar \ldots{}
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+FormatEnd
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+部があります。
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Subsection
+ひな型のヘッダ
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+AutomaticProduction
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+true|false
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ このひな型で扱うファイルをLyXが生成しなくてはならないか否か。このコマンドは、一度だけ必ず現れなくてはなりません。
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+FileFilter
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+<パターン>
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ 望むファイル群を表示するために、ファイルダイアログで使用するフィルタ用globパターン。2つ以上のファイル拡張子があり得る場合（たとえば、tgifには
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+.obj
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+と
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+.tgo
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+があります）、「
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+*.{obj,tgo}
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+」の様なパターンを使用してください。このコマンドは、一度だけ必ず現れなくてはなりません。
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+GuiName
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+<GUI名>
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ この文字列はボタン上に表示されます。このコマンドは、一度だけ必ず現れなくてはなりません。
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+HelpText
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+<文章>
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+HelpTextEnd
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ 外部素材ダイアログで使用されるヘルプ文。このひな型がユーザに何を提供できるのか、ユーザに説明するのに十分な情報を盛り込んでください。このコマンドは、一度だけ必
+ず現れなくてはなりません。
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+InputFormat
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+<書式>
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ オリジナルファイルのファイル形式。これは、LyXが知っている書式名でなくてはなりません（第
+\begin_inset CommandInset ref
+LatexCommand ref
+reference "sec:ファイル形式"
+
+\end_inset
+
+章参照）。このひな型が、2つ以上の書式のオリジナルファイルを取り扱える場合は、「
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+*
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+」を使用してください。この場合、LyXはファイル形式を推定するために、ファイル自体に詮索を試みます。このコマンドは、一度だけ必ず現れなくてはなりません。
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Template
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+<ID>
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ このひな型の（他と重複しない）名称。代入マクロを含めてはなりません（下記参照）。
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Transform
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+Rotate|Resize|Clip|Extra
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ このコマンドは、このひな型がどのような変換をサポートしているかを指定します。これは全く登場しなくても1回以上現れても構いません。このコマンドは、外部素材ダイア
+ログ中の対応するタブを使用可能にします。
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Transform
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+コマンド一つずつに応じて、
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Format
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+部に、対応する
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+TransformCommand
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+コマンドか
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+TransformOption
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+コマンドを置かなくてはなりません。これを行わないと、この書式での変換はサポートされません。
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Subsection
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Format
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+部
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Format
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+LaT
+\begin_inset ERT
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+{}
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+eX|PDFLaT
+\begin_inset ERT
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+{}
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+eX|PlainText|DocBook
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ この書式定義が定める主要な文書ファイル形式。すべてのひな型が、全文書ファイル形式に対して意味のある表示ができるわけではありません。それでも、全書式に対して
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Format
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+部を定義してください。表示する方法がないときは、ダミーテキストを使用してください。これによって、書き出した文書内で、少なくとも外部素材への参照を見ることができる
+ようになります。
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Option
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+<名称>
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+<値>
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ このコマンドは、
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Product
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+での代入に使うマクロ
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+$$<名称>
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+を新たに定義します。
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+<値>
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+自体にも代入マクロを使うことができます。
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Product
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+で
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+<値>
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+を直接使用するよりも優れた点は、
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+$$<名称>
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+に代入された値が、その文書書式で有効な非必須引数となるように健全化されることです。このコマンドは全く登場しなくても1回以上現れても構いません。
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Product
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+<文>
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ 書き出された文書に挿入される文。実のところ、これが最も重要なコマンドであり、とても複雑になることがあります。このコマンドは、一度だけ必ず現れなくてはなりません
+。
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-$$RelPathMaster
+Preamble
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+<名称>
\end_layout
\end_inset
- LyX親文書への相対ファイルパス
+ このコマンドは、LaTeXプリアンブルに入れるプリアンブル片を指定します。これは
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+PreambleDef
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ \SpecialChar \ldots{}
+
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+PreambleDefEnd
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+を使用して定義しなくてはなりません。このコマンドは全く登場しなくても1回以上現れても構いません。
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-$$RelPathParent
+ReferencedFile
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+<書式>
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+<ファイル名>
\end_layout
\end_inset
- LyX文書への相対ファイルパス
+ このコマンドは、変換過程で生成され、特定の書き出し書式に必要とされるファイルを示します。ファイル名が相対パスである場合には、親文書に対する相対パスとして解釈さ
+れます。このコマンドは全く登場しなくても1回以上現れても構いません。
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-$$Sysdir
+Requirement
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+<package>
\end_layout
\end_inset
- このマクロは、システムディレクトリの絶対パスを展開します。これは、典型的には、LyXに同梱されているヘルパースクリプト群を示したりするのに使用されます。
+ 必要とされるLaTeXパッケージ名。パッケージは、LaTeXプリアンブル中で
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+
+\backslash
+usepackage{}
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+を使って取り込まれます。このコマンドは全く登場しなくても1回以上現れても構いません。
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-$$Tempname
+TransformCommand
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+Rotate
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+RotationLatexCommand
\end_layout
\end_inset
- 元の文書が閉じられたり、挿入されていた外部素材が削除されたりすると自動的に削除される一時ファイルのフルパスとファイル名。
+ このコマンドは、回転用に、組み込みのLaTeXコマンドを使用するように指定します。このコマンドは、1回現れても全く現れなくても構いません。
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Standard
-パスを示すマクロはすべて最後のディレクトリ区切りも含んでいますので、たとえば絶対パスのファイル名を
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-$$AbsPath$$Basename$$Extension
+TransformCommand
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+Resize
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+ResizeLatexCommand
\end_layout
\end_inset
-のようにして作ることができます。
+ このコマンドは、伸縮用に、組み込みのLaTeXコマンドを使用するように指定します。このコマンドは、1回現れても全く現れなくても構いません。
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+TransformOption
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+Rotate
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+RotationLatexOption
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ このコマンドは、回転が非必須引数を通じて行われるように指定します。このコマンドは、1回現れても全く現れなくても構いません。
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+TransformOption
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+Resize
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+ResizeLatexOption
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ このコマンドは、伸縮が非必須引数を通じて行われるように指定します。このコマンドは、1回現れても全く現れなくても構いません。
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+TransformOption
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+Clip
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+ClipLatexOption
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ このコマンドは、切り抜きが非必須引数を通じて行われるように指定します。このコマンドは、1回現れても全く現れなくても構いません。
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+TransformOption
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+Extra
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+ExtraLatexOption
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ このコマンドは、追加の非必須引数を使用することを指定します。このコマンドは、1回現れても全く現れなくても構いません。
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+UpdateFormat
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+<書式>
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ 変換されたファイルのファイル形式。これは、LyXが知っている書式名でなくてはなりません（
+\begin_inset Flex MenuItem
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+ツール\SpecialChar \menuseparator
+設定:変換子
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ダイアログを参照）。このコマンドは、一度だけ必ず現れなくてはなりません。
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
+
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+UpdateResult
+\begin_inset space ~
+\end_inset
+
+<ファイル名>
+\end_layout
+
+\end_inset
+
+ 変換されたファイルのファイル名。ファイル名は絶対パスでなくてはなりません。このコマンドは、一度だけ必ず現れなくてはなりません。
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Subsection
+プリアンブルの定義
\end_layout
\begin_layout Standard
-上記マクロは、特記しない限りはすべてのコマンドで代入が行われます。
+外用ひな型設定ファイルには、
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Transform
+PreambleDef
\end_layout
\end_inset
-コマンドと
+ \SpecialChar \ldots{}
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-TransformCommand
+PreambleDefEnd
\end_layout
\end_inset
-ã\82³ã\83\9eã\83³ã\83\89ã\81\8cæ\9c\89å\8a¹ã\81«ã\81\95ã\82\8cã\81¦ã\81\84ã\82\8bå ´å\90\88ã\80\81
+ã\81§å\9b²ã\82\93ã\81 ã\83\97ã\83ªã\82¢ã\83³ã\83\96ã\83«å®\9a義ã\82\92追å\8a ã\81\99ã\82\8bã\81\93ã\81¨ã\81\8cã\81§ã\81\8dã\81¾ã\81\99ã\80\82ã\81\93ã\82\8cã\82\89ã\81®å®\9a義ã\81¯ã\80\81ã\81²ã\81ªå\9e\8bã\81®
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Product
+Format
\end_layout
\end_inset
-コマンドは、これらに加えて以下の代入もサポートします。
+部で使用することができます。
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Section
+代入機構
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Standard
+外部素材機構が外部プログラムを呼び出すときには、ひな型設定ファイルで定義されたコマンドにしたがって行われます。これらのコマンドには、実行前に展開されるマクロをい
+ろいろ入れることができます。実行は、つねに元の文書があるディレクトリで行われます。
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Standard
+また、外部素材が表示されるときにはいつでも、その名称は代入機構によって組み立てられ、ひな型定義中の他のほとんどのコマンドも代入をサポートしています。
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Standard
+使用できるマクロは以下の通りです。
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-$$ResizeFront
+$$AbsOrRelPathMaster
\end_layout
\end_inset
- 伸縮コマンドの前置部。
+ LyX親文書への絶対ファイルパスないしは相対ファイルパス
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-$$ResizeBack
+$$AbsOrRelPathParent
\end_layout
\end_inset
- 伸縮コマンドの後置部。
+ LyX文書への絶対ファイルパスないしは相対ファイルパス
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-$$RotateFront
+$$AbsPath
\end_layout
\end_inset
- 回転コマンドの前置部。
+ 絶対ファイルパス
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-$$RotateBack
+$$Basename
\end_layout
\end_inset
- 回転コマンドの後置部。
+ パスおよび拡張子を除いたファイル名
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Standard
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Option
+$$Contents(
+\begin_inset Quotes eld
+\end_inset
+
+filename.ext
+\begin_inset Quotes erd
+\end_inset
+
+)
\end_layout
\end_inset
-コマンドの値に入れる文字列では、
+ このマクロは、
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-Transform
+filename.ext
\end_layout
\end_inset
-コマンドと
+と云う名のファイルの中身を展開します。
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-TransformOption
+$$Extension
\end_layout
\end_inset
-コマンドが有効にされていれば、以下の代入もサポートされます。
+ ファイル拡張子（点を含む）
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-$$Clip
+$$FName
\end_layout
\end_inset
- å\88\87ã\82\8aæ\8a\9cã\81\8dã\82ªã\83\97ã\82·ã\83§ã\83³。
+ å¤\96é\83¨ç´ æ\9d\90ã\83\80ã\82¤ã\82¢ã\83ã\82°ã\81§æ\8c\87å®\9aã\81\95ã\82\8cã\81\9fã\83\95ã\82¡ã\82¤ã\83«ã\81®ã\83\95ã\82¡ã\82¤ã\83«å\90\8dã\80\82ã\81\93ã\82\8cã\81¯LyXæ\96\87æ\9b¸ã\81¸ã\81®çµ¶å¯¾ã\83\91ã\82¹ã\81§ã\82\82è\89¯ã\81\84ã\81§ã\81\99ã\81\97ã\80\81ç\9b¸å¯¾ã\83\91ã\82¹ã\81§ã\82\82æ§\8bã\81\84ã\81¾ã\81\9bã\82\93。
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-$$Extra
+$$FPath
\end_layout
\end_inset
- 追加オプション。
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Description
+
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-$$Resize
+$$FName
\end_layout
\end_inset
- 伸縮オプション。
+のパス部分（LyX文書への絶対パス名か相対パス名）
\end_layout
\begin_layout Description
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-$$Rotate
+$$RelPathMaster
\end_layout
\end_inset
- 回転オプション。
+ LyX親文書への相対ファイルパス
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Standard
-どうしてこんなに多くのパス関連マクロがあるのか不思議に思われるかもしれません。主に以下の二つの理由があります。
-\end_layout
+\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\begin_layout Enumerate
-相対ファイル名と絶対ファイル名は、それぞれ相対的あるいは絶対的なままで維持されなくてはなりません。ユーザにはどちらかの形を好む理由があるのかもしれません。たとえ
-ば相対名は、いろいろなマシンで作業をする持ち運び用の文書で役立ちます。絶対名は、プログラムによっては必要とされることがあり得ます。
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+$$RelPathParent
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Enumerate
-LaTeXは、相対ファイル名に関して、LyXや入れ子にした取り込みファイル中の他のプログラムとは異なった取り扱いを行います。LyXにとって相対ファイル名とは、常
-にこのファイル名が書かれている文書に対して相対的なものになります。LaTeXにとっての相対ファイル名は、常に親文書に対するものになります。これら二つの定義は、一
-つの文書しかないときには同じですが、部分文書を含む親文書があるときには異なったものとなってきます。つまり、相対ファイル名は、LaTeXに提示されるときに変換され
-なくてはならないのです。幸い、正しいマクロを選びさえすれば、これはLyXが自動的に行ってくれます。
-\end_layout
+\end_inset
-\begin_layout Standard
-すると、新しく作ったひな型定義では、どのパス関連マクロを使うべきでしょうか。このルールは難しくありません。つまり、
+ LyX文書への相対ファイルパス
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Itemize
-絶対パスが必要とされるときには
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-$$AbsPath
+$$Sysdir
\end_layout
\end_inset
-を使う。
+ このマクロは、システムディレクトリの絶対パスを展開します。これは、典型的には、LyXに同梱されているヘルパースクリプト群を示したりするのに使用されます。
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Itemize
-代入された文字列が、LaTeXインプットの一種である場合には、
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-$$AbsOrRelPathMaster
+$$Tempname
\end_layout
\end_inset
-を使う。
+ 元の文書が閉じられたり、挿入されていた外部素材が削除されたりすると自動的に削除される一時ファイルのフルパスとファイル名。
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Itemize
-ã\81\9dã\82\8c以å¤\96ã\81ªã\82\89ã\81°ã\80\81ã\83¦ã\83¼ã\82¶ã\81®é\81¸æ\8a\9eã\82\92å°\8aé\87\8dã\81\99ã\82\8bã\81\9fã\82\81ã\81«
+\begin_layout Standard
+ã\83\91ã\82¹ã\82\92示ã\81\99ã\83\9eã\82¯ã\83ã\81¯ã\81\99ã\81¹ã\81¦æ\9c\80å¾\8cã\81®ã\83\87ã\82£ã\83¬ã\82¯ã\83\88ã\83ªå\8cºå\88\87ã\82\8aã\82\82å\90«ã\82\93ã\81§ã\81\84ã\81¾ã\81\99ã\81®ã\81§ã\80\81ã\81\9fã\81¨ã\81\88ã\81°çµ¶å¯¾ã\83\91ã\82¹ã\81®ã\83\95ã\82¡ã\82¤ã\83«å\90\8dã\82\92
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-$$AbsOrRelPathParent
+$$AbsPath$$Basename$$Extension
\end_layout
\end_inset
-ã\82\92使ã\81\86。
+ã\81®ã\82\88ã\81\86ã\81«ã\81\97ã\81¦ä½\9cã\82\8bã\81\93ã\81¨ã\81\8cã\81§ã\81\8dã\81¾ã\81\99。
\end_layout
\begin_layout Standard
-このルールが機能せずに、たとえば相対名が必要となる特殊な場合もありますが、通常、上記でうまく動作します。特殊例の例としては、上述のXFigひな型での
+上記マクロは、特記しない限りはすべてのコマンドで代入が行われます。
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-ReferencedFile latex "$$AbsOrRelPathMaster$$Basename.pstex_t"
+Transform
\end_layout
\end_inset
-ã\81¨ã\81\84ã\81\86ã\82³ã\83\9eã\83³ã\83\89ã\81\8cã\81\82ã\82\8aã\81¾ã\81\99ã\80\82ã\81\93ã\81®å ´å\90\88ã\80\81
+ã\82³ã\83\9eã\83³ã\83\89ã\81¨
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-.pstex_t
+TransformCommand
\end_layout
\end_inset
-ファイルの複写子は、ファイル内容を書き換えるのに相対名を必要とするために、絶対名を使用することができないのです。
-\end_layout
+コマンドが有効にされている場合、
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\begin_layout Section
-セキュリティに関する論点
-\begin_inset CommandInset label
-LatexCommand label
-name "sec:セキュリティに関する論点"
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+Product
+\end_layout
\end_inset
-
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Standard
-外部素材機能は、多くの外部プログラムとの橋渡しをし、しかもそれを自動的に行うので、そのセキュリティ面での帰結を考慮しなくてはなりません。特に、ユーザは好きなファ
-イル名やパラメータ文字列を含めることが許されていて、しかもそれらがコマンドに展開されるので、ユーザが文書を閲覧したり印刷したりしたときに、任意のコマンドを実行す
-ることができるような悪意ある文書を作成することが可能となりましょう。これは、我々がぜひとも避けたいことなのです。
+コマンドは、これらに加えて以下の代入もサポートします。
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Standard
-しかしながら、外部プログラムコマンドはひな型設定ファイルでのみ指定されているので、LyXが安全なひな型でのみ適切に設定されているならば、セキュリティ上の問題は発
-生しません。これは、外部プログラムが
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-system
+$$ResizeFront
\end_layout
\end_inset
-システムコールではなく、
+ 伸縮コマンドの前置部。
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-execvp
+$$ResizeBack
\end_layout
\end_inset
-システムコールで呼び出されているため、ファイル名やパラメータ部からシェル経由で任意のコマンドを実行することはできないためです。
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Standard
-これは、外部素材ひな型でどのようなコマンド文字列を使用することのできるかについて、制限があることを意味します。特に、パイプやリダイレクトはそのまま使用することは
-できません。これは、LyXの安全性を維持するためにそうしなくてはならないのです。もしシェル機能の一部を使用したいとすると、これを完全に統御の下においたまま行う安
-全なスクリプトを書いた上で、このスクリプトをコマンド文字列から呼び出すようにしなくてはなりません。
+ 伸縮コマンドの後置部。
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Standard
-シェルと直接やりとりするひな型を設計することは可能ではありますが、悪意のあるユーザが狡猾なファイル名やパラメータを書くことによって、任意のコマンドを実行できるよ
-うになるため、一般的には、統御下に置いた状態で
+\begin_layout Description
\begin_inset Flex Code
status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-execvp
+$$RotateFront
\end_layout
\end_inset
-システムコールを使用する安全なスクリプトのみを使用することをお勧めします。確かに、管理された環境下で使用する分には、通常のシェルスクリプトを使用する方に流れる誘
-惑はあります。そうした場合には、お使いのシステムに簡単に濫用することのできるセキュリティホールを、
-\emph on
-間違いなく
-\emph default
-導入することを理解しておいてください。オープンソースの伝統に従って、私たちは人々に新しいひな型を投稿してくれるよう促していますが、そのような安全でないひな型はL
-yXの標準頒布版には取り入れるべきでないとすることには当然の正当性があります。公式の頒布チャンネルから出荷されているLyXには、安全でないひな型は決して入ってい
-ません。
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Standard
-外部素材を含めることで強力な力を手に入れることができますが、この力とともにセキュリティ上の危険を導入してしまわないように気をつける必要があります。無防備なスクリ
-プトのたった一行に入り込んだ、ちょっとしたエラーが、巨大なセキュリティ上の問題に扉を開きうるのです。したがって、もしこの問題を完全に理解していないならば、特定の
-ひな型が安全であるかどうか疑問がある際には、知識豊富なセキュリティの専門家か、LyX開発チームに相談してみてください。そしてこの相談は、管理されていない環境下で
-これを使用する前に、行うようにしてください。
+ 回転コマンドの前置部。
\end_layout
-\begin_layout Chapter
-\start_of_appendix
-
-\lang english
-List of functions to be used in layouts
-\lang japanese
+\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
-\begin_inset CommandInset label
-LatexCommand label
-name "chap:List-of-functions"
+\begin_layout Plain Layout
+$$RotateBack
+\end_layout
\end_inset
-
+ 回転コマンドの後置部。
\end_layout
\begin_layout Standard
-\align center
-\begin_inset Tabular
-<lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="6">
-<features tabularvalignment="middle">
-<column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="14col%">
-<column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="14col%">
-<column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="14col%">
-<column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="14col%">
-<column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="14col%">
-<column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="14col%">
-<row>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
-\begin_inset Text
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-accents
+Option
\end_layout
\end_inset
-</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
-\begin_inset Text
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-bbding
-\end_layout
-\end_inset
-</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
-\begin_inset Text
+コマンドの値に入れる文字列では、
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-dvipost
+Transform
\end_layout
\end_inset
-</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
-\begin_inset Text
+
+コマンドと
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-fancybox
+TransformOption
\end_layout
\end_inset
-</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
-\begin_inset Text
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-hhline
+コマンドが有効にされていれば、以下の代入もサポートされます。
\end_layout
-\end_inset
-</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
-\begin_inset Text
+\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-latexsym
+$$Clip
\end_layout
\end_inset
-</cell>
-</row>
-<row>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
-\begin_inset Text
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-amsbsy
+ 切り抜きオプション。
\end_layout
-\end_inset
-</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
-\begin_inset Text
+\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-bm
+$$Extra
\end_layout
\end_inset
-</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
-\begin_inset Text
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
+ 追加オプション。
\end_layout
-\end_inset
-</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
-\begin_inset Text
+\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-feyn
+$$Resize
\end_layout
\end_inset
-</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
-\begin_inset Text
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-hyperref
+ 伸縮オプション。
\end_layout
-\end_inset
-</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
-\begin_inset Text
+\begin_layout Description
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-listings
+$$Rotate
\end_layout
\end_inset
-</cell>
-</row>
-<row>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
-\begin_inset Text
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-amscd
+ 回転オプション。
\end_layout
-\end_inset
-</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
-\begin_inset Text
+\begin_layout Standard
+どうしてこんなに多くのパス関連マクロがあるのか不思議に思われるかもしれません。主に以下の二つの理由があります。
+\end_layout
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-booktabs
+\begin_layout Enumerate
+相対ファイル名と絶対ファイル名は、それぞれ相対的あるいは絶対的なままで維持されなくてはなりません。ユーザにはどちらかの形を好む理由があるのかもしれません。たとえ
+ば相対名は、いろいろなマシンで作業をする持ち運び用の文書で役立ちます。絶対名は、プログラムによっては必要とされることがあり得ます。
\end_layout
-\end_inset
-</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
-\begin_inset Text
+\begin_layout Enumerate
+LaTeXは、相対ファイル名に関して、LyXや入れ子にした取り込みファイル中の他のプログラムとは異なった取り扱いを行います。LyXにとって相対ファイル名とは、常
+にこのファイル名が書かれている文書に対して相対的なものになります。LaTeXにとっての相対ファイル名は、常に親文書に対するものになります。これら二つの定義は、一
+つの文書しかないときには同じですが、部分文書を含む親文書があるときには異なったものとなってきます。つまり、相対ファイル名は、LaTeXに提示されるときに変換され
+なくてはならないのです。幸い、正しいマクロを選びさえすれば、これはLyXが自動的に行ってくれます。
+\end_layout
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-endnotes
+\begin_layout Standard
+すると、新しく作ったひな型定義では、どのパス関連マクロを使うべきでしょうか。このルールは難しくありません。つまり、
\end_layout
-\end_inset
-</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
-\begin_inset Text
+\begin_layout Itemize
+絶対パスが必要とされるときには
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-fixltx2e
+$$AbsPath
\end_layout
\end_inset
-</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
-\begin_inset Text
-
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
+を使う。
\end_layout
-\end_inset
-</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
-\begin_inset Text
+\begin_layout Itemize
+代入された文字列が、LaTeXインプットの一種である場合には、
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-longtable
+$$AbsOrRelPathMaster
\end_layout
\end_inset
-</cell>
-</row>
-<row>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
-\begin_inset Text
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-amsmath
+を使う。
\end_layout
-\end_inset
-</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
-\begin_inset Text
+\begin_layout Itemize
+それ以外ならば、ユーザの選択を尊重するために
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
+$$AbsOrRelPathParent
\end_layout
\end_inset
-</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
-\begin_inset Text
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-enumitem
+を使う。
\end_layout
-\end_inset
-</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
-\begin_inset Text
+\begin_layout Standard
+このルールが機能せずに、たとえば相対名が必要となる特殊な場合もありますが、通常、上記でうまく動作します。特殊例の例としては、上述のXFigひな型での
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-float
+ReferencedFile latex "$$AbsOrRelPathMaster$$Basename.pstex_t"
\end_layout
\end_inset
-</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
-\begin_inset Text
+
+というコマンドがあります。この場合、
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-ifsym
+.pstex_t
\end_layout
\end_inset
-</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
-\begin_inset Text
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-lyxskak
+ファイルの複写子は、ファイル内容を書き換えるのに相対名を必要とするために、絶対名を使用することができないのです。
\end_layout
+\begin_layout Section
+セキュリティに関する論点
+\begin_inset CommandInset label
+LatexCommand label
+name "sec:セキュリティに関する論点"
+
\end_inset
-</cell>
-</row>
-<row>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
-\begin_inset Text
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-amssymb
+
\end_layout
-\end_inset
-</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
-\begin_inset Text
+\begin_layout Standard
+外部素材機能は、多くの外部プログラムとの橋渡しをし、しかもそれを自動的に行うので、そのセキュリティ面での帰結を考慮しなくてはなりません。特に、ユーザは好きなファ
+イル名やパラメータ文字列を含めることが許されていて、しかもそれらがコマンドに展開されるので、ユーザが文書を閲覧したり印刷したりしたときに、任意のコマンドを実行す
+ることができるような悪意ある文書を作成することが可能となりましょう。これは、我々がぜひとも避けたいことなのです。
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Standard
+しかしながら、外部プログラムコマンドはひな型設定ファイルでのみ指定されているので、LyXが安全なひな型でのみ適切に設定されているならば、セキュリティ上の問題は発
+生しません。これは、外部プログラムが
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-CJK
+system
\end_layout
\end_inset
-</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
-\begin_inset Text
+
+システムコールではなく、
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-esint
+execvp
\end_layout
\end_inset
-</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
-\begin_inset Text
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-framed
+システムコールで呼び出されているため、ファイル名やパラメータ部からシェル経由で任意のコマンドを実行することはできないためです。
\end_layout
-\end_inset
-</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
-\begin_inset Text
+\begin_layout Standard
+これは、外部素材ひな型でどのようなコマンド文字列を使用することのできるかについて、制限があることを意味します。特に、パイプやリダイレクトはそのまま使用することは
+できません。これは、LyXの安全性を維持するためにそうしなくてはならないのです。もしシェル機能の一部を使用したいとすると、これを完全に統御の下においたまま行う安
+全なスクリプトを書いた上で、このスクリプトをコマンド文字列から呼び出すようにしなくてはなりません。
+\end_layout
+
+\begin_layout Standard
+シェルと直接やりとりするひな型を設計することは可能ではありますが、悪意のあるユーザが狡猾なファイル名やパラメータを書くことによって、任意のコマンドを実行できるよ
+うになるため、一般的には、統御下に置いた状態で
+\begin_inset Flex Code
+status collapsed
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-ifthen
+execvp
\end_layout
\end_inset
-</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
-\begin_inset Text
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
+システムコールを使用する安全なスクリプトのみを使用することをお勧めします。確かに、管理された環境下で使用する分には、通常のシェルスクリプトを使用する方に流れる誘
+惑はあります。そうした場合には、お使いのシステムに簡単に濫用することのできるセキュリティホールを、
+\emph on
+間違いなく
+\emph default
+導入することを理解しておいてください。オープンソースの伝統に従って、私たちは人々に新しいひな型を投稿してくれるよう促していますが、そのような安全でないひな型はL
+yXの標準頒布版には取り入れるべきでないとすることには当然の正当性があります。公式の頒布チャンネルから出荷されているLyXには、安全でないひな型は決して入ってい
+ません。
+\end_layout
+\begin_layout Standard
+外部素材を含めることで強力な力を手に入れることができますが、この力とともにセキュリティ上の危険を導入してしまわないように気をつける必要があります。無防備なスクリ
+プトのたった一行に入り込んだ、ちょっとしたエラーが、巨大なセキュリティ上の問題に扉を開きうるのです。したがって、もしこの問題を完全に理解していないならば、特定の
+ひな型が安全であるかどうか疑問がある際には、知識豊富なセキュリティの専門家か、LyX開発チームに相談してみてください。そしてこの相談は、管理されていない環境下で
+これを使用する前に、行うようにしてください。
\end_layout
-\end_inset
-</cell>
-</row>
-<row>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
-\begin_inset Text
+\begin_layout Chapter
+\start_of_appendix
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-amstext
-\end_layout
+\lang english
+List of functions to be used in layouts
+\lang japanese
+
+\begin_inset CommandInset label
+LatexCommand label
+name "chap:List-of-functions"
\end_inset
-</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
-\begin_inset Text
-\begin_layout Plain Layout
-color
+
\end_layout
-\end_inset
-</cell>
+\begin_layout Standard
+\align center
+\begin_inset Tabular
+<lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="8">
+<features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
+<column alignment="left" valignment="top">
+<column alignment="left" valignment="top">
+<column alignment="left" valignment="top">
+<column alignment="left" valignment="top">
+<column alignment="left" valignment="top">
+<column alignment="left" valignment="top">
+<column alignment="left" valignment="top">
+<column alignment="left" valignment="top">
+<row>
<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
+accents
\end_layout
\end_inset
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
+booktabs
\end_layout
\end_inset
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
+feyn
\end_layout
\end_inset
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-makeidx
+listings
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-</row>
-<row>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-amsthm
+natbib
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-covington
+rotfloat
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
+tfrupee
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-graphicx
+wasysym
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
+</row>
+<row>
<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-jurabib
+amsbsy
\end_layout
\end_inset
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-marvosym
+calc
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-</row>
-<row>
<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-array
+fixltx2e
\end_layout
\end_inset
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-csquotes
+longtable
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
+nomencl
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
+rsphrase
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
+tipa
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-mathdesign
+wrapfig
\end_layout
\end_inset
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-ascii
+amscd
\end_layout
\end_inset
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
+CJK
\end_layout
\end_inset
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
+float
\end_layout
\end_inset
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-mathdesign
+lyxskak
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
+pdfcolmk
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-mathdots
+setspace
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-</row>
-<row>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
+tipx
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
+xargs
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
+</row>
+<row>
<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
+amsmath
\end_layout
\end_inset
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-mathdots
+color
\end_layout
\end_inset
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
+framed
\end_layout
\end_inset
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-subfig
+makeidx
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-</row>
-</lyxtabular>
-
-\end_inset
-
-
-\end_layout
-
-\begin_layout Standard
-\align center
-\begin_inset Tabular
-<lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="6">
-<features tabularvalignment="middle">
-<column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="14col%">
-<column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="14col%">
-<column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="14col%">
-<column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="14col%">
-<column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="14col%">
-<column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="14col%">
-<row>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-makeidx
+pdfpages
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-pdfcolmk
+shapepar
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-setspace
+tone
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-textcomp
+xcolor
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
+</row>
+<row>
<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-ulem
+amssymb
\end_layout
\end_inset
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-xargs
+covington
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-</row>
-<row>
<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-marvosym
+graphicx
\end_layout
\end_inset
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-pdfpages
+marvosym
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-slashed
+pifont
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-textgreek
+slashed
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-undertilde
+txfonts
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-xcolor
+xy
\end_layout
\end_inset
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-mathdesign
+amstext
\end_layout
\end_inset
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-pifont
+csquotes
\end_layout
\end_inset
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-soul
+hhline
\end_layout
\end_inset
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-tfrupee
+mathdesign
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-units
+pmboxdraw
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-xy
+soul
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-</row>
-<row>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-mathdots
+ulem
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-pmboxdraw
+yhmath
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
+</row>
+<row>
<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-splitidx
+amsthm
\end_layout
\end_inset
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-tipa
+dvipost
\end_layout
\end_inset
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-url
+hyperref
\end_layout
\end_inset
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
+mathdots
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-</row>
-<row>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-mathrsfs
+polyglossia
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-polyglossia
+splitidx
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-subfig
+undertilde
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-tipx
+
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
+</row>
+<row>
<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
+array
\end_layout
\end_inset
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-yhmath
+endnotes
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-</row>
-<row>
<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-mhchem
+ifsym
\end_layout
\end_inset
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-prettyref
+mathrsfs
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-subscript
+prettyref
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-tone
+subfig
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-varioref
+units
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-multirow
+ascii
\end_layout
\end_inset
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-pxfonts
+enumitem
\end_layout
\end_inset
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
+ifthen
\end_layout
\end_inset
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-txfonts
+mhchem
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-verbatim
+pxfonts
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
+subscript
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-</row>
-<row>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
+url
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\end_inset
</cell>
+</row>
+<row>
<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
+bbding
\end_layout
\end_inset
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
+esint
\end_layout
\end_inset
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
+jurabib
\end_layout
\end_inset
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
+multicol
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-</row>
-<row>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-natbib
+refstyle
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-rotating
+textcomp
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
+varioref
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+</row>
+<row>
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-wasysym
+bm
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
+fancybox
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-</row>
-<row>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-nomencl
+latexsym
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-rotfloat
+multirow
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
+rotating
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-
+textgreek
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
-wrapfig
+verbatim
\end_layout
\end_inset
</cell>
-<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
+<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
\begin_inset Text
\begin_layout Plain Layout
\lang english
Names of available colors to be used in layouts
+\lang japanese
+
\begin_inset CommandInset label
LatexCommand label
name "chap:Names-of-colors"
projects / features.git / commitdiff